Construction Manual

CONSTRUCTION MANUAL
2019
FOREWORD
The CDOT Construction Manual is an operational manual of the Colorado. Department of Transportation
(CDOT). It defines the criteria and procedures to be used by engineering personnel in the administration
of construction contracts. The Manual was prepared and is maintained by the Contracts and Market
Analysis Branch under the authority of, and at the direction of, the Chief Engineer. Although the Manual
follows the general outline of the Standard Specifications, it is not a specification and should not be
interpreted as such. Any section references are specific to this Manual unless otherwise noted.
Suggestions and/or comments for improvement, clarification, correction, and/or inclusion of material in
the Manual are welcome. Please forward your comments to your Area Engineer in the Contracts and
Market Analysis Branch.
The instructions and procedures in this Manual are written and intended for use by Project Engineers
and Project Inspectors.
TRADEMARKS
AASHTOWare® is a registered trademark of the American Association of Highway and Transportation
Officials (AASHTO). It is a suite of software for transportation projects.
Preconstruction is a commonly used name for AASHTOWare Project PreconstructionTM.
SiteManager is a commonly used name for AASHTOWare Project SiteManager.
Adobe and Acrobat are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in
the United States and other countries.
MicroStation® is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated.
ProjectWise® is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated.
REVISIONS
The Manual will be revised as methods, materials, policies, procedures, specifications, and the industry
change. CDOT will make revisions to the Manual available at
https://www.codot.gov/business/designsupport/bulletins_manuals
Suggested or required revisions shall be approved and made by the Area Engineers only.
Revisions are notated as shaded text.
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Contents
SECTION 100 GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................... 100-1
SECTION 101 GENERAL GUIDELINES .................................................................................................. 100-2
SECTION 102 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS ............................................................ .100-9
SECTION 103 AWARED AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT ................................................................. 100-13
SECTION 104 SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................................................ 100-15
SECTION 105 CONTROL OF WORK ................................................................................................... 100-19
SECTION 106 CONTROL OF MATERIAL ............................................................................................. 100-48
SECTION 107 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC .......................................... 100-51
SECTION 108 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS .................................................................................. 100-73
SECTION 109 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................................ 100-99
SECTION 120 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 100-109
SECTION 121 FINAL PROJECT RECORDS ......................................................................................... 100-176
SECTION 122 LOCAL AGENCY PROJECT ADMINISTRATION ............................................................ 100-198
SECTION 123 COMBINED BRIDGE ENTERPRISE AND CDOT FUNDED PROJECTS ............................ 100-202
SECTION 200 EARTHWORK .............................................................................................................. 200-1
Section 200 EARTHWORK .................................................................................................................. 200-2
SECTION 201 CLEARING AND GRUBBING .......................................................................................... 200-6
SECTION 202 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS ....................................................... 200-8
SECTION 203 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT ............................................................................. 200-10
SECTION 206 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES ......................................................... 200-17
SECTION 207 TOPSOIL ...................................................................................................................... 200-20
SECTION 208 EROSION CONTROL .................................................................................................... 200-22
SECTION 209 WATERING AND DUST PALLIATIVES ........................................................................... 200-28
SECTION 210 RESET STRUCTURES .................................................................................................... 200-30
SECTION 212 SEEDING, FERTILIZER, AND SODDING ........................................................................ 200-33
SECTION 213 MULCHING ................................................................................................................. 200-36
SECTION 214 PLANTING ................................................................................................................... 200-39
SECTION 215 TRANSPLANTING ........................................................................................................ 200-42
SECTION 216 SOIL RETENTION COVERING....................................................................................... 200-44
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 217 HERBICIDE TREATMENT ............................................................................................. 200-45
SECTION 250 ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH, AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT ........................................ 200-47
SECTION 300 BASES ......................................................................................................................... 300-1
SECTION 300 BASES ........................................................................................................................... 300-2
SECTION 304 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE .......................................................................................... 300-4
SECTION 306 RECONDITIONING ........................................................................................................ 300-6
SECTION 307 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE ........................................................................................... 300-7
SECTION 400 PAVEMENTS ............................................................................................................... 400-1
SECTION 400 PAVEMENTS ................................................................................................................. 400-2
SECTION 401 PLANT – MIX PAVEMENTS – GENERAL......................................................................... 400-3
SECTION 402 RESERVED ................................................................................................................... 400-17
SECTION 403 HOT – MIX ASPHALT................................................................................................... 400-18
SECTION 405 HEATING AND SCARIFYING TREATMENT ................................................................... 400-20
SECTION 406 COLD ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RECYCLE)....................................................................... 400-22
SECTION 407 PRIME COAT, TACK COAT, AND REJUVENATING AGENT ........................................... 400-25
SECTION 408 JOINT AND CRACK SEALANT ....................................................................................... 400-27
SECTION 409 CHIP SEAL ................................................................................................................... 400-29
SECTION 411 ASPHALT MATERIALS ................................................................................................. 400-34
SECTION 412 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT ............................................................. 400-35
SECTION 420 GEOSYNTHETICS ......................................................................................................... 400-48
STRUCTURES .............................................................................................................. 500-1
SECTION 501 STEEL SHEET PILING ..................................................................................................... 500-2
SECTION 502 PILING ........................................................................................................................... 500-4
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 503 DRILLED CAISSONS ..................................................................................................... 500-10
SECTION 504 WALLS ........................................................................................................................ 500-14
SECTION 506 RIPRAP, GABIONS, AND SLOPE MATTRESS ................................................................ 500-17
SECTION 507 SLOPE AND DITCH PAVING......................................................................................... 500-19
SECTION 508 TIMBER STRUCTURES ................................................................................................. 500-22
SECTION 509 STEEL STRUCTURES .................................................................................................... 500-24
SECTION 510 STRUCTURAL PLATE STRUCTURES ............................................................................. 500-27
SECTION 512 BEARING DEVICES ...................................................................................................... 500-30
SECTION 514 PEDESTRIAN AND BIKEWAY RAILING ......................................................................... 500-33
SECTION 515 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE ....................................................................................... 500-35
SECTION 516 DAMPPROOFING ........................................................................................................ 500-37
SECTION 517 WATERPROOFING ...................................................................................................... 500-39
SECTION 518 WATERSTOPS AND EXPANSION JOINTS ..................................................................... 500-41
SECTION 600 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................. 600-1
SECTION 601 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE .............................................................................................. 600-2
SECTION 602 REINFORCING STEEL ................................................................................................... 600-18
SECTION 603 CULVERTS AND SEWERS............................................................................................. 600-20
SECTION 604 MANHOLES, INLETS, AND METER VAULTS ................................................................. 600-23
SECTION 605 SUBSURFACE DRAINS ................................................................................................. 600-25
SECTION 606 GUARDRAIL ................................................................................................................ 600-27
SECTION 607 FENCES ....................................................................................................................... 600-29
SECTION 608 SIDEWALKS AND BIKEWAYS ....................................................................................... 600-31
SECTION 609 CURB AND GUTTER .................................................................................................... 600-34
SECTION 610 MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL ........................................................................................ 600-36
SECTION 611 CATTLE GUARDS ......................................................................................................... 600-37
SECTION 612 DELINEATORS AND REFLECTORS................................................................................ 600-38
SECTION 613 LIGHTING .................................................................................................................... 600-40
SECTION 614 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES ....................................................................................... 600-42
SECTION 615 WATER CONTROL DEVICES ........................................................................................ 600-49
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 616 SIPHONS ..................................................................................................................... 600-50
SECTION 618 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 600-52
SECTION 619 WATER LINES .............................................................................................................. 600-59
SECTION 620 FIELD FACILITIES ......................................................................................................... 600-60
SECTION 622 REST AREAS AND BUILDINGS ..................................................................................... 600-62
SECTION 623 IRRIGATION SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 600-72
SECTION 624 DRAINAGE PIPE .......................................................................................................... 600-74
SECTION 625 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING ...................................................................................... 600-75
SECTION 626 MOBILIZATION ........................................................................................................... 600-76
SECTION 627 PAVEMENT MARKING ................................................................................................ 600-77
SECTION 629 SURVEY MONUMENTATION ...................................................................................... 600-81
SECTION 630 CONSTRUCTION ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................. 600-82
APPENDIX A. MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AGENDAS....................................... A-1
CONFERENCE AGENDAS ........................................................................................................................ A-3
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE NOTIFICATION AND AGENDA........................................................ A-4
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AGENDA ........................................................................................ A-8
HOT MIX ASPHALT PRE-PAVING CONFERENCE AGENDA .................................................................... ..A-9
PRE-DEMOLITION CONFERENCE AGENDA .......................................................................................... A-33
PRE-ERECTION CONFERENCE AGENDA ............................................................................................... A-44
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PRE-POUR CONFERENCE AGENDA ............................................................. A-55
CONCRETE PAVEMENT PRE-PAVING AND QC/QA CONFERENCE AGENDA ........................................ A-68
ENVIRONMENTAL PRECONSTRUCTON CONFERENCE AGENDA AND ATTENDANCE ROSTER............. A-70
APPENDIX B. EXAMPLE NOTICES, LETTERS, AND FORMS ...................................................................B-1
EXAMPLE LETTERS, NOTICES, AND FORMS ............................................................................................B-4
Sample Acceptance Letter .....................................................................................................................B-5
Sample Buy America Certification .........................................................................................................B-6
Sample Summary of Buy America Quantities ........................................................................................B-8
Sample Buy America Certification with Exceptions .............................................................................B-10
Sample Stockpiled Material Letter of Vested Interest.........................................................................B-13
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sample Prompt Payment Notice ..........................................................................................................B-14
Sample Prompt Payment Law Notice ..................................................................................................B-15
Form 7 – Weekly Report on Miscellaneous Pay Items ........................................................................B-16
Form 10 – Inspector’s Report for Force Account Work .......................................................................B-20
Billing Example: Contractor Bill to CDOT .............................................................................................B-24
Billing Example: Subcontractor Bill to Contractor ...............................................................................B-25
Form 46 – Concrete Truck Mixer Inspection Certification ...................................................................B-26
Form 103 – Project Diary .....................................................................................................................B-28
Form 105 – Speed Memo.....................................................................................................................B-31
Form 200 – OJT Training Questionnaire ..............................................................................................B-34
Form 262 – Weekly Time Count Report – Work Days .........................................................................B-36
Form 263 – Weekly Time Count Report – Calendar Days ....................................................................B-39
Form 266 – Inspector’s Progress Report..............................................................................................B-42
Form 279 – Inspector’s Report of Reinforcing Steel Placed ................................................................B-46
Form 280 – EEO and Labor Compliance Verification ...........................................................................B-49
Form 282 – Asphalt Paving Inspector’s Daily Report ...........................................................................B-51
Form 568 – CDOT Temporary Speed Limit Reduction .........................................................................B-54
Form 580 – Equipment Rental Rate Determination Request ..............................................................B-59
Form 832 – Trainee Status and Evaluation ..........................................................................................B-63
Form 838 – OJT Trainee/Apprentice Record .......................................................................................B-66
Form 859 – Project Control Data .........................................................................................................B-69
Form 1186 – Contract Funding Increase/Decrease and Approval Letter ............................................B-78
Form 1212 – Final Acceptance Report .................................................................................................B-81
Form 1318 – Dispute and Claim Status Report ....................................................................................B-84
FHWA Form 1391 – Federal-Aid Highway Construction Contractors Annual EEO Report ..................B-88
Form 1401 – Block Faced MSE Wall Submittal Checklist .....................................................................B-90
Form 1402 – Panel Faced MSE Wall Submittal Checklist .....................................................................B-92
Piling Form ...........................................................................................................................................B-93
Traffic Control Review Form ................................................................................................................B-96
Project Final Submittal Checklist........................................................................................................B-104
CPM Schedule Review Checklists .......................................................................................................B-109
APPENDIX C. CHANGE ORDER EXAMPLES .......................................................................................... C-1
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHANGE ORDER EXAMPLES ................................................................................................................... C-3
APPENDIX D. MISCELLANEOUS DATA ................................................................................................. D-1
MISCELLANEOUS DATA ......................................................................................................................... D-3
6
CDOT CONSTRUCTION MANUAL
SECTION 100
GENERAL PROVISIONS
100-1
General Provisions
SECTION 101 GENERAL GUIDELINES

Section 100 presents the general requirements of construction contract administration and
includes topics such as the contracting process, the authority of the Department, legal aspects,
contract time, and payment for work. The intent and meaning of terms, pronouns, and
acronyms that are typically used in Contract documents are found in Section 101. Section 101
also refers to various agencies and organizations whose specifications and construction
requirements are referenced in the Contract.
101.1 – 101.100 RESERVED
101.101 SOURCE DOCUMENTS

As needed for clarification and additional information, reference the following documents:
1. CDOT Construction Bulletins,
2. CDOT Cost Data Book,
3. Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment,
4. CDOT Pavement Design Manual,
5. CDOT Erosion Control and Storm Water Quality Guide and Pocket Book,
6. CDOT Field Materials Manual,
7. CDOT Laboratory Manual of Test Procedures,
8. CDOT M&S Standard Plans,
9. CDOT Policy and Procedural Directives,
10. CDOT Safety Manual,
11. CDOT SiteManager® Users Guide,
12. CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,
13. CDOT Standard Special Provisions,
14. CDOT Project Special Provisions,
15. CDOT Supplemental Specifications,
16. CDOT Survey Manual,
17. CDOT Work Zone Safety Book and CDOT MUTCD Supplement, and
100-2
General Provisions
18. Contract Plans.
If a discrepancy is found in the Contract documents, check subsection 105.09 of the Standard
Specifications for the order of precedence to use in resolving the discrepancy.
Note that updates to CDOT Standard Specifications are issued quarterly as Standard Special
Provisions. Updates to the CDOT Construction Manual are published periodically in the CDOT
Construction Bulletins.
101.102 CDOT INTERNET AND INTRANET WEBSITE

Most CDOT information is maintained in an electronic format on the Department’s Internet and
Intranet website. The Department’s website is an invaluable source of information for
construction contract administration information. The Department’s Internet site is
https://www.codot.gov/ and the Employee Hub site is
https://sites.google.com/state.co.us/cdothub/home.
Following is a partial list of the electronic information contained on the websites:
Standard Specifications, Standard Special Provisions, M&S Standard Plans, CDOT Construction
Manual, and CDOT Construction Bulletins. Contact the Construction Engineering Services Branch
for additional information.
101.103 CDOT ORGANIZATION AND STAFF

101.103.1 Chief Engineer
The assignment of complete responsibility for individual contracts to Project Engineers is at the
administrative direction of the Chief Engineer, who is responsible for directing all CDOT
activities within the Division of Engineering and Maintenance.
101.103.2 Construction Engineering Services Branch Manager
Under the direction of the Chief Engineer, the Construction Engineering Services Branch
Manager provides each Region and various Local Agencies with assistance, engineering, and
support services for the administration of construction contracts.
Responsibilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. establishing consistent policy and uniform standards for the administration of

construction contracts;
2. formulating, developing, issuing, and implementing policies, procedures, and

specifications to ensure efficient and effective contract administration;
3. providing guidance and training to ensure that policies, procedures, and specifications
are clearly understood and uniformly applied;
100-3
General Provisions
4. conducting joint FHWA/CDOT Quality Assurance Reviews for construction projects under
the Federal-Oversight Program, compiling findings, and providing and implementing
recommendations to improve quality in construction; and
5. assisting the Chief Engineer during construction contract dispute/claim resolution.
101.103.3 Region Transportation Director
The Region Transportation Directors exercise overall control of their Regions and act as the
Chief Engineer's representatives in their respective Region. Additional assigned duties include
supervision of the Region Business Office, EEO Office, Maintenance Section, Planning and
Environmental Section, Traffic and Safety Section, and the Program Engineering Section.
101.103.4 Region Program Engineer
The Region Program Engineer reports directly to the Region Transportation Director and directs
the operations of the Region Program Engineering Section. The Region Program Engineer is the
highest level of authority with design and construction responsibility within the Region. Assisted
by Resident Engineers, the Region Program Engineer administers all construction contracts
according to the policies and procedures established by the Project Development Services
Branch and Construction Engineering Services Branch. The Region Program Engineer is also
responsible for funding decisions within the Region.
101.103.5 Resident Engineer
The Resident Engineers within each Region report directly to the Region Program Engineer.
They are charged with the overall administration of projects assigned to the unit (i.e., scoping
through construction) and for maintaining a unit capable of efficiently and effectively carrying
out the Department’s policies and procedures, including continuing and special training
programs. Resident Engineers delegate authority to Project Engineers based on their experience
and ability.
The Resident Engineer is responsible for apprising the Region Program Engineer on the status
of work, any problems that are encountered, decisions that have been made, and any
recommendations for improvements in construction practices.
101.103.6 Project Engineer
The complete responsibility for the administration and satisfactory completion of a CDOT
construction contract is assigned to the Project Engineer. The Project Engineer is the direct
representative of the Chief Engineer and reports directly to the Resident Engineer.
The Project Engineer is the first level of authority concerned with unusual circumstances (e.g.,
non-specification work, work outside the scope of the Contract, disputes, and change orders).
As practical, problems concerning contract interpretation should be referred to higher levels
of authority until the problem is acceptably resolved. Immediate decisions can be made, and
orders written, as necessary, to expedite construction.
100-4
General Provisions
Although the Project Engineer has the authority to direct the Contractor’s operations, the
Project Engineer should refrain from doing so unless special circumstances require such
intervention. The Project Engineer is responsible for ensuring that the Contractor uses proper
methods for performing quality work safely and in compliance with the Contract requirements.
If the Project Engineer or other project personnel attempt to direct the Contractor’s
operations, the Contractor may claim that the project personnel assumed risk and responsibility
for the work product.
101.103.6.1 Consultant Project Engineer
The Project Engineer is the Chief Engineer’s duly authorized representative who may be an
employee of a consulting engineer (consultant) under contract to CDOT. The Consultant Project
Engineer, if not a licensed Professional Engineer, shall be under the responsible charge of the
consultant’s Professional Engineer (a licensed P.E. in Colorado) who is in direct charge of the
work and satisfactory completion of the project. Both the Consultant Project Engineer and the
Consultant Professional Engineer shall report directly to a CDOT Resident Engineer (RE), or
designee as stated in the scope of services contract.
The responsibilities of the consultant fulfilling the role of the Project Engineer will be similar
to that of the CDOT Project Engineer, however, the Consultant Project Engineer and the
Consultant Professional Engineer are not authorized to sign or approve Contract Modification
Orders (CMOs) and time extensions. The Consultant Project Engineer and the Consultant
Professional Engineer shall coordinate as a team to keep the RE informed of project progress
as directed and manage the project work. All field revisions and design changes must be
approved by the RE prior to implementation.
The Consultant Project Engineer shall not direct the Contractor’s operations. The Consultant
Project Engineer is responsible for ensuring that the Contractor uses proper methods for
performing quality work safely and in compliance with the Contract requirements. If the
Consultant Project Engineer or other project personnel attempt to direct the Contractor’s
operations, the Contractor may claim that the project personnel assumed risk and responsibility
for the work product.
When an immediate decision needs to be made regarding the Contractor’s work, and that
decision may affect project costs or safety of the traveling public or result in a different
installation than what is shown on the plans, the Consultant Project Engineer shall contact the
CDOT RE for guidance. If the CDOT RE cannot be reached, then the Consultant Project Engineer
shall contact the Consultant Professional Engineer to address the issue of the Contractor’s work
and make sure that all potential safety issues are resolved prior to the Contractor leaving the
site for the day. The Consultant Project Engineer shall follow up with the RE as soon as possible
to discuss the issue in question.
101.103.7 Project Inspector (Materials Tester)
Under the supervision of the Project Engineer, Project Inspectors are authorized to inspect or
test all work performed and materials furnished. Such inspections may extend to all or any part
of the work and to the preparation, fabrication, or manufacture of the materials to be used.
100-5
General Provisions
Project Inspectors are not authorized to alter or waive provisions of the Contract or to issue
instructions.
The Project Inspector shall not direct the Contractor’s operations. The Project Inspector shall
document and report to the Project Engineer when the Contractor is not performing work safely
and in compliance with the Contract requirements. The Project Engineer is responsible for
ensuring that the Contractor uses proper methods for performing work safely and in compliance
with the Contract requirements. If the Project Engineer or other project personnel attempt to
direct the Contractor’s operations, the Contractor may claim that the project personnel
assumed risk and responsibility for the work product.
The following training is required to perform inspection on a CDOT project:
Technical Series (EPS Assistant I through EPS Technician III) +-6+-6
1. Basic Highway Math
2. Basic Highway Surveying
3. Basic Highway Plan Reading
4. Erosion Control Supervisor
Professional Series (EIT I through EIT III)
1. Basic Highway Surveying
2. Basic Highway Plan Reading
3. Erosion Control Supervisor
The specialty certifications, such as CAPA Asphalt Inspection, WAQTC, and Major Structures,
will only be required when an inspector is working on a project where those items of work are
performed. For example, a person working on an asphalt overlay would need the pre-requisites
plus the CAPA asphalt inspection; a person working on an embankment would need the pre-
requisites plus the WAQTC soils; etc. The specialty training requirements apply to the full range
of both the technical and professional series listed above.
101.103.8 Staff Bridge Services Branch
101.103.8.1 Quality Assurance Inspectors (Fabrication Inspectors)
Fabrication Inspectors of the Staff Bridge Services Branch act on behalf of the Project Engineer
and inspect the Contractor’s ability to control quality in fabricated work and materials. The
Project Engineer is responsible for notifying the Staff Bridge Fabrication Unit of upcoming
bridge work that may require fabrication inspection such as prestress concrete or structural
steel bridge elements. The Fabrication Inspectors are authorized to assess and accept or reject
the fabricated work, the fabrication plant, and the Contractor’s quality control process control
inspection and testing personnel. Fabrication Inspectors will contact the Project Engineer
100-6
General Provisions
regarding work and materials that are out of specified limits. Fabrication Inspectors also assist
field personnel regarding the processing of pre-inspected items and may be contacted at (303)
757-9339.
101.103.8.2 Bridge Construction Assistance
The Staff Bridge Services Branch provides assistance regarding structural items to Region
personnel. The Staff Bridge Services Branch processes shop drawings by distributing them to
the Project Structural Engineer and returning them to the Project Engineer. Working drawings
will also be reviewed as time allows. In cooperation with Project Structural Engineer, Staff
Bridge Services Branch provides assistance to field personnel on questions regarding design
intent, expertise on operations such as post-tensioning, steel girder bridges, and construction
modifications. Structural defects noted during inspection or changes made during construction
should be discussed with the Staff Bridge Services Branch. Contact Staff Bridge at (303) 757-
9309 for the corresponding Region Unit Leader for bridge construction assistance and questions
pertaining to shop drawings.
101.103.8.3 Bridge Construction Reviews
Notify Staff Bridge upon construction completion of every structure that meets the federal
definition of a major bridge as well as other structures such as pedestrian and wildlife
structures, walls, sign structures, and culverts greater than 4 feet in diameter. A major bridge
is any structure that carries vehicular traffic and is over twenty feet long, measured along the
centerline of the roadway. In addition to these structures, pedestrian and railroad structures
over state highways will be included. Staff Bridge shall conduct a final inspection for
acceptance of all structures before project final acceptance is granted. Typically, this is done
at the final walkthrough when developing a punch list of items to finish. Coordinate the Staff
Bridge final inspection prior to structure contractor demobilization so the Contractor can
perform the unfinished work items identified at the inspection without having to remobilize.
Schedule the review by contacting the Staff Bridge PE II assigned to the Region. An additional
bridge inspection is required to FHWA/NBIS standards prior to opening to traffic.
101.103.9 ENGINEER IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE (EIRC)
During the construction phase, every project must have an Engineer in Responsible Charge. A
project may require/need more than one EIRC. If you are working on a project and are not an
EIRC on the project, then you are working under at least one EIRC. For more information about
EIRC refer to CDOT’s Construction Engineer in Responsible Charge Information Document which
is posted on CDOT’s External website at the same location as this manual.
101.104 PROCESS CONTROL/OWNER ACCEPTANCE (PC/OA)

For information on the Quality Assurance Program, see the CDOT Field Materials Manual.
100-7
General Provisions
101.105 FHWA INVOLVEMENT

To ensure compliance with applicable engineering, legal, and administrative requirements in
the expenditure of Federal funds, the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) administers the
Federal-Aid Program, which funds eligible highway improvements nationwide. Pursuant to the
current Federal Transportation legislation (i.e., Moving Ahead for Progress in the 21st Century
Act (MAP-21)), CDOT and FHWA have adopted a Stewardship Agreement that defines FHWA
oversight requirements on Federal-Aid projects. The Stewardship Agreement specifically
addresses the type, scope, and location of projects requiring Federal oversight. An FHWA
Operations Engineer assigned from the FHWA Colorado Division Office will be the primary point
of contact for Project Engineers. The FHWA Operations Engineer typically will be involved in
joint FHWA/CDOT Quality Assurance Reviews and the processing of claims and contract
modification orders, as defined in the Stewardship Agreement.
100-8
General Provisions
SECTION 102 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND

CONDITIONS
Section 102 of the Standard Specifications governs the requirements and conditions under which
bids may be accepted from contractors. The Construction Engineering Services Branch
administers the provisions of Section 102 and may be contacted for assistance with bidding
rules and requirements.
102.1 – 102.3 RESERVED
102.4 BID RULES AND CONTRACTOR EVALUATIONS

The Construction Engineering Services Branch Manager is the “promulgator” of the Bid Rules.
These rules set the ethical requirements of contractors for bidding and performing CDOT work.
The process for the Project Evaluation System (PES) system is as follows:
1. The Project Engineer will complete an electronic evaluation at the following link:
https://docs.google.com/forms/d/e/1FAIpQLSe78dBQMVY6q8TuZyY2ZiAIR4yH8cqtD2_s
YMS-QIpigCdADw/viewform
2. Project Support will send an email to the Project Engineer with two attachments.
Attachment 1 will be the evaluation the Project Engineer completed. Attachment 2 will
be a form for the Contractor to evaluate CDOT.
3. The Project Engineer will include Attachment 1 in the Finals package submitted to the
Finals Administrator.
4. The Project Engineer will forward Attachment 1 and 2 to the Contractor. This serves as
the Contractor’s notification of the score, allows for Contractor comments, and provides
the Contractor with the form to evaluate CDOT.
5. If the Contractor fills out Attachment 2 and returns it to the Project Engineer, the
Project Engineer will forward it to the Construction Area Engineer. The Contractor is
not required to evaluate CDOT.
A Finals Administrator will not final a project until the Project Engineer has completed an
evaluation and submitted it to the Finals Administrator. Interim evaluations will be performed
by the Project Engineer annually if a project lasts longer than one year.
The Project Engineer is not required to provide the Contractor an opportunity to comment on
interim evaluations but should provide these interim evaluations to the Contractor if
performed.
100-9
General Provisions
102.5 EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, SPECIAL

PROVISIONS, AND SITE OF WORK
102.5.1 Project Showings
It is the responsibility of each prospective bidder to examine the site of the proposed work
carefully and to schedule an on-site project showing with the Project Engineer listed in the
Notice to Bidders
To ensure competitive bidding, the Project Engineer will provide all bidders with an equal
opportunity to view the proposed construction site and will conduct each of the project
showings in a similar manner. It is important to provide each prospective bidder with identical
information. The same Project Engineer should conduct each of the project showings.
To provide equal information to all bidders, the Project Engineer shall share project showing
information with all prospective bidders, the appropriate Program Engineer, the appropriate
Resident Engineer, the appropriate Construction Services Area Engineer, and the appropriate
Estimator. This information shall contain all questions asked by the bidders during the showings
and the responses given by the Project Engineer.
The Project Showing form, Form 1389, will be used to document the bidders’ questions and the
responses from CDOT. As the bidders’ questions are answered, they should be emailed to the
CDOT representatives listed above. Nonproprietary questions and answers shall be emailed to
[email protected]. Updated emails will include all questions and answers, not
just updates from the previous email.
The final Project Showing Questions and Answers shall be kept as project documentation and
be emailed (as stated above) no later than 12:00 noon the Monday before Bid Opening. The
Region will answer no bidder questions after the final Project Showing Questions and Answers
are emailed. Any major concerns brought up after this time could result in project deferral.
The CDOT Award Officer will post the Project Showing Questions and Answers on the CDOT
Project Advertisement web page to allow bidders to view the information:
https://www.codot.gov/business/bidding/future-bidding-opportunities
Prior to each job showing the Project Engineer shall notify the bidder that the bidder's
nonproprietary questions will be documented and made available to all bidders. When a
question is asked by a bidder regarding an interpretation of a standard specification, whether
it is from the M&S Standard Plans, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, or
a standard special provision, the response will be to bid the plans.
If the question requires an interpretation of the plans or project special provisions, the CDOT
Project Engineer should answer the question or seek guidance from the appropriate sources and
respond at a later date. If the Project Engineer’s immediate supervisor is unable to answer the
question, the next information source would be the appropriate specialty group such as Staff
Bridge, Staff Traffic, etc. If the specialty group is unable to answer the question, the Area
Engineers should be consulted.
100-10
General Provisions
It is CDOT’s goal to answer all questions and disseminate all the questions and answers to clarify
any areas in the plans and specifications susceptible to misinterpretation wholly and
thoroughly. If the questions reveal significant discrepancies in the plans and specifications, a
revision should be issued and, if necessary, the project opening delayed.
If the bidder has a question or requests clarification that involves the bidder's innovative or
proprietary means and methods, phasing, scheduling, or other aspects of construction of the
project, the Project Engineer should direct the bidder to contact the Resident Engineer directly
to address the question or clarification. The Resident Engineer will determine if questions are
innovative or proprietary in nature. If the Resident Engineer determines that the bidder’s
question is innovative or proprietary, the bidder’s innovative method shall be kept confidential
and not shared with other bidders. If the Resident Engineer determines that a question does
not warrant confidentiality, the bidder may withdraw the question. If the bidder withdraws the
question, the Resident Engineer will not answer the question and the question will not be
documented on the CDOT website. If the bidder does not withdraw the question, the question
should be answered, and both the question and CDOT answer should be posted on the website.
If it is known that revisions to plans, specifications, or other contractual documents have been,
or will be, published and distributed, notify each of the prospective bidders during the project
showing. If the Project Engineer volunteers information to a bidder, it will be provided to all
the bidders.
The Project Engineer should remind the bidders that the questions and answers document is for
information only, and it is the bidder's responsibility to verify the information.
Issuing the question and answer memo and publishing it online will not only help CDOT
understand potential risks, but it will help the contracting community understand the risks as
well. If both parties understand their risks, the project will be properly bid.
102.5.1.1 Signature Project Showings
Refer to the Project Development Manual for the definition of a Signature Project.
For signature projects, the following procedures should be followed in addition to those
detailed in section 102.5.1 above.
All project showings should be completed within the first three weeks after the date of
advertisement. Job showings should be attended by the Program Engineer, the Resident
Engineer, the Project Engineer, and the Engineering Estimates Program Manager.
The Project Showing form (CDOT Form 1389) should be completed and emailed as soon as the
bidder’s questions are answered. The final Project Showing Questions and Answers for Signature
Projects have the same deadline as specified in section 102.5.1 Project Showings.
Three weeks after the advertisement date, the project staff will review all the questions and
comments from the potential bidders and determine if a plan revision or clarification is needed.
If a revision or clarification is warranted, the appropriate notification will be sent to all the
plan holders on record. If necessary, bid opening may be delayed.
100-11
General Provisions
102.6 – 102.10 RESERVED
100-12
General Provisions
SECTION 103 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF

CONTRACT
Section 103 of the Standard Specifications governs the procedures for determining the
successful bidder and entering into the Contract. The Construction Engineering Services Branch
administers the requirements of Section 103.
103.1 – 103.4 RESERVED
103.5 SURPLUS FUNDS

When a bid results in surplus funds on the project, the Bids and Awards Unit will issue a
Preliminary Financial Statement and will submit a request to the Region Business Office for a
budget action.
If the Region wants to retain all or part of the bid surplus, the Region Transportation Director
(RTD) shall request retention of surplus funds after bid opening day. The request process for
the region has two steps.
Step One
RTD will send an email to the Chief Engineer (CE) with notification of the region's “intent” to
request to retain all or part of the bid surplus funds. This email must be submitted to the Chief
Engineer by noon the day following bid opening.
Prior to the submission of the email to the CE the region will submit a spreadsheet to the
Engineering Estimates and Market Analysis Unit (EEMA) of the Construction Engineering Services
Branch analyzing the proposed costs of the work to be added if funding becomes available. The
spreadsheet will list all items of work; the unit prices of the low bidder, second low bidder,
and third low bidder; and the product extensions for each bidder. If EEMA determines that
including the additional work in the low bidder's bid would result in higher costs to CDOT than
if it were included in the bids from either the second or the third low bidder, the additional
work will not be added to the Contract. The region will also analyze costs to perform the
additional work as though it were a separate contract, including additional mobilization, traffic
control, indirect costs, etc. This analysis will also be submitted to EEMA in a spreadsheet format
containing quantities, estimated unit prices, and product extensions. The EEMA may adjust the
estimated unit prices to complete the work under a separate contract as necessary. If EEMA
does not concur that the anticipated cost savings to add the work to the Contract is reasonable,
EEMA will notify the region.
Step Two
RTD will submit a formal letter requesting to retain all or part of the bid surplus funds to the
Chief Engineer’s office by the Monday following bid opening.
100-13
General Provisions
Both submissions should be sent via email to the Chief Engineer. The second email should
contain the funds retention request letter, the first email with initial approval and amount of
surplus. The following Units are to be copied on the second email: Office of Financial
Management and Budget, Project Budget Unit, Office of Financial Management and Budget -
Project Award and Accounting Unit, the Awards Officer in Construction Services, and the Region
Business Office Manager.
The formal letter should contain the following justification at a minimum:
Time involved in preparing, letting, awarding, and issuing a notice to proceed for a separate
contract.
1. Anticipated competition for the work.
2. Time remaining and the critical work that must be done before winter shutdown period.
3. Justification of work that was omitted because of funding constraints.
4. Environmental clearances for the extra work, if any.
After receipt of the signed letter from the Chief Engineer approving the Region’s request to
obtain bid surplus funds, the Project Awards and Accounting Unit will add a CMO line in the
AASHTOWare® worksheet bid project under category 0200 and item number 70070002. The
amount to input in the CMO line will be the net amount of funds retained after allowance for
CE and Indirect Costs. The net amount is calculated by dividing the amount retained by the
current CE and Indirect rate.
The Project Awards and Accounting Unit will generate a final financial statement and submit it
to the Agreements Unit for project award.
100-14
General Provisions
SECTION 104 SCOPE OF WORK

Section 104 of the Standard Specifications governs the work under the Contract and specifies
procedures for revising the scope of work, if necessary. A revision to the scope of work requires
the proper execution of a change order. The Contractor cannot be required to do work beyond
the original project limits, unless the Contractor has agreed to complete the work and a project
extension change order has been executed. Additional approvals are required for project
extension change orders before work can begin. See Section 120.7 for additional information
on preparing and processing change orders.
104.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT

The intent of the Contract is to provide for the construction and completion of the work
described.
104.2 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS, SUSPENSIONS OF WORK, AND

SIGNIFICANT CHANGES IN THE CHARACTER OF WORK
Issues relating to differing site conditions, suspension of work, and significant changes in the
character of work are usually complex and frequently result in Contractor disputes or claims
for additional time and compensation. A change order is required to authorize an adjustment
in cost or extension of contract time resulting from the impact of these issues. The expertise
of engineering and legal staff outside the office of the Resident Engineer may be useful in
assessing the situation. Contact the Area Engineer for additional guidance. See Section 120.7
for additional information on preparing and processing change orders.
104.3 EXTRA WORK

If extra work for which there is no price included in the Contract is necessary or desirable for
Contract completion, the Project Engineer may order the extra work to be performed by the
Contractor. Extra work must be authorized by a change order and paid for as provided under
subsection 109.04 of the Standard Specifications. See Section 109.4 of this Manual for additional
information.
104.4 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC

Subsection 104.04 of the Standard Specifications defines the responsibilities for maintaining
traffic throughout the project, including items such as detours, access points, and snow
removal. The provisions of subsection 104.04 are a day-to-day responsibility of both CDOT and
Contractor personnel and will be emphasized during the Preconstruction Conference.
The Contractor must make every reasonable and practical effort to maintain safety and
minimize the inconvenience to the traveling public. Project Engineers and Project Inspectors
should continually monitor the condition of the traveled way and ensure that the Contractor
properly places and maintains traffic control devices in compliance with specified
100-15
General Provisions
requirements. Regardless of who is responsible for the cost or repair of maintenance, both
CDOT and Contractor personnel must ensure that all dangerous situations are immediately
corrected or reported to the Project Engineer or Contractor for correction. See Section 630 of
this Manual for additional information on construction zone traffic control.
The Contractor is responsible for the maintenance and repair of all Contract items. Subsection
107.17 of the Standard Specifications permits the Project Engineer to relieve the Contractor of
expenses for damage to certain portions of the work caused by traffic or the elements. See
Section 107.17 of this Manual for additional information.
104.5 RESERVED
104.6 RESERVED
104.7 VALUE ENGINEERING CHANGE PROPOSALS BY THE

CONTRACTOR
Contractors are encouraged to submit Value Engineering Change Proposals (VECPs) to the
Department for evaluation. Complete submittal requirements are defined in subsection 104.07
of the Standard Specifications.
The Project Engineer will notify the appropriate Area Engineer upon receipt of a VECP. The
following procedure is to be used in the evaluation of VECPs:
1. Determine if a VECP qualifies for consideration and evaluation. The Project Engineer
should discuss VECPs with the Resident Engineer and reject any VECP that is incomplete
or that requires excessive time or costs for review, evaluation, or investigation. The
Project Engineer should also reject proposals that are not consistent with the
Department’s design or construction policies or criteria for the project, or with the
specification. The Project Engineer should notify the Contractor immediately in writing
of the rejection, and the reasons for the rejection.
2. Categorize Proposal. Proposals should be categorized as VECP (Category A) or VECP

(Category B). See subsection 104.07 of the Standard Specifications for Category
definitions.
No VECP can be used to alter incentive and disincentive rates and maximums on A+B
(cost plus time) projects. In other words, no additional incentive will be paid resulting
from acceptance of a VECP for an A+B project.
For either category of VECP, the Project Engineer should be certain that the estimated
quantities, costs, and savings are reasonably accurate. The Contractor shall provide
additional information regarding costs or quantities as required by the Project Engineer.
3. Evaluation of the proposal. Upon receipt of a VECP, the Project Engineer will ensure
that sufficient time is provided for review and will promptly notify the Contractor if
additional time is needed. If additional response time affects the critical path of the
100-16
General Provisions
Contractor’s schedule, a non-compensable time adjustment to the Contract should be

included in the CMO for the accepted VECP (see No. 5 below).
Level of Review (Category A and Category B)
For VECPs (Category A), the Project Engineer will work with the Resident Engineer and
Area Engineer to determine an appropriate panel of subject matter experts to evaluate
a VECP proposal. The panel may include representatives of Staff Bridge, the Federal
Highway Administration (FHWA), the Region Program Engineer, the Area Engineer, and
others as necessary. The recommendations of the panel will be provided to the
appropriate Region Program Engineer. The Region Program Engineer will then make a
final decision in consultation with the Region Transportation Director.
VECPs (Category B) may be evaluated in the Region by a panel consisting of the Project
Engineer, Resident Engineer, Program Engineer, and other experts as needed including
FHWA. The appropriate Area Engineer should also be included. The Region Program
Engineer will then make a final decision, based on the recommendations of the panel.
Review Panel Evaluation
For both Categories of VECPs, the Project Engineer will facilitate the panel’s review. All
panel members should thoroughly review the VECP specification before beginning
evaluation. Evaluation of the VECP should consider the results of any previous Value
Engineering (VE) studies conducted on the project during the design phase, structure
selection reports, or other decisions, which have been considered previously. Conditions
may or may not have changed since these studies and reports were prepared.
VECP Review Panels should consider the potential merits, cost savings, time savings,
and original design intent as well as the shared risk of the proposal.
The cost of each individual item in the proposed change as well as the total cost of the
proposal should be thoroughly reviewed. The recommendations of the panel will be
provided to the Program Engineer for a decision.
When the Program Engineer issues a decision, the Project Engineer will notify the
Contractor in writing, of the approval of the VECP or the reasons for rejection.
4. Contractor Appeal Process. Appeals can only be made on VECPs (Category A). The Prime
Contractor submitting the VECP may file a one-time appeal of a denial through the
Project Engineer to the Region Transportation Director. The Contractor must provide a
valid reason for the appeal, and the decision of the Region Transportation Director will
be final.
5. Processing of accepted VECPs. After the terms of the proposal are agreed upon, the
Project Engineer will process the proposal using Form 90 – Contract Modification Order.
See Appendix C for an example.
It is preferable that the final cost be agreed upon before implementation. However, based on
the estimated value of the change, the Project Engineer and the Contractor may agree to a
100-17
General Provisions
flexible method of determining the final cost share. Such agreements must be documented in
detail on Form 90.
The Form 90 should identify the difference between the original planned quantities and the
quantities represented by the accepted VECP. The net savings shall be calculated pursuant to
the formula shown in the specification.
If a VECP saves time on the project, especially on A+B projects, the contract time will be
adjusted accordingly as noted in the examples below:
Example 1: – If an A+B project initially has a contract time of 300 calendar days, and CDOT
accepts a VECP that saves the project 20 days, the CMO will reset the contract time to 280
days. The allowable incentive and disincentive rates and maximums will be unchanged.
Example 2: – An A+B project initially has a contract time of 200 calendar days with an early
completion incentive of $10,000 per day. A VECP proposes to save 10 days, but at an increased
construction cost of $85,000. The early completion incentive cannot be used to offset the
additional construction costs, and CDOT would not accept the proposal because it would result
in additional construction costs.
The Contractor’s development and re-design costs and CDOT’s review costs are those costs over
and above what each party would have expended if the VECP did not exist. If the Contractor’s
development and re-design costs include the services of a Consultant Engineer, they must be
documented with certified billings. CDOT’s costs should include costs for reviews by Staff
Bridge, Region or Headquarters personnel, and Consultants, prompted by the VECP. The rates
for CDOT’s review services are listed in the specification.
The Contractor will be paid for the work represented by the appropriate pay items as the work
progresses and is acceptably performed. In addition, the VECP Incentive will be paid to the
Contractor upon acceptable completion of all the construction work represented by the VECP,
according to the formulae in the specification via the SiteManager® System. To initiate
payment, the Project Engineer must enter a 900-item “Value Engineering Change Proposal
Incentive” into SiteManager®.
If an analysis of the schedule, modified to include the VECP, shows an impact to the critical
path, consideration should be given to adjusting the contract time using the CMO. The CMO
letter of explanation should describe impacts to the project schedule. The CMO letter of
explanation should also describe impacts to the original scope of the project, including but not
limited to milestones or lane rentals. The CMO should address adjustments to these items if
warranted.
100-18
General Provisions
SECTION 105 CONTROL OF WORK

The authority, rights, and duties of CDOT and the Contractor are specified in Section 105 of the
Standard Specifications. Pay particular attention to the requirements of Standard Special
Provisions that pertain to Process Control/Quality Assurance and roadway smoothness.
105.1 AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER

The Engineer will decide all questions regarding the quality and acceptability of work, material,
and rate of progress; all interpretations of the Contract documents; and the acceptable
fulfillment of the Contract.
105.1.1 Project First Program
Project First is CDOT’s partnering program. The Project First website

(https://www.codot.gov/business/designsupport/design-docs/project-first-on-construction-
projects) includes the information and tools needed to implement the Program. The Issue
Documentation Matrix (or The Risk Register) and Escalation Ladder on this website will be
completed by the Project Engineer and the Contractor to suit the project’s needs.
Project First is a high priority for CDOT. CDOT’s region management, HQ management, and
Construction Area Engineers will assist in and monitor its use and success. For this to happen,
the Project Engineer will place the newly developed Issue Documentation from the Initial
Workshop in a Google Shared Drive. Contact your Area Engineer for access to this drive. When
the Matrix is updated as future workshops occur and issues are addressed, replace the older
version in the Google Shared Drive. The title of the document will include the subaccount code
and the month and year of the workshop. (Example of title – 12345_12_2018)
105.2 PLANS, SHOP DRAWINGS, WORKING DRAWINGS, OTHER

SUBMITTALS, AND CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
Shop drawings are submitted to the Project Engineer for formal review and returned to the
Contractor for action. Working drawings are submitted to the Project Engineer for information
only and are not formally reviewed or returned to the Contractor. Table 105-1 of the Standard
Specifications defines which items require shop drawings and working drawings. Review all
Contract Plans and Specifications with respect to Contractor submittal requirements.
105.2.1 Working Drawing Review
The Project Engineer may review the working drawings for conformity to Contract
requirements; acceptance of the work will be based on the Contract requirements. For archival
purposes, the Project Engineer will forward one set of working drawings to Bridge Records, in
care of Staff Bridge, for the following structural items:
1. expansion devices (0 inch to 4 inch),
100-19
General Provisions
2. precast panel deck forms,
3. permanent steel bridge deck forms, and
4. bridge railing.
105.2.2 False work Certification
The Contractor’s Professional Engineer shall determine when false work drawings are required.
In accordance with subsection 601.11(b) of the Standard Specifications, the Contractor’s

Engineer will provide the required certifications before the placement of any concrete that will
be supported by false work.
See Section 601.2 of this Manual for additional information on false work.
105.2.3 Shop Drawing Review Process
The Project Engineer will use the services of the Staff Bridge Services Branch to process shop
drawings. The shop drawing submittal usually goes through the following steps:
1. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall submit electronic shop drawings to the
Project Engineer. Shop drawings shall be stamped “Approved for Construction” and
signed by the Contractor before CDOT’s review.
Subcontractors and suppliers shall submit shop drawings to the Contractor who shall
approve the drawings for construction, which then shall be submitted to the Project
Engineer.
2. The Project Engineer will retain one copy for informational purposes and transmit
another copy to the Project Structural Engineer. The Project Engineer will discard the
retained set when the reviewed shop drawings are returned. The Project Engineer and
Project Structural Engineer will document the time the shop drawings are received.
3. The Project Structural Engineer will review and mark each page of the shop drawings
“Reviewed, no exception taken”, “Reviewed, revise as noted”, “Resubmit, revise as
noted”, as appropriate. The Project Structural Engineer will retain one copy and return
another copy to Bridge Records.
4. The Project Engineer will retain one copy of reviewed shop drawings for the project
records in ProjectWise and send one copy to the Contractor (who will provide one copy
to the supplier) and one copy to each railroad company, as applicable.
If marked “Resubmit,” the Contractor/supplier will make the appropriate corrections, and the
above procedures will be repeated upon receipt of the corrected drawings.
105.2.4 Construction Drawings
The Project Engineer shall retain one set of plans, reviewed shop drawings, working drawings,
and other submittals and mark on this set all changes and deviations as the work progresses.
100-20
General Provisions
Upon completion of the work, these drawings will be used in preparing As-Constructed Plans
(see Section 121.2.3). The Contractor is no longer contractually required to keep a set of all
changes and deviations.
105.3 CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT

Subsection 105.03 of the Standard Specifications requires the Contractor to perform work in
conformity with the various Contract provisions. Although criteria for determining acceptability
of the work is defined, good engineering judgment must be used to determine conformity with
the intent of the Contract.
105.3.1 Use of Price Reductions and Warranties
The Contractor is required to furnish materials and workmanship that conform to the
requirements of the Contract. However, there are rare, brief, and accidental instances during
the project where the Contractor could produce material or work that is slightly out of
tolerance. In such cases, price reductions will be used.
Price reductions are not to be used as a general method of continually accepting nonconforming
items on the project, nor are they to be used for items under the provisions of the Process
Control/Quality Assurance Specifications (see Section 105.3.2). Where nonconformance is
detected, the Project Engineer will immediately require the Contractor to bring the item back
into conformance. If the Contractor does not comply, the Project Engineer will issue a written
stop work order for the item until the problem is satisfactorily corrected.
It is not acceptable to accept a warranty of any kind in lieu of the Contractor providing
specification material. If the Original contract did not include a warranty provision, do not add
a warranty provision after project award.
105.3.2 Price Reductions for Nonconforming Materials
Although materials will be sampled and tested in accordance with the schedules and procedures
presented in the CDOT Field Materials Manual, CDOT has the right to test materials at any time
during the project. Any material that appears suspect during the course of the work should be
immediately sampled and tested, regardless of specified sampling schedules, and treated as a
one sample lot.
105.3.3 Price Reductions for Nonconforming Work
Nonconforming work is work that does not conform to the requirements of the Contract. The
Department classifies nonconforming work as follows:
1. nonconforming work that is reasonably acceptable, and
2. nonconforming work that is unacceptable.
The final determination of how to classify nonconforming work, as defined in the Standard
Specifications, is the responsibility of the Project Engineer. See Section 105.3.3.1 and Section
100-21
General Provisions
105.3.3.2 of this Manual, respectively, for the processing procedures for reasonably acceptable
and unacceptable work.
105.3.3.1 Reasonably Acceptable Work
Reasonably acceptable work is work that does not conform to the Contract but is reasonably
acceptable and may remain in place, as assessed by the Project Engineer.
There are two processing procedures to consider, depending on whether the work item has an
associated “F” factor. See Section 105.3.3.1.1 for processing guidance on Contract items
without an “F” factor and Section 105.3.3.1.2 for guidance on items with an “F” factor.
105.3.3.1.1 Contract Items without “F” Factors
For Contract items that do not have an element listed in the Table of Price Reduction Factors
in the Standard Specifications or Special Provisions, the price reduction should be based on
engineering judgment. Such reductions must be documented by a change order. When assessing
a fair and equitable price reduction for accepting nonconforming work of this type, the impacts
on the item’s service life and future maintenance costs must be considered. The Project
Engineer should contact the Region Materials Engineer and as needed, the Materials and
Geotechnical Services Branch for assistance with this determination.
105.3.3.1.2 Contract Items with “F” Factors
For Contract items that have an element listed in the Table of Price Reduction Factors in the
Standard Specifications or Standard Special Provisions, determine the price reduction based on
the equation and methodology provided in the Contract. The equation is based on statistical
sampling and testing data. The procedures for establishing sampling lots and performing random
sampling and testing are presented in the CDOT Field Materials Manual. These procedures must
be followed. Use the following guidelines when determining price reductions for Contract items
with “F” factors:
1. Sampling and Testing Errors. Results from erroneous samples and tests will not be used.
The reason for voiding samples and tests will be noted on Form 626 – Field Lab Test
Results, which must be signed by the Project Materials Tester.
2. Calculations. Calculations will be performed using the current version of the computer
price reduction program available from the Pavement Management and Design Program
of the Materials and Geotechnical Services Branch. Input data should be carefully
checked to ensure accuracy before running the program.
3. Outliers. Certain test results may be statistical outliers. An outlier does not imply an
incorrect result, rather a result that is not acceptable for use in determining price
reductions (i.e., outside statistical limits). Outliers should be promptly investigated for
errors and the material retested if an error is discovered. The new result, if found
statistically acceptable, should be used in determining the price reduction.
4. Total “P” Value. Use the total “P” value to assess the work as follows, where “P” is the
price reduction percentage factor:
100-22
General Provisions
105.3.3.2 Unacceptable Work
Unacceptable work is work that is not in conformance with Contract requirements and of such
poor quality that the final product is unacceptable. The Project Engineer will require the
unacceptable item to be removed, replaced, or otherwise corrected to bring the item into
conformance. Such activities by the Contractor will be at no additional cost to the Department.
105.3.4 Process Control/Quality Assurance (PC/OA) Specifications
105.3.4.1 Cooperation and Communication
Communication between project personnel is essential to implementing PC/OA specifications

and resolving project issues. The Project Engineer, the Contractor’s Superintendent and Process
Control Supervisor, as well as other project personnel, generally achieve this goal by attending
formal or informal weekly meetings. Note: there may be project specific provisions, which
require weekly meetings to coordinate schedules and address material quality and traffic
control issues.
105.3.4.2 Quality Level
Contract items that are governed by PC/OA specifications require random sampling and testing
during the prosecution of the work. Results of such tests are statistically analyzed to determine
Quality Level (i.e., the percentage of work projected to be within specified requirements).
Depending on the Quality Level, a factor will be assigned to adjust payment for the work as
discussed in Section 105.3.4.3.
The Plan Value in the Concrete 03 program is not labeled correctly. It should be labeled as the
Lower specification limit (TL). The calculations used in Colorado Procedure 71 for the Lower
Quality Index are based on this value. This (TL) is also defined in Subsection 105.06 as the Lower
Tolerance Limit. When submitting the final report, strike out the words Plan Value and replace
them with Lower Specification Limit or Lower Tolerance Limit as shown in Figure 100 - 1. Do
not adjust the default value of 570 psi when assigning the Plan Value in the Concrete 03
program.
100-23
General Provisions
EXAMPLE CONCRETE 03 PRINT OUT
Figure 100 - 1
105.3.4.3 Incentive/Disincentive Payments
PC/OA specifications define an incentive for the Contractor to provide a high-quality Contract
item and a disincentive for producing a product with lesser quality. A pay factor, based on
Quality Level, is used to adjust payment. See Section 105.3.4.2 for information on Quality
Level. Pay factors can be categorized as follows:
1. Pay Factor ≥ 1.0000. A pay factor greater than or equal to 1.0000 will be used for work
and materials with a Quality Level of a high-quality product (i.e., the better the quality,
the greater the payment above the unit bid price).
2. Pay Factor < 1.0000. A pay factor less than 1.0000 will be used for work and materials
with a Quality Level representing a lesser quality product (i.e., the poorer the quality,
the greater the reduction in pay below the unit bid price).
Incentive payments compensate the Contractor for maintaining good process control that will
produce high-quality material. High-quality materials will increase the performance and service
life of the final product. The Contractor must maintain a consistent quality to earn incentive
payments. Disincentive payments are applied when the Contractor has poor process control
that will produce an inferior product.
100-24
General Provisions
105.3.4.4 Acceptance Sampling
To ensure statistical accuracy, acceptance samples for PC/OA specifications must be obtained
through a stratified random sampling procedure. The random samples will be used to
statistically analyze the acceptance of the work. The following example illustrates the
stratified random sampling procedure:
1. Given: Testing Frequency. The testing frequency in this example is one test for every
500 tons. Therefore, a random sample will be taken from every 500 tons.
2. Select Random Location. To determine the exact location for the density test, randomly
select both a longitudinal station and a transverse offset.
3. Obtain Sample. Perform the density test at the exact location of the randomly selected
longitudinal station and transverse offset.
Although acceptance sampling is performed to meet PC/OA specifications, additional sampling

and testing may be performed at the discretion of the Project Engineer, such as where a
material appears obviously deficient. Such samples and tests are not random and, therefore,
must not be incorporated in the PC/OA statistical analysis. Consider the following examples for
a project that includes a PC/OA specification for hot mix asphalt (HMA):
Example 1 – Segregation. Quality Assurance tests for aggregate gradation are being
taken from the cold feed at the plant. The test results are within specified
requirements; however, the Project Engineer notices an obviously segregated area
behind the paver screed and immediately requests the Contractor to stop the paver,
remove the segregated area, and replace the deficient material with non-segregated
HMA. If the Project Engineer and the Contractor disagree on the material being
segregated, the Project Engineer will have the material sampled and tested in
accordance with the specifications. The Project Engineer will not allow the Contractor
to place segregated material.
Example 2 – Asphalt Content. Quality Assurance tests for asphalt content are being
performed at the plant, and the test results are within specified limits. The Project
Engineer suspects that a truckload of HMA contains too much asphalt cement. The
Project Engineer immediately requests the Contractor to obtain a sample of the HMA
material. If the test results are outside specified limits and the Project Engineer
determines that the material is unacceptable, the Contractor must remove and replace
the material at no cost to the project.
CDOT may sample materials at any time and location, especially if the Project Engineer suspects
that there is an obvious defect. The material represented by that sample will be accepted or
rejected based on the test results of the sample. Samples that are not randomly selected will
be individually tested, and the test results and the quantity they represent will not be included
in the PC/OA statistical analysis.
100-25
General Provisions
105.4 – 105.6
105.7 CONFORMITY TO ROADWAY SMOOTHNESS CRITERIA

Interpreting the Pavement Smoothness Specification and Profiler Operating Parameters
Asphalt Pavement Smoothness Category Changes
There are some cases when asphalt smoothness categories on projects could be changed.
Project HRI (Half-car Roughness Index) Category changes can only be executed by a change
order by the CDOT project manager/engineer.
Some category changes can take place if a project has varying curb and gutter layout, varying
pavement obstructions, short lead-ins to intersections, curves that cannot be traveled at least
15 MPH in a high-speed profiler, or short sections at a bridge.
For pavement smoothness categorization instructions see Design Bulletin 2011-3. The link for
the design bulletin website is listed below.
http://www.coloradodot.info/business/designsupport/bulletins_manuals/design-
bulletins/current
All smoothness category changes shall be made prior to any construction activity.
Some examples of situations where smoothness categories could be changed are:
Example 1: A project has a 6-lane divided highway with curb and gutter on each side
along with a number of manholes and utility boxes and/or intersections with grade
breaks. However, the project’s middle lane is relatively free from any obstructions. This
project could have HRI Category IV assigned on the two outside lanes in each direction
and HRI Category I or II in the middle lanes. If the initial project category was all
Category I or II, then a change could be made.
Example 2: A project has a low volume road that is receiving a single thin asphalt
overlay (less than 1.5 inches). It was initially assigned HRI Cat I, II or III but because it
is a single thin lift it should have been HRI Category IV. This could be a case where a
change could be made.
Example 3: A project has a very short lead-in to an intersection and the project was
assigned HRI Category I or II. Because there is not a lot of lead-in, it could be a good
idea to change this project to a Category IV or remove the incentive/disincentive and
apply the localized roughness criteria only for the assigned smoothness category.
Example 4: A project has a short pavement section on each side of a bridge and was
originally assigned as Category I or II. Because there is only a short section of pavement,
it could be a good idea to change this project to a Category IV or remove the
incentive/disincentive and apply the localized roughness criteria only for the assigned
smoothness category.
100-26
General Provisions
Example 5: A project has a section of pavement with a tight curve where a vehicle must
slow down to below 15 MPH. This section of the pavement will be excluded from
incentive/disincentive payments and localized roughness and shall be tested with a 10-
foot straight edge.
Example 6: A project is a total of 3 miles. Two miles of the project have no curb and
gutter. One mile of the project has curb and gutter and a large number of manholes.
This project should receive two different smoothness categories for the two sections of
the project.
Exclusions
Smoothness specifications are in subsection 105.07 and 105.08 for asphalt and concrete
pavements respectively. Pavement smoothness incentive/disincentive payments are excluded
in some areas.
Shoulders with a width less than 12 feet are not subject to incentive and disincentive payments
or localized roughness, but shoulders with a width greater than 12 feet are to be profiled and
evaluated for localized roughness. Some of these wide shoulders will be future driving lanes
and will also be evaluated for incentive/disincentive.
When a project contains a roundabout, the roundabout is excluded from incentive/disincentive

payments. A roundabout is a turning lane and will be evaluated for localized roughness only if
the profiler can maintain a speed of over 15 MPH.
If there is not enough of a lead-in for the profiler to get up to speed to profile a bridge. This is
either because of a sharp curve before it or the extent of the project does not allow it, the
short lead-in is excluded.
Areas that cannot be tested with a high-speed profiler (HSP) and exclusions shall be tested with
a 10-foot straight edge.
Conditions for Profiling
Some conditions do not allow the profiler to collect data in an accurate or safe fashion. Some
of those conditions are:
If the ambient temperature is less than 34 degrees Fahrenheit, the profiler cannot be operated
because the electronics are outside of their operating parameters. If the surface of the
pavement is wet, or has some type of shining membrane, the profile data will be compromised
and cannot be performed. Examples of a shining membrane include fresh tack coats, magnesium
chloride, and some SMA (Stone Matrix Asphalt) pavement. Traffic should be allowed to travel
in these areas to remove the sheen.
When scheduling profiling, it is important to make sure that there are no other construction
activities taking place on the finished pavement. These activities include shouldering and
guardrail installation. The area to profile should be free from debris and all construction
activities at the time of the profile. Debris will increase the roughness results and penalize the
100-27
General Provisions
contractor. Construction activity can cause interruptions in profiling requiring additional time
to properly profile. This can increase the project’s traffic control cost.
The distance calibration site is required to be 1056 feet long with a lead-in and lead–out. The
lead-in/out shall be long enough to allow the profiler to get up to testing speed and safely stop.
The distance calibration site shall be in an area with a speed limit at least as fast as the testing
speed. For example, do not have a distance calibration site on a local road when results are
needed on the interstate.
Submission of Pavement Smoothness Data
Data collected by the contractor shall be submitted to the Concrete & Physical Properties Unit
immediately. The data can be submitted electronically through the CDOT network, the CDOT
FTP server, ProjectWise, or email.
Contact the Concrete and Physical Properties Unit at 303-398-6549 to determine the best
method for data submittal. Submitting the smoothness data promptly will allow CDOT to verify
the contractor’s test results if needed and allow prompt payment for incentive/disincentives.
The specification requires that smoothness test results be returned to the contractor within 10
calendar days after data collection.
Prior to accepting data from the contractor, verify that the equipment and operator are
currently certified. Data collected by uncertified operators or equipment is invalid and will
need to be recollected. If a project contains two significantly different speed limits, the project
could be done in two different profiles.
Corrective Action Requirements
All CDOT projects require an initial profile to be completed, evaluated by CDOT, and corrective
work to be completed. All corrective work must be completed, and each lane must be profiled
and evaluated again. If a project’s initial profile does not contain any corrective action areas,
a second profile is not required unless additional grinding is done for disincentive reduction or
elimination.
Localized roughness is based on the HSP data only. If necessary, a second profile can be
requested. For example, localized roughness is not based on feel.
The localized roughness report does not designate grind areas. It only designates areas in the
pavement where roughness exceeds the threshold. A plan shall be established to correct the
out of spec areas. Localized roughness corrective work may be required even when tenth mile
section corrective work is not required.
If additional help is needed, please contact your Regional Materials Engineer or the Concrete
and Physical Properties Unit at 303-398-6549.
100-28
General Provisions
105.8 RESERVED
105.9 COORDINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, SUPPLEMENTAL

SPECIFICATIONS, AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Subsection 105.09 of the Standard Specifications states that the Contract Plans, Standard
Specifications, Supplemental Specifications, and Special Provisions are essential parts of the
Contract and are intended to be complimentary. If a discrepancy is found in these documents,
the discrepancy should be resolved based on the order of preference presented in subsection
105.09 of the Standard Specifications.
105.10 COOPERATION BY CONTRACTOR

The Contractor is required to have a competent Superintendent, authorized to act on behalf of
the Contractor, who will be on the project at all times. The Contractor Superintendent must
be on the project when subcontractors are working, even if the Contractor is not performing
work with its own forces. A Superintendent who is not competent should be removed from the
project. The Superintendent is responsible for all subcontractors and suppliers and must
schedule and control their respective operations.
105.11 COOPERATION WITH UTILITIES

CDOT will attempt to have all utility adjustments coordinated as soon as practical and the
Contractor is expected to cooperate fully with the affected companies. No additional
compensation will be allowed by the Department for any delay or damage to, associated with,
or caused by utility appurtenances or adjustments that are shown in the Contract.
The Contractor must consider all delays noted in the Contract when submitting the bid. If the
utility installation takes longer than anticipated, it may qualify as a changed condition under
subsection 104.02 of the Standard Specifications. Unforeseen utilities or unplanned relocations
should also be handled as a changed condition. If such a situation develops, it is imperative
that good records be maintained. The project records must document the events leading to the
situation and the effect of the delay on the Contractor's operations. Nonetheless, the Project
Engineer should encourage the utility company to expedite its work and coordinate with the
Contractor to minimize the impact on the overall project schedule.
105.12 COOPERATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS

Subsection 105.12 of the Standard Specifications requires the Contractor to prosecute the work
required by the Contract without interfering with other contractors.
105.13 CONSTRUCTION STAKES, LINES, AND GRADES

Subsection 105.13 of the Standard Specifications prohibits the Contractor from beginning
construction work until adequate lines and grades have been established. A Pre-survey
100-29
General Provisions
Conference will be held before the survey is performed (see Section 120.13.6). If the survey
work is subcontracted, the subcontractor must first be approved using Form 205 – Sublet Permit
Application. Before construction, the Project Engineer should ensure that the construction
stakes have been located in accordance with Section 625 of the Standard Specifications.
105.14 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF THE PROJECT ENGINEER

105.14.1 Authority of Project Engineers
The Project Engineer has immediate charge of the administrative and engineering details of
the Contract and has the authority to exercise all duties and responsibilities of the Engineer,
as referenced in the Contract, except those specifically retained by the Chief Engineer. The
Project Engineer, as the Chief Engineer’s representative, is authorized to sign change orders
and is responsible for decisions on Contractor claims for additional compensation and extension
of contract time that are filed pursuant to subsection 105.22 of the Standard Specifications.
Note that only CDOT Project Engineers (not consultant or other), by law, can obligate funds or
authorize payments on CDOT Contracts.
105.14.2 Duties of the Project Engineer
Specific responsibilities include construction of the project in accordance with the plans;
enforcement of governing specifications and special provisions; control of inspection; proper
documentation; and preparation of change orders. By law, consultant or entity Project
Engineers perform the same functions as CDOT Project Engineers but cannot obligate funds or
authorize payment on behalf of CDOT. As the Department's representative, the Project Engineer
has frequent personal contacts with the Contractor, property owners, municipal officials,
utilities, and the traveling public; thus, personal conduct should be a credit to both the
individual and CDOT.
The Project Engineer’s duties regarding construction Contracts include:
1. Administer the Contract according to established CDOT Policies and Procedures,

including those described in this manual.
2. Ensure that all Work and Materials used on the Project, and applicable Project
documentation conform to Contract requirements and established CDOT Policies and
practices. Document and bring to the attention of the Resident Engineer items that do
not meet the Contract or accepted CDOT guidelines.
The Contractor shall make all requests in writing and the Project Engineer shall respond
to those requests as directed by the RE. Responses to Contractor requests shall be in
writing on a CDOT Form 105 and shall be documented in the daily diary. Instructions and
directions provided to the Contractor shall be documented on a CDOT Form 105 and in
the daily diary.
3. Manage the Project within the current approved construction budget authorization, or
approved budget changes.
100-30
General Provisions
4. Ensure Contract Time is managed in a way that benefits the Project.
5. Ensure timely completion of the Project based on the original project schedule and
approved schedule revisions.
6. Ensure the Work is inspected daily and as required to ensure reasonable conformance
to the Contract.
7. Ensure the Project records and other documentation are proper and current.
8. Ensure DBE, OJT, and other requirements are fulfilled.
9. Ensure the Contractor is paid timely for all Contract items that are satisfactorily
completed in accordance with the Contract.
The Consultant Project Engineer’s duties regarding construction Contracts include:
1. Administer the Contract according to established CDOT Policies and Procedures, including
those described in this manual.
2. Ensure that all Work and Materials used on the Project, and applicable Project
documentation conform to Contract requirements and established CDOT Policies and
practices. Prior to the work taking place the Consultant Project Engineer and Consultant
Professional Engineer shall obtain written approval from the RE or CDOT Engineer of
Record for:
3. All price adjustments.
4. Documentation that does not meet the Contract or accepted CDOT guidelines.
The Contractor shall make all requests in writing and the Consultant Project Engineer
shall respond to those requests as directed by the RE. Responses to Contractor requests
shall be in writing on a CDOT Form 105 and shall be documented in the daily diary.
Instructions and directions provided to the Contractor shall be documented on a CDOT
Form 105 and in the daily diary.
5. Manage the Project within the current approved construction budget authorization, or
approved budget changes.
6. Ensure Contract Time is managed in in a way that benefits the Project.
7. Ensure timely completion of the Project based on the original project schedule and
approved schedule revisions.
8. Ensure the Work is inspected daily and as required to ensure reasonable conformance to
the Contract.
9. Ensure the Project records and other documentation are proper and current.
10. Ensure DBE, OJT, and other requirements are fulfilled.
100-31
General Provisions
11. Ensure the Contractor is paid timely for all Contract items that are satisfactorily
completed in accordance with the Contract.
105.14.3 Problem Resolution
The Project Engineer should attempt to resolve quality concerns with the Contractor
Superintendent. If the concern is not resolved, the Project Engineer should discuss the concern
with the Resident Engineer and consider suspending work on the affected item. Additional
guidance may be obtained from the Region Materials Engineer, Region Program Engineer,
Materials and Geotechnical Services Branch, and Area Engineer. Address problems immediately.
Do not wait until a substantial portion of the item is completed before resolving the problem
or seeking advice. If work is suspended, do not permit work to resume until the problem has
been corrected.
105.14.4 Quality of Workmanship
The Project Engineer must continually assess the quality of workmanship. The traveling public
perceives quality primarily in terms of roadway durability, rideability, and appearance. It is
therefore essential that the Project Engineer assertively and effectively partners with the
Contractor and administers the Contract to encourage overall quality improvements.
The following example illustrates the impact of poor workmanship: The Contractor used high
quality, high-performance HMA material and excellent laydown and compaction procedures. In
addition, the Contractor was extremely quality conscious and received the maximum quality
incentive payment. However, the Region received several complaints from the public regarding
crooked pavement markings, spilled pavement-marking paint, and splashed asphalt emulsion
on curbs and median barriers, and unsightly and uneven guardrail. In addition, complaints were
received regarding a rough riding surface. Upon investigation, the Contractor had apparently
dumped shouldering material on the surface and bladed it off with a grader. The grader had
damaged the new pavement surface and created a dangerously low shoulder. Although material
and density met specified requirements, the overall quality of workmanship with respect to
appearance and rideability was highly unacceptable.
105.14.5 Assessing Acceptability of Work
In assessing quality and acceptability, consider the following questions during construction:
1. Will CDOT customers (i.e., Colorado taxpayers, traveling public) be satisfied?
2. Would I accept this work if I owned the facility?
3. Would I pay for this work out of my own pocket?
If any of these questions have a negative response, the Project Engineer should immediately
resolve the problem as discussed in Section 105.14.3.
100-32
General Provisions
105.15 DUTIES OF THE PROJECT INSPECTOR

CDOT Project Inspectors are authorized to inspect all work and materials furnished by the
Contractor. Such inspections may extend to all or any part of the work and to the preparation,
fabrication, and manufacture of materials to be incorporated in the work. Project Inspectors
are not authorized to alter, waive, or issue instructions contrary to the provisions of the
Contract nor act on behalf of the Contractor, such as a foreman.
105.16 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF WORK

The Project Engineer is the direct representative of the Chief Engineer in all matters related
to the Contract. Project Inspectors and Material Testers are directly responsible to the Project
Engineer.
Project Inspectors and Material Testers should consider the following:
1. Safety Considerations. Review the CDOT Safety Manual and the Contractor’s Safety Policy
to ensure that all inspection activities will be in compliance. Do not take unreasonable
risks when performing your duties. Report any unsafe practices immediately to the
Project Engineer.
2. Authority and Responsibilities. Discuss your authority and responsibility with the Project
Engineer who has day-to-day project responsibility. Know your responsibilities and
authority before construction begins.
3. Contract Documents. Become thoroughly familiar with the Contract documents (e.g.,
Contract Plans, Standard Specifications, and Special Provisions). Become familiar with
available reference materials and understand their applicability.
4. Sampling and Testing. Review sampling and testing requirements and the certifications
that must accompany materials upon delivery. See the CDOT Field Materials Manual for
additional information.
5. Documentation. Review the format and required content for pay documentation, CDOT
forms, and daily inspection diaries.
6. Maintenance of Traffic. Where traffic is maintained during construction, review the

approved Method of Handling Traffic and the required type, number, and arrangement
of traffic control devices.
105.17 Changes. Advise the Project Engineer of any changes, corrections, delays, rejections, or
deviations from the Contract Plans and Specifications. REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE WORK
AND UNAUTHORIZED WORK
Work that does not conform to specified requirements will be removed and replaced in an
acceptable manner at the Contractor's expense. The project records will contain written
documentation of the reason for the removal and replacement.
100-33
General Provisions
105.18 LOAD RESTRICTIONS

During construction, the Contractor’s haul trucks and construction equipment must conform to
the load restrictions and vehicle dimensions shown in Appendix D and
https://sites.google.com/state.co.us/cotriporgfreight/helpful-information/legal-weights-
dimensions. These restrictions apply to all Colorado public roads and bridges. Project personnel
must continually monitor compliance with subsection 105.18 of the Standard Specifications. In
general, project personnel must not allow overweight construction vehicles to traverse
Colorado roads and bridges. Overweight vehicles shall not be permitted on newly constructed
bridges or pavement or on other pavement or existing elements of the project that will not be
removed and replaced. Weight limits apply to bridges and pavements as soon as they are
constructed. Occasionally, however, the Contractor will need to move extremely heavy
equipment, such as a large crane, across a bridge or culvert. In such cases, contact the Staff
Bridge Services Branch for guidance before the equipment is moved.
105.19 MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION

Subsection 105.19 of the Standard Specifications governs the Contractor’s responsibilities for
maintenance during construction, which must be continuous and effective. The Contractor will
be held responsible for the maintenance and repair of all Contract items, except as noted in
Section 107.17. CDOT project personnel should monitor and require correction of any condition
that threatens or inconveniences the traveling public (see Section 104.4).
105.20 FAILURE TO MAINTAIN ROADWAY OR STRUCTURE

If the Project Engineer notifies the Contractor of a maintenance problem and the Contractor
does not take action, subsection 105.20 of the Standard Specifications allows the Project
Engineer to have the problem fixed and deducted from the money due the Contractor. See
Section 107.17 of this Manual for additional information.
105.21 ACCEPTANCE
105.21.1 Partial Acceptance
The partial acceptance of a specific phase will be allowed if included in the original Contract.
Partial acceptance for other occurrences must be in accordance with subsections 105.21,
107.16 and 107.17 of the Standard Specifications. Refer to the Project Special Provisions when
the project includes a landscape maintenance period.
105.21.2 Final Acceptance
The Project Engineer will perform a final inspection, and the Contractor shall correct any
unacceptable work before written final acceptance from CDOT is issued. See Section 120.3.2
for guidance on preparing the Final Acceptance Letter.
100-34
General Provisions
105.21.3 Form 1212 and SAP Workflow
1. Once a project is accepted in construction as complete, by either CDOT (Form 1212) or

the Local Agency (Form 1212 LA), the Form workflow should be started in SAP. Starting
the Form workflow can be done in one of two ways, depending on the type of project.
a. For CDOT administered projects in SiteManager®, the Form 1212 workflow is

triggered automatically when the Project Acceptance Date is populated within
SiteManager®. The workflow will be initiated in SAP the day after the acceptance
date is entered. This date is automatically brought over to the SAP system and
populates the same field in the Project Manager Custom Tab in transaction CJ20N.
Please refer to the portion of the SAP Project Manager tab screen shot below:
This date will be automatically populated through SiteManager®. It can only be

populated through this method for CDOT Administered construction projects.
Note the box is grayed out or blue in color, which means that the user cannot
complete it.
b. Local Agency Projects, Non-Engineering Capital Projects, and Non-advertised side

of combo projects: The Form 1212 LA workflow is triggered when the assigned
Project Manager populates the Final Acceptance Date within the Project Manager
Custom Tab in the SAP transaction CJ20N. The Form 1212LA workflow can also be
triggered when the Project Manager populates the CDOT Final Acceptance Date
in ZJ40LA. These project types do not manage construction activities through
SiteManager® and the acceptance date must be entered manually. Please refer
to the portion of the SAP Project Manager tab screen shot below:
CJ20N:
OR
ZJ40LA:
For local agency and non-engineering capital projects, Project Managers must
manually populate the date in order to start the SAP Form 1212 LA workflow.
Note the user can change the fields in white.
The Contract Award Amount in ZJ40LA must be entered before triggering the
workflow in order to populate the field on the Form 1212 LA.
ZJ40LA:
2. Once the Form 1212 or Form 1212 LA workflow has been started, a Form 1212 / Form
1212 LA workflow item and outlook email message will be sent to all Resident Engineers
within the project’s region. The Resident Engineer managing the project should open this
100-35
General Provisions
workflow through transaction SBWP to save the workflow or to complete the Form. Please
refer to the screen shot below:
3. Upon opening the workflow message, the Form for the project will be ready for
modification.
a. The top section of the Form 1212 has two fields that need to be completed by the
Resident Engineer (Contractor’s Name; Inspection Date). The top section of the
Form 1212 LA has two additional fields that need to be completed by the Resident
Engineer (Percent Time Elapsed; Original Contract Time). All other fields will be
automatically populated using existing information within SAP. The Federal
Oversight radio button is automatically selected based on the project information
in SAP, but can be changed if necessary.
Please refer to the screen shot below:
100-36
General Provisions
Final Acceptance for Local Agency Projects: FORM 1212 LA
b. The bottom section of the form is the checklist of activities that should be
complete as part of project acceptance. All activities must be evaluated before
submitting the form.
Form 1212: The Resident Engineer can select whether or not the project included
work on bridges or culverts with a span (or diameter) >=4’, tunnel, walls over
4’high, traffic signal structure and/or overhead sign structure . If one of the items
listed above is included in the project, the Resident Engineer must evaluate the
following checkboxes before submitting the form:
i. Staff Bridge or the Engineer of Record has conducted a final inspection

(walk-through) of all structures and determined the work is in reasonably
close conformity with the plans and specifications, and
ii. Bridge/Culvert>20’ long or Tunnel: The CDOT Bridge & Structure

Inspection and the Asset Management Engineer has been contacted for
required NBIS/NTIS inspections.
Please refer to the screenshot below:
100-37
General Provisions
Form 1212 LA: The Resident Engineer can select whether or not the project
included work on bridges or culverts with a span (or diameter) >=4’, tunnel, walls
over 4’high, traffic signal structure and/or overhead sign structure. If one of the
items listed above is included in the project, the Resident Engineer must evaluate
the following checkboxes before submitting the form:
i. All Structures: The Local Agency’s Licensed Engineer in Responsible

Charge of Construction (EIRC) has conducted a final inspection (walk-
through) of all structures and determined the work is in reasonably close
conformity with the plans and specifications, and
ii. Bridge/Culvert>20’ long or Tunnel: The CDOT Bridge & Structure

Inspection and the Asset Management Engineer has been contacted for
required NBIS/NTIS inspections.
Please refer to the screen shot below:
100-38
General Provisions
c. The Resident Engineer and date fields at the bottom of the form are automatically
populated with the user initiating the workflow and the current date. These can
be changed if needed.
d. Click the “Submit” button to complete the Form. You will then be prompted to
check the green checkmark.
e. If the Resident Engineer is not ready to complete the Form 1212 or Form 1212 LA
when he receives the workflow, then the workflow should be reserved with that
Resident Engineer. Open the workflow item; then close it without completing it.
It will show that this workflow is only in that Resident Engineer’s SAP business
workplace. See screen shot below:
f. The workflows only in the Resident Engineer’s workplace show a blue and white
box under status. This is referred to as “reserving the workflow item.”
g. The workflows in all the Region’s Resident Engineers' workplaces show a white
only box.
h. The Resident Engineer can come back to this reserved Form 1212 or Form
1212 LA workflow when he is ready to complete it.
100-39
General Provisions
i. If you want to unreserve a Form 1212 or Form 1212 LA workflow and put it back
in all the Region’s workplaces, highlight the workflow and then press the
submit button.
After the submit button is hit, the workflow is automatically completed and an
email message is sent to all Resident Engineers indicating that the Form 1212 or
Form 1212 LA is complete. The email will include a pdf copy of the completed
form. The Resident Engineer should print the pdf copy, sign it and send the form
with other project closure paperwork to the Region Finals Administrator.
For projects that do not require the Form 1212 or Form 1212 LA to be completed,
the workflow can be bypassed and the business office can start project closure
activities. These types of projects include design-only projects, property
projects, DTD projects, maintenance projects, withdrawn projects, or any other
projects that do not have a Construction phase.
j. For these projects, the Business Manager or designee can mark the Form 1212 /
Form 1212 LA status in CJ20N for the project and save the project. Once this
status is set, the business office can set the TECO status and begin project closure
activities and the Form 950 workflow. Please refer to the screen shots below:
Hit the blue “i” button at the top level of the project. Then the following screen
will appear.
What do I do if I lost the Form 1212 or Form 1212 LA workflow?
There is now a workflow report available that will allow anyone to see where any workflow is
located. It may be in another RE’s SAP workplace and this report will indicate the location. The
report is located in the Portal under the Report tab, then under Project Systems. If help is
needed with the report, contact your region Super User or the SAP Project Systems support
team.
100-40
General Provisions
What do I do if I want to run the Form 1212 or Form 1212 LA workflow again?
There is no way in the system to easily re-run a Form 1212 / Form 1212 LA workflow that has
already been completed. If the Form 1212 / Form 1212 LA that was created is needed or if the
workflow needs to be restarted, the SAP Project systems support team will need to be
contacted.
Please contact the SAP Project Systems Business process experts.
105.22 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

105.22.1 General
Contract adjustments and dispute resolutions will be:
1. based on Contract documents and factual information;
2. objective and impartial (i.e., unaffected by individual personalities); and
3. fair and reasonable.
The dispute and claim resolution processes are business processes that are sometimes necessary
to resolve differences between CDOT and Contractors. The intent of the processes is to resolve
issues early, efficiently, and as close to the project level as possible. In the event of a dispute,
the Project Engineer will contact the Area Engineer. Refer to Appendix D for the Disputes and
Claims Flow Chart (Figure 105-1).
105.22.1.1 Dispute and Claims Evaluations
Adjustments or resolutions must be based on the Contract documents and factual information.
Doing otherwise encourages frivolous disputes and claims that are not in the best interest of
the Department. All CDOT project personnel must maintain accurate and timely records
throughout the project. For Administrative, settlements see Section 120.7.2 of this Manual.
105.22.1.2 Dispute and Claim Status Report
The Construction Engineering Services Branch is responsible for preparing and forwarding a
quarterly Dispute and Claims Status Report to the Chief Engineer. Therefore, it is essential that
Project Engineers monitor the status of each dispute or claim on their respective projects. To
assist with this task, Project Engineers shall use the Form 1318, Dispute and Claim Status Report
Form (see Appendix B), which is available from the Forms Catalog website or in electronic
format from the Construction Engineering Services Branch. Submit the form to your Area
Engineer whenever the status of a dispute or claim changes. The Dispute and Claim Status
Report Form presents a list of key events that are time sensitive in processing disputes and
claims.
100-41
General Provisions
105.22.1.3 FHWA Involvement
Title 23 Code of Federal Regulations 635.124 defines the extent to which Federal-Aid highway
funds may be used to participate in awards and settlements of construction contract disputes
and claims brought by contractors against state highway agencies. The Project Engineer will
provide the FHWA Operations Engineer with written notification upon receipt of the formal
notification of intent to file a dispute from the Contractor when the dispute meets the following
requirements:
1. all disputes exceeding $250,000 on Federal-Aid projects; and
2. all disputes on full oversight projects.
The written notification shall be followed up with copies of all dispute information. Upon
notification, the FHWA Operations Engineer will determine the appropriate level of FHWA
involvement. Note that it is not necessary to involve the FHWA Operations Engineer on State-
funded projects where there is no FHWA involvement.
105.22.2 Dispute Processing Procedures
105.22.2.1 Dispute Notification
The contract requires that disputes must be based on the requirements of the Contract
documents (e.g., Contract Plans, Standard Specifications, and Special Provisions). Upon failure
of the Parties to resolve an issue through negotiations and the Contractor elects to escalate the
dispute, the Contractor must provide the Project Engineer with immediate written notice of
dispute. Upon receipt of this notice, the Project Engineer should perform the following:
1. Acknowledge Receipt. Upon notification, the Engineer should respond with a letter that
includes the following sample language. “CDOT is in receipt of your notice of dispute in
regard to______________. Your Request for Equitable Adjustment (REA) is due 15 days
from the date of your notice of dispute letter, dated ______.”
2. Alert AE. Notify your Area Engineer of the Project Engineer’s receipt of a “notice of
dispute.”
3. Contract Specifications. Review the requirements of subsection 105.22 of the contract.

Pay particular attention to specified time requirements.
4. Seek Guidance. Upon notification of a dispute, the Project Engineer will seek advice and
concurrence from the Resident Engineer and the Region Program Engineer. In addition,
the Project Engineer will contact and discuss each dispute with the Area Engineer before
rendering a decision.
5. Gather Supplemental Data. Document all pertinent details as soon as practical after
receiving notification, and immediately implement procedures to document the disputed
work completely and accurately. Such records may include:
100-42
General Provisions
a. Force Account Records. Force account records of the disputed work must be on
Form 10 – Inspector’s Report for Force Account Work. For information on Force
Account, see Section 109.4 and Appendix B of this Manual.
b. Conversations. Accurately document conversations, agreements, and actions

taken by the Contractor, Project Engineer, or other CDOT personnel regarding the
disputed work on CDOT Form 103, Daily Diary.
Do not editorialize. Be factual and cite the Contract requirements.
c. Photographs/Videotape. Where appropriate, take photographs and videotape of

the disputed work. Follow the steps in Section 120.1.3.6. Be careful what is stated
near audio microphones during videotaping.
105.22.2.2 Review of REA Package
The Project Engineer is responsible for reviewing the Contractor’s REA package.
The review must be complete and thorough. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Check REA Package. Disputes will not be considered unless the Contractor has first
complied with the resolution processes as specified in subsections 104.02, 106.05 and
108.08. Compare the REA package to the Contract documents (e.g., Contract Plans,
Standard Specifications, and Special Provisions) and the CDOT project records to ensure
there exists a contractual and factual basis for the dispute. The contractor shall provide
the estimated dollar cost of the dispute with supporting documentation, and an analysis
of the progress schedule showing the schedule change or disruption. The package needs
to be specific in order for CDOT to evaluate the elements being disputed, so that other
elements are not drawn into the dispute. The Contractor is allowed to supplement the
REA as additional information becomes available.
2. Request Additional Information. If it is determined that additional information or

clarification is required from the Contractor to review the REA package, notify the
Contractor in writing clearly stating the information required, why the information is
required, and a reasonable response date. Acknowledge receipt of the information in
writing. The request for additional information letter should give the Contractor 10 days
to provide missing information. Only the information submitted as part of the REA or
supplemental REA will be considered in the decision for merit.
3. Seek Guidance. Seek advice and concurrence from the Resident Engineer and the Region
Program Engineer. In addition, the Project Engineer will contact and discuss each dispute
with the Area Engineer before rendering a decision. If the dispute involves legal issues
or legal questions, the Area Engineer, after discussing the issue with the Resident
Engineer, will consult the Attorney General for guidance.
4. Request Audit. An audit may be performed for any dispute. The audit will evaluate the
amount of the Contractor’s damages but will not make judgment on merit or quantum.
In certain cases, there are damages that are the fault of both Parties and a determination
of value to be assigned to each Party will have to be negotiated. If the decision is made
to perform an audit, the Project Engineer will request the audit as soon as practical after
100-43
General Provisions
receiving the complete REA or dispute. The Project Engineer will contact the Area
Engineer to assist in the determination of the scope of the audit.
5. Use of Consultants. If the Project Engineer feels additional help with the dispute is
warranted, he will consult with his Resident Engineer for approval to use a consultant.
Complex or multiple delay issues are difficult to analyze, and such analyses are a complex
and time-consuming task that may be more effectively performed by a consultant.
Consultants can help determine the impacts of delays, the validity from a contractual
and legal standpoint, and the compensation due, if any. A thorough analysis and a fair
assessment of entitlement issues can sometimes help resolve the dispute at an early
stage. The Construction Engineering Services Branch has contracts in place to assist
projects with disputes and claims. Contact the Area Engineer for additional information.
105.22.2.3 Project Engineer Decision
The Project Engineer will follow the requirements of subsection 105.22(c) of the Contract and
render a decision within the timeframes specified. This determination will include a summary
of the relevant facts, Contract provisions supporting the determination, and an evaluation of
all scheduling issues that may be involved. The determination may include both merit and
quantum, but quantum may be determined separately. Merit may be granted, but the quantum
may continue to be disputed and follow the dispute resolution process through the Dispute
Review Board, or through the claim process.
105.22.2.4 Resident Engineer Review
If the Contractor rejects the Project Engineer decision of merit or quantum, the Resident
Engineer (RE) will follow the requirements of subsection 105.22(d) of the Contract. If the
meetings with the RE do not result in a resolution or the participants mutually agree that they
have reached an impasse, the dispute shall be presented to the Dispute Review Board in
accordance with subsection 105.23 of the Contract.
105.23 DISPUTE REVIEW BOARD

The Project Engineer will initiate the Dispute Review Board (DRB) process in accordance with
subsection 105.23(a) of the Contract when a dispute has not been resolved. Select DRB members
based upon their experience, knowledge relevant to the project and their availability. When
contacting prospective DRB members, let them know who the project participants (contractor,
subcontractors, project personnel, etc.) are so that a conflict-of-interest situation can be
avoided.
Once DRB members have been selected, notify the Area Engineer so the AE can obtain
concurrence from the Attorney General. Upon approval of DRB members, submit the Third-
Party Agreement to the Area Engineer for signature by the Chief Engineer.
The Pre-Hearing submittal shall include a pre-hearing position paper containing the information
required in subsection 105.23(e) of the Contract. A joint statement describing the dispute is
part of the position paper. If the parties are unable to agree on the wording, see the
specification for suggested wording of this document. Both parties need to be able to agree
100-44
General Provisions
upon what is being disputed. This is a fundamental part of the dispute process. The DRB shall
hear only those disputes identified in the written request for the DRB and shall review only the
information contained in the pre-hearing submittals. The pre-hearing submittal shall only
contain information that was shared and discussed with both parties during the Project and
Resident Engineer review meetings. Therefore, consider including the following documents in
the pre-hearing submittal:
1. Contract Plans,
2. Standard Specifications,
3. Special Provisions,
4. Standard Plans,
5. shop drawings,
6. reports from consultants,
7. reports from auditors,
8. schedules and schedule updates,
9. schedule analysis,
10. Schedule narratives,
11. project diaries,
12. correspondence,
13. engineering memos,
14. inspection reports,
15. time counts, and
16. pay estimates.
If the parties are unable to resolve the dispute after the DRB process, the contractor may
escalate the dispute to a claim.
105.24 CLAIMS FOR UNRESOLVED DISPUTES

When the dispute is not resolved at the Resident Engineer level, the Project Engineer will
continue to be involved with the process by maintaining the claim record and ensuring the
specification is followed.
100-45
General Provisions
105.24.1 Official Claim Record
The official claim record consists of CDOT’s documents and the Contractor’s claim package
along with any additional documentation developed during the claim process.
Development of Claim Record
1. Contractor submits 5 copies of the Contractor claim package to RTD
2. Project Engineer prepares 5 copies of the CDOT claim package
3. Project Engineer is responsible for getting all the packages together and creating 5 Claim
Records
4. The Project Engineer is responsible for maintaining these 5 records while the RTD reviews
the Claim. This includes adding:
a. any correspondence related to the claim between the Contractor and RTD,
b. minutes or notes from the RTD hearing,
c. any additional information provided to render a decision, and
d. the RTD Decision letter
e. This can be done by providing electronic copies of these documents to the person
with a copy of the claim record.
5. When the RTD issues a written Decision, a copy of the Record is returned to the
Contractor.
6. If the claim is appealed to the Chief Engineer, the Area Engineer will be responsible for
maintaining the four remaining copies of the claim record. The Area Engineer will add
the following documents to the claim records:
a. the Contractors appeal to the Chief,
b. any correspondence related to the claim between the Contractor and the Chief,
c. minutes or notes from the Chief Engineer hearing,
d. any additional information provided to render a decision, and
e. the Chief Engineer’s Decision letter.
7. To assist with review of the Claim Package, the Project Engineer and/or the Area
Engineer may prepare a summary of the claim record for the RTD and Chief’s review of
the claim. Oftentimes a Contractor will submit large volumes as the claim package; this
summary is intended to help the RTD and Chief to understand the claim.
100-46
General Provisions
Claim Record Distribution
Record RTD Level Chief Level

Copy
1 Contractor Contractor
2 RTD RTD (Region Use)
3 Project Engineer or RE Area Engineer
4 Unassigned Chief
5 Unassigned Attorney General (if necessary)
Figure 100 - 2
Consider the documents listed in subsection 105.23 of this Manual when preparing the claim
record.
Once the claim record has been assembled by the Project Engineer, the submission of additional
information, other than subsequent levels of review, will not be permitted.
105.24.2 RTD Decision.
The RTD will render a written decision within 60 days after receipt of the official claim package
or receipt of the audit, whichever is later.
105.24.3 Chief Engineer Decision.
The Contractor may appeal the RTD decision within 30 days to the Chief Engineer. Within 15
days of the appeal, either party may submit a written request for a hearing with the Chief
Engineer. The Chief Engineer will render a written decision within 60 days after receipt of the
official claim package and will only consider information contained in the claim package.
105.24.4 De Novo Litigation or Merit Binding Arbitration.
If the Contractor rejects the Chief Engineer’s decision, the Contractor may initiate de novo
litigation or merit binding arbitration depending on the option selected by the Contractor on
Form 1378 submitted at the Preconstruction Conference.
100-47
General Provisions
SECTION 106 CONTROL OF MATERIAL

106.1 SOURCE OF SUPPLY AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor is required to not use or enter on any private property until the Contractor has
furnished the Project Engineer with a copy of the original signed agreement between the
Contractor and the property owner. Private property includes, but is not limited to, dumps,
storage yards, haul roads, and plant sites. The Project Engineer will retain the copy in the
project records and note in the project diary that it was received.
106.2 RESERVED
106.3 SAMPLES, TESTS, CITED SPECIFICATIONS

Obtaining timely turnaround of test results is vital to the successful construction of a project.
This is important for all of the testing whether it is the Contractor conducting the tests for
Process Control, or the State conducting the tests for Quality Assurance. Refer to the CDOT
Field Materials Manual for additional guidance.
106.4 QUALIFICATION OF TESTING PERSONNEL AND

LABORATORIES
Personnel performing any type of testing on a project shall be certified in accordance with the
CDOT Field Materials Manual.
106.5 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF HMA

All HMA, Item 403, except HMA (Patching) and temporary pavement shall be tested in
accordance with the specifications and the CDOT Field Materials Manual.
106.6 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

PAVING
All Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Item 412, shall be tested in accordance with the
specifications and the CDOT Field Materials Manual.
106.7 – 106.10 RESERVED
106.11 BUY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS

With the exception below, the Contractor shall provide steel and iron products for permanently
incorporated elements, for which all manufacturing processes have occurred in the United
States.
100-48
General Provisions
For definitions of steel and iron, products refer to the Special Notice to Contractors in the Field
Materials Manual.
This requirement applies to all steel and iron products, including donated materials, which are
permanently incorporated into the project.
Contractor shall maintain a document summarizing date and quantity of all steel and iron
material delivered to the project. Document shall show pay item, quantity of material delivered
to the project, along with quantity of material installed by cutoff date for monthly progress
payment. Summary shall also reconcile pay item quantities to the submitted Buy America
Certifications. The Contractor shall also maintain documentation of project delivered cost of
all foreign steel or iron permanently incorporated into the project. Both documents shall be
submitted to the Engineer within five days of the cutoff date for monthly progress payment. A
monthly summary shall be submitted even if no steel or iron products are incorporated into the
project during the month. The summary document does not relieve the Contractor of providing
necessary Buy America Certifications of steel and or iron prior to permanent incorporation into
the project.
Bid items that include steel and iron products will not be paid for in a monthly pay estimate
until the Contractor complies with the Buy America specification.
Contractor shall provide documentation of the project delivered cost of all foreign steel or iron
permanently incorporated into the project, if any.
The practice of making items non-participating to circumvent the Buy America provisions is
prohibited.
The Contractor may use a minimal amount of foreign steel. The total cost of all such foreign
steel, which includes the cost of delivering the steel to the project, shall not exceed one-tenth
of one percent of the total Contract cost or $2,500, whichever is greater.
There is no clear-cut rule for resolving an after-the-fact discovery of an inadvertent

incorporation of an excess amount of foreign materials into a project. Each situation must be
resolved on a case-by-case basis and approved by the FHWA.
All Buy America waiver requests must be submitted to the FHWA Office of Program
Administration for consideration. The waiver request will be posted on the internet for public
comment for 15 days before FHWA action is taken. They will be posted at “Notice of Buy
America Waiver Request.”
http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/construction/contracts/waivers.cfm
Waiver requests that are based on an adverse impact to a contractor’s construction schedule
will not be accepted when domestic material is available.
The Contractor shall maintain a document summarizing the date and quantity of all steel and
iron material delivered to the project. The document shall show the pay item, quantity of
material delivered to the project, along with the quantity of material installed by the cutoff
100-49
General Provisions
date for the monthly progress payment. The summary shall also reconcile the pay item
quantities to the submitted Buy America certifications. The Contractor shall also maintain
documentation of the project delivered cost of all foreign steel or iron permanently
incorporated into the project, if any. A summary of both sets of documentation shall be
submitted to the Engineer within five days of the cutoff date for monthly progress payment. A
monthly summary shall be required even if no steel or iron products are incorporated into the
project during the month. Summary document does not alleviate the requirement to provide
the necessary Buy America Certifications of steel and or iron prior to permanent incorporation
into the project.
Glass Beads for Pavement Marking. All post-consumer and industrial glass beads for pavement
marking shall have been manufactured from North American glass waste streams in the United
States of America. Bead manufacturer shall submit a COC in accordance with subsection 106.12
confirming that North American glass waste streams were used in the manufacture of the glass
beads.
106.12 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE

The Project Engineer must be in receipt of all original material certifications with an original
signature before payment is made for the Contract item. For details and the language required
on the Certificate of Compliance see subsection 106.12 of the Standard Specifications and
Standard Special Provision, Revision of Section 106 - Certificates of Compliance and Certified
Test Reports.
106.13 CERTIFIED TEST REPORT

The Project Engineer must be in receipt of all original material Certified Test Reports, with an
original signature, before payment is made for the Contract item. For details and the language
required on the Certified Test Report, see subsection 106.13 of the Standard Specifications and
Standard Special Provision, Revision of Section 106 - Certificates of Compliance and Certified
Test Reports.
100-50
General Provisions
SECTION 107 LEGAL RELATIONS AND

RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC
Section 107 of the Standard Specifications requires that all laws and regulations including those
of Federal, State, and local jurisdictions, be observed by both Contractor and CDOT personnel.
107.1 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED

By reference, subsection 107.01 of the Standard Specifications incorporates legal statutes and
requirements of the Davis-Bacon Act, Equal Employment Opportunity, Occupational Safety and
Health Administration, Mine Safety and Health Administration, and other legal regulations
related to CDOT construction contracts.
107.1.1 Davis-Bacon Act
The United States Department of Labor and the Federal Highway Administration delegate to
the Department the responsibility for enforcing the Davis-Bacon Act, the Contract Work Hours
and Safety Standards Act, and the Copeland Anti-Kickback Act. The provisions of these acts
respectively govern payment of minimum wage, payment of overtime wage, and prevention of
Contractor kickbacks. The Davis-Bacon Act specifically governs payment of minimum wage and
applies to all Federal-Aid highway construction contracts and subcontracts exceeding $2,000,
except those for local roads and rural minor collectors. Senate Bill 19-196 requires the
Department of Transportation to apply the requirements of the federal “Davis-Bacon Act”
to all projects advertised on or after July 1, 2021 regardless of project size or funding type
(this includes CDOT projects that are fully state-funded). Local Agency state-funded
projects are excluded from this requirement.
107.1.1.1 FHWA Form 1273
The FHWA Form 1273 – Required Contract Provisions – Federal-Aid Construction Contracts must
be incorporated directly into Federal-Aid Contracts, including subcontracts and lower tier
subcontracts. The applicable requirements of Form FHWA-1273 are incorporated by reference
for work done under any purchase order, rental agreement or agreement for other services.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring compliance of all subcontracting and supplying
entities. The Project Engineer or Region Civil Rights Office must discuss these requirements
with the Contractor and subcontracting entities at the Preconstruction Conference.
107.1.1.2 Weekly Payrolls
Weekly payrolls are required from all Contractors and subcontractors.
Contractor and all tiers of subcontractors: Submission of weekly payrolls (at least every seven
days) is required.
100-51
General Provisions
Suppliers: When the criteria outlined in Specification 106.01 is met, submission of weekly
payrolls (at least every seven days) is required.
Prime Approver: Prime Contractor reviews and approves or rejects all payrolls submitted by
their own company as well as all subcontractors and applicable suppliers.
CDOT Project Engineer or designee: Accepts or rejects all submitted payrolls
Using the payroll review checklist
(https://www.codot.gov/business/civilrights/compliance/assets/lcptracker-payroll-review-
checklist_05-21.pdf), the CDOT Project Engineer or designee will review 100% of the first four
performing payroll submissions of the Contractor, each subcontractor, and each Supplier (if
required to be submitted). If the CDOT Project Engineer or designee has determined that the
firm has demonstrated compliance in payroll submissions, the individual may determine to
reduce reviews to 10% of each firm’s payrolls submitted thereafter. If the firm does not
demonstrate compliance, the individual may determine to increase the percentage of reviews.
All submitted payrolls must be accepted by the CDOT Project Engineer or designee in the
LCPtracker system within 14 days of submission from the Prime Approver.
107.1.2 Processing Requests for CDOT Records
Requests for access to CDOT public records must be forwarded to the Department in writing
(see CDOT Procedural Directive 51.2 – Public Inspection of Department Records). The Colorado
Open Records Act requires CDOT to respond to inquiries for information within three days of
the written request.
107.1.3 Disadvantaged Business Enterprises
107.1.3.1 Utilization Plan
For all federal aid projects with a DBE goal greater than zero, the Contractor shall have an
approved DBE Utilization Plan (UP) prior to contract award. The UP lists the DBE commitments
the Contractor shall use to meet the DBE contract goal. The Project Engineer and regional staff
can view the UP in B2GNow under Proposals. Additionally, when the Civil Rights and Business
Resource Center creates the contract in B2GNow, the commitments presented in the UP are
transferred into the contract. They are designated by a red exclamation point until a Form 205
or Form 1425 is received and approved by the CRO. For more information, see the DBE
Participation Training Resources section of the Civil Rights and Business Resource Center.
107.1.3.2 Sublet Permit Application
While the CRO is responsible for reviewing the Form 205 to ensure the Contractor is acting in
accord with his DBE commitments, the Project Engineer should also be familiar with the
commitments and watching for inconsistencies with the original commitments. The Project
100-52
General Provisions
Engineer or CRO may withhold approval of a DBE or non-DBE Form 205 if the work items in the
Form 205 are inconsistent with the UP.
The Contractor may add new DBEs to the project using the Form 205. Listing a DBE on the Form
205 does not create a DBE commitment subject to the termination and reduction procedures.
The CRO will review the Form 205 to verify that the DBE participation is eligible to count toward
the DBE contract goal. If approved, the CRO will add the DBE as for credit participation in
B2GNow. Verified participation can count toward the contract goal in the event of the need for
a substitution or for increases in the project, which raise the dollar value of the project goal.
107.1.3.3 Utilization Plan Modifications
The Contractor must make good faith efforts to meet the DBE goal and to fulfill each separate
DBE commitment listed in the UP. Regardless of whether the goal is met, if the Contractor does
not use the listed DBE to perform the work of the commitment, CDOT cannot pay the Contractor
for the work performed unless the termination and reduction processes were followed.
Additionally, the Contractor cannot make modifications to the DBE commitments without CRO
approval. Increases in quantities are not considered modifications and do not require CRO
approval.
If the Contractor is seeking to terminate, reduce, modify, or make a substitute DBE

commitment, the contractor must submit the Form 1420 to the CRO, with a copy to the Project
Engineer, for approval. DBE participation verified via Form 205 may count as substitute
participation. At his discretion, the CRO may request a Form 1415, Commitment Confirmation.
When a Form 1415 is requested and the Form 1420 approved, the commitment then becomes
subject to enforcement like an original UP commitment.
The CRO will review the Form 1420 and provide a concurrence or denial on the form and return
it to the Contractor with a copy to the Project Engineer. The CRO will also make the
commitment modifications and upload all 1420s in B2GNow. Regions should follow the standard
escalation procedures if a dispute regarding good faith efforts arises between the Contractor
and CDOT.
Contractors, Project Engineers and the CRO can use B2GNow to track the progress of the
Contractor towards fulfilling the Utilization Plan and meeting the contract goal. The original
Utilization Plan is available under the Proposals. The current contract participation is available
by going under “Search” and then “Contract” and searching for the applicable contract. The
information is provided on the Compliance Audit Summary tab.
107.1.3.4 Change Orders
At the end of the project, the calculation of whether the Contractor has met the goal is based
upon the Total Earnings Amount. This includes all work issued via change orders. Therefore, if
the Contractor receives change orders during the project which increase the work to be
performed, the Contractor must ensure that he makes good faith efforts to obtain additional
DBE participation. If the Contractor is unable to obtain additional participation, the Contractor
must request a waiver via Form 1420.
100-53
General Provisions
107.1.3.5 Commercially Useful Function
Project Engineers are responsible for overseeing the daily activities of firms and ensuring that
DBEs are performing a commercially useful function. At the completion of the DBE’s work, the
DBE, Contractor and Project Engineer must each complete their respective portion of Form
1432 and submit it to the CRO. The DBE’s participation cannot count toward the contract goal
unless a Form 1432 is submitted. The CRO may conduct additional in depth commercially useful
function reviews. These will be stored in B2GNow.
107.1.3.6 Withholding Payment and Sanctions
If the Contractor does not use the listed DBE for the work stated in the commitment, then the
Project Engineer should withhold payment to the Contractor for such work.
At the end of the project, the CRO will review the Contractor’s compliance and good faith
efforts to fulfill the commitments and meet the contract goal. The Project Engineer shall not
release retainage or withheld amounts until the CRO has determined whether the Contractor
shall be subject to sanctions. In the event the amount of sanctions exceeds the amount
withheld, the CDOT shall seek reimbursement from the Contractor for the balance of the
sanctioned amount.
107.1.4 On-the-Job Training
For more information or assistance with the application of the OJT requirements please contact
your Region Civil Rights Office (CRO) or the OJT Program Coordinator at the Civil Rights and
Business Resource Center, 303-757-9234
107.1.4.1 Preconstruction Conference Requirements
At the Preconstruction Conference the Project Engineer or if available, the CRO representative
will discuss the Project’s On-the-Job Training (OJT) goal and the OJT requirements. An
emphasis will be placed on noncompliance resulting in the withholding of payments and the
assessment of disincentives against the Contractor at the end of the project. If the Contractor
does not comply by the end of the project, he is subject to disincentives.
107.1.4.2 Enrolling Trainees and Apprentices
The Contractor shall enroll all trainees and apprentices by submitting a Form 838 – OJT
Trainee/Apprentice Record and one of the following as supporting registration documentation
to the Project Engineer ten working days before the trainee or apprentice starts work onsite.
Type of Program Documentation Required
Standard Training Program Form 838, plus

Copy of the Contractor’s Standard OJT Training Program’s
Approval Letter signed by CDOT and FHWA
- or -
100-54
General Provisions
Colorado Contractors Association Manpower Training

Program Acceptance Form
U.S. Department of Labor Form 838, plus

Approved Apprentice US DOL – Program Registration and Apprenticeship
Agreement – Form ETA 671 – Section II
- or -
US DOL – Office of Apprenticeship, Apprenticeship
Certification with the Apprentice’s name on this list
Figure 100 - 3
The Project Engineer will forward the form to the CRO for approval. The CRO will review and
respond within ten working days. If the Contractor has not submitted the OJT Form 838 and
registration documentation to the Project Engineer at least ten working days prior to the first
progress payment, the Project Engineer will send a Form 105 – Speed Memo to the Contractor.
The Form 105 will remind the Contractor of the OJT goal, the possibility of progress payments
being withheld, and the possible assessment of disincentives for non-compliance. The Project
Engineer will remind the Contractor at the weekly project meetings about the OJT goal and the
Contractor’s status towards the goal. The Project Engineer will follow up with the issuance of
a Form 105 memo as appropriate.
When a trainee or apprentice is approved by the CRO, the Contractor shall submit the hours
worked on the project by the trainee/apprentice on a Form 832 – Trainee Status and Evaluation.
The form is due monthly and requires approval of the Project Engineer. The Project Engineer
should review the project hours for reasonableness in comparison to the certified payrolls, daily
diaries, or other project observations. The Project Engineer will initiate payment from the OJT
force account for hours worked on the CDOT project site and found to be reasonable at the
rate of $10.00 per hour. A copy of Form 832 shall be sent to the CRO each month. At no time
should the OJT force account be paid as a lump sum pay item.
107.1.4.3 Increasing OJT Hours
The Contractor will be reimbursed for no more than the amount outlined in the OJT force
Account budget.
107.1.4.4 Offsite OJT Hours
Offsite OJT Hours will not count toward the OJT goal.
107.1.4.5 OJT Goal Waiver or Modification
The Contractor or the Project Engineer may initiate a waiver or modification of the OJT goal.
If the Contractor requests that the OJT goal be waived or modified, a written explanation shall
be submitted. Once a written request is received or the Project Engineer determines a waiver
or modification is warranted, the Project Engineer will notify the CRO. The Project Engineer
100-55
General Provisions
with the CRO will decide whether to approve the waiver or modification and if approved, a
Form 1336 – Waiver Request for Contract’s On the Job Training Hours will be completed by the
Project Engineer. If applicable, it should include the Contractor’s request as an attachment.
The CRO will have ten working days to review and approve Form 1336. If Contractor’s request
for a waiver or modification is denied, the Project Engineer will notify the Contractor in a Form
105. Examples of when a waiver or modification should be considered are:
1. when the work a trainee or apprentice performs is a safety hazard that cannot be
mitigated and was unknown at the time the goal was developed;
2. if there was a change of scope that eliminates the work that would have been performed
by a trainee or apprentice and there are no other opportunities for the trainee or
apprentice; and
3. any other efforts to meet the goal such as a Contractor soliciting OJT participation from
the subcontractor.
107.1.4.6 Not Meeting the OJT Goal
If the Contractor does not meet the required OJT goal, the Project Engineer will notify the CRO
prior to Final Acceptance of the project. The Project Engineer will issue a Form 105 requiring
the Contractor to submit a written explanation for not meeting the OJT goal. When the
Contractor provides a written explanation, the Project Engineer and the CRO will confer to
determine whether disincentives should be imposed, and in what amount. If the Contractor
does not provide a written explanation or the explanation provided is not satisfactory to CDOT,
disincentives will be assessed against the Contractor. The CRO will determine the journeymen’s
rates to be used to calculate disincentives. The Project Engineer will notify the Contractor of
the decision using Form 105.
107.1.4.7 Assessing OJT Disincentives in SiteManager®
In SiteManager®, add a change order (Reason code: No MCR/CMO required) for the calculated
disincentives. Use Category 0200; use only item code 900-00028, Added Item/OJT Disincentives.
This disincentive is a per hour type item. Enter the hourly rate as a positive and the quantity
of hours as a negative. Remember to post to your DWR. For further information and assistance
with SiteManager® entry, please contact the AASHTOWare Project Manager at
[email protected].
107.1.5 Equal Employment and Civil Rights Considerations
107.1.5.1 Discrimination and Sexual Harassment Complaints
Discrimination and sexual harassment complaints must be kept confidential and forwarded
immediately to the Region EEO/Civil Rights Specialist for action.
100-56
General Provisions
107.1.5.2 Form 280
Form 280 – EEO and Labor Compliance Verification will be used to document compliance with
both Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) and Labor Compliance as required by federal
regulations. Form 280 interviews are required on all projects (i.e., federal aid construction
projects, local agency projects, maintenance projects and state funded only projects). All
projects require the “Equal Employment Opportunity” section to be completed. The “Labor
Compliance” section is only completed when Davis-Bacon wages are required on the project.
Each Region Civil Rights Manager will create a process to report the number of interviews
required and completed. The actual interview forms shall be retained in the project records. A
copy should be forwarded to the Region Civil Rights Manager for follow-up action if problems
are noted. Region Civil Rights Manager will report data for each residency to the Labor and
Contract Compliance Officer in the Civil Rights and Business Resource Center on a quarterly
basis. The report will indicate the number of interviews required, completed, and forwarded
for follow up action. The Labor and Contract Compliance Officer will prepare a summary report
for the Chief Engineer.
Project personnel will conduct interviews in accordance with the following table:
Contract Amount Interviews Required
Up to $20 million 4 interviews during each month of active construction
Greater than $20 million and up to $100 million 8 interviews during each month of active construction
Greater than $300 million 20 interviews during each month of active construction
Figure 100 - 4
Please note field personnel should prioritize interviews by:
1. Interviewing women and minorities on the workforce in order to monitor potential

discriminatory actions
2. Rotating the interviews among the prime and subcontractors on the project
3. Rotating the interviews among various labor classifications, with emphasis on the more
heavily utilized classifications
Questions regarding this process may be referred to the Labor and Contract Compliance Officer
in the Civil Rights and Business Resource Center at 303-757-9540.
100-57
General Provisions
The sample spreadsheet below may be used by the Project Engineer for tracking Form 280
interviews
A B C D E
1 Project Tracking Form for EEO interviews using Form 280

2 Project Number/Code:
3 Original Contract $$:
4 Start of work date:
Standard # of Form 280s required monthly (from
5
chart):
6 # of # of # Form 280s
Form forwarded
7 Form 280s
280s for
follow-up
8 Reporting Period required completed Comments
action
9 July (year)
10 August (year)
11 September (year)
12 Quarterly totals
13 October (year)
14 November (year)
15 December (year)
16 Quarterly totals
17 January (year)
18 February (year)
19 March (year)
20 Quarterly totals
21 April (year)
22 May(year)
23 June (year)
24 Quarterly totals
Figure 100 - 5
100-58
General Provisions
107.1.5.3 FHWA Form 1391
The FHWA Form 1391 – Federal-Aid Highway Construction Contract Annual EEO Report is
required each year from all Contractors and subcontractors working on Federal-Aid projects,
including Local Agency projects, that are active during the last week of July. The Region
EEO/Civil Rights Specialist will establish the timetable for processing these reports. Each
construction firm shall disclose its respective project workforce or submit a Form 1391 with a
“No Work” statement, for the one-week period designated by the Region EEO/Civil Rights
Specialist. Only the project data for the designated one-week period will apply. Once
completed, the reports will be submitted to the Project Engineer and forwarded to the Region
EEO/Civil Rights Specialist for review and processing.
107.1.6 Drug-Free Workplace
Subsection 107.06 (b) of the Standard Specifications requires that Contractors, subcontractors,
and suppliers participating in CDOT construction contracts maintain and enforce a drug-free
workplace policy. Incidents occurring on a CDOT construction project will be handled in
accordance with subsection 108.06 of the Standard Specifications.
107.1.7 Outdoor Advertising During Construction
For more detailed information on Outdoor Advertising, refer to 2 CCR 601-3, the Rules
Governing Outdoor Advertising in Colorado. The contractor is required to follow all laws and
regulations related to Outdoor Advertising.
Guidance on displaying contractor names and logos during construction. The contractor is
permitted to display its name and/or logo on a construction project on equipment or materials
visible to the public as long as the equipment or materials serves a construction function. For
example, a stationary water tank or an equipment storage trailer that displays the contractor’s
name and/or logo are permitted. An example of an item that is not allowed is a banner across
a bridge or a fence that displays the company name and/or logo. In general, it is not allowed
if the item it is not serving a construction purpose or if it is displayed with the purpose of
advertising the contractor. Contact information such a phone number, email address, or
website are not permitted. If you have any questions related to outdoor advertising, contact
the Region Outdoor Advertising Administrator.
107.2 PERMITS, LICENSES, AND TAXES

If asked questions about Contractor tax liability or exemption certificates, CDOT personnel
should:
1. provide reference to subsection 107.02 of the Standard Specifications;
2. refer questions regarding sales tax to the local taxing authority or the Sales, Use and
Cigarette Tax Section of the Colorado Revenue Department; and
3. not state opinions or make decisions regarding tax liability, especially during project
advertisement.
100-59
General Provisions
107.3 – 107.5 RESERVED
107.6 SANITARY, HEALTH, AND SAFETY PROVISIONS

107.6.1 Performance of Safety Critical Work
The following work elements are considered safety critical work:
1. Overhead girder erection
2. Overhead structure construction or repair
3. Removal of bridge
4. Removal of portion of bridge
5. Temporary works: false work, shoring that exceeds 5 feet in height, cofferdams, and
temporary bridges
6. Work requiring the use of cranes or other lifting equipment
7. Blasting
8. Excavation and embankment adjacent to the roadway, especially if it requires shoring
9. Tunneling
10. Work operations such as pile driving and jack hammering which may create vibration and
cause debris to fall into traffic.
11. Rock fall mitigation
The Contractor shall submit, for record purposes only, an initial detailed construction plan that
addresses safe construction of each of the safety critical elements. When the specifications
already require an erection plan or a bridge removal plan, it shall be included as a part of this
plan. The detailed construction plan shall be submitted two weeks prior to the safety critical
element conference described below. The construction plan shall be stamped “Approved for
Construction” and signed by the Contractor. The construction plan will not be approved by the
Engineer.
The Construction Plan shall include the following:
1. Safety Critical Element for which the plan is being prepared and submitted.
2. Contractor or subcontractor responsible for the plan preparation and the work.
3. Schedule, procedures, equipment, and sequence of operations, that comply with the
working hour limitations
4. Temporary works required: false work, bracing, shoring, etc.
100-60
General Provisions
5. Additional actions that will be taken to ensure that the work will be performed safely.
6. Names and qualifications of workers who will be in responsible charge of the work:
a. Years of experience performing similar work
b. Training taken in performing similar work
c. Certifications earned in performing similar work
7. Names and qualifications of workers operating cranes or other lifting equipment
a. Years of experience performing similar work
b. Training taken in performing similar work
c. Certifications earned in performing similar work
8. The construction plan shall address how the Contractor will handle contingencies such
as:
a. Unplanned events (storms, traffic accidents, etc.)
b. Structural elements that don’t fit or line up
c. Work that cannot be completed in time for the roadway to be reopened to traffic
d. Replacement of workers who don’t perform the work safely
e. Equipment failure
f. Other potential difficulties inherent in the type of work being performed
9. Name and qualifications of Contractor’s person designated to determine and notify the
Engineer in writing when it is safe to open a route to traffic after it has been closed for
safety critical work.
10. Erection plan or bridge removal plan when submitted as required elsewhere by the
specifications. Plan requirements that overlap with above requirements may be
submitted only once.
A safety critical element conference shall be held two weeks prior to beginning construction on
each safety critical element. The Engineer, the Contractor, the safety critical element
subcontractors, and the Contractor’s Engineer shall attend the conference. Required pre-
erection conferences or bridge removal conferences may be included as a part of this
conference.
After the safety critical element conference, and prior to beginning work on the safety critical
element, the Contractor shall submit a final construction plan to the Engineer for record
purposes only. The Contractor’s Engineer shall sign, and seal temporary works related to
construction plans for the safety critical elements, Removal of Portion of Bridge and Temporary
100-61
General Provisions
Works. The final construction plan shall be stamped “Approved for Construction” and signed by
the Contractor.
The Contractor shall perform safety critical work only when the Engineer is on the project site.
The Contractor’s Engineer shall be on site to inspect and provide written approval of safety
critical work for which he provided stamped construction details. Unless otherwise directed or
approved, the Contractor’s Engineer need not be on site during the actual performance of
safety critical work but shall be present to conduct inspection for written approval of the safety
critical work.
When ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately stop safety critical work that
is being performed in an unsafe manner or will result in an unsafe situation for the traveling
public. Prior to stopping work, the Contractor shall make the situation safe for work stoppage.
The Contractor shall submit an acceptable plan to correct the unsafe process before the
Engineer will authorize resumption of the work.
When ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove workers from the project that are
performing the safety critical work in a manner that creates an unsafe situation for the public
in accordance with subsection 108.06 of the Standard Specifications.
Should an unplanned event occur, or the safety critical operation deviate from the submitted
plan, the Contractor shall immediately cease operations on the safety critical element, except
for performing any work necessary to ensure worksite safety, and provide proper protection of
the work and the traveling public. If the Contractor intends to modify the submitted plan, he
shall submit a revised plan to the Engineer prior to resuming operations.
All costs associated with the preparation and implementation of each safety critical element
construction plan will not be measured and paid for separately but shall be included in the
work.
Nothing in the section shall be construed to relieve the Contractor from ultimate liability for
unsafe or negligent acts or to be a waiver of the Colorado Governmental Immunity Act on behalf
of the Department.
107.6.2 Safety Equipment
Required personal protective equipment (including but not limited to hard hats, vests, eye
protection, and foot protection) will be made available, and will be properly used by, all CDOT
personnel and consultants pursuant to Procedural Directive 80.1, which is available at:
http://intranet/resources/policy-procedure/documents/0080-1/view.
Consultants working on CDOT projects must wear the same personal protective equipment as
CDOT personnel. Appropriate safety equipment will be used as required by the specific work
conditions and current policy.
100-62
General Provisions
107.6.3 Responsibilities and Authority
The Contractor is responsible for complying with all safety, health and sanitation laws, rules,
regulations, and guidelines, including but not limited to the Project Safety Management Plan
(Plan) described in the specification, the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), 29 CFR
1910, 29 CFR 1926, 23 CFR 634, the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), Title 30
CFR, “Colorado Work Zone Best Practices Safety Guide”, CFR 49, national consensus standards,
and the Federal Drug Free Workplace Act, and for ensuring the safety of all representatives and
employees of the Contractor and all subcontractors, suppliers, Department personnel and
consultants, visitors, and the public throughout the project site.
The specifications require the Contractor to prepare a project-specific safety management

plan. The Contractor must certify that:
1. The Plan complies with applicable safety, health, and sanitation laws, rules, regulations,
and guidelines.
2. All operations and work practices of the Contractor comply with it.
3. All subcontractors, suppliers, and Department personnel and consultants will comply with
it.
The Contractor is to submit a copy of this Plan to the Engineer before starting work and is to
keep it updated. The Engineer should be familiar with the specification and the Plan. The
Engineer should review the Plan for general adequacy and compliance with the specification
and notify the Contractor in writing that the plan has been received and addresses items 1
through 12 in the Standard Specifications. The Engineer may also request assistance from the
Region Safety Officer.
An example project safety management plan has been posted on the Construction Specifications
page of CDOT's website. Notice that this is only an example project safety management plan.
It may be used only as a guide in preparing an actual project safety management plan. The
safety management plan for a particular project must address the project specific construction
activities. The URL for the CDOT web page on which the example plan may be found is:
http://www.coloradodot.info/business/designsupport/construction-specifications/2011Specs.
Among other things, the specification requires at a minimum that all personnel on the project
site are to wear hard hats, high visibility apparel and appropriate, sturdy footwear at all times
when outside of their vehicles and within CDOT ROW. Consider the following additional
guidelines:
1. CDOT Responsibility and Authority. The Department will not permit any employee to
work in or around unsanitary or unsafe conditions. All CDOT and Consultant personnel on
the project should monitor Contractor and subcontractor activities for obvious or
suspected noncompliance with the Plan, and safety, health and sanitation laws, rules,
regulations, and guidelines. Any concerns should be raised immediately and followed up
in writing with the Contractor’s competent person for that activity, the Superintendent,
or the Contractor’s Project Safety Manager. Due to training and liability constraints, the
100-63
General Provisions
Department does not have the authority to accept a specific condition as complying with
OSHA requirements. Furthermore, it is not the intent of the specification for CDOT or
Consultant personnel to function as OSHA enforcement or OSHA inspectors. The
Contractor is responsible for compliance with its Plan.
2. Noncompliance. The Project Engineer will immediately notify the Contractor in writing
of apparent noncompliance with the Plan, or other laws, rules, and regulations. The
specification requires the Contractor to respond in writing to safety issues raised by the
Engineer. The Engineer may contact the Region Safety Officer or the Statewide Safety
Manager for assistance.
3. Imminent Danger. Imminent danger as defined by OSHA is any condition or practices in

any place of employment which are such that a danger exists which could reasonably be
expected to cause death or serious physical harm immediately or before the imminence
of such danger can be eliminated through the enforcement procedures otherwise
provided by this Act. It should be noted that subsection 105.01 of the Standard
Specifications requires the Engineer to suspend immediately all or part of the work when
the Contractor fails to correct conditions unsafe for the workers or the general public.
Additionally, the Project Safety Planning special provision now allows the Engineer to
immediately enact a “safety stand-down” in the case of an accident (including property
damage), or catastrophe (the hospitalization of three or more employees, resulting from
a work-related incident or exposure; in general, from an accident or an illness caused by
a workplace hazard), or other situation presenting an imminent danger to life or health,
such as a “near miss”, violation of the Plan, or presence of a hazardous situation. The
safety stand-down is mandatory in the case of a work zone fatality directly related to
the Contractor’s or any subcontractor’s operations. The Engineer will need to apply
judgment in non-fatal situations, in cases of vehicular fatality not caused by a work zone
incident, and for minor infractions. The Contractor is required to provide properly
certified documentation specifying the corrective measures that it has taken to prevent
recurrence before the Contractor may resume operations. Contact the Region Safety
Officer or the Statewide Safety Manager for assistance with questionable situations and
for review of the Contractor’s corrective measures.
4. Notification for Serious Accident or Event on Construction Projects. Notification shall be

given to the Region Safety Officer (RSO), and the instruction followed in the most current
version of “Notification for Serious Accident or Event,” anytime there is a serious
accident or event on a construction project. This includes any fatalities on a construction
project. The Project Engineer will provide any requested documentation to the RSO. The
most current version of “Notification for Serious Accident or Event” may be found at:
http://intranet.dot.state.co.us/best-dot/risk-management.
The Engineer should withhold progress payments, suspend the project, or both, for failure to
submit an acceptable Plan or update it, for failure to respond in writing to safety issues that
are raised by the Engineer, or for failure to submit documentation of safety inspections.
100-64
General Provisions
107.7 – 107.9 RESERVED
107.10 BARRICADES AND SIGNS

The provisions of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways
(MUTCD) and the CDOT Supplement to the MUTCD govern the work zone traffic control that will
be used on CDOT construction projects. A change order is required before major changes can
be made to the Traffic Control Plan for any project. For additional information on work zone
traffic control, see Section 630 of this Manual and Section 630 of the Standard Specifications.
107.11 RESERVED
107.12 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY AND

LANDSCAPE
Many construction projects have environmental mitigation commitments. These commitments
were developed in the project development process as part of the National Environmental
Policy Act. These commitments may be in the form of water quality permit requirements,
wetland mitigation, endangered species mitigation, cultural resources mitigation or others.
It is the Project Engineer's responsibility to ensure compliance with the environmental

mitigation commitments during construction. Violations of environmental regulations can result
in civil and criminal penalties.
Recommendations:
1. Project Engineers should review the plans and the environmental mitigation
commitments and discuss them with the RPEM before the project is advertised to ensure
all commitments are addressed and understood.
2. At the Environmental Preconstruction Conference, ensure all sub-contractors have been

invited and be sure to cover the environmental requirements. Request that the RPEM or
other environmental specialist attend to speak to the environmental issues.
3. At weekly meetings with the Contractor and subcontractors, be sure to cover the
environmental mitigation commitments.
4. If you suspect you will have difficulty getting the Contractor to comply with certain
requirements, ask for assistance from your RPEM.
107.13 FOREST PROTECTION

107.13.1 Preservation of Wetland Areas and Plant and Animal Habitats
Legally protected wetland areas and habitats of threatened and endangered species will be
designated in the Contract. As needed, contact CDOT Natural Resources Staff in Environmental
Programs for assistance regarding permits or special treatments. Ensure that the Contractor
100-65
General Provisions
has been properly informed regarding the importance of preserving wetland areas and plant
and animal habitats. Check that limits of encroachment are clearly marked before construction
begins. For affected projects, the requirements stipulated in the permits must be reviewed and
understood by all project personnel.
There are three project special provisions that may appear in the Contract to implement
Migratory Bird Treaty Act requirements:
1. One for use on projects where the work consists only of structure work.
2. One for use on projects where the work includes soil and vegetation disturbance and bird
surveys have been done by CDOT environmental personnel.
3. One for use on projects where the work includes soil and vegetation disturbance, and
bird surveys will be done by the Contractor’s wildlife biologist.
The appropriate one of these special provisions will be included in the Contract for each
project. The RPEM and the Staff Biologist are responsible for working with engineers to prevent
potential problems and for collaborating on avoidance and mitigation measures.
CDOT staff involved in construction will act to ensure that appropriate and reasonable measures
are taken to prevent the taking of migratory birds.
107.13.2 Preservation of Trees and Shrubs
Trees and shrubs are protected for both environmental and aesthetic purposes. Before
construction, check to ensure that protected trees and shrubs are clearly marked for
preservation, and ensure that the Contractor fully understands the limits within which clearing
and grubbing may be performed.
107.14 RESERVED
107.15 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS, INSURANCE TYPES

AND COVERAGE LIMITS
Subsection 107.15 of the Standard Specifications requires the Contractor to procure and
maintain public liability and property damage insurance. The Project Engineer shall review the
certificate of insurance to ensure it meets the requirements of Subsection 107.15 of the
Standard Specifications. Insurance coverage is evidenced by a Certificate of Insurance, which
certifies that the policy is in effect and will not be canceled without CDOT receiving written
notice 30 days prior to cancellation. The Contractor must forward Certificates of Insurance for
the required coverage to the Construction Engineering Services Branch before the Contract will
be executed.
The Project Engineer will monitor cancellations of the insurance coverage. If coverage expires,
the Project Engineer, with the approval of the Resident Engineer, will issue a written stop work
100-66
General Provisions
order to the Contractor, and work must not resume until the Contractor furnishes a new
Certificate of Insurance.
107.16 OPENING SECTIONS OF PROJECT TO TRAFFIC

The Contract will define the criteria for opening sections of the project to traffic, and
subsection 107.16 of the Standard Specifications gives the Project Engineer authority to order
the openings. Consider the following:
1. Contractor Delay. If it is necessary to order the opening of a section to traffic because

the Contractor caused a delay in completing the work, the Contractor shall be responsible
for all costs until final project acceptance, including the costs for damage caused by
traffic.
2. Other Basis. If it is necessary to order the opening of a section of the project to traffic
and the order is not based on Contractor delay, the Contractor is not responsible for
damage caused by traffic. A change order must be executed to compensate the
Contractor for associated delays and additional costs.
107.17 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK

Subsection 107.17 of the Standard Specifications defines the provisions by which the Project
Engineer may relieve the Contractor of expenses for restoring damage to contract work caused
by traffic and other elements. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Expense Relief Granted. If damage occurs to work on sections of the project where the
Contractor has been granted relief from restoration expenses, the following two
restoration options are acceptable:
a. Require the Contractor to repair the work and pay for the restoration under the
provisions of subsection 104.03 of the Standard Specifications.
b. Contact the Region Maintenance Superintendent to schedule the needed

restoration work.
2. Expense Relief Not Granted. If damage occurs to work on sections of the project where
the Contractor has not been granted relief from restoration expenses, the Project
Engineer must determine what, if any, of the restoration expenses are attributable to
the Contractor. This depends primarily on the extent to which the Contractor provided
protection from a foreseeable cause of damage. In general, if the work was damaged by
an unforeseeable cause, the Department will pay for restoration expenses. Consider the
following guidelines:
a. Unforeseeable Causes. Unforeseeable causes of damage are causes beyond the

control of the Contractor that could not have been reasonably anticipated. For
example, 100 mile per hour winds can cause major damage to a project. If the
occurrence was deemed rare and unlikely, as demonstrated by historical weather
data for the location and time of year, the costs for restoration should generally
be borne by the Department.
100-67
General Provisions
b. Foreseeable Causes. Foreseeable causes of damage are causes that can be

reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, whether they are in the Contractor’s
control. For example, 100 mile per hour winds in the Boulder area are generally
predictable from year to year based on the season. If such winds caused damage
to a project in the Boulder area and the Contractor did not provide adequate and
reasonable protection from this foreseeable event, restoration costs should be
borne by the Contractor.
c. Traffic. The cost of restoring damage to work caused by traffic is generally borne
by the Contractor, because CDOT considers traffic a foreseeable cause of damage.
However, there are instances where the restoration costs should be borne by the
Department. The following examples are provided to clarify this policy:
i. The project is a HMA overlay. The traveling public damages a section of

existing guardrail. The Department will pay for restoration of the damaged
guardrail.
ii. The project is a partial reconstruction that includes guardrail removal and
replacement. The traveling public damages a section of newly installed
guardrail. The Contractor shall pay for the restoration of the damaged
guardrail.
iii. The project is a HMA overlay. A Contractor supplier damages a section of

bridge rail. The Contractor shall pay for the restoration of the damaged
bridge rail.
107.18 – 107.22 RESERVED
107.23 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND PALEONTOLOGICAL DISCOVERIES

107.23.1 Site Investigation
Ensure that the Contractor has been properly informed regarding the importance of preserving
protected archaeological and paleontological sites. Protected sites should be clearly marked
before construction begins.
107.23.2 Discovery During Construction
If archaeological or paleontological resources such as plant or animal fossils remains, chipped

stone, pottery shards, purple bottle glass, or suspected human skeletal remains are
encountered during construction, halt all activity that would otherwise disturb the discovery
and immediately notify the CDOT Cultural Resources Staff (e.g., Staff Archaeologist or
Paleontologist) in Environmental Programs of the Department of Transportation Development
(DTD). CDOT Cultural Resources Staff will provide recommendations. Do not restart
construction until directed to do so by the CDOT Cultural Resources Staff.
100-68
General Provisions
107.24 RESERVED
107.25 WATER QUALITY CONTROL

107.25.1 General
The following Section presents an overview of Federal and State requirements for water quality
control within the State of Colorado. For further information, see the CDOT Erosion Control and
Storm Water Quality Guide, and subsection 107.25 and Section 208 of the Standard Special
Provisions for projects less than one acre, and subsection 107.25 and Section 208 of the
Standard Specifications for projects equal to or greater than one acre, as referenced below.
107.25.2 Contractor Responsibility
The Contractor shall comply with all governing Federal, State and local water quality control
regulations, permit requirements, and all Contract requirements associated with temporary
and permanent water pollution control measures for streams, side ditches, lakes, ponds, and
other watercourses (State waters). With permission from and at the direction of the Engineer,
the Contractor shall comply with action items documented by the Region or Headquarters
inspections. For projects over an acre, the Contractor faces enforcement action by the Colorado
Department of Public Health and Environment for permit violations and liquidated damages
from CDOT under subsection 208.09 – Regulatory Mechanism for Water Quality. Where concrete
washout sites will be used, they must be pre-approved by the Engineer. See the CDOT Erosion
Control and Storm Water Quality Guide and Section 208 of the Standard Special Provision for
projects under one acre, and Section 208 of the Standard Specifications for projects equal to
or greater than one acre.
107.25.2.1 SWMP
The Contractor must maintain a Storm water Management Plan (SWMP).
See Section 208.03(d) 1 of the Standard Special Provision for projects less than one acre, and
Section 208.03(d) 1 of the Standard Specifications for projects equal to or greater than one
acre, for a list of required SWMP contents. The SWMP is property of CDOT and shall be available
for reference at the CDOT field office during construction. Upon final acceptance, for sites
equal to or greater than one acre, the Engineer will provide the SWMP to the Region Water
Pollution Control Manager (RWPCM). Upon final acceptance for sites with less than one acre of
disturbed area (no Colorado Discharge Permit System Stormwater Construction Permit), the
SWMP shall be provided to the Finals Administrator.
107.25.2.2 Environmental Preconstruction Assessment
Prior to the Environmental Preconstruction Conference, the Contractor’s SWMP Administrator

shall provide a list that identifies and describes all potential pollutant sources. At, or prior to,
the Environmental Preconstruction Conference, the Contractor shall submit a Spill Response
Plan (SRP) in accordance with subsection 107.25(b) of the Standard Special Provision for
projects less than one acre, and subsection 107.25(b)5 of the Standard Specifications for
100-69
General Provisions
projects greater than or equal to one acre. See subsection 208.06(c) in Standard Special
Provisions for projects under one acre, and 208.06(c) of the Standard Specifications for projects
equal to or greater than one acre, for the required contents of the SRP. Work shall not be
started until the plan has been submitted to and approved by the Engineer.
A minimum of ten days prior to the start of the construction activity, the Contractor shall
submit in writing a Method Statement for Containing Pollutant Byproducts to the Engineer for
approval. For requirements, see subsection 107.25(b) in the appropriate Standard Special
Provision for projects less than one acre, and subsection 107.25(b)12 of the Standard
Specifications for projects greater than or equal to one acre (CDOT or Contractor Obtained
Stormwater Permit).
A Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasure Plan (SPCC) may be required from the
Contractor prior to the start of work. See subsection 107.25(b) of the appropriate Standard
Special Provision for projects less than one acre, and subsection 107.25(b)5 of the Standard
Specifications for projects greater than or equal to one acre (CDOT or Contractor Obtained
Stormwater Permit) for SPCC requirement criteria.
For projects over one acre of disturbance, invite the Region Water Pollution Control Manager
(RWPCM) to the Environmental Preconstruction Meeting.
107.25.2.3 Site Cleanliness
The Contractor shall certify that construction equipment has been cleaned prior to site arrival.
Vehicles shall be free of soil and debris capable of transporting noxious weed seeds or roots
onto the site.
At the end of each day, the Contractor shall collect all trash and dispose of it in appropriate
containers. Containers shall be emptied as needed.
107.25.3 Internal CDOT Coordination
Because of the different Contract requirements of who is responsible to obtain the required
environmental permits and who is the permittee/s of record, internal CDOT coordination is
essential. Notification from Federal, State, and local regulatory agencies of pending inspections
or Notice Of Violation must immediately be communicated between the HQ Environmental
Programs Branch, region environmental staff, Project Engineer and Resident Engineer.
107.25.4 Permit and Reporting Requirements
To meet the Environmental Protection Agency’s stormwater quality regulations (i.e., National
Pollution Discharge Elimination System), the Colorado Department of Public Health and
Environment enforces the Colorado Discharge Permit System. All construction activities, except
those disturbing less than one acre of total land area that are not part of a larger common plan,
must comply with these requirements. EPA remains the permitting authority for projects
located on Federal or Tribal lands.
100-70
General Provisions
The Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment must issue a general permit,
entitled, “CDPS General Permit for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction
Activity” (CDPS-SCP). There are also “Qualified Local Agencies”, that have been designated by
CDPHE to issue stormwater permits up to 5 acres. Some local agency stormwater requirements
may need to be adhered to and that the Regional Environmental Unit should be consulted.
If the Standard Specification 107.25 has been included in the Contract, CDOT is responsible for
obtaining the CDPS-SCP permit prior to advertisement. The Contractor and CDOT will be co-
permittees before the start of any construction. The Contractor will provide proof that they
are a permittee on required permits prior to start of construction. If a project special 107.25
has been included in the contract, refer to the terms of the project special.
When a Utility Company has obtained a CDPS-SCP within a CDOT project area, prior to the
Contractor being on-site, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and the Utility
Company to transfer or reassign the permit area within the project’s Limits of Construction to
the Contractor and CDOT prior to work commencing. The Contractor shall not commence
construction until CDPHE issues a new CDPS-SCP identifying the Contractor as the Operator,
and the permit is put in the SWMP 107.25(c).
The Erosion Control Management (ECM) staff consists of a SWMP Administrator and one or more
Erosion Control Inspectors, if required, depending on the overall area of disturbed area. See
subsection 208.03(c) in the Standard Specifications, or 208.03(c) of the Standard Special
Provision, for additional information on the duties and requirements for ECM staff.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining permits for construction groundwater
dewatering unless already obtained by CDOT. The Contractor is again solely responsible for
compliance with this permit, and if CDOT obtained the permit, the Contractor shall contact the
Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment and accept responsibility for the
permit. Construction Dewatering may be discharged to the ground on projects where CDPHE’s
Low Risk Guidance Document for Discharges of Uncontaminated Groundwater to Land are met
(107.25(b)8).
If a spill occurs on site, the Contractor shall immediately implement the SRP.
107.25.4.1 Transfer of Stormwater Permit from the Contractor to CDOT

Maintenance
As the project nears completion, the Contractor shall request a review of the erosion control
site conditions and documentation (Partial Acceptance of permanent stabilization unit of work).
The timing of this review will be when, at the judgement of the Engineer, the project is
sufficiently completed as that no further construction operations will affect permit
requirements, but sufficient Contractor equipment and workforce remains to do the “punch
list” type work on erosion control features. See subsection 107.25(d) of the Standard
Specifications (CDOT or Contractor Obtained Stormwater Permit) for requirements. In design
build the Contractor may be contracted until final stabilization is achieved (70% of pre
disturbance vegetation). In some Regions the permit is transferred to CDOT Maintenance and
100-71
General Provisions
other Regions to a CDOT Engineer that is overseeing a Post Construction Establishment Phase
(PCEP) Contractor; please make plans according to the Regions and project needs.
107.25.5 Waste Disposal Practices
Before construction, ensure that the Contractor fully understands the contractual and legal
obligations regarding waste disposal, and verify the proposed disposal methods and sites for
compliance. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Legal and Safety Considerations. The Contractor is responsible for complying with all
applicable Federal and State laws and safety regulations and any applicable local
ordinances with respect to waste disposal and burning of debris, as governed by Section
107 and Section 250 of the Standard Specifications.
2. Burning. Burning of debris, without written approval from the Project Engineer, will not
be permitted. If approved, verify that the Contractor is performing the operation as
specified.
3. Temporary On-Site Storage and Containment. A suitable and properly prepared on-site
location should be used to temporarily store and contain waste and debris until it can be
hauled to a suitable disposal site. Factors that should be considered include waste
composition, location, number of containers, lids, coverings, and drainage. If the
Contractor uses a site on private property, written permission from the landowner is
required and the Contractor shall provide the Project Engineer with a copy (see Section
200).
4. Hazardous Waste. Known and discovered hazardous waste on the project requires special
treatment. See Section 250 for additional information.
107.25.6 Spill Prevention Practices
Spill prevention practices are generally specified on projects where chemicals and hazardous
substances will be used. Refer to the Erosion Control and Storm Water Quality Guide.
100-72
General Provisions
SECTION 108 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS

Section 108 of the Standard Specifications governs the prosecution and progress of the work
performed by the Contractor.
108.1 SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT

Subsection 108.01 of the Standard Specifications requires the Contractor to perform a minimum
of 30 percent of the Contract work with its own forces, excluding specialty items. Cost of
materials and manufactured products to be purchased or produced by the Contractor may be
included in the original contract amount. Prior to subcontracting any work on the project, the
Contractor must submit Form 205 – Sublet Permit Application to the Project Engineer for
signature approval.
See Section 120.10 of this Manual for additional information.
108.2 NOTICE TO PROCEED

The Contractor shall not initiate work on the Contract prior to receiving the written Notice to
Proceed. The Award Officer in the Engineering Contracts unit issues the Notice to Proceed (NTP)
to the Contractor once the contract is fully executed. A PDF copy of the NTP or a link to a copy
in ProjectWise® is posted in SAP in the Purchase Order (PO) as an attachment. Use transaction
ME23N- Display Purchase Order if you know the PO number or ME2J – Purchase Order for Project
if you have the subaccount (project definition or project code).
1. ME23N – Display Purchase Order
Usually, the last PO opened will display, if this is not the PO for the Project you are
looking for, click on the Other Purchase Order button. In the Select Document dialog
box, enter the correct PO number in the Purchase Order field and click on the Other
Document button. Once the PO is opened click on the Services for Object button then
select Attachment List. If the NTP is available, it is in the list, double click the file or
link and open the PDF file.
2. ME2J – Purchase Order for Project
Enter the five-digit Project Definition (subaccount) in the Project field and click
Execute. A list of Purchase Orders (PO) related to the project will display. Scroll to the
PO with the Order type ZG – Highway Construction and double click that row. The PO
will open in a new window. Click on the Services for Object button then select
Attachment List. If the NTP is available in the list, double click the file or link and open
the PDF file.
100-73
General Provisions
108.3 SCHEDULE
Subsection 108.03 of the Standard Special Provision, Revision of Section 108 – Project Schedule
requires the Contractor to submit a Microsoft Project or Primavera Critical Path Method (CPM)
project schedule. The Engineer is required to approve the Preliminary or Baseline Schedule
before work may start. Bar charts are not an acceptable option. It is essential to ensure that
schedule submittal packages include all of the information and reports listed in subsection
108.03(c) Schedule Submittals of the Standard Special Provision, Revision of Section 108 –
Project Schedule. The Engineer is required to retain the electronic files in native file format
(*.mpp for Microsoft Project schedules or *.xer for Primavera schedules) and all reports in
Portable Document Format (PDF) for every schedule submittal. The schedule submittal,
narrative, and reports are necessary for analyzing the planned work, progress of the work,
changes, and delays. The PDF documents are intended to provide a snapshot of the schedule
that cannot be changed. In this guidance, when referring to an approved schedule, the status
of the schedule is either “Approved, no exceptions taken” or “Approved-as-noted” and a
complete schedule submittal includes the native file, the Job Progress Narrative, and all
reports.
CPM schedules are essential for planning and managing the project. The purposes of the
schedules are to:
• demonstrate the Contractor’s plan for executing the work;
• be a reflection of the actual work started, progressed, or completed;
• serve as a communication tool with stakeholders;
• manage CDOT and Contractor resources;
• determine impacts from time-related changes; and
• ensure the critical path is agreeable and logical to all parties.
The intent of the schedule submittal requirement is to empower CDOT and the Contractor to
proactively manage project issues rather than reacting to issues. An additional benefit of this
requirement is that a schedule analysis is favorable and allows for delay issues to be resolved
quickly. In order for CPM schedules to be useful, the Preliminary Schedule, Baseline Schedule,
Project Schedule Updates, and Revised Schedule must be reasonable, accurate, and the
contemporaneous schedule must be updated and maintained in accordance with the
specifications.
108.3.1 Reviewing the Schedule
The Engineer will review all Preliminary, Baseline, Project Schedule Update, and Revised
Schedule submittals including all reports and will provide the Contractor with a written
response based on the review within 10 days of receiving the complete submittal. If the
Engineer approves a schedule in which the Contractor does not include an element of work,
that contains insufficient or incomplete logic, or that contains errors, this will not excuse the
100-74
General Provisions
Contractor from completing all the work within the contract or within contract time. The
Department will only change a contract by issuing a change order. The intent of the review of
the schedule is to understand the Contractor’s plan for completing the work and to ensure it
reflects the contract requirements. Schedule development and project execution is the
Contractor’s responsibility; however, the Engineer has a responsibility to verify that the work
is logically organized and check whether the times allotted to activity durations appear
adequate. The Engineer should not feel obligated to “catch” everything. During the review, it
is important to discuss with the Contractor and document observed issues and inconsistencies
between daily diaries, actual events, and events being shown in the schedule. The Engineer is
also cautioned to take care not to direct the Contractor’s means and methods.
As a project progresses from start to finish, the Contractor is required to submit the schedules
listed in subsection 108.03(d) through (i) of the Standard Special Provision, Revision of Section
108 – Project Schedule as appropriate. Below are some considerations for reviewing each of
these schedules.
1. Reviewing the Schedule Submittal for Completeness
The reviewer first should ensure that schedule submittals are complete. Does the
submittal include all the required components, including the native file and reports in
the correct format? If a submittal is not complete, the Engineer should immediately
notify the Contractor and request the missing information. The Engineer may request this
verbally if it is a minor oversight and consider requesting in the additional information in
writing when it is a greater concern. If the Contractor does not respond timely (consider
about two business days), the Engineer should notify the Contractor in writing on a Form
105 to “Revise and Resubmit”, explaining why the submittal is incomplete and that the
review cannot continue until the submittal is complete. The Engineer should identify
which items are missing and not allow work to start or withhold payments until a
complete package is received. To help ensure that a schedule submittal is complete, see
CPM Schedule Review Checklist 1 – Schedule Submittal (Appendix B). The best response
to each item in the checklist is “yes”.
Next, the reviewer will analyze the schedule to make sure that it is reasonable. When
performing the review, the entire CDOT project team should participate and be engaged.
2. Conducting the Schedule Review Meeting
A Schedule Review meeting should be held following each submission of a Preliminary,

Baseline, Project Schedule Update, or Revised Schedule. The CDOT Project Engineer, the
CDOT schedule consultant (if applicable), the Contractor’s project manager or
superintendent, the individual that developed the Contractor’s schedule, key
subcontractors, and any other key project personnel should participate in the Schedule
Review meeting. To help manage the schedule review efficiently, it is recommended that
the meetings focus on the review and approval of the Schedule and not include other
topics. The Schedule Review meeting is useful to discuss items that are either going well
or not going as planned. For items that are not going as planned, discussion should include
possible mitigation measures that all parties could undertake to improve the situation.
The purpose of the meeting is to:
100-75
General Provisions
• validate that CDOT and the Contractor have a similar understanding of critical
issues and actual/potential schedule risks;
• discuss the Contractor’s approach and sequence to construct the job;
• discuss questions or discrepancies in the schedule to resolve issues and

minimize revisions and resubmissions;
• establish an open line of communication about the schedule.
Timing for the meeting should be as soon as feasible after receipt of a complete schedule
submittal and with enough time to allow the Engineer to respond within 10 days of
submission of the complete schedule. In advance of the meeting, the Engineer and the
CDOT schedule consultant (if applicable) will conduct an in-depth review to assist in
development of the meeting agenda and focus areas. The Engineer may share these
comments with the Contractor in advance of the meeting. Together, the Contractor and
the Engineer will determine who will attend the meeting, who will facilitate the meeting,
and the agenda for the meeting. If possible, and to expedite a response, consider editing
the schedule and narrative during the meeting.
An agenda for Preliminary, Baseline, and Revised Schedule Review meeting may include:
• Introductions (All)
• CDOT will review the Project Scope
• Contractor discussion of the:
• Approach to the Work
• Critical and Near Critical paths with risks and assumptions
• Planned workdays and hours, non-work periods including weather days

included in the schedule, calendars, and their applicability
• Planned completion date and how it fits with contract time
• [Preliminary] The Contractor’s plans and timing to develop and submit the
Baseline Schedule
• [Revised] Added, modified, and deleted activities, logic changes and duration
changes, and critical and near critical path changes with explanations
Engineer discussion of items that:
• Require revision before work may begin
• Are “Approved-as-noted” and require attention before next submittal is

approved
• Are “Approved-as-noted” and only informational
100-76
General Provisions
• Develop next steps to resolve open items
An agenda for Project Schedule Update Schedule Review meeting may include:
• Introductions (All)
• Contractor discussion of the:
• All the work performed
• Status of critical and near critical pending items
• Changes to the planned worked or problems encountered
• Explanations for milestones, critical and near critical activities not progressing
as planned
• Completion date status and if necessary for change
• Current and anticipated delays including effect on work and critical path and
actions needed or taken to avoid and mitigate delay
• For working day contracts, discuss the planned non-working days with actual
work.
• Added, modified, and deleted activities, logic changes and duration changes,
and critical and near critical path changes with explanations for change
Engineer discussion of items that:
• Require revision before work may begin
• Are “Approved-as-noted” and require attention before next submittal is

approved
• Are “Approved-as-noted” and only informational
• Develop next steps to resolve open items
Example of a Successful Baseline Schedule Review:

A Contractor was awarded a mountain corridor project. The scope of the project is fixing
flooding damage. Safety improvements were also made, including widened shoulders,
guardrails, and improved sight distances. A multi-use trail was also improved as part of the
project. The contract was a working day contract, with the overall duration planned over two
construction seasons.
When the Contractor submitted the Baseline Schedule the team had a number of comments. It
was observed that planned weather days and seasonal restrictions for paving were not
accounted for in the project calendars. During the Baseline Review meeting, these items were
discussed. Initially the Contractor thought this would be a minimal impact. However, after
100-77
General Provisions
incorporating the no-work periods into the project calendars, the schedule showed, the work
was going to take three seasons and be a year late! Identifying these risks early in the project
allows the project team time for mitigation and resequencing in order to get the project back
on track.
Realizing major scheduling issues up front provides the best opportunity to make adjustments
that will result in a successful project. With each passing month, the ability to address schedule
concerns becomes more difficult, with new unplanned issues continuously arising. Oftentimes
a single issue might not be considered a major schedule risk, but when multiple issues are
incorporated into the schedule the compounding effect changes the approach for the project.
Note that the Schedule Review meeting and Job Progress Narrative are not intended to qualify
as notice of a delay event. If the Contractor seems to be describing a delay event, the discussion
should focus on actions required by all parties to mitigate a delay event, as opposed to
validation of a delay event. The Engineer will direct the Contractor to follow the time extension
process. If a time extension is required, the Contractor shall submit a written request for an
Extension of Contract Time per subsection 108.08(d) of the Standard Specifications.
3. Reviewing the Preliminary or Baseline Schedule
The Preliminary and Baseline Schedules are necessary because they serve as benchmarks
for subsequent schedule submittals. These schedules will have no progress and will show
all work completed within the contract time. The Contractor may choose to submit either
a Preliminary Schedule and a Baseline Schedule (see A.) or only a Baseline Schedule (see
B). If no schedule is submitted and the Engineer has not approved a Preliminary or
Baseline Schedule, work will not begin. The first submittal is due within 14 days of Award
and before Notice to Proceed is issued. If the submittal is received at this time, the
Engineer and Contractor have approximately 30 days available to hold a Schedule Review
meeting, resolve comments, and respond with approval, before the work is allowed to
start. Subsection 108.02 allows 30 days for the execution of the contract and issuance of
the Notice to Proceed.
a. Preliminary Schedule Submittal – When the project is complex or expected to span

multiple construction seasons, the Contractor may choose to submit a Preliminary
Schedule followed by a Baseline Schedule, allowing the work to begin sooner, and
providing the Contractor more time to develop a complete Baseline Schedule. The
Preliminary Schedule will show the details for the planned activities to take place
in the first 60 working days of the project and include a summary of activities
through planned completion. The detail required for the remainder of the project
duration should include summary tasks by phase or work type. The Engineer will
focus the review on the first 60 days using the Checklist 2 – Preliminary and
Baseline Schedule Checklist. The review of the information after the first 60
working days may be at a cursory level and will focus on determining if the details
of the Preliminary Schedule are reasonable and the logic makes sense. A detailed
review of the remaining activities occurs when reviewing the complete Baseline
Schedule.
When a Preliminary Schedule is submitted, a Baseline Schedule is required by the

45th day after Award. This will typically be a short time after Notice to Proceed
100-78
General Provisions
and the work is likely to have begun (this could be as early as 15 days after work
starts). The Baseline Schedule submitted after a Preliminary Schedule will contain
all the details of the Preliminary Schedule and include additional details for the
remaining portions of the work. Review of the Baseline is described below. If the
Baseline Schedule is not received within 45 days after the contract Award, the
Engineer will withhold payments until a schedule is received. Within the first 60
days, the Engineer will not process payments until a complete Baseline Schedule
is submitted. The Engineer will not allow work to continue past the first 60 days
and will not make payments until a complete Baseline Schedule is approved.
b. Baseline Schedule Submittal – When the Contractor submits a Baseline Schedule,

the review will focus on determining if all the details of the schedule are
reasonable and the logic makes sense. Once the Baseline Schedule is approved;
the Engineer may request the Contractor to set the baseline in the native file
before beginning to show progress in the schedule. Until the Baseline Schedule is
approved, the Contractor should not show progress in the Schedule.
The Engineer should check the schedule to see if:
• all contract work has been addressed.
• durations are realistic.
• production rates are reasonable.
Checklist 2 – Preliminary and Baseline Schedule (Appendix B) will help determine topics for the
Schedule Review meeting and the items the Contractor needs to address. It is possible that
some of the items listed will not apply to every project. The best response to each item in the
checklist is “yes”. If a statement applies and you cannot answer yes, decide if you should
approve or require corrections and resubmit.
4. Reviewing the Project Schedule Update
The Project Schedule Update should include all actual work completed up to, but not
including the cut-off date for the monthly progress pay estimate; this will be the Data
Date in the schedule. Checklist 3 – Project Schedule Update Checklist (Appendix B)
provides a list of items to review. If any of the items in Checklist 3 are found in the
Project Schedule Update, they also should be discussed in the Job Progress Narrative and
discussed at the Schedule Review meeting.
As the project progresses and regardless of the Contract Time, the Planned Completion
Date on the final activity may vary in the update. When a Project Schedule Update has a
completion date later than the contract completion date and is approved, such approval
does not change the contract requirement to complete the work on time. Only a change
order can change the contract completion date. When there is a substantial variation in
milestone dates or the completion date, the Job Progress Narrative should address the
Contractor’s plan for completing the work on time. The Job Progress Narrative and
Schedule Review meeting are not intended to qualify as notice of a delay event. When
the Contractor describes a delay, the discussion should focus on actions required by all
100-79
General Provisions
parties to mitigate a delay, as opposed to validation of a delay. The Engineer will direct
the Contractor to follow the Request for Extension of Contract Time process. If a time
extension is required, the Contractor shall submit a written request for an Extension of
Contract Time per subsection 108.08(d) of the Standard Specifications.
When reviewing a Project Schedule Update, focus on the critical and near critical
activities. Evaluate the work planned versus what was accomplished, by comparing the
planned start and finish dates, durations to the Update’s actual start, actual finish,
actual duration, and actual percent complete of activities. Verify this with field staff and
daily diaries. Evaluate if there were activities that may have had progress, but none
reported. A failure to report progress on activities can significantly influence float
calculations.
Evaluate any work that did not start when planned and when non-critical work was not
performed when planned or was performed out of sequence. Also consider the impact to
the Contractor’s resources; when similar work is stacking, evaluate if the Contractor has
adequate resources to complete this work. This should not interfere with activities that
are CDOT’s responsibility. For example, if CDOT has a review period of 10 days, the
schedule should also allow for 10 days. When non-critical work has experienced
significant slippage or has been performed out of sequence, the Contractor is expected
to explain the reasoning.
With a good Baseline Schedule, if no significant scope or work changes were encountered
during the month, there should be minimal, changes to the schedule activities, original
durations, logic, and critical path. If significant changes are made to activities, durations,
logic, or the critical path, refer to the Reviewing the Revised Schedule section. The Job
Progress Narrative should clearly explain the need for changes to the schedule. When the
Contractor makes changes to original durations, carefully review that the submittal
reflects the actual plan to complete the work. Look for changed, added, or removed
activities on the critical path. Focus the review on these items to determine if the
changes are reasonable. Analyze the reasoning for the changes and evaluate if they are
made in an effort to hide or minimize a known delay or other event.
The Job Progress Narrative should include a discussion of the past months and upcoming
month’s work. The Engineer should also review these items with the Weekly Planning
Schedule. The Project Schedule Update, Job Progress Narrative, and Weekly Planning
Schedule should align with each other.
Note that Microsoft Project will automatically add a constraint on incomplete work and
may show an early finish date completion in the past. This is a flaw with Microsoft Project
and needs to be evaluated during the schedule review. Microsoft Project allows
progressing of the schedule so that an incomplete activity’s early finish date is calculated
based upon remaining duration without taking into consideration the data date. This
happens when the planned duration would have the activity completed before the data
date and the actual duration spans past the data date. This must be corrected to reflect
the actual start and actual planned duration and when the activity is complete the actual
finish date. Work in progress that has not been completed cannot show an early finish
date in the past.
Often, work will have occurred in the period of time between the submittal of the Project
Schedule Update and the review and approval of the schedule. When reviewing the
100-80
General Provisions
schedule, the Engineer should keep in mind the progress made during this time or work
that occurs differently than originally planned. Keep in mind the schedule is a snapshot
in time and the focus should be on the plan to complete the work.
Checklist 3 – Project Schedule Update (Appendix B) will help determine topics for the Schedule
Review meeting and the items the Contractor needs to address. It is possible that some of the
items listed will not apply to every project. The best response to each item in the checklist is
“Yes”. If statement applies, and you cannot answer “yes,” decide if you should respond
Approve-as-noted, require Revise and resubmit, or require a Revised Schedule.
5. Reviewing the Weekly Planning Schedule
The Weekly Planning Schedule (WPS) shows the Contractor’s and all subcontractor’s
planned activities for a minimum of the upcoming two weeks and a summary of the actual
work performed for the previous week. This information should be used in comparing the
previous WPS and the current Project Schedule Update. This schedule is typically detailed
at the activity level and shall include the description, responsible party, duration and
sequence of work activities, and anticipated lane closures to allow for the planning of
upcoming activities. Ideally, the WPS should be an extraction from the Project Schedule
and based on a CPM analysis. The Engineer may accept a time-scaled logic bar chart or
other standard format. The WPS does not require the reports or native file submittal
requirements and it should be sufficiently detailed to explain the work. It is a best
management practice for the project team to hold a weekly schedule meeting to discuss
upcoming work, traffic patterns and lane closures, and to document the discussions.
6. Reviewing the Revised Schedule
The Engineer should require a Revised Schedule from the Contractor when there is a
major contract or schedule change. A request for the Revised Schedule is required in
writing and the Contractor shall respond within 10 days of the request. The Revised
Schedule must include a description and analysis of the changes, including any impact to
the Contractor’s planned completion date or the contract completion date. A Revised
Schedule shall include all the requirements of (c) Schedule Submittals.
Require the Contractor to submit a Revised Schedule when the original Baseline Schedule
no longer reflects how the work is being performed. This will help to determine if delays
are attributable to the changes in the schedule or are due to something else.
108.3.2 Schedule Reports
The Contractor is required to provide several reports that facilitate a review. These reports are
particularly helpful if the Contractor is using Primavera and the Engineer does not have access
to the software. The Engineer may also request an exported copy of the schedule data in a
spreadsheet (.xlsx) copy of the reports to help with review of the information. Tips for
reviewing these reports are listed below:
1. The Job Progress Narrative Report should discuss progress and highlight and explain
changes from the previous schedule submittal. It should also discuss issues that occurred,
and issues anticipated in the future. A narrative should include the following items, as
appropriate:
100-81
General Provisions
a. Baseline, Preliminary, and Revised Schedules:
It is important to review the production rates indicated in the Narrative, to check

that they are reasonable and attainable. The production rates should also be
compared to activity durations in the schedule to make sure that they agree. For
example, if a Narrative shows a production rate of 1,000 LF/day for installation
of curb and gutter and the plan quantity is 10,000 LF, the corresponding activity
in the schedule should have a duration of at least 10 days. If the duration is only
5 days, discuss with the Contractor to determine how the contractor plans to
accomplish this with the production rate. It could be that the contractor plans to
use two crews to perform the work. Significant differences in time may indicate
an error in the schedule and require additional discussion. A schedule may be
“Approved as Noted” if the Engineer disagrees with minor items such as overly
optimistic production rates or the logic between activities.
b. Project Schedule Update:
• Identification of actual schedule progress during the reporting period.
• Actual progress compared to contractual milestones during this period.
• A list of significant activities started or completed during the reporting period.
• Explanation of lack of progress on critical path activities planned to be performed

during the previous reporting period.
• The status of major material and equipment procurements.
• Identification of difficulties encountered (delays) during the reporting period.
• Explanation of any significant schedule variances from the Baseline Schedule plan.
If there are any, a Revised Schedule may be needed
2. The Predecessor Activity and Successor Activity Report should list the schedule logic
including Lags and for each activity. It is usually difficult to read logic ties on a network
diagram and when the schedule is developed using Primavera, this report can help with
the review of workflow logic. Also, it can be used to verify the activities on the critical
path, and any other path. In reviewing the report, look for activities with at least one
Predecessor and at least one Successor, or activities that have a start-to-start
relationship and only have start-to-start Successors, or activities that have a finish-to-
finish relationship and only have finish-to-finish Predecessors. When this is the case and
before approval, the Contractor is required to tie all activities into the schedule to
determine a reliable critical path or paths and the project duration.
3. The Early Start Report lists all activities sorted by actual start, if started; and early start
date, if planned. The early start is the earliest that an activity can start, based on the
completion of predecessor activities. This report is intended to identify the work that is
coming up next. The Contractor could use this report to develop the Weekly Planning
Schedule. The Engineer will compare the report to the Weekly Planning Schedule and
discrepancies should be discussed as the work progresses.
100-82
General Provisions
4. The Float Report lists all activities sorted in ascending order of Total Float. This report
will help identify the Critical Path, Critical activities, and Near Critical activities. Delays
to the Critical activities can delay the project completion date. Use this report in
conjunction with the Job Progress Narrative Report and ensure the Contractor addresses
significant changes to float that occurred from the last reporting period in the narrative.
5. The Critical Path Report lists the completion percentage for partially completed
activities, sorted by float and then by early start. This report provides a good status of
the project and could help you to identify issues that could impact completion of the
project within contract time. Any changes to activities on this report should be discussed
in the Job Progress Narrative Report.
6. The list of all non-workdays identifies the plan for anticipated days in the project and
activity calendars with no work planned. Typically, this may include Holidays, no work
periods identified in the contract such as free time, or anticipated weather days. When
reviewing this report with the Preliminary and Baseline Schedules, the report should
include the required non-workdays such as Saturday, Sunday, Holidays, and other
contract restrictions. It is acceptable that the Contractor includes a reasonable number
of anticipated weather days in the schedule and this list. This helps the schedule reflect
a realistic planned completion date. When reviewing a schedule, update the planned
non-workdays to reflect that work occurred. This should also match the Time Count. If
this is not performed, the planned completion date is incorrect.
108.3.3 Comparison Tools (coming soon)
1. Using Excel
2. Using MSP
3. Using Primavera reports (and Claim Digger)
4. Creating an As-Built schedule
108.3.4 When to respond with “Approved, no exceptions taken,” “Approved-

as-noted,” or “Revise and Resubmit”
The Engineer will approve the schedule as submitted if it is reasonable and complete. If the
schedule is complete, follows the requirements, and is mostly reasonable, but the reviewer
disagrees with some specific items, the Engineer will approve the schedule with notes. The
notes need to be specific and focused on whether the schedule is reasonable. However, the
response should not direct the Contractor’s means and methods. By approving the schedule
submittal with notes, a record is created, and it can be helpful if problems arise later. Some
examples of when notes are appropriate:
1. The reviewer questions the durations for specific activities and the Contractor is sure it
can accomplish the work in that time, the Engineer can approve the schedule with a
comment that production rates or durations seem overly optimistic. This comment will
be helpful later if the Contractor fails to achieve planned production rates.
100-83
General Provisions
2. The reviewer questions logic between activities. Approval can include a note questioning
whether it is necessary to finish final striping before setting guardrail. This is helpful
when the Contractor uses preferential logic or when an activity A and activity B can be
scheduled in any order.
If the Contractor submits a Baseline Schedule with a planned early completion, respond
“Approved-as-noted” and include this statement:
The planned completion date reflected on (insert Contractor’s name)

Baseline schedule is expected [pick one: 1) on mm/dd/yyyy; 2) after
### Working Days; or 3) after ### Calendar Days]. The Contractor’s bid
includes all compensation for the work and administration of the
project through the Contract completion date. When the work extends
past the Baseline Schedule planned completion date up to and
including the Contract Completion date of [pick one: 1) mm/dd/yyyy;
2) ### Working Days; or 3) ### Calendar Days], the Contractor is not
entitled to additional time or compensation.
Finally, if there are significant reasons the Engineer cannot approve the schedule, the written
response to the Contractor will include specific comments describing the reasons for revision
and resubmittal. Be sure to document the dates the schedule is returned and the resubmitted
schedule is received.
To assist the Engineer with enforcement, subsection 108.03(d) of the Standard Special
Provision, Revision of Section 108 – Project Schedule states that no work will begin until the
Preliminary Schedule or Baseline Schedules is approved. In addition, if the Contractor has
submitted a Preliminary Schedule, the Baseline Schedule must be approved in accordance with
subsection 108.03(e) of the Standard Special Provision, Revision of Section 108 – Project
Schedule, otherwise further partial payments should not be made. If it becomes necessary to
withhold payment, notify the Resident Engineer and Program Engineer to obtain their
concurrence. Consistent enforcement of these subsections will help ensure that the Contractor
provides reasonable and timely schedule submittals. Checklist 4 – Revise and Resubmit Schedule
(Appendix B) lists issues that require revision of the Schedule. When these items are answered
“yes,” consider requiring corrections and requiring the contractor to resubmit the submittal.
108.3.5 When Should the Engineer Withhold Progress Payment?
Keep in mind the work will not start until the complete Preliminary or Baseline Schedule is
received and approved. Complete means the submittal includes the native file, the Job Progress
Narrative, and all reports.
When a Preliminary Schedule is submitted, a Baseline Schedule is required by the 45th day after
Award. Withhold payments if the complete Baseline Schedule is not received within 45 days
after Award and continue to withhold until a complete schedule submittal is received. Within
the first 60 days of work, the Engineer will not process a payment until a complete Baseline
100-84
General Provisions
Schedule is submitted. The Engineer will not allow work to continue past the first 60 days and
will not make payments until a complete Baseline Schedule is approved.
When the first schedule submitted is only a Baseline Schedule, the Engineer will withhold
payments when the Contractor does not submit a complete Project Schedule Update. When the
Contractor submits a complete Project Schedule Update, the current monthly payment will be
paid before the submittal is reviewed and approved. By the following month’s payment, the
Engineer will withhold payments when the schedule submittal is incomplete or is not approved.
Before withholding a payment, the Engineer will discuss the reasoning with the Resident
Engineer and Program Engineer and obtain their concurrence.
108.3.6 When is a Scheduling Consultant Needed?
The need to use a schedule consultant’s expertise to assist in reviewing the Contractor’s
schedules should be analyzed before advertisement of the project. Once the need to use
support is determined, including scheduling assistance in the Statement of Work of a
construction management contract is the best way to provide this support. The Area Engineers
have Non-Project Specific contracts available for disputes and claims and they include schedule
review. Contact the Area Engineer for more information on using these contracts.
The schedule consultant selected should be skilled in schedule analysis, understand heavy
highway transportation construction, and have access to the same scheduling software that the
Contractor uses. Ability to review the jobsite and attend project meetings is also helpful but
not required.
Consider using a schedule consultant to assist with the review of all schedules when a project
is large, complex, essential to complete on time for other projects or stakeholders, or the type
of work has a high potential for a delay. If a project is of medium to low complexity and includes
a potential for delay, the Engineer may choose to have the schedule consultant only review the
Baseline Schedule, and the Project Engineer may review the Project Schedule Updates. The
Engineer may also choose the assistance of a schedule consultant to assist with the analysis of
added or changed work or requests for extension of contract time.
When a consultant is supporting the Engineer, the Engineer will not hand over the schedule
consultant’s reports or deliverables directly to the Contractor. The Engineer is responsible for
reviewing the schedule consultant’s reports or deliverables and developing a response.
Checklist 5 - Schedule Risk Analysis (Appendix B) provides points to consider when analyzing
schedule risk to decide if a schedule consultant is necessary. When responses are more often
High or High and Medium, it is an indication that using a schedule consultant could help manage
the schedule.
100-85
General Provisions
108.4 PAYMENT SCHEDULE

In accordance with the February 1, 2010, Memorandum issued by Executive Director, Russell
George, all projects require a drawdown schedule, and the data shall be entered in the SAP
system. (See Standard Special Provision Revision of Section 108 Payment Schedule (Single
Construction Year). The purposes for maintaining a drawdown schedule are:
1. To aid CDOT in becoming a “cash management” organization.
2. To providing more accurate time and cost estimates – before and after budgeting
projects.
3. To enhance internal communication links at key times.
4. To provide a standardized tool and approach to project management.
108.4.1 Payment Schedule
A Payment Schedule is also known as a drawdown schedule from a contractor and is required
for all CDOT construction projects. The larger the project budget the more important it
becomes that the drawdown schedule be managed. The contractor shall provide a Payment
Schedule for the contract amount, planned force account work, and expected incentive
payments. The Project Engineer is responsible for estimating and maintaining the drawdown
schedule for the project’s encumbered funds not in the contractor’s control. The Project
Engineer will need to account for the additional force account funds and other costs that may
be expended during the construction phase.
CDOT personnel and consultant construction engineering charges paid from the CE Pool do not
need to be included in the drawdown because they are captured through other processes.
Bridge Enterprise and CE exempt projects where the charges are applied directly to the project
are exceptions meaning the Project Engineer should include them in the drawdown schedule.
If Right-of-Way, Utility, or Railroad or other funds will be paid during the construction phase,
they should also be included in the drawdown schedule in the Construction WBS. Since they are
generally a one-time payment, enter the estimated amount in the future month when the
expected payment will be made.
The contractor is required to submit an Initial Payment Schedule at the Preconstruction

Conference that includes planned force account work and expected incentive payments.
The Project Engineer shall review the submittal for completeness.
Once work begins, a Payment Schedule update is required each month by the first of each
month. The best practice is to receive the update after the last progress payment is made. The
Project Engineer shall review the update completeness. Drawdown schedules shall reflect the
current remaining encumbered balance for the duration of construction. The drawdown data
does not need to be corrected for discrepancies between actual cash flow (past) versus the
drawdown schedules for previous months.
100-86
General Provisions
Many project drawdowns and the encumbered balance will not match, and this is expected in
order to be accurate. Examples when this may happen are:
1. A construction project where the full encumbered amount will not be spent. The contract
may be under budget so the encumbered funds will be more than the drawdown schedule.
2. A construction project that has been completed and there are still funds encumbered
but the project has not had final payment yet. The encumbered amount will be more
than the drawdown schedule.
3. A project that is running behind schedule.
108.5 LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS
Subsection 108.05 of the Standard Specifications gives the Project Engineer authority to alter
the sequence of work. Such authority should be exercised with discretion, because altering the
sequence of work could increase Contractor costs and result in a claim. The alteration of the
planned sequence of work should only be considered if it minimizes traffic interference and is
essential to public convenience.
108.6 CHARACTER OF WORKERS; METHODS AND EQUIPMENT

108.6.1 Personnel and Equipment Considerations
Poor supervision, inadequate number of workers and insufficiently maintained equipment

contribute to poor progress and, in some instances, unsatisfactory work. Unsatisfactory work
and poor progress frequently result in requests for time extensions, disputes, and claims. The
Project Engineer and project staff must document observations of Contractor operations,
equipment, and personnel to ensure that adequate information is available if it becomes
necessary to evaluate a request for time extension and a dispute or claim.
108.6.2 Removal of Project Personnel
Subsection 108.06 of the Standard Specifications gives the Project Engineer authority to remove
any Contractor or subcontractor personnel, including Superintendents and owners, if their work
is not being performed in a proper and skillful manner. In such situations, discuss the matter
with the Resident Engineer and the Region Program Engineer. If removal is necessary, request
in writing, listing specific information, that the Contractor remove the personnel from the
project. If the Contractor fails to comply with the request, the Project Engineer may suspend
work with a written stop work order until the Contractor complies. The details of the
circumstances leading to the decision will be documented in writing. The notes must be factual
without personal comment or opinion.
108.7 WORKPLACE VIOLENCE

Subsection 108.07 of the Standard Specifications outlines that any representative or employee
of the Contractor, or any subcontractor, who commits an act of workplace violence on the
100-87
General Provisions
project shall be sanctioned as provided by the Contractor’s employment policies and, where
appropriate, shall be reported to law enforcement authorities. At the request of either the
Contractor or the Project Engineer, the Project Engineer and the Contractor shall meet to
discuss appropriate actions to be taken against the representative or employee. Appropriate
action may include removing the representative or employee from the project. If removal is
warranted and the Contractor fails to remove the representative or employee, the Project
Engineer may suspend the work by written notice until compliance is achieved.
Subsection 101.95 defines workplace violence.
108.8 DETERMINATION AND EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME

108.8.1 General
After the Final Office Review and the resolution of all design issues affecting the scope of work,
the Project Engineer will use CPM scheduling, experience, and good engineering judgment to
determine the contract time the Department will allow for completing the project. The results
of this analysis will be reported on Form 859 – Project Control Data (see Appendix B).
As needed, refer to the FHWA Technical Advisory No. T 5080.15, 10/15/02 - FHWA Guide for
Construction Contract Time Determination Procedures and consider the guidelines presented in
the Sections that follow.
The link for this advisory is: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/construction/contracts/t508015.cfm
The Project Engineer will use Microsoft Project software to facilitate and document the
determination of contract time.
108.8.2 Factors Influencing Contract Time
Contract time is typically specified in working days; however, calendar days or a fixed
completion date may be used if warranted by unique features of the project. Contract time
will vary from project to project. Consider the following factors when determining contract
time:
1. urgency of the proposed improvement;
2. impact on local businesses and property access;
3. need for coordination with other projects;
4. requirements for irrigation;
5. impacts of scheduled special events and holidays;
6. time needed for construction surveying;
7. type of traffic management required;
100-88
General Provisions
8. interruptions to traffic flow and required construction phasing;
9. inconvenience to the traveling public, including the traffic volume affected;
10. safety of both the public and the project workforce;
11. seasonal impacts on construction activities;
12. time required to obtain permits and mix designs;
13. time required for material fabrication and delivery;
14. concrete curing time, including placement sequence and phasing;
15. special sections and features requiring staged or phased construction; and
16. impact of local noise ordinances on construction activity.
When determining contract time, it will be necessary to establish production rates for items of
work on the project. The production rates used in developing the CPM schedule should be
included in the “notes” section of the software for each task. Note that accelerated production
rates (i.e., those faster than the average Contractor can perform) generally decrease contract
time and may increase cost and limit competition.
Production rates for items of work that are used to determine contract time should:
1. be project specific, incorporating the special features and construction sequences of the
project;
2. represent the production achievable by an average Contractor, unless the work item is
of a specialized or critical nature; and
3. be based on a typical eight-hour workday unless project priority or special requirements

warrant the use of multiple shifts or night work.
Resurfacing projects can be an exception. The Project Engineer should establish a schedule
that allows the Contractor flexibility. A flexible schedule will result in the lowest price by
allowing Contractors to make efficient use of their resources.
108.8.3 Guidelines for Preparing Form 859
Appendix B presents examples and guidance for completing Form 859 – Project Control Data.
Use the following procedures when preparing the CPM Schedule:
1. List Items of Work. List the items of work, required submittals (MHTs, Shop Drawings,
Form 43, etc.) and fabrication times in the chronological order that they will be
performed on the project.
2. Determine Controlling Items of Work. The controlling items of work on the project or is
also considered an activity on the critical path. The critical path is determined by the
100-89
General Provisions
scheduling software based upon the logic and durations input into the program. A
controlling item is not synonymous with a salient feature. A controlling item will increase
the project’s time to completion if its duration increases. A salient feature is an item
that may be of special or political interest to scheduling but will not affect the project’s
overall completion schedule.
3. Project Phasing. Project phasing is generally established by hypothetically constructing

the project. Each project phase will consist of one or more items of work, some of which
may be controlling. A project phase becomes critical if by increasing its duration the
project’s overall completion schedule is extended.
Consider the following when determining project phasing:
a. scheduling of material fabrication and delivery,
b. scheduling of sequential and concurrent construction activities,
c. completing special project features, and
d. impacts of maintaining traffic on the facility.
It is likely that traffic management will affect construction phasing. Many projects
require traffic to be maintained on one lane of existing pavement while an adjacent
lane is being resurfaced. Once completed, the newly paved lane is opened to traffic
while the remainder of the facility is being resurfaced.
4. Determine Production Rates. Determine an estimated daily production rate for each item
of work included in the CPM Schedule. Production rates should be included in the “notes”
section of the software for each item. Consider the following when determining
production rates:
a. Information Sources. As needed, use the following sources of information when

determining specific production rates for the project:
i. CDOT Engineering Estimates and Market Analysis Unit,
ii. project diaries of similar projects in the same location,
iii. experienced Region construction personnel,
iv. experienced Region materials personnel,
v. method statements from similar projects, and
vi. local contractors and contractor associations.
b. Geographic Area. Consider the impacts that geographic location will have on
production rates. For example, the daily production rate for unclassified
excavation for a project located on the plains may be different from that for a
project located in the mountains. The production rate for a project in Denver may
be different from a project in a more rural location.
100-90
General Provisions
c. Quantities of Work. Consider the impact the project’s magnitude will have in
terms of the relative quantities of work required for the critical path.
d. Material Availability. Consider how the availability of materials will affect

production rates for controlling items of work. Also, consider factors such as
material sources, crushing rates, and haul distance.
e. Traffic Delays. Consider the impact that traffic congestion through the work zone
will have on production rates.
f. Weather. Consider the time of year the work will be performed and the potential
for weather impacts to production.
5. Determine Contract time. To determine the Contract time required to complete the
work, calculate the longest logical path through the CPM schedule driven by calendars,
constraints, and logic.
108.8.4 Alternative Delivery Time Methods
The following methods are innovative contract time methods and explanations of each can be
found in the Innovative Contract Guide Manual
https://www.codot.gov/business/designsupport/adp-db-cmgc:
1. A + B Method. The A + B method considers the daily road user costs in determining the
low bid. If this method is used, the Department will establish the unit price for each
calendar day based on the daily road user costs and include this information in the bid
documents. The Contractor bids the number of days it will use to complete the project.
The low bid is determined by combining the total bid price of all Contract items and the
total bid price for the number of calendar days the Contractor determines will be
necessary to complete the project.
2. Incentive/Disincentive Clauses. Incentive clauses motivate the Contractor for early

completion of the project. Disincentive clauses are intended to recover damages to the
traveling public for late completion. The use of incentive and disincentive clauses will
be determined on a project-by-project basis.
3. Delayed Start Date. Where a delayed start date is used, the contract time will be
controlled by the long lead-time that is required to obtain project materials (e.g.,
lighting and signal equipment, fabricated steel members). If this method is used, the
Contract will specify a period for fabrication and delivery as well as one for the number
of working days allowed for construction. Time charges will begin at the end of the
fabrication and delivery period.
4. Floating Start Date. Where a floating start date is used, the earliest and latest
permissible start dates will be specified with the number of working days required for
the project. The use of a floating start date will be determined on a project-by project
basis.
100-91
General Provisions
108.8.5 Guidelines for Charging and Reporting Project Time
108.8.5.1 Form 262 and Form 263
Project time charges will be determined and documented by the Project Engineer in
SiteManager on either Form 262 – Weekly Time Count Report – Work Days or Form 263 – Weekly
Time Count Report – Calendar Days, depending on the method used for the project. See Section
120.6.1 for additional information on documentation requirements.
108.8.5.2 Progress Schedule Considerations
Sound engineering judgment, experience, and careful examination of the Contractor’s

operations and progress schedule are required to properly determine project time charges.
Consider the progress schedule presented in Figure 100 - 10:
EXAMPLE PROJECT SCHEDULE

Figure 100 - 6
In Figure 100 - 7, the critical path of the project is identified by the bars in red (i.e., Phase I –
Major Structures, Phase II – Grading, Phase III – Paving). The controlling item of work in Phase I
is the major structure, and any delay to this work will delay completion of the project. Because
grading in Phase I is not a controlling item, any delay to this item will not affect project
completion. The following observations should be made regarding project time charges:
1. In Phase I, the determination of project time charges should be based on the Contractor's
ability to effectively prosecute the work on the major structure.
2. In Phase 1, full days should be charged when work on the major structure can be
effectively prosecuted, whether or not the Contractor works on the structure and even
if the grading operation is completely shut down.
3. In Phase 1, no time should be charged if work on the major structure cannot be

effectively prosecuted, even though the Contractor is able to effectively work on
grading. It is possible for a project to appear active without warranting project time
charges.
4. Time should be charged if the reason that the Contractor does not effectively prosecute
the work was within the Contractor’s control.
100-92
General Provisions
108.8.5.3 Charges for Full Working Days
Use the following guidelines to determine when a full working day should be charged to the
project:
1. Minimum Hours of Daily Progress. A full working day should be charged when the
Contractor effectively prosecuted the controlling item of work or was able to prosecute
the controlling item of work and elected not to for at least six hours.
2. Contractor Elected Not to Work. Charge a full working day if the Contractor could have
effectively prosecuted the controlling item of work for at least six hours but elected not
to. This criterion applies as long as the reason for not prosecuting the work was under
the Contractor’s control.
3. Contractor Elected to Delay Progress. Charge a full working day if the Contractor worked
on the controlling item, but the actual rate of production was slower than normally
achievable. This criterion applies as long as the reason for the delay was under the
Contractor’s control and typically occurs when the Contractor appears to be working but
is actually performing an operation that is not progressing the controlling item, such as
during clean-up operations.
4. Plant and Equipment Breakdowns. Charge a full working day if progress on the controlling
item of work was delayed by plant or equipment breakdowns. Breakdowns are under the
Contractor’s control.
5. Material Delivery. Where material delivery delays the progress of the controlling item of
work, charge a full working day if the delay was caused by:
a. Contractor not ordering materials in a timely manner;
b. suppliers reprioritizing their customer deliveries;
c. Contractor reordering and replacing materials rejected by CDOT;
d. financial problems of the Contractor, manufacturer, or supplier; or
e. causes foreseeable by the Contractor, manufacturer, or supplier.
6. Disputes and Claims. If the Contractor notifies the Project Engineer of an intent to file a
dispute or claim, continue to charge full working days, as appropriate.
108.8.5.4 Charges for Less Than Full Working Days
Use the following guidelines to determine when less than a full working day should be charged
to the project, and provide an explanation for the decision on Form 262 or Form 263, whichever
is appropriate for the method of contract time:
1. Delays Beyond Contractor Control. Charge less than a full working day if the prosecution
of work on the controlling item was not active or active at less than full efficiency due
100-93
General Provisions
to a delay caused by interference beyond the control and fault of the Contractor. In such
situations, charge project time as follows:
a. Two to Six Hours of Effective Work. Charge a half day of project time if the
Contractor was able to effectively prosecute the controlling item of work for two
to six hours.
b. Less Than Two Hours of Effective Work. No time should be charged if the
Contractor was only able to effectively prosecute the controlling item of work for
less than two hours.
2. Adverse Weather Delays. When the Time Count basis is a Working Day Contract or
Calendar Day Contract, adverse weather delays only apply to days the Contractor is
allowed to prosecute the work. Use the guidelines presented in item 1 Delays Beyond
Contractor Control to charge less than a full working day if the prosecution of work on
the controlling item was delayed by adverse weather.
The recovery time required to attain the approximate condition of the work prior to the
event should be recorded as unworkable weather. For example, after a heavy snowstorm,
the Contractor is unable to work for four days. The storm started at 11 am on the first
day, the Contractor could not clear the work area for the next two days, and the fourth
day the subgrade was too saturated to safely allow equipment on the subgrade. If the
storm occurred on a Monday, that day would be a half daytime charge and no time would
be charged on Tuesday through Thursday. If the storm occurred on a Saturday for a
Working Day Contract, no time would be charged on Saturday through Tuesday. If that
scenario occurred on a Calendar Day Contract, no time would be charged on Monday and
Tuesday. Time would be charged on Saturday and Sunday because the Contractor could
not have worked, regardless of the storm.
3. Right-of-Way, Utilities, and Railroads. As a condition for advertisement and award, CDOT
must certify that right-of-way, utility, and railroad work has been completed or properly
coordinated with construction to avoid unnecessary delays. Coordination, if required,
will be included in the contract time and Project Special Provisions. Charges for less than
full working days generally will not be considered for such delays, because the Contractor
should have accounted for these situations in its proposal. However, charges for less than
full working days, as presented in Item #1, should be considered under the following
conditions:
a. the construction work was delayed by right-of-way, utility, or railroad

interference beyond the time frame established in the Contract;
b. the Contractor did everything required by the Contract to minimize the delay;
and
c. CDOT was unable to exercise effective control of the situation, despite its best
efforts.
108.8.5.5 Charges for Free Time
Time count stops during “Free Time” when defined in the Project Special Provisions.
100-94
General Provisions
108.8.5.6 Challenges by the Contractor
If project time charges are challenged, the Contractor shall provide written notification to the
Project Engineer within 30 working days of receipt of time count for the period in contention.
108.8.6 Extension of Contract Time
If an event, action, or factor beyond the control and fault of the Contractor causes an extension
to the project completion date, an extension of contract time may be warranted. Contract time
should be extended if the Project Engineer determines that the delays have resulted from
conditions beyond the control and fault of the Contractor. In evaluating the delays, the Project
Engineer should compare actual production and the Contractor’s Project Schedule Update in
affect at the time of delay occurrence and whether the difference is a result of circumstances
beyond the Contractor’s control.
Consider the following guidelines when evaluating contract time extensions:

1. Excusable Delays. Any delay to a critical activity or activities or caused the critical path
to change to include the activity or activities and was not caused by the Contractor or
which the risk was assigned solely to CDOT. Excusable delays are further defined as
compensable (i.e., money) and non-compensable (i.e., time, but no money) as follows:
a. Compensable Delays. A compensable delay is an excusable delay for which the

Contractor may be entitled to additional monetary compensation. For example,
a design plan error caused a delay to the critical path, which resulted in a delay
to project completion. The Contractor is entitled to additional compensation in
accordance with 109.10.
When CDOT elects to add or changed scope, to consider additional time, the
critical path must be affected. If new items are needed or existing items are
modified, the compensation for additional time is typically included in the added
or modified items.
b. Non-compensable Delays. A non-compensable delay is an excusable delay for

which the Contractor may be entitled to a contract time extension with no
additional monetary compensation. Examples of non-compensable delays include
acts of God, acts of the public enemy, fires, floods, area wide strikes, freight
embargoes, and unusually severe weather conditions. These are typically
considered Force Majeure delays. Non-compensable delays also include delays
caused by fuel shortage and material delivery, if the delay is due to unusual
market conditions such as industry-wide strikes, national disasters, and area-wide
shortages. For this type of delay, consideration of compensation will be for time
only, not money.
2. Non-excusable Delays. Any delay that was reasonably foreseeable or within the
Contractor’s control is a non-excusable delay, and no additional time or monetary
compensation will be considered. For example, a delay caused by the Contractor not
placing a material order in a timely manner would be non-excusable.
100-95
General Provisions
3. Concurrent Delays. Occur when two or more independent delays occur at the same time
or overlap for a period of time. In concept, excusable concurrent delays offset
compensation to either party.
Delay Event Concurrent with Net Effect

Another Contractor Non-excusable to Contractor and
Contractor Delay
Delay or Nothing Compensable to Owner (LDs)
Another Owner Compensable to Contractor and Non-
Owner Delay
Delay or Nothing excusable to Owner (no LDs)
Excusable to Contractor and Non-
Owner Delay Contractor Delay
compensable to both parties
Excusable but Non-compensable to
Force Majeure with anything
Contractor
Figure 100 - 7
If it is determined that an excusable delay occurred, the Project Engineer shall extend the
Contract time as soon as possible after the delay occurs and the amount of time is known. If
the Contractor delays providing information to determine the amount of time owed, it is
acceptable to issue a change order with the time the Engineer can substantiate. If the delay is
compensable, refer to subsection 109.10. Waiting until the end of the project because the
Contractor may make up the time, is not valid. The reason for issuing time as soon as possible
is to avoid a claim for constructive acceleration. The Contractor may argue that the time is
excusable and because time was not granted, it accelerated efforts to avoid being charged
Liquidated Damages.
An extension of contract time, if warranted, requires the execution of a change order, as

discussed in Section 120.7.7. The Engineer will apply the timeframes for requesting time. The
Contractor is required to notify CDOT in writing within seven days and provide the full details
within 30 days of the written notice. If the Contractor does not do this, they have given up
entitlement to time and money. A few of other points to consider in determining an extension
of time, the delay has to affect the critical path, the Contractor is required to reasonably
attempt to mitigate the delay, and an approved schedule with a data date within 30 days of
the delay is required. To determine the amount of time allowed, the Engineer will use either a
Time-Impact Analysis, a reasonable analysis method from the AACE® International
Recommended Practice 29R-03 Forensic Schedule Analysis, or another acceptable analysis
method.
108.8.7 Holiday and Special Event Construction Operation Restrictions
In addition to the construction operation restrictions on Saturdays and Sundays, operations are
restricted on and around New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,
Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. The holiday construction operation restrictions are
illustrated in following two tables:
100-96
General Provisions
Figure 100 - 8
During the preconstruction phase, considerations for additional construction operation

restrictions should be considered based on the traffic volumes, special events or other factors
100-97
General Provisions
related to the holiday or event where operations may severely impact traffic. The Project
Engineer should consult with the Resident Engineer, Region Traffic Engineer, and the region
Lane Closure Strategy to help determine when additional restrictions are appropriate. If an
unforeseen event not included in the contract is anticipated, subsection 105.01 of the
Standard Specifications outlines that the Engineer may limit or stop work when it is
determined by the Engineer to be in the public interest. The Engineer should do so with as
much notice to the contractor as possible.
108.9 FAILURE TO COMPLETE WORK ON TIME

If the Project Engineer determines the Contractor may not complete the work within contract
time, he will write a Form 105 to the Contractor advising him that liquidated damages will be
assessed. The Form 105 will include the amount charged per day and the anticipated date
contract time will end. The Project Engineer will continue to track time in SiteManager® time
count forms. If the contract time is a fixed completion date and was not tracked in
SiteManager®, the Project Engineer shall start tracking time.
108.10 DEFAULT OF CONTRACT

Default of contract and termination may adversely affect a Contractor’s ability to work on
future projects. It is important that CDOT uniformly and fairly evaluate the circumstances
leading to these actions. Default of contract or termination is a contract administration issue
that rests with the Chief Engineer.
If situations arise that may lead to the default or termination of any construction contract or
default of any contractor or consultant, the Resident Engineer and the Project Engineer will
immediately notify the Construction Services Area Engineer, the Program Engineer, and the
Region Transportation Director. The Resident Engineer will obtain preapproval from the
Program Engineer and the Region Transportation Director. The Resident Engineer will be
prepared to discuss the circumstances leading to the default or termination with those
individuals.
The Area Engineer will notify the Project Development Services Branch Manager, Construction
Engineering Services Branch Manager, and Attorney General’s CDOT Representative.
The Area Engineer will coordinate the collection and review of documentation that will be used
to make a decision. Based on information and input collected, the Construction Engineering
Services Branch Manager will make a recommendation for appropriate action to the Chief
Engineer. Only the Chief Engineer can issue a Notice of Intent to Default or terminate a
contract.
108.11 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT

See Section 108.10 Default of Contract.
100-98
General Provisions
SECTION 109 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Section 109 of the Standard Specifications defines the methods used to compensate the
Contractor for the work performed. Documentation required under Section 109 is extensive and
is fully discussed in Section 120 of this Manual.
109.1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES

It is imperative that Project Engineers and Resident Engineers verify the accuracy of interim
payments to Contractors. Justifying interim payments based solely on information submitted
by the Contractor, (i.e., load counts), is unacceptable. The Project Engineer must
independently verify that work has been completed pursuant to the specifications and the
Resident Engineer is responsible to ensure that quantities are reasonable before authorizing
the pay estimate.
The term, “estimated quantity”, means a quantity that is calculated approximately. It is the
Project Engineer’s responsibility to calculate estimated quantities as accurately as possible so
as not to overpay the Contractor.
109.1.1 Scale Certification
The Measurement Standards Section of the Colorado Department of Agriculture must license
scales used by the Contractor. Each time a scale is installed at a new location, an approved
company must check the scales and provide an in-service report before the scale can be
operated. The governing criteria related to scale certification, based on State Statute and the
Colorado Department of Agriculture, include:
1. a basic tolerance of two pounds in 1,000 pounds;
2. checking of scales once each year by the Colorado Department of Agriculture.
3. renewal of scale license each year before June 30th; and
4. prohibition of split weighing under Colorado Revised Statue 24-91-103(2).
109.1.2 Requirements for Federal-Aid Projects
109.1.2.1 Verification of Manual Weighing Operations
On projects where loaded truck weights are entered manually on scale tickets, the certified
weigher must be checked at least once, and more often as deemed necessary by the Project
Engineer. These checks will be performed as follows:
1. Randomly Select One Truck. The Project Engineer will randomly select one loaded truck
after it has been issued a scale ticket from the certified weigher.
100-99
General Provisions
2. Reweigh Loaded Truck. The loaded truck will be reweighed in the presence of the Project
Engineer.
3. Check Tolerance. The scale reading of the reweighing will be compared to the weight
reported on the certified weigher’s original scale ticket. To be acceptable, the scale
reading must be within plus or minus 200 pounds of the weight reported on the original
scale ticket.
4. Determine Cause of Problem. If the comparison of the two weights is found to be out of
tolerance, factors other than human error should be ruled out before consideration is
given to replacing the certified weigher. The Project Engineer must assess this situation
carefully on a case-by-case basis. It is recommended that both the Project Engineer and
the Contractor Superintendent, or authorized designee, be present at the site during the
scale inspection. Consider the following recommended procedures:
a. Check for Malfunctions. Inspect the operation of the scale for malfunctions (e.g.,
lodged or jammed foreign objects, worn or broken parts). Repairs may be needed.
b. Check Calibration. Check the calibration of the scale for accuracy. Certified test
weights, if available, may be used to ensure that the scale has not lost calibration.
The Measurement Standards Section of the Colorado Department of Agriculture
should be contacted if it is suspected that the scale is no longer calibrated.
c. Reweigh Additional Trucks. If previously weighed loaded trucks with scale tickets
are still available at the site, two to three additional comparison checks should
be performed, and their tolerance verified. The suspect scale ticket may have
been an isolated incident. In addition, consider having the certified weigher
perform one of these checks, and observe the weigher’s procedures and methods.
Retraining may be necessary.
d. Other Factors. Once satisfied that the cause is not an anomaly, malfunction, or
calibration issue, the Project Engineer should consider the facts and the severity
of the problem before deciding to replace the certified weigher. Other factors
may be at play.
5. Replace Certified Weigher. The Project Engineer must notify the Contractor in writing
prior to replacing the certified weigher. Remember to check the certification credentials
of the new weigher.
6. Notify Measurement Standards Section. All certified weighers that are replaced for
inaccurate weighing should be reported to the Measurement Standards Section of the
Colorado Department of Agriculture (303) 866-2845. The CDOT personnel assigned to
report the incident should be knowledgeable of the facts and provide the following
information to the Measurement Standards Section, because a regional scale inspector
may need to return the call for investigation purposes:
a. name,
b. phone number,
c. scale location,
100-100
General Provisions
d. certified weigher’s name,
e. certified weigher’s license number, and
f. a brief description of the problem encountered.
109.1.2.2 Verification of Computerized Scales
The Project Engineer will verify the accuracy of computerized scales. Verification procedures
are detailed in Standard Special Provision, Revision of Section 109 – Measurement of Quantities.
109.2 SCOPE OF PAYMENT

109.2.1 General
The Project Engineer may expect situations during construction that require work beyond the
scope of the Contract. Such situations are common and must be evaluated on a case-by-case
basis to determine if the Contractor should be paid additional compensation.
109.2.2 Incidental Work
It is seldom possible or desirable to develop plans that completely cover all Contract work in
minute detail. Costs of design would be prohibitive and improvements of questionable value.
Compensation for all work necessary to properly complete the project shall be included in the
Contract unit prices. Subsection 104.02 of the Standard Specifications defines conditions that
may warrant additional compensation. Contractors generally will provide for minor
contingencies in their bids. Only differing site conditions and/or significant changes in the scope
of the work should be considered for additional compensation.
The Summary of Approximate Quantities in the plans shows the pay items for which the work
and materials are to be paid. Work or materials that are essential to the project but for which
there are no pay items included in the plans will not be measured and paid for separately but
should be included in the work. This work or materials are usually minor in nature and
reasonable for a Contractor to anticipate in preparing his bid. An example is removal of asphalt
mat. If the Summary of Approximate Quantities did not include the item and it is obvious by
review of the plans or work site that this work is required, then no additional payment for this
work should be made.
Only differing site conditions or significant changes in the character of the work as described
in subsection 104.02 of the Standard Specifications should be considered for extra work. If,
however, work is described and detailed with specifications that show a pay item as basis of
payment and the designer has inadvertently omitted the pay item from the Summary of
Approximate Quantities, the Project Engineer may make additional payment to the Contractor
as in subsection 109.04 of the Standard Specifications. An example could be an expansion device
shown in the plans with specifications that indicate the basis of payment is by the linear foot.
If the designer failed to add the pay item or note that this device was included in the work, it
may be unreasonable to expect the Contractor to include this device in his bid. The Project
100-101
General Provisions
Engineer may negotiate a change order to add a pay item for this work according to subsection
104.03 of the Standard Specifications.
109.3 RESERVED
109.4 COMPENSATION FOR CHANGES AND FORCE ACCOUNT WORK

109.4.1 Compensation for Extra Work
Compensation for extra work, as defined in subsection 104.03 of the Standard Specifications,
must be authorized by a change order and paid for on a unit price, lump sum, or force account
basis.
109.4.2 Force Account
Avoid the use of force account, particularly on work involving large sums of money. If a force
account is warranted and the Contractor disputes (i.e., refuses to sign) a daily Form 10 –
Inspector’s Report for Force Account Work, the Project Engineer will require the Contractor to
prepare a Form 10 that documents the items the Contractor believes to be eligible for payment.
The Contractor must furnish this Form 10 prior to starting the work in question on the next
working day. See Appendix B for a sample Form 10.
109.4.3 Specialty Work
109.4.3.1 Specialty Firms
A "specialty firm” is a term that is used in subsection 109.04(e) of the Standard Specifications.
It is a term that is not defined elsewhere in the Contract. Billings from a specialty firm are
eligible for administrative loading. All other force account rules apply to specialty firms.
109.4.3.2 Specialty Items
Subsection 108.01 of the Standard Specifications uses the term specialty item. On Federal-Aid
projects, FHWA Form 1273 – Required Contract Provisions – Federal-Aid Construction Contracts
defines specialty items as follows:
Specialty items shall be construed to be limited to work that requires highly specialized
knowledge, abilities, or equipment not ordinarily available in the type of contracting
organization qualified and expected to bid in the Contract as a whole and in general are to be
limited to minor components of the overall Contract.
Subsection 108.01 of the Standard Specifications requires specialty items to be specified in the
Contract.
Contract Administration Considerations

The following Contract administration procedures apply to specialty work:
100-102
General Provisions
1. Form 205 – Sublet Permit Application is required for all specialty work;
2. certified payrolls are required for all specialty work on Federal-Aid projects; and
3. force account work will be paid according to subsection 109.04 of the Standard
Specifications.
With regard to Contract administration, administer specialty firms and specialty items in the
same manner as other subcontractors are administered on the project.
109.5 ELIMINATED ITEMS

Items that are not necessary to prosecute work on the project may be eliminated from the
Contract using Form 105 – Speed Memo to notify the Contractor. If the Contractor has incurred
costs from prosecuting the item, a change order must be executed to compensate the
Contractor. However, a change order is not needed if costs have not been incurred. Elimination
of items does not qualify for a Value Engineering Change Proposal.
109.6 PARTIAL PAYMENTS

109.6.1 Preparation and Processing of Estimates
The Project Engineer will prepare monthly partial payment estimates for the work performed
during each month of the Contract. Consider the following:
1. Delayed Partial Payments. The Project Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, of
the reason for any delay to a partial payment. The notification should be given in advance
of the estimate cutoff date, if possible, so the Contractor will have time to correct the
deficiency before the estimate is due. All Contractor requests to delay a partial payment
to permit inclusion of a specific amount of work shall be made in writing. The Contractor
shall notify each subcontractor who has performed work during the payment period of
the reason for the delay.
2. Copies of Partial Payment Estimates. The Project Engineer will provide the Contractor
with a copy of all partial payment estimates. The Contractor should provide a copy of
the estimate to each subcontractor that has performed work during the period covered
by the estimate. CDOT will assist subcontractors in obtaining this information and will
furnish the subcontractors with a copy of the estimate, if requested.
3. Partial Payment. The Resident Engineer will electronically transmit partial payment
approval to Division of Accounting and Finance. Accounting will transfer the payment
request to COFRS. The State Controller's Office then processes a payment warrant to the
Contractor five to seven days after the Resident Engineer authorizes partial payment
approval.
4. Electronic Funds Transfer. The Contractor can authorize CDOT to electronically transfer
funds directly to its account. Electronic Funds Transfer forms are available from the
Accounts Payable Office at [email protected]. The Contractor should be
100-103
General Provisions
reminded of this option at the Preconstruction Conference. Funds are normally available
in four to five days after the Resident Engineer authorizes partial payment approval.
5. Prompt Payment. Subsection 109.06 Partial Payment allows the Contractor to withhold
retainage from subcontractors or suppliers. Once all of the subcontractor's work is
complete and accepted by CDOT, the subcontractor or suppliers may follow the process
in 109.06 (f) to have retainage released.
6. Monthly Reporting. For CDOT projects, by the 15th of each month, the Contractor shall
record all payments to subcontractors by completing an audit in the B2GNow System.
7. Fuel Cost Adjustment. Contract cost adjustments will be made to reflect increases or
decreases in the monthly average prices of gasoline, diesel, and other fuels from the
average price for the month preceding the month in which bids were received for the
Contract, assuming the Contractor elected to accept this option on the Form 85 at the
time of bidding.
8. Asphalt Cement Cost Adjustment. Contract cost adjustments will be made to reflect
increases or decreases in the monthly average price of asphalt cement from the average
price for the month preceding the month in which bids were received for the Contract,
assuming the Contractor elected to accept this option on the Form 85 at the time of
bidding.
9. Maximum Partial Payments. Partial payments will not be made in excess of the
encumbrance amount except at the sole discretion of the Department. Work performed
in excess of the encumbrance amount, without written approval of the Department, shall
be performed at the Contractor’s risk.
109.6.2 Reduction of Retainage
109.6.2.1 Retainage by the Contractor
If during the prosecution of the project, a subcontractor satisfactorily completes all work
described on CDOT Form 205, or as amended by changes directed by the Project Engineer, the
Contractor can request final payment for the subcontractor’s work and concurrence to release
the subcontractor’s retainage. At that time the Project Engineer will inspect, measure, and
furnish final quantities for all work listed on that subcontractor’s Form 205. All paperwork
(payrolls, materials certifications, FHWA Form PR-47, etc.) will need to be submitted and
correct before the Project Engineer will authorize final quantities for a subcontractor’s work.
These quantities will NOT be adjusted at the end of the project, so it is imperative that these
quantities are accurately measured and paid for in accordance with the contract requirements.
If the total dollar amount of the subcontracted work, as described on the CDOT Form 205,
exceeds $100,000, the Project Engineer is strongly advised to submit the final quantity
calculations to the Region Finals Administrator for review, prior to agreeing on the quantity
with the Contractor.
100-104
General Provisions
Upon CDOT’s release of subcontractor’s final payment, the Contractor shall release the
subcontractor’s retainage. Final measurement of the subcontracted item shall not constitute
acceptance of the work.
109.6.2.2 Prime Retainage
When the Contract has been completed, the Contractor may request the Department to reduce
the amount of retainage or securities withheld. Such requests must be made in writing to the
Project Engineer. The amount of withholdings may be reduced to a value of $1,000 or one-
tenth of one percent of the Project Commitment Amount, whichever is greater. The Project
Engineer may withhold a greater amount if a valid reason for doing so can be substantiated.
CDOT will consider a reduction request only if all the following conditions have been met:
1. the Contractor has completed the project,
2. the Department has accepted the project.
3. the Contractor has submitted all required forms and paperwork,
4. the Project Engineer has approved the final pay quantities, and
5. a written consent has been received from the surety company.
6. the Contractor has complied with all DBE and OJT requirements and is not subject to a
payment reduction.
If the Contractor meets the above requirements, the reduction should be made before
submission of the final to the Region Finals Administrator. If the Contractor meets the
requirements after submission of the final, the Region Finals Administrator may make this
reduction as soon as all the documentation is received.
The Project Engineer should have sufficient justification for withholding retainage. Contact the
Construction Services Area Engineer for guidance.
109.6.3 Subcontractor/Supplier Liens
If payment is not made in accordance with the Prompt Payment Act, Colorado Revised Statute
24-91-103(2) and Colorado Revised Statute 38-26-107, permits subcontractors and suppliers to
file liens against the Contractor. Such liens are different from claims for Contract adjustments,
which are processed in accordance with subsection 105.22 of the Standard Specifications. Liens
that are filed under the Prompt Payment Act will be processed in accordance with the following
procedures:
1. When the Center for Accounting receives a properly completed lien (claim), the Center
for Accounting will immediately forward a copy of the lien (claim) to the Resident
Engineer in charge of the project and the Region Program Engineer. Prior to making
further payments to the Contractor, the Resident Engineer will enter a separate line item
for each lien on the estimate and withhold the amount of the lien (claim) from payments
due the Contractor. The amount withheld shall be in addition to retainage and/or
100-105
General Provisions
securities. The Region shall not submit the final estimate to the Center for Accounting
until all liens (claims) has been resolved.
2. If the lien (claim) is released and the Contractor furnishes the Center for Accounting with
the properly completed lien (claim) release, the Center for Accounting will immediately
forward a copy of the lien (claim) release to the Resident Engineer and the Region
Program Engineer. The Region will pay the amount withheld and zero out the lien (claim)
line item
3. If a lawsuit has not been filed and the Center for Accounting has not received a notice
of lis pendens within ninety days after the final settlement date, the Center for
Accounting will forward a lien (claim) release notice to the Resident Engineer and the
Region Program Engineer. The Region will pay the amount withheld and zero out the lien
(claim) line item.
4. If a lawsuit is filed and the Center for Accounting receives a notice of lis pendens within
ninety days after the final settlement date, the Center for Accounting will immediately
forward a copy of the lis pendens to the Resident Engineer and the Region Program
Engineer. The Region will continue to withhold the lien (claim) amount.
5. If the lawsuit is settled out of court, the Center for Accounting will immediately forward
a copy of the lien (claim) release to the Resident Engineer and the Region Program
Engineer. If a court judgement is reached, the Center for Accounting shall consult with
the Attorney General before forwarding instructions to the Resident Engineer and Region
Program Engineer, which must detail how and to whom payment shall be made. The
Region will make payment in accordance with the instructions from the Center for
Accounting.
Lien forms can be obtained from the Center for Accounting.
The Resident Engineer should ensure that all liens and any questions related to subcontractor
and supplier liens be directed to the Center for Accounting at [email protected].
109.6.4 Fuel Cost Adjustment
Contractors are allowed to “opt-in” (accept) or “opt-out” (not accept) Fuel Cost Adjustments
by checking the appropriate line on the Form 85, “Contractor’s Proposal”. They are required
to turn in Form 85 at the time they submit their bids. Contractors are not allowed to change
their minds regarding Fuel Cost Adjustments after bids are opened.
After receiving a copy of the executed Contract from Construction Services, the Resident
Engineer will notify the Project Engineer whether or not to make Fuel Cost Adjustments.
The Project Engineer will pay for the Fuel Cost Adjustment under F/A Fuel Cost Adjustment,
Pay Item 700-70016. If the amount of actual Fuel Cost Adjustments exceeds the funding allotted
in the Planned Force Account, the remainder of the adjustments should be made using funding
from Minor Contract Revisions (MCRs), or by adding funding to the project.
Fuel Cost Adjustments will be made only to those items listed in the specification. The table in
the standard special provision lists specific items and associated fuel factors that were
100-106
General Provisions
developed through cooperation between CDOT and the contracting community. The adjustable
pay items are listed in the specification.
If the Contractor accepted Fuel Cost Adjustments, the Project Engineer should calculate the
adjustments once per month.
https://www.codot.gov/business/designsupport/cdot-construction-specifications/2019-
construction-specifications/fuel-cost-adjustments/opis_denver_ultra_low_sulfur_diesel_lub
To calculate the adjustment, use the spreadsheet found the bottom of the page at the website
referenced above. The spreadsheet contains additional detailed instructions regarding Fuel
Cost Adjustments.
Retroactive Fuel Cost Adjustments will not be allowed. In other words, this standard special
provision should not be applied or change-ordered into any Contract that did not contain it at
the time of bid opening.
109.7 PAYMENT FOR MATERIAL ON HAND (STOCKPILED MATERIAL)

Only material, which meets Contract requirements and has been fabricated or processed and
is ready for installation into the project is eligible for payment, with the following exception:
This section specifies that payment for structural steel (unfabricated milled plate) may be made
on projects where the plan quantity of structural steel exceeds one million pounds. The Project
Engineer may pay for 60 percent of the invoice cost of the structural steel (unfabricated milled
plate) delivered to the fabrication plant. The stockpile location and/or fabrication plant do not
have to be in the State of Colorado.
See Section 120 of this Manual for further information and documentation requirements.
109.8 RESERVED
109.9 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT

109.9.1 Processing Procedures
As the project nears completion, the Project Engineer should discuss completion and cleanup
requirements with the Resident Engineer and Maintenance Superintendent, including items
requiring maintenance or removal such as temporary erosion control measures and permanent
drainage features. To expedite final acceptance, a punch list should be provided to the
Contractor when the work is nearly complete.
Once the punch list items have been substantially completed, the Project Engineer should
schedule a Final Inspection review meeting. The suggested attendance for this meeting includes
the Project Engineer, Resident Engineer, Program Engineer, Contractor, Maintenance, specialty
groups and local agencies/jurisdictions as necessary. On Full Oversight projects, the FHWA must
be invited.
100-107
General Provisions
On the same day, the Contractor has satisfactorily completed all work in accordance with the
Contract; the Project Engineer will prepare and forward an Acceptance Letter to the
Contractor. See Section 120.3.2 for additional guidance. A copy of the Acceptance Letter must
be transmitted to the Region Finals Administrator, the Program Engineer, the Resident
Engineer, and the Projects & Grants Accounting.
109.9.2 Requirements for Federal-Aid Projects
Form 1212 – Final Acceptance Report is required for all Federal-Aid projects. The Resident
Engineer will verify the proper completion of the following items:
1. Form 473. Letter of Materials Certification has been properly completed and submitted.
2. Right-of-Way. Has been inspected and is free of apparent unauthorized encroachments.
3. Safety Deficiencies. Project has been reviewed for obvious safety deficiencies.
Comments regarding liquidated damages and dollar amounts and time extensions
associated with claim resolutions may be included in the remarks section of Form 1212.
However, comments regarding corrective work or deficiencies should not be included on
Form 1212, because such items must be corrected prior to final acceptance.
The Project Engineer notifies the Contractor of project acceptance in writing and sends a copy
to the Region Finals Administrator. Once the Finals Administrator enters the final acceptance
date in SiteManager®, SAP sends an email message to the Resident Engineer stating the Form
1212 can be completed. When the Resident Engineer fills out the SAP Form 1212, the Resident
Engineer will need to distribute.
Note that no changes can be made to the SAP Form 1212 after completion, only a checked box
will indicate that the Form 1212 has been completed in SAP.
Any missing check marks on the Form 1212, as well as any deficiencies noted in the remarks
section will need to be resolved before initiating the Form 1212 in SAP prior to final distribution
to the Finals Administrator as outlined in Figure 100G of the Construction Manual [original to
FHWA and copies to Construction Services and the Projects & Grants Accounting. Any exceptions
need to be discussed with the Area Engineer and FHWA Operations Engineer.
The Form 1212 must be complete in order to close the project. Failure to complete the Form
1212 in a timely manner may cause the project to be labeled as inactive with FHWA and ties
up funds that could be used for other projects.
109.10 COMPENSATION FOR COMPENSABLE DELAYS

Subsection 109.10 of the Standard Specifications establishes the basis for quantifying
compensation for compensable delays. The Contractor must provide evidence that the delay
was compensable in accordance with subsection 105.22 and subsection 108.08 of the Standard
Specifications. All costs must be documented by the Contractor, reviewed, and approved by
the Project Engineer.
100-108
General Provisions
SECTION 120 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

This Section defines the documentation required by CDOT to ensure that adequate records are
maintained during contract administration. Documentation is required by law and is an essential
part of contract administration. CDOT’s goal is to be as paperless as practical. The Project
Engineer and project team will strive to generate and keep all documentation in an electronic
format. Exceptions to not using electronic documentation will require Project Engineer to seek
approval from the Resident Engineer and Program Engineer. This includes obtaining electronic
documentation from other parties. Appendix B and Appendix C include examples with
instructions for many of the letters, notices, and forms that are used.
120.1 PROJECT RECORD

A Project Record is a construction record as set forth in the Record File Plans relevant to
construction and each specialty areas. The Record File Plans include all documents, books,
papers, maps, photographs, or other documentation materials, regardless of physical form or
characteristics, made or received by CDOT. A record may be inscribed on a tangible medium or
that is stored in an electronic or other medium.
When this Construction Manual refers to documentation, it is a record, written or electronic,

developed during the administration of a construction contract. All documentation is subject
to Federal and State audits and reviews. All documents will contain the project number and
project code (subaccount).
120.1.1 Signatures
Obtaining electronic signatures is an important step toward achieving CDOT’s goal to be

paperless. The definitions and distinctions between the terms digital signature, electronic
signature, and certificate-based signature, are complicated. CDOT has simplified the decision-
making surrounding what type of signature and where a particular signature type will be used.
Any questions related to signatures should be directed to the Records Management Program at
[email protected]. Additionally, CDOT employees can view the electronic
signature guidance is available at:
https://drive.google.com/file/d/1Ic_ZjyibTdbCX9NTgPbrbtHiy-im-59M/view
Signature Type 1
Documents requiring a Signature Type 1 are the Form 90 and any document requiring a
Professional Engineer, Professional Architect, or Land Surveyor Seal. Adobe Sign will be used
for signatures in this category.
Signature Type 2
A Signature Type 2 is simply every signature which is not a Type 1. Documents that may use a
Type 2 are related to tasks such as initialing, tracking, approving, certifying, creating, quality
control confirmation, read receipts, or acknowledgement of the handling, conformance, and
management of a document. Type 2 signatures are related to documents such as a Project
100-109
General Provisions
Diary, pay documentation, payment voucher for estimates, change order letter of explanation,
Project Termini Extension letter of explanation, Speed Memo, Certificate of Compliance, or
Buy America certification. Adobe Sign will not be used for documents in this category. This
decision is based on the cost for each use. Other acknowledgment methods that may be used
in lieu of Adobe Sign for this category include an Adobe Acrobat Pro DC certified signature, Blue
Beam, login verification, or a scanned handwritten signature.
120.1.2 Active Construction Document and Data Management
Project Records will be accurate, complete, and easily understood. Documents will be prepared
in a manner that will allow individuals not familiar with the project to easily determine what
was performed, even if reviewed several years later.
ProjectWise Explorer is CDOT’s active project Electronic Document Management System (EDMS)
for archiving Project Records. Bentley Project Share is a companion cloud storage space and
may be used for day-to-day file sharing with the contractor and other third parties and to place
Project Records while the project is active.
Information input into SiteManager and SAP does not need to be placed in the ProjectWise.
Information input into data collection software such as Survey123, will be placed into
ProjectWise. If information does not need to be retained for 3.5 years or longer and is collected
in digital datasets within programs (e.g., Survey123, SAP, SiteManager), the information does
not need to be rendered in PDF documents.
All pay documentation that is not in SiteManager® will be archived in ProjectWise Explorer and
referenced in SiteManager® so the documentation can be easily located.
Construction Software Nomenclature for Electronic Documentation
Also Known As
Software Name Access software via…
Construction Manual term
ProjectWise Design Explorer
ProjectWise Explorer Desktop application
ProjectWise
ProjectWise Services
ProjectWise 365 Services Includes:
Bentley Cloud Services Project Share, Webpage
Bentley Connect ProjectWise Web Connections,
Deliverables Management
Connection Center Connection Center Desktop application
ProjectWise Share Project Share Webpage

ProjectWise Deliverables
Deliverables Management Webpage
Management
Webpage or
Adobe Sign Adobe Sign
email link or Adobe DC
Adobe Acrobat Pro DC Adobe DC Desktop application
100-110
General Provisions
Construction Software Nomenclature for Electronic Documentation

Desktop application and
SAP SAP
Web portal
AASHTOWare SiteManager SiteManager Virtual Desktop
Figure 100 - 9
120.1.3 Original Source Document
The original source document is the document or electronic file on which the information was
recorded that supports the final pay quantity, for example the DWR in SiteManager, an
electronic copy of CDOT Form 266, or a spreadsheet. The information must document payment
according to the procedures described in Section 120.15.2 Methods of Measurement, including
supporting calculations and measurements as needed. The original source document must be
attached to or referenced on the document that authorizes payment. The term “original source
document” does not imply that notes on scratch paper or written documentation created in the
field must be included in the documentation to support payment. The original source document
may be an electronic document transcribed or created from such notes or documentation. The
notes do not need to be included in the final documentation that is submitted to the Finals
Administrator but will be Smart Scanned and retained in project files.
120.1.4 SiteManager® Electronic Documentation
Electronic documentation in SiteManager® will be processed as follows:
1. Access Agreement. Each user must sign a SiteManager® access agreement to create an
individual account. The access agreement provides a password for the individual to utilize when
accessing SiteManager®. The access agreement establishes that data entered into
SiteManager® under each individual user’s password is equivalent to signing the following
statement:
The item(s) and material(s) were inspected and found to conform reasonably to the
Contract Plans and Specifications except as noted.
A copy of the access agreement can be obtained from the SiteManager® website at:
https://www.codot.gov/business/engineering applications/project- construction/aashtoware-
project-construction-sitemanager-access.
2. Username Entries. SiteManager® automatically records the name of the person entering
project data. If a different person performed the measurements or calculations, enter this
person’s name in the proper record.
3. Electronic Copies. At the Project Engineer’s option, an electronic copy of the daily work
report or Form 266 – Inspector’s Progress Report may be maintained in addition to the electronic
version in SiteManager®. At the Project Engineer’s discretion and copies of supporting
information that cannot be easily entered into the electronic version of the daily work report
100-111
General Provisions
(e.g., measurements, charts, and sketches) may be properly referenced in the daily work report
and maintained as a separate electronic document.
120.1.5 Photographs and Video Recordings
When photographs or video recordings are taken on a project, the following information is to
be included with the record:
• project number and project code.
• name of the person who took the picture or video recording.
• date and time the picture or video recording was taken; and
• location and approximate station number or mile marker.
120.1.6 Required Documentation from Contractors
Before the Project Engineer submits a monthly Contractor pay estimate to the Resident
Engineer, the Project Engineer will fill out and update the Required Document checklist to
verify and document that all required documents have been received from the Contractor. The
Project Engineer will update and submit the checklist to the Resident Engineer upon first use
and with each pay estimate.
The Resident Engineer will review and approve the checklist prior to approving each pay
estimate. The Project Engineer will keep the approved checklist in the project files.
100-112
General Provisions
Required Documentation
Date Date
Submittal submitted prior to: Construction Use
Received Approved
Baseline or Preliminary CPM Schedule and

Reports: 108.03, Baseline or Preliminary Schedule X
within 14 days of Award of the Contract.
Written List of All Permits:

X
107.02
Proposed Subcontractors X
Sublet Permit Applications, Form 205

X
(approved prior to use)
Form 1425: 106.01, at Preconstruction Conference
or a minimum of 2 weeks prior to material delivery.
X
Update to add new suppliers throughout the
project.
Form 1420:(w/ Form 1415 if new DBE commitment)
As necessary to make modifications to DBE
X
utilization plan or request DBE participation
waivers.
Mix Designs: HMA, concrete, etc. X
List of Haul Vehicles Legal Loads X
Project Safety Management Plan: 107.06 X
Insurance Certificate: 107.15 X

Transportation Management Plan (TMP) [may incl.
Traffic Control Plan (TCP), Transportation X
Operation Plan (TO) and Public Info (PI)] 630.10
Transportation Management Plan Completed
exercises in the evening. (TMP) [may incl. Traffic
X
Control Plan (TCP), Transportation Operation Plan
(TO) and Public Info (PI)] 630.10
Method of Handling Traffic (MHT) Initial 630.10(a) X
Method of Handling Traffic (MHT) Other 630.10(a) X
TCS Certification: at Precon, 630.11 X

Flagger Certification: 630.14 X
100-113
General Provisions
Required Documentation
Date Date
Submittal submitted prior to: Construction Use
Received Approved
Contractor's Schedule for Temporary and

X
Permanent Erosion Controls 208.03
List of Potential Pollution Sources: 107.25(b)6 X
Spill Prevention, Control, and Countermeasure

X
Plan (SPCC): 107.25(b)6
Surveying Schedule: 625.03 submitted prior to Pre-

X
survey Conference
Form 1337, Contractor Commitment to Meet OJT X
Requirements: no later than Precon
Form 1378, Contractor Selection of Litigation or

X
Arbitration
Contractor's EEO Policy and Procedures X

Letter confirming EEO Policies and Procedures
orientation meeting was presented to supervisory
X
personnel: prior to construction and every 12
months
Letter describing Contractor's EEO complaint
X
procedures
Letter describing Contractor's method and
schedule for monitoring subcontractor EEO X
compliance schedule
Letter communicating Contractor's tentative date
X
of first project EEO meeting
Project Engineer: Date:
Resident Engineer: Date:

Figure 100 - 10
100-114
General Provisions
120.1.7 Responsibilities
120.1.7.1 Resident Engineer
The Resident Engineer is responsible for ensuring that complete and accurate documentation
is compiled.
120.1.7.2 Project Engineer
The Project Engineer will compile, or cause to be compiled, and verify, the required
documentation. The Project Engineer is responsible for Archiving Project Records in
ProjectWise on a continuing basis.
120.1.7.3 Bridge Inspector
The Project Inspector has the primary duty of ensuring that construction is performed in
accordance with the Contract. The Project Inspector is the representative of the Project
Engineer and will maintain complete and accurate records of the work performed, the materials
used, the disposition of rejected materials, and the measurements of the items inspected.
120.2 ARCHIVING
All archived documents will be stored in ProjectWise per the Record File Plan. When project
documentation is finalized or no longer needed for active construction, it will be archived.
ProjectWise does not replace LIMS, SiteManager, B2G, LCP Tracker or other software systems
currently being used as a repository for documents or data. Project staff will move completed
documentation to ProjectWise throughout the duration of the construction project to minimize
the effort needed for archiving when construction ends and to ensure an up-to-date record set
during the life of the project.
Archiving for documents to be permanently retained includes Smart Scanning. Smart Scanning
means rendering the PDF searchable, page aligned, and in the ISO 19005 series PDF/A-1b
format. Smart Scanning is not just scanning and is the process CDOT developed that includes a
range of tasks that supports archiving documents to be retained more than 3.5 years. Smart
Scanning and Digital Signatures (eLearning) (COURSE 89002) training is available on the SAP
Learning Management System. Archiving also includes using a standard naming convention and
placing the document in the correct location in ProjectWise. The Record File Plan identifies
the retention period and where to archive documents. The Record File Plan is in ProjectWise
and can be found at the following link: 5 - Record File Plans.
Since a PDF/A-1b format document does not retain signature encryption, for documents where
Adobe Sign used to sign you will archive two documents. One document will not be in the PDF/A-
1b format and will retain the signature encryption and the other will be PDF/A-1b compliant
and lose encryption. Refer to Appendix D for the instruction on how to create a PDF/A-1b
document of an encrypted Adobe Sign document.
Contact the Region Finals Administrator or Area Engineer with questions about documents not
listed in the Record File Plan.
100-115
General Provisions
120.3 CORRESPONDENCE
120.3.1 Letters
Letters for all correspondence outside the Department will be prepared on CDOT letterhead.
Letters should not include any logos other than the current CDOT logo, as specified by the
unified state brand system. CDOT branding guidance is available at:
https://www.codot.gov/assets/2019_cdot_quickguide.pdf
Use Letters to document the following:
1. Partial or Final Acceptance
2. Dispute or Claim decisions
3. Written Notice of intent to default
4. Written Contract Termination Notice
5. Complex issues involved in Contract performance that require lengthy responses
120.3.2 Acceptance Letters
Acceptance Letters (see Appendix B) for final project acceptance should, at a minimum, contain
the following information:
1. date and time of acceptance;
2. a detailed list of documentation and forms that the Contractor must submit before the
Project Engineer is permitted to reduce retainage;
3. a detailed list of documentation and forms that are required from the Contractor before
submittal of the final estimate for payment;
4. date that the final estimate quantities will be available for Contractor review;
5. name and telephone number of the CDOT contact person from whom the Contractor can
obtain information regarding the final estimate; and
6. recognition of any portion of work that exhibits an exceptional product or effort by the
Contractor.
On the same day the project is accepted, forward the original Acceptance Letter to the
Contractor and one copy each to the Region Finals Administrator, Program Engineer, Resident
Engineer and Projects & Grants Accounting.
The letter should be sent by certified mail, return receipt requested, or hand delivered. If hand
delivered, the Contractor should sign a copy indicating receipt. The Acceptance Letter triggers
the statutory requirement of advertising for final settlement pursuant to Colorado Revised
100-116
General Provisions
Statutes 24-70-101. If all documentation required for finalization has not been received within
30 days, the Project Engineer should send the Contractor a written reminder.
120.3.3 Memoranda
Prepare all correspondence within the Department using a memorandum format. Memoranda
should not include any logos other than the current CDOT logo, as specified by the unified state
brand system. CDOT branding guidance is available at:
https://www.codot.gov/assets/2019_cdot_quickguide.pdf
120.4 FORM 105 – SPEED MEMO

Use Form 105 – Speed Memo to document:
1. directions and interpretations given the Contractor;
2. instructions to Contractor for work formalized later with a change order;
3. agreements between the Project Engineer and the Contractor; and
4. transmittal of project documents and other project information, including to the

Contractor, internal CDOT staff, and consultants working on the project.
Example: For instances relating to erosion control where action needs to be taken by the
Contractor, the Project Engineer should prepare and issue a CDOT Form 105 to give the
appropriate direction to the Contractor for correcting the noted deficiencies and place a copy
in the project file and the SWMP notebook. Failing to notify the Contractor on a Form 105 in
accordance with subsection 208.09 of the Standard Specifications is being viewed by CDPHE as
a non-compliance issue.
The Contractor must sign each Form 105 – Speed Memo to acknowledge receipt, even if the
Contractor does not agree with its content. If a Contractor refuses to sign the form, this refusal
should be noted on the form. The form should then be immediately sent to the home office
address of the Contractor.
120.4.1 Use of Email Is Not an Acceptable Alternative
Email is not the established manner for CDOT project staff to communicate the information
listed in Section 120.4. Therefore, the use of an email as an alternative method of documenting
these communications in lieu of a Form 105 – Speed Memo is not acceptable.
An email “read receipt” or any of other form of tracking delivery or receipt of an electronic
copy of a Form 105 – Speed Memo is not an acceptable alternative to obtaining a copy of a Form
105 – Speed Memo signed by the Contractor.
Additionally, in the case of the Contractor refusing to sign the form, the use of an email to
deliver a Form 105 – Speed Memo is not an acceptable alternative to sending the Form 105
100-117
General Provisions
Speed Memo by registered mail to the home office of the Contractor. (The use of email to
deliver a Form 105 – Speed Memo is an acceptable method of sending the Form 105 to the
Contractor in other circumstances. The Contractor should return a signed copy to the Project
Engineer) It is recommended that CDOT’s use of Form 105, as detailed above, be discussed with
the Contractor at the start of the project.
120.5 FORM 103 – PROJECT DIARY

The project diary should be prepared on Form 103 – Project Diary in either handwritten or
electronic format. The Project Engineer is responsible for preparing Form 103. To ensure the
precise recording of all Contract activities, the Project Engineer may require other CDOT
personnel to prepare additional diaries. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Project Events. Document all events that occur during construction and the
administration of the Contract, including:
a. work in progress,
b. labor and equipment used,
c. acceptability of materials used,
d. details of problems encountered, and
e. contacts with or directions issued to the Contractor.
2. Discussions. Document all discussions with Contractor personnel, property owners, CDOT
Staff, and other agency personnel regarding the project.
3. Night Shift Work. Work on a night shift that begins before midnight and ends after
midnight will be considered as occurring on the calendar day on which the shift ends. All
documentation should be dated in accordance with this policy.
4. Audio and Video Recordings. Audio and video recordings may be used to supplement
project diaries. If used, catalog the tape recordings so that they may be transcribed and
indexed for future reference.
5. Standard Specifications. Figure –100-17 illustrates the minimum information related to

the subsections of the Standard Specifications that should be included.
100-118
General Provisions
Subsection Information to be Included on Form 103 – Project Diary
Prospective bidders (company and individual’s name) who looked at the project,
102.05
comments made, questions asked, and CDOT response.
Alteration of plans, character of work and quantities (including both anticipated

and actual). Include a concise description of any changed condition, anticipated
104.02 effect on Contract work underway, action required, and nature of increased work
to the Contractor, including estimated time and cost to correct. Continue to
document activities until the impacted work is completed.
104.03 Conditions leading to extra work.
104.04 Traffic conditions, roadway conditions, signing, flagging, detours, etc.
104.05 Use of materials found in the excavation. Conditions imposed on their use.
105.01 Directions or interpretations given to the Contractor.
Information leading to any decision on acceptance or rejection of work based on

105.03
reasonable conformity.
105.09 Discrepancy in Contract documents and the decision as to which will be followed.
Objective comments on the competency of supervision and organization of

105.10
Contractor. No comments should be included that could be perceived as derogatory.
Utility conflicts, status and details concerning any delay to Contract progress.
105.11
Record the Contractor’s effort to locate and protect utilities.
Unacceptable work – Include date and discussions leading to remedial action or

105.17
rejection and ultimate resolution.
105.18 Problems concerning legal load restrictions.
105.19 Contractor efforts to maintain Contract work.
105.20 Project Engineer's action if such maintenance is not performed.
Actions taken in relation to partial or final acceptance. Include directions for

105.21
completion of or correction of unsatisfactory work.
The Project Diary is the document most often referred to in the case of a Contract
claim. If a claim is anticipated or has actually been started, detailed documentation
105.22
covering all project activities and any impacts on the Contractor’s operations should
be recorded.
100-119
General Provisions
Subsection Information to be Included on Form 103 – Project Diary
Material sources – Pit conditions before, during, and after removal of material;
106.02 method of working; haul road; and any other problems noted. Contact with property
owners.
Storage of Materials – Where stored, how and with whose permission. A Vested
106.08 Interest Letter is required if the material is stored on private property. Record the
condition of site at completion of project.
Method of Handling Materials – Damage and problems caused by transportation

106.09
methods, production procedures, etc.
106.10 CDOT furnished materials. Record source, quality, cost, and handling.
106.11 Contacts made concerning non-domestic steel and actions taken.
Compliance with applicable laws. Comments by property owners or the general

107.01
public.
Compliance with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices and the Traffic
107.10
Control Plan.
Conditions and discussions related to opening portions of work to traffic, including

107.16
CDOT and Contractor responsibilities.
107.17 Contractor efforts to protect work from damage.
108.01 Subcontractors working on the project.
108.03 Documentation of work progress as it relates to the Progress Schedule.
Clear statement explaining why time was or was not charged. To ensure consistency,
108.08 it is recommended that only one person be designated to document weather,
temperature, and other factors related to time charges.
Documentation of events leading to default of the Contract must be carefully and

108.10
concisely recorded.
Documentation of events leading to termination of the Contract must be carefully

108.11
and concisely recorded.
109.01 Inspection of scales and weigher certifications, as required.
109.07 Conformance to specifications and suitable storage conditions for materials on

hand.
Figure 100 - 11
100-120
General Provisions
120.6 FORM 262 and 263 – WEEKLY TIME COUNT REPORTS

Weekly Time Count Reports (Form 262 and Form 263)
Weekly time count reports provide a weekly statement of time charges to the Contract. Time
charges will be made in accordance with subsection 108.08 of the Standard Specifications,
appropriate for the method used to administer the Contract. See Appendix B for examples.
Consider the following guidelines:
1. Working Day. Use Form 262 – Weekly Time Count Report – Work Days if contract
administration is based on workdays.
2. Calendar Day. Use Form 263 – Weekly Time Count Report – Calendar Days if contract
administration is based on calendar days.
3. Fixed Completion Date. If contract administration is based on a fixed calendar date, it is

not necessary to use either Form 262 or Form 263.
4. Project Diary. Ensure that the project diary (i.e., Form 103) substantiates the daily
assessment of contract time, especially when less-than-full-time charges are assessed.
5. Night Shift Work. Work on a night shift that begins before midnight and ends after
midnight will be considered as occurring on the calendar day on which the shift ends.
6. SiteManager®. The SiteManager® Accessories feature includes Form 262 and Form 263.
Use of these computerized forms is optional.
7. Suspension of Work. When a project is to be suspended in accordance with subsection

105.01 of the Standard Specifications or when less-than-full-time charges are assessed,
the justification for the action must be documented on or attached to either Form 262
or Form 263, as appropriate. The documentation must include the reason the work was
discontinued and when the work is expected to resume. The justification requirements
for suspension will be the same as that which would be required to support a change
order to extend the project. When the Contractor requests the suspension, the
Contractor must provide the required documentation to justify the suspension.
8. Contractor Refusal to Sign. Form 262 or Form 263, as appropriate, should be completed
promptly and presented to the Contractor to sign and date weekly. If a Contractor refuses
to acknowledge receipt by signing the form, this refusal should be noted on the form.
The form should then be immediately sent by registered mail to the home office address
of the Contractor. If the proposed time charges will be protested, the Contractor has 30
days to file the written protest.
120.6.1 Project Status Reports (Form 110 and Form 517)
A Form 110 or Form 517 is required for every construction project including Local Agency and
enhancement projects. These forms are automatically generated.
100-121
General Provisions
120.6.2 Project Financial Status Report (Form 65)
120.6.2.1 Accessing Form 65 in SAP
The Project Engineer is responsible for monitoring the financial status of the project and the
Project Financial Status Report (Form 65) is the tool which provides the information necessary
to do this. To access the Project Financial Statement: Form 65 in SAP use transaction code ZJ20
– Project Financial Statement: Form 65. Because the Form 65 is in SAP, only CDOT employees
can generate the Form 65. There are Help documents that guide you through this in the SAP
Training website: http://saptraining/. Select Engineering then select Project Systems Lifecycle
then select Project Month End/Period Close.
120.6.2.1.1 Checking Funds for a Change Order
The Project Engineer will check the Financial Statement when developing a Change Order. The
steps for doing this are:
1. Maintain the Overs and Unders” report in AASHTOWare® SiteManager® Accessories, by

ensuring they are up to date. This information displays in the Over/(Unders) – Inc. Bid
Items, CMOs and Plan F/A line just above line [6] Total CMOs and Overs/(Unders).
2. When developing a change order, enter the planned amount for the Change Order in SAP
using transaction CJR2. The Help document that guides you through this is CJR2 – Enter
Planned Contract Expenditure on the Form 65.
3. Run the Form 65 Financial Statement. The planned change order amount will appear on
line [9] Planned Contract Expenditure and it will adjust the amounts in Line [14], [15],
and [16]. This is helpful to determine how the change order amount, CE costs and indirect
charges affect the project. For further assistance, see the Help document ZJ20 – Review
Planned Contractor Expenditures.
4. Review line [25] Total Cost of Project compared to the next two lines (Curr Allotment
and TCA Allotment).
a. If line Curr Allotment and TCA Allotment are positive (+) or in surplus there is
funding in your project for the change order.
b. If line Curr Allotment and/or TCA Allotment are negative (-) or in deficit you will
need to add money to the project. Contact your Region Business office for
guidance to move forward. Refer to 120.6.3.2 Requests for Additional Funds. You
will use this Form 65 to justify the amount you need to add to the project.
5. To avoid accounting for the planned change order twice, this next step is crucial. You
must remove the amount entered for Planned Contract Expenditure. The Help document
that guides you through this, CJR2 – Remove Planned Contract Expenditure on the Form
65, is located in the SAP Training website: Select Engineering then select Project Systems
Lifecycle then select Project Month End/Period Close then select CJR2 – Remove Planned
Contract Expenditure on the Form 65.
100-122
General Provisions
6. Now you are ready to create the change order in Trans*port SiteManager® and approve.
See section 120.7 of this manual.
7. You will need to manually adjust the Projected Quantities for the newly added items in
Trans*port SiteManager® Accessories under the Contract Administration tab.
8. Run the Form 65. Check that line [9] is zero and that Curr Allotment and TCA Allotment
are positive (+) or in surplus. The Help document that guides you through this is ZJ20 –
Project Financial Statement: Form 65.
120.6.2.1.2 Maintain Form 65 for the Estimate
The Project Engineer will follow steps one and eight above to generate and check the Financial
Statement monthly and submit it along with the Progress Payment Estimate from SiteManager®.
120.6.2.1.3 Adding Comments
To enter comments in the comments field at the bottom of the form, use SAP transaction CJ20N
- Project Builder and in the Structure tree on the left select the Construction WBS
(XXXXX.20.10). Then in the Work Area on the right click on the Long text tab and enter your
comments starting in Line 2. Do not enter comments in line 1, because it is not displayed on
the Form 65 and is reserved for the WBS element description.
120.6.2.2 Requests for Additional Funds
If the projected completion cost is expected to exceed the project commitment amount for
the current project budget, the Region is required to request additional funding by submitting
Form 1186 – Contract Funding Increase/Decrease and Approval Letter (Funding Letter) to the
CDOT Controller. This submission should be made at least two weeks prior to paying an estimate
that will exceed the project commitment amount. The project commitment amount is equal to
the amount of the Contract (i.e., bid amount) plus the projected amount of all planned force
account work.
If the projected completion cost exceeds 115 percent of the latest Transportation Commission
action, the Region is required to obtain Transportation Commission approval.
For further information, see CDOT Procedural Directive 40.1 – Project Financial Status During
Preconstruction and Construction. Contact the Region Business Manager or the Center for
Accounting for any needed assistance. See the example and instructions in Appendix B.
120.6.2.3 Processing of Funding Letters
A funding letter must be submitted and approved before any amount that exceeds the project
commitment amount can be paid to the Contractor. The Region is responsible for determining
when a funding letter should be submitted on a project (see Section 120.6.3.2). A funding letter
is created by completing Form 1186 Contract Funding Increase/Decrease and Approval Letter.
The following procedures should be used to process funding letters:
100-123
General Provisions
120.6.2.3.1 Funding Letters Related to CMOs
The Construction Engineering Services Branch Construction Area Engineers will modify highway
construction Purchase Orders (POs) for funding letter requests that are related to Contract
Modification Orders (CMOs).
1. The Project Engineer will enter a SAP Shopping Cart, provide a draft of the CMO Form
90, a draft of the explanation letter and any pertinent attachments to the Region
Business Office.
2. Upon approval of the Shopping Cart by the Region Business Office and the Program
Engineer, the Business Office will submit the request, with all attachments and the
funding letter, to the Construction Area Engineer and the Budget and Policy Analyst in
OFMB. The Region Business Office will submit the completed funding letter to the CDOT
Controller.
3. Once the CMO complies with the requirements of Section 120.7 of this Manual and OFMB
concurs with the request, the Construction Area Engineer will modify the PO.
120.6.2.3.2 Funding Letters Not Related to CMOs
The Construction Area Engineers will also modify highway construction PO amendments not
related to CMOs for funding letter requests for general increases or decreases. The process
steps shall be as follows:
1. The Project Engineer will enter a SAP Purchase Requisition and provide documentation,
including Form 65 and Overs/Unders report, as to what has changed in the project scope
that requires the increase or decrease.
2. Upon approval of the SAP Purchase Requisition by the Region Business Office and the
Program Engineer, the Business Office will submit the request, with all attachments and
the Funding Letter, to OFMB to determine whether the change is due to a budget issue.
The Region Business Office will submit the completed funding letter to the CDOT
Controller.
a. If the change is related to justifiable cost overruns or underruns and project

budget is available, the request will be immediately forwarded to the
Construction Area Engineer to modify the PO.
b. If the change is not justifiable or there are other concerns, the request will be
returned to the Region for additional clarification.
3. Upon receipt of a PO modification request that has been reviewed by OFMB, the
Construction Area Engineer will proceed with modifying the PO.
100-124
General Provisions
120.7 CHANGE ORDERS

120.7.1 General Requirements
A change order is a construction-industry accepted term for a change in the scope,

specifications, pay items, project limits, duration, or design of a project, as compared to the
original Contract requirements. Change orders are legal documents that revise the terms of the
original Contract between CDOT, and the Contractor Appendix C presents many examples of
commonly occurring types of change orders.
120.7.2 Administrative Settlements
Every change order should be a fair and equitable agreement between CDOT and the
Contractor. Change orders should not be affected by the personalities of either CDOT or
Contractor personnel. Change orders at the Project Engineer/Region level must be based on a
contractual basis using information to conform to Colorado Revised Statutes.
The Chief Engineer and the Region Transportation Directors are the only CDOT individuals with
authority to make an administrative settlement between CDOT and a contractor. CDOT
Procedural Directive 304.1, Regional Transportation Director Authority for Administrative
Settlement of Construction Contract Claims, delegates authority to Region Transportation
Directors (RTDs), subject to the supervision of the Chief Engineer and Executive Director of the
Department. Region personnel other than the RTD cannot make administrative settlements. An
administrative settlement is defined as an agreement that is not based solely on a contractual
basis using factual information. The Settlement Agreement must be based on discussions with
the Chief Engineer, the Area Engineer staff, RTD, the Region staff, CDOT’s Controller, the Office
of Attorney General (AGO), and the Office of the State Controller (OSC). The rationale for the
decision should be documented in the Letter of Explanation for the resulting change order. The
Chief Engineer or RTD will coordinate with the AGO to prepare the Settlement Agreement for
all Administrative Settlements. Following a formal review by CDOT’s Controller, all covered
parties to the Settlement Agreement shall sign the Settlement Agreement, which includes the
AGO, the OSC, Chief Engineer or RTD, and the Contractor in accordance with the OSC’s Policy
regarding Settlement Agreements. The Settlement Agreement is an attachment to the Form 90
which shall be distributed to the Contractor.
Consider the following example: The Contractor submits a request for $100,000. The Project
Engineer evaluates the request, reviews the Contract documents and is unable to support the
request based on the facts and Contract requirements.
The Project Engineer considers the impacts that may result if the Contractor's request is denied,
and the Contractor files a claim. The Project Engineer and his staff are busy and responding to
a dispute will require a great deal of time and effort.
It will probably be necessary to hire a claims consultant to assist in preparing the claim
response, which will be expensive. If the claim is not settled and arbitration is necessary, costs
will increase, and additional time and effort will be required by the Project Engineer and his
100-125
General Provisions
staff. The Project Engineer determines that the impacts of denying this request will be
significant and does not have time to prepare a dispute response.
Even though the request cannot be supported by the facts and Contract requirements, the
Project Engineer makes a monetary offer to the Contractor. This is an administrative settlement
regardless of the amount offered ($1or $50,000) and cannot be made by Region personnel other
than the RTD.
If the request cannot be supported by the facts and Contract requirements in accordance with
subsection 105.22 of the Standard Specifications, the Project Engineer must deny the request.
The Project Engineer should discuss denial of the request with the appropriate Area Engineer.
If a portion of the request is justified, the Project Engineer should execute a change order for
the portion that is justified.
The Contractor must file a Request for Equitable adjustment to pursue the request or the
portion of the request that was not justified.
120.7.3 Preparation of Change Orders
120.7.3.1 Requirements and Responsibilities
The Form 90 will be completed and shall be signed by CDOT and the Contractor prior to the
start of the added or changed work. The Resident Engineer is responsible for approving all
change orders. Refer to the approval requirements in section 120.7.5 and Table 120.7.5 - Order
of Signatures on Form 90 for information on approvals that are required on specific types of
change orders.
In some cases, time constraints may prevent the Form 90 from being completed and signed
before work starts. If it is necessary to commence work before the Form 90 is completed, the
Project Engineer will provide the Contractor with a written authorization to proceed. It is
important that this authorization be as specific and accurate as possible to avoid further costs
that may result from any confusion. The authorizing document should contain as much of the
information required on the Form 90 as possible. The Project Engineer will use a letter or Form
105 – Speed Memo to issue the authorization. This authorization will be signed and routed using
Adobe Sign. The authorization must describe the specific work being authorized, the basis of
payment, the applicable specifications, and the method of measurement. The basis of payment
will be one of the following: Contract unit prices, agreed unit prices, lump sum, or force
account. When the basis of payment is agreed unit price or lump sum, the memo will include
the actual agreed unit price or lump sum. The change order should be completed and executed
as soon as possible.
The Form 90 – Contract Modification Order is used to document all changes to the original
Contract. See Section 120.6.7 for Types of Change Orders. For change orders considered minor
(Minor Contract Revision or MCR), it is acceptable to include more than one MCR line item on
each Form 90.
100-126
General Provisions
The Project Engineer will submit a copy of the Minor Change Order Items Summary worksheet
from SiteManager® Accessories to the Resident Engineer and Region Program Engineer for
review on a monthly basis as the items are added to the Contract. Upon completion of the
project, all Minor Contract Revision (MCR) Form 90’s shall be packaged and submitted by the
Project Engineer with one Letter of Explanation to the Region Program Engineer for final
signature. The approved Letter of Explanation and MCR package will then be forwarded on to
the Construction Engineering Services Branch by the Region Finals Administrator.
In accordance with CRS 24-30-202, the CDOT Form 90 must be “fully executed”, i.e., signed by
both the Contractor and CDOT, before payment can be made to the Contractor for the change
order work. Typically, the CDOT signature required to fully execute the change order would be
that of the CDOT Project Engineer. In cases where there is a consultant project engineer, the
Resident Engineer’s signature is required. Obtain the remaining signatures on the CDOT Form
90 and finalize the explanation letter as soon as possible thereafter.
Payment for the change order work will be made on the monthly or interim estimate as the
work is completed. Barring disputes or missing documentation completed work shall be paid for
monthly if the contractor is satisfactorily performing the work.
120.7.3.2 Required Information for the Form 90
The Form 90, Contract Modification Order, must be prepared in a clear and concise manner to
effectively communicate to the Contractor the exact work to be performed, the applicable
specifications, the basis of payment, and the impacts to contract time. Only contractual and
factual information should be presented in the form 90. Form 90s will include the following
information:
1. Heading Information. Ensure that the heading information on the Form 90 is correctly
completed including the change order title block. Include “Minor Contract Revision” in
the title block by selecting it from the pull-down menu if appropriate.
2. Cost Adjustments. Include the estimated increase or decrease in project cost associated
with the change order; SiteManager automatically fills this field. The cost of a Minor
Contract Revision type of change order will always be zero because added cost will be
balanced against Item 700-70010 F/A Minor Contract Revisions.
3. Opening Statements. The use of one of the following opening statements is required on
all Form 90s:
a. “You are hereby authorized to...”
b. “Your Contract is hereby modified to include...”
c. “Your Contract is hereby revised to...”
4. Minimum Information. The Form 90 must clearly describe, at a minimum, the following
information:
a. description of work or change;
100-127
General Provisions
b. location of change;
c. description of materials, including quantities and specifications;
d. construction requirements including plan and specification references;
e. method of measurement; and
f. basis of payment.
5. Contract Time. Ensure that contract time is properly addressed in the Form 90 and
specify if the time is calendar or working days. Note that time adjustment must match
the contract time type (working or calendar) in the original contract. If no time will be
granted, add the statement “No additional time will be added for this work” to the form
90.
6. Attachments. If attachments are necessary, ensure that each attachment contains the
project number and project code and is sequentially numbered and referenced in the
Form 90. If new or revised plan sheets are required, ensure that they are referenced as
attachments to the Form 90 and sealed by the responsible designer, as discussed in CDOT
Procedural Directive 508.1 – Professional Engineer’s Stamp. The new or revised plan
sheets shall be Sealed by the responsible designer using software for electronic seals or
mechanical seals
120.7.4 Statewide Uniformity
The Construction Area Engineer is responsible for providing subject matter expertise, ensuring
statewide uniformity, and monitoring all change orders for completeness and conformance with
established CDOT policies and procedures. The Construction Area Engineer is available for
assistance with any change order but is not authorized to approve change orders. The Project
Engineer will contact the Construction Area Engineer for advice and assistance on all Contract
Modification Orders. The Construction Area Engineer is available to assist with all MCRs. At a
minimum, the following items will be discussed:
1. circumstances precipitating the change order;
2. items of work to be included in the change order;
3. basis of payment and justification for the prices being authorized; and
4. justification of any time extensions.
120.7.5 Approval Procedures for Change Orders
120.7.5.1 Pre-approval of Change Orders
Regardless of the funding source, the Project Engineer will obtain pre-approval from the
Resident Engineer before the Contractor signs a Form 90; and, upon notification, the Resident
Engineer should consult with the Region Program Engineer in responsible charge of funding
100-128
General Provisions
decisions. The Resident Engineer must pre-approve the change order before the Project
Engineer discusses it with the FHWA Area Engineer (FHWA AE).
Other approvals may also be required, as discussed in Section 120.7.7. These approvals are
dependent upon the nature of the change order. For example, a structural change would require
concurrence of the structural designer. A materials change would require the concurrence of
the Region Materials Engineer or Staff Materials or both.
Written approval from the FHWA AE is required prior to work being performed for the following
CMOs:
1. All Project Termini Extensions, regardless of oversight or funding (as defined in 23 CFR
635.102 and CDOT’s Construction Manual, 120.7.7.3)
2. All changes affecting NEPA scope or Environmental Commitments
3. All Administrative Settlement of Claims
4. “Major” Design Changes on all FHWA Projects of Significant Interest (PoDI), as defined in
CDOT’s Construction Manual 120.7.7.1, “significant” to be determined via discussions
between the FHWA AE and CDOT. Major changes on non-PoDi’s are delegated to CDOT.
The FHWA approval process for these CMOs is outlined below:
1. The CDOT Project Engineer notifies the applicable FHWA AE as soon as possible of the
proposed change prior to the work commencing. This is to start the early coordination
between FHWA and CDOT. Upon notification, the FHWA AE will determine the
appropriate level of FHWA involvement. When the FHWA AE will be signing the CMO, the
following process applies.
2. The Project Engineer will submit to the FHWA AE an electronic draft of the CMO (Form
90) and draft of the Letter of Explanation, which includes a detailed description of the
work, location of change, description of materials, construction requirements, method
of measurement, and basis of payment including any contract time extensions, and any
pertinent attachments, etc. The FHWA AE will review the CMO and supporting
documentation in accordance with the “Evaluation of Change Orders” section of the
FHWA procedures.
3. The FHWA AE will notify CDOT of any needed additional information or provide comments
to CDOT within 5 business days. The FHWA AE shall verify that all pertinent information
relating to the CMO, along with an independent cost analysis (as described in section
120.7.6.2 of the Construction Manual), is included in the submittal. The method and
degree of analysis can vary by project, but it must support the final compensation
determination.
4. The FHWA AE will not provide prior approval but will discuss the CMO with CDOT so that
they may prepare the final Form 90 and gather necessary CDOT signatures The CDOT
Project Engineer will submit a final Form 90 to the FHWA AE for approval.
100-129
General Provisions
5. The FHWA AE, through signature of the Form 90 will provide formal approval of the CMO.
The FHWA AE should receive the Form 90 and all attachments before the contractor
performs any of the work. If the work is emergency work that must begin with the written
notice from the Project Engineer (i.e., via 105), the Project Engineer shall contact the
FHWA Area Engineer and their Construction Area Engineer prior to beginning such work.
The Form 90 can be submitted as a PDF for FHWA signature.
6. The FHWA AE will sign the Form 90 and return the Form 90 with the original signature to
the Project Engineer within 5 business days of receipt.
7. When time allows, the original Form 90 shall be routed through CDOT and FHWA to collect
original signatures for final project documentation. All attachments, including the
explanation letter, emails and signed PDF documents should be circulated with the
original form 90 to hasten this process
CDOT Project Engineer Consultant Project Engineer

Standard PoDi/ PTE / Standard PoDi/ PTE /
CDOT Project Engineer CDOT Project Engineer Resident Engineer Resident Engineer
Contractor Resident Engineer Contractor Program Engineer
Resident Engineer Program Engineer Program Engineer FHWA Area Engineer
Program Engineer FHWA Area Engineer Contractor
Contractor RTD or Chief Engineer*
RTD or Chief Engineer*
PoDi - Projects of Division Interest
PTE - Project Termini Extension
*Admin. Settlement - Administrative Settlement (*only Chief Engineer)

Figure 100 - 12
120.7.5.2 Electronic Signatures on Change Orders
Whenever possible, it is preferred to approve and route final change orders in an electronic
format. The Engineer will follow the existing change order process in the Construction Manual
for pre-approval and review of change orders. Adobe Sign® is required to electronically sign
the CDOT Form 90, Contract Modification Order. To utilize Adobe Sign®, the person initiating
signatures is required to have access to the software; however, signing documents as a recipient
does not require a software license. Consultant Project Engineers may initiate the signature
process with their company’s Adobe Sign license. CDOT Resident Engineers or CDOT delegates
will need to initiate the signatures in Adobe Sign if the Consultant Project Engineer does not
have a license.
For a single change order, mixed formats, i.e., using both electronic and hard copies, is not
allowed. The final change order will be either all electronic or all hard copy.
100-130
General Provisions
Electronic change orders will have two PDFs (portable document format) when obtaining
signatures:
1. The Form 90 and the attachments referenced in it (Form 90 Document) and
2. The Letter of Explanation and its supporting attachments (Letter of Explanation

Document).
Form 90 Document
The Engineer will combine the Form 90 and its attachments into one PDF document. If the Form
90 is developed in Site Manager, print the Form 90 in PDF from SiteManager. When setting up
the Form 90 PDF document and before routing for signature in Adobe Sign, check the
appropriate boxes related to PoDi and Participating funds. This document is routed for
electronic signature to the contractor, CDOT personnel, and FHWA personnel (when applicable)
(Table 120.7.5 - Order of Signatures on Form 90). Examples of the Form 90 attachments include
new or revised plan sheets or special provisions. The revised or added plan sheets also require
the responsible engineer’s seal before routing for signature.
Letter of Explanation Document
The Engineer will prepare a PDF of the Letter of Explanation and all supporting documentation.
Typically, the supporting documents include correspondence, email, independent price
justifications, schedules, Form 65, etc. that are referenced in the Letter of Explanation. The
attachments to the Letter of Explanation will be sequentially numbered and referenced in the
Letter of Explanation and include the Project Code and Project Number on each page. This
letter is not distributed to the Contractor and does not require signatures in Adobe Sign.
120.7.5.3 Archiving Final Executed Change Order in ProjectWise
Once signed and completed the Project Engineer may combine the two documents in Adobe
Sign or keep the documents separate and place the change order PDF documents in the
project’s Change Order folder in ProjectWise. Include the Project Code, CMO or MCR, change
order number, and Form 90 or Letter of Explanation in the file name (e.g.,
22391_CMO002_Form90). Also, once the change order is completely executed, email a
ProjectWise link of the Change Order and its attachments and the Letter of Explanation and its
attachments to the Area Engineer.
100-131
General Provisions
Figure 100 - 13
120.7.6 Letter of Explanation
A Letter of Explanation is required to explain and justify each Contract Modification Order. This
letter is not distributed to the Contractor. The Letter of Explanation will provide the essential
information to support sufficient justification.
It is acceptable to submit one letter of explanation for all of the minor (MCR Type) change
orders at the completion of the project or a letter for each MCR Form 90. This letter will be
drafted as MCRs are added.
120.7.6.1 Content Requirements
The Letter of Explanation must contain sufficient information for a person unfamiliar with the
project to review and understand the change without additional assistance (see Appendix C).
The following information must be included in the Letter of Explanation:
1. Description of Change. Provide a clear and detailed explanation of the change being
made.
2. Explanatory Narrative. Provide a clear and detailed explanation of why the change is
being made.
3. Measurement and Payment. Include the method of measurement and the basis of
payment that will be used to pay for the work.
4. Contract Time. Explain the impact the change will have on contract time. If time will be
adjusted, ensure that the letter thoroughly explains and justifies the adjustment. Time
adjustments should only be made if an analysis of the project schedule determines that
there is a change to the critical path of the Contractor’s current approved schedule.
100-132
General Provisions
5. Price Justification. Include justification for each price to be paid for the work. See
Section 120.7.6.2 for additional information on price justification.
6. Conversations and Concurrence. Include the dates and with whom (name and section)
conversations were made and when concurrence was received from the responsible
design engineer and any specialty units (e.g., Staff, Region, consultant). The Professional
Engineer of Record should review and approve changes to design plan sheets. Also,
include the date when the change order was discussed with the Area Engineer (see
Section 120.7.4).
7. Financial Status. Describe the financial status of the project. See Section 120.7.6.3
for documentation requirements.
8. Budget Action. Include an explanation of budget action as discussed in Section 120.7.6.3,

if necessary.
9. Status of Work. Include a notation regarding work status, such as “No work has started”
or “Because of the emergency nature, work was authorized to commence by Form 105,
dated xx/xx/xx” and attach a copy.
120.7.6.2 Price Justification
When the proposed basis of payment is an agreed unit price or lump sum, a justification for the
basis of payment must be included in the Letter of Explanation for every new contract item.
Federal and state statutes require that a cost justification accompany all change orders. The
purpose of the cost justification is to establish or verify a reasonable cost for the work, not to
determine exact costs. The price will be justified by one of the methods discussed in this
Section. Contact the Area Engineer, as needed, for advice and assistance.
The price justification will be detailed. If the price justification is simple, include all the details
in the Letter of Explanation. If the price justification is long or complicated, it should be
summarized in the Letter of Explanation and any detailed supporting attachments included with
the original copy of the change order.
120.7.6.2.1 Contractor Cost Analysis
The Project Engineer may request that the Contractor furnish a detailed cost analysis. The
Contractor is not required to provide a cost analysis. To be used for price justification, the cost
analysis will include breakouts of all costs for:
1. labor,
2. specific equipment,
3. material, and
4. an appropriate allocation of related fixed costs (i.e., overhead).
100-133
General Provisions
Fixed costs are usually offered as a percentage loading of the direct costs. A fixed cost of 15
percent or less is acceptable. A fixed cost greater than 15 percent should be analyzed for
reasonableness and justified in the explanation letter.
The Project Engineer may use the cost analysis to justify an agreed unit price or lump sum, if
the analysis is reviewed for reasonableness by the Project Engineer and the Letter of
Explanation contains the following statements:
1. The labor and equipment hours are reasonable.
2. The labor rates and the equipment rates are reasonable.
3. The material quantities and prices are reasonable.
4. The total cost, including overhead, is reasonable.
To help the Project Engineer determine if the cost analysis is reasonable, he may use wage
decisions, contractor payrolls, the Rental Rate Blue Book of Rental Rates for Construction
Equipment, average equipment rates from the QC Training Manual for Construction Contract
Administration, quotes from equipment rental firms and material suppliers, or other sources.
The Contractor’s Cost Analysis is not required to use exact numbers from any of these suggested
reference sources.
For Contract changes that are considered minor (MCR), the Project Engineer need only to review
the Contractor’s Cost Analysis for accuracy and completeness and attach it to the Letter of
justification. The Project Engineer shall include those statements described above as required
for the MCR Letter of Explanation verifying that the costs have been reviewed, properly
documented, and are considered reasonable. No further documentation is required to be
submitted beyond what is stated here for minor (MCR) change orders.
120.7.6.2.2 Independent Cost Analysis
The Project Engineer may prepare an independent cost analysis, also called a force account
analysis, to justify an agreed unit price or lump sum. The unit price or lump sum justified by
this method should not exceed the total cost determined by the Project Engineer’s independent
force account analysis by more than 15 percent.
To help the Project Engineer estimate the costs, he may use wage decisions, contractor
payrolls, the Rental Rate Blue Book of Rental Rates for Construction Equipment, average
equipment rates from the QC Training Manual for Construction Contract Administration, quotes
from equipment rental firms and material suppliers, or other sources. The force account
analysis is not required to use exact numbers from these reference sources. The intent is to
provide a simple but reasonable cost estimate.
For minor change orders (MCRs), a tiered approach for handling smaller cost changes and larger
costs is acceptable. For MCRs under $10,000 (use aggregate amount) an estimated method as
shown in the following example may be used. For MCRs over $10,000 a more detailed analysis
100-134
General Provisions
is required using payrolls, invoices, equipment rates following the method outlined in the CDOT
Standard Specifications, subsections, 109.04(a) through 109.04(e).
Example Minor Change Order $0 to $10,000 – Estimated Method:

Example: Added item 603-30036 36-inch Steel End Section, Contractor submitted price $1,200
each for 1 each. Total cost $1,200.00. The Project Engineer’s force account analysis:
Categories Totals
Labor:
Laborer 4 hr X $20/hr $80.00
Operator 4 hr X $30/hr $120.00
Labor Total $200.00 $200.00
Equipment:
Combination Loader 4 hr X $ 90/ hr $360.00
Pickup 4 hr X $50/hr $200.00
Equipment Total $560.00 $560.00
Materials:
End Section 1 each X $400/each $400.00
Materials Total $400.00 $400.00
Total: $1,160.00
A price of up to $1,334 is acceptable.

Figure 100 - 14
The Force Account estimate procedure as stated above shall be used only when the total dollar
amount of the minor (contract revision (MCR) is equal to or less than $10,000.
For a major contract change, a more detailed analysis is required as outlined in CDOT Standard
Specifications, subsections 109.04(a) through 109.04(e). The Project Engineer shall provide all
necessary documentation to justify the costs documented in the cost analysis.
Example MCR /Major Change Order Over $10,000 – Estimated Method:
Repair to Existing MSE Wall: The Contractor submitted a lump sum cost of $12,500.00 to repair
the wall. This work includes the removal of block facing, excavation of existing material, and
100-135
General Provisions
the replacement of backfill material and blocks. Concrete slope and ditch paving will be placed
to prevent further erosion.
The information below includes wage rates taken from the project Wage Decision, rounded to
the nearest dollar, equipment rates from the 2007 historical data in the QC Manual, and
rounded to the nearest dollar, and material rates that were quoted by the suppliers.
Categories Totals
Labor:
Laborer (3) 144 hr X $18.00/hr $2,592.00

Operator 48 hr X $20.00/hr $960.00
67% loading $2,380.00
Labor Total $5,932.00 $5,932.00
Equipment:
Flatbed Truck 16 hr @ $20.00/hr $320.00 $320.00
Rental Equipment:
Backhoe 6 days @ $200/day $1,200.00

10% Loading $120.00
Rental Equipment Total $1,320.00 $1,320.00
Materials:
Concrete ClB 14 cu yd @ $250.00/cu yd $3,500.00

Facing Blocks 100 blocks @ $12.00 each $1,200.00
15% loading $705.00
Materials Total $ 5,405.00 $5,405.00
Subtotal: $12,977.00
Administrative loading per 109.04(e) $640.00
Total: $13,617.00
Therefore, the contractor’s submitted price of $12,500.00 is acceptable.

Figure 100 - 15
120.7.6.2.3 CDOT Cost Data Book
Price justification should be performed by comparing the unit prices with those documented in
the latest complete year of the CDOT Cost Data Book. The CDOT Cost Data Book should be used
in a statistically meaningful way. If the proposed unit price is unreasonable or significantly
100-136
General Provisions
greater than the average yearly unit price in the CDOT Cost Data Book, further justification
must be provided. It may be necessary to review the detailed data for the item. If market prices
for a particular item are volatile, it may be reasonable to use data from the current (partial)
year to justify the Contractor’s submitted price.
The prices presented in the CDOT Cost Data Book are average prices. It is unreasonable to
expect the price comparison to be exact prior to acceptance. It may be reasonable to accept
price deviations of up to 15 percent. For example, the Contractor submits a price of $2,350 for
an inlet, but the average price in the CDOT Cost Data Book is $2,268. This may be considered
reasonable.
Comparisons can be made to selected projects based on the quantity involved or the project
location, and but the rationale for the data selection will be included in the Letter of
Explanation. Either average bid or award prices can be used. A weighted average will be
calculated based on the selected data. It is also reasonable to consider inflation and unusual
project factors. The latest full year issue of the CDOT Cost Data Book should be used for these
comparisons. Consider the following example:
Example of Weighted Awarded Bid Average: Is $350.00/LF a reasonable price for 80 LF of Item
503-00036, Drilled Caisson (36 In)?
Project No. Description Qty LF X $/LF = Cost
FBR095A-011 SH95, Sheridan Bridge 76 X $ 205.00 = $15,580.00
FSA002A-005 SH2: 12th Ave & EB I70 88 X $ 238.00 = $20,944.00
FSA0142-054 SH257 & SH14 76 X $ 270.00 = $20,520.00
NH160A-019 In Pagosa Springs 76 X $ 575.00 = $43,700.00
STA0504-066 US50B in Rocky Ford 76 X $ 462.00 = $35,112.00
∑ 392 LF ∑ $135,856.00
$135,856.00 /392 LF = $346.57 / LF. Since the price is within 15% of calculated weighted
average, $350.00/LF is reasonable.
Note: Comparison to a single project may be acceptable if that project work is similar in nature,
location, and quantity. Rationale for the comparison will be explained in the Letter of
Explanation.
If a submitted price is greater than the highest of either of these averages, then the Engineering
Estimates and Market Analysis Unit of the Construction Engineering Services Branch may be
contacted to review the submitted price and verify that it is reasonable. The Engineering
Estimates Unit may also be contacted for advice and assistance on issues such as market
conditions, inflation, site-specific cost fluctuations, and guidance on analyzing cost data. The
100-137
General Provisions
Project Engineer is responsible for justifying the prices paid for the work; however, written
concurrence and justification from the Engineering Estimates Unit will suffice for price
justification and should be included with the explanation letter.
120.7.6.3 Budget Actions
The Project Engineer is required by Procedural Directive 715.1 to prepare an updated CDOT
Form 65 for active construction projects on a monthly basis. This is to be reviewed by the
Resident Engineer prior to the time the Interim Estimate is paid to the Contractor. Procedural
Directive 715.1 also requires that no active construction project exceed budgeted funds by
more than five (5) percent.
The Region Program Engineer is responsible for funding decisions, which includes signing the
change order and indicating the type of funds. The Region Program Engineer must also approve
all increases to the current minor contract revision limit. The date and new limit (i.e.,
cumulative total) will be recorded by a letter or email from the Region Program Engineer to
the Project Engineer. Concurrence from the Region Program Engineer is to be obtained prior to
exceeding each cumulative limit. The Project Engineer must include in the Letter of Explanation
a description of the financial status of the project. The following table is made available to
assist Project Engineers in addressing this requirement, and could be used in the Letter of
Explanation:
(FOR EACH STATEMENT ON THE LEFT, CHECK ONE STATEMENT ON THE RIGHT)
The amount listed in __ Does not exceed approved Project Commitment Amount**- No
PROJ’D TO COMPL column Form 1186 required
on Line [7] Project __ Exceeds approved Project Commitment Amount**- Form 1186
Commitment Amount*: Required
__ Exceeds approved Project Commitment Amount** - Delaying
funding letter until the projected quantities can be
adjusted accurately
The amount listed in
PROJ’D TO COMPL column __ <5% Over Current Allotment*** - No Budget Action is required
on Line [25] Total Cost of __ >5% Over Current Allotment*** - Budget Action is required
Project is*:
The amount listed in
PROJ’D TO COMPL column __ <15% Over Current TCA**** – No Commission Action required
on Line [25] Total Cost of __ >15% Over Current TCA****– Commission Action is required
Project is*:
Figure 100 - 16
Notes:
*Add to this amount the total cost of the CMO including CE costs.
100-138
General Provisions
**The approved Project Commitment Amount is the sum of the Awarded Project Commitment
Amount (i.e., Line 7, AWARD column of Form 65) and any approved funding letters (CDOT Form
1186 – Contract Funding Increase/Decrease and Approval Letter).
***The Current Allotment is listed in Line 3, CURRENT column of Form 65. ****The Current TCA
(TRANS COMM ACTION) is listed in Line 26 (top right corner) of Form 65.
If the table above is not used in the Letter of Explanation, all appropriate text from the table
will be excerpted and included, based on the boxes checked above. For example:
If the first line is checked in the box above, the project has a surplus, and the following
statement will be included:
“No Form 1186 is required.”
See Section 120.6.3.2 for additional information.
120.7.7 Types of Change Orders
The situations presented in this Section require change orders but are not all-inclusive. Other
situations may apply. Major and minor changes are processed using the Form 90- Contract
Modification Order. The Resident Engineer is responsible for determining the type of change
order required for the change. In addition to other criteria such as whether a change is a major
design change, it is recommended that a $25,000 limit be used for a Minor Contract Revision
line item. Cost alone should not be used to determine if a change is major or minor. See
Appendix C for complete examples.
Examples of Change Orders
Type of Change Scope of Change
Major Design Changes

Project Termini Extensions
CDOT Field Engineering Errors
Major
Settlement of Contract Claims
Changes to Traffic Control Plan (TCP)
Purchase of Authorized Materials
Minor Everything not described as Major and as

determined by the Resident Engineer
Note: The Project Engineer shall consult Resident Engineer for the
type of change being addressed.
Figure 100 - 17
100-139
General Provisions
120.7.7.1 Major Design Changes
A Contract Modification Order is required for major design changes, including:
1. significant errors or omissions in the original design,
2. significant design features that are unsuitable for field conditions,
3. Value Engineering Change Proposals,
4. significant increase in cost, and
5. other unforeseen circumstances of a significant nature.
The Licensed Professional Engineer responsible for the design is required to stamp the new or
revised design, in accordance with CDOT Policy Directive 508.1 – Professional Engineer’s Stamp.
The Project Engineer is responsible for incorporating the changes into the As-Constructed Plans
(see Section 121.2.3).
During preparation, the Project Engineer will obtain the required concurrences before the
Resident Engineer approves the change order. Depending on the nature of the change order,
the following concurrences may be required:
1. Roadway Design. Major roadway design changes must have concurrence from the designer
in responsible charge.
2. Structures: Where the Contractor’s design is a revision to a structure in the bid plans,
the organization (CDOT or consulting firm) that provided the original design shall review
the contractor’s proposal for the Project Engineer. The following submittal requirements
shall be provided by the Contractor:
a. Construction plans sealed by a Colorado PE
b. Design Calculations
c. Independent design check calculations
A copy of the Contractor’s proposal shall also be sent to Staff Bridge for review and
archiving. This submittal shall be made to the Staff Bridge PE II assigned to the
applicable Region.
3. Typical Section. Major design changes to a typical section, including changes to the
subgrade, must have concurrence from the Region Materials Engineer.
4. Compaction Specification. Prior concurrence from both the Construction Area Engineer
and the Materials and Geotechnical Engineer is required when a contract modification
order is written to change the HMA compaction specification.
It is only necessary to note concurrences in the Letter of Explanation.
100-140
General Provisions
120.7.7.2 Differing Site Conditions/Significant Changes to Work
Differing site conditions and significant changes in the character of work, in accordance with
subsection 104.02 of the Standard Specifications, can be complex; and the expertise of
engineering staff beyond the office of the Resident Engineer and legal staff may prove to be
invaluable. The Construction Area Engineer is available to provide additional advice and
assistance. Consider the following:
1. Differing Site Conditions. Subsection 104.02(a) of the Standard Specifications defines

differing site conditions.
2. Disputes or Claims. A dispute or claim situation may occur if the Contractor encounters
conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract. If the Contractor
files a dispute or claim, refer to subsection 105.22 of the Standard Specifications for
additional guidance.
3. Significant Changes in Character of Work. Subsection 104.02(c) of the Standard

Specifications defines significant changes in the character of the work.
4. Contract Time. Subsection 108.08 of the Standard Specifications defines when the
Contractor may be entitled to additional contract time.
120.7.7.3 Project Termini Extensions
The preparation and approval of a Project Termini Extension is a detailed process with very
specific requirements. These procedures are stipulated in both state and federal statutes to
ensure environmental regulation compliance, competitive bidding and to result in the best
value for the State. It is very important that the Project Engineer follow the procedures for
documentation and approval (See Section 120.7.7.3.3). The justification of extensions is
carefully scrutinized to ensure that the proposal is in the best interests of the State.
In accordance with subsection 104.01 of the Standard Specifications, a Contract Modification

Order is required for all project termini extensions. There are two types to consider: Type I –
Routine and Type II – Critical. Both types require written approval and signatures by the
Construction Engineering Services Branch Manager and the Region Transportation Director in
the letter of explanation (see Section 120.7.7.3.3). For all Project Termini Extensions,
regardless of oversight or funding, FHWA should be notified to determine their level of
involvement. The Contractor must not sign the change order nor commence work until the
CDOT and FHWA signatures have been obtained. The Project Engineer must first determine
which type is applicable and note the type in the title of the change order. Evaluation criteria
and approval procedures for each type are discussed in the Sections that follow.
120.7.7.3.1 Type I – Routine Project Termini Extensions
All of the following criteria must be met when processing a change order for a Type I Extension.
The following items need to be addressed in the letter of explanation, in the same order as
shown below, in addition to the letter of explanation requirements outlined in Section 120.7.6
(See Section 120.7.7.3.3 for additional approval requirements):
100-141
General Provisions
1. The Contractor is willing to do the extra work.
2. The Contractor has obtained sufficient additional bonding and insurance for the
additional work.
3. The need for the work was initially established during the design process, but the work
was omitted because of funding constraints.
4. The work constitutes a lengthening of the project, will be performed in a no-work section
of the project, or is an added location for projects with various locations. In all cases,
the work is similar in kind and nature to the original Contract work.
5. Project funds are available, and the work can be completed at reasonable unit prices.
6. Added work will be paid at Contract unit prices with minor adjustments that are
considered necessary and desirable. No work will be paid by force account.
7. The total value of the proposed Type I Extension does not exceed either 20 percent of
the original Contract or $100,000, whichever is less.
8. The value of all negotiated work (i.e., work which will not be paid for at Contract unit
prices) does not exceed 20 percent of the value of the added work.
9. The Region Environmental Manager has completed the necessary environmental

clearances and permits and has given written concurrence.
10. The Resident Engineer, Program Engineer and pertinent specialty groups have concurred
with the proposal.
11. Contact the FHWA Area Engineer to determine the level of involvement FHWA wants with
this change order. If the FHWA Area Engineer will sign the Form 90, follow the procedure
in 120.7.5.
120.7.7.3.2 Type II – Critical Project Termini Extensions
All of the following criteria must be met when processing a change order for a Type II Extension.
The following items need to be addressed in the letter of explanation, in the same order as
shown below, in addition to the letter of explanation requirements outlined in Section 120.7.6
(See Section 120.7.7.3.3 for additional approval requirements):
1. The Contractor is willing to do the extra work.
2. The Contractor has obtained sufficient additional bonding and insurance for the
additional work.
3. The proposed work is in reasonably close proximity to the project.
4. The need for the work is of a critical nature for reasons of safety, structural adequacy,
or design deficiency.
5. Project or other funds are available to cover the cost of the proposed work.
100-142
General Provisions
6. The cost of the proposed work is not expected to exceed 50 percent of the value of the
original Contract.
7. Performing the proposed work as a project extension will avoid the cost of preparing
plans, advertising, and awarding a separate Contract. In order to justify a project
extension, these costs should be at least ten percent less expensive than if the work were
bid and completed under a separate Contract. The Project Engineer will prepare a cost
estimate of the anticipated total cost of the proposed work, as if it were bid and
performed under a separate contract.
The Project Engineer shall submit an analysis to the Engineering Estimates and Market
Analysis Unit (EEMA) of the Construction Engineering Services Branch comparing the
proposed costs of the project extension to the costs if the work were bid as a separate
contract. The EEMA may adjust the estimated costs to complete the work under a
separate contract as necessary. If justified, the EEMA unit will concur that the
anticipated cost savings to complete the work as a project extension is reasonable.
8. The Resident Engineer and Program Engineer have concurred with the proposed design
and the critical nature of the proposed extension.
9. The Region Environmental Manager has completed the necessary environmental

clearances and permits and has given written concurrence.
10. Contact the FHWA Operations Engineer to determine the level of involvement FHWA
wants with this change order. If the FHWA Operations Engineer will sign the Form 90,
follow the procedure in 120.7.5.
120.7.7.3.3 Approval Requirements for Project Extensions
1. CDOT Approval Procedures. Use the following procedures to obtain approval for change
orders for project extensions:
a. Written approval by the Construction Engineering Services Branch Manager and

Region Transportation Director is required for all project extensions.
b. The Project Engineer will submit to the Construction Area Engineer the full CMO
package, including a Letter of Explanation illustrating that the proposed
extension meets all the criteria for a project extension, including required
concurrences. The request must include "I Concur" signature-approval blocks for
the Construction Engineering Services Branch Manager and the Region
Transportation Director in the letter of explanation.
c. The Construction Area Engineer will review the request to ensure it addresses all
the project extension requirements and then forward the request to the
Construction Engineering Services Branch Manager for signature. Once the
signature is obtained, the document will be returned to the Construction Area
Engineer who will send it to the Region for final signatures.
100-143
General Provisions
d. The Construction Engineering Services Branch Manager and Region Transportation

Director will determine that the authorization of this work will not be at the
expense of an identified priority needed elsewhere in the Region or State.
2. FHWA Approval Procedures. Written approval (FHWA signature on the Form 90) may be
required from the FHWA Area Engineer for either type of project extension in accordance
with subsection 120.7.5 of this manual. The following are items that the Project Engineer
should be prepared to discuss with the FHWA Area Engineer:
a. What is the reason for extending the project termini?
b. Is the additional work programmed (i.e., included in the description of the

original project or another project in the Statewide Transportation Improvement
Program)?
c. Does an environmental clearance exist for the extra work? Either the work must
be covered by the original document for the original project, or a new document
must be prepared to cover the extra work. Guidance can be obtained from the
Region Planning and Environmental Manager, and concurrence in any
determination should be obtained from the FHWA Area Engineer.
d. What is the justification for not using competitive bidding?
e. The Region Program Engineer will make the Federal-Aid participation

determination for all Federal-Aid projects after written approval has been
obtained from the FHWA Area Engineer.
120.7.7.4 Contract Time Adjustments
Contract time is not automatically extended for additional work. The timing of the added
change order work and how that work fits in the schedule with critical path work will determine
if a time adjustment is warranted. No time adjustments will be made for work that can be
completed concurrently with other work on the project.
An adjustment to contract time requires a change order and is governed by subsection 108.08
of the Standard Specifications. There are two types of change orders regarding contract time
adjustments:
1. Contractor Request. If an adjustment of contract time is desired, the Contractor must

forward a written request to the Project Engineer. The request must state how the work
has been affected by items beyond the Contractor’s control. The request must also
include a schedule and supporting analysis showing how the work affected the critical
path to change the completion of the project. If accepted, the Project Engineer will
initiate a change order.
2. Changes in Work. Time adjustments for changes in work will be made only when a
schedule analysis shows an impact on the critical path. No time adjustments will be made
for work that can be completed concurrently with other work on the project. The Project
Engineer must justify the time adjustment with an analysis showing how the work affects
100-144
General Provisions
the critical path. Record the amount of time adjustment on the change order, even if it
is a zero adjustment.
120.7.7.5 Dispute and Claim Resolution
Most disputes and claims will be resolved in the Region since the Chief Engineer has delegated
this authority to the Region Transportation Directors (RTD), but when the Chief Engineer
resolves a claim, the Construction Area Engineer will provide sufficient information to the
Region for the preparation of the change order.
120.7.7.6 CDOT Field Engineering Errors
A change order is required to correct a CDOT field engineering error and is eligible for Federal-
Aid participation if the error could not have been reasonably anticipated or prevented. In
addition to the requirements of Section 120.7.6, the Letter of Explanation will address the
following:
1. Adequate Staffing. Include an explanation demonstrating that a sufficient number of field

engineering personnel were available to fulfill the necessary construction engineering
work.
2. Qualified Staff. Provide an explanation showing that the engineering personnel were
sufficiently skilled and trained to understand the Contract.
3. Error Details. Provide specific information on the cause and the impacts of the error.
4. Corrective Actions. Describe the measures that were taken to prevent recurrence of a
similar error.
120.7.7.7 Payment of Repairs
The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and repair of all Contract items, unless
the Project Engineer has relieved the Contractor of this responsibility in accordance with
subsections 104.04, 105.19, and 107.17 of the Standard Specifications (see Sections 104.4,
105.19, and 107.17 of this Manual for additional information). The Contractor shall also be held
responsible for damage to anything caused by his operations. If the Project Engineer grants
relief from damage, a change order will be required to make payment for the damage and
repairs. Consider the following:
1. Relief from Damage. CDOT will pay the Contractor for repair expenses under the
following conditions:
a. The item damaged was not included in the Contract work, and the damage was
sustained through no fault of the Contractor.
b. The damage to a Contract work item was through no fault of the Contractor, and
the Project Engineer relieved the Contractor of responsibility in accordance with
the governing Standard Specifications.
100-145
General Provisions
c. The damage to a Contract work item was due to an unforeseeable cause beyond
the control of and by no fault of the Contractor. See Section 107.17 for additional
information on unforeseeable causes.
d. To qualify for relief from damage due to a foreseeable cause, the Contractor must
have attempted to reasonably protect the Contract work item from the
foreseeable cause of damage. See Section 107.17 for additional information on
foreseeable causes and conditional protection.
2. Letter of Explanation. In addition to the requirements of Section 120.7.6, the Letter of

Explanation that accompanies the change order must include the following information:
a. The reason the Contractor could not have foreseen the event that caused damage
to the Contract work item.
b. The normal precautions that were taken by the Contractor to prevent damage to
the Contract work item.
120.7.7.8 Initiation or Extension of Utility Work
120.7.7.8.1 Initiation of Utility Work
When it is determined that utility work is essential to the satisfactory completion of the
Contract and there is no existing agreement with the utility for the project, the following
procedures must be used to authorize the utility work:
1. Notify Region Utilities Engineer. The Region Utilities Engineer will execute the new
agreement with the utility.
2. Determine Reimbursement Eligibility. The Region Utilities Engineer will determine if the
work is eligible for reimbursement in accordance with 23 Code of Federal Regulations
645.107, Subpart A.
3. Non-Reimbursable. If the relocation work is not reimbursable, the Region Utilities

Engineer will notify the utility to commence work and explain that it will be necessary
for the utility to coordinate relocation work with the Project Engineer.
4. Reimbursable. If the relocation is determined to be reimbursable in accordance with 23

Code of Federal Regulations 645.107, Subpart A, one of the following procedures must
be used to accomplish the work:
a. Work Performed by Utility. If the utility will do the work and bill the Contractor,
the Contractor and the utility must agree on the terms and conditions for
performance and payment of the work. A change order between CDOT and the
Contractor will be executed that authorizes the utility work. Basis of payment
will be a certified invoice from the utility to the Contractor. The utility invoice
will be the actual direct and related indirect costs of performing the work in
accordance with established accounting procedures. Administrative
compensation will be allowed according to subsection 109.04(e) of the Standard
Specifications.
100-146
General Provisions
b. Work Performed by Contractor. If the utility will allow the Contractor to perform
the work and the Contractor is willing and capable, the Region Utilities Engineer
will obtain a Contractor-Adjusted Utility Agreement from the utility, and the
Project Engineer will execute a change order between CDOT and the Contractor
to authorize the work.
120.7.7.8.2 Extension of Utility Work
If the cost of utility work will exceed the amount in the basic utility agreement, a change order
is required to authorize the extension or overrun. The Colorado Revised Statutes requires a
change order for every overrun or extension, no matter how insignificant. The Region Utilities
Engineer is responsible for preparing the change order for the utility agreement. The date of
the change order must precede the date that the work was performed. Major overruns or
extensions, as determined by the Region Utilities Engineer, require a supplemental utility
agreement that must be approved before the work is accomplished.
120.7.7.9 Major Change to Traffic Control Plan
A change order must be used to authorize major revisions to the Traffic Control Plan included
in the construction plans (e.g., addition of a crossover).
120.7.7.10 Acceptance of Non-Specification Materials
The Region Materials Engineer and the Materials and Geotechnical Services Branch should be
consulted and concur in the use of non-specification material incorporated into the work.
Justification should be in accordance with Section 105.3:
1. Items without an “F” Factor (see also Section 105.3.3.1.1). A change order must be
prepared for an item that does not have an “F” factor. The change order will establish
either a price reduction or an “F” factor. When an “F” factor is established, the price
reduction will be calculated using the price reduction formula in the Standard
Specifications.
2. Items with an “F” Factor and “P” Value > 25 (see also Section 105.3.3.1.2). A change
order must be prepared for items with an “F” factor that have a calculated “P” value
greater than 25. The change order must establish a price reduction based on engineering
judgment.
120.7.7.11 Purchase of Materials
Consider the following when processing change orders for purchase of materials:
1. Conditions. A change order will be required for:
a. a materials purchase, such as gravel for a maintenance stockpile, from a

Contractor who has a Contract with CDOT; and
b. Contractor purchased materials that were included in the Contract but not used
on the project.
100-147
General Provisions
2. Change Order. The change order must include:
a. material specifications,
b. location and delivery requirements,
c. method of measurement, and
d. basis of payment.
3. Letter of Explanation. The Letter of Explanation must include:
a. Justification. Justification for the material purchased.
b. Disposition. Proposed use of the material.
c. Account. Explanation of the account to the which the costs will be charged:
i. If the material can be used by Maintenance, the material should be

charged to the Maintenance Section. The Region Maintenance
Superintendent must give prior approval.
ii. If the material cannot be used by Maintenance, it must be processed as a

participating cost as follows:
4. If the material can be restocked, pay the restocking charge based on the certified
supplier’s invoice.
5. If the material cannot be restocked, pay the Contractor for the cost of the material based
on the certified supplier’s invoice. The material will become the property of the
Contractor or the Department, as determined by the Project Engineer.
120.7.8 Situations Not Requiring a Fully Executed Form 90
Signed Form 90s are not required under any of the following conditions:
1. Deleted or Unused Items. A change order is not required if a Contract pay item is deleted
or not used, unless the Contractor is to be compensated for costs incurred before the
item was deleted. The Contractor must be given written notification of the deletion.
2. Material Changes. No change order is required if the contract stipulates or allows for
choices of different types of material. If the contract does not stipulate or provide for
material alternatives, but the contractor proposes to change materials, this would be a
change to the contract and therefore a change order would be required.
3. Price Adjustments. If a Contract formula is used to compute the price reduction for non-
specification material, a change order is not required. A change order is required to
accept or correct non-specification material when the “P” factor is greater than 25 (see
Section 120.7.7.10 and Section 105.3).
100-148
General Provisions
4. Additional Items. A change order is not required to add items that are included in the
Contract. Some examples include:
a. liquidated damages,
b. piling cutoffs,
c. supplier lien deductions, and
d. extra construction surveying paid in accordance with 105.13(a) of the Standard

Specifications.
However, a change order is required for extra construction surveying if a rate different
from that in the Contract is negotiated.
5. Force Account. A change order is not required for payment of planned force account to
the Contractor unless the method of measurement or basis of payment is changed.
6. Field Revisions. The Resident Engineer will determine when a field revision constitutes
a design change and requires a change order. Some examples of when field revisions do
not require a change order include:
a. overruns or underruns of plan item quantities; and
b. minor adjustments to minor drainage structures, signs, fences, and walls.
Field revisions must be properly documented on the As-Constructed Plans.
120.7.9 Distribution of Completed Change Orders
120.7.9.1 General Requirements
The Region will distribute Contract Modification Orders, excluding MCR Change Orders after the
Form 90 is signed by the Program Engineer and FHWA Area Engineer, where necessary. All MCR
Change Orders will be submitted to Construction Services as a single document by the Region
Finals Administrator after project completion. Distribution of the final change order – Form 90,
letter of explanation and all attachments – is as follows:
1. Area Engineer – original;
6. Region – archived in ProjectWise Explorer in Adobe PDF/ A-1 b ISO compliant format; and
7. Contractor, excluding the Letter of Explanation.
After reviewing the change order for compliance with the requirements in this Manual and
obtaining corrections from the Region, the CDOT Construction Area Engineer will distribute the
original change orders, with all attachments, to the CDOT Records Center.
100-149
General Provisions
120.8 EMERGENCY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS

For additional information on Emergency Construction Projects, visit CDOT’s SharePoint site at:
http://connectsp/sites/eep/SitePages/Home.aspx
120.8.1 Definition of Emergency Conditions
Fiscal Rule 2-2 of the State of Colorado Fiscal Rules defines an emergency as follows:
An emergency is a situation that creates an immediate threat to public health, welfare, or

safety, the functioning of state government, or preservation or protection of property. There
is insufficient time to obtain a written waiver of the requirements for issuance of a commitment
voucher pursuant to this fiscal rule before requiring goods or services to respond to the
emergency.
If a situation does not pose an immediate threat to the public health, welfare, or safety, the
functioning of state government, or preservation or protection of property, it is not an
emergency, and these procedures cannot be used.
120.8.2 Scope of Emergency Procedures
Fiscal Rule 2-2 of the State of Colorado Fiscal Rules requires specific actions in an emergency
as follows:
In an emergency, the head of an agency or institution, or his/her designee, may acquire goods
and services necessary to respond to an emergency without execution of a state contract or
purchase order, provided that such emergency procurements shall be made with such
competition as is practicable under the circumstances. Disbursement may be made upon receipt
of invoices, receipts, or other statements describing goods or services being purchased and the
amount to be paid. Commitment vouchers shall be executed as soon as possible to define future
performance obligations where required by the fiscal rules. As soon as practicable, and in no
event later than the end of the next business day, a written report of the circumstances and
the nature and value of the commitments shall be made to the chief financial officer of the
agency and institution and to the State Controller.
In an emergency, only those goods and/or services that are necessary to respond to the
emergency may be acquired without the execution of a state contract. Emergency
procurements shall be made with such competition as is practicable under the circumstances.
Once the emergency is ended, conventional contracting techniques must be used for any
remaining work.
By declaring an emergency, it is recognized by the State Controller, CDOT Controller, and CDOT
upper management that time is of the essence. Because time is critical, the most cost-effective
procedure from a budget perspective may not be the most prudent course of action. The project
manager must first focus on alleviating the immediate threat to the public health, welfare or
safety, the functioning of state government, or the preservation or protection of property. The
project manager must also make wise use of the state's resources.
100-150
General Provisions
120.8.3 Procedure for Emergencies
Fiscal Rule 2-2 grants the Executive Director the authority to obtain goods and services in an
emergency without execution of a state contract. The Executive Director has delegated that
authority to the Deputy Executive Director, Chief Engineer, Region Transportation Directors
(RTD) and Maintenance Superintendents. Only the Executive Director or one of the delegates
may declare an emergency pursuant to Fiscal Rule 2-2.
When an emergency occurs, the Region Authority (RTD or Maintenance Superintendent) should
be notified of the nature of the emergency. The Region Authority will:
1. Determine whether the emergency meets the requirements of Fiscal Rule 2-2.
2. Verbally approve procurement of a contractor and commencement of work prior to

execution of a contract.
3. Designate a Project Manager who is the CDOT employee authorized to acquire the
resources necessary to prudently respond to the emergency. The Project Manager is also
responsible for oversight of the contractor’s activities.
4. No later than the end of the next business day after the emergency occurs, issue a
written approval to procure a contractor and commence work prior to execution of a
contract.
The Project Manager will:
1. Procure a contractor to deal with the emergency utilizing a process for the procurement
that is as competitive as is practical.
2. Contact the Region Authority periodically to provide progress updates.
3. No later than the end of the next business day after the emergency occurs, submit a
written request for emergency contracting to the RTD.
4. No later than the end of the next business day after the emergency occurs, submit a
report to the Controller.
5. Submit contracting information to the Agreements Unit or the Procurement Office as

soon as practical.
The RTD will forward the written request for emergency contracting to the Chief Engineer for
approval signature. Together they will determine the limits of the emergency work and the
contracting method to be used for any work subsequent to the emergency. If the Chief Engineer
is not available, the request will go to the Executive Director or Deputy Executive Director.
120.8.4 Contractor Selection for Emergency Work
Commensurate with the circumstances of the emergency, the most competitive process
possible should be utilized to select a contractor. The following procedures will be used:
100-151
General Provisions
1. Preliminary Investigation:
The Project Manager will perform the preliminary investigation and determine the best
course of action. This involves determining what work needs to be done, how much
needs to be done, and how it will be paid. For many emergency responses, the rapid
response required, and the unknown details of the work will dictate that the work be
done on a force account basis. The cost of the work can be estimated using pay items
and quantities, force account analysis, or a combination of both. The following items
must be determined:
a. The scope and nature of the emergency work,
b. Start date and time frame for completion,
c. Pay items and estimated quantities (where appropriate),
d. Estimated cost,
e. Method of measurement and basis of payment.
2. Solicitation
As circumstances allow, bids should be solicited by phone or fax from at least three
qualified contractors that can respond quickly. It is acceptable to solicit a bid from a
contractor already working in the area. If the circumstances of the emergency, such as
time constraints, limited interest, or lack of qualification makes it impractical to solicit
three bids, the reason must be documented.
It is not proper to merely issue a CMO to a contractor nearby. If the work was not
contemplated by the original solicitation for that contractor, then it is beyond the scope
and the price agreed to in that contract. Issuing a CMO in such a situation may violate
CDOT procedures and State Statutes applicable to government contract bidding. In such
a situation, the work must be done under a separate contract. A nearby contractor may
do the work, but a new contract would be needed for the new work.
3. Force Account Work
If force account is necessary, the work should be paid for in accordance with subsection
109.04 of the Standard Specifications. If doing so is not reasonable, then documentation
must be provided explaining the rationale for exceeding labor and equipment rental
rates. For example, the emergency may justify nonstop work activity for a short
duration, which generally warrants higher rates. Contact the Engineering Estimates and
Market Analysis Unit of the Construction Engineering Services Branch, as needed, for
assistance in justifying rates.
4. Work Authorization
A written authorization on CDOT Form 105 – Speed Memo, must be given to the
Contractor performing the emergency work prior to the commencement of work. The
100-152
General Provisions
Contractor must sign and return the authorization before proceeding. The written
authorization must include the following:
a. Scope of work and project limits,
b. The required time to start work,
c. Expected duration of the work,
d. Estimated quantities,
e. Method of measurement,
f. Basis of payment, and
g. Estimated total cost of the work
If payment will be by force account, include either the agreed rates for labor and
equipment or the provisions of subsection 109.04, whichever is applicable.
The Form 105 must include the following statement at the end of the memo, “By
signature below, the Contractor agrees to perform the work and be compensated as
detailed above.”
120.8.5 Project Manager Responsibilities by the End of the Next Business Day
after the Emergency Occurs
1. Written Request
The Project Manager must submit a written request for emergency contracting to the Region
Authority. The written request must include the items listed below.
a. A justification that an emergency exists in accordance with Fiscal Rule 2-2 (The
explanation must be complete enough to describe the problem and how it
qualifies as an emergency.)
b. An explanation of why the normal procurement procedures will not permit

procurement of a contractor quickly enough to address the emergency. (The
request should state the time that will be required to obtain a contractor using
the normal procurement process and why the emergency requires a quicker
response)
c. The scope of the emergency work, the limits of the project and the estimated
cost.
2. Report to Controller
The Project Manager must make a report of the circumstances and the nature and value
of the commitments to the CDOT Controller and to the State Controller.
100-153
General Provisions
120.8.6 Contracting Information
As soon as practical, the Project Manager must submit the following information to the
Agreements Unit of the Construction Engineering Services Branch or to the Procurement Office,
whichever is appropriate, for the preparation and execution of the emergency contract:
1. A copy of the request for emergency contracting approved by the Chief Engineer.
2. All required procurement documentation and a description of the method used to select
the Contractor, including an explanation if less than three contractors were solicited,
and any reasons for deviating from Department policy.
3. The basis of payment for the contract.
a. When the work is to be paid on an agreed unit price or lump sum basis, submit
the agreed prices, units, and estimated quantities, including justification for
using the agreed unit price or lump sum basis.
b. When force account is used, submit justification for payment in accordance with
subsection 109.04 of the Standard Specifications. If the hourly rates to be paid
for labor and equipment exceed those that would be paid in accordance with
subsection 109.04, submit the agreed to rates and the justification for using the
higher rates.
120.8.7 Contract
1. Payment Prior to Contract Signing
Disbursement may be made upon receipt of invoices, receipts or other statements

describing the goods or services utilized and the amount to be paid. However, a Contract
must be executed as soon as possible to define future performance obligations.
2. Preparation and Execution of Contract.
The Agreements Unit or the Procurement Office will prepare and execute the
appropriate contract document as soon as practical after the emergency occurrence.
3. Administration of the Emergency Contract
4. The appropriate CDOT region will administer the Contract for the emergency work in
accordance with CDOT policies and procedures.
120.8.8 Immediate Response
This procedure is to be used for immediate response to the emergency. Once the situation no
longer constitutes an immediate threat to public health, welfare, or safety, the functioning of
state government, or preservation or protection of property, it is no longer an emergency.
Continuing work after dealing with the emergency requires evaluation of the situation and a
decision of what contracting method to use for work subsequent to the emergency.
100-154
General Provisions
120.9 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE FORMS
120.9.1 Form 1420
The Contractor must submit Form 1420 to request DBE goal waivers or approval of modifications
to the Contractor’s UP. Modifications may include commitment work area modifications,
terminations, reductions, and substitutions. For substitute DBEs, the Contractor should include
a Form 1415, Commitment Confirmation. Multiple requests may be included in one Form 1420.
If received by the Project Engineer, this form must be submitted to the CRO. The CRO will
respond to the contractor via approval or denial of the Form 1420.
120.9.2 Form 1432
The Contractor must submit a Form 1432 for each DBE that will count toward the contract goal.
The Contractor should submit this form no later than thirty days from the completion of the
DBE’s work. The DBE completes the first set of questions, the Contractor completes the next,
and the Project Engineer completes the third. The Project Engineer must send this form to the
CRO. The Project Engineer should notify the CRO of any potential commercially useful function
issues.
120.10 SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT WORK

Subletting of contract work will be performed in accordance with subsection 108.01 of the
Standard Specifications. The Contractor may sublet no more than 70 percent of the Contract.
120.10.1 FHWA Form 1273
Item VI. 4. of FHWA Form 1273 – Required Contract Provisions – Federal-Aid Construction
Contracts states the following:
No portion of the Contract shall be sublet, assigned or otherwise disposed of except with the
written consent of the state highway agency contracting officer, or authorized representative,
and such consent when given shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor of any
responsibility for the fulfillment of the Contract. Written consent will be given only after the
state highway agency has assured that each subcontract is evidenced in writing and that it
contains all pertinent provisions and requirements of the Prime Contract.
On Federal-Aid projects where FHWA Form 1273 is applicable, the Contractor certifies on Form
205 – Sublet Permit Application that FHWA Form 1273 is attached to and incorporated in every
subcontract and service agreement.
120.10.2 Form 205 and Form 1425
The Department assures compliance with subsections 101.61 and 108.01 of the Standard
Specifications by requiring on all projects the completion, certification, and submission of
the Form 1425 (Supplier Application Approval Request) and Form 205 (Sublet Permit
Application). CDOT uses the Form 1425 and Form 205 to enter suppliers and subcontractors
100-155
General Provisions
into the B2GNow software system for prompt payment monitoring and tracking of
compliance with the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise requirements. CDOT also uses Form
205 to track and oversee the subcontracting percentage. The Contractor shall complete
and submit an electronic Form 1425 or Form 205 in the B2GNow system for each
subcontractor and supplier on the project to the Project Engineer. The Project Engineer
will recommend the supplier or subcontractor for approval in the B2GNow system. Once
the Form 1425 or Form 205 receives recommended approval from the Project Engineer, the
Region Civil Rights Specialist will approve or deny the supplier or subcontractor in the
B2GNow system. The supplier or subcontractor may not begin work until the Form 1425 or
Form 205 has been approved in the system. The Contractor must submit a revised Form
205 if items of work are added to the subcontract. It is unnecessary to revise the Form 205
for overruns and underruns. This information is used by the CRO to track Contractor
compliance with good faith efforts. The Contractor must execute a written agreement with
the subcontractor that includes all relevant State and Federal provisions, before the
subcontractor begins work.
The following procedures should be utilized to ensure compliance with subsection 108.01:
1. Material Suppliers. Determine if the work to be performed by a firm or individual is part

of the construction Contract or is supplying material using the definitions outlined
Specification 101.81 and 101.81.5. The Form 205 is not required for suppliers. Instead,
the Contractor must submit a Form 1425 for each supplier that meets the $10,000
threshold outlined in 106.01. Supplier employees, including truck drivers, are not
covered by DBRA prevailing wages in the following instances (the prevailing wage
requirements do not apply to these employees and are not included on a payroll):
2. Employees working at and truck drivers hauling to the project from a facility not deemed
part of the “site of the work” are not covered under DBRA prevailing wage requirements.
The facility is not considered to be part of the “site of the work” if it does not meet the
criterial of dedicated and/or adjacent to the project.
a. For example: If truck drivers are hauling material to the project from a facility
that is not adjacent or virtually adjacent to the project, they are not covered
under DBRA.
b. For example: Truck drivers hauling materials to the project from a commercial
source are not covered under DBRA. The commercial source is not a facility that
is dedicated exclusively, or nearly so, to the project; Therefore, DBRA does not
apply.
c. Trucking owner-operators are not covered under DBRA.
For drivers that work (either as employees or contractors) for a bona fide material supply
company the following additional guidance applies. If the driver is making deliveries of
materials to the site of work, that time is not covered for DBRA purposes. However, if the
worker of a material supply company (including a driver) performs actual construction work
(such as warranty or repair work) for more than an incidental amount of time (20% of a
work week), and that construction work is related to an item that has been delivered to
100-156
General Provisions
the site of work, then that time spent performing actual construction work (on site) would
be covered by DBRA. Moreover, if a worker for a material supply company spends more
than 20% of their workweek performing actual construction work on the site of work, at
that point all time that the worker spends on the site of work, including delivery time, will
be considered to be covered. The material supply company should be tracking any time
that a material supply company worker spends on the site of work doing actual construction
to make sure that the worker is paid the applicable prevailing wage for that work. If the
material supply worker spends more than 20% of their work week performing actual
construction work, the contractor would then also need to track delivery time spent on site
as at that point they are considered to essentially be a construction worker and all of their
onsite time would be covered.
1. Subcontractors. If a firm or individual subcontractor performs the work, a written

subcontract, approved Form 205, and certified payrolls are required, subject to
the following conditions:
a. Owner/Operator Truck Drivers. The U.S. Department of Labor takes a non-

enforcement position on drivers who own their own trucks, thus Davis-
Bacon wages are not required. An owner/operator is defined as an owner
driving a truck that is registered in the owner/operator’s name. Truck
drivers who are owner/operators must appear on a certified payroll. The
owner/operator’s name, address, and Social Security number must be
included on the payroll with the notation “owner/operator” listed under
the wages column. Owners of other types of equipment must comply with
Davis-Bacon requirements. Contractors shall:
i. submit Form 205 for the owner/operator and have the

owner/operator certify and submit its own payroll.
b. Truck Drivers and Site of Work Considerations. Truck drivers who are not on
site haulers (hauling on the site of work, from the site of work, or to the
site of work) are not covered by the requirements of the Davis-Bacon Act.
The Department recognizes the following definition of site of work: Site of
Work: The site of work shall be defined as the physical location where the
project exists and any adjacent property that is set up to service the
project. If the staging area, pits, or plants can be accommodated on the
project site or on adjacent property, but are located elsewhere for
circumventing the payment of predetermined wage, the site of work shall
include the service area. For the purposes of determining site of work,
adjacent shall be defined as “lying near or close to; sometimes, contiguous;
neighboring. Adjacent implies that the two objects are not widely
separated, though they may not actually touch.” Project Engineers should
contact their Region Civil Rights Office for assistance in making
determinations.
100-157
General Provisions
i. For drivers that work (either as employees or through a written

agreement) for a construction contractor (or subcontractor)
performing construction onsite, the following additional guidance
applies. Under current DOL guidance as stated in the Field
Operations Handbook at 15e22, drivers who work for the
construction contractor are covered when loading or unloading
materials onsite for delivery or removal if such time is not de
minimis, such as just a few minutes spent at a time to pick up or
drop something off. Waiting in queue on the site of work to drop off
materials from a location that is not on the site of work does not
contribute to the few minutes. There is no 20% requirement or cutoff
for determining that work is or is not de minimis for truck drivers
who work for contractors. In the Field Operations Handbook, the
20% is only mentioned with reference to drivers who work for
material supply companies.
c. Other Truck Drivers and Construction Personnel. All other truck drivers and
construction personnel are covered by Davis-Bacon requirements and must
appear on certified payrolls in accordance with the following:
i. a written subcontract and completed Form 205 must be executed,

and the truck drivers or equipment operators must submit their own
payroll.
2. Subcontractors that are also material suppliers on a single project: Per

Specification 108.01, when a firm both sells material to a prime contractor and
performs the work of incorporating the materials into the project, these two
phases shall be considered in combination and as constituting a single
subcontract. The Subcontractor shall acknowledge on the Form 205 that they are
operating both in the capacity of a Subcontractor and Supplier for a project.
a. Certified Payroll considerations: When evaluating whether certified

payrolls are required, the primary employer will evaluate what functions
the employee is doing on the site of work. If the employee is performing
active construction as part of the subcontracted work, the employee will be
subject to the Subcontractor certified payroll guidance above.
i. If the employee in the capacity of fabricating or processing an item

off the site of work or is delivering an item(s) to the site of work,
they are acting as a supplier and will be subject to the Supplier
certified payroll guidance in the Supplier section below.
120.10.3 Use of Form 205 for Leased or Rented Equipment
The following information defines the requirements for using Form 205 for leased or rented
equipment:
100-158
General Provisions
1. Operators on Payroll. If the Contractor or subcontractor rents or leases equipment, Form

205 – Sublet Permit Application is not required if the operator:
a. is considered part of the Contractor or subcontractor organization, and
b. will appear on the Contractor or subcontractor payroll.
This criterion applies whether or not an operator is supplied with the equipment.
2. Operators Off Payroll. If the Contractor or subcontractor rents or leases equipment with
an operator, Form 205 is required if the operator:
a. is not considered part of the Contractor or subcontractor organization, and
b. will not appear on the Contractor or subcontractor payroll.
The equipment subcontractor must have an approved Form 205, and the operator
must appear on the equipment subcontractor payroll.
3. All Projects. On all projects, all employees performing the contract work must appear
on a payroll and be paid at least the predetermined minimum.
This applies regardless of:
a. who rents or leases the equipment;
b. whether the equipment is rented or leased, with or without an operator; or
c. whether or not the equipment or operator are considered part of the Contractor
or subcontractor organization.
120.10.4 Review, Approval, and Distribution of Form 205
120.10.4.1 Project Engineer Review
The Project Engineer will check the following items before recommending the Form 205 – Sublet
Permit Application for approval to route to the CRO:
1. Partial Items. If partial items of work are sublet (e.g., the "Drive Only" portion of a
bridge piling item), the percentage of the Contract unit price that is being sublet must
be placed in the percent of original bid price column.
2. Other Checks. Check that all Contract unit prices, extensions, totals, and percentage
calculations are correct.
120.10.4.2 Project Engineer Approval
The Project Engineer will recommend the Form 205 for approval in the B2Gnow system, which
constitutes approval to sublet portions of the Contract.
100-159
General Provisions
120.10.4.3 Region EEO/Civil Rights Specialist Review
The following items are the responsibility of the CRO.
1. Debarment and Suspension. Check all proposed subcontractors for debarment or

suspension. A list of Federally debarred Contractors, CDOT-debarred, CDOT suspended
Contractors, and interlocking ownership Contractors is available at
http://www.arnet.gov/epls. Form 205 will not be approved if a Contractor has been
debarred or suspended or there is reason to believe such action is being considered. The
CRO will immediately notify the Project Engineer and the Construction Engineering
Services Branch Manager. For additional assistance, call (303) 757-9540.
2. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Goals. For DBEs listed on the Contractor’s Utilization
Plan, verify the work listed on the Form 205 matches the work listed in the DBE
commitment and the DBE is still certified to perform the work. If the Contractor is
adding a new DBE for credit, verify the DBE is certified to perform the work and, if the
Contractor is adding a supplier, the work has been properly counted. If the
subcontractor is not a DBE, verify that the participation does not conflict with the
utilization plan.
3. Approve Form 205 in B2Gnow: The CRO will review the Form 205. If approved, the Form
205 will be available in the B2Gnow system. The CRO and Project Engineer have access
to view the record in the system.
120.10.5 Replacement of Subcontractor
If it is necessary to replace a subcontractor that is a certified Disadvantaged Business

Enterprise, the Contractor must follow the procedures in the Standard Special Provisions
included in the Contract.
120.11 PROGRESS SCHEDULE/METHODS STATEMENT

The Contractor is required to submit methods statement and progress schedules in accordance
with subsection 108.03 of the Standard Specifications.
120.11.1 Progress Schedule
Consider the following guidelines when processing progress schedules:
1. Purpose. The progress schedule is used to evaluate the potential for modifying contract
time, in accordance with subsection 108.08, and to evaluate disputes and claims, in
accordance with subsection 105.22.
2. Submittal. The Contractor shall submit either the bar chart or the critical path method
90-day project schedule at least five working days prior to the start of work.
3. Review and Acceptance. The Project Engineer will carefully review the schedule and
either return it to the Contractor for revision or provide initial written acknowledgment
of receipt. No schedule will be accepted that shows completion of work after the
100-160
General Provisions
authorized number of workdays or the specified fixed completion date of the Contract.
If the Critical Path Method is used, no work will be permitted beyond the first 90-day
period until the project schedule has been submitted and accepted. On large complex
projects with a potential for claims, the Project Engineer may want to utilize a non-
project specific claim consultant contract administered by the Construction Engineering
Services Branch to assist with schedule reviews.
4. Schedule Updates. As the work is prosecuted, the Contractor shall prepare and submit
monthly progress schedules that reflect the actual work performed. Progress payments
will not be processed if the progress schedule has not been received by the Project
Engineer on or before the payment cut-off date (see Section 109.6.1).
5. Lagging Schedules. If it appears that the actual progress is significantly lagging, the
Project Engineer will forward written notification to the Contractor requesting submittal
of a schedule that shows how the project will be completed on time. The Project
Engineer will withhold progress payments if the Contractor fails to furnish the revised
schedule within 15 days of receiving the written request.
120.11.2 Methods Statement
The methods statement is a narrative description of all work necessary to complete each salient
feature. See subsection 108.03 of the Standard Specifications for formatting requirements. The
methods statement will be submitted with the progress schedule at least five days prior to the
start of work. The Project Engineer should review the methods statement and either return it
to the Contractor for additional information or provide written acknowledgement of its receipt.
Appendix B illustrates an example. Note that all information contained in the methods
statement is proprietary and must be kept confidential.
120.12 MATERIALS
The requirements for materials documentation are presented in the CDOT Field Materials
Manual. The Project Engineer must comply with the documentation requirements.
120.12.1 Nuclear Gauges
Chapter 800 of the CDOT Field Materials Manual, Documentation Chapter, addresses the proper
use and storage of nuclear gauges that are used to perform various materials testing. A
radiological monitoring device must be worn by all personnel that operate testing equipment
with a nuclear source (i.e., moisture/density gauge, asphalt content gauge), in accordance with
CDOT Procedural Directive 89.2 – Medical Monitoring for Hazardous Materials Workers. See
Chapter 800 of the CDOT Field Materials Manual for additional guidance.
120.12.2 Field Laboratory Test Results
If material test results are found to be outside specified limits, the Contractor should be
immediately notified using Form 626 – Field Laboratory Test Results. This will enable the
Contractor to take corrective action in a timely manner to address non-complying materials.
Form 626 is normally prepared by the Project Materials Tester, signed, and dated by the
Project
100-161
General Provisions
Engineer, and presented to the Contractor for acknowledging signature. The completed and
signed Form 626 is distributed to the Contractor, Project Engineer, and the Project Materials
Tester.
120.12.3 Calculation for Price Reduction
When the materials furnished, the work performed, or the finished product does not conform
to the Contract, the material or work will be evaluated for price reduction according to
subsection 105.03 of the Standard Specifications. Use the latest version of the price reduction
software to perform the calculations. Check the data input carefully. Include the printout in
the final pay quantity documentation and enter the price reduction on the pay estimate as a
negative dollar amount. Record the out of specification material on the appropriate materials
summary report and attach a copy of the printout from the price reduction software.
120.12.4 Concrete Batch Plants and Trucks Mixer Certification
120.12.4.1 Truck Mixer Certification
The Contractor is required to obtain certification from the concrete supplier that truck mixers
are acceptable based on the requirements defined in subsection 601.07(c) of the Standard
Specifications. Form 46 – Concrete Truck Mixer Inspection Certification will be used to
document this information and certify all trucks to be used on the project. See Appendix B for
a sample Form 46. This certification shall be completed whenever the Contractor purchases a
mixer truck. The Contractor shall provide the Project Engineer with a copy of this certification
with the correct date and current project number for each project. The Contractor will be
required to complete a new certification only if flights are changed and the wear marks are
different than when the original certification was completed. Ready Mix supplier signature
approval is required. During the project, spot checks of truck mixers should be performed and
documented in the project diary.
120.12.4.2 Batch Plant Certification
Prior to initiating concrete placement, the Project Engineer will ensure that the batch plant
has current scale and water-meter certifications. The condition of batching equipment and
material storage areas should also be inspected for compliance in accordance with the
requirements defined in subsections 601.07 and 106.08 of the Standard Specifications,
respectively. Record this information in the remarks section of Form 46 – Concrete Truck Mixer
Inspection Certification or in the project diary.
120.13 CONFERENCES
Section 120.13 discusses several types of conferences that are typical of CDOT construction
projects. Appendix A presents sample conference agendas that may be used “as is” or as a
guide in developing customized agendas for the Region or project.
100-162
General Provisions
120.13.1 Preconstruction Conference
120.13.1.1 Purpose
As soon as practical after a Contract is awarded, the Project Engineer will arrange a
Preconstruction Conference with the Contractor to discuss the prosecution of work. The
Preconstruction Conference is a good opportunity to review with the Contractor the
Department’s expectations and the details of the project before construction begins.
120.13.1.2 Notification Letter
A Preconstruction Conference Notification Letter should be prepared and forwarded to the

Contractor. The letter should include the meeting date, time, and location, and an itemized
list of all information and documentation that CDOT needs from the Contractor before the
conference and the date this information is due. Ensure the due date provides the Department
with sufficient time to adequately prepare the conference agenda. See Appendix A for examples
of both letter and fax notifications.
120.13.1.3 Preconstruction Conference Agenda
The Preconstruction Conference should follow a carefully prepared agenda, similar to the
example presented in Appendix A. Emphasize at the Preconstruction Conference that,
regardless of who is responsible for the cost of repair or maintenance, both CDOT and
Contractor personnel are responsible for ensuring that all dangerous situations are immediately
corrected. Prompt notification of the Project Engineer and correction by the Contractor are
important. Long lead items should be noted during the conference.
120.13.1.4 Distribution of Meeting Minutes
After the Preconstruction Conference, a completed copy of the agenda and the minutes of the
meeting should be forwarded to each attendee, including the FHWA Operations Engineer for all
projects with Federal oversight.
120.13.2 HMA Pre-paving Conference
Paving operations on projects that will use large quantities of asphalt paving material should
be coordinated by the Project Engineer prior to starting the paving operation. A Pre-paving
Conference that involves all affected parties should be scheduled so that critical elements of
the paving operation (e.g., traffic control) can be discussed and resolved before the operation
begins. The meeting should be facilitated using a Conference Agenda similar to the one
presented in Appendix A for the HMA Pre-paving Conference. After the conference, a completed
copy of the agenda and the minutes of the meeting should be forwarded to each attendee,
including the FHWA Operations Engineer for all projects with Federal oversight.
120.13.3 Concrete Pavement Pre-paving Conference
The Project Engineer should conduct a Pre-paving Conference before concrete paving
operations begin. Attendees should include all parties involved in the work. The meeting should
100-163
General Provisions
be facilitated using a conference agenda similar to the one presented in Appendix A for the
Concrete Pavement Pre-paving Conference. After the conference, a completed copy of the
agenda and the minutes of the meeting should be forwarded to each attendee, including the
FHWA Operations Engineer for all projects with Federal oversight.
120.13.4 Structural Concrete Pre-pour Conference
The Project Engineer should conduct a Pre-pour Conference prior to placement of significant
quantities of structural concrete on the project. Attendees should include all parties involved
in the work. The conference should be held prior to placement of concrete for major structures,
particularly bridge decks. The meeting should be facilitated using a conference agenda similar
to the one presented in Appendix A for the Structural Concrete Pre-pour Conference. After the
conference, a completed copy of the agenda and the minutes of the meeting should be
forwarded to each attendee, including the FHWA Operations Engineer for all projects with
Federal oversight.
120.13.5 PC/OA Conferences for Asphalt and Concrete Pavements
The PC/OA specifications provide for incentive/disincentive payments, and it is important that
Contractor process control personnel and CDOT Quality Assurance personnel understand their
respective duties and responsibilities. As such, a PC/OA Conference should be held prior to
beginning each paving project governed by PC/OA specifications. The PC/OA Conference may
be held simultaneously with the Pre-paving Conference. The meeting should be facilitated using
a conference agenda similar to the samples presented in Appendix A for hot-mix asphalt and
concrete pavements. After the conference, a completed copy of the agenda and the minutes
of the meeting should be forwarded to each attendee, including the FHWA Operations Engineer
for all projects with Federal oversight.
120.13.6 Pre-survey Conference
The purpose of the Pre-survey Conference is to discuss the construction surveying and survey
monumentation requirements of the project and to coordinate schedules. This meeting will be
held prior to commencing survey work, and the CDOT Survey Manual includes sample agendas
to facilitate the meeting. Attendees generally include Superintendent, Survey Party Chief,
Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor in responsible charge of the survey work, Project
Engineer, Project Survey Inspector, and Region Survey Coordinator. After the conference, a
completed copy of the agenda and the minutes of the meeting should be forwarded to each
attendee, including the FHWA Operations Engineer for all projects with Federal oversight.
120.14 PIT PAYMENTS (Royalty Fees)

120.14.1 Physical Pit Condition Certification
If CDOT holds the "Option to Buy Material," a Form 789 – Physical Pit Condition Certification will
be used to document the pit owner's final acceptance of the physical condition of the pit, as
required by the Contract. Form 789 should be completed, and the owner's acceptance signature
100-164
General Provisions
obtained by the Project Engineer as soon as practical after completion of the work in and around
the pit site. A copy of Form 789 will be submitted to the Records Center.
120.14.2 Mining Permits
If the Contractor uses material from any source, the Contractor is required to furnish the
Project Engineer a mining permit from the Mined Land Reclamation Division or a letter from
the Mined Land Reclamation Division stating that no permit is required. This must be
accomplished before the material is excavated. If the source is an available source for the
specific project and CDOT holds a current mining permit, no further action will be required by
the Contractor.
120.15 INTERIM CONTRACT PAYMENTS

Section 120.15 provides recommended procedures for documenting the method of
measurement and basis of payment for interim pay estimates. Documentation may be provided
on either hard copy or electronic forms. See Section 121 for information on documenting final
pay estimates. Contractors or subcontractors can access the pay estimate at
https://www.codot.gov/business/engineeringapplications/project-construction/aashtoware-
project-construction-sitemanager-pay-estimates#gsc.tab=0. The user is “contractor” and the
password is “prompt pay”.
120.15.1 Documentation for Contract Pay Items
120.15.1.1 General
Documentation of the various pay items included in the contract shall be done in the
SiteManager® Daily Work Report (DWR). Additional documentation may be prepared using CDOT
numbered forms electronically attached to the DWR’s or appropriately referenced in the DWR
as described in Section 120.1.3.5. Other supplementary documentation shall be electronically
attached to the DWR or appropriately referenced in the DWR as described in Section 120.1.3.5
Hardbound field notebooks shall not be used for pay item documentation due to the large
volume of irreplaceable documentation that would be lost if a field book were destroyed or
misplaced. The project diary will not be used to document pay items.
120.15.1.2 Quantity and Payment Considerations
The Project Engineer is required to approve all progress payments based on the interim
quantities documented during the prosecution of work. Two documentation methods may be
used, and the method selected for each pay item should minimize the time required to prepare
and submit final quantities:
1. Method One – Measured or Counted Quantities. Method One will be used for pay items
that can be measured or counted as the work progresses. The source document will be
used to support payment of actual quantities as the work is performed. Quantities of
this type will be entered in the Daily Work Report in SiteManager® and automatically
posted to the Item Summary.
100-165
General Provisions
2. Method Two – Estimated Quantities. Method Two should be used when the actual
quantity of the pay item cannot be determined as the work progresses (e.g., earthwork).
The source document will be used to support payment of estimated quantities. Interim
measurements will be entered in the Daily Work Report in SiteManager® and
automatically posted to the Item Summary. If Method Two is used, the final quantity of
the pay item will be measured as indicated in the Specifications.
The term, “estimated quantity”, means a quantity that is calculated approximately. It

is the Project Engineer’s responsibility to calculate estimated quantities as accurately
as possible so as not to overpay the Contractor. Consider the following:
Load counts may be used to verify estimated quantities; however, they are not a
substitute for actual measurements and shall not be used alone to justify interim
payments. Interim surveys or quantities calculated based on cross section estimates may
be used to support earthwork payments.
120.15.2 Methods of Measurement
Figure 100 – 18 illustrates methods of measurement for interim and final pay item quantities.
This table is a guide. Refer to the Plans and Specifications for additional information.
ITEM TYPE INTERIM FINAL

Item is complete. If lump
201 – Clearing and Grubbing Percent of lump sum. sum, include beginning and
end dates.
The total of the removal,
If lump sum, a percent of
202 – Removals whether a counted item,
lump sum.
measured item or lump sum.
203 – Excavation and Based on a calculated Plan quantity unless changes
Embankment estimated quantity. or errors are found.
206 – Structure A percentage based on the Plan quantity unless changes
Excavation/Backfill plan quantity. or errors are found.
A percentage based on the Measured quantity pursuant
207 – Topsoil
original calculations. to SS 207.04
208 – Erosion Control Actual amount used. Actual amount used.
Actual amount used based on Actual amount used based on
approved meters or approved meters or
209 – Watering
measured in the vehicle at measured in the vehicle at
the point of delivery. the point of delivery.
A percentage based on the Item is complete. Actual
210 – Resets
whole amount. quantity completed.
212 – Seeding and Fertilizing A percentage based on the Plan quantity unless changes
212 – Sodding plan quantity. or errors are found.
100-166
General Provisions
ITEM TYPE INTERIM FINAL

A percentage based on the Plan quantity unless changes
213 – Mulching
plan quantity. or errors are found.
214 – Planting Actual amount placed. Actual amount placed.
215 – Transplanting Actual amount placed. Actual amount placed.
216 – Soil Retention Covering Actual amount placed. Actual amount placed.
217 – Herbicide Treatment Actual amount measured. Actual amount measured.
300 – Bases Total quantity placed. Total quantity placed.
Total quantity placed based
on certified scale tickets or
400 – Pavements Total quantity placed.
measured quantity as
applicable.
Plan quantity unless changes
500 – Structures Percent of plan quantity.
or errors are found.
Actual measurements of Actual measurements of
500 – Piling
piling and any welds. piling and any welds.
626 – Public Information
Actual amount used. Actual amount used.
Management
630 – Traffic Control Items Payment per specification. Final measurement or count.
Figure 100 - 18
120.15.3 Force Account Work
120.15.3.1 Definition
A force account is a time and materials method of payment based on established hourly rates
and the quantities of labor, materials, and equipment that are used to complete the work.
120.15.3.2 Force Account
A force account should only be used when the Project Engineer and the Contractor cannot agree
on an agreed price for the work (i.e., unit or lump sum), or the nature of the work is such that
it is not possible to determine an agreed price. The Department discourages the use of force
account because it increases the costs to the Department and removes the Contractor’s
incentive to efficiently complete the work. This is an especially important consideration for
work involving large amounts of money.
120.15.3.3 Importance of Converting Force Account to Fixed Price
If a force account is currently in effect, the Project Engineer should be monitoring the work for
an opportunity to convert this time-and-materials method of payment to one that is more
100-167
General Provisions
suitable to the Department (i.e., agreed price). At some point during the work, a force account
can often be converted to an agreed price, because both the Project Engineer and the
Contractor have a better understanding of the scope and costs involved. Unless the estimated
cost is less than $2,000, the Project Engineer should attempt to negotiate with the Contractor
to determine if an agreement can be reached on an agreed price for the remaining work. If
such an agreement can be reached, payment should be made as follows:
1. Payment for Work Already Completed. The work already completed will be paid for as
force account.
2. Payment for Remaining Work. Reimbursement for the remaining work should be paid for
at the agreed price (i.e., unit price or lump sum).
120.15.3.4 Initiating Force Account Work
Force account work that is not already included in the Contract (i.e., planned force account)
must be authorized by a change order. The added item code should begin with a “700” prefix.
Force account work is administered differently than other pay items. The Project Engineer, not
the Contractor, is responsible for directing the work. Before force account work begins, the
Project Engineer must discuss with the Contractor and reach agreement on many work-related
issues. Although this will be performed in a cooperative manner, the Project Engineer is
authorized to make all final decisions regarding the work. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Scope of Work. Discuss the scope of work to ensure that the Contractor fully understands
what the work is to accomplish, including limits, expectations, and acceptance.
2. Construction Methods. Discuss with the Contractor the most efficient construction
methods and procedures available to complete the work and emphasize that the work
is to be performed in an efficient manner.
3. Efficiency Improvements. Both the Project Engineer and the Contractor should
continually monitor the progress of the work to determine if better methods are
available to improve efficiency and reduce costs. In reality, such analyses will be the
primary responsibility of the Project Engineer; and, where improvements can be made,
the Project Engineer is authorized to require changes to the Contractor’s operations.
4. Conversion to Unit Pricing. Similar to efficiency improvements, both the Project

Engineer and the Contractor should continually monitor the operation for the
opportunity to convert the force account to unit pricing. In reality, such an effort will
be the primary responsibility of the Project Engineer. See Section 120.15.3.2 for
additional information on this topic.
5. Labor Issues. Discuss with the Contractor the most efficient use of manpower available
to complete the work. If practical, utilize workers that is available on the project. In
most cases, this will be the most efficient procedure, but ensure that it does not
adversely affect the prosecution and progress of other Contract work. In addition,
ensure that the Contractor has a clear understanding of the number and classification
of workers required (e.g., four laborers, three operators, and one foreman) and the
number of hours to be worked each day.
100-168
General Provisions
6. Materials. Discuss with the Contractor the material issues related to the force account
work, including:
a. required types,
b. available sources,
c. quantities and rate of use,
d. pricing, and
e. acceptance criteria.
7. Equipment. Discuss with the Contractor the most efficient use of the equipment
available to complete the work. If practical, utilize equipment that is available on the
project. In most cases, this will prove to be the most efficient, but may warrant a cost
comparison to mobilizing equipment that is more efficient. The quantity of work will be
a major consideration in this analysis. For example, if required only for a few hours,
equipment available on the project may be the best choice, even if efficiency is
discounted. However, if required for several weeks, it would probably be prudent to
consider mobilizing equipment that is more efficient. Ensure that Contractor clearly
understands what is required with respect to:
a. owned, leased, or rented equipment and any mobilization required;
b. equipment type (e.g., scraper, backhoe, haul truck);
c. size of equipment (e.g., five cubic yard, 15 cubic yard);
d. number of each equipment type required (e.g., one each, 20 each);
e. starting date required for each type of equipment; and
f. the hours the equipment is required each day.
120.15.3.5 Form 10
Force account work will be recorded daily on Form 10 – Inspector’s Report For Force Account
Work and it is the source document for the pay item. Several key pieces of information must
be recorded, and the preparation of Form 10 must be thorough. Consider the following when
preparing Form 10:
1. Form Capacity. Form 10 has sufficient space to record five days of force account work.
The dates recorded do not have to be consecutive.
2. Signature Approval. At the end of each workday, representatives of the Contractor

and/or subcontractor must initial the daily record that has been documented on the
Form 10.
3. Employee Names. Employee names must be recorded as they appear on certified

payrolls, either Contractor or subcontractor.
100-169
General Provisions
4. Equipment Data. The following information must be recorded on Form 10 for each piece
of equipment used for the force account work:
a. description;
b. equipment number from Form 580;
c. equipment disposition (i.e., designated operation or on standby);
d. hourly equipment rental rate from Form 580; and
e. hours the equipment was used.
5. Supporting Information. Supporting information related to work progress, conversations

with the Contractor, decisions, and any problems encountered should not be recorded
on Form 10, but should be documented in the Project Inspector’s diary (i.e., Form 103).
Upon completing Form 10 (i.e., five days of force account work entries), a copy should be
forwarded to the Contractor. The Contractor shall use the copy of Form 10 to prepare the billing
for the force account work. See Appendix B for a sample Form 10.
120.15.3.6 Form 580
Form 580 – Equipment Rental Rate Determination Request will be used to calculate equipment
rental rates and must be retained with the force account documentation. Ensure that all
required information is provided. See Appendix B for detailed information on completing the
form.
120.15.3.7 Standby Equipment Rental Rates
As approved by the Project Engineer, standby equipment rental rates will be used to reimburse
the Contractor for ownership costs and will be based on the Rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment. Contact the Region, as needed, for assistance in determining these
rates. Consider the following guidelines before approving use of standby equipment rental
rates:
1. If the equipment is idle because of a mechanical failure, there is no obligation for

reimbursement.
2. If the equipment is used for other non-force account work, standby rates should not be
used.
3. If equipment has been ordered available for work but is idle through no fault of the
Contractor, standby rates should be used.
4. If the cost for holding the equipment on site is less than the cost for removal and
remobilization, standby rates should be used.
100-170
General Provisions
5. If equipment is not mobilized under its own power, reimbursement will include the
standby rate for mobilization, including disassembly and reassembly, if applicable; and
the hauling unit rental rate.
6. Standby rates are not applicable to small tools.
120.15.3.8 Reimbursement for Leased or Rented Equipment
The Contractor will be reimbursed for leased or rented equipment as follows:
1. Actual Costs. If the cost can be substantiated by a certified invoice, the Contractor will
be reimbursed for the actual cost of leased or rented equipment. It is possible for the
hours on the invoice to differ from those on Form 10. For example, the Contractor may
have had to pay for a minimum of eight hours, even though the piece of equipment was
only used for six. The Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of the eight
hours.
2. Operating Costs. If operating costs are excluded from the rental or lease agreement,
the Contractor will be reimbursed for the cost of operating the equipment. The rate of
reimbursement for operating costs will be based on the Rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment. Operating costs only apply to hours of actual operation.
3. Overhead Rates. The Contractor will be reimbursed for overhead costs at a rate of 10
percent according to subsection 109.04 of the Standard Specifications.
4. Negotiated Equipment Rental Rates. Negotiated equipment rental rates may be used if
they are less than those published in the Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction
Equipment, including operating costs. Justification for negotiated rates must include
the equipment number and rental rate from Form 580.
5. Rental Rates for Small Tools. Small tools are generally valued between $500 and $2,000.
The rental rate for small tools will be $2 per hour of use. Standby rates do not apply to
small tools according to subsection 109.04 of the Standard Specifications.
6. Reimbursement for Fast-Wear Expendable Parts. If substantiated by a certified invoice,

items such as saw blades, tooth-bits for saws, pavement breakers, and other similar
equipment will be reimbursed at invoice cost plus 10 percent. Payment will be made
based on the percentage of wear caused by the work. The 15 percent loading for
materials specified in subsection 109.04(b) of the Standard Specifications does not apply
to fast-wear expendable parts.
120.15.3.9 Payment Procedures for Force Account Work
Before payment is made for force account work, subsection 109.04 of the Standard
Specifications requires the Contractor to submit an itemized bill. In lieu of the Contractor
submitting an itemized bill, the Project Engineer may choose to calculate the cost of the force
account work. Consider the following when processing payment for force account work:
1. Review and Approval. The Project Engineer must review all force account invoices based
on certified payrolls and the approved copies of Form 10. Pay the invoice on the
100-171
General Provisions
estimate and submit the original document to the Finals Administrator. This should be
performed on a monthly basis as the work progress. Do not backlog force account bills
until finalization.
2. Certified Invoices. Certified invoices from the Contractor must support billings for the
following items:
a. materials,
b. rented or leased equipment, and
c. specialty firms.
3. Certification Statement. Certified invoices must contain the following statement, which
has been signed by the Contractor:
We certify, by photocopy of this invoice, that the quantity of

material/rental or lease/specialty work, represented by this invoice
was purchased and received for CDOT Project No. and
that the prices shown are actual costs.
Contractor: Date:
4. Certified Payrolls. The Contractor must furnish certified payrolls for the labor used on
the force account work, even though certified payrolls may not be required by the
Contract (e.g., State-funded projects). The bill and payrolls will be reviewed for
accuracy by the Project Engineer. A statement “Payrolls were checked by (Project
Engineer name)” will be noted on the face of the Force Account Billing.
5. Employee Pay Rates. Employee pay rates will not exceed the normal pay rate nor the
prevailing wage for the area (e.g., the Contractor cannot double the normal pay rate
for employees on force account).
6. Salaried Foremen. If a salaried Foreman is being used on force account work, the
Contractor must furnish a payroll certifying the Foreman’s pay rate and fringe benefits.
7. Superintendent Wages. Superintendent wages are included in the loading and should not
be paid for separately, unless previously approved by the Project Engineer before the
expense was incurred. This may be applicable where the only work on the project is the
force account work added by change order.
8. Supplemental Payrolls and Billing Corrections. If certified payrolls do not agree with
Form 10, the Contractor must submit a supplemental payroll or a new force account
billing to correct the error. Minor errors may be corrected on billings and a copy returned
to the Contractor, but under no circumstance should certified payrolls be returned for
correction.
9. Loading. Loading will be applied as follows:
100-172
General Provisions
a. Actual Wages. Actual wages and fringe benefits that are paid directly to the
employee will be loaded 67 percent.
b. Material Costs. A loading of 15 percent will be applied to material costs,

including applicable transportation costs.
c. Fast-Wear Expendable Parts. A loading of 10 percent will be applied to fast-wear

expendable parts.
d. Administrative Loading. In accordance with subsection 109.04 of the Standard

Specifications, administrative loading will be applied to the total force account
work for subcontractors, specialty firms, utilities, and railroads.
10. Mathematical Checks. Calculations will be checked. Minor errors can be corrected by
the Project Engineer and a copy returned to the Contractor.
11. Approval and Submittal. When the billing has been completely checked, it should be
approved by the Project Engineer and submitted to the Finals Administrator. Submittal
will include the following original documents as necessary:
a. Form 10,
b. Form 580,
c. Contractor billings,
d. subcontractor billings,
e. certified invoices for materials,
f. statement of materials taken from stock,
g. certified invoices for specialty firms, and
h. certified invoices for equipment rentals or leases.
12. Alternative Documentation Method. Alternatively, the Project Engineer will calculate
the cost of the force account work before approving payment. If this method is used,
the Project Engineer will use the following data to calculate the cost of the force
account work:
a. Form 10,
b. Form 580,
c. certified payrolls, and
d. certified invoices.
100-173
General Provisions
Items #1, #10, and #11 are not applicable to this payment procedure. After calculation by the
Project Engineer, all documentation will be included with the final documentation submitted
to the Region Finals Administrator.
120.15.4 Stockpiled Material
Payment will be made for stockpiled material only after testing, receipt of all Certificates of
Compliance, and acceptance by the Department (see Section 109.7). The Contractor must
submit the following documentation, which the Project Engineer will retain in the project file:
1. Certified Invoice. A certified invoice for purchased material must contain the following
statement, which must be signed by the Contractor:
We certify, by photocopy of this invoice, the quantity of material

represented by this invoice was purchased and received for CDOT
Project No. ,
and the prices shown are actual costs.
Contractor: Date:
2. Cost Analysis. A cost analysis must be provided by the Contractor in accordance with
subsection 109.07 of the Standard Specifications. An example cost analysis follows:
We (Contractor) request payment for 1,740 linear feet of HP 10x57 Steel

Piling at the invoice cost of $8.97/linear foot. The following is a cost
analysis showing sufficient funds remain to install the material:
Invoice Cost: $8.97/linear foot
Labor to Install $3.58/linear foot
Equipment to Install $14.42/linear foot
Total Cost $26.97/linear foot
The total cost is less than the $30.00/linear foot bid price, and the total
amount requested for stockpile payment is $15,607.80
Contractor Superintendent: Date:
The Project Engineer will review this analysis for reasonableness. If the analysis is
considered reasonable, the Project Engineer will sign and date it. Otherwise, it will be
returned to the Contractor for further information or revision.
3. Letter of Vested Interest. If the site is not on the project or state-owned property, a
Letter of Vested Interest from the owner and/or lessee of the property will be required.
100-174
General Provisions
If the storage site is owned or leased by an entity (e.g., a city, county, transportation
district), the Letter of Vested Interest will be signed by the entity employee who is
responsible for that site. See Appendix B for an example.
120.15.5 Partial Payments
Partial payments to the Contractor are made once each month as the work progresses. Consider
the following guidelines:
1. Retainage/Securities. The amount to be retained from partial payment, per

specification, is automatically calculated. Subsection 109.06 of the Standard
Specifications explains procedures to be used for reducing retainage or securities. The
Contractor may provide securities in lieu of cash retainage to be withheld from
payments. The Project Engineer will ask the Contractor if he intends to provide
securities in lieu of retainage at the Preconstruction Conference. After the securities
have been deposited, the pay estimate computer program automatically posts them to
the estimate. Questions concerning procedures for depositing or posting securities
should be directed to the Projects & Grants Accounting at
[email protected].
2. Mobilization. Appropriate payment is made automatically by the pay estimate computer

program. No additional documentation need be maintained.
3. Traffic Control Devices. The number of devices actually used needs to be reported. The
payment amount is automatically calculated by the pay estimate computer program in
4. Price Reductions. Price reductions should be added to the estimate as a negative dollar
amount in the pay item section.
5. Supplier Claims. Supplier claims should not be included as an adjustment to retainage.

A separate line item with a negative dollar amount should be used.
6. Liquidated Damages. Liquidated damages should be added to the estimate as a

negative dollar amount in the construction engineering bid item section of the
estimate.
100-175
General Provisions
SECTION 121 FINAL PROJECT RECORDS

121.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Documentation requirements are discussed in Section 120. Section 121 discusses final project
records and requirements for preparing and checking final plans and estimates. Although this
Section presents commonly encountered situations, the Project Engineer should contact the
Region Finals Administrator or Materials Final Documentation Coordinator for assistance when
exceptions are encountered.
121.1.1 General Requirements
The following general requirements apply to project finalization:
1. Final Quantity Records. Acceptable documentation will be a record that supports the
final quantity. All final measurements and quantities will be identified to distinguish
them from interim measurements or quantities.
2. Signature Approvals. Hard copy documentation is not complete until it is signed or

initialed and dated by the originator. The authorized SiteManager® Access Agreement
fulfills this signature requirement for documentation in SiteManager®. Documentation
Formats. Final pay quantity documentation may be submitted using any acceptable
format. The Project Engineer will notify the Finals Administrator and Materials Final
Documentation Coordinator which format is used to submit the finals documentation.
The following are examples of acceptable formats:
a. Electronic records will be preserved with Smart Scanning and archived in

ProjectWise (see https://www.codot.gov/business/designsupport/cadd for
consultant access information and the CDOT ProjectWise Reference Manual for
the Construction file structure)
b. Electronic records in SiteManager®
c. CDOT numbered forms, bound and indexed;
d. Contractor scale tickets, totaled and checked;
e. data processing output, checked and signed;
f. drawings and calculations, checked and signed; and
g. plan and cross-section sheets, checked and signed.
When electronic documentation is submitted, hard copy duplicates of this

documentation need not be submitted but will be retained in the project file.
100-176
General Provisions
3. Review and Payment. The preparation and checking of final plans and estimates must
allow the final payment authorization to be submitted to the Center for Accounting
within 45 calendar days after receiving all Contractor submittals and resolving all
Contractor claims and supplier liens (i.e., completion of all Contract requirements).
4. The intent of the Finals Checking Procedure is to ensure reasonable conformance to

CDOT Policies and Procedures, and specification requirements; and to audit the
accuracy of quantity measurements.
121.1.2 Responsibilities of the Project Engineer
As the representative of the Chief Engineer, the Project Engineer has the responsibility for
proper documentation, including final documentation, on the project. The Project Engineer
will ensure that CDOT documentation procedures are followed. All documents should be filed
in ProjectWise. File naming and attribute assignments shall be applied to all documents.
The Project Engineer is responsible for ensuring that all quantities have been checked before
the final estimate is paid.
The Project Engineer is responsible for ensuring that final documentation is completed in a
timely manner. The Project Engineer will actively pursue completion of the final, even if the
Contractor has not submitted all required documentation. If the Project Engineer completes
the final documentation and the Contractor has not submitted the required documentation
(e.g., Form 17, Buy America Certification Letter, Certificates of Compliance, certified
payrolls), the final will be submitted to the Region for checking. See Appendix B for a sample
Buy America Certification Letter.
The Project Engineer will complete and submit final documentation to the Finals Administrator
within 45 calendar days of issuing the acceptance letter. The Project Engineer is responsible
for all time from the date of the acceptance letter until he has submitted all documents under
his control, i.e., all documentation for which the Contractor is not responsible.
121.1.3 Responsibilities of the Region Finals Administrator
The Region Finals Administrator is responsible for:
1. providing guidance in the Region to ensure uniformity in project documentation

pursuant to the requirements of this manual;
2. auditing project documentation for conformance to CDOT specifications, policies and

procedures, Federal, State, and other rules and regulations;
3. auditing calculations to ensure accurate and uniform application of specified methods

of measurement and basis of payment;
4. auditing accuracy of posting quantities;
5. verifying all disputes/claims have been resolved and settlements posted to the final
estimate;
100-177
General Provisions
6. verifying all subcontractor/supplier liens and/or lis pendens are resolved; and
7. authorizing final payment to the Contractor.
The Region Finals Administrator will begin the finals checking process as soon as practicable.
Finals checking or submittal of the final will not be delayed while waiting for documentation.
The Region Finals Administrator will complete his review of the final documentation within 45
calendar days of receipt of the documentation from the Project Engineer. The Region Finals
Administrator is responsible for all time from the time that the Project Engineer has submitted
the project final as defined in Section 121.2.7 of this Manual, until the Finals Administrator
completes the checking of those documents.
The Finals Administrator is responsible for accurately tracking and reporting these time
durations to the Construction Engineering Services Branch via the Project Closure Report.
121.2 PROJECT FINAL PROCEDURES

121.2.1 Basis of Payment Documentation
The following presents the final documentation required by specified basis of payment (see
Appendix B for sample forms):
1. Lump Sum. Document the beginning and end dates of work.
2. Each. Document the final quantity as counted in the field.
3. Linear Foot. Document the final field-measured length or plan quantity, whichever is
specified in the Contract.
4. Ton (Measured by Weighing). Quantities for items such as HMA or aggregate base course
should be documented as follows:
a. Scale Tickets. Include in the final documentation the daily envelopes containing
scale tickets and tapes. Ensure that all manual entries and calculations are
checked. Envelopes and scale tickets shall be labeled with the following
information:
i. date and project number;
ii. material;
iii. location of spread (e.g., scale ticket, Form 282, spreadsheet);
iv. total; and
v. signature of person responsible for quantities and spread data.
b. Certifications. Attach one copy of scale and weigher certifications and vehicle
identification sheets with the applicable pay item documentation that is
100-178
General Provisions
submitted to the Region. The vehicle identification sheets furnished by the

Contractor shall contain the following information:
i. Identification mark,
ii. vehicle length,
iii. tare weight,
iv. number of axles,
v. the distance between extreme axles, and
vi. information relative to determining legal weight, including the permit

number and permitted weight of each vehicle for which the State has
issued an overweight permit. Obtain new copies of this information
whenever there is a change
5. Ton (Asphalt Cement). Include invoice or tank stabs, if used. Meter readings are
acceptable.
6. Area (e.g., Square Yard). Include Final measurements and calculations.
7. Hour or Day. Document the total number of days and hours for each item.
8. M-Gallon (e.g., water for landscaping). Quantity will be determined by measuring and
calculating tank volume or by using meter readings.
9. Gallon (e.g., prime and tack coats, pavement-marking paint). Use tank stab readings,
meter readings, or truck weight data. Calculations for conversions and rate-verification
calculations will be included.
10. Pound (e.g., structural steel, reinforcing steel). Quantity will be based on plan quantity
or recalculation of field changes or errors. Form 279 (see Appendix B) can be used to
document quantities of reinforcing steel.
11. Area (e.g., seeding, fertilizer, mulching). Ensure that tags were submitted. Document
in the project records that tags were submitted. Retain the tags in the project records.
Quantity will be based on plan quantity or recalculation of field changes or errors.
12. Volume (e.g., cubic yard for earthwork). Quantity will be based on plan quantity or, if
field changes are made or a plan error is found, one of the following:
a. recalculation based on field change or error;
b. computer output check, signed and dated;
c. final measured dimensions and calculations, checked and signed; or
d. field notes or plotted cross-sections and calculations, checked and signed.
100-179
General Provisions
Note that load count is not an acceptable method of documenting final pay
quantities for earthwork.
13. Volume (e.g., cubic yard structure earthwork). Quantity will be based on plan quantity
or, if field changes or a plan error applies, one of the following:
a. recalculation based on field change or error;
b. computer output – checked, signed, and dated;
c. final measured dimensions and calculations, checked and signed;
d. field notes or plotted cross-sections and calculations, checked and signed;
e. design-aid factor and source identified with number and date; or
f. pro-ration – plan versus final structure length.
14. Volume (e.g., cubic yard for structural concrete). Quantity will be based on plan
quantity or recalculation based on change or error.
121.2.2 Documentation for Pay Items
Final quantities for pay items should be determined as soon as they are completed to ensure
that final estimates can be completed promptly. Rounding and appropriate significant figures
of final estimate quantities are discussed in Section 121.2.5. The following Sections discuss the
documentation requirements for key pay items.
For the items, which will not be measured but shall be the quantities designated in the contract,
i.e., plan quantity, spot-checking of plan quantities is a good practice to ensure accurate
quantities. If field changes are ordered or discrepancies in the plans exist, the Project Engineer
is required to measure and document.
The location of completed work will be documented on the source document.
For items, which are measured, the Project Engineer will follow the method of measurement
and basis of payment for the item. Over-runs and under-runs will be documented on the source
document.
121.2.2.1 Excavation and Embankment (Section 203)
Items paid by volume will not be remeasured but will be the quantities designated in the
Contract. Exceptions will be made when field changes are ordered or when it is determined
that there are discrepancies on the plans in an amount of at least plus or minus two percent.
The Contractor will be immediately notified of any deviation in quantities. All accepted
excavation and borrow will be measured in their original position.
100-180
General Provisions
121.2.2.2 Structural Excavation and Backfill (Section 206)
Structural excavation and backfill generally should be the quantities shown on the plans. Only
major errors and changes, which significantly alter quantities, should be considered. Nominal
changes in length, depth, and location do not require recalculation, and minor changes that
will not significantly change the cost of installation should not be considered as a basis for
alteration of pay quantity.
121.2.2.3 Bases and Pavements (Sections 300 and 400)
When payment is by the ton, an envelope containing the Contractor's scale tickets, daily tare
weights, and one of the following methods is required: Two adding machine tapes each signed
by a different individual, one hand-checked adding machine tape checked and signed by two
different individuals, checked Form 282, or a checked printout from a computer spreadsheet
must be made daily and submitted with the final estimate to the Region. Reasons for partial
loads or voided tickets must be stated on the ticket. Scale certification, weigher certification,
vehicle number and length list may be included in the envelopes or with the pay item
documentation submitted to the Region. When the base material is measured by the cubic yard,
documentation will include standard volume calculations.
121.2.2.4 Piling (Section 502)
Field notes will record piling heat number, cut-off location and lengths, number of splices, and
final penetration in accordance with Section 502 of this Manual. Special attention will be given
to the reuse of steel cut-offs to prevent double payment. Each pile cut-off will be marked so
that if a cut-off is reused, its original location can be identified, and double payment can be
prevented. Individual cut-offs will be measured to the nearest one-tenth of a foot. Final
quantities will be tabulated to the nearest foot. Cut-offs will be paid under a separate line item
at the rate shown in Section 502. As-Constructed Pile Tip elevations shall be documented in
the As-Constructed Drawings.
121.2.2.5 Concrete Slope and Ditch Paving (Section 507)
Payment for concrete slope and ditch paving will be based on final field measurements and
calculations. Calculations involving thicknesses of four-inch, eight-inch, etc., will be made
using the fraction (1/3, 2/3, etc.).
121.2.2.6 Structural Steel (Section 509)
The weight of structural steel will not be remeasured or recalculated but will be the quantities
shown on the plans. Exceptions will be for changes in design or for any error in excess of
specified limits in the total weight shown on the plans.
121.2.2.7 Structural Concrete (Section 601)
Structural concrete will not be remeasured but will be the quantities shown on the plans,
except when field changes are ordered, or it is determined there is an error in the plan quantity
100-181
General Provisions
in excess of the specified limits. If recalculation is required, final payment will be made on the
calculated quantity. Calculations involving thickness of four-inch, eight-inch, etc., will be made
using the fraction (1/3, 2/3, etc.).
121.2.2.8 Reinforcing Steel (Section 602)
Reinforcing steel in structures will not be remeasured or recalculated, but will be the quantities
shown on the plans, except when field changes are ordered, or it is determined there is an
error in plan quantity in excess of specified limits. If a recalculation is required, final payment
will be made on the recalculated quantity.
121.2.2.9 Price Reductions (Section 105)
Price-reduction calculations should be submitted in accordance with the procedures discussed

in Section 120.7.7.10. These reductions will be added as separate items to the estimate.
121.2.3 As-Constructed Plans
121.2.3.1 Availability
Original plans and cross-sections are generally available from the Resident Engineer. If
unavailable, the Region will need to obtain an unmarked set of plans from ProjectWise®.
121.2.3.2 Incorporation of Changes
As required by CDOT Procedural Directive 508.1 – Professional Engineer’s Stamp, changes in the
scope of work, intent of Contract, geometric design, structural plans, typical sections, standard
plans, specifications, and corrections of design errors must be incorporated into the As-
Constructed Plans. The designer may have generated project plan sheets either manually or
electronically. If the plan sheets have been prepared electronically, as-constructed revisions
should be completed using electronic software. See the CADD Manual for electronic completion
of As-Constructed Plans using MicroStation® or Redline software. If other software, such as
Adobe, is used to complete As-Constructed Plans, the work shall closely approximate what is
described in the CADD Manual for electronic software.
Each set of As-Constructed Plans will be prepared under the supervision of the Project Engineer
who supervised construction. The Project Engineer should prepare As-Constructed revisions as
construction progresses but must not revise the original electronic software file. A backup copy
of the original file will be created before revisions are made. Do not delete data from original
plans; rather, cross out information that is no longer needed or accurate. The following Sections
discuss the procedures to revise As-Constructed Plans. The As-Constructed plans shall include
any changes and be Sealed by the Engineer responsible for those changes. As CDOT transitions
from paper to electronic records, As-Constructed plans will be developed electronically or
scanned in an Adobe PDF/ A-1 b ISO Compliant format and archived in ProjectWise Explorer.
121.2.3.2.1 Electronic and Manual Procedures
The following applies to both electronic and manual procedures:
100-182
General Provisions
1. As-Constructed Box. In the as-constructed box on each plan sheet, place the project
acceptance date in either the “Revised,” “No Revisions,” or “Voided by Construction”
space.
2. Adding Sheets. Add sheets by adding a suffix (e.g., 3A, 3B).
3. Replaced Sheets. Replace sheets by adding “X” to the sheet number (e.g., 3X).
4. Title Sheet. The title sheet should present complete information, as follows:
a. Contractor;
b. Resident Engineer;
c. Project Engineer;
d. start date;
e. project acceptance date;
f. comments;
g. project number;
h. five-digit project code (subaccount), if not already shown;
i. beginning and ending location; and
j. change order number if there is a project extension.
5. Index. Revise the index of plan sheets as required. List the sheets that were “Added,”
“Substituted,” or “Voided by Construction.” Do not add sheet numbers for cross-sections
to the index.
6. Typical Section Sheets. Show any changes to base course or surfacing thickness with the
appropriate change order number. Add, revise, or delete typical sections, and list the
appropriate change order numbers.
7. Summary Sheets. Use the following procedures to prepare summary sheets for As-
Constructed Plans
a. Complete a “Summary of Final Quantities” with change order numbers beside

affected items.
b. It is unnecessary to indicate planned or final force account dollar amounts.
c. Any force account items added by change order should be shown.
d. Any items that have been deleted must reference the change order or the CDOT
Form 105 that authorized the deletion.
8. Structures. Use the following procedures to prepare structural sheets:
100-183
General Provisions
a. Show actual tip elevation of piling for each pier, wall, or abutment. Columns for
actual tip elevations are often included in structural piling layout drawing.
b. Show any structure changes for both minor and major structures.
c. Show type, manufacturer, manufacturer's project number, and shop drawing

number of bridge expansion and bearing devices installed.
d. Show elevation and placement of brass cap benchmarks, when used. The
elevation should be project specific and marked on the plans. All temporary
benchmarks on the plans will be lined out.
e. Vertical and lateral clearances should be indicated.
9. Plan and Profile: Use the following procedures to prepare plan and profile sheets:
a. Show the final location of new utility placements, unknown utility discoveries,
relocations, and changes. Abandoned utilities should be shown and noted.
b. Show all geometric revisions to alignment, super elevation, and grade. Include
the change order number as appropriate.
c. Show significant changes in revised slope catches specifically ordered in the

field. Include change order numbers as appropriate.
d. Show final locations of minor structures.
e. As-constructed information must be completed on the item tabulations for

significant items such as structures. However, incidental tabs for items such as
landscaping, delineation, etc. may be crossed out instead.
f. Show locations of any petroleum-contaminated soils incorporated into earthwork

for disposal, as approved by the Region Planning and Environmental Manager.
g. Show locations of discovered underground features, such as foundations or pipes,

which are left in place.
h. Show detailed information on the location of all buried material within the CDOT
right of way or project limits.
i. Detail any new or deleted accesses.
10. Tabulation of Quantities. Individual tabulations of separate pay items may or may not
be edited, as determined by the Project Engineer, to reflect the actual as constructed
quantities. It is important that all individual tabulations match the final quantities, if
not crossed out. If tabulation information is not corrected, the tabulation shall be
crossed out and a reference made to “See Summary of Approximate Quantities Sheet
No. X”.
11. Altering Verbiage. Notes may be altered to reflect the as-constructed condition.
100-184
General Provisions
12. Landscape Plan Sheets will not be updated except that the tabulations may be updated
as determined by the Project Engineer.
121.2.3.2.2 Electronic Procedures
See the CADD Manual for electronic completion of As-Constructed Plans using MicroStation® or
Redline software. If other software, such as Adobe, is used to complete As-Constructed Plans,
the work shall closely approximate what is described in the CADD Manual. Revisions will not be
made to original electronic software files. A backup copy of the original file will be used to
enter the as-constructed revisions. Procedures for the electronic preparation of As-Constructed
Plans are as follows:
1. Leave original data in the electronic file intact.
2. Do not delete any layers in the electronic file.
3. All text revisions are to be completed using the AsConst font in MicroStation® or Redline.
If other software is used to complete As-Constructed Plans, a freehand print font
available through the electronic software may be used.
4. The original design information is contained on the frozen layers of the electronic file
copy and in the record set as outlined in CDOT Procedural Directive 508.1.
5. Additional levels will be created in the electronic software file to enter as-constructed
information as described in the CADD Manual. These levels will be labeled as described
in the CADD Manual. Do not show features on the plot of the As-Constructed Plans that
no longer exist (e.g., roadway alignments, approaches, fences, utilities, and grades).
6. The original sheet will be removed and replaced by the hard copy plot showing as-
constructed information in the As-Constructed Plans. Hard copy plots are to be printed
using the “black and white” option.
7. When as-constructed revisions are completed using electronic software, sheets marked
“Voided by Construction” will occur only if the work covered by that sheet was not
performed. For example, if the project termini were shortened by change order, the
affected plan/profile sheets would be marked “Voided by Construction.”
8. In addition to the hard copy distribution, electronic copies of As-Constructed Plans

developed using electronic software will be retained by the Resident Engineer.
121.2.3.2.3 Manual Procedures
Use the following procedures to manually prepare As-Constructed Plans:
1. Complete all revisions in red using a non-smearing writing implement.
2. Line out plan data being corrected.
3. Indicate removals, by crossing out, when construction operations have obliterated

features that were originally shown on the plans as existing.
100-185
General Provisions
4. When as-constructed revisions are completed manually, instances of sheets marked

“Voided by Construction” will occur only if the work covered by that sheet was not
performed. For example, if the project termini were shortened by change order, the
affected plan/profile sheets would be marked “Voided by Construction.”
121.2.4 Final Estimates
Quantities on the final estimates must agree with the “Summary of Final Quantities” on the As-
Constructed Plans. The following procedures will be performed on force account billings that
have not been received by the Project Engineer within 90 days after final settlement has been
advertised and final checking has been completed:
1. Project Engineer. Estimate the value of the outstanding force account billings including
the value of all manpower, equipment, materials, and railroad flagging. Submit the
estimate to the Region Finals Administrator.
2. Region Finals Administrator. Create a line item for each force account-billing item and
add the line item to the final estimate. Process Form 950 – Project Closure, according
to Section 121.3.5 and notify Projects & Grants Accounting by means of Form 96 –
Contractor Acceptance of Final Estimate to escrow the amount of the outstanding force
account billings.
121.2.5 Rounding of Final Estimate Quantities
If a specification indicates that the method of measurement for a particular item will be plan
quantity, all interim estimate quantities will be rounded to the nearest whole unit. Otherwise,
the final quantity should be rounded according to this Section. Round the final quantity to the
proper decimal as detailed in Figure 100E.
As the unit price value of any item increases, a corresponding increase in number of figures to
the right of the decimal will be used. If the last digit of a number to be rounded is 4 or less,
round down, if 5 or greater, round up. For example, 2.74 will be rounded to 2.7 and 2.75 will
be rounded to 2.8.
121.2.6 Final Project Records
As CDOT transitions from paper to electronic records, Final Project Records will be developed
electronically or scanned in an Adobe PDF/ A-1 b ISO compliant format and archived in
ProjectWise Explorer. The following final project records, books, and documents will be
submitted to the Region Finals Administrator and in some cases to the Materials Final
Documentation Coordinator. Electronic format is always preferred:
1. documentation supporting pay quantities,
2. civil rights and labor compliance documentation,
3. survey documentation,
4. as-constructed plans,
100-186
General Provisions
5. materials documentation, and
6. any additional documentation required by CDOT Specifications, FHWA or other state or

local regulations.
A Final Notebook or Packet will be submitted by the Project Engineer to the Region Finals
Administrator. The Project Final Submittal Checklist (Appendix B) will be used as the table of
contents to assemble a tabbed notebook for the project documentation.
A separate Final Materials Notebook or Packet will be submitted to the Region Finals
Administrator for the project materials documentation. The Final Materials Submittal Checklist
(Appendix B) will be used as the table of contents to assemble a tabbed notebook for the project
materials documentation.
The “List of Items Retained by the Region” letter will show the distribution of these books,
records, and documents. The residency will retain all supporting documentation for stockpiled
materials in the project files.
Rounding Criteria for Pay Items

Pay Unit Rounding Criteria
Acre 0.X
Cubic Yard (concrete) 0.X
Cubic Yard X.
Day X.
Each X.
Gallon X.
Hour X.
Linear Foot X.
Lump Sum (%) X.
M-Board Feet 0.XXX
M-Gallon X.
Mile 0.XX
Pound X.
Square Feet X.
Square Yard X.
Ton 0.XX
Yard-Mile X.
Legend
X. Round to the nearest whole unit.
0.X Round to the nearest tenth.
0.XX Round to the nearest hundredth.
0.XXX Round to the nearest thousandth.
Figure 100 - 19
100-187
General Provisions
121.2.7 Contractor Reports
The following reports and forms shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Project Engineer,
who will forward them to the Region Finals Administrator:
1. Contract Payroll Data. In accordance with FHWA Form 1273 – Required Contract
Provisions Federal-Aid Construction Contracts, payroll data, including all appropriate
CDOT forms, are required on all Federal-Aid projects exceeding $2,000; however,
projects on roadways classified as local roads or rural minor collectors are exempt.
Contact the Resident Engineer to determine roadway classification.
2. Buy America Certification. Buy America Certification is required for steel and iron
products.
The Project Engineer will encourage the timely submittal of all required reports as reduction
in retainage or final payment cannot be made until all documentation has been received. Any
documentation that has not been received at the time of project acceptance will be itemized
in the Project Acceptance Letter.
121.3 ADVERTISEMENT FOR FINAL SETTLEMENT

The Region Finals Administrator, by memorandum or electronic mail, will request the
Construction Engineering Services Branch to advertise each project for final settlement
immediately after the project has been accepted. The Region Finals Administrator will send a
copy of the memorandum or electronic mail to the Right-of-Way Program of the Project
Development Services Branch, which will allow the Right-of-Way Program to clear any
temporary easements.
121.3.1 Region Records
The Region Finals Administrator will maintain, at a minimum, the following records or data on
each project:
1. Number of Elapsed Days. The number of elapsed days between project acceptance and
final Contractor payment for each project will be calculated as shown below and
reported on Form 325 – Final Estimate Data. The entry will represent the number of days
that are the responsibility of the following parties:
a. Field/CDOT Residency. Time will accumulate in this category beginning at Final

Acceptance and continuing until all required documentation under the control
of the Project Engineer has been submitted to the Finals Administrator. Final
documentation submittal by the Project Engineer will not be delayed by
outstanding disputes or claims. Final checking by the Finals Administrator on all
submitted documentation will be done in accordance with established
procedures except preparation of the final estimate and submission of CDOT
Form 96. Any necessary corrections by the Finals Administrator will be done prior
to and independent of any dispute or claim resolution. When disputes or claims
are resolved, necessary changes will be made and the final estimate and CDOT
Form 96 will be submitted to the Contractor.
100-188
General Provisions
For example, a project is accepted on January 15, and the Project Engineer
submits all documentation except for that which is required from the Contractor
on February 15. The time that the Residency is responsible for will commence
on January 15 and accumulate until February 15.
The Project Engineer is responsible for ensuring that the project final
documentation is completed in a timely manner. The Project Engineer will
actively pursue completion of the final even if the Contractor has not submitted
all required documentation. If the Project Engineer completes the final project
documentation and the Contractor has not submitted the required
documentation (e.g., Form 17, Buy America Certification Letter, Certificates of
Compliance, certified payrolls), the final will be submitted to the Region for
checking.
b. Region Finals Administrator. Time will accumulate in this category beginning

when the Project Engineer has submitted all documentation under the control of
the Project Engineer. For example, the Region Finals Administrator receives the
final documentation package from the field on March 27, and completes the
Region review on April 7. The Contractor submits missing forms on April 14 and
the Region sends out the Form 96 on April 16. The Form 96 is again received by
the Region on April 28, and final payment is made on April 30. The Finals
Administrator is responsible for the time from March 27 to April 7, April 14 to
April 16, and from April 28 to April 30.
c. Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for other periods of time when
the only item holding up the review is the lack of documentation from the
Contractor. This procedure will ensure final payment is made as soon as possible.
When the Region is experiencing difficulty obtaining the required documentation from the
Contractor the following escalation procedure will be used:
a. The Project Engineer or Resident Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing
regarding the need for missing documentation.
b. If the Contractor does not respond within 30 days, the Resident Engineer will
escalate the issue to the appropriate Region Program Engineer.
2. Date Review Begins. Document the date the final documentation review was started.
3. Name of Reviewer. Document the name of the final documentation reviewer.
4. Checking Percentage. Document the number of items checked and the total number of
items on the final estimate. The method of computing percentage checked will be the
dollar amount of the items checked divided by the final Contract amount.
5. Date Review Ends. Document the date the final documentation review was completed.
100-189
General Provisions
121.3.2 Region Review Procedures
The Region Finals Administrator will review the final project documentation to ensure that the
field personnel responsible for creating and checking the project documentation have
reasonably followed CDOT specifications, policies, and procedures.
A Final Documentation Risk Analysis will be used to determine the extent of the documentation
review required. The Region Finals Administrator may complete the Final Documentation Risk
Assessment Form, illustrated in Figure 100F, for each project before commencing review of the
final project documentation. If four or more factors in this analysis are considered high risk,
the finals documentation for this project will be considered high risk, and additional checking
will be instituted.
FINAL DOCUMENTATION RISK ASSESSMENT
Project Number:
Project Code Number:
Description:
Risk
Factor
High Low
Final Cost/Bid Cost (More than 110% = High Risk).
Project History (Construction problems?).
Experience of Project Staff.
Project Size (Number of pay items/project dollars).
Complexity of Project (Phases, multiple construction types).
Number and size of Change Orders.
Consultant/CDOT Team Performance.
Organization and Detail of Documentation.
Percentage of Force Account Work (More than 10% = High Risk).
Lump Sum Pay Items in excess of 10% of the project

Comments:
Region Final Administrator: Date:
Figure 100 - 20
100-190
General Provisions
Final documentation will be reviewed as follows:

1. Review Identification. The Region Finals Administrator will identify information each
has reviewed by using a red check mark.
2. Periodic Field Reviews. The Region Finals Administrator may conduct periodic
documentation field reviews of active projects.
3. Extensive Reviews. The Region Finals Administrator will make a complete final
documentation review on a minimum of one project in every 20 (i.e., five percent). At
least one-half of the projects on which a complete review is performed will have a cost
exceeding $1 million.
4. Major Pay Item Reviews. The following procedures will be used to review final
documentation on all projects not completely reviewed in Item #3. A major pay item is
defined as any pay item with a final cost that exceeds ten percent of the final Contract
amount.
a. Two pay items will be completely reviewed per each $1 million of final Contract
amount (e.g., three pay items would be completely reviewed on a project with
a final Contract amount of $1.5 million). Major or high-risk pay items will be
checked first.
b. If any significant documentation deficiencies are found, one additional pay items
per $1 million of final Contract amount will be reviewed. The Project Engineer
will meet with the Region Finals Administrator to review the documentation and
correct all deficiencies.
5. Other Pay Item Reviews. The Region Finals Administrator may review other pay items if
the risk associated with measurement and payment of a pay item is considered
significant enough to require a check.
6. Force Account Billings. Force account billings will be reviewed for proper procedure (see
Section 120.15.3).
7. Scales and Water Tickets. The Project Engineer will review scale and water tickets. The
Region Finals Administrator will verify that established procedures have been followed.
No further checks will be required unless the procedural review reveals deficiencies.
8. Signature Authority. The Region Finals Administrator will sign the estimate sheets and
voucher for all final estimates. The signature line on the final estimate voucher will
state the following: “I hereby approve payment.” The signature will constitute full
authority for payment to be made on the final estimate.
121.3.3 Distribution by Region Finals Administrator
After the Region Finals Administrator has received, reviewed, and checked all the required and
applicable documentation, one copy each of the forms will be distributed by the Region Finals
Administrator as illustrated in Figure 100 - 17. As CDOT transitions from paper to electronic
records, Final Project Records will be developed electronically or scanned in an Adobe PDF/ A-
1 b ISO Compliant format and archived in ProjectWise Explorer.
100-191
General Provisions
Document Distribution
Construction Engineering Services Branch

ProjectWise Explorer in Adobe PDF/ A-1 b ISO Compliant format
Form 325
Projects & Grants Accounting
Resident Engineer
Construction Engineering Services Branch (Original)

Form 17
EEO Business Programs

EEO COC
Resident Engineer
FHWA
Form 1212 ProjectWise Explorer in Adobe PDF/ A-1 b ISO Compliant format
Projects and Grants Section (Center for Accounting)
Projects and Grants Section (Center for Accounting) (Original)

Form 96
Region Business Office
(signed by Contractor)
Resident Engineer
Projects and Grants Section (Center for Accounting) (Original

w/original voucher)
Final Estimate FHWA (Oversight projects only)
Materials Engineer
Resident Engineer

Region Materials Engineer
Form 250
Resident Engineer
FHWA (Oversight projects only)

Buy America
Region Materials Engineer
Resident Engineer

Form 473
Materials and Geotechnical Services Branch
Resident Engineer
Form 262/263 FHWA (Final time count only on Oversight projects)
100-192
General Provisions
Document Distribution
List of Items Retained by ProjectWise Explorer in Adobe PDF/ A-1 b ISO Compliant format
Region Resident Engineer

As-Constructed Plans 1 e-file copy to Staff Right-of-Way
# of copies needed + original to Region
Figure 100 - 21
121.3.4 Construction Phase Closure
The CDOT Controller, in conjunction with the Federal Highway Administration, has established
procedures to expedite the closure of projects following project acceptance. These procedures
require the closure of the construction phase of a project within six months after the project
acceptance date. At the end of this six-month period, charges against the project will not be
allowed unless an extension notification or request has been submitted in accordance with the
requirements discussed in this Section.
Extensions of the construction phase of the project may be needed for settlement of Contract
disputes, claims against the Department, or for completion of pending investigations. In the
event that a lengthy extension period is anticipated for any reason, procedures are available
to escrow project funds to allow for project closure until a determination has been reached on
unresolved issues. The procedures for escrowing project funds are discussed in Section 121.3.5
and should be used, as practical, to expedite closure of the construction phase of a project.
Consider the following:
1. Content of Correspondence. All correspondence regarding notification or requests for

construction phase extensions will include the following information:
a. Project Information. Include the project number, project code (subaccount), and
location.
b. Subject Line. In the subject line, include either “Notification” or “Request” for
extension to distinguish between the two possibilities.
c. Acceptance Date. Include the project acceptance date and extension period (in
months) beyond the acceptance date.
d. Justification. Include justification for the extension, including sufficient detail

of the circumstances, such as:
i. Contractor submittals not received and discussion verifying that the

Contractor has been informed of any deficiencies;
ii. Contract dispute issues and status of the issues;
100-193
General Provisions
iii. claims against the Department and status of the claims; and
iv. status of project final documentation review and discussion of pertinent

investigations
2. Requests for Extensions Less Than 12 Months. The following procedures are applicable
to an extension request of an additional six months up to 12 months after project
acceptance:
a. If resolution of the pending issues is anticipated between six and 12 months after
the project acceptance date, the Project Engineer will request the Region
Business Manager to notify the Projects and Grants Section in writing of the need
for a six-month extension of the phase closure date.
b. The notification will include the information presented in Items 1.a through 1.d
above.
c. A copy of this notification will be forwarded to the Construction Engineering

Services Branch.
d. Requests for extensions will not be granted if the pending issues have no financial
impact on the project or if outstanding project costs can be escrowed.
3. Requests for Extensions Greater Than 12 Months. The following procedures are
applicable to an extension request for more than 12 months after project acceptance:
a. If the Region determines the phase should remain open longer than 12 months
after project acceptance, the Region Business Manager will send a request for
the additional extension with appropriate justification to the Office of Financial
Management and Budget with copies to Projects & Grants Accounting and the
Construction Engineering Services Branch.
b. The request will explain why project charges cannot be placed in escrow or borne
by a like-funded project.
c. Projects & Grants Accounting will record the additional phase extension upon
approval.
d. The Construction Engineering Services Branch will monitor and track the status
of all projects that have been extended beyond the allotted six months after
project acceptance.
e. The Region is to report the status of construction phase extensions in the remarks
section of Form 517 – Status of Construction Project Finals with a brief
explanation of the reason for construction phase extensions and the anticipated
extension period, in months, after project acceptance.
121.3.5 Escrow of Project Funds
The Department's project closure agreements with the FHWA require that the construction
phase of projects be closed six months after CDOT accepts the project from the Contractor.
100-194
General Provisions
The procedures discussed in this Section will be used on projects with unresolved labor claims
or subcontractor/supplier liens or when the Contractor fails to submit the required forms. Note
that this process cannot be used when one of the following applies:
1. The Contractor has filed a claim in accordance with subsection 105.23 of the Standard
Special Provision, Revision of Section 105 – Disputes and Claims for Contract Adjustments
[projects controlled by the 2005 Spec Book].
2. The Contractor has filed a claim in accordance with subsection 105.24 of the Standard
Specifications [projects controlled by the 2011 Spec Book].
3. The amount of any payment is in dispute.
When the project construction phase is complete except that the final estimate cannot be
processed because of unresolved labor complaints or supplier liens or the Contractor has not
submitted the required forms, the Region Finals Administrator will notify the Projects
Accounting and Reporting Section of the Division of Accounting and Finance at
[email protected] to initiate the escrow of project funds. The
following actions will be taken:
1. Labor Issues. The following procedures will be used when the issue relates to labor
complaints or other labor pay issues:
a. Projects & Grants Accounting will charge the project for the amount of the labor
complaint and escrow the funds.
b. Upon notification, the Region Finals Administrator will run the final pay
estimate, close the project, and initiate or request initiation of Form 950.
c. When the final estimate is run, the amount of the labor complaint previously
withheld from the Contractor will be zeroed out in SiteManager® and the term
“Escrowed” entered in the supplemental item description field in the Items
Window in SiteManager®.
d. The Construction Engineering Services Branch will track the labor complaint and
notify both the Region Finals Administrator and Projects & Grants Accounting
when the complaint has been resolved.
e. Projects & Grants Accounting will prepare a payment voucher in accordance with
the final resolution of the labor claim.
2. Subcontractor or Supplier Liens. The following procedures will be used when the issue
relates to subcontractor or supplier liens:
a. The Region Finals Administrator will run the final estimate, close the project,
and initiate or request initiation of Form 950.
b. When the final estimate is run, the amount of the lien previously withheld from
the Contractor will be zeroed out in SiteManager® and “Escrowed” entered in
the supplemental item description field in the Items Window in SiteManager®.
100-195
General Provisions
c. Simultaneously, the Finals Administrator will submit to Projects & Grants

Accounting a request to escrow the funds. This written request will include:
i. project number,
ii. project code number (PCN),
iii. Location,
iv. reason for escrow,
v. dollar amount escrowed,
vi. vendor number (from contractor payment voucher),
vii. contractor name, and
viii. the contractor address.
d. When the final pay estimate is processed for payment, Projects & Grants
Accounting will establish an escrow for the same amount as the lien.
e. When Projects & Grants Accounting receives a release of escrowed liens or other
resolution of the escrowed lien, payment will be made to the appropriate party
from the escrow account. The Projects Accounting and Reporting Section will
notify the Region Finals Administrator of either of these actions.
3. Contractor Failure to Submit Required Forms. The following procedures will be used if
the Contractor fails to submit the required forms, except when final quantities and
additional payment may be affected:
a. The Region Finals Administrator will verify that the Contractor has been notified
of forms not received (i.e., by means of the project acceptance letter and/or
other correspondence) and will run the final estimate, close the project, and
initiate or request initiation of Form 950.
b. Simultaneously, the Finals Administrator will submit to Projects & Grants

Accounting a request to escrow the funds. This written request will include:
i. project number,
ii. project code number (PCN),
iii. location,
iv. reason for escrow,
v. dollar amount escrowed,
vi. vendor number (from contractor payment voucher),
100-196
General Provisions
vii. contractor name, and
viii. the contractor address.
c. Upon written notification by the Region Finals Administrator, Projects & Grants
Accounting will prepare a journal voucher for the final payment and establish an
escrow account.
d. When the Contractor submits the required forms, the Region Finals Administrator
will notify Projects & Grants Accounting to release the escrowed final pay
estimate amount to the Contractor.
e. If any of the overdue forms relate to payment issues that depend on paperwork
submittal, the Project Engineer will review the forms upon receipt for
correctness and forward them to the Region Finals Administrator. The Region
Finals Administrator will revise Form 96 and make distribution. Projects & Grants
Accounting will release the appropriate amount to the Contractor.
Projects & Grants Accounting will provide a quarterly status report of escrowed final pay
estimate amounts to the Region Finals Administrator and the Area Engineers in the Construction
Engineering Services Branch.
Note that Form 96 will identify and itemize dollar values that have been escrowed.
100-197
General Provisions
SECTION 122 LOCAL AGENCY PROJECT

ADMINISTRATION
122.1 ADMINISTRATION OF FEDERAL-AID LOCAL AGENCY
PROJECTS
The CDOT Local Agency Manual covers all topics in more detail. Federal-Aid funds are available
to Local Agencies for the construction of roads, streets, structures, and other improvements,
including enhancement projects. The FHWA requires the Department to certify that such
projects are administered in accordance with Federal regulations.
122.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE – CDOT FEDERAL-OVERSIGHT

PROGRAM
Regardless of the contract administrative procedures used, a CDOT/FHWA Quality Assurance
Review will be performed on random projects in accordance with the CDOT/FHWA Stewardship
Agreement (see Section 101.105).
122.3 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION

The Local Agency Contract Administration Checklist will define the contract administration
responsibilities of the parties involved in each Local Agency project, including enhancement
projects. The types of contract administration procedures used for these projects are discussed
in the following Sections.
122.3.1 Administration by the Department
When administered by the Department, CDOT will advertise, bid, award, and administer the
project exactly like any other CDOT construction project. Consider the following:
1. Region. The Region will ensure that the project is administered in the same manner as
other Federal-Aid projects.
2. Resident Engineer/Project Engineer. The Resident Engineer will be in responsible charge

of all facets of contract administration and may delegate this responsibility to a Project
Engineer.
3. Change Orders. The following statement, included in the body of the change order, must
be signed by a qualified representative of the Local Agency or private owner for all
change orders that involve the expenditure of Local Agency or private owner funds
before the work covered by the change order commences:
100-198
General Provisions
Should Federal funds not be available to cover these additional costs, or the FHWA decide not
to participate in these costs, the Local Agency or private owner agrees to provide the required
funds.
The ____________________________________________________
(Name of Local Agency or Private Owner)
Approves this Change Order No. _______by signing below.
_____________________________________________________________
Signature Title Date
Figure 100 - 22
122.3.2 Administration by the Local Agency
CDOT and the Local Agency will execute a project specific agreement that authorizes the Local
Agency to assume responsibility for part or all of the contract administration on a specific
construction project. The agreement will be completed and signed before the project is
advertised.
The agreement will include a Local Agency Contract Administration Checklist. The checklist will
indicate whether the Region or the Local Agency has assumed responsibility to perform each
specific contract administration task on the project. When the Local Agency has assumed
responsibility for any task on a project, the Local Agency will fulfill all requirements associated
with that task as referenced in this Manual, including those usually designated to be completed
by the Region Program Engineer, Resident Engineer, and Project Engineer.
122.4 REGION RESPONSIBILITIES FOR OVERSIGHT

Regardless of which party advertises, bids, and awards the project, the Resident Engineer, or
Project Engineer as assigned, should review the agreement between the Local Agency and the
Department to ensure that the following items are addressed:
1. Appointment of Project Engineer. The Local Agency will appoint a qualified Professional
Engineer, licensed in the State of Colorado, as the Project Engineer. The Project
Engineer may be an employee of the Local Agency or a consultant.
2. Assignment of Responsibility. The following statement will be included in the agreement

to protect the CDOT Engineer's Professional Engineering License:
Notwithstanding CRS 12-25-103, the Project Engineer appointed by the Local Agency
shall be in responsible charge of the construction supervision for the duties specified in
the approved agreement.
3. Administration. The Project Engineer will administer the project in accordance with the
approved agreement, Contract requirements, and CDOT policies and procedures. The
100-199
General Provisions
agreement should address the project administration tasks that the Local
Agency/consultant will perform, such as:
a. project inspection and testing;
b. approval of material sources;
c. record keeping (e.g., testing, inspection, pay documentation);
d. preparation and approval of pay estimates;
e. monitoring of project financial status; and
f. processing of Contractor claims.
The Region will be responsible for assuring that all contract administration tasks not assigned
to the Local Agency are performed by CDOT.
122.5 QUALITY CONTROLPROCESS CONTROL – CDOT FEDERAL-

OVERSIGHT PROGRAM
The Resident Engineer will be responsible for approving change orders and determining whether
the funding for change orders will be participating or non-participating. Before approving the
change order, the Resident Engineer will perform the following:
1. Compliance Review. Review the change order and letter of explanation to ensure
compliance with CDOT policies and procedures contained in this Manual.
2. Budget Review. Review the financial status of the project to ensure that the projected
completion cost does not exceed the allotted budget. If the projected completion cost
exceeds the allotted budget, the Resident Engineer will consult with the Region to
determine if Federal-Aid funds are available and can be added to the project. Consider
the following:
a. If additional Federal-Aid funds are available and can be added to the project,
the Region will complete the required budget actions.
b. If additional Federal-Aid funds are not available, the Local Agency will provide
the additional funds.
122.6 PROJECT REVIEWS

The Region will designate a Resident Engineer or Project Engineer to perform random project
reviews and provide advice to the Project Engineer of the Local Agency.
The reviews by the Resident Engineer or Project Engineer will be sufficiently detailed to ensure
that the Project Engineer of the Local Agency is administering the project in accordance with
the terms of the Contract and the approved agreement. All CDOT reviews will be documented
in the project diary, on the monthly pay estimate, or in the Field Review Form.
100-200
General Provisions
The Resident Engineer or Project Engineer will communicate only with the Project Engineer of
the Local Agency, or his duly authorized assistant, and, except in an emergency, will issue no
instructions to the Contractor or its Foremen.
122.7 FINAL PROJECT INSPECTION

As a quality control activity, the Resident Engineer will perform the final project inspection.
See Section 109.9 for additional information on final project inspection and Form 1212 LA –
Final Acceptance Report For Local Agency Projects. Notify Staff Bridge for assistance and
coordination on projects with structures.
100-201
General Provisions
SECTION 123 COMBINED BRIDGE ENTERPRISE AND

CDOT FUNDED PROJECTS
123.1 BACKGROUND
The Bridge Enterprise (BE) and CDOT are two separate entities with two separate funding
sources. The BE is funded from an increase in registration fees for vehicles and is a result of
legislation passed in Colorado in 2009. CDOT is funded from federal and state highway user
taxes on gasoline.
CDOT projects can be set up in AASHTOWare® to accept several different funding sources. The
funding sources are identified in AASHTOWare® and assigned a priority which defines the order
in which each source of funding is spent. There are fundamentally four reasons why BE and
CDOT funds cannot be comingled into one project this way.
1. TABOR Legislation – TABOR legislation prohibits one state governmental entity from
giving money to another state governmental entity.
2. AASHTOWare® Voucher System – The AASHTOWare® system is set up to pay a contractor

for work from a single owner, or CDOT, and is not capable of paying a contractor from
two different owners. The AASHTOWare® Shazam/SAP interface that assigns a payment
voucher from CDOT to the contractor would have to be modified to accommodate two
owners.
3. Construction Engineering (CE) – CDOT has a CE pool from which indirect costs such as
vehicles, buildings, Staff Services, etc. are funded. The BE will be billed directly for
these types of charges. Because BE projects are not subject to the CE rate the CE work
will have to be separated into two projects.
4. SAP – Numerous forms within SAP would require modification to accept a combination
project (i.e., Form 65).
Region personnel must ensure that the work designed and performed is funded from the
appropriate source. BE work must be accounted for and paid for separately from other work on
the project and to do this the project should be entered into AASHTOWare® as a combination
project (combo-project) before the project is advertised. Multiple Projects combined under
one Contract/Proposal in the AASHTOWare® Project modules are a combo project. This Combo
project approach allows for associating several projects under one Contract, with one Prime
project, and one Proposal, for more efficient management both in our software system and in
the field. Each project must begin as a separate project with a unique five-digit project code
and associated funding in SAP. For further information and assistance with the combo-project
business process, please contact the Alternative Delivery Branch or the Staff Bridge Branch. For
assistance with AASHTOWare Project (Transport) system support contact the Data Program &
Project Analysis group at [email protected].
100-202
General Provisions
123.2 GUIDANCE
1. Administer the project like any other typical project. However, as issues arise the PE
and RE must keep BE funds separate from CDOT funds, or funds from any other source.
Differences between the BE work and the other work should be clearly identified in the
plans.
2. There could be split plan force account items in the BE category and the other work
category. Be sure to post work items in the proper category in the Daily Work Report.
Inspectors need to post to the correct item/category (i.e., MCR, OJT,
Incentive/Disincentive, etc.) Refer to the category definitions above for additional
information.
3. There will be a planned force account dollar value for Minor Contract Revisions (MCR)
in the BE work category as well as the other work category.
4. Change Orders, if required, must be added to the appropriate category of work. For
example, if liquidated damages need to be assessed, two separate lines for posting may
need to be added (one for the BE work category and one for the other work category).
The PE and RE will determine an accurate proportional difference in costs based on
engineering judgment if the change order impacts both the BE work and the other work.
Cost justifications will need to clearly identify the funding source, or sources for the
additional work.
5. Stockpile materials requests will have to be analyzed to determine if the materials will
be used on the BE work, the other work, or as a portion of a like item. If the materials
are part of a like item, the materials will have to be proportioned and assigned to the
appropriate category.
6. Since there is just one contract, retainage is not a concern and can be handled similarly
to standard CDOT projects.
100-203
SECTION 200
EARTHWORK
200-1
Earthwork
Section 200 EARTHWORK

200.1 GENERAL
Site preparation and earthwork activities on CDOT construction projects should be carefully
monitored. This type of work generally involves removing structures and obstructions, clearing
and grubbing objectionable and unsuitable materials, excavating and constructing the roadbed
embankment, installing temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures,
and handling and disposing non-hazardous and hazardous waste materials. Throughout this type
of work, the Contractor is responsible for preserving all protected properties and for complying
with all applicable Federal and State laws and local ordinances in accordance with Section 107
200.2 PRECONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS

The following section presents issues that should be addressed before earthwork begins. Most
of these topics should be communicated to the Contractor at the Preconstruction Conference
(see Appendix A).
200.2.1 Limits of Construction
The limits of construction define the area in which construction personnel and equipment are
permitted to operate. These limits are generally bounded by State right of way. Private
property may be involved as discussed in Section 200.2.2. Verify that these limits have been
properly staked. Stakes and other markings should be preserved until they have served their
useful purpose.
200.2.2 Access to Private Property
Access to private property is obtained on a project-to-project basis. Private property access is

permitted only through written agreement between the landowner and Contractor. This
agreement will define the limits of access, permitted use, and restoration requirements. The
Contractor shall furnish the Project Engineer a copy of this agreement before using private
property. Periodically check that points of access to all affected private properties remain open
during the project. Contact the Region Right of Way Manager for assistance.
200.2.3 Utilities and Existing Highway Facilities
The schedule and status of any needed utility adjustment or relocation should be carefully
reviewed and clearly understood by all affected parties. Contact the Region Utilities Engineer
for assistance.
200-2
Earthwork
200.2.4 Historical Sites and Markers
Historical sites and historical markers are scattered throughout the State. Verify that protected
historical sites and markers within the limits of construction have been properly marked. Check
to ensure that the Contractor is fully aware of the importance of preserving these sites and
markers during construction. Contact the Region Planning and Environmental Manager for
assistance.
200.2.5 Wetland Areas and Animal Habitats
Ensure that protected wetland areas and animal habitats within the limits of construction are
clearly staked or otherwise delineated. Inform the Contractor of the sensitivity of these areas
and the importance of their preservation. Contact the Region Planning and Environmental
Manager for assistance. See Section 107.13.1 for additional information.
200.2.6 Trees and Shrubs
Verify that protected trees and shrubs are clearly staked or otherwise delineated. Contact the
Region Planning and Environmental Manager for assistance. See Section 107.13.2 for additional
information
200.2.7 Highly Erodible Soils
Where clearing and grubbing is required, the limits of clearing in highly erodible areas will be
discussed in the Stormwater Management Plan and defined in the Contract Plans. Verify that
these areas are clearly staked or otherwise delineated. During construction, the effectiveness
of the Best Management Practices employed for erosion and sedimentation control will be
inspected for compliance. Contact the Region Planning and Environmental Manager for
assistance (see Section 208.1.2).
200.2.8 Archaeological and Paleontological Sites
Ensure that archaeological and paleontological sites discovered during the Site Investigation
are clearly staked or otherwise delineated. Ensure the Contractor understands the importance
of preserving these resources. If unforeseen archeological or paleontological discoveries are
encountered during construction, the Contractor’s affected operations shall immediately cease
and the Region Planning and Environmental Manager shall be notified. See Section 107.23
200.2.9 Hazardous Operations
As governed by Section 107 of the Standard Specifications, the Contractor is solely responsible
for adhering to Federal and State laws and local ordinances with respect to the safety of project
personnel and the public. Periodically review construction operations for obvious signs of non-
200-3
Earthwork
compliance. Explosives handling, blasting operations, felling of timber, and burning of debris
present significant hazards. Immediately notify the Project Engineer of any suspect operation.
Contact the CDOT Safety Officer for assistance.
200.2.10 Hazardous Material/Hazardous Waste
Ensure that all suspected hazardous material/hazardous waste sites that have been identified
during the Modified Environmental Site Assessment and Site Investigation are properly staked
or otherwise delineated. All special requirements of the Contract should be strictly enforced.
Also, ensure that the notification flowchart presented in Figure 200A of Section 250.2.5.1 has
been completed and posted. Contact the Region Planning and Environmental Manager who in
turn will confer with Hazardous Materials in Safety Services and Hazardous Waste in the
Property Management Unit. See Section 250.2 for additional information.
200.2.11 Salvable Materials
Salvable materials that become the property of the Department must be carefully removed in
sections and properly marked and stored. Where required, check that the Contractor utilizes
match markings for the reassembly of structures. Check the provisions of the Contract for
special requirements. Verify that the Contractor is aware of the disposition of all salvable
material before earthwork activities begin. Inspect materials for damage if they are to be
reused on the project. See Section 200.2.2 where materials must be stored on private property.
200.2.12 Stakes and Survey Monuments
Check stakes for compliance with Section 625 of the Standard Specifications and to ensure that
all survey benchmarks, monumentation, and stakes are adequately marked and preserved
during the project. Contact the Region Right of Way Manager for assistance.
200.2.13 State Noxious Weeds
All mulch, seed, sod, plants, shrubs and other similar biological material must be free from
noxious weeds to minimize their propagation. Noxious weeds are plants that are detrimental to
the health and well-being of other living organisms within the State, as determined by the
Colorado Department of Agriculture state and county noxious weed list. This should be discussed
with the Contractor at the Pre-construction Conference and reiterated at Project Progress
Meetings before operations such as excavating topsoil, placing topsoil; seeding, sodding,
planting, and mulching begin. Contact the Region Environmental Manager or the Region Noxious
Weed Manager for additional information.
200-4
Earthwork
200.2.14 Visual Documentation
Visual aids can substantially complement the written documentation required by the
Department, especially when claims and litigation are anticipated. Prior to and during the
project, use cameras and video recorders to document field results.
200-5
Earthwork
SECTION 201 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

201.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Clearing and grubbing are specified on projects to eliminate all unsuitable material from
roadway excavation material and embankments. If organic material is allowed to remain, it will
rot and create voids within or under the compacted embankment material. As the embankment
material settles to fill the voids, a pavement failure will generally occur. In addition, all
branches within 20-feet clear height above the subgrade must be pruned and the cut surface
properly treated.
201.1.1 Excavation Areas and Borrow Pits
One objective during roadway design is to balance cuts with fills by reusing excavated material
further ahead in station to construct embankments; thus minimizing construction costs. The
excavated material is not always suitable for use in roadway embankments. In these areas,
specially located borrow pits are used for the additionally needed material. Both excavated
and borrowed material must not only be suitable in terms of soil characteristics, but also free
from organic matter. Clearing and grubbing is typically specified for excavation areas and
borrow pits to completely remove organic matter such as trees, undergrowth, stumps, roots,
and ground cover.
201.1.2 Embankment Areas
For embankment areas, the treatment of stumps and vegetation depends on many factors as
discussed in this section.
201.1.2.1 Fills Greater Than Four Feet
Many contracts require the underlying embankment foundation to be pre-compacted, which

necessitates complete clearing, grubbing, and removal of organic ground cover. If pre-
compaction is not specified, however, and the fill (i.e., as measured from natural ground line
to subgrade) is greater than four feet, the following practice is acceptable:
1. Vegetation. Vegetative matter may be mowed and remain in place.
2. Stumps. Stumps may be cut to a height of six inches above the natural ground and remain
in place. One exception to this practice is where the stump is within two feet of the toe
of the fill slope, which requires complete stump removal.
200-6
Earthwork
201.1.2.2 Four-Foot Fills or Less
For fills that are four feet or less (i.e., as measured from natural ground line to subgrade), the
following practice must be followed:
Vegetation. All vegetative matter must be completely stripped.
Stumps. Stumps may be cut to a height within six inches above the natural ground and remain
in place. However, there is a condition to this practice: the final embankment must have at
least two feet of compacted fill material between the resulting subgrade or side slope and the
top of the stump.
201.2 INSPECTION GUIDELINES

201.2.1 Before Construction
Before clearing and grubbing begins, review the preconstruction considerations presented in
Section 200.2. In addition, verify acceptability of the Contractor’s proposed method of debris
disposal.
201.2.2 During Construction
Blasting. Consult the Project Engineer if violations are suspected.
Stumps and Vegetation. Verify that vegetation and stumps are treated consistent with the
criteria presented in Section 201.1. Treatment depends on many factors including fill height
and location.
Objectionable Material. Verify that objectionable materials are removed and backfilled as
specified in the Contract. Ensure that objectionable materials are not mixed with excavated
material.
Tree Branches. Verify that tree branches are pruned to the required vertical clearance. Ensure
that unsound and unsightly branches are also pruned. Pruning must be performed using good
tree surgery practices.
Debris Disposal. Check that debris is disposed of properly and that approved burning operations
are performed safely and within legal limits.
201.2.3 After Construction
A newly cleared site is vulnerable to erosion. Check the Stormwater Management Plan and the
provisions of the Contract with respect to the Best Management Practices required for erosion
and sedimentation control. See Section 208 for additional information.
200-7
Earthwork
SECTION 202 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND

OBSTRUCTIONS
All structures and obstructions marked for demolition within the limits of construction must be
safely removed and properly disposed. The trenches, holes, or pits resulting from such activities
must be backfilled and compacted. Unless otherwise directed, backfill that is placed below or
outside the roadway prism (e.g., below subgrade) will be placed and compacted as close as
practical to the density of the in situ soil. Backfill placement and compaction within the
roadway prism will be performed as specified in the Contract.

Consider the following guidelines before removal of structures and obstructions:
Methods of Removal. Prior acceptance by CDOT of the Contractor's methods of removal may be
necessary. Check the provisions of the Contract.
Damage to Structures. Do not allow any construction method or equipment operation to

continue if it could damage an adjacent structure or portion of structure designated to remain
in place.
Blasting. The handling of explosives and blasting operations will be performed as specified in
the Contract.
Measurements. Many items designated for removal will require measurement for payment prior
to the actual removal work (e.g., curb & gutter, sidewalk). Measure and mark these items and
ensure that the Contractor understands the limits of removal.
Salvable Materials. If culverts are to be reused, ensure they are removed without damage and
properly stored. See Section 200.2.11 for additional information.
Pavements and Sidewalks. Where the Contract specifies complete removal of pavement,
sidewalks, curbs, etc., verify removal to the proper width and depth. Check that the material
is disposed of properly. Some contracts may specify material recycling. Check the provisions of
the Contract. If partial removal is specified, verify that sawed cut lines are true and maintained.
200-8
Earthwork
Basements. Basements and other similar cavities that are left by demolition must be filled and
compacted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. Special attention is needed
to achieve uniform density in such areas.
Maintenance of Traffic. Verify that pavement markings are completely eradicated before new
traffic patterns are established. Check the Contract Plans for conformance with the
Transportation Management Plan. See Section 630 for additional information.
Bridges. Check for removal to the proper depth (e.g., columns, abutments, footings).
Items to be removed are sometimes removed in sections or a portion at a time. Where partial
removal is necessary, carefully check the site to ensure that the remaining portion of the item
does not impose a public hazard or compromise adjacent property (e.g., the remaining
structure appears unstable, a section of guardrail is left exposed without proper end
treatment). Prior to reopening roadways to traffic, also check that all debris has been removed
from the roadway.
202.3 REMOVAL OF BRIDGE

Projects that include bridge removal will include a project special provision titled Revision of
Section 202 – Removal of Bridge.
This special provision requires the Contractor to submit a Bridge Removal Plan, parts of which
must be signed and sealed by the Contractor’s Engineer. The Contractor’s Engineer is not
required to be on site when bridge removal operations are in progress, but shall be present to
conduct daily inspections to certify in writing that the falsework, bracing, and shoring conform
to the details of the Bridge Removal Plan. The Contractor’s Engineer must inspect the removal
operation daily and submit a daily progress report. When an unplanned event occurs, the
Contractor’s Engineer must submit a report that describes the operation or procedure proposed
to remedy the situation. Conditions under which the Engineer may suspend bridge removal are
listed in the special provision.
This special provision also requires that a Pre-Removal Conference be held at least seven days
prior to beginning bridge removal. Required attendees include the Engineer, the Contractor,
the demolition subcontractor, the Contractor’s Engineer, and the Contractor’s Traffic Control
Supervisor. The agenda for the conference is included in Appendix A.
200-9
Earthwork
SECTION 203 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT

Excavation and embankment (i.e., generally referred to as earthwork) is the construction of a
graded roadbed, upon which subsequent base and wearing courses are constructed. Excavation
is that part of the earthwork that is dug up, hauled, or reused as fill material to construct the
embankment portion of the roadbed. Roadway excavation, which is that material obtained from
within the right of way exclusive of structural excavation, may be composed of common earth,
solid rock, loose rock, or any combination of these materials. Where there exists insufficient
quantities of suitable roadway excavation and structural excavation for embankment
construction (i.e., cuts do not balance with fills), borrow excavation is specified to make up
the difference.
203.1.1 Excavation
203.1.1.1 Types of Excavation
Unclassified Excavation. Unclassified excavation includes all materials encountered regardless

of their nature or the manner in which they must be removed.
Stripping. Stripping consists of the removal of overburden or other specified material from pits
before the underlying material is excavated for use in the roadway. Stripping also includes
replacing the stripped material.
Removal of Unsuitable Material. Removal of any soils or organic materials that are detrimental
to the roadway subgrade or subbase.
Rock Excavation. Rock excavation includes all masses of material that cannot be removed
without blasting or ripping and all detached stones or boulders having a volume of 0.5 cubic
yards or more as determined by physical or visual measurement meet one of the following
criteria:
Ripping Test
Seismic Test
Handling Test
Muck Excavation. Muck excavation provides for the removal and disposal of saturated or
unsaturated mixtures of soil and organic matter that are not suitable for a foundation material
or embankment. Requests for muck excavation payment should be investigated carefully.
Contact the Resident Engineer or the Area Engineer for additional guidance.
200-10
Earthwork
Borrow Excavation. Borrow excavation consists of approved material, required for

embankments or other portions of work, acquired from outside the right of way.
Potholing. Potholing shall consist of exposing and verifying the location of existing utilities at
locations as directed.
203.1.1.2 Excavation Near Wetlands
Excavation in and near wetland areas should be carefully monitored for compliance with
environmental requirements. Non-permitted encroachment of wetland areas is unacceptable.
Such practices may cause permanent damage to these protected areas and result in litigation.
See Section 107.13.1 for additional information.
203.1.2 Embankment Construction
203.1.2.1 Embankment Materials
Embankment material consists of approved material from excavation or imported, and placed
in embankments. See subsection 203.03 of the Standard Specifications for definitions of soil
embankment, rock embankment, and rock fill.
203.1.2.2 Foundation Inspection
Before embankment construction begins, carefully inspect the area that will serve as the
embankment foundation. Pay particular attention to areas that have questionable supporting
capacity. Where soft or very wet areas are found, consider the following:
Unsuitable Materials. If the material is found to be unsuitable, it must be replaced with a

material that is suitable for use as an embankment foundation.
Springs/Seeps. Where springs or seeps are found, underdrain facilities may be required to
adequately remove the spring or seepage water.
Poor Surface Drainage. When material becomes saturated due to poor surface drainage, it must
be dried.
203.1.2.3 Embankment Uniformity
The importance of uniformity in embankment construction cannot be overemphasized. Practical

construction methods that ensure uniformity of material, layer thickness, moisture content,
and compactive effort are paramount in achieving a quality embankment. Most roadway failures
can generally be traced to a lack of uniformity in the embankment.
200-11
Earthwork
203.1.3 Steep Slopes and Transitions
Where embankments are constructed on steep slopes, a good interlock must be achieved
between the sloping foundation and the new embankment material. Material interlock can be
effectively achieved by plowing, terracing, or benching the foundation slope. Consider the
Vegetation. Vegetation on very steep slopes must be completely removed to prevent the
creation of a slip plane between the foundation slope and the new embankment material.
Hard Sloping Surfaces. Slopes that have a relatively hard surface will create a slip plane unless
properly treated. Such slopes must be plowed, terraced, or benched to properly key the
embankment material as it is placed and compacted.
Existing Embankments. Where existing embankments are widened or raised in terms of grade,
plowing, terracing, or benching are used to key the new material into the existing embankment.
Transition Areas. Benching is used in the transition area between sizable cuts and fills. The
transition area is the point where a cut section changes to a fill section. Particular attention
should be placed in these areas. Failure to provide sufficient transverse benching and uniformity
in compaction generally will result in a rough pavement surface at this junction.

In addition to the general preconstruction guidelines presented in Section 200.2, consider the
following before excavation and embankment construction begins:
Utilities. Verify the location of utilities and the status of any relocation work. Note any
encroachment permits (see Section 200.2.3).
Environmental Considerations. Verify compliance with respect to erosion and sedimentation

control, vegetation and tree protection, wetlands, and other environmental requirements
including mitigation measures committed to in the Environmental Assessment or Environmental
Impact Statement. Make certain that protected wetland areas are marked and communicated
to the Contractor (see Section 200.2.5 and Section 200.2.6).
Types of Excavation. Review the types of excavation that will be required for the project (see
Section 203.1.1.1). Verify that borrow sites, where used, have been approved and that cross-
sections have been taken. Where explosives and blasting are required for rock excavation,
verify compliance with the Contract Specifications.
200-12
Earthwork
Compaction Considerations. Become familiar with and understand the moisture and density
requirements for embankment construction. Check the provisions of the Contract for any
required special compaction equipment. Understand the proper operation of such equipment.
Typical Sections/Staking. Become familiar with the typical sections of the Contract Plans. Pay
particular attention to required treatments for steep slopes and transition areas (see Section
203.1.3). Verify that slope stakes are properly set (see Section 200.2.12). Visually check staking
for obvious irregularities (e.g., off right of way).
Foundation Inspection. Observe the area for unsuitable material and wet spots. Verify removal
or treatment based on the direction given by the Project Engineer. Document the locations,
quantities, and disposition of materials and treatments. See Section 203.1.2.2 for additional
information.
Consider the following guidelines during excavation and embankment construction:
Blasting and Explosives. Monitor any handling of explosives and blasting operations for
conformance with legal requirements (see Section 200.2.9).
Slide Areas. Be alert to any condition that could indicate a possible slide area.
Slope Stake Preservation. Make certain the Contractor preserves slope stakes and control point
references during the operation (see Section 200.2.12).
Clearing and Grubbing. Verify that the site has been properly cleared and grubbed (see Section
201).
Excavated Materials. Observe and report noticeable changes in excavated material with regard
to type, texture, and color. Such factors may indicate the presence of unsuitable materials.
Verify removal based on directives from the Project Engineer.
Document the locations, quantities, and disposition of such materials. Watch for encounters
with materials that could be used elsewhere (e.g., topsoil, riprap). Where topsoil stripping is
specified, ensure that topsoil is properly salvaged (see Section 207).
Base of Cut/Top of Slope. Verify that rock encountered at the base of cuts has been excavated
to the proper grade. Observe that rounding along the top of cut slopes is performed where
specified.
Subexcavated Areas. Ensure that subexcavated areas have been measured for payment before
backfilling.
200-13
Earthwork
Drainage and Erosion. Verify ditch construction (e.g., typical sections, staking, natural
drainage, interceptor ditches at tops of cuts). Watch for damage to the embankment (e.g.,
unexpected high water with respect to design, improperly drained foundation or roadbed,
damage from precipitation). Ensure that the Best Management Practices for water quality
control are monitored as required (see Section 208.1.2).
Benching. Verify that slopes and transition areas are being treated as specified with regard to
keying the new material (see Section 203.1.3).
Embankment Material. Check to ensure that the embankment is maintained free of organic and
frozen materials and uniformly mixed. Rocks, concrete, and asphalt chunks larger than
allowable dimensions must be removed and disposed of properly.
Placement and Compaction. Verify that the embankment material is placed in uniform
horizontal lifts that do not exceed the allowable maximum thickness. Note the use and
permissibility of any end dumping. Observe the compaction operation for uniformity with
respect to moisture content and target density. Monitor the operation of specialized
compaction equipment for compliance. Check that the top two feet of embankment is
constructed with rock free material.
Structure/Pile Locations. Ensure that embankment material is being placed to avoid damage to
adjacent structures. Oversize material should not be used around structures or pile driving
locations.
Debris Disposal. Roots, logs, and other unsuitable materials must be disposed of in designated
areas outside the fill area.
Cross-Sections. Frequently monitor the earthwork cross-section (e.g., width, side slopes, grade)
for conformance with regard to tolerance of typical sections.
After construction, verify that the roadway grade and prism are within specified tolerance and
that embankment construction meets the density requirements of the Contract. Check the
installation of drainage facilities for proper operation and that the Contractor maintains the
roadbed in proper condition.
203.2.4 Suggested Practices for Avoiding and Mitigating Localized Soft Subgrade
Problems Encountered While Paving
The intent of this section is to provide guidance for field personnel in the appropriate
remediation of localized soft subgrade encountered during paving operations and after final
approval of finished subgrade and proof rolling have been completed in accordance with
Revision of Section 203 Proof Rolling.
200-14
Earthwork
It is important to note that the Engineer may suspend work at any time the subgrade is not in
proper condition for the placing of the sub base, base course or pavement. The best practices
listed below are not intended to replace good engineering judgment.
Suggested Practices – Prior to Construction
The Project Engineer and Inspection Staff should review and be familiar with the appropriate
pavement and earthwork specifications and the Construction Manual. Some of these sections
include Section 203 (Excavation and Embankment), 306 (Reconditioning), 307 (Lime Treated
Subgrade), 401 (Plant Mix Pavements), 403 (Hot Mix Asphalt), 412 (Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement) and 420 (Geosynthetics).
203.2.4.1 Contractor Methods Statement
At the Pre-Construction Conference, the Project Engineer should request a Methods Statement
from the contractor (to be submitted at the Pre-Paving Conference) as to what method(s) he
proposes to use to remediate soft subgrade immediately prior to, or during the course of paving
operations. The Project Engineer should evaluate the proposed method(s) and discuss with the
Contractor. This methods statement should include, but not be limited to the following:
What methods does the Contractor propose to protect the subgrade from excessive traffic
(including construction equipment and construction workers’ vehicles), weather, etc., after it
has been proof rolled, string-lined and approved by the Engineer?
What equipment does the Contractor propose to have available in case remediation becomes
necessary?
What materials will the Contractor have available to assist in repairing these soft spots?
During the Pre-Construction Conference, the Project Engineer should add a note to review the
Methods Statement prepared by the Contractor during the PrePaving Conference.
203.2.4.2 Prior to Paving
The following items should be discussed in detail during the Pre-Paving Conference:
1. The Contractor’s Proposed Methods Statement(s)
2. The Proof Rolling specification.
3. Paving on frozen subgrade or base material will not be permitted.
4. Excessive vehicle traffic should be minimized on the approved subgrade prior to paving.
200-15
Earthwork
Pre-Paving Inspection - It is the Contractor’s responsibility to construct the work pursuant to

the plans and specifications. The Department’s inspectors have a responsibility to thoroughly
inspect all subgrade in cooperation with the Contractor’s forces. The following are a few of
the items that should be considered:
1. Check that subgrade/base has been constructed, string-lined and inspected to assure
that the required cross-slope, elevation, and alignment has been obtained as required
pursuant to the contract.
2. The subgrade shall be shaped to the required grade and section, free from all ruts,
corrugations, or other irregularities, and uniformly compacted and approved in
accordance with Section 203.
3. Ensure that the specified materials have been incorporated into the work in accordance
with Subsection 203.03.
4. Check that the subgrade/base has been compacted to the required moisture/density.
Densities will be determined by nuclear methods in accordance with CP 80.
5. During the proof rolling operation, check for soft spots and ruts, and ensure that the
contractor corrects these deficiencies. Any soft spots should be corrected before the
paving operation begins.
6. Ensure that the work has been adequately protected once the subgrade has been
approved in accordance with the specification.
200-16
Earthwork
SECTION 206 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR

STRUCTURES
206.1 GENERAL
If the project includes work on structures, excavation and backfill operations will be specified
in the Contract.
206.1.1 Contractor Responsibility
Construction requirements for excavation and backfill for structures are specified in Section
206 of the Standard Specifications. The limiting nature of this criteria (e.g., minimum cover
over pipe, backfilling evenly on opposite sides of the structure) does not relieve the Contractor
from responsibility for failure or damage caused by unsound construction practices. The
Contractor also must consider and effectively use the guidance and recommendations provided
by product manufacturers and suppliers. CDOT will not consider participating in the repair or
replacement of work if the failure or damage is caused by the fault or negligence of the
Contractor.
206.1.2 Damage and Failure Considerations
Structural damage and failures can be avoided if sound construction practices are used in the
backfill operation. The Project Inspector should monitor the operation for obvious signs of
unsound practices and bring any instances to the attention of the Project Engineer.
Factors that typically contribute to structural damage and failures include:
1. the presence of rock in backfill material,
2. uneven backfilling on opposing sides of the structure,
3. backfilling too soon against freshly poured concrete,
4. placement of backfill material in lifts that are too thick,
5. providing insufficient cover over pipe structures, and
6. operating heavy equipment too close to pipe structures.
CDOT Plans and Specifications are designed so that backfilling operations can be accomplished
without causing structural damage or failure, if sound construction practices are employed.
200-17
Earthwork
For example, the structural integrity of a large diameter steel pipe relies on the side support
provided by the compacted backfill material. If this side support is not adequately developed,
the structure may fail. Such types of failure can generally be attributed to a lack of uniformity
in the compacted backfill material. It is critical that such operations be carefully monitored for
compliance.

Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract for any special requirements. Verify and
understand the requirements for excavation and the class and quality of backfill material
specified. Take cross-sections and profiles, as needed, for verification.
Payment Factors. Upon receipt of the Contract Plans, consider developing a payment factor for
each structure (i.e., factor = total trench volume divided by total length of structure). If, for
example, an installed pipe differs from the plans in length but not in cross-section, the factor
can be used to quickly adjust final pay quantities.
Staking. Check stakes for any irregularities.
Structure Inspection. Compare the Contract Plans to the site. Inspect and note the condition of
the structure. Make certain that structural concrete has attained the minimum required
strength before backfilling.
Unsuitable Materials. Verify that unsuitable materials have been properly excavated and
removed. Document the location, quantity, and disposition of the material.
Embankment. Embankment must be completed, where required, for structures located above
natural ground.
Excavation Limits. Check excavated limits, dimensions, and grades. Document quantities.
Trenching. OSHA has strict regulations regarding the provision of shoring in trench operations.
As required by Section 107 of the Standard Specifications, such operations are entirely the
responsibility of the Contractor. Verify that shoring and side slope treatments are being
installed where required.
Base of Excavation. The base of excavation must be firm and comply with specified
requirements. Check the base to ensure it has been properly drained and prepared for any
placement of concrete.
200-18
Earthwork
Pipe. Check the adequacy of the pipe bedding and bed treatment, especially where rock is
present. Check the direction of flow, camber, cradles, etc. Pushing the pipe out of line or
raising the pipe off its bed during backfilling is unacceptable. Pay particular attention to the
backfill material. Direct contact with rock greater than two inches may cause failure in steel
pipe.
Compaction. Use extreme caution when backfilling and compacting. Stress uniformity. Verify
material lifts, moisture, and the compaction operation for compliance. Do not exceed optimum
moisture content. Helical pipe has been known to fail where A-6 and A-7 soils are used. Note
any quantities that are not consistent with the Contract.
Hazards. During excavation and backfill operations, protruding structures and surface cavities
pose significant hazards to workers and equipment. Check that these types of hazards are
clearly marked to prevent mishaps and equipment damage.
200-19
Earthwork
SECTION 207 TOPSOIL

207.1 GENERAL
Topsoil obtained from below original ground level in fill sections will increase the quantity of
embankment material required to complete construction. Topsoil obtained from cut sections
will reduce the material available with which to construct the embankment.

Consider the following guidelines before the topsoil operation begins:
Source/Approval. Verify the source and prior approval of the material.
Slope/Depth. Existing slopes must be acceptable. Note the depth desired for topsoil.
Stockpiling. Verify if stockpiled topsoil is a part of the Contract.
Consider the following guidelines during the topsoil operation:
Objectionable Material. Check for the proper removal of debris, roots, heavy clay, hard clods,
brush, toxic substances, and stones larger than six inches from the area requiring topsoil. Check
topsoil at the site for the presence of State noxious weeds. If State listed noxious weeds, seed,
or reproductive vegetative plant parts are present, reject the topsoil. Management controls
may be required.
Tilling/Scarification. Verify that tilling or scarification is being performed at the specified

depth. Check for cross-tilling, where required. Ensure that topsoil is not applied over untilled
or unscarified areas.
Distribution. Check that the Contractor is evenly distributing the topsoil at the specified depth.
Compaction. Check the acceptability of the compaction operation. Over-compaction is

unacceptable. Pre-compaction will generally become unnecessary when topsoil is obtained
from the roadway.
Grading. Check grades and make certain provision is made for adequately draining surface
water, especially away from buildings and other improved structures. Check the finished grade
for conformance and tolerance.
200-20
Earthwork
Seeding Considerations. Verify light rolling, fine grading, raking, and depth of tillage. Observe
whether there are excessive clods in seedbeds. Determine the need for discing and harrowing
to provide an acceptable seedbed.
Check the Stormwater Management Plan of the Contract Plans for the Best Management
Practices for erosion and sedimentation control that is required upon completing the placement
of topsoil. See Section 208 for additional information.
200-21
Earthwork
SECTION 208 EROSION CONTROL

208.1 GENERAL
Erosion control work consists of the construction, installation, maintenance, and removal of
erosion control measures. This work prevents or minimizes erosion, sedimentation, and
pollution of State waters (including wetlands). Erosion and sedimentation control measures
will be constructed and maintained in accordance with the Best Management
Practices (BMPs)/control measures designated in the Stormwater Management Plan
(SWMP) for the project.
There are many resources available to the Engineer for assistance with erosion control.
Additional design information can be obtained from the CDOT Erosion Control and Stormwater
Quality Guide and the CDOT Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Field Guide. In addition, a
comprehensive checklist outlining permit compliance requirements that engineers need to
know for their projects is available on the MS4 Construction Program Website
https://www.codot.gov/programs/environmental/water-quality/stormwater-programs/
construction-sites-program/assets/cdot-project-level-ms4-construction-program-compliance-
checklist_draft_1-18-22.xlsx.
The Region Water Pollution Control Manager (RWPCM) is the primary day-to-day point of contact
for all issues relating to erosion control. Questions related to final stabilization may be directed
to the Landscape Architect representing the Region or to the Landscape Architecture Section
at CDOT headquarters. For urgent concerns, conflict resolution, or if the RWPCM is
unavailable, the Engineer may contact the Regional Planning Environmental Manager (RPEM).
Staff within the Headquarters Environmental Water Quality (WQ) section are also available for
questions relating to erosion control and water quality.
208.1.1 Erosion and Sedimentation Process
Erosion and sedimentation are natural processes whereby soil materials are detached and
transported from one location and deposited in another due to the action of water, wind, ice,
and gravity. Erosion can take many forms including sheet, rill, gully, and channel erosion. The
erosion potential of a particular area is determined by interrelated factors including soil
characteristics, vegetative cover, topography, and climate.
208.1.2 Water Quality Management Requirements
208.1.2.1 Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP)
The SWMP is included on all CDOT projects and will define the temporary construction control
measures required for regulatory compliance and water quality control. The SWMP must be
prepared by a CDOT-certified SWMP Preparer and reviewed and accepted by a CDOT
employed and certified SWMP Preparer. The RWPCM or CDOT Headquarters HQ staff will
conduct routine
200-22
Earthwork
storm water management inspections during construction and will provide guidance to the
Engineer during construction.
208.1.2.2 Control Measures
Best management practices are schedules of activities, avoidances, administrative

procedures, and structural and non-structural control measures that are used to control
erosion and sedimentation and minimize pollution of stormwater runoff both during and after
construction. Details on control measures, including construction and maintenance
requirements, are found in Section 208 of the Standard Specifications and Standard
Special Provisions (Standard Specifications apply for projects with a stormwater construction
permit [SCP], Standard Special Provisions are available for projects without an SCP).
Soil Stabilization Practices. Soil stabilization practices are temporary, interim, and permanent
treatments that stabilize and protect exposed earthen surfaces from erosion due to
precipitation, overland flow, and run-on conditions. The definitions and requirements of each
soil stabilization practice can be found in subsection 208.04(e) of the Standard Specifications
and Standard Special Provisions.
Design and construction criteria for specific control measures are presented in the CDOT Erosion
Control and Stormwater Quality Guide and the CDOT Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality
Field Guide, and in M&S Standards M-208-1 and M-216-1.
208.1.2.3 Erosion Control Management (ECM)
The number of days for Erosion Control Management (ECM) will be specified in the Contract and
is based on the Engineer’s estimated schedule to complete the project. See subsection 208.03
of the Standard Specifications and Standard Special Provisions for requirements.

An on-site Environmental Pre-construction Conference shall be held, see subsection 208.03 of

the Standard Specifications and Standard Special Provisions for requirements. An RWPCM
(Region Water Pollution Control Manager) should be invited to participate in the environmental
Pre-construction Conference. An example of an Environmental Pre-construction Conference
Agenda is in Appendix A. Consider the following guidelines before clearing and grubbing work
begins:
Schedule Review. Review the Contractor’s schedule for temporary and permanent erosion
control measures to ensure proper coordination with other construction activities. Emphasize
the importance of this schedule to the Contractor.
Training Requirements. Verify that the individual(s) assigned as the SWMP Administrator and
Erosion Control Inspector(s) met the training requirements specified for the Contract, see
200-23
Earthwork
subsection 208.3(c) of the Standard Specifications and Standard Special Provisions for
requirements.
Stormwater Management Plan. Review the SWMP and fully understand the types and locations
of the control measures that are to be employed. Verify that the Contractor fully understands
the requirements and intent of the SWMP. Any changes or modifications to the SWMP requested
by the Contractor shall be approved with Form 105. Approved 105s related to water quality
should be included in the SWMP.
Stormwater Construction Permit. Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment

(CDPHE) issues Colorado Discharge Permit System Stormwater Construction Permits (CDPS- SCP)
for all projects with disturbance equal to or greater than one acre. Both CDOT and the
Contractor will be co-permittees on the CDPS-SCP before construction begins.
Consider the following guidelines during the inspection of erosion control work:
SWMP. The SWMP Administrator shall maintain a SWMP as required by Section 208.03(c) of the
Standard Specifications and Standard Special Provisions.
Installation Review. Review the installation of the control measures closely, and document the
appropriate pay quantities on CDOT Form 266 – Inspector’s Progress Report.
Inspection. The Contractor’s ECM staff shall routinely inspect the control measures to ensure
they are functioning as intended. The minimum formal inspection frequency can be found in
subsection 208.03(c)2 of the Standard Specifications and Standard Special Provisions.
Sedimentation. Sediment buildup behind erosion control features shall be routinely removed by
the Contractor. Check control measures to ensure that sediment is being removed as required.
See subsection 208.04(f) of the Standard Specifications and Standard Special Provisions for
requirements.
Soil Stabilization. The Contractor shall conduct temporary, interim, summer and winter, along
with permanent stabilization measures as site conditions allow. See subsection 208.04(e) of
the Standard Specifications and Standard Special Provisions for requirements.
Unforeseen Conditions. The Contractor shall adaptively manage control measures to effectively
minimize polluted storm water discharges from the project site. This may require the
Contractor to install control measures that were not originally included in the SWMP, or to
modify the standard control measure details. CDPHE defines major SWMP modifications and
minor SWMP modifications in the Non-standard MS4 Permit (CDPS Permit No. COR070000).
CDOT is adopting these definitions. The RWPCM will review, and may either approve or reject,
200-24
Earthwork
all minor SWMP modifications during the next CDOT MS4 Inspection after the SWMP is modified.
For major SWMP modifications, the Project Engineer will follow the Contract Modification Order
(CMO) process described in this Construction Manual, or another relevant project delivery
manual. The Project Engineer should consult with the RWPCM to discuss how the CMO will
impact project compliance with MS4 Permit requirements. Any major changes or modifications
to the SWMP shall be approved with Form 105. Approved 105s related to water quality should
be included in the SWMP. Modified standard details or substantial modifications to the overall
SWMP strategy must be approved by the Engineer with recommendations by the RWPCM.
Modifications that affect the Permanent Stabilization Site Map shall be approved by the
Landscape Architect representing the Region.
Spill Response. Immediately following a spill, the Contractor shall implement their Spill
Response Plan. Colorado Water Quality Control Act, Regulation 5 CCR 1002-61 requires the
Contractor to report certain spills to CDPHE. If such a spill occurs, the Contractor shall report
the spill to the Engineer prior to CDPHE notification. The Engineer should contact the RWPCM
for additional assistance.
CDOT’s Municipal Separate Storm Sewer Systems (MS4) Permit COS000005. Headquarters and
Region water quality inspections are required for all projects with disturbance equal to or
greater than one acre as part of the CDOT’s MS4 compliance. The RWPCM and/or Headquarters
Water Quality section staff will conduct inspections, see subsection 208.09 of the Standard
Specifications for requirements.
Corrective Action Response Log. Following CDOT MS4 inspections, the RWPCM or Headquarters
Water Quality section staff will document any findings in the online Corrective Action Response
Log (CARL) system. Once the findings have been uploaded, the Engineer is responsible for
issuing Form 105s to the Contractor to rectify each finding. Form 105s associated with water
quality inspection findings must be issued through the CARL system. The Contractor shall
correct each finding within the timeframe defined in subsection 208.09 to avoid liquidated
damages, work stoppage or other enforcement authorized under subsection 208.09. Once the
required corrective action has been taken, the Contractor’s SWMP Administrator will be
responsible for documenting the corrective action in CARL. If the Contractor provides the
documentation, the Engineer must approve or reject it within CARL. For information and CARL
access, contact your RWPCM. Access the appropriate CARL at the following links:
http://vdtdescan.dot.state.co.us/escan/corrective_action_log/index.aspx or
https://2nform.com/.
Enforcement of Regulatory Permits and Contract Requirements. The enforcement of the CDOT
Specifications with respect to water quality is regulated by CDOT’s MS4 Permit. See subsection
208.09 of the Standard Specifications for requirements. The following flow chart outlines the
MS4 permit enforcement escalation stages and the deferment request option the Contractor
has within the first 24 hours of the initial notice of failure to perform.
200-25
Earthwork
Figure 200 - 1
200-26
Earthwork
Consider the following guidelines after construction:
Removal of Temporary Installations. Upon completion of the project, temporary erosion and
sediment control features must be removed by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer,
unless biodegradable or otherwise specified by the Engineer.
Partial Acceptance Walkthrough. (Discussed in section 105.21(a)) The Engineer should set up a
walkthrough with Region environmental personnel and CDOT Maintenance (or the post
construction establishment phase contractor or group). Note the location of any erosion and
sediment control measures that will require future maintenance or corrective measure and
subsequent removal. If determined necessary, the Engineer should coordinate with
Maintenance for further inspections to confirm corrective work has been completed.
When using the CDPS General Permit for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction
Activity (CDPS-SCP) Transfer to Maintenance Punch List, ensure that all questions, except those
listed under the section “Questions for PE/ECM Staff”, are answered “no” or have a corrective
work completed associated in the comment section. The corrective action must be completed
by the Contractor prior to permit transfer.
Inspections. The Contractor is required to continue inspections until project Final Acceptance.
Form 1176 or 1177 (Stormwater Field Inspection Report - Post Construction) must be used
to record these inspections.
Closure of Permit. The Engineer will contact the RPEM and RWPCM for the project review
to close the permit. The RPEM and RWPCM can check with CDPHE for the most up to date
guidance to clarify options available to permitees to achieve final stabilization at construction
sites.
200-27
Earthwork
SECTION 209 WATERING AND DUST PALLIATIVES

209.1 GENERAL
Water typically is used on projects for such purposes as compaction, seeding, sodding, planting,
transplanting, and dust control. Where paid for separately, a complete record of the quantities
of water used must be maintained.

Consider the following guidelines before construction begins:
Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract with regard to application rate and
any special requirements of the project.
Source Approval. Check to verify that the source of material has been properly approved.
Haul Trucks/Quantities. Establish the method of measuring and documenting quantities.

Establish truck identifications, determine, and record the capacity of each haul truck to be
used on the project for load count and documentation purposes.
Water Meters. Obtain the necessary water meter certifications in accordance with subsection
209.02 of the Standard Specifications. Retain these certifications in the project records. Ensure
that meters are as close to the distribution point as practical. Verify that the outfall pipe from
the meter is full and operating under the required pressure. Note any leaks.
Soil Classification/Application. The Project Inspector and the Project Engineer should discuss
the soil classifications, required application rate, and equipment operation. Application must
be uniform. Be alert to small and remote areas that are difficult to water.
Consider the following guidelines during construction:
Runoff/Ice. Note the presence and approximate quantity of runoff when prewetting. In cold
weather, watch for excessive ice buildup.
Small Areas. Check small and remote areas to ensure they are not missed. Moisture content in
the soil material must be uniform.
200-28
Earthwork
Verify Calibration and Quantities. Verify the calibration of equipment and the quantities
reported. Watch for loads being spread or dumped in unauthorized places. Compare daily totals
with daily production and note any wasting. Immediately investigate unexplained variations.
Pay particular attention to locations where water has ponded and where excessive runoff has
caused erosion. Areas of ponding indicate possible problems with the finished subgrade. These
problem areas could be either a design deficiency or a deficiency on the Contractor’s part.
Investigate these situations because such areas may need mitigation with temporary erosion
control treatments (see Section 208).
200-29
Earthwork
SECTION 210 RESET STRUCTURES

210.1 GENERAL
Unserviceable material will be replaced with new material when the Project Engineer
determines that this is necessary. New material required for this pay item will be paid for in
accordance with subsection 109.04(b) of the Standard Specifications. Guardrail and signposts
are two of the most common items requiring new material and/or hardware where reset. Make
certain that the items needing replacement were not damaged by Contractor personnel.

Consider the following guidelines before barriers (e.g., guardrail, concrete barriers, transitions,
and end treatments) are reset or installed:
1. Stakes. Check that stakes are set in their proper location.
2. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract and become familiar with the
installation requirements of the particular type of guardrail being reset or installed.
Also, note any requirements for concrete barrier, transitions, and end treatments. Note
any peculiar material requirements.
3. Materials. Verify the condition of existing and new materials. The materials must be
clean, sound, and serviceable. Verify that the Contractor has furnished the necessary
Mill Test Reports and that hardware meets specified requirements. Check the adequacy
of any shop bent rail. Verify that concrete and reinforcing steel for concrete barriers
meet specified requirements.
Consider the following guidelines during the resetting or installation of barriers:
1. Storage and Handling. Materials and hardware must be properly stored and handled to
avoid damage. Verify the proper repair and recoating of damaged material. Review and
verify compliance with the storage provisions of the Contract. Verify proper disposal of
unusable materials and the storage and safekeeping of salvable materials.
2. Posts. Ensure that posts of different types are segregated by groups. If a post has been
cut, check that the surface has been properly treated. Make certain that voids under
posts are filled with concrete mixture, where required. With respect to meeting
Contract requirements, consider the following additional factors when inspecting posts:
200-30
Earthwork
a. type of posts and blockouts required (wood or steel);
b. laboratory inspection requirements for wood posts;
c. post and blockout dimensions;
d. procedures and tolerance for setting posts with respect to rail height;
e. backfilling requirements (i.e., material and procedure);
f. required treatment for cut posts; and
g. requirements for nailing blockouts in place.
3. Unserviceable Items. The Contractor may be reimbursed for furnishing new material for
reset items that are not usable. Make sure that damaged items are not the fault of the
Contractor. Such damaged items will be restored, repaired, or replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
4. Rail Height. It is critical to check that the height of rail is being reset to that specified
in the Contract Plans.
5. Protection of Traffic. Verify that the Contractor is providing adequate protection to the
traveling public from sections that are not complete. Check that installation proceeds
in the direction specified. Verify the proper direction of rail lapping. At the end of the
workday, check that rail ends have been properly addressed.
6. Assembly. Verify compliance with the Contract Plans and Specifications. Check washers,
bolts, and rail horizontal and vertical alignment. Check that bolts extend beyond the
nuts and are being securely tightened. Verify that the rail is being installed in a smooth,
continuous vertical and horizontal alignment.
7. Deadmen. Where deadmen are required, verify proper installation.
8. Concrete Barriers. Consider the following during the inspection of concrete barrier
installation or resetting:
a. Concrete Finish. Inspect the finishing of the concrete for compliance.
b. Lift Holes. Verify that lift holes in precast sections are being filled with approved
material where required.
c. Trench/Base. Check trench construction for cast-in-place barriers, or the base

for precast barriers, for compliance with the Contract Plans.
200-31
Earthwork
d. Alignment. Check the longitudinal alignment of the barrier with a 10-foot straight
edge for conformance.
e. Transition. Verify the connection between the concrete barrier and the guardrail
for compliance. Different types may be specified.
9. Reflectors. Check that the reflector tabs are being installed as specified.
200-32
Earthwork
SECTION 212 SEEDING, FERTILIZER, AND SODDING

212.1 GENERAL
Seed, fertilizing, and sodding are specified on projects for both landscaping and erosion and
sedimentation control purposes. Contact the Landscape Architect assigned to the Region for
further information.
212.1.1 Landscape Applications
For landscapes to be successful, proper topsoil preparation, adequate fertilization, healthy

plants and quality seed material, judicious watering, and proper follow-up care must be
performed.

Consider the following guidelines before seeding, fertilizing, and sodding are performed:
1. Seed Material. Verify the mixture, names, purity, germination, weed content, and date
of last test on seed labels for compliance. Retain seed labels and vendor statements for
the project records. Verify certification requirements (i.e., Contractor furnished,
laboratory tests). Verify that the pure-live-seed content has been determined based on
the formula in the Contract Specifications. Check condition of seed for water, insect,
and mold damage. Enforce the provisions of the Contract with respect to rejection.
Ensure the mixture is free from weeds included on the State Department of Agriculture
and the State and county noxious weeds list (see Section 200.2.13).
2. Fertilizer Material. Check the bag label for compliance with respect to mixture type
(e.g., pellet or granular), percent, and class. Retain labels for project records. Check
certification requirements (e.g., Contractor furnished, soil tests). Verify that the
fertilizer is delivered in unopened containers.
3. Mulch Material. Where mulch is required, see Section 213.
4. Plant Material. Where plants are required, see Section 214.
5. Sod Material. Verify from grower certificates that sod is of the correct species. Retain
certificates for the project records. Make certain the rectangular sections of sod have
uniform widths, retain native soil on roots, and are the specified thickness. Sod should
be placed within 24 hours of being cut. Check to ensure sod is maintained in moist
condition.
200-33
Earthwork
6. Seeding Coverage. Check coverage of seeding.
7. Surface Preparation. Spot check the prepared soil to ensure that the top four inches or
specified depth has been prepared as required.
8. Application Rate. Verify the application rate of seed, fertilizer, and water for the
operation.
9. Seasonal and Geographical Location Considerations. Verify the season of the year and
the geographical location for compliance with respect to seeding, planting, etc. The
Project Engineer may waive specified requirements. Do not permit seeding or planting
on consistently frozen ground.
10. Watering/Maintenance. If specified, ensure that the irrigation or sprinkler system is

completed and inspected.
Consider the following guidelines during seeding, fertilizing and sodding:
1. Application Rates. Check for even distribution and rate of application for seed,
fertilizer, water, etc. Check coverage of seed in remote areas.
2. High Wind. Watch for loss of seed and fertilizer in high winds and, as necessary, postpone
application.
3. Quantity Checks. Check total quantities of seed or fertilizer used against the acreage
covered. Retain empty bags until the number is recorded.
4. Drill Seeding. Verify that drill seeding is being performed at right angles to the slope.
The seed should be drilled or sown to provide a 0.25-inch cover.
5. Fertilizer Treatment. Verify that the fertilizer is being worked into the top four inches
of soil.
6. Mulching, Weed Free. Where mulch is required, see Section 213.
7. Mulch Tackifier. Ensure that the application rate is in accordance with the Contract
Specifications.
8. Planting. Where plants are required, see Section 214.
9. Sod. Sod is to be fertilized after laying is completed and before soaking.
200-34
Earthwork
10. Maintenance. Seeded areas should be inspected frequently. Areas with failures must be
repaired and reseeded.
Check the Contract Specifications for landscape maintenance requirements.
200-35
Earthwork
SECTION 213 MULCHING

213.1 GENERAL
Mulching is specified on projects for both landscaping and erosion and sedimentation control
purposes. In the context of erosion and sedimentation control, mulching is a soil stabilization
Best Management Practice that protects the soil surface from raindrop impact and overland
flow or runoff. Mulching generally consists of the application of plant residues or other suitable
material to the soil surface. Typical mulching material includes straw, hay, and wood cellulose
fiber and must be weed free. Contact the Landscape Architect assigned to the Region for
assistance.
213.1.1 Material Certification
Proper weed-free certification must accompany all mulch material before it is used within State
right of way. The purpose of this certification is to prevent State noxious weeds from entering
the State as discussed in Section 200.2.13. Verification of compliance is performed through
visual inspection. All bales shall have one of the following, to indicate material acceptability:
1. one of the bale ties is orange and blue twine;
2. one of the bale ties is specially produced, shiny galvanized wire; or
3. a Regional Forage Certification Program Tag, with appropriate certification number, is

attached to the bale.
Do not allow the Contractor to unload any quantity of straw or hay or remove any identifying
twine, wire, or tag before inspection by the Project Engineer. Also, ensure that the Contractor
supplies the transit certificate that has been signed by both the grower and a duly authorized
representative of the Colorado Department of Agriculture.

Consider the following guidelines before the weed-free mulching operation begins:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract for the areas to be treated and
any special requirements
2. Slopes/Staking. Verify slope adequacy and any staking for the areas to be mulched.
Ensure the Contractor fully understands the limits of mulching.
200-36
Earthwork
3. Mulching Method. Understand the proper operation of the mulching method that will be
used (e.g., mechanically crimped, hydraulic).
4. Materials. Verify that the proper type of mulch has been provided. Check mulch for
freshness. It should be expandable and springy. Reject mulch that is discolored, brittle,
rotten, moldy, or decayed. At a minimum, 50 percent of the mulch, by weight, should
be 10 inches or more in length. Retain supplier certificates indicating dry weight for the
project records. Hay should consist of native grasses free of State noxious weeds. Straw
should consist of clean cereal shafts that are free of weeds that are named on the
Noxious Weeds List. Tackifier will be a free flowing non-corrosive powder without
mineral filler, recycled cellulose fiber, clays, or other substances that will inhibit plant
growth.
5. Application Rate. Verify the specified rate of application for the type of mulch material
and the method of application to be used.
Consider the following guidelines where mulching is performed:
1. Application. Applied mulch depth should not be less than one inch and not more than
two inches. The mulch should be uniformly applied in accordance with the Contract
specifications. Compare weight certificates against the area mulched to determine if
the mulch was applied at the specified rate.
2. Anchoring. Check method of securing mulch to the ground and depth of anchoring. Hay
and straw mulch should be anchored to the soil surface using a tackifier, blanket, or
net, or with a mulch crimping machine. Mechanical anchoring, or crimping, is preferred
and recommended for slopes flatter than 2:1. Blankets or nets on slopes steeper than
2:1 should be anchored to the soil.
3. Tackifier Slurry/Application. Tackifier used for anchoring is generally applied in a slurry

with water and wood fiber (e.g., 100 pounds of powder/150 pounds of fiber/700 gallons
of water). Application rate of the powder should be between 80 to 200 pounds per acre.
4. Seeding. Mulch should be applied immediately after seeding.
5. Mechanical Method. Consider the following factors where a mechanical application

method is used:
a. uniformity of application (i.e., hay, straw);
b. crimping method;
200-37
Earthwork
c. application within 24 hours of seeding; and
d. areas designated for burlap or blanketing.
6. Hydraulic Method. Consider the following factors where a hydraulic application method
is used:
a. quantity proportions in slurry tank;
b. uniformity of application; and
c. mulching area free from surface water.
7. Maintenance. Inspect frequently and reapply mulch where necessary.
Check the Contract Specifications for maintenance requirements.
200-38
Earthwork
SECTION 214 PLANTING

214.1 GENERAL
Planting is specified on projects for landscaping, erosion, and sedimentation control purposes.
Contact the Landscape Architect assigned to the Region for needed assistance.

Consider the following guidelines before the planting operation begins:
1. Planting Layout. Review the planting layout that is included in the Contract.
2. Utilities. Verify that planting locations have been properly coordinated with existing
utilities and any utilities that will be adjusted or relocated. Also consider any proposed
utilities.
3. Plant Types. Check that plants have been properly labeled regarding species and variety
with respect to the requirements of the Contract Plans. Verify that the specified types
and sizes are provided according to the Plant List in the Contract.
4. Plant Condition. Check quality and size against the requirements in American Standards
for Nursery Stock, Contract Plan tabulations, and the Contract Specifications. Verify
that the plants supplied are healthy with well-developed branch and root systems.
Reject all plants on which roots have become dry or damaged. Check foliage for wilting
or dryness. Observe any obvious signs of insect or other damage. Verify balled and
burlapped plants for a solid ball that conforms to specified dimensions. Check for
broken, cracked, soft or pliable balls. Such types of damage are general grounds for
rejection.
5. Certification. Check plants, trees, shrubs, vines, and ground cover for compliance.
Check the certificates of inspection for plants, trees, and shrubs (e.g., inspected at
nursery, Contractor-furnished samples). Do not accept plants without certificates.
Retain certificates for the project records.
6. Season. Check that the planting will be performed during the appropriate season. Verify
whether the plants should be balled and burlapped or container grown.
Consider the following guidelines during the planting operation:
1. Shipping/Handling. Check that the shipping and handling of plants are meeting specified
requirements. Check for any damage caused by shipping and handling.
200-39
Earthwork
2. Plant Location. Check that trees and shrubs are planted according to the Contract Plans,
especially with regard to the required roadway clear zone and sight distance. Check for
any conflicts with utilities or underground and overhanging structures, and have plants
relocated where necessary.
3. Ground/Plant Preparation. Verify that the soil has been properly prepared with the
proper type and quantity of soil conditioner and fertilizer. Check that the type of
material used for this purpose has been properly approved. Check depth and diameter
of planting hole and spacing in beds. Topsoil and soil preparation are generally rototilled
prior to planting ground cover type plants.
4. Plant Preparation. Observe the preparation of plants. Plants must be prepared according
to specified requirements (e.g., soaked, unwrapped). Pruning must be performed using
good tree-surgery practices.
5. Backfill. Check that plants are properly backfilled with the specified soil conditioner
and fertilizer. Saucers are to be covered with approved moist wood chip mulch.
6. Staking. Deciduous and coniferous trees generally should be staked for stabilization
purposes. Verify that trees are staked as specified. Verify staking locations based on
prevailing wind direction. Check that the operation is being performed without damage
to the tree (e.g., damage from guy wires), and that the tree trunks are being wrapped
as required.
7. Maintenance. Verify that the Contractor provided for watering and maintenance of the
plants as specified in the Contract.
Check the Contract Specifications for maintenance requirements.
Landscape Establishment Incentive:
When a force account item for Landscape Establishment Incentive is included in the contract,
the dollar amount of the incentive will be transferred to a CDOT escrow account prior to project
final acceptance. Project Engineer will contact the Finals Administrator and the Landscape
Architect assigned to the Region for assistance when the Landscape Incentive provision is
included in the project plans.
Landscape Establishment Incentive
1. The Landscape Establishment period begins upon receipt of the written “Notice of
Landscape Completion” from the Engineer and lasts for a period specified in the 214
Landscape Establishment.
2. Project Engineer transfers dollar amount in the Force Account item- Landscape
Establishment Incentive to the CDOT escrow account. Dollar amount is based on the
Engineer’s Estimate cost of the Item 214 pay items included in the incentive.
200-40
Earthwork
3. Ensure that dead plant material is removed within 30 days after notice during the
Landscape Establishment period.
4. Conduct Landscape Establishment Inspection with Contractor and CDOT representatives

during the time period specified in the specification.
5. Project Engineer determines amount of Incentive based on the results of the inspection.
6. Project Engineer notifies the Finals Administrator who will coordinate with Project
Accounting to pay the authorized amount of Incentive (if any).
7. Contractor replaces plant material determined to be unacceptable (dead or extremely

distressed) at end of Landscape Establishment Period.
200-41
Earthwork
SECTION 215 TRANSPLANTING

215.1 GENERAL
Transplanting is specified on projects for both landscaping and erosion and sedimentation
control purposes. Salvable trees and shrubs that can be transplanted to other locations on the
project will be designated in the Contract Plans. Contact the Landscape Architect assigned to
the Region for needed assistance.
Consider the following guidelines before the transplanting operation begins:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract for any special requirements of
the operation. Verify plant dormancy requirements before transplanting.
2. Marking/Staking. Verify that trees and shrubs to be transplanted have been properly
marked and that information has been communicated to the Contractor. Fully
understand those plants that are to remain (i.e., marked for protection, trimming,
targets for grubbing).
3. Utilities. Verify that transplanting locations have been properly coordinated with
existing utilities and utilities that will be adjusted or relocated. Also consider any
proposed utilities.
4. Season. Check that the transplanting will be performed during the appropriate season.
Consider the following guidelines during the transplanting operation:
1. Roots. Verify that the root system of the plants is being properly pruned, and that the
minimum diameter of the balled root system is being maintained.
2. Spraying. Check that plants are sprayed as specified in the Contract. Pay particular
attention to the type of spray being applied and any special precautionary measures
that are required. Spraying should not be performed in high winds.
3. Pits. Verify that plant pits are the appropriate size. Check that trees remain in the
machine spade ready for transplant and that the pits are sufficient in dimension for the
machine-dug root ball.
4. Backfill. Check that backfill is being properly worked and watered.
200-42
Earthwork
5. Water Basins. Verify that water basins are of appropriate capacity and filled with water
at proper intervals.
6. Saucers. As specified, check that saucers are being covered with approved moist wood
chip mulch.
7. Fertilizer. Check that the type and application rate of fertilizer conforms to specified
requirements.
8. Schedule Considerations. Plants should generally be transplanted the same day they are
removed from the ground.
9. Maintenance. Check that transplanted trees and shrubs are being maintained properly
and watered as specified in the Contract.
Transplanted trees shall be subject to a 180-day maintenance period. Guying material shall be
removed after the 180-day establishment period
200-43
Earthwork
SECTION 216 SOIL RETENTION COVERING

216.1 GENERAL
Soil retention covering (“blankets”) is typically specified on projects for the purpose of erosion
and sedimentation control. In this context, soil retention covering are used to stabilize the soil
and protect it from raindrop impact and overland flow or runoff. Areas to be treated will be
designated in the Contract Plans. Contact the Landscape Architect assigned to the Region for
assistance.

Consider the following guidelines before soil retention covering is placed:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract for the type of material to be
used and any special requirements of the operation.
2. Marking/Staking. Verify that areas to be treated have been properly marked or staked.
Ensure the Contractor fully understands the limits of treatment.
During construction, verify that blanket material conforms to specified requirements and is
placed in the areas designated for treatment. Verify the correct placement of blankets with
respect to unrolling and overlapping requirements. Ensure that the blankets are being
maintained properly.
200-44
Earthwork
SECTION 217 HERBICIDE TREATMENT

217.1 GENERAL
Herbicide treatment is typically specified to eradicate or otherwise control plant material on
the project right of way or control weeds that are listed on the Noxious Weeds List. Areas to
be treated will be designated in the Contract Plans. Contact the Landscape Architect assigned
to the Region for assistance.

Prior to construction, the Region Maintenance Noxious Weed Coordinator should be notified of
the location and time when spraying will be performed. Consider the following guidelines before
herbicide treatment is performed:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract for the type of herbicide to be
used and any special requirements.
2. Marking/Staking. Verify that the areas to be treated have been properly marked or
staked. Ensure the Contractor fully understands the limits of treatment.
3. Safety Precautions. Fully understand the safety precautions for the particular herbicide
to be used. Verify that the Contractor understands these requirements.
4. Material/Labels. Check that the type of herbicide provided meets the specified
requirements. Verify the herbicide is properly labeled and the Contractor has furnished
the necessary label information. Retain the label information in the project files.
5. Licensing. Verify that the Contractor has furnished the required documentation
regarding applicator licensing. Retain this documentation in the project records.
Consider the following guidelines during herbicide treatment:
1. Mixing/Application. Verify that the Contractor mixes and applies the herbicide in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Weather Conditions. Verify that the weather conditions are appropriate for application.
Herbicide should not be applied during high winds. Review the manufacturer’s
recommendations for adverse weather conditions.
3. Overspray. Check that the Contractor’s methods of controlling overspray meets

specified requirements
200-45
Earthwork
200-46
Earthwork
SECTION 250 ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH, AND SAFETY

MANAGEMENT
250.1 GENERAL
This section provides environmental, health, and safety management considerations related to
contaminants that may be encountered on the project. Section 107 and Section 250 of the
Standard Specifications govern the Contractor’s obligations and legal responsibilities for
related topics.
250.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL/HAZARDOUS WASTE

250.2.1 Governing Specifications and Procedural Directives
Where hazardous materials and hazardous wastes are encountered, Section 250 of the Standard
Specifications will govern the actions and activities of all construction personnel. Review CDOT
Procedural Directive 89.2 – Medical Monitoring for Hazardous Materials Workers to identify
which CDOT personnel assigned to the project will require medical monitoring, and become
familiar with the monitoring procedures. Contact the CDOT Safety Officer of the Office of
Transportation Safety for assistance.
250.2.2 Site Investigation
If hazardous materials and/or hazardous waste have been identified within the proposed limits
of construction, such areas will be designated in the Contract. Verify that the Contractor has
been properly informed with respect to site location and special requirements. Check that such
areas are clearly marked.
250.2.3 Importance of Records and Documentation
It is important that complete and accurate records and documentation be maintained

throughout the course of processing a hazardous material or hazardous waste discovery. Written
notes, reports, detailed cost records, photographs, and videos all should be considered. Such
records will assist CDOT in cost recovery and possible litigation.
250.2.4 Create Notification Form for Emergency Response
When the project first starts, the Project Engineer will prepare a list of contact names and
telephone numbers to use in the event of a hazardous material/hazardous waste situation.
Figure 200A presents a form for the recommended flow of notification. Complete and post this
form in an obvious location within the project field office.
250.2.5 Discovery During Construction
Where hazardous materials are discovered during construction, pay particular attention to the
encounter and treat each situation uniquely. Use common sense, remain calm, and stay alert.
200-47
Earthwork
Use the procedural flowchart in Figure 200B to mitigate and contain the situation and obtain
the needed assistance from hazardous-material experts and specialists (e.g., CDOT Staff, CDOT
Hazardous Materials Consultants, State and local health officials). The following sections loosely
correlate with the steps in the flowchart.
250.2.5.1 Potential Discovery Situations
Be aware of the possibility of encountering a hazardous material/hazardous waste situation

during construction. Upon discovery of a potential hazardous substance, do not open any closed
container or otherwise attempt to identify the substance. Halt work, and follow the flowchart
procedures in Figure 200B. Immediately notify the proper authorities (see Section 250.2.5.4).
200-48
Earthwork
PROJECT NUMBER: LOCATION:
PROJECT ENGINEER
REGION PLANNING AND ENVIRONMENTAL RESIDENT ENGINEER

MANAGER
REGION RIGHT OF WAY MANAGER

REGION SAFETY OFFICER (RSO)
CDOT STAFF RIGHT OF WAY MANAGER
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH AND SAFETY CDOT ATTORNEY GENERAL
CDOT HAZARDOUS MATERIALS CONSULTANT
EMERGENCY RESPONSE PHONE NUMBERS:
Emergency Notification (where available) ………………………………………… 911
State Patrol – Dispatcher (24 Hours) ……………………………………………… (303) 239-4501
State Patrol – Local (24 Hours) …………………………………………………….._ _
Figure 200 - 2 Notification Form for Contact Numbers for Hazardous Materials Situations
Encountered During Construction
200-49
Earthwork
Underground storage tank or contaminated
soil and/or groundwater discovered.
STOP WORK IN THE AREA.

Notify the Project Engineer
Secure Area.
Contact the Region Resident Engineer &

Region Planning and Environmental
Manager.
Engage CDOT Hazardous Materials

Consultant to sample, analyze, and
recommend remedial alternatives.
Can Hazardous Materials avoidance be Yes Issue written directive to

achieved? Contractor.
No
CDOT Hazardous Materials Consultant
Underground Storage develops Health and Safety Plan Soil/groundwater is
Tank Discovered. contaminated.
Are Underground Storage Yes

Consultant removes
Tank contents hazardous?
tank contents.
Consultant provides
recommendations for
remediation through
Removal of Underground Storage Tank per coordination with
regulations. regulatory agencies.
Consultant performs soil sampling of

Underground Storage Tank Excavation.
Tank removed and soil

sampling per
specifications.
Is soil in the Underground Storage Tank excavation contaminated?
No Yes
Backfill and continue Consultant determines extend of Remediation by CDOT

with construction. the problem and recommends Hazardous Materials
remediation Consultant.
Figure 200 - 3 Procedures for Hazardous Material/Hazardous Waste Situations Encountered

During Construction
200-50
Earthwork
1. Excavation. Hazardous substances could be encountered during excavation. Treat all

underground storage tanks, buried containers, and suspect soil and groundwater as
potential hazards. Obnoxious fumes, unusual odors, discolored soils, water surface
sheen, and visible fumes and smoke are key indicators.
2. Illegal Dumping. Be aware that hazardous materials could be illegally dumped within
the right of way during off-shift hours. Use common sense and collaborative judgment
to assess the nature of the encounter. Treat suspect containers and materials as
potential hazards.
3. Construction Mishaps. Construction personnel and equipment operations could

inadvertently rupture a natural gas or petroleum pipeline or cause a large fuel or
chemical spill. Treat such incidents as a hazardous-material situation.
250.2.5.2 Stopping Work
Upon discovery of a suspect substance, immediately notify the Project Engineer. A written
directive using Form 105 to stop work near the suspect substance will be issued to the
Contractor. This action is necessary to avoid health risks to all personnel at the site and the
general public. Health and safety take precedence over construction costs and delays. People
who have come into direct contact with suspect substances (e.g., skin contact, inhalation) or
exhibit adverse reactions should receive immediate attention by authorized medical personnel.
People who have been exposed to suspect substances also should be monitored for adverse
delayed reactions based on the recommendations of authorized medical personnel.
250.2.5.3 Securing the Area
After work has been stopped, the area surrounding the suspect substance must be secured to
prevent inadvertent or unauthorized access by personnel or the public. Treatments generally
consist of cordoning the area, installing temporary fencing, and/or rerouting traffic patterns.
Specific actions will depend on the scale, severity, and nature of each situation. In addition,
each situation will require appropriate administration of the Contract. After the area has been
properly secured, the Project Engineer should consider practical alternatives for the Contractor
to continue work on the project. If unavailable, document work delays, because Contractor
negotiations may be necessary.
250.2.5.4 Emergency Contact Notification
In a situation where an extremely hazardous or life-threatening substance is encountered,

immediately notify the following:
1. 911 Emergency Response (where available);
2. Colorado State Patrol 24-hour line at (303) 239-4501;
3. local fire department; and
200-51
Earthwork
4. Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Emergency Response Section

at (303) 756-4455.
A coordinated effort is necessary to properly address each hazardous material/ hazardous waste
situation. To provide continuity within the project, the Project Engineer should always be kept
informed. It is extremely important to maintain complete and accurate records (e.g., contacts
made, recommendations, decisions, planned and completed activities, schedules). Figure 200A
presents the minimum recommended notification procedures. Key contacts are as follows:
1. Project Engineer. After the Project Engineer has been notified, the Project Engineer
will contact the Region Resident Engineer and the Region Planning and Environmental
Manager. The Region Planning and Environmental Manager will provide guidance
regarding the handling of suspect hazardous materials. Do not permit suspect soils that
have been excavated to be rehandled unless otherwise recommended by the Region
Planning and Environmental Manager.
2. Region Planning and Environmental Manager. The Region Planning and Environmental
Manager will contact CDOT Hazardous Waste Staff in the Property Management Unit of
the Maintenance and Operations Branch. As needed, the Region Planning and
Environmental Manager will contact:
a. CDOT Safety Officer in Office of Transportation Safety/Statewide Safety Officer;
b. CDOT Environmental Programs Branch of the Division of Transportation

Development;
c. Emergency Response Section of the Colorado Department of Public Health and

Environment; and
d. other State and local health and regulatory agencies, as needed.
3. Region Resident Engineer. The Region Resident Engineer or, as directed, the Project
Engineer will contact the Region Right of Way Manager for assistance in investigating
the substance encroaching private property, originating source of the material, and
ownership.
4. Region Right of Way Manager. The Region Right of Way Manager will coordinate with the
CDOT Staff Right of Way Manager in Right of Way Programs of the Project Development
Branch to determine if it is necessary to contact the CDOT Office of the Attorney General
with regard to liability, cost recovery, and documentation issues. If a claim against the
State Petroleum Fund is probable, contact Environmental Programs for guidance on
record maintenance for the reimbursement application.
5. Other Notifications. Other notifications may be necessary as follows:
a. Office of Public Relations. The CDOT Office of Public Relations should be notified
in the event of any situation adversely affecting the public or if media
200-52
Earthwork
involvement is imminent. During office hours call (303) 757-9228 and after office
hours call the Region Public Relations contact.
b. FHWA. If the project has Federal oversight, inform the FHWA

Design/Environmental Engineer of the situation.
For additional information, see the CDOT Guide to Hazardous Materials Response on State
Highways, and contact the CDOT Safety Officer of Office of Transportation Safety.
250.2.5.5 Hazardous Material/Hazardous Waste Consultants
The Department maintains Consultant contracts for hazardous material/hazardous waste

services. The Project Engineer and the Regional Planning and Environmental Manager will
determine the scope of services required and whether a Consultant is needed. If needed, the
next available candidate, not having a conflict of interest, will be selected, and the Project
Engineer will initiate procurement with the Center for Procurement Services. To better assess
the feasibility of complete or partial avoidance of the hazardous material/hazardous waste
encounter, the Department will typically request recommendations from Consultants based on
risk assessment and feasibility studies of various alternatives.
250.2.5.6 Assessment of Avoidance Alternatives
Alternatives to completely or partially avoid the hazardous materials are preferred. The Project
Engineer, Region Planning and Environmental Manager, and Region Resident Engineer will
initially assess the feasibility of complete avoidance. As needed, CDOT Staff in the Project
Development Branch will assess the feasibility of design revisions, partial deletions of work,
and construction alternatives. CDOT will also consider the feasibility of terminating the
Contract based on the scope of the situation, the costs of other alternatives, the anticipated
magnitude of claim settlements, and the project’s significance to public safety and other
planned improvements. If complete avoidance is not feasible, alternatives for partial avoidance
will be considered to minimize health risks. Avoidance alternatives require the Contractor’s
Health and Safety Officer to prepare and follow a Health and Safety Plan, as governed by
Section 250 of the Standard Specifications.
If complete avoidance is selected, the Project Engineer will issue the Contractor a written
directive addressing changes to the project and revisions to the Contract. One copy of the
written directive should be forwarded to each of the following:
1. Region Resident Engineer,
2. Region Planning and Environmental Manager,
3. Region Right of Way Manager,
4. CDOT Staff Right of Way Manager,
5. CDOT Hazardous Waste Management Supervisor, and
200-53
Earthwork
6. other individuals as deemed appropriate.
Cost and delay issues will probably necessitate Contractor negotiations and may require a
change order. It is, therefore, important to develop and maintain complete and accurate
records. As needed, request a revised progress schedule from the Contractor to address the
changes to the project.
250.2.5.7 Health and Safety Plan Implementation
Based on the requirements of Section 250 of the Standard Specifications, the Contractor’s
Health and Safety Officer is responsible for preparing and implementing a Health and Safety
Plan to proceed with construction. The Health and Safety Plan, as well as the associated plan
for site investigation, must properly reflect the requirements of Federal, State, and local
regulatory agencies. Concurrence of the Chief Engineer and the FHWA Design/Environmental
Engineer also may be required before work proceeds. Development and implementation will
significantly involve the services of the CDOT Hazardous Material/Hazardous Waste Consultant
assigned to the project. The Project Engineer will prepare and forward a written directive to
the Contractor addressing specific requirements. Consider the following:
1. Site Investigation Plan. Prior to developing the Health and Safety Plan, the Contractor’s
Health and Safety Officer will prepare and implement a detailed work, sampling, and
analysis plan to characterize and define the horizontal and vertical limits of
contamination. The CDOT Hazardous Material/Hazardous Waste Consultant and the
Region Planning and Environmental Manager will review this plan and recommend
acceptance, revision, or rejection to the Project Engineer. Upon acceptance, the
investigative work will proceed. The CDOT Hazardous Material/Hazardous Waste
Consultant will oversee the work for compliance and review analytical reports prepared
by the Contractor’s personnel.
2. Health and Safety Plan. Based on the results of the site investigation, the Contractor’s
Health and Safety Officer will prepare a Health and Safety Plan to proceed with
construction. The Plan will indicate the necessary training of CDOT and Contractor
personnel. The CDOT Hazardous Material/Hazardous Waste Consultant will oversee
implementation and report instances of non-compliance immediately to the Project
Engineer.
3. Change Order. The Project Engineer is responsible for preparing the change order
necessary to address the implementation of Section 250 requirements.
250.2.6 Signature Authority for Manifests
Waste manifests (i.e., chain-of-custody forms) for hazardous materials and hazardous wastes
must be properly signed by authorized personnel. Ensure that a copy of the signed manifest is
forwarded to the CDOT Records Center with the appropriate project number and project code.
Either the Region Planning and Environmental Manager or his staff is qualified to sign manifests.
The project personnel are qualified to sign manifests if they have had proper and adequate
training in the disposal of hazardous materials and hazardous waste.
200-54
SECTION 300
BASES
300-1
Bases
SECTION 300 BASES

In terms of structural longevity and riding smoothness, overall pavement quality depends
primarily on the quality and uniformity of the material layers constructed under the surface
course. Subgrade, subbase, and base course materials must meet specified requirements and
must be properly and uniformly prepared, placed and compacted to adequately support the
loads of vehicular traffic. Deficiencies in subgrade, subbase, and base course construction will
invariably degrade the riding surface and cause a need for premature rehabilitation.
300.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

Section 203 of this Manual discusses roadbed excavation and embankment construction. The
resulting subgrade is the primary foundation of the total pavement structure; therefore, its
construction should be closely monitored. Examine the subgrade for soft spots, ruts, and grade
deficiencies. Such deficiencies must be corrected in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract. Consider the following general guidelines:
1. Low Areas. Low areas should be filled with a suitable subgrade material, regraded, and
compacted to target density. Pay particular attention to areas such as ruts. If not filled
and compacted with subgrade material, ruts will invariably be filled with base material,
and most compaction equipment will bridge over ruts. This bridging effect creates areas
that will fail to meet specified uniform density requirements.
2. High Areas. Pay particular attention to rocky areas above grade. It is unacceptable
practice to scalp these areas and reuse the resulting rocky material to fill low spots
further ahead in station. The rocky material produced by the scalping operation will be
poorly graded and will promote pavement failure. Rather, these areas should be
scarified to a depth sufficient to accommodate the required compacted thickness of
approved base course material.
3. Moisture Content. Pay particular attention to the moisture content of the subgrade
material placed for compaction. Uniform compaction to target density is critical but will
not be achieved if the material is either too wet or too dry.
See Section 306 and Section 307 of this Manual for additional information on subgrade
reconditioning and treatment.
300.2 BASE COURSE CONSTRUCTION

The base course, or subbase if specified, is a layer of material (e.g., bituminous mix, aggregate)
that is placed, graded, and compacted on top of the subgrade. Depending on the requirements
of the Contract Plans, more than one layer of base course material may be required. The base
300-2
Bases
course provides the pavement structure with a free-draining, non-frost-susceptible material

layer that distributes the traffic load from the surface course to the underlying subgrade.
Because the base course lies directly beneath the surface course, it is critical that construction
parameters be tightly controlled. Consider the following general guidelines:
1. Material Considerations. Check to ensure that the base course material meets the
requirements of the Contract Specifications in terms of type, gradation, and uniformity.
Reject substandard material based on the provisions of the Contract.
2. Thickness. Where applicable, lift thickness must not exceed the maximum specified for
the material being placed. Verify the total compacted thickness of the base course with
that specified in the typical sections of the Contract Plans.
3. Density. Check that the material is uniformly compacted to target density. Moisture
content greatly affects material consolidation and should be monitored as required.
Areas that fail to meet specified requirements must be reworked, compacted, and
verified for compliance.
4. Grade and Surface Tolerance. To ensure a smooth riding surface and a uniform depth of
surface course material, the final grade and cross-section of the base course must be
within allowable tolerance. It is unacceptable to adjust the thickness of the surface
course for making final adjustments to grade and cross-section.
See Section 304 of this Manual for additional information on aggregate base course construction.
300-3
Bases
SECTION 304 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

304.1 GENERAL
Aggregate base course is a graded aggregate material that is hauled, placed, and compacted as
a base course for the pavement structure. See Section 300.2 of this Manual for additional
information.

Before construction of the aggregate base course begins, consider the following:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract. Specifically note the allowable
lift thickness, total required depth, and cross slope required. Check the Project Special
Provisions for any changes to the Method of Measurement or Basis of Payment.
2. Material Requirements. Review the material requirements of the Contract Specifications

(e.g., gradation requirements) and the related tests and acceptance criteria. Gradation
requirements, in particular, may change on a project-to-project basis.
3. Scale/Weigher Certification (Tonnage Basis). Check to ensure that the commercial scale
and weigher have been properly certified.
4. Load Restrictions. Review the load restrictions on public facilities. See Appendix D for
applicable legal weight limits.
5. Equipment. Gather the necessary inspection equipment and be prepared to check lift
thickness, total depth, and surface tolerance.
6. Spread Yield. Review the method for checking the spread yield for placed base course
material. For instructions on calculating spread yields and yield factors, see the example
in Appendix B for Form 282 – Asphalt Paving Inspector Daily Report.
7. Subgrade/Subbase. Ensure that the cross slope, elevation, and alignment are correct.
Visually inspect the subgrade/subbase for soft spots, ruts, and grade deficiencies.
Ensure that the subgrade/subbase is prepared within allowable tolerance to properly
receive the required thickness of base course material. See Section 300.1 of this Manual
for additional information.
8. Staking. Spot check and verify that width and thickness have been properly staked.
300-4
Bases
9. Soil Survey. In areas where the subgrade may provide an unusually stable foundation
(e.g., rocky areas), consider requesting a soil survey to determine if the total thickness
of the aggregate base course can be effectively reduced without compromising the
integrity of the pavement structure.
Consider the following guidelines when inspecting the construction of aggregate base course:
1. Load Tickets (Tonnage Basis). Do not accept any load of material without receipt of a
properly completed and validated load ticket. Do not accept or sign a load ticket unless
the load was actually placed as specified. Do not accept load tickets from overweight
haul vehicles.
2. Material Quality. Verify that the material delivered meets specified criteria with regard
to gradation requirements, and ensure that samples are tested at the required
frequency. Poorly graded, oversize, and contaminated material (e.g., balls of clay) are
grounds for rejection.
3. Placement. Verify the uniformity of the aggregate material. Observe the material as it
is placed and spread for obvious signs of degradation (e.g., segregation, foreign
material, mixing with subgrade material). Take measurements, as needed, to verify
placement to the required width and depth. Check yield frequently to verify actual
quantities.
4. Compaction. Observe the compaction operation for obvious signs of improper operation.
Each lift must be uniformly compacted to the target density before subsequent lifts are
placed. To ensure optimum density, verify the proper application of water before
compaction.
5. Surface Tolerance. Check the cross-section (e.g., cross slope, thickness, elevation), as
needed, to ensure that the final compacted base is within the limits of the Contract
Specifications.
Check that the surface is satisfactorily maintained until the next course (e.g., surface course)
is ready to be placed.
300-5
Bases
SECTION 306 RECONDITIONING

306.1 GENERAL
Reconditioning is the preparation of a specified depth of the top layer of the existing subgrade.
This work is generally performed by blading, watering, and compacting. The moisture content
of the in situ material is critical during compaction to achieving target density.

Before reconditioning of subgrade material begins, consider the following:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract. Specifically note the required
cross-sectional elements (e.g., width, depth of thickness, cross slope). Specified surface
tolerance may change on a project-to-project basis, especially where surface materials
are to be placed directly on the reconditioned subgrade.
2. Equipment. Gather the necessary inspection equipment and be prepared to check depth
of treatment and surface tolerance.
3. Staking. Spot check and verify that the correct lines and grades have been staked.
Consider the following guidelines when inspecting the reconditioning of subgrade material:
1. Blading. Check the depth of treatment for conformance. To ensure that the proper
quantity of water is being added to the subgrade material, periodically verify the
moisture content with the Project Laboratory, especially in areas suspect of being too
wet or too dry.
2. Compaction. Observe the compaction operation for obvious signs of failure. Visually
inspect the subgrade for soft spots and other unacceptable deficiencies.
3. Surface Tolerance. Check the surface tolerance frequently for conformance to the
Contract Specifications.
Check that the surface is satisfactorily maintained until the next course (e.g., base course) is
ready to be placed.
300-6
Bases
SECTION 307 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE

307.1 GENERAL
Hydrated lime is typically added to the in situ subgrade material to improve its stability as a
foundation. The required quantities of lime and water are determined through preliminary
sampling and testing of the soil. Application rates typically are specified in the Contract Plans,
but may be provided by the Project Engineer. The Contract Plans also will designate the depth
and width of treatment.

Before work on the subgrade begins, consider the following:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract. Specifically note the number of
courses, depth of treatment, and required cross-sectional tolerance. Check for any
changes in the Method of Measurement or Basis of Payment.
2. Material Requirements. Become familiar with the material and processing requirements
of the Contract Specifications (e.g., slurry mixing) and the related tests and acceptance
criteria.
3. Scale/Weigher Certification. Check to ensure that the commercial scale and weigher
have been properly certified.
4. Load Restrictions. Become familiar with the load restrictions on public facilities. See
Appendix D for applicable legal weight limits.
5. Equipment. Gather the necessary inspection equipment and be prepared to check depth
of treatment and surface tolerance.
6. Application Rate. Review the method for determining and verifying lime and water
quantities and the rate of application of lime slurry for the required width and depth of
treatment.
7. Hazards. Review the hazard potential and ensure that proper first aid is available to
handle bodily contact with lime.
Consider the following guidelines when inspecting the construction of lime-treated subgrade:
300-7
Bases
1. Preparation. Ensure that the subgrade has been properly prepared and that the cross-
section, elevation, and alignment are correct. Visually inspect the subgrade for soft
spots, ruts, and grade deficiencies. See Section 300.1 of this Manual for additional
information. Where scarification is required, verify that the maximum depth of loosened
material is not exceeded.
2. Load Tickets. Do not accept any load of material without receipt of a properly
completed and validated load ticket. Do not accept or sign a load ticket unless the
material was applied as specified. Do not accept load tickets from overweight haul
vehicles.
3. Material Quality. Verify that the material delivered meets specified criteria and ensure
that sampling and tests are performed at the required frequency. Reject loads based on
the provisions of the Contract.
4. Weather Limitations. Check weather forecasts and verify that the operation is being
performed within the limits of the Contract Specifications with regard to cold and
inclement weather. Do not allow the operation to continue when the subgrade material
is wet or frozen.
5. Application Rate. Check the quantities of lime and water, as needed, to verify that the
proper proportions are being used. Periodically verify that the rate of application is as
specified in the Contract.
6. Mixing. The initial mixing operation must follow immediately behind the application of
the lime slurry. Check that the lime slurry, water, and scarified soil are being thoroughly
mixed to the required width and depth. Residual lime, clods, lumps, and foreign matter
are unacceptable. Several passes may be necessary before final mixing. Based on the
results of field tests, ensure that the optimum moisture content is attained before
compaction. Additional water may be required.
7. Compaction. Observe the compaction operation for obvious signs of improper operation.
Verify that the target density is being obtained. Pay particular attention to the density
obtained near edges and joints.
8. Surface Tolerance. Check the cross-section (e.g., cross-slope, thickness, elevation) as

needed to ensure that the final compacted subgrade is within the limits of the Contract
Specifications.
9. Construction Joints. Construction joints may be required based on the time elapsed
between work on adjacent sections. Check the specific requirements of the Contract.
10. Curing. Check that the method of curing conforms to specified requirements. Unless an
overlying seal or base course is applied, the treated subgrade is typically sprinkled with
300-8
Bases
water. Ensure that the Contractor corrects any surface damage to the final treated
subgrade and that subsequent pavement courses are not prematurely placed.
Check that the surface is satisfactorily maintained until the next course (e.g., base course) is
ready to be placed.
300-9
SECTION 400
PAVEMENTS
400-1
Pavements
SECTION 400 PAVEMENTS
400.1 GENERAL
Section 400 of the Standard Specifications governs the requirements for Portland cement
concrete and hot-mix asphalt (HMA) pavement construction, including rehabilitative
treatments. The following Sections briefly discuss considerations that are common to these
pavement construction materials.
400.1.1 Process Control/Quality Assurance Provisions
The Contractor is responsible for process control, and CDOT is responsible for quality assurance,
including final acceptance of pay items under the provisions of the Contract. It is the Project
Engineer’s responsibility to review the appropriate specifications and provisions for the project.
It is important that CDOT and Contractor personnel clearly understand their respective
responsibilities. As such, these provisions are discussed at the Pre-paving Conference and at
the beginning of each major phase of the project (see Appendix A for example Pre-paving
Conference Agenda). The status and results of PC/OA sampling and testing are typically
discussed during routine weekly meetings. Attendees generally include: Contractor
Superintendent, Quality ControlProcess control Supervisor, Paving Foreman, Plant Operator,
Material Supplier, Trucking Foreman, Project Engineer, Project Inspectors, and PC/OA Testers.
400.1.2 Vertical Clearance Under Structures
The Construction Manager will verify the vertical clearance of structures before, during, and
after construction on any new or rehab paving project that includes work under a structure.
This requires measuring the vertical clearance under bridges and overhead signs and reporting
the findings to Staff Bridge Branch. See Appendix D for additional guidance.
400-2
Pavements
SECTION 401 PLANT – MIX PAVEMENTS – GENERAL
Section 401 provides guidance and considerations that are common to inspecting typical CDOT
plant-mix asphalt pavement projects.
401.1 PRELIMINARY CONSIDERATIONS

Before plant-mix production and paving operations begin, many factors should be considered.
The following Sections briefly discuss these considerations.
401.1.1 Contract Plans and Specifications
Review the Contract, including any Special Provisions. Pay particular attention to the following:
1. type of pavement specified;
2. material specifications and mix design requirements;
3. temperature limitations (e.g., mix, mat, air);
4. number and thickness of courses;
5. construction dimensions and tolerances (e.g., widths, grades, cross-section);
6. compaction procedures and density requirements;
7. 7. sampling and testing requirements and responsibilities; and
8. acceptance and payment criteria.
401.1.2 Asphalt Paving Publications
As needed for additional guidance, review and reference the following publications during the
project:
1. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Handbook, American Association of State Highways and

Transportation Officials (AASHTO);
2. Segregation Causes and Cures for Hot-Mix Asphalt, AASHTO;
3. The Asphalt Handbook, Manual Series No. 4 (MS-4), Asphalt Institute;
4. Superpave Series No. 2 SP-2, Asphalt Institute; and
400-3
Pavements
5. Special Report 180 Superpave Construction Guidelines, National Asphalt Paving

Association.
401.1.3 Job – Mix Formula
The Contractor is required to submit a proposed mix design. The Regional Materials Engineer’s
Office will review the proposed mix design and issue a Form 43 – Job-Mix Formula when the mix
design has been approved. The Form 43 will include the following information:
1. mix design number;
2. mix gradation;
3. source of materials;
4. percent of materials;
5. name of suppliers;
6. percent of reclaimed asphalt pavement materials, if selected;
7. grade of asphalt binder;
8. warm mix asphalt technology, if selected; and
9. other relevant project information.
The Project Engineer should require the Contractor to have an approved Form 43 prior to the
Pre-paving Conference. Verify that copies of the reviewed and accepted Form 43 are distributed
to the proper personnel. Changes affecting mix design (e.g., type and source of materials)
require the Contractor to obtain a revised Form 43.
401.1.4 Longitudinal Joint and Pavement Marking Plan
The Contractor is responsible for submitting a Longitudinal Joint and Pavement Marking Plan
that illustrates the location and configuration of longitudinal joints and pavement markings,
including the proposed method of establishing control. Verify that the Contractor submits this
Plan for review at least three days before the Pre-paving Conference. Acceptance must be
provided in written form to the Contractor.
401.1.5 Pre-Paving Conference/Communications/Process Control Plan
Discuss project requirements with the Contractor at the Pre-paving Conference (see Section
400.1.1). Maintain effective communications with Contractor personnel (e.g., Superintendent,
Foremen, Material Testing Supervisor, Certified Weigher). Feedback between the production
400-4
Pavements
plant and the paving site is invaluable to effect needed mix adjustments in a timely manner
and ensure a quality pavement.
The Contractor is responsible for submitting a Quality ControlProcess control Plan to the Project
Engineer for review and acceptance before the paving operation begins.
401.1.6 Weather Conditions
Review the Contract limitations with respect to cold-weather paving and inclement weather,
including allowable conditions for placing prime and tack coats and underlying pavement layers
and surface lifts.
401.1.7 Foundation Preparation and Conditioning
Quality, in terms of surface smoothness and durability, will be no better than that of the
underlying foundation (e.g., subgrade, base, existing pavement). If the foundation is not true
to grade and cross-section or is rutted, the surface course thickness will vary, and it will be
difficult to obtain uniform density. This will generally result in surface undulations, dips, and
swales.
401.7.1. Subgrade/Base
Verify that the subgrade and/or base have been properly graded and compacted. Check the
cross-slope, elevation, and alignment for conformance. Check for soft spots and ruts, and
ensure that the Contractor corrects these deficiencies. Require that any damage to the
subgrade or base be repaired before paving. Do not permit paving on frozen subgrade or base
material. Approve the foundation preparation and conditioning work prior to placement of the
surface course.
401.7.2. Existing Pavement
On rehabilitation projects requiring an overlay, any needed pavement repair shall be completed
and approved before the overlay is placed. The entire surface, including edge of pavement,
also must be swept and maintained in a clean and dry condition just prior to placing and
compacting the plant-mix asphalt overlay.
401.1.8 Application of Prime and Tack Coats
As specified or directed, ensure that the underlying surface is properly tacked with an approved
bituminous material before the mix is placed. In addition, verify that contact surfaces such as
curbs, gutters, manholes, and barriers are tacked just ahead of the paving operation. Tack and
prime coat materials should not be applied beyond the limits of the final surface course. Where
overspray or smearing is observed, require the affected surfaces to be cleaned. See Sections
407 and 411 for additional information.
400-5
Pavements
401.1.9 Project Stationing
Verify that project stationing has been clearly marked for the purpose of documenting mix
placement and yield checks. Review the method that will be used to perform yield checks. See
the example for Form 282 in Appendix B for guidance on yield checks.
401.1.10 Compaction Test Section
The Contractor shall construct a test section using material that conforms to the approved Form
43 – Job-Mix Formula (see 401.1.3). The purpose of the test section is to establish the rolling
pattern and sequence, including number, type, and combination of rollers, that are necessary
to obtain target density. Density tests will be performed to verify compliance. The Contractor
is responsible for documenting the results in a report to the Project Engineer. Before production
paving begins, the Contractor shall have a Compaction Test Section Report that has been
reviewed and approved by the Project Engineer. Changes to the compaction process will require
a new compaction test section.
401.1.11 Mix Segregation
Mix segregation is the distribution of non-uniformly graded coarse and fine aggregate material
throughout the mix. In simple terms, the aggregate material in various locations in the mat can
fail to meet gradation specifications. This is a common problem with plant-mix asphalt
pavements that should be closely monitored. Areas with too much coarse aggregate will be low
in asphalt content and high in voids, which makes them prone to premature deterioration.
Segregation can be introduced in several locations throughout the paving process (e.g.,
stockpiling, mixing, hauling, dumping, laydown). For example, segregation can be introduced
where a windrow is not completely picked up and deposited into the paver. Suggested Best
Practices for Minimizing Segregation have been summarized in the HMA Pre-paving Conference
Agenda.
401.2 PRODUCTION
401.2.1 Plant Facilities
The plant must be in good mechanical condition and have adequate capacity to balance
production with the laydown and compaction operations. Prior to production, consider the
guidelines in the following Sections.
401.1.1. Laboratory Facilities
Verify that the Contractor has furnished the required laboratory facilities and is prepared to
perform the process control sampling and testing specified in the Contract.
400-6
Pavements
401.1.2. Air Quality Considerations
Verify that the Plant Operator is in receipt of a proper and current air quality certification from
the governing State agency. See subsections 107.01 and 107.24 of the Standard Specifications.
401.1.3. Plant Scales
Verify scales with respect to certification, checks for accuracy and zero balance, and operation
by a Certified Weigher (see subsection 109.01 of the Standard Specifications). Verify that the
platform is clean, free of obstructions, and operating freely. Verify that scale tickets document
the proper information. Ticket takers shall verify correct information is provided on the scale
ticket as required in subsection 109.01 and shall add:
1. Placement location (station or milepost)
2. Signature of ticket taker responsible for quantities and
3. Spread data
401.1.4. Job – Mix Formula
Verify that the Plant Operator is in receipt of a properly completed and approved Form 43 –
Job-Mix Formula.
401.2.2 Material Considerations
There are several factors related to material type, storage, and handling that should be
considered at the plant, as discussed in the following Sections.
401.2.1. Component Materials
Prior to mix production, verify that component materials at the plant (e.g., aggregates, mineral
filler, hydrated lime, bituminous material, reclaimed asphalt pavement, additives) have been
properly sampled, tested, and approved for use as provided for in the Contract.
401.2.2. Aggregate Stockpiles
Aggregate stockpiles should be built in layers to minimize segregation and separated to avoid
intermingling. Discourage any handling procedure that would push or dump aggregate over the
side of a stockpile or otherwise degrade the material.
400-7
Pavements
401.2.3. Aggregate Handling
To minimize segregation, the loader operator should work the full face of the aggregate
stockpile. Dividers should be installed between cold-feed bin compartments so that aggregate
piles do not overflow.
401.2.3 Mix Production and Storage
Once the plant is in operation, many factors should be monitored with respect to mix production
and storage. Consider the guidelines in the following Sections.
401.3.1. Bituminous Materials
The bituminous material should be uniformly heated to the correct temperature. Localized
overheating is unacceptable and should be carefully monitored. Improper handling can destroy
or deteriorate the binder properties that are required by the Contract. Examples of improper
handling include:
1. storing in tanks at excessive temperature,
2. storing for excessive periods of time,
3. mixing in the plant at excessive temperature, and
4. contamination by storing in tanks containing other material.
The mix discharge and delivery temperatures required in subsection 401.07 of the Standard
Specifications should be verified. The Contractor should consult his binder supplier for further
information on the ideal production temperatures appropriate for the grades of binder supplied
to the project. In addition, verify the Contractor has a Field Binder Management Plan (see
Colorado Procedure 11 in the CDOT Field Materials Manual, bullet 14).
401.3.2. Addition of Lime
Verify that lime is introduced to the aggregate as required. Verify the proportions of lime and
water for conformance, and check that the pugmill uniformly combines the materials (see
subsection 401.14 of the Standard Specifications).
401.3.3. Mixing Efficiency
Look for brown fines at the discharge conveyor. This is a good indication of non-uniform asphalt
content caused by inefficient mixing, especially in drum-mix plants. The temperature of the
dryer discharge gas, at the hood, should generally not be greater than 20 degrees higher than
the aggregate temperature.
400-8
Pavements
401.3.4. Mix Proportions
Verify that PC/OA samples and tests are performed as specified in subsection 106.05 of the
Standard Specifications and the Field Materials Manual. Make frequent visual checks to ensure
acceptability of the mix. If the aggregates are not completely and uniformly coated with
bituminous material, it will result in non-uniform asphalt content.
Check for signs of segregation.
401.3.5. Mix Discharge Temperature
Check the mix temperature at plant discharge for conformance with Contract requirements.
Require adjustments as needed to conform.
401.3.6. Surge Silo Storage
Temporary storage in a surge silo is acceptable, provided it does not adversely affect mix
quality (e.g., binder stripping, segregation, heat loss). Pay particular attention to evidence of
segregation. If the silo is improperly charged or operated, mix segregation is inevitable. The
conveying device should deposit the mix into the center of the batcher at the top of the silo.
The batcher gate should remain closed while charging, be fully opened when the batch is
dropped, and then be quickly closed to prevent dribbling.
401.3 LOADING/HAULING OPERATION

The following Sections provide general inspection guidance.
401.3.1 Haul Trucks
The Contractor should have available an adequate number of haul trucks to provide a constant
supply of mix to the paving site. Check that truck beds are tight, smooth, clean, and treated
with an approved release agent before loading. Fuel oil is not an acceptable release agent.
401.3.2 Truck Loading Considerations
If trucks are not loaded properly, segregation of the mix may occur. Trucks should be laterally
centered (i.e., left to right) under the discharge gate of the surge silo. Trucks should be loaded
in multiple drops (e.g., first drop at the rear, second drop at the front, alternating drops in
between). From three to seven drops may be necessary depending on the size of the truck (e.g.,
single unit, semi). The mix should not dribble from the bottom gate of the surge silo into the
bed of the truck.
400-9
Pavements
401.4 LAYDOWN OPERATION

Project Inspectors should focus on the following areas because poor workmanship often occurs
at these locations: tapers, ramps, manholes, joints and where adverse paving conditions are
encountered (e.g., cold weather, wind, rain, snow, equipment breakdowns).
401.4.1 Paving Equipment
Verify that approved and properly adjusted paving equipment is furnished and used by the
Contractor. Pay particular attention to the acceptability of the receiving hopper, screed, strike-
off assembly, automatic screed control, grade sensors, and sensor reference line. Verify the
paver is capable of placing the mix uniformly and nonsegregated in front of the screed. Check
the length of the automatic leveling ski for acceptability.
401.4.2 Mix Delivery
Once an acceptable mix has been established, note the appearance of the load (e.g., peaking
or flat, dull or shiny, white or blue smoke). A differing appearance in subsequent loads may
indicate an unacceptable change in mix proportions or temperature. Visually inspect the mix
for signs of segregation or incomplete coating of the aggregate. The Project Inspector should
notify the Construction Manager if any of the previous conditions occur.
401.4.3 Charging the Paver Hopper
When mix is dumped into the paver hopper, the truck should be aligned properly with the
hopper and should not bump or jar the paver. Before the tailgate is opened, the truck operator
should first raise the bed to move the material to the tailgate. Once opened, this will provide
the necessary surge of mix into the hopper, which minimizes segregation. If mix is spilled on
the roadway in front of the paver, ensure that it is removed before the paver moves ahead.
The hopper should be kept more than half full at all times.
401.4.4 Paver Operation and Adjustment
To ensure the mix is placed properly without segregation, consider the guidelines in the
following Sections.
401.4.1. Paver Control
The paver should be operated under automated controls (e.g., screed controls, grade sensors,
sensor reference lines). The proper use of this automated control system is paramount to ensure
a quality pavement. However, the following instances of manual operation are acceptable:
1. Irregular Areas. Manual operation of the paver is permitted in irregularly shaped and
minor areas (e.g., tapers). Closely monitor these areas for conformance.
400-10
Pavements
2. Automated System Failure. If the automated control system of the paver fails, the
equipment may be operated manually for the remainder of the workday. Paving shall
not commence if the Contractor is unable to fix the control system before the next
workday.
401.4.2. Paver Speed
The operator should use the slowest paver speed that will accommodate production and
delivery of the mix. The paver should be stopped and started quickly at normal operating speed
to avoid gradual deceleration and acceleration. This will minimize imperfections and damage
to the mat such as holes, tears, and drags.
401.4.3. Material Feed
The feed sensor and flow gates at the rear of the hopper should be adjusted so that the quantity
of material moved by the slat conveyor from the hopper to the midpoint of the augers is
continuous. The hopper should be kept no less than half full.
401.4.4. Paver Hopper Wings
Paver wings should be cycled at a regular interval to prevent large buildups of the material.
Material retained on the wings should not be incorporated into the pavement, unless regular
cycling intervals are used. The material remaining after dumping the wings at the end of the
day shall be disposed of properly and not incorporated into the pavement.
401.4.5. Augers
The augers should span the full-width of the screed. The auger height should be adjusted so
that the bottom of the auger is at least two inches above the finished surface of the mat.
401.4.6. Screed
The paver should be equipped with a full-width vibratory screed. A sufficient quantity of mix
should be supplied by the augers to maintain a constant level of mix in front of and across the
full-width of the screed. The use of drag wings is unacceptable. Verify that the screed is in
proper adjustment to produce an acceptable mat.
401.4.5 Quality Considerations
The Project Inspector should consider the following guidelines:
1. Surface and Texture. The surface of the mat should be uniform in appearance and
texture (without holes, tears, gouges, drags, or segregation).
400-11
Pavements
2. Segregation. If segregation is observed behind the paver, immediately notify the

Construction Manager and the Contractor.
3. Mat Temperature. Check the temperature of the mat behind the paver screed for
conformance. Ensure the mixture is at proper temperature before rolling. The risk of
thermal segregation increases when paving in cool temperatures. See Section 401.5 for
4. Subsequent Lifts. Ensure that rejected areas (e.g., segregated areas, soft spots) have
been corrected prior to placing a subsequent lift.
5. Cross-Section/Thickness/Yield. Ensure that the mat is placed in conformance with the

required cross-section (e.g., slope, crown) and lift thickness. Check the total thickness
and yield as required. Require screed adjustments, if necessary.
401.5 COMPACTION OPERATION

The mat will be uniformly compacted using the procedures established by the compaction test
section (see Section 401.1.10). Consider the guidelines in the following Sections.
401.5.1 Rolling Procedures
Document the rolling procedures used by the Contractor. Particularly note deviations from the
procedures established by the compaction test section (see Section 401.1.10) and any
conversations with the Contractor.
401.1.1. Rolling Sequence
In general, the compaction operation will be sequenced as follows:
1. Initial Breakdown Rolling. Initial rolling is the first pass of the rollers on the freshly
placed mat just behind the paver. It is used to break down and consolidate the mix.
2. Intermediate Rolling. Intermediate rolling is the second pass of the rollers that takes
place just after initial rolling. It is performed to obtain the required mat density in
accordance with applicable temperature requirements.
3. Finish Rolling. Finish rolling is performed after intermediate rolling to improve the finish
of the surface. It is preformed while the mix is warm enough to permit the removal of
roller marks.
400-12
Pavements
401.1.2. Roller Speed
Rollers should, in general, not travel faster than approximately three miles per hour (brisk
walking pace). A rippled surface may occur if the rollers are operated at too high a speed. The
Contractor should avoid stopping rollers on the freshly placed mat.
401.1.3. Pneumatic Tire Rollers
Where pneumatic-tire rollers are used, the compactive effort is directly related to the tire
pressure. Verify that the correct tire pressure is used in accordance with the compaction test
section.
401.1.4. Vibratory Rollers
Vibratory rollers can be used in either the static or vibratory mode. Where the vibratory mode
is used, the frequency should be as high as practical without detriment to the mat.
1. Static Mode. Static mode, or non-vibratory rollers, should be used on mats that are less
than 1.25 inches thick. The vibratory mode should not be used during finish rolling of
surface courses or on waterproofed bridge decks.
2. Low Amplitude. A low-amplitude vibratory mode should be used for mat thicknesses
between 1.25 and three inches.
3. High Amplitude. A high-amplitude vibratory mode should be used for mats greater than
three inches thick.
401.1.5. Manual Compaction Methods
Hand-operated mechanical tampers should be used in areas that are inaccessible to rollers.
401.5.2 Temperature Considerations
Temperature plays a critical role in the compaction of plant-mix asphalt pavements and should
be closely monitored. See subsection 401.07 of the Standard Specifications.
401.5.3 Joint Construction
The quality of longitudinal and transverse joints will affect the quality and long-term
performance of the asphalt pavement. The surface must be smooth across the joints after
density is obtained. See Section 401.1.4 for additional information. The following Sections
provide additional guidance.
400-13
Pavements
401.3.1. Traverse Joints
When transverse joints are required, see subsection 401.18 of the Standard Specifications.
401.3.2. Longitudinal Joints
When longitudinal joints are required, see subsection 401.16 of the Standard Specifications.
Refer to Colorado Procedure 11 in the CDOT Field Materials Manual, bullet 14.
401.5.4 Safety Edge
The paver shall include an approved longitudinal wedge system to create a sloped safety edge
as shown on the plans.
401.6 SMOOTHNESS
1. Contractor PC/OA Smoothness Profiling. The contractor shall perform the following PC
operations for smoothness profiling:
a. Profiler. The contractor will perform PC profiling on the first 2000 tons of the
final layer or each day's paving within 24 hours after the concrete has achieved
sufficient strength for PCCP The Contractor shall not perform the PC testing until
after the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 1,000 psi if a light
weight profiler is used or 2,000 psi if a high speed profiler is used. The profiler
is operated by Contractor staff; this profiling does not have to be in the presence
of a CDOT inspector. Only CDOT certified profiling equipment may be used for
CDOT projects. The contractor's staff must be properly trained and have a
current CDOT Operator's certification. A list of certified profilers and operators
can be found on the CDOT website at
https://www.codot.gov/business/designsupport/matgeo/pave-smooth-testing
Prior to PC profiling the contractor shall submit a traffic control plan for
approval.
Profile results from the PC smoothness profiling must be submitted to the

Engineer within 48 hours after profiling. The profile results shall show the Mean
Roughness Index (MRI) for each 0.1 mile section. Paving should be suspended
when profile results show corrective work is required. Paving will remain
suspended until the contractor proposes corrective actions in writing to the
Engineer.
400-14
Pavements
b. Straightedge. A 10-foot straight edge is supplied by the contractor. The

straightedge method performed by the Contractor will be employed in areas not
requiring profiling by the profiler or areas that could not be profiled by the
profiler. Observe the operation, document deviations greater than 3/16 of an
inch.
2. Initial Smoothness Acceptance Profiling. The Contractor’s High-Speed Profiler will be

used for acceptance of the pavement. This profiling is performed to set the incentive
for each 0.1-mile section and to designate areas requiring corrective work. To prepare
for the profiling the contractor shall perform the following:
a. Submit a traffic control plan that will allow the continuous collection of data for
a lane. The traffic control plan shall allow the profiler to run the length of the
lane at a constant speed without stopping. Profile testing shall not be performed
without traffic control using the approved MHT.
b. The contractor shall mark the paving limits and each excluded area. These marks
need to be verified by the CDOT inspector.
c. The contractor shall lay out a distance calibration site. This site may be outside
the project limits, but must be checked by the inspector.
d. The lanes must be in their final configuration and allow the profiler to profile in
the intended direction of traffic.
e. The lanes shall be free of debris and construction activity while profiling.
f. This profiling cannot occur when the pavement is wet or icy. The ambient
temperature shall be at least 34°F for the profiler to operate.
When the contractor is ready for acceptance, he must submit a request at least 10 days prior
to profiling. The contractor will also notify the Staff Materials and Geotechnical Branch’s
Concrete Unit. The Staff Materials and Geotechnical Branch’s Concrete Unit may verify the
Contractor’s profile results. Verification will occur at the same time that the contractor
profiles the pavement. This testing should be witnessed by the CDOT inspector in CDOT is not
performing verification testing.
After the profiling, the contractor shall submit the electronic data to the Project Engineer. The
Project Engineer will submit the electronic data to the Staff Materials and Geotechnical
Branch’s Concrete Unit at [email protected]. The data shall be submitted as soon as
possible so that the contractor’s profiling may be verified within the allowable amount of time.
The Staff Materials and Geotechnical Branch’s Concrete Unit may verify the Contractor’s profile
results and will notify the Project Engineer of its intent to verify the data. The contractor shall
not perform any corrective work until after the verification profiling has occurred. The Project
400-15
Pavements
Engineer may call the Staff Materials and Geotechnical Branch’s Concrete Unit prior to QA
profiling to ask if the contractor needs to be verified. The verification profiling can take place
at the same time as the contractor’s QA profiling to save on traffic control.
A report for each lane will be sent to the Project Engineer showing the HRI MRI for each 0.1-
mile section, the incentive/disincentive for each 0.1-mile section and areas requiring corrective
work. If the contractor performed any corrective work prior to this initial smoothness profiling,
the engineer shall reduce the incentive for any 0.1-mile section where the contractor
performed corrective work to $0.00 even if it was a short distance of grinding. The disincentive
will not be changed.
Corrective Work. The contractor will perform the indicated corrective work. Once the
corrective work is completed, recheck the acceptability of the corrected final surface with
respect to texture and skid resistance. Joint sealant and pavement markings damaged by
grinding shall be removed and replaced.
1. Final Smoothness Acceptance Profiling. The Contractor’s Profiler will be used for
acceptance of the pavement. This profiling is used to check that the contractor
performed and fixed all areas of corrective work. The profiling and contractor’s
responsibilities are the same as the initial smoothness profiling.
After the profiling, a report for each lane will be sent to the project showing the HRI
MRI for each 0.1-mile section, the revised incentive/disincentive for each 0.1-mile
section and areas requiring corrective work. Each 0.1-mile section showing an initial
disincentive can have that disincentive reduced or eliminated, but that section cannot
earn incentive.
If corrective work is still indicated, the contractor shall perform the corrective work and
the lane will be re-profiled. For every re-profile after the first Final Smoothness
Acceptance Profiling, the contractor will be charged $500.
Verification profiling may occur on any profiling done by the contractor.
400-16
Pavements
SECTION 402 RESERVED
400-17
Pavements
SECTION 403 HOT – MIX ASPHALT
403.1 GENERAL
The Contract Plans will designate the type and extent of base preparation, the number and
thickness of mix courses required, and the lines, grade, and cross-section required for the final
HMA surface. Use the guidelines presented in Section 401.
403.2 WARM MIX ASPHALT

Warm mix technology is an additive that the contractor may elect to use.
Foaming is another warm mix technology where the asphalt producer injects water into the
mix, through a special nozzle. Currently this technology is only approved for up to 10,000 tons
per project, until performance data is submitted and analyzed. This method is less costly than
the chemical additive used in the first warm mix asphalt method, as the only additive is water.
When either method of warm mix asphalt is used, it is treated the same as conventional hot
mix asphalt, both in the field and in the laboratory, with respect to compaction and testing.
The only difference is the contractor is able to obtain proper compaction at lower
temperatures, thus being able to extend haul distances.
400-18
Pavements
400-19
Pavements
SECTION 405 HEATING AND SCARIFYING TREATMENT
405.1 GENERAL
Heating and scarifying treatment is a rehabilitative process typically specified to recycle the
uppermost layer of an existing asphalt pavement in preparation for a new asphalt overlay.

Before the heating and scarifying operation begins, consider the following guidelines:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Pay particular attention to the requirements for the
rejuvenating agent.
2. Surface Preparation. Verify that the surface is properly prepared before the operation
begins. The surface should be cleaned of all loose and foreign debris by using either
mechanical or hand methods. Items such as manholes also should be clearly marked.
3. Equipment. Verify that the Contractor has available the proper type and number of
equipment for the operation. Verify that the heating and scarifying, paving, and rolling
equipment conforms to specified requirements. Pay particular attention to the
acceptability of the type and number of steel-wheel and pneumatic-tire rollers
provided.
4. Flammable Materials. Inform the State Patrol or local law enforcement agency of project
scope and limits. Additional signing may be required.
Consider the following guidelines during the heating and scarifying operation:
1. Width of Heating. Verify that the width of heating beyond that of scarification meets
minimum specified requirements.
2. Width and Depth of Scarification. Check the width and depth of scarification for
conformance. Verify that the Contractor maintains adequate control over the
scarification depth and that testing is performed as required.
3. Overlap of Adjacent Passes. Adjacent passes of the heating and scarifying operation
should overlap. Verify that the overlap of adjacent passes extends into the previously
placed mat to the minimum specified requirements.
400-20
Pavements
4. Temperature. Check the temperature of the scarified material for conformance. See
subsection 405.03 of the Standard Specifications.
5. Rejuvenating Agent. Check the conformance of the rejuvenating agent applied to the
scarified material. The agent must be applied while the scarified material is hot and
before it is transferred to the paving machine.
6. Distribution of Material. After the hot recycled material is transferred to the paving
machine, the mix will be distributed (i.e., screeded) to the cross-section designated on
the Contract Plans. Verify the width, depth, and cross-slope for conformance.
7. Compaction. Immediately behind the paver, the rolling operation should begin. Check
that the type and number of rollers and the rolling pattern employed meet the
requirements for breakdown and finish rolling. Pay particular attention to the
temperature of the material at the time of compaction, and verify that the required
density is being obtained.
Review the work to ensure acceptability, and discuss with the Contractor any unacceptable
areas. Enforce the Contract provisions with respect to needed corrections. Do not allow the
Contactor to place a subsequent asphalt overlay over the treated surface before the minimum
specified elapsed time.
400-21
Pavements
SECTION 406 COLD ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RECYCLE)
406.1 GENERAL
Cold asphalt pavement recycling is typically specified as a rehabilitative treatment for asphalt
pavements. The work generally consists of pulverizing (e.g., milling) the existing asphalt
surface within the limits and to the depth required by the Contract, mixing a recycling agent
with the pulverized material, and then spreading and compacting the recycled material to the
specified grade, cross-section, and density.

Before the cold asphalt pavement recycling operation begins, consider the following guidelines:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Pay particular attention to the requirements for the
pulverized material, recycling agent, temperature requirements, and sealing emulsion.
2. Surface Preparation. Items such as manholes should be clearly marked.
3. Recycling Equipment. Check the operation of the recycling equipment for conformance
with respect to its pulverizing capabilities, control over width and longitudinal joint
offset, automatic depth control, screening and crushing capabilities, continuous
measurement of recycled material and automatic metering of recycling agent, and
mixing and windrow placement capabilities.
4. Paving Equipment. Check the paving equipment for conformance. Verify the proper
operation and adjustment of the pick-up machine, paver, and screed. The screed does
not have to be heated.
5. Compaction Equipment. Check the compaction equipment for conformance. Both

pneumatic-tire and steel-wheel rollers, either static or vibratory, will be required. The
use of the vibratory mode for finishing requires previous approval.
6. Representative. Verify that a representative of the manufacturer of the recycling agent

is present at the beginning of the operation and remains on site to provide guidance
until acceptable production has been established.
During the cold asphalt pavement recycling operation, consider the following guidelines:
400-22
Pavements
1. Depth of Milling. Verify that the underlying material is not disturbed beyond the depth
of milling designated on the Contract Plans.
2. Longitudinal Overlap. Verify that the overlap of adjacent passes meets specified
minimum requirements.
3. End Overlap. Where the operation is halted, check that the operation is restarted by
overlapping the end where the operation stopped.
4. Vertical Faces. Verify that the faces of vertical cuts in the pavement are properly
cleaned during the operation and are not left overnight.
5. Mixing Operation. The recycling agent will be automatically metered based on the
continuous weight measurement of pulverized material. Verify that the rate of
application is calibrated to within allowable tolerance. Water may be added to the
pulverized material to facilitate mixing uniformity.
6. Spreading Mix. Verify that the production of recycled material is balanced with paving
for a continuous operation. Check that the mix is uniformly placed in windrows to
prevent segregation. The paving equipment should pick up the entire windrow and place
the recycled material in one pass to the required grade and cross-section.
7. Segregation Considerations. Watch for segregation in the windrows and the screeded
surface, and enforce the provisions of the Contract with respect to removal and
replacement of unacceptable mix. If segregation is evident, suspend the operation until
the problem can be identified and corrected.
8. Compaction Operation. Pneumatic-tire rollers shall be used for initial breakdown and
compaction rolling. Compaction should generally stop where no further displacement is
observed. Hand methods will be necessary for areas inaccessible to rollers. Finish rolling
will be performed with steel-wheel rollers using either the static or vibratory mode.
Note, however, that the use of the vibratory mode requires previous approval and low
amplitude. Verify that the required density is obtained and that the surface finish is
free of roller marks and damage. Where cracks, movement, or pavement distress is
observed, suspend the operation until the problem can be identified and resolved.
Enforce the Contract provisions with respect to removal and replacement of deficient
areas. See subsection 406.07 of the Standard Specifications.
9. Longitudinal Joints. Verify that longitudinal joints are laterally offset between layers at
the specified minimum distance but do not fall in wheel paths.
10. Free Moisture Tests. Check that free moisture tests are being performed as required,
and enforce the specified limits of free moisture before allowing placement of a
designated sealing emulsion or asphalt overlay. Enforce the Contract provisions with
400-23
Pavements
respect to removal and replacement of damaged and soft areas before any sealing
emulsion or asphalt overlay is placed. See subsection 406.07 of the Standard
Specifications.
Review the work to ensure acceptability, and discuss with the Contractor any unacceptable
areas. Enforce the Contract provisions with respect to needed corrections and minimum time
before opening the section to any traffic after compaction. A sealing emulsion may be specified
to minimize surface raveling. Where applicable, verify the limits of treatment and rate of
application for conformance. Where an asphalt overlay is designated, verify that the minimum
overlay thickness is placed over the recycled pavement within the minimum specified time
limit. Check the density, grade, and crosssection of the final surface for conformance.
400-24
Pavements
SECTION 407 PRIME COAT, TACK COAT, AND

REJUVENATING AGENT
407.1 GENERAL
Where prime or tack coat is specified, the Contractor will be responsible for preparing and
treating the surface with a bituminous material within the limits designated on the Contract
Plans. Prime coat is typically applied to a base or foundation course to provide a dust-free
surface that promotes adhesion between the underlying surface and the overlying asphalt mix.
The tack coat promotes bonding between the new and old materials. The rate of application
should be carefully monitored. Too much tack coat promotes slippage between the two layers,
rather than adhesion, and the excess material generally bleeds to the surface along
construction joints. If tack coat is applied too far ahead of the paving operation, the material
will usually collect a film of dust, which also causes poor adhesion.

Before prime or tack coat is applied, consider the following guidelines:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Pay particular attention to the type and grade of
bituminous material specified and its application rate and temperature requirements.
2. Distribution Equipment. Verify that the distribution unit meets specified requirements
with respect to material heating, circulation, and application control. Before the
operation, verify that the application rate and the spray width have been properly set
and that the distributor is capable of positively cutting off the flow of material.
3. Material Considerations. Retain and check the Certificates of Compliance and delivery
tickets to ensure that the type and grade of bituminous material conform to specified
requirements.
4. Surface Preparation. Verify that the surface to be treated has been properly prepared.
The base must not be too dry, because this will cause the prime coat material to ball
up. Before tack coat is applied, ensure that the existing surface has been properly
repaired, patched, and swept. Vertical edges, such as curbs and manholes, must also be
clean. Otherwise, the tack will not adhere to the surface.
Consider the following guidelines during the application of prime and tack coats:
400-25
Pavements
1. Application Rate. The application must be uniform and continuous at the specified rate.
Verify that spray bar nozzles deliver without streaking. Skipped or deficient areas must
be corrected. Excess material (e.g., overlaps, puddling) also must be corrected (e.g.,
squeegee, blotter material). In general, no more material than that needed for the day's
operation should be applied. Overspray and smearing of curbs, gutters, and barriers is
unacceptable and should be corrected. Consult the Project Engineer if penetration
appears to be an issue.
2. Blotter Material. Where traffic must be maintained on the treated lane and the material
does not adequately penetrate the surface, blotter material must be spread to absorb
the excess bituminous material.
3. Traffic. Check for proper handling of traffic to prevent pickup, tracking, and
contamination of the bituminous material. Traffic should generally be kept off the
material as long as practical. Where traffic must be maintained on the facility, not more
than one-half the width of the section should be treated in the same pass.
400-26
Pavements
SECTION 408 JOINT AND CRACK SEALANT
408.1 GENERAL
Joint and crack sealing is a routine method of pavement rehabilitation. Joints and cracks in the
pavement surface that are not properly sealed will allow water to infiltrate into the underlying
layers of the pavement structure causing premature deterioration. Where joint and crack
sealing is specified, the Contractor will be responsible for cleaning and preparing joints and
cracks and furnishing and placing sealant material.

Consider the following guidelines before the joint and crack sealing operation begins:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Pay particular attention to the material requirements
for the hot poured joint and crack sealant material.
2. Material. The Contractor shall supply approved sealant material and under no
circumstance should different materials be mixed during the operation. The Materials
and Geotechnical Branch pretests all batches of crack sealant. Contact the Bituminous
Unit of the Asphalt Pavement Program (303) 398-6530 for approved crack sealant.
3. Equipment. Verify that the Contractor has adequate equipment to properly heat and
pour the sealant material in a continuous operation.
4. Material Preparation. Check to ensure that the Contractor prepares the sealant material
according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
During the joint and crack sealing operation, consider the following guidelines:
1. Crack Width. The Contractor should be sealing cracks between 0.125 and one inch in
width.
2. Joint and Crack Preparation. Prior to sealing, verify that joints and cracks are properly
cleaned of loose and foreign material to the specified depth. This operation is generally
performed with hot compressed air. Immediately prior to sealing, the vertical faces of
the joint or crack should be clean, dry, and warm. This promotes a positive bond of the
sealant material to the vertical faces.
400-27
Pavements
3. Sealant Temperature. Periodically verify the sealant temperature for conformance.

Overheating degrades the material and should not be permitted.
4. Sealing Operation. Verify that the sealant is poured in the crack or joint reservoir to a
height flush with the pavement surface. Excess sealant material must not remain on the
surface but should be squeegeed to the specified width on either side of the crack or
joint.
Before opening to traffic, the sealant material should be allowed to cure sufficiently to
prevent being picked up or pulled out of the crack or joint by traffic. If this becomes a
problem, require blotter material to be applied to the sealant material. Enforce the Contract
provisions with respect to removal and replacement of damaged seals.
400-28
Pavements
SECTION 409 CHIP SEAL
409.1 GENERAL
Seal coats are typically specified to lengthen the service life of an existing pavement and to
improve the skid resistance of the surface. Prior to chip seal, it is important that the surface
be properly prepared. The bituminous and aggregate cover materials must not be placed prior
to the Project Engineer’s approval of the prepared surface. The Contract Plans will designate
the limits of treatment. Where the bituminous material is to be used as a fog seal, aggregate
cover generally will not be specified.

Before the seal coat operation, consider the following guidelines:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Pay particular attention to the type, grade, and
temperature requirements of the bituminous material, the gradation requirements of
the aggregate cover material, and their respective rates of application.
2. Equipment. Check equipment for conformance. The Contractor should provide adequate
bituminous distributors, aggregate spreaders, pneumatic-tire rollers, and rotary power
brooms for a continuous operation. Pay particular attention to the distributor. It should
have adequate means for controlling and monitoring the temperature, rate, and width
of application of bituminous material.
3. Test Section. A test section will be used, as needed, to evaluate the application rates,
yield, and penetration. Embedment of approximately 75 percent of aggregate into the
bituminous material is recommended. The operation should consistently use either butt
or lap seams, but no seams should be placed in the wheel paths of operating traffic. The
sequence of placement should minimize turning movements on the freshly placed
surface.
4. Maintenance of Traffic. Verify that the correct types of temporary pavement markings
and signing have been properly placed.
5. Surface Preparation. Prior to sealing, verify that the surface has been properly prepared
and approved. The surface should be to the desired line and grade, free of irregularities,
clean, and dry. Power brooms are generally used to remove loose and foreign material.
Items such as manhole covers, drop inlets, valve boxes, and valley pans should be
covered with dirt or paper to prevent bonding with the bituminous material.
400-29
Pavements
409.2.2.1 Application of Bituminous Material
During the application of the bituminous material, the Project Inspector should ensure
conformance with respect to the type, grade, temperature, and application rate of the material
within the limits designated on the Contract Plans. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Temperature/Initial Quantity. Check the temperature of the material in the distribution

truck for conformance. Determine the initial quantity of material in the distribution
truck before it is applied.
2. Distribution Bar/Nozzles. Check that the distribution bar applies at a uniform,

continuous spread. End nozzles should be normal to the surface (i.e., turned at 90
degrees) to reduce overspray on curbs and reduce development of false seams.
Adequate bituminous material should be applied along the seam line, not just over
sprayed. The Contractor should have spare nozzles readily available.
3. Application Uniformity. Check to ensure that the bituminous material is applied at the
specified rate uniformly over the surface in a continuous operation without producing
deficient areas or areas of excess material. Check the yield as required for confirmation.
Particularly watch for streaking. Halt the operation if streaking is observed and require
corrective action. Junctions of adjacent passes should be closely monitored. Areas with
too little or too much bituminous material must be corrected before application of the
cover aggregate. In addition, the application rate should be adjusted to compensate for
oxidized and open-graded surfaces. Contact the Project Engineer where such areas
become problems.
4. Overspray. Check that the bituminous material is not over sprayed on adjacent items
such as curbs and sidewalks. If observed, require the Contractor to thoroughly clean
such excess.
5. End Overlaps. Pay particular attention to the start and cut-off operation of the
distribution truck. The truck should be moving forward in the direction of application
when the spray bar is opened or closed. Verify that building paper is used at the
beginning and end of each spread. Such practice minimizes excess from overspray and
dripping and helps to square the ends of application.
6. Length of Application. The length of application of the bituminous material should be

balanced with the aggregate spreader. In general, the spreader should be maintained
relatively close behind the distribution truck. Otherwise, the bituminous material may
begin to cool sufficiently to prevent the aggregate from being embedded and held in
place by the bituminous material when rolled.
400-30
Pavements
7. Fog Seal. Where fog seal is specified, verify that the bituminous material is applied at
the specified rate. Aggregate cover will generally not be required where fog seal is
specified.
409.2.2.2 Application of Aggregate Cover
During the application of aggregate cover material, the Project Inspector should ensure
conformance with respect to the type, gradation, and application rate of the material
within the limits designated on the Contract Plans. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Material and Quantity. Check that the type and gradation of the aggregate material
conforms to specified requirements. Record the quantity of aggregate delivered and
spread (i.e., volume or weight from delivery ticket).
2. Dust Considerations. The cover material shall be moistened with water prior to
placement to reduce dust emission. This also reduces the dust coating on the
aggregate, which enhances bonding with the bituminous material.
3. Timing of Operation. The aggregate spreader should be following relatively closely

behind the application of the bituminous material. Do not allow the aggregate to be
placed on bituminous material that has been allowed to chill, set, or dry.
4. Width of Application. Check to ensure that the aggregate cover is placed within the
limits of the bituminous material previously applied to the surface.
5. Application Rate/Yield. Ensure adequate coverage and verify the application rate
and yield for conformance. Deficient areas must be adequately covered with
additional aggregate, and excess piles must be trimmed prior to rolling.
6. Haul Truck Considerations. Verify that the equipment tires do not roll over and
damage the freshly applied and uncovered bituminous material. Also check that
equipment tires do not pick up the aggregate material. Enforce the Contract
provisions with respect to needed repairs. To help embed the aggregate into the
bituminous material, haul trucks should stagger their wheel paths.
409.2.2.3 Rolling Operation
After the aggregate has been spread, the rolling operation should begin immediately behind
the spreader to embed the aggregate into the bituminous material. Consider the following
guidelines:
1. Roller Tires. The correct pressure should be used in the tires of the pneumatictire
rollers. Pay particular attention to the operation to ensure that the aggregate is not
picked up by the tires.
400-31
Pavements
2. Rolling Operation. To properly embed the aggregate, pneumatic-tire rollers should

perform three complete passes over the aggregate prior to the bituminous material
taking its initial set. Verify that the rolling operation is keeping up with the
aggregate spreader; otherwise, it will be difficult to embed the aggregate into the
bituminous material. Verify that areas of exposed bituminous or loose aggregate are
not left at the end of the day. In addition, rapid start and stop movements should
be avoided to minimize damage to the treated surface.
3. Coverage. Check the surface behind the rolling operation to ensure that adequate
coverage of aggregate remains over the bituminous material. Require correction of
areas identified with deficient or excess aggregate material.
4. Embedment. Check the acceptability of embedment of the aggregate in the

bituminous material. Embedment of approximately 75 percent of aggregate into the
bituminous material is recommended. In addition, check for proper bonding of the
two materials. If weak bonding is evident after the bituminous material takes its
initial set, notify the Contractor of the deficient area.
5. Bleeding. Blotting sand should be used in areas where excess bituminous material
bleeding occurs.
409.2.2.4 Brooming Operation
After the rolling operation has embedded the aggregate into the bituminous material and
set sufficiently to hold bond, the brooming operation should begin. Brooming is performed
to remove loose aggregate and chips that did not bond with the bituminous material. The
operation is generally performed at the beginning of the next work day. Ensure that the
operation does not remove embedded aggregate. In such cases, lighter brooming or a delay
in the operation may be needed.
After the brooming operation, verify the acceptability of the final surface with respect to
proper coverage, embedment, and bonding of the aggregate with the bituminous material.
Enforce the Contract provisions for any needed surface corrections. Verify the correct
installation of traffic control devices (e.g., temporary paving markings, drums) prior to
opening the section to traffic.
400-32
Pavements
400-33
Pavements
SECTION 411 ASPHALT MATERIALS
411.1 GENERAL
Various types of bituminous materials may be specified in the Contract, and the type specified
will depend on its intended application (e.g., prime, tack, seal coat).

Before the Contractor applies the bituminous material, consider the following:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Pay particular attention to the type and grade of
bituminous material specified and any dilution or additive requirements.
2. Storage. Depending on the project, several different types of bituminous material may
be necessary for different operations. Check to ensure that the Contractor properly
stores different types of bituminous material separately without mixing. Verify the
Contractor has a Field Binder Management Plan (see Colorado Procedure 11 in the CDOT
Field Materials Manual).
Check to ensure that the Contractor’s application operation does not result in overspray on
adjacent items such as curbs, gutters, sidewalks, and structures. Enforce the Contract
provisions with respect to cleaning such marred areas.
In general, it is best not to close the facility to traffic, even if this means maintaining a one-
way operation. In such cases, verify that the bituminous material is not oversprayed into the
adjacent lane. To avoid damage from traffic, do not open the facility to traffic until the
bituminous treatment has sufficiently cured.
400-34
Pavements
SECTION 412 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

The construction of Portland cement concrete pavement is a highly mechanized operation that
requires the inspection of a vast quantity of material and a working knowledge of numerous
types of equipment. Project Inspectors that are assigned to the work should be thoroughly
familiar with the Contract Plans and Specifications, Special Provisions, construction methods
and details, and the sequence of operations.
412.1.1 Contract Plans and Specifications
Pay particular attention to the class of concrete required, component material specifications,
mix design requirements, consistency requirements for the proposed method of operation, and
the requirements for reinforcement, dowel bars, tie bars, joint sealant, and curing materials.
Become familiar with the proposed method and sequence of operation with respect to mix
production, mix hauling, joint construction, reinforcement and concrete placement (i.e., fixed
form, slip form), finishing, curing, joint sawing, profiling, surface tolerance, and slab and
surface correction requirements.
412.1.2 Portland Cement Concrete Mix Design
Before mix production and paving begins, the Project Engineer and Project Inspector should
understand the mixing and batching procedures, and be able to verify that the Portland cement
concrete mix design has been approved for use on the project.
412.1.3 Process Control Plan
Verify that the Contractor’s Process Control Plan has been submitted and approved. The Process
Control Plan will document the Contractor’s proposed sampling and testing procedures for
quality control process control of pavement thickness. It shall address the sampling and testing
method and frequency for traffic lanes, shoulders, intersections, entrances, and crossovers.
Use the Process Control Plan to verify conformance of quality control process control by the
Contractor.
412.1.4 Pre-paving Conference/Communications
Discuss project requirements and sequence of operations with the Contractor at the Prepaving
Conference (see Section 400.1.1). Establish and maintain communications with Contractor
personnel (e.g., Superintendent, Foremen, Material Testing Supervisor, Certified Weigher).
During the paving operation, communication between the plant and the paving site is invaluable
to effect needed adjustments to the mix and ensure quality.
400-35
Pavements
412.1.5 Equipment Considerations
Verify the acceptability of the number and type of equipment supplied by the Contractor.
1. Hauling/Placing Equipment. Check the acceptability of haul trucks, spreading, strike-

off, consolidation, and finishing equipment for the particular method of paving used
(i.e., fixed-form or slip-form paving).
2. Load Transfer Devices/Bars. Check the location and operation of equipment used to
place load transfer devices and bars.
3. Vibrators. Check vibrators for conformance with respect to specified type, diameter and
spacing. Frequency of vibrators should be tested and documented.
4. Test Bridge. Verify the acceptability of the test bridge provided for CDOT personnel.
5. Safety Edge. The Contractor shall use an approved longitudinal paver wedge system to
create a sloped safety edge.
6. Joint Sawing Equipment. Check that extra saws, blades, and lighting equipment have
been provided to continue joint sawing sufficiently to control cracking.
7. Curing Equipment. Verify that standby equipment has been provided for the curing
operation in the event of a mechanical breakdown.
8. Texturing Equipment. Check the acceptability of the equipment needed for surface
texturing.
9. Concrete Protection. Check that the Contractor has available the tools and materials
necessary to protect the concrete from cold and wet weather damage.
10. Profiler. Check that the high speed profiler has been calibrated as specified.
412.1.6 Utilities
Verify that the manholes, inlets, and utilities that will be incorporated into the pavement are
properly located and marked.
412.1.7 Subgrade/Base Preparation
Check that the subgrade/base has been constructed to the required grade and crosssection and
compacted to the required density. Ensure that high or low spots and soft or muddy spots have
been properly corrected. The final grade must be in a smooth and non-frozen condition. Where
400-36
Pavements
the prepared grade is untreated, verify that the material is maintained in a moist condition just
ahead of the paver without forming mud or pools of water. Intermittent sprinkling may be
required.
412.1.7.1 Fixed-form Considerations
For fixed-form paving operations, consider the following guidelines:
1. Rail Forms. Verify rail forms for conformance with respect to dimensions and condition.
Rails should be clean and in good repair. Reject damaged forms.
2. Limits of Trimming. Check the limits of trimming beyond the width of the forms. This
area will be used as a track path for finishing, curing, and surface texturing equipment.
3. Foundation. Verify that the rail foundation is uniform and properly compacted. The
foundation must support the operation so that the top face of the rails remains flush
with the final pavement surface without moving.
4. Rail Movement. Verify rails are secured with stakes and locked pins. Check for movement
in any direction. Visible springing or settlement is unacceptable.
5. Oiling. Ensure that the forms are thoroughly cleaned and coated with oil or other
approved release agents.
6. Resetting/Removal. Require resetting of unacceptable forms. The forms should not be

removed until the concrete has set sufficiently to hold the edge of the slab.
412.1.7.2 Slip-form Considerations
For slip-form paving operations, the Contractor shall adjust the automatic alignment and
elevation controls to spread, consolidate, screed, and finish the concrete in a single pass.
412.2 REINFORCEMENT AND JOINT CONSIDERATIONS

There are many factors that the Project Inspector should consider with respect to the provisions
for reinforcement and joint construction. Consider the guidelines in the following Sections.
412.2.1 Reinforcing Steel
Where reinforcing steel is specified, check the reinforcement for conformance with respect to
material type and condition. Verify that the Contractor properly stores the reinforcing steel
without damage or degradation. Pay particular attention to the storage and handling of epoxy
coated bars. Require repair or replacement of the epoxy coated material, as needed. Verify
the acceptability of the placement operationThe Contractor shall supply and use a MIT-Scan-2.
400-37
Pavements
Check the method of securing bars and the depth and location of placement. Observe the
consolidation operation for evidence of unacceptable bar movement. Vibrators must not come
into contact with reinforcement.
412.2.2 Construction Joints
Use the following guidelines to inspect longitudinal and transverse construction joints:
1. Longitudinal Construction Joints. Where longitudinal construction joints are built, check
the following for conformance:
a. Location. Check that longitudinal construction joints are properly located,

especially with respect to lane lines.
b. Keyways. Verify the correct installation of keyways. It is preferable to construct

female keyways.
c. Tie Bars. Where tie bars are specified, verify the diameter and length of the
epoxy coated bars for conformance. Observe the insertion operation for proper
location and spacing of bars. Ensure that the Contractor demonstrates, by
testing, the required pullout resistance where tie bars are stabbed or drilled and
epoxied into place.
2. Transverse Construction Joints. Verify that transverse construction joints are properly
located and constructed. Check to ensure the location of joints for conformance with
minimum spacing requirements.
412.2.3 Weakened Plane Joints
Use the following guidelines to inspect longitudinal and transverse weakened plane joints:
1. Longitudinal Weakened Plane Joints. Where longitudinal weakened plane joints are
constructed, check the following for conformance:
a. Location. Check that longitudinal weakened plane joints are properly located,
especially with respect to lane lines.
b. Tie Bars. Where tie bars are specified, verify the diameter and length of the
epoxy coated bars. Check that the bars are inserted by an approved method
ahead of the vibration operation. Observe the insertion operation for proper
location, depth, and spacing of bars.
c. Sawing. Check the dimensions of saw cuts. Ensure that the sawing is completed
at the proper time to prevent random cracking and raveling.
400-38
Pavements
2. Transverse Weakened Plane Joints. Where transverse weakened plane joints are
constructed, check the following for conformance:
a. Location. Check that transverse weakened plane joints are located as designated
on the Contract Plans.
b. Load Transfer Devices. Verify that dowels conform to the specified type,
diameter, and length of material. Check to ensure that the number and size of
shipping braces does not exceed what is specified in subsection 412.13(b)2 of the
Standard Specifications. Check to ensure that the horizontal support wires and
shipping braces are not cut prior to concrete placement and that the assembly
is firmly secured to the subbase as required. Check welding to ensure that only
one end is welded. Check the tolerance of placement for acceptability with
respect to location, depth, and spacing. Ensure that the Contractor marks the
center of the dowel assembly on both sides of the slab for reference by the saw
crew. Verify dowel lubrication for conformance. Ensure that joints in widening
and shoulders align with those in the adjacent slab.
The Project Inspector should do quality assurance to ensure the location of the
dowels in the plastic pavement behind the paver.
c. Sawing. Check the dimensions of the saw cuts for conformance. Ensure that the
sawing is completed at the proper time to prevent random cracking and raveling.
If uncontrolled cracking is observed, verify that the Contractor moves the sawing
operation ahead and then returns to saw the joints that were skipped.
412.2.4 Expansion Joints
Check that transverse expansion joints are properly constructed at the locations specified.
Verify that preformed joint filler material is placed at all structures, manholes, inlets, and
other projections into the pavement.
412.3 PLACEMENT AND CONSOLIDATION OPERATION

412.3.1 Moistening of Grade
Just ahead of the placement operation, verify that the grade is kept moist without creating
standing water or soft spots. Additional sprinkling of the grade may be required throughout the
day, especially during hot, dry, and windy conditions.
412.3.2 Hauling and Delivery Considerations
For each load, retain the delivery ticket and check that the required information is provided.
Refer to subsection 601.06 of the Standard Specifications for details on delivery tickets
400-39
Pavements
requirements. Check the mix for acceptability. The mix should be visually similar from load to
load with respect to uniformity and consistency (i.e., slump). Pay particular attention to signs
of segregation, and verify that the mix temperature is within acceptable limits. Ensure that
molds for strength tests are cast as required and that air and slump tests are performed as
specified. Verify that the concrete is completely discharged within the required time limits,
especially from non-agitating trucks. When water is added to truck mixers, record the
additional quantity, verify the water-cement ratio and record the number of mixer revolutions
before discharge. Pay particular attention to any unacceptable movement of joint and
reinforcement materials when the concrete is deposited.
412.3.3 Spreading and Strike-Off Considerations
Concrete shall be deposited uniformly over the base ahead of the strike-off operation. Concrete
should be placed so that minimal rehandling is necessary. Where hand methods are needed,
verify that shovels, not rakes, are used. Workers with muddy boots should not be permitted to
walk through the freshly placed concrete. Ensure that any footprint areas are properly vibrated.
412.3.4 Vibration Considerations
The concrete should be vibrated across the full width of the slab. Observe consolidation and
require any needed frequency adjustments. When the equipment train halts, verify that
vibrators are shut off. If any vibrator malfunctions, halt the operation until it can be effectively
repaired or replaced. Verify that hand-held vibrators are used to consolidate concrete adjacent
to forms and joint assemblies.
412.4 SURFACE FINISHING OPERATION

412.4.1 Floating Considerations
After the concrete has been placed, struck off, and consolidated, the floating operation will
begin. Hand floating finishing is only permitted to finish areas inaccessible to finishing
equipment (e.g., narrow widths, irregular shapes) and for short periods where finishing
equipment breaks down. The Contractor should not use the CDOT test bridge for the finishing
operation. Verify the grade and cross-section of the floated surface for conformance. Check for
surface irregularities and enforce the Contract provisions with respect to stopping work and
correcting surface defects. Check the edge for rock pockets and edge slump. A consistent
concrete slump will promote a consistent slab edge.
412.4.2 Adding Water to Surface
The Contractor shall not be permitted to add water or finishing aids (water with a small amount
of chemical) to the surface for the purpose of finishing the concrete. The intent is to ensure
that the concrete placed will be high quality and durable In situations where the surface
400-40
Pavements
becomes dry and difficult to finish, as evidenced by tearing, paving shall cease and adjustments
be made to the concrete mix or paving sequence.
412.4.3 Surface Texturing
Verify that the surface is textured in an acceptable manner. The acceptability of the surface
texture is determined by CP 77 Method B. If the texture is deficient, identify the limits of the
deficiency. Deficient surface texture will be corrected by diamond grinding prior to pavement
smoothness testing. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Plastic Turf/Burlap. Where plastic turf and burlap are used, verify that the dragging
operation completely covers the surface and produces a uniform gritty texture. The drag
material should be maintained clean and free of dry mortar. Require replacement of the
material as needed to ensure production of an acceptable texture. Burlap should be
maintained in a moist condition during the operation; however, the quantity of added
water shall not be enough to introduce additional water to the surface of the concrete.
2. Diamond Grinding. Diamond Grinding shall be uniform in appearance. Diamond grinding

shall not occur prior to the concrete achieving a compressive strength of at least 2500
psi.
412.4.4 Stationing
Verify that stations are imprinted on the pavement surface at the specified locations.
412.4.5 Rumble Strips
Verify that rumble strips are placed where specified (e.g., deceleration lanes, ramps,
shoulders). Check the size, shape, depth, and orientation of the strips for conformance.
412.5 CONCRETE CURING OPERATION

Immediately after finishing, check that the surface and edges are completely and uniformly
sprayed with an approved impervious membrane material at a rate of at least 1 gallon per 180
square feet of pavement surface. Concrete shall not be exposed for more than 10 minutes
before being covered with curing compound. Edges and irregular areas will usually be sprayed
by hand. Halt paving if operations are not balanced sufficiently to ensure timely and adequate
treatment. Ensure that all membrane damaged within 72 hours of application is immediately
repaired. The Contactor shall be adequately prepared to protect the pavement from rain and
cold weather damage. Use strength tests to verify compressive strength before allowing
equipment to operate on the new slab.
400-41
Pavements
412.6 SLAB REPAIR WORK

Know the conditions requiring repair work and the limits of removal and replacement. Coring
should be used as needed to verify questionable areas. Enforce the Contract provisions with
respect to repairing deficient areas. Verify that spalled joints and cracks are corrected as
specified.
412.7 SURFACE SMOOTHNESS TESTING

After the concrete has cured sufficiently to support the smoothness testing operation, test the
pavement (i.e., mainline, shoulders, ramps) according to the method specified. Consider the
1. Contractor QC Smoothness Testing. The contractor shall perform the following QC

operations for smoothness testing:
a. Profiler. After the concrete has cured sufficiently to support the smoothness
testing operation, 1,000 psi for a light weight profiler (LWP) or 2,000 psi for a
high-speed profiler (HSP), the contractor with perform QC testing of each day’s
paving, high speed or light weight. The profiler is operated by Contractor staff;
this testing does not have to be in the presence of a CDOT inspector. The profiler
shall be certified according to CP78 to test concrete pavement. A list of certified
profilers can be found on the CDOT website at
http://www.coloradodot.info/business/designsupport/design-docs . The
contractor’s staff must be properly trained and have a current LABCAT Level S
certification. Retain a copy of the operator’s certification.
Prior to QC testing the contractor shall submit a traffic control plan for approval.
Test results from the QC smoothness testing must be submitted to the Engineer
within 48 hours after testing. The test results shall show the Half-car Roughness
Index (HRI) for each 0.1-mile section and areas of localized roughness. Paving
should be suspended when test results show corrective work is required. Paving
will remain suspended until the contractor proposes corrective actions in writing
to the Engineer
b. Straightedge. A 10-foot straight edge is supplied by the contractor. The

straightedge method performed by the Contractor will be employed in areas not
requiring testing by the profiler or areas that could not be tested by the profiler.
Observe the operation, document deviations greater than 3/16 of an inch.
2. Department Initial Smoothness Acceptance Testing. The Department’s High-Speed

Profiler will be used for acceptance of the concrete pavement. This testing is performed
prior to any corrective work to set the incentive & disincentive for each 0.1-mile section
400-42
Pavements
and to designate areas requiring corrective work. To prepare for the Department’s
testing the contractor shall perform the following:
a. Submit a traffic control plan that will allow the continuous collection of data for
a lane. The traffic control plan shall allow the department’s profiler to run the
length of the lane without stopping
b. The contractor shall mark the paving limits and each excluded area.
c. The contractor shall lay out a distance calibration site. This site may be outside
the project limits, but must be checked by the inspector.
d. The lanes must be in their final configuration and allow the profiler to test in the
intended direction of traffic.
e. The lanes shall be free of debris and construction activity while testing.
f. This testing cannot occur when the pavement is wet or icy.
When the contractor is ready for acceptance, they must submit a written request at
least 10 days before they want the testing to occur. Since the Department only has one
profiler, the contractor’s requested date may not be available and will need to be
rescheduled. The project will schedule the department’s profiler by calling the Staff
Materials and Geotechnical Branch’s Concrete Unit at 303398-6548 or 303-398-6549.
After the testing, a report for each lane will be sent to the project showing the HRI for
each 0.1-mile section, the incentive/disincentive for each 0.1 mile section and areas
requiring corrective work. If the contractor performed any corrective work prior to this
initial smoothness testing, the engineer shall reduce the incentive for any 0.1-mile
section where the contractor performed corrective work to $0.00 even if it was a short
distance of grinding. The disincentive will not be changed.
3. Corrective Work. The contractor will perform the indicated corrective work and any
additional corrective work to reduce disincentive payments. Once the corrective work
is completed, recheck the acceptability of the corrected final surface with respect to
texture and skid resistance. Joint sealant and pavement markings damaged by grinding
shall be removed and replaced.
4. Department Final Smoothness Acceptance Testing. The Department’s High-Speed

Profiler will be used for acceptance of the concrete pavement. This testing is used to
check that the contractor performed and fixed all areas of corrective work and to reduce
the disincentive payments. The testing and contractor’s responsibilities are the same
as the initial smoothness testing.
400-43
Pavements
After the testing, a report for each lane will be sent to the project showing the HRI for
each 0.1-mile section, the revised incentive/disincentive for each 0.1-mile section and
areas requiring corrective work. Each 0.1-mile sections showing an initial disincentive
can have that disincentive reduced or eliminated, but that section cannot earn
incentive.
If corrective work is still indicated, the contractor shall perform the corrective work and
the lane will be retested by the Department. For every retest after the first Final
Smoothness Acceptance Testing, the contractor will be charged $500.
412.8 JOINT SAWING AND SEALING

412.8.1 Sawing Operation
Verify that the location of cuts that are sawed over load transfer devices are within specified
tolerance. On the same day joints are to be sealed, verify that the saw cuts are properly cleaned
and that all residue is removed from the joint reservoir and surface (e.g., flushing with water,
sandblasting, compressed air). Follow the requirements of subsection 107.25 of the Standard
Specifications for concrete slurry removal.
412.8.2 Sealing Operation
The sealing operation will begin after completion of all corrective work, joint sawing, and
curing. Immediately prior to placement of the backer rod and sealant material, verify that the
joint reservoir is further cleaned with compressed air. Pay particular attention to any oil or
moisture that may be blown into the cavity. This will prevent the sealant from bonding with
the walls of the reservoir. Require additional cleaning as needed. The sealing operation should
not be conducted during wet weather conditions or when the ambient temperature falls below
the manufacturer’s recommendations. Verify that the sealant material is properly stored,
prepared, and heated prior to application. Check the acceptability of the installed backer rod
and sealant material (e.g., depth, height in relation to slab surface). Require the Contractor to
clean any sealant material that may have smeared on the pavement surface.
412.9 PAVEMENT THICKNESS DETERMINATION

Ensure that the Contractor’s coring operation conforms with the requirements of the Contract
Specifications and the Contractor’s Process Control Plan (see Section 412.1.3). Pay particular
attention to the frequency of coring required for the mainline, shoulders, intersections, and
miscellaneous areas. Verify that the Contractor documents daily thickness measurements.
Acceptance tests must be witnessed by the Project Inspector and will be based on the length
of core samples measured at the time the cores are taken by the Contractor. Determine the
average length of cores and require additional coring as specified for deficient areas. Enforce
the provisions of the Contract with respect to any needed price adjustments and the removal
400-44
Pavements
and replacement of unacceptable slabs. Verify that the Contractor properly fills all core holes
left in the pavement.
412.10 TRAFFIC CONSIDERATIONS

Where appropriate, ensure that the Contractor provides adequate maintenance of traffic
through the construction zone (e.g., crossovers for construction equipment and public
vehicles). Construction traffic should not be permitted on the pavement until the sawing and
sealing operation has been completed. The pavement shall not be opened to traffic until the
test specimens obtained during the placement of the concrete indicate that the pavement has
reached its minimum specified strength.
400-45
Pavements
Figure 400 - 1
GUIDELINES FOR INTERPRETING NON-STANDARD READINGS USING THE MIT-SCAN-2
When verifying dowel placement using the MIT-Scan-2 for dowels placed using a dowel bar
inserter (DBI) machine or when using dowel baskets, some detailed exceptions have been
observed:
A common cause of incorrect dowel bar placement is incorrect sawing of the transverse joint.
The specification requires: The Contractor shall detail his methodology for ensuring correct
marking of dowel bar insertion points and correct sawing of the joints. There may be instances
with dowel baskets where additional analysis and engineering judgment may be required to
make a final determination of the acceptability of the placed dowel bars.
The Engineer is encouraged to discuss the proposed dowel placement and potential MIT-Scan-2
reading exceptions at the Pre-construction or Pre-pave conferences to determine a method of
handling these conditions.
This guidance is attached for your reference. Before applying these guidelines, ensure the MIT-
Scan-2 device has been calibrated properly and settings entered correctly.
400-46
Pavements
400-47
Pavements
SECTION 420 GEOSYNTHETICS

Geosynthetics (e.g., geotextiles, geogrids, geomembranes) are specified for many types of
applications. For the material to function as intended, it is important that the specified type
of material be furnished and properly placed. Before the application of geosynthetics, consider
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract, including Special Provisions,
with respect to the type of application, limits of treatment, and material, construction,
measurement, and payment requirements.
2. Material Considerations. Various types of geosynthetics are available for different

applications. Check the material delivered for conformance.
3. Geosynthestic Technician. Where required for paving applications, verify that a

technician from the geotextile supplier is present for technical advice.
4. Surface Preparation/Tearing Considerations. Pay particular attention to the surface

upon which the geosynthetic will be placed. The surface should be reasonably smooth
to a grade that conforms to the intended application. Observe the surface for items that
could tear the material. In addition, the cover material should be placed carefully to
avoid ruptures and tears.

420.2.1 Paving Applications
Geotextiles are typically used in paving applications for crack reduction. Consider the following
guidelines:
1. Surface Preparation. Before the material is laid, verify that the surface is properly
cleaned. Power brooms are generally used for this purpose.
2. Asphalt Cement Binder. After cleaning and before the fabric is laid, check that the
asphalt cement is applied at the specified temperature and rate, and is the same grade
as the asphalt cement used for item 403.
3. Fabric Placement. Immediately after the application of asphalt cement, the fabric
should be laid. Verify that the geotextile fabric is placed within the limits of the
Contract Plans with proper overlaps at joints and without wrinkles or tearing. No more
400-48
Pavements
fabric than that which can be covered by a subsequent asphalt mix course should be
applied during the work day.
4. Traffic Considerations. To avoid damage, check to ensure that equipment does not park
or make sudden starts, stops, or short turns on the fabric. Traffic on the fabric should
be minimal.
420.2.2 Impervious Lining Applications
Geomembranes are typically used for impervious lining applications. Check to ensure that the
geomembrane is loosely laid to avoid rupture and that wrinkles are smoothed where practical.
Verify that field lap joints are properly placed and that the joint contact surfaces are cleaned
and treated with bonding adhesive as specified. Enforce the provisions of the Contract with
respect to any needed repairs.
420.2.3 Erosion Control and Drainage Applications
Geotextiles are typically used for erosion control and drainage applications. The manner in
which the geotextile is laid should minimize displacement of the fabric by water. Check that
the fabric is loosely laid in the direction of water flow and anchored as required. Verify that
trenching is placed at the top of slopes where designated on the Contract Plans. Check joint
overlaps and sewn seams for conformance.
420.2.4 Subgrade Applications
Geotextiles and geogrids are typically used in subgrade applications. Prior to placement,
inspect the prepared surface for acceptability. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Fabric Placement. The fabric should be placed in the direction of construction traffic in
a relatively stretched condition without wrinkles or folds and secured as specified. Folds
that are in the direction of construction traffic are acceptable on curved sections. Do
not allow the fabric to be dragged across the subgrade. Verify overlaps at joints for
conformance and inspect the fabric for damage prior to placement of cover material.
Enforce the Contract provisions with respect to any needed repairs.
2. Cover Placement/Compaction. Verify that the placement, grading, and compaction

operation for the first lift of cover material conforms to specified requirements. Watch
for damage to the fabric caused by the compaction operation and ensure that needed
repairs are made.
3. Traffic Considerations. Enforce the provisions with respect to equipment traffic (e.g.,
minimum thickness of cover, type and weight limitations). In general, equipment should
not make turning movements on the first lift of compacted cover. Watch for fabric
damage and subgrade rutting and ensure that any needed repairs are made.
400-49
Pavements
420.2.5 Landscape Applications
Geotextile fabric is typically used for weed barriers in mulched landscape applications. Prior to
placement, verify that the soil has been properly prepared and graded. Check to ensure that
the fabric is placed loosely, lapped in the direction of water flow, and anchored as required.
Where designated on the Contract Plans, verify check slots are provided at the top of slopes.
Also check for the installation of metal landscape borders where required.
400-50
STRUCTURES
500-1
Structures
SECTION 501 STEEL SHEET PILING
501.1 GENERAL
Sheet piling is typically specified in Contracts for applications such as cofferdams and cutoff
walls at the base of retaining-wall footings. In such applications, sheet piling provides a tight
interlocking bulkhead that restricts the lateral movement of material behind it. The Contract
will designate the location, extent, and type of sheet piling required. The primary duty of the
Project Inspector is to verify that the Contractor furnishes the correct material and properly
installs the sheet piling.

Consider the following guidelines before the pile driving operation begins:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract with respect to the designated
limits of treatment (e.g., location, driving depth, cut-off elevation) and the type of
sheet piling. Pay particular attention to splicing, welding, and painting requirements.
2. Types of Sheet Piling. The Contract will designate the type of sheet piling required.
Upon delivery, review the Mill Test Reports to ensure that the heat numbers on the
sheet piles correspond to those on the reports. Document the width and length of each
sheet pile. Where painting is designated in the Contract, check that the sheets are in
accordance with the Contract Specifications. Two types of sheet piling may be
designated in the Contract. Consider the following:
a. Type I. Where Type I sheet piling is designated, verify that the piling is
corrugated, non-galvanized steel sheeting of the interlocking type. Check the
material grade, thickness, and section modulus for compliance.
b. Type II. Where Type II sheet piling is designated, check that the material grade
and thickness conform to the requirements for steel sheet piling.
Consider the following guidelines during the driving of sheet piling:
1. Driving Head. Verify that a driving head is used during the operation. Check for damaged
piling and enforce the Contract provisions with respect to pulling and replacing damaged
piling.
500-2
Structures
2. Penetration. Verify conformance of the method used to determine acceptable

penetration (e.g., measured depth, refusal).
3. Cut-Off Elevation. Where a sheet extends above the designated cut-off elevation, ensure
that it is cut to the required elevation by an approved method. Document the area of
cut sheets that are not used at other locations or for splice work.
4. Splicing. Where a standard length of sheet piling must be driven so that its top is below
the designated cut-off elevation, verify that additional sheeting is spliced (i.e., cut,
installed, and welded) to raise the height of the piling to the required elevation. Check
the cutting and welding operation for acceptability. Where multiple splices are needed,
ensure that the minimum specified distance between splices is not exceeded. Document
the number, width, and length of splices performed and accepted.
500-3
Structures
SECTION 502 PILING
502.1 GENERAL
Structural steel shapes are typically used as foundation piles. These piles are driven vertically
or near vertically into natural ground to help support the structure and minimize settlement.
Without a solid foundation, the attention given to constructing a quality structure is
meaningless. As such, the Project Inspector must thoroughly and competently inspect the
foundation piling provided for structures.
Many types of piles are available for foundation designs, and each design will differ based on
the specific conditions at the site. The Contract will designate criteria such as pile type,
number, length, horizontal arrangement, orientation (i.e., plumb, batter), and driving
specifications such as design load, driving energy, depth, and number of blows. Each pile that
is driven to specification will provide a bearing capacity that will support a fraction of the
structure’s total load (i.e., design load). The pile’s bearing capacity results from a combination
of resistant forces, including the surface friction between the pile and natural ground and the
bearing pressure of the pile tip on the substrata material (e.g., bedrock).
Although it is equally important to check items such as pile type, location, and orientation, it
is paramount to continually inspect the driving operation. If driving is stopped too soon, the
pile will not have developed the required bearing capacity to resist the design load, and the
structure may eventually settle due to a lack of support. If overdriven, the pile may incur
structural damage, increasing the chance that the foundation will settle or otherwise fail at
the location of the damaged pile.

Significant information will need to be documented with respect to pile driving. See Appendix
B for an example of a completed Piling Form.
502.2.1.1 Contract Plans and Specifications
Review the Contract with respect to equipment requirements and pile type, length, location,
orientation, anticipated driving depth, structural refusal, bearing capacity, and cut-off
elevation. Review the splicing, capping, and painting requirements.
500-4
Structures
502.2.1.2 Pile Location and Utility Considerations
Verify that utility locations have been staked and that any known conflicts have been resolved
before the operation begins. Review to ensure that all pile locations have been properly staked
in accordance with the Contract.
502.2.1.3 Excavation
Where excavation is required, check the limits of excavation (i.e., plan dimensions and depth)
for compliance. Unless otherwise authorized, excavation must be completed and accepted prior
to driving foundation piles.
502.2.1.4 Equipment Considerations
Various types and energy ratings of pile drivers are available. Equipment selection depends on
the type and size of piles to be driven. More than one type of driver may be required for the
project. Based on the methods and criteria specified in the Contract, the Project Engineer will
determine equipment acceptability before delivery to the job site.
This task generally involves analysis and comparison of data supplied by the Contractor and, if
questionable, further inspection and testing (e.g., pile driving analyzer). As soon as practical,
provide the Contractor with written notification of equipment acceptance or rejection. Verify
that the Contractor furnishes the pre-approved equipment and ensure that substitutions are
not made during the work. Otherwise, equipment acceptability must be reassessed. Consider
1. Hammer Cushion/Striker Plate. Hammer cushions and striker plates are typically used
to ensure uniform driving behavior and minimize damage to the pile. Where required,
verify conformance with respect to type and size.
2. Pile Driving Head. Where a pile driving head is required, verify compliance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Pile Driving Leads. Pile driving leads are typically used to guide the movement of the
hammer, thus ensuring the pile receives a concentric impact with each blow. It is
essential that the fall of the hammer be in line with the pile; otherwise the head of the
pile may be severely damaged, the hammer may be damaged, the energy of the hammer
may be reduced, or the pile may change direction. Also, check lead alignment to ensure
that it does not hinder the movement of the hammer.
4. Followers. Where required, verify the proper use of followers.
500-5
Structures
502.2.1.5 Material Considerations
Use the following guidelines to inspect materials for the pile driving operation:
1. Pile Types. The pile types that are typically used in foundation applications include
structural steel shapes, steel pipe, and steel shell piles. The Contract will designate the
types required. Upon delivery, review the Mill Test Reports to ensure that the heat
numbers on the piles correspond to those on the Reports and that the piles have been
manufactured in the United States of America. Also, check and document conformance
with respect to pile condition, material grade, length, and cross-sectional shape and
dimensions.
2. Pile Tips. Where their use is specified, check pile tips and fastening details for
compliance.
3. Concrete. Concrete is used to fill the interior of steel pipe and steel shell piles after
they are driven and their interior cleaned of debris and water. Where specified, check
the concrete class for conformance.
502.2.1.6 Test Piles and Pre-drilling
As designated or directed, test piles will be used to determine the need for pre-drilling. In
general, if a test pile is driven to specification without reaching the designated minimum
penetration depth and bearing elevation, pre-drilling will be required. Check and record the
location, depth, and diameter of all pre-drilled holes. The hole diameter depends on the type
and size of pile required. This ensures that the pile will be in an accurate and stable position
for driving. If the maximum diameter is exceeded, verify that voids are backfilled as specified.
502.2.1.7 Welder Certification
As needed for splice work, ensure that welders are prequalified for the work. Check each
welder’s Certificate of Qualification. Ensure that the document complies with the minimum
period of satisfactory performance for the type of welding to be performed. Retain a copy of
all Certificates of Qualification.
During the driving of foundation piles, consider the inspection guidelines in the following
Sections. See Appendix B for a sample piling form.
502.2.2.1 Pile Location and Direction
Verify that each pile is driven within tolerance of its designated location. Also, check pile
alignment (i.e., vertical, batter) for deviation from allowable tolerance. Verify that pile flanges
500-6
Structures
are oriented as designated in the layout of the Contract. Watch the pile as it is driven for
sudden changes in direction. This is a good indication that the pile has failed below the ground
surface. In such cases, contact the Engineer of Record for assistance.
502.2.2.2 Hammer Cushion/Striker Plate
As needed during driving, inspect the integrity of cushions and striker plates for compliance.
Pay particular attention to the thickness of the material and require replacement based on the
minimum specified thickness.
502.2.2.3 Water Jetting
Water jets, where authorized, are used to facilitate pile penetration. Ensure that water jets
are removed, as specified, for the final depth of penetration. Once removed, determine
average penetration using test blows.
502.2.2.4 Pile Penetration and Bearing Elevation
Piles must be driven to virtual refusal into natural ground so that the elevation of the tip of the
pile is at or below the designated bearing elevation. At bridge structures, the bearing elevation
of the pile must be below the 500-year scour depth. Check and document pile elevation, number
of blows at minimum final penetration, and final depth of the pile. Consider the following
guidelines:
1. Adjacent Piles. Where a new pile is being driven, closely monitor the elevation of
adjacent piles. In some cases, adjacent piles will tend to “push up.” Ensure that the
Contractor re-drives affected piles to the proper bearing elevation.
2. Sudden Changes in Penetration. Monitor the pile for sudden changes in penetration
between blows. This usually indicates that the pile has failed or an unusually soft
subsurface strata has been encountered. Sudden disappearance of the pile confirms the
presence of a cavern or large void. In such cases, contact the Engineer of Record for
assistance.
3. Unusually High Bedrock. Where the designated penetration depth and bearing elevation
cannot be obtained without damaging the pile (e.g., encounter with unusually high
bedrock), contact the Project Engineer for assistance. Pre-drilling may be required.
4. Springing/Bouncing. Watch for pile springing and hammer bouncing. Springing may occur
where spliced members are not properly aligned, the pile head is not squared properly,
or the pile and hammer are misaligned. Bouncing may occur where the pile has reached
the point of virtual refusal, a hammer of insufficient weight is used, or too much steam
or air pressure is used in double-acting hammers.
500-7
Structures
5. Pile Driving Analyzer. The Project Engineer will determine the number and location of
piles to be monitored by a pile driving analyzer. If the Contractor is directed to setup
the analyzer and monitor the piles, check and document the number and location of
piles that were monitored and the results of the analysis.
502.2.2.5 Cutting of Piles
Ensure that the piles are cut by an approved method and to the correct cut-off elevation. Check
that the cuts made at splices are normal to the longitudinal axis of the pile. Document the pile
location, the pile’s initial length, and the length of pile that was cut. Pay particular attention
to the disposition of cut lengths of piles. They may or may not be reused. If reused in field-
splice work, document the pile location and the length of pile that was reused.
502.2.2.6 Pile Splicing
For those piles driven deeper than the minimum penetration depth, splicing may be necessary
to raise the top of the pile to the correct cut-off elevation. Either commercial splices or field-
welded splices may be used. Check for acceptability and document the location, type, and
number of all splices. Where commercial splices are used, check that they are of an approved
type and fastened in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Thoroughly
inspect welding for compliance with respect to welder certification, surface preparation, root
opening, welding method, type of weld, number and order of passes, and removal of slag.
502.2.2.7 Filling and Capping of Hollow Piles
After steel pipe, shell piles, and the adjacent piles have been driven and accepted, inspect the
inside cavity using the Contractor-supplied lighting system. Pay particular attention to buckling
or crushing. Ensure that water and debris are removed from within the pile before the
Contractor fills the interior with the designated class of concrete.
502.2.2.8 Pile Damage and Defects
During the driving operation, continually monitor piles for damage and defects, and review the
provisions of the Contract with respect to corrective work. Pay particular attention to head
damage, internal damage, splice defects, and improper pile location, direction, and final
bearing elevation. Contact the Project Engineer and the Engineer of Record as needed for
assistance. Defective piles may need to be removed and replaced, or they may be permitted to
remain with the provision of another treatment (e.g., new adjacent pile, footing adjustment,
additional extension). Note any unusual conditions encountered. Re-inspect all corrective work.
500-8
Structures
Once foundation piles have been driven to specification, verify that the pile tops are cut square.
Ensure that all loose material is removed from around the piles before the foundation concrete
is poured.
500-9
Structures
SECTION 503 DRILLED CAISSONS
503.1 GENERAL
Caissons are relatively large-diameter, underground columns of reinforced concrete that are
constructed in pre-drilled holes to provide foundation support for structures. They are designed
to transfer and distribute structural loads to underlying strata through side shear and end
bearing. In general, caisson construction consists of drilling a hole at a designated location,
depth, and diameter; constructing and placing a cage of reinforcing steel; and placing and
finishing concrete to the elevation required by the foundation details of the Contract.

Before the construction of drilled caissons, consider the following guidelines:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract with respect to the requirements
for reinforcing steel and concrete materials and caisson location, depth, diameter, and
elevation. Pay particular attention to the caisson drilling sequence and dewatering
requirements.
2. Caisson Location/Utilities. Verify that utility locations have been staked. Verify that all
caisson locations have been staked in accordance with the Contract.
3. Boring Log/Geological Reports. Review the boring log and geological reports. Become
familiar with the appearance of the type of material anticipated at the depth of the
bearing strata.
4. Blasting. The use of explosives for caisson construction is not permitted.
5. Materials. Check to ensure that the type of reinforcing steel and class of concrete
conforms to specified requirements. Where steel casing is required, verify conformance
with respect to wall thickness, strength, diameter, and condition.
503.2.2.1 Drilling Operation
Where holes are drilled for caissons, consider the following:
1. Location. Check the location of the center of the shaft to ensure it is within allowable
tolerance from that designated in the Contract.
500-10
Structures
2. Depth of Embedment. The designated bottom elevation is specified, which may be

revised by the Project Engineer to ensure proper load bearing capacity. Document the
depth drilled into the target bearing strata, and compare the excavated material with
geological information to ensure that adequate bearing material has been reached.
3. Diameter/Sides. Check the hole diameter and sides to ensure compliance to size,
vertical orientation, and allowable tolerance. Where caving is encountered, halt the
operation until the situation can be evaluated and corrected. Protective steel casing
may be needed.
4. Excavated Material/Cleaning. Check to ensure that the hole is dewatered and cleaned
of all loose material. If dewatering is not practical, the provisions of the Contract with
respect to placing concrete under water will govern.
5. Protective Covers. Once the hole has been accepted, verify that protective covering is
installed to prevent persons and materials from falling into the hole.
6. Shale / Claystone Considerations. Where a caisson is to be socketed into shale /

claystone, the reinforcing cage, support system, and concrete must be placed within
the specified time limit after drilling. If the limit is exceeded, require the Contractor to
drill the specified additional depth into the shale / claystone just prior to placement of
the concrete, and verify that the reinforcement cage is adjusted to the new depth.
503.2.2.2 Caisson Reinforcement/Steel Casing
Caisson reinforcement will consist of a single-unit cage of reinforcing steel. The cage must be
inspected prior to being placed into the drilled hole. Consider the following:
1. Cage Construction. Inspect the cage for proper bar size, spacing, and fastening. Check
the cage height and diameter for conformance.
2. Steel Casing. Where designated or as directed, ensure that the proper size of steel casing
is installed prior to placement of the cage, support system, and concrete.
3. Installation Timing. After the hole and cage have been inspected, the cage and support
system must be installed in the hole just prior to pouring concrete. If the concrete is
not immediately poured, require removal of the cage, re-inspect the hole for loose
material, and check the surface condition of the steel for acceptability.
4. Support System. A support system must be provided so that the cage does not sit on the
bottom nor lean against the wall of the hole. Check conformance with respect to the
number and interval of spacers along the length of the cage. Verify that the support
system does not rack or skew the cage, and require additional steel as needed to stiffen
the cage.
500-11
Structures
503.2.2.3 Concrete Placement
Acceptability of the placement method used for concrete will depend on whether the hole is
considered dry or wet. Just prior to placement, check the depth of water at the bottom of the
hole. If the depth, without pumping, is less than approximately two inches, the hole may be
considered dry for the purpose of method approval. Otherwise, the hole should be considered
wet. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Dry-hole Placement. Where the hole is dry, the concrete may be poured continuously in
a free fall from the surface with the use of a hopper or approved device. Check to ensure
that the concrete does not hit the reinforcing cage or the sides of the hole on the way
down.
2. Wet-hole Placement. For wet holes, the Project Engineer must review the proposed
method of placement. The Contract provisions regarding placement under water will
govern. Verify that the hole is dewatered.
3. Vibration Operation. Check the vibration operation for compliance with respect to the
minimum depth of concrete consolidation at the top of the caisson.
4. Removal of Water-Diluted Concrete. Where water-diluted concrete has floated to the

top of the caisson during the pour, verify that the minimum depth of the top surface is
removed and wasted as specified.
5. Steel Casing. Unless otherwise designated or directed, the steel casing shall be removed
from the caisson.
6. Concrete Curing. Check that the top surface of the concrete is properly cured.
7. Adjacent Construction. Where work for foundation piles, excavation, or caissons is to be

performed adjacent to the freshly poured caisson, check compliance with respect to
minimum lateral clearance and compressive strength requirements.
Verify that the projecting reinforcing steel is in the correct location and properly cleaned of
mortar.
503.2.4 Caisson Construction Inspection Documentation
The CDOT Form No. 1333 should be used as a minimum standard for the as-built documentation
of each caisson (drilled shaft) installation. Assistance with inspection can come from CDOT’s
Material and Geotechnical Branch or a geotechnical consultant.
500-12
Structures
Some of the site-specific geotechnical items to review include depth to bedrock, groundwater
elevations, overburden soil and bedrock material types, and potential for caving soil. The
inspection staff should be able to perform a visual field verification of the soil/rock material
for comparison to supplied geologic boring logs.
The inspection staff should consider the need for the following equipment.
1. Weighted 100-Foot Tape
2. Mirror / High Intensity Light
3. Plumb Bob
The Inspection Staff should regularly communicate with the Engineer regarding the progress of
installation, any irregularities, and the quality of the contractor’s methods and means.
500-13
Structures
SECTION 504 WALLS
504.1 GENERAL
Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) walls are earth-retaining structures that are constructed by
placing alternating layers of reinforcement and compacted soil behind a facing element to form
a composite material, which acts integrally to restrain lateral forces. MSE walls are gravity
structures that are relatively flexible and can tolerate horizontal and vertical deformations.
MSE walls can be used in cut situations, though they are most efficient in fill or embankment
applications.

The Contractor shall submit six sets of shop drawings and certified material test reports for
review prior to construction of the wall.
Before construction begins, consider the following guidelines:
1. Wall Layouts. Review the Contract with respect to the location, limits, and type of wall-
required lines, grades, starting, corner and end stations, leveling pad step breaks, total
number of panels and top and bottom wall elevations. Pay particular attention to the
shop drawings and submittal requirements outlined in Revision of Section 504. Form
1401 – Block Faced MSE Wall Submittal Checklist or Form 1402 – Panel Faced MSE Wall
Submittal Checklist shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings.
2. Panel and Reinforcement Locations. Panel to panel, panel to reinforcement connection

detail, and limits of special panels at curved wall corner shall be shown.
3. Wall Elevations. Except for the top of the leveling pad, wall elevations given on the
plans are based on the desirable wall height.
4. Soil Reinforcement Materials. Review the material requirements with respect to color,
size, shape, efflorescence, and test results for freeze and thaw durability of block and
or panels, etc. Visually observe the samples if a submittal requirement is included.
Ensure the soil reinforcement type meets the Long-Term Design Strength (LTDS) of the
Ultimate tensile strength, TULT (MARV) for geosynthetic soil reinforcement or LTDS for
metallic soil reinforcement.
5. Soil Reinforcement Length. See table for minimum reinforcement length requirements.
500-14
Structures
6. Panel Size and Soil Reinforcement Spacing. Verify requirements for minimum soil
reinforcement spacing.
7. Long Term Design Strength (LTDS) of Reinforcement. Verify requirements for long-term
design strength of reinforcement.
8. Surface Preparation/Excavation. Verify the acceptability of the slope after it is

prepared, including the bed for the leveling pad. Check the excavation for the toe or
cut-off wall, where required, to ensure that it conforms to the lines designated in the
Contract. Check for the need for over excavation for incompetent foundation material.
If over excavation is needed, inspect the replacement Class 1 backfill material and
operations.
9. Prior to construction, it is recommended to have a preconstruction meeting with the

Contractor to review all checklists.
The following Sections present inspection guidelines that should be considered during the
construction of MSE walls.
504.2.2.1 Block Facing MSE Walls
The Inspector’s Checklist for Concrete Block Facing MSE Wall shall be filled out during the
construction of the Block Facing MSE Wall.
Review the specifications for additional requirements during construction.
504.2.2.2 Concrete Panel Facing MSE Walls
The Inspector’s Checklist for Concrete Panel Facing MSE Wall shall be filled out during the
construction of the Concrete Panel Facing MSE Wall and any Hybrid MSE Wall systems.
Review the specifications for additional requirements during construction.
500-15
Structures
500-16
Structures
SECTION 506 RIPRAP, GABIONS, AND SLOPE MATTRESS
506.1 GENERAL
Erodible slopes within the right-of-way (e.g., along the banks around bridge structures) are
typically treated with an erosion and sedimentation countermeasure. Three types of treatments
may be designated: riprap, gabions, or slope mattresses. Riprap is the careful placement of
relatively large, angular stone on the erodible slope. Gabions and slope mattresses, used on
highly erodible banks, are similar to riprap, except that fabricated wire-cage units containing
the graded rock are placed on the slope.

Before construction begins, consider the following guidelines:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract with respect to the location,
limits, and type of treatment required. Pay particular attention to the nominal size and
material requirements of the stone, depth of treatment, and fabrication details for wire-
cage units.
2. Materials. Review the requirements for riprap with respect to nominal size, shape,
dimensional ratio, specific gravity, gradation, abrasion resistance, and compressive
strength. Visually observe the required material samples from the quarry and site for
compliance (i.e., size, angularity, gradation). Where the material is suspect, request
laboratory results for verification or require the Contractor to provide the necessary
equipment for gradation testing. Where gabions or slope mattresses are designated,
check compliance of the tie wire, wire mesh, cages, anchor stakes, and stone material.
3. Surface Preparation/Excavation. Verify the acceptability of the slope after it is

prepared, including the bed for gabions and slope mattresses. Check the excavation for
the toe or cut-off wall, where required, to ensure that it conforms to the lines
designated in the Contract.
The following Sections present inspection guidelines that should be considered during the
construction of riprap treatments, gabions, and slope mattresses.
500-17
Structures
506.2.2.1 Riprap Treatment
Check the limits of treatment and depth of stone for compliance. Pay particular attention to
the placement of the final surface layer. The final surface shall appear relatively smooth with
interlocking faces of adjacent stones.
506.2.2.2 Gabion Treatment
Gabions are wire cages (i.e., building blocks) that are filled with riprap material, placed, and
tied to each other on the slope to provide a larger protective structure. Check the acceptability
of the wire cages in terms of dimensions and perimeter edges (i.e., selvedged, bound). Ensure
that the stone material is placed in the cages as dense as practical. Verify the units are placed
closely together and tied to each other as specified.
506.2.2.3 Slope Mattress Treatment
Slope mattresses are similar to gabions except that the horizontal dimensions of the wire cage
are much greater than the depth. Where slope mattresses are specified, verify the proper use
of secured diaphragms within the cage. Their use will depend on the unit’s length-to-width
ratio. Each diaphragm contains the stone material in smaller cells within the mattress. Prior to
filling, check that adjoining surfaces and edges of lids are tied as specified. Verify that each
mattress is properly anchored with stakes. Where holes are predrilled for stakes, check the
depth for compliance. Where wire cages are pre-fabricated and placed on the slope, ensure
that damage to the zinc coating is properly repaired. .
Walk the treated area and look for obvious signs of improperly placed stone, inadequate depth
of stone, and misaligned or untied wire cages.
500-18
Structures
SECTION 507 SLOPE AND DITCH PAVING
507.1 GENERAL
Slope and ditch paving is used primarily for erosion and sedimentation control, but it also offers
a neater appearance over other treatments, especially on slopes around major structures.
Where designated in the Contract, the Project Inspector must ensure compliance as discussed
in this Section.

Before slope and ditch paving begins, consider the following guidelines:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract. Pay particular attention to the
location, limits, depth, and type of paving required.
2. Materials. The materials required for the work will depend on the type of paving specified,
which may include: concrete, reinforcing steel, grout, bituminous material, riprap, and dry
rubble. Check the required materials for compliance (e.g., type, class, size, classification,
gradation). Where dry rubble is required, do not allow the use of riprap material. The
purpose of dry rubble is to provide a natural appearing slope around bridge abutments
without introducing a rock slope that is potentially hazardous to the traveling public.
3. Surface Preparation/Excavation. Ensure that the area to be treated is properly prepared.

Check the toe or cut-off wall excavation for compliance... The paving slope may need to be
adjusted in the field to properly match the ditch line. This may occur where a road on steep
grade traverses under a structure or where rough terrain does not permit a smooth transition
with approach fill. Note that the paving slope designated in the Contract is the maximum
allowed, and any required field adjustment must be in the direction of providing a flatter
slope.
Use the guidelines in the following Sections to inspect slope and ditch paving construction.
507.2.2.1 Concrete Paving
Where concrete slope and ditch paving is specified, check the mixing and placement of concrete
for conformance. To enforce the Contract provisions for slip-form and hand placement
methods, pay particular attention to the designated paving thickness and that, which is
500-19
Structures
proposed by the Contractor. Where required, check the acceptability of forms and the
placement of reinforcing steel. Monitor the depth of paving for compliance, and ensure that
expansion joint materials, where required, are placed at the proper thickness and location.
Verify compliance with requirements for cold-weather paving, curing method and material,
surface moisture, and curing period.
507.2.2.2 Dry-Rubble Paving
Riprap is not allowable where dry-rubble slope and ditch paving is specified. Check that larger
stones are placed on the lower course. Verify compliance of joint location and treatment, total
paving thickness, and the appearance of the final surface. Pay particular attention to oversize
stones and protrusions that could present a safety hazard, and require immediate corrective
action.
507.2.2.3 Grouted-Rubble Paving
Where grouted-rubble slope and ditch paving is specified, check the placement of the stone for
acceptability. Inspect the joints prior to grouting and require cleaning as needed to remove soil
and debris. Ensure that the elapsed time between grout mixing and placement does not exceed
specified limits. Do not permit grouting during freezing weather. Check that all joints are
properly grouted and that the grout is kept moist for the required curing period. This is
especially important during hot, dry, and windy conditions. Verify that the final surface is swept
to expose the faces of the rock without removing grout from the joints.
507.2.2.4 Grouted-Riprap Paving
Where grouted-riprap slope and ditch paving is specified, verify that the riprap material is
properly placed. Where required, check weep holes with respect to bedding, pipe, geotextile
fabric, and rock cover. Ensure that the elapsed time between mixing and placement of concrete
mortar does not exceed specified limits, and do not permit mortar to be applied during freezing
weather. Verify the use of pencil vibrators between rocks, and inspect mortar penetration for
acceptability. Verify that the top layer of exposed rock is properly cleaned and the required
height above the mortar. Check to ensure that the concrete mortar is properly finished and
cured.
507.2.2.5 Bituminous Paving
Where bituminous slope and ditch paving is specified, check to ensure that the bituminous
material is placed and compacted to the cross-section designated in the Contract. Verify that
a fog coat is applied at the specified rate to the final surface.
500-20
Structures
After construction, ensure that excavated areas that were not paved are properly backfilled
with acceptable material and tamped to the level of the original ground.
500-21
Structures
SECTION 508 TIMBER STRUCTURES
508.1 GENERAL
The requirements for timber structures, as well as portions of other structures that are timber,
are governed by the provisions specified in Section 508 of the Standard Specifications.

Before beginning work that involves treated and untreated timber members, consider the
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Review the Contract. Pay particular attention to
material requirements and designations for timber grade, working stress, and
preservative treatments. Know where and how specific timber members are to be
arranged, fastened, primed, and painted.
2. Timber Members. Upon delivery, inspect the timber members to ensure that they are
grade-marked by a grading agency certified by the American Lumber Standards
Committee. As needed, reference the Lumber Inspection Agency Certification Grade
Verification Guidelines contained in Appendix D. Check the certificate of inspection to
ensure that it designates the correct destination and project.
3. Fasteners/Incidental Materials. Fasteners that are typically used in timber construction

include bolts, washers, nuts, drift pins, dowels, nails, and screws. Check compliance
with respect to the type and size of materials required. Pay particular attention to
thread length and galvanization requirements.
4. Shop Drawings. Bridges made from timber require shop drawings to be submitted. The
Project Engineer will send the drawings to the Staff Bridge Branch for processing
according to Section 105.2.3.
Consider the following guidelines during the inspection of work involving treated and untreated
timber members:
1. Field Cuts/Drilled Holes. Unless otherwise directed, treated timber will not be cut in
the field. Where it is necessary and approved by the Engineer to cut or drill treated
500-22
Structures
timber, ensure that the Contractor properly applies the required preservative treatment
to the exposed timber.
2. Construction Details. Check compliance of the following items with respect to type,
size, location, grain orientation, clearance, and fastening details:
a. bracing and framing;
b. piling and posts;
c. bulkheads, longitudinal X-braces, trusses, and bent timbers;
d. treated fill pieces and dapping;
e. sills and caps, including sheet metal and burlap caps;
f. hot asphalt swabbing;
g. joints, blocking, and shimming;
h. stringers, floor planks, laminated flooring; and
i. handrails and handrail posts.
3. Bolts/Bolt Holes. Check the diameter of drilled holes for the type of bolt specified, and
ensure that the correct type and number of washers are used.
4. Painting. Where designated in the Contract, check that wood and metal surfaces are
properly cleaned, prepared, primed, and painted.
5. Structure Number. Check to ensure that the structure number is placed as designated
in the details of the Contract.
Perform a final review of the timber structure for obvious errors and omissions, and require
immediate corrective action based on the provisions of the Contract.
500-23
Structures
SECTION 509 STEEL STRUCTURES
509.1 GENERAL
The work for steel structures, as designated in the Contract, will be governed by Section 509
Prior to fabrication of steel structures, contact the Staff Bridge Fabrication Inspection Unit
(303) 757-9339 to arrange quality assurance inspections.
See specification 509 for pre-erection requirements and see appendix A for the pre-erection
conference agenda.

Many different activities must be performed before construction begins. Consider the following
guidelines:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Inspection of steel structures requires a great deal of
coordination, attention to detail, and a thorough working knowledge of the Contract
documents. These documents include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CDOT Standard Specifications;
b. Standard Special Provisions;
c. Project Special Provisions;
d. ASTM Material and Testing Specifications;
e. AASHTO Material and Testing Specifications;
f. AASHTO Standard Specifications for Bridges;
g. AISC Steel Construction Manual;
h. Bridge Welding Code ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5;
i. Shop Drawings; and
j. Quality Control Process Control Plan.
500-24
Structures
Prior to the start of work, review this documentation and become familiar with the
responsibilities of CDOT and Contractor inspection personnel; material sampling and
testing requirements; fabrication, assembly, and erection details; welding and painting
requirements; and the acceptance criteria specified in the Contract.
2. Storage. Do not allow bent or damaged steel members to be incorporated in the work
without prior review by the Project Engineer.
3. Shop Drawings. Shop drawings are required for all steel structures governed under
Section 509 of the Standard Specifications. Review the drawings and become familiar
with the types and locations of steel and fasteners required, member identification and
marking system, rolling orientation designations, types and location of welds, and the
location, extent, and criteria for non-destructive tests.
Consider the following guidelines during field assembly and erection:
1. Material Inspection, Delivery, and Erection. Watch for materials and work that have not
been previously inspected and documented on the Form 193. Pay particular attention
to the following:
a. Straightening. Straightening of bent members, check to ensure the process does

not fracture or damage the member. Visually inspect members immediately after
straightening and, if fractures are suspected, use magnetic particle and dye
penetration testing for verification.
b. Match Marking. Check match marks on members and assemblies to ensure that
they are arranged, assembled, and erected based on the Contractor’s match-
marking diagram.
c. Coating Damage. Watch for damage to shop coating (e.g., galvanization, paint)
caused by mishandling upon delivery and during erection, and require the
Contractor to make immediate repairs.
2. False work Considerations. Where false work is required, verify conformance with
subsection 601.11 of the Standard Specifications.
3. Bearings and Bearing Seats. Where bearing devices are designated for steel structures,
see Section 512.
4. Field Welding Considerations. With the exception of attaching studs, field welding is
only permitted where designated in the Contract or as approved by the Engineer. The
Engineer shall obtain written permission from Staff Bridge.
500-25
Structures
5. Bolt Installation and Inspection. The Staff Bridge Fabrication Inspection Unit will
perform rotational capacity tests of all bolts on the project before installation. The
Project Engineer will notify the Staff Bridge Fabrication Inspection Unit no less than 72
hours before installation. Connections must be drawn tightly together. All bolts in the
connection must be installed before final tightening of the connection. Once the
connection is complete, check bolts for proper tension, as specified.
6. Field Cleaning and Painting. After inspection and acceptance of erection work, verify
that surfaces to be field painted are properly cleaned. Self-weathering steel will be
cleaned but not painted to promote development of a uniform coat of rust. Ensure that
a prime coat is applied to all uncoated surfaces to be painted, including damaged shop
painted surfaces. Once the prime coat has cured, verify that the top coat is applied in
the manner specified. Pay particular attention to the mishandling of painting materials,
and enforce the Contract provisions with respect to mitigating environmental
contamination.
Upon completing the steel structure, consider the following guidelines:
1. Removal of Supports. Check that all blocking, supports, and false work are removed
without damaging the structure.
2. Final Appearance. Check the fit and appearance of diaphragms, transverse bracing, field
splices, and floor beam connections.
3. Damaged Coating. Verify repair of galvanized units on which the spelter coating has
been burned by welding or damaged during erection.
4. Structure Number. Verify that the number stenciled on the structure is correct and
placed in the proper location.
500-26
Structures
SECTION 510 STRUCTURAL PLATE STRUCTURES
510.1 GENERAL
Structural plate pipes are typically used in culvert and bridge applications. Depending on the
particular needs of the application, the plates will be fabricated from steel or aluminum alloy
and assembled to form an arch, elliptical, or circular pipe. To obtain full design strength, this
type of structure depends primarily on the specified tensioning of bolts and backfill placement.

Before work begins, consider the following guidelines:
location, type and size of structure, excavation and flow line, assembly method and
sequence, and material requirements. At the Preconstruction Conference, the
Contractor shall state the type of material (steel or aluminum) they will use.
2. Materials. Check structural plates for conformance with applicable material

specifications for steel and aluminum alloy.
3. Manufacturer/Fabricator Certificates. Verify that the Contractor has furnished the

appropriate Certificates of Compliance. Also, check that the manufacturer has furnished
the required data sheets.
4. Field Coating. Where designated in the Contract, check the application of field coating
with respect to the material used, application method, rate of application, and number
of coats applied.
5. Damaged Coating. Plates delivered with broken or bruised spelter coating shall be
repaired in accordance with subsection 707.09 of the Standard Specifications.
Consider the following guidelines during the work involving structural plate pipes:
1. Excavation. Check the width and depth of excavation (e.g., trenching) for conformance
to the lines and grades designated in the Contract. Ensure the embankment has been
completed to a height 0.3 of the rise above the flow line or 0.3 of the diameter of the
structure before excavation. Check the bedding of the flow line for compliance paying
particular attention to oversize rocks and rock protrusions.
500-27
Structures
2. Test Pits. Verify compliance of test-pit excavation with respect to the required number,
location, and depth below the flow line. Where unsuitable foundation material is
encountered, ensure that the material is removed to the minimum specified depth
below the flow line and backfilled with suitable material.
3. Field Cutting. Where plates are cut to form skewed or sloped ends, check the angle of
the cut for compliance. Ensure that the cut plates are numbered or match-marked as
required.
4. Spelter Coating. Verify that damage to spelter coating caused by field cutting or welding
is properly repaired in accordance with subsection 707.09 of the Standard Specifications.
5. Assembly. Watch for correct sequencing of plate assembly. Check to ensure that thicker
invert plates are placed in the proper position. Check longitudinal and circumferential
seams, joint staggering, and bolt connections for compliance with specified
requirements. Require the Contractor to demonstrate that bolts have been tightened to
within the specified range. After complete assembly but before backfilling, check all
bolts for proper torque. After backfilling, perform spot checks to verify that uniform
bolt tension has not been lost due to backfilling or vibratory compaction equipment. If
the structure is assembled in other than its final location and is to be set in place after
erection, all bolts must be tightened to specification requirements before lifting.
6. Pipe Distortion. Prior to backfilling, check to ensure pipes are not distorted and are
properly set.
7. Backfilling. Check that backfilling complies with the details of the Contract. Watch for
damage to the pipe and require immediate correction. Pay particular attention to the
progression of the backfill operation. The height of the backfill on each side of the
structure should progress equally in uniform compacted layers. This will minimize
uneven lateral stresses on the structure.
After assembly and backfilling, check the dimensions of the final cross-section (e.g., diameter,
span and rise) and the grade of the flow line for conformance. Check to ensure that adequate
earth cover has been placed and compacted before allowing heavy equipment traffic to operate
over the structure.
500-28
Structures
500-29
Structures
SECTION 512 BEARING DEVICES
512.1 GENERAL
Bearing devices are used in structures to allow movement (i.e., longitudinal, transverse,
rotational) due to such factors as temperature change, post tensioning, and girder rotation.

Before work involving the installation of bearing devices begins, consider the following
guidelines:
location and types of bearing devices required. Know the certification and installation
requirements for each type of bearing to be installed.
2. Inspection Upon Delivery Testing and Acceptance. Prior to delivery, the Engineer may
witness testing either at the plant or at an independent testing facility. Upon delivery,
verify compliance with the required certification documentation. Retain all written
certifications and applicable
3. Certificates of Compliance in the permanent project files. Check the documentation to

ensure that the bearings have been delivered to the correct location and are the proper
type for the structure. Check that each bearing is properly packaged to prevent damage
and contamination. Verify that bearing components are marked where required. Reject
bearings that fail to meet these delivery requirements.
Consider the following guidelines during the installation of bearing devices:
1. Concrete Surface/Bearing Seat. Check to ensure that the concrete surface and bearing
seat are within tolerance of the required elevation and horizontal or super elevated
plane. Verify that the concrete surface is clean and free of cracks. Do not accept grout
pads unless previously authorized by the Project Engineer.
2. Installation/Adjustment. Check to ensure that sole plates are positioned to the correct
grade and super elevation and are in full contact with the bottom flange of the girder.
Check the bearing alignment for conformance with the Contract. Verify proper
adjustment for temperature, post tensioning, and shrinkage. Watch for interference
between anchor bolts and the upper part of the bearing device.
500-30
Structures
3. Type III – Special Considerations. Verify that Type III masonry plates are set on the proper
sheeting where monolithic cap seats are used. Ensure that a representative of the
manufacturer of the Type III bearing is present to provide guidance during installation
and to assist with inspection. Ensure the Type III bearing device does not move during
girder placement or erection.
4. Protection of Bearings. Where welding is performed in proximity to non-metallic bearing

pads, check for the proper use of wax pencils to monitor the heat generated and prevent
damage to the pads. Where the structure is painted, verify protection from overspray
and contamination.
Perform a final check of the bearing devices and require corrective work based on the provisions
of the Contract. Following completion of the superstructure, inspect the installation and
alignment of each Type III device in the presence of the Contractor and the manufacturer’s
representative. Obtain written certification from the Contractor that the installation of all Type
III bearing devices have been correctly installed.
500-31
Structures
500-32
Structures
SECTION 514 PEDESTRIAN AND BIKEWAY RAILING
514.1 GENERAL
Pedestrian and bikeway railing is typically designated for pedestrian walkways and bikeways,
including those combined with bridge rails across structures. Depending on the particular needs
of the application, different designs and materials may be specified, including steel and timber.

Before work involving pedestrian and bikeway railing begins, consider the following guidelines:
type and limits of railing, material requirements, and fastening details (e.g., hardware
and bracket locations).
2. Materials. Check that the type of railing delivered conforms to specified quantity,
dimensional, and material requirements. In general, timber will be governed by Section
508, and steel by Section 509 of the Standard Specifications. For pipe railing, verify the
coating (e.g., black, galvanized, painted, powder coated) and threaded and slip fittings
for compliance. For steel tube railing, verify compliance of the steel tubes, plates, bars,
fastening hardware, zinc coating, and prefabrication welding. For timber railing, verify
that the correct fastening hardware has been delivered, and check that the timber
members are pressure treated as specified. Upon delivery, verify the destination and
project from the Certificate of Inspection, and inspect the timber members to ensure
that they are properly grade-marked (see Section 508.2.1).
3. Working Drawings. Check that the Contractor has submitted the required working
drawings. Review the working drawings and become familiar with the fastening details.
Consider the following guidelines during the installation of pedestrian and bikeway railing:
1. Posts/Rail Installation. Check posts for proper location, alignment, and plumb
tolerance. Check that the rails are rigidly braced and secured and that connections are
tight and free of rattle and noticeable deflection.
2. Fastening/Welding Considerations. Check to ensure that bolts are long enough to extend
beyond nuts and that the thread extensions are oriented away from pedestrian and
bicycle traffic (i.e., the smooth, round heads of carriage bolts will face pedestrians).
500-33
Structures
Where welding is required, verify conformance with specified requirements. For timber
members, verify that bolts are recessed as required. Check hand and rub rails for
projections, and require immediate correction.
3. Electrolytic Isolation. Where dissimilar metals meet each other, electrolytic isolation
will be designated in the Contract. Verify the proper installation of electrolytic isolation.
4. Painting. Where designated for non-galvanized pipe and steel railing, verify that the
railing is properly prepared and painted with the designated color.
After construction, ensure that all welds are ground smooth. Watch for burrs and sharp edges
from cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping and ensure rounding where required. Check to
ensure that paint and galvanization damage is properly repaired.
500-34
Structures
SECTION 515 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
515.1 GENERAL
Waterproofing treatments (e.g., reinforced and elastomeric membranes, concrete sealer) are
typically applied to concrete bridge decks. Concrete sealer is applied to bridge decks that will
not receive an asphalt-wearing course. Waterproofing membrane is applied to bridge decks that
will receive an asphalt-wearing course. The treatment is applied just prior to placement of the
asphalt overlay. This minimizes potential damage to the treatment during construction.

Before the waterproofing treatment is applied, consider the following guidelines:
limits of treatment, type of waterproofing designated, sampling and testing
requirements, and the method and sequence of operation.
2. Materials. Check the materials (e.g., membrane, sealer, primer) at the site to ensure
they conform to the type designated for the project. Verify and retain applicable
Certificates of Compliance. Verify compliance with sampling and testing requirements,
and document test results.
3. Weather Considerations. Know the limitations of application with respect to inclement

weather, surface moisture, and surface and ambient temperatures. Pay particular
attention to required drying periods.
4. Concrete Curing. Check to ensure that the age of the concrete complies with specified
limits before application of the treatment.
5. Surface Preparation. Before the treatment is applied, check to ensure that the concrete
surface has been properly prepared. Pay particular attention to the limits of cleaning
(e.g., bridge deck, approach slabs, height of curb above asphalt overlay, height of bridge
rail above deck, sidewalks), sequence, timing, and methods (e.g., sand blasting, shot
blasting, power washing, sweeping). Where waterproofing membrane is designated,
verify that rough surface areas that could puncture or create air pockets in the
membrane have been corrected.
Consider the following guidelines during the application of waterproofing treatments:

500-35
Structures
1. Primer Application. If a primer is specified, verify the limits (e.g., height of curb above
asphalt overlay) and application rate for conformance with specified requirements.
2. Placement of Reinforced Membrane. Check that the membrane is not placed too soon
after primer application. Check the limits of placement (e.g., height of curb above
asphalt overlay). Ensure that the membrane is overlapped in such a manner that a
shingling effect will be achieved that directs runoff toward curbs and drains. Watch for
wrinkles and air bubbles, and enforce the Contract provisions with respect to repairing
such defects. Pay particular attention to flashing and priming requirements where
membrane is placed near joints and drain pipes.
3. Placement of Elastomeric Membrane. Where elastomeric membrane is designated,

check the limits of treatment and rate and thickness of application for compliance.
4. Placement of Protective Covering. Where protective covering is designated, do not

permit any more membrane to be placed than can be properly covered in the same
workday. Pay particular attention to the limits of covering and the required treatment
of overlaps and joints.
5. Concrete Sealant Application. Contractor and CDOT personnel should follow the
manufacturer’s safety recommendations when applying concrete sealant. For
protection, wear the Contractor-supplied respirators during the inspection of work
involving concrete sealer. Verify the limits of treatment (e.g., height on bridge rails
above bridge deck) and the application rate for conformance.
Ensure that all corrective work to damaged waterproofing is completed as soon as practical.
Immediately after the treatment has been inspected and accepted, notify the Contractor in
writing of such approval and that the asphalt overlay can be placed. If the Contractor does not
immediately place the overlay, it must be inspected again prior to paving.
500-36
Structures
SECTION 516 DAMPPROOFING
516.1 GENERAL
Where designated in the Contract, dampproofing of concrete surfaces will be governed by

Before the dampproofing is begun, consider the following guidelines:
limits of treatment, type of material required, sampling and testing requirements, and
the method and sequence of operation.
2. Materials. Check primer and asphalt dampproofing materials to ensure they conform to
the type designated for the project. Verify and retain applicable Certificates of
Compliance. Verify compliance with sampling and testing requirements, and document
test results.

weather, surface moisture, and temperature.
4. Concrete Curing. Check to ensure that the concrete has been cured before application
of the treatment.
5. Surface Preparation. Before the treatment is applied, check to ensure that the concrete
surface has been thoroughly cleaned.
Consider the following guidelines during the application of dampproofing treatment:
1. Primer Application. Verify conformance with respect to limits, method, number of

coats, and rate of application.
2. Asphalt Dampproofing Application. Verify conformance with respect to timing, method,

and rate of application.
500-37
Structures
After the asphalt, dampproofing has been applied, check for discoloring of concrete surfaces
beyond the designated limits of treatment, and require the Contractor to properly clean the
marred surfaces.
500-38
Structures
SECTION 517 WATERPROOFING
517.1 GENERAL
Where designated in the Contract, waterproofing of concrete surfaces will be governed by

Before the waterproofing treatment is applied, consider the following guidelines:
limits of treatment, type of waterproofing material designated, sampling and testing
requirements, and the method and sequence of operation.
2. Materials. Check the materials (e.g., asphalt primer, asphalt mop coat, woven cotton
fabric) at the site to ensure they conform to the type designated for the project. Verify
and retain applicable Certificates of Compliance. Verify compliance with sampling and
testing requirements, and document test results. Pay particular attention to the method
and temperature required for heating asphalt materials.

weather, surface moisture, and surface and ambient temperatures. Pay particular
attention to required drying periods.
4. Concrete Curing. Check to ensure that the age of the concrete complies with specified
limits before application of the treatment.
5. Surface Preparation. Check that the concrete surface has been thoroughly cleaned.
Verify that rough surface areas that could puncture or create air pockets in the
treatment have been corrected.
Consider the following guidelines during the application of the waterproofing treatment:
1. Primer Application. Verify the limits and method of primer application for conformance
with specified requirements.
2. Mop Coat Application. Check that mop coat is applied at the specified locations and
application rate.
500-39
Structures
3. Fabric Placement. Verify that the fabric is overlapped so that water will run over, not
against, the laps. Check the lap width for conformance and that the laps are treated
with mop coat. Watch for wrinkles and air bubbles and required immediate correction.
Verify the application of mop coat over the entire surface of the fabric. Check to ensure
this process is repeated as specified. Do not allow any more fabric to be applied that
can be properly covered and sealed with mop coat in the same workday.
After the waterproofing has been applied, check for areas that may allow water to infiltrate,
such as improper overlaps and punctured fabric. Require immediate correction of any such
defects.
500-40
Structures
SECTION 518 WATERSTOPS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
518.1 GENERAL
The installation of waterstops, expansion joints, and end dams is governed by Section 518 of
the Standard Specifications. Expansion joint devices must not allow water to seep through the
superstructure slab.

Before work involving the installation of waterstops, expansion joints, and end dams begins,
consider the following guidelines:
installation details, material testing and certification requirements, and the locations,
types, and sizes of devices required. The Contractor will provide the manufacturer and
model number of the designated devices at the Preconstruction Conference.
2. Materials. Check devices and component materials to ensure they conform to the
quantity, size, and type designated for the project. Verify compliance with sampling
and testing requirements. The manufacturing plant and testing facility may be inspected
for compliance by the Staff Bridge Pre-Inspection Unit. Ensure that the Project Engineer
has accepted devices before they are installed. Verify and retain the manufacturer’s
written certification and applicable Certificates of Compliance.
3. Working Drawings/Shop Drawings. Do not accept working drawings or shop drawings that
do not include the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Review the drawings and
become familiar with the component designations and installation details (e.g., center
beams and support bars of modular expansion devices).
4. Manufacturer’s Literature. Review the required manufacturer’s installation literature to

become familiar with the materials, components, adjustment settings, and installation
details of the designated devices.
5. Manufacturer’s Representative. Installation of expansion devices relies heavily on

manufacturer’s assistance and guidance. Ensure that the Contractor has properly
notified the manufacturer of the need to provide a qualified representative during
installation. Inspection certification will be required. Installation certifications are
required from the Contractor or manufacturer, depending on the type of device.
500-41
Structures
6. Joint Opening Preparation. Check the joint opening for proper alignment, grade and
dimensions as provided in the bridge plans and that the opening has been properly
cleaned and prepared.
518.2.2.1 Waterstops
Where waterstops are installed, verify proper installation. Ensure that the material is properly
cut and spliced to prevent buckling and distortion. Check the position and shape for
acceptability.
518.2.2.2 Asphaltic Expansion Devices
Where asphaltic expansion devices are installed, ensure that a qualified manufacturer’s
representative is on site during installation of the device. Verify with the representative that
the device is being installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s literature. Check
conformance of the final thickness and grade.
518.2.2.3 Elastomeric Expansion Devices
Where elastomeric expansion devices are installed, ensure that a qualified manufacturer
representative is on site during installation. Verify with the representative that the device is
being installed in accordance with the working drawings and the manufacturer’s literature. The
Contractor shall set the joint opening in accordance with the temperature chart in the Contract
Plans. Check that the device is properly set, supported, and secured. Where Portland cement
concrete end dams are designated, verify the proper use of pressure injected grout and
compliance with temperature and curing limitations. Verify that uncoated metal surfaces are
properly cleaned and maintained. Check the final joint opening, grade, and elevation for
conformance. Once installed, test the expansion joint for evidence of water seepage. If the
test fails, require immediate correction, and retest the joint.
518.2.2.4 Modular Expansion Devices
Where modular expansion devices are installed, ensure that a qualified manufacturer
representative is on site during installation of the device. Verify with the representative that
the device is being installed in accordance with the shop drawings and the manufacturer’s
literature. The Contractor shall set the joint opening in accordance with the temperature chart
in the Contract Plans. Verify that the maximum time between setting the joint opening and
placement of the concrete is not exceeded, and measure and document the structure
temperature as specified. Check for unacceptable bends or kinks and, if found, require
replacement. Verify that recess openings in the deck and curb are properly primed with grout,
filled with concrete, and finished. Ensure that uncoated metal surfaces are properly cleaned
and maintained. Visually inspect concrete anchorages for conformance, and perform the
500-42
Structures
hammer test as specified. Require replacement if the hammer test fails. Check the final joint
opening, grade, and elevation for conformance. Once installed, test the expansion joint for
evidence of water seepage.
If the test fails, require immediate correction, and retest the joint.
518.2.2.5 Elastomeric Concrete End Dams
Verify proper installation based on assistance and guidance provided by the qualified
manufacturer’s representative. Enforce the provisions of the Contract with respect to
corrective work.
Obtain written certification (i.e., signed and dated) from the Contractor and the qualified
manufacturer representative that the expansion devices and end dams designated for the
project have been installed correctly.
500-43
SECTION 600
MISCELLANEOUS
CONSTRUCTION
600-1
Miscellaneous Construction
SECTION 601 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

Section 601 of the Standard Specifications governs the construction requirements for major
concrete structures such as bridges, retaining walls, and box culverts. Acceptability depends
on the quality incorporated in the following distinct operations:
1. formwork, falsework, and framing;
2. reinforcing material and placement;
3. concrete mix materials, design, and production;
4. concrete placement and consolidation;
5. concrete finishing; and
6. concrete curing.
The Contract governs each of these operations in detail. Most problems encountered can be
traced to materials and work that do not conform to specified requirements.
601.1.1 Completed Bridge Inspection
When construction of a bridge or overhead sign is completed, contact the Bridge Management
Systems Engineer at (303) 757-9188 to schedule an inspection.
601.1.2 Vertical Clearances
The Project Engineer will verify the vertical clearance measurements for all bridges and
overhead signs and report the findings to the Staff Bridge Branch and Staff Maintenance
Oversize/Overweight Permits Office if less than 16 feet six inches. See Appendix D for guidance
on measuring and reporting vertical clearances.
601.2 FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK

Falsework is used to support loads, including formwork, until the structure becomes self-
supporting. Falsework design and construction are the Contractor’s responsibility.
601.2.1 Form Lumber
To produce a clean, uniform finish on exposed concrete surfaces, acceptable form lumber must
be used. Compliance will help ensure the desired surface appearance of the finished structure.
600-2
Attempts to cover up surface blemishes resulting from the use of marginal form lumber will not
produce results equal to those that can be obtained from using acceptable form lumber. In
addition, check that exterior corners are formed with a chamfer strip or other suitable means
to produce smooth, even edges.
601.2.2 Bracing Considerations
The Contractor is responsible for providing adequate bracing of all formwork, and CDOT
personnel cannot dictate construction methods. This poses a dilemma during construction,
because inadequate bracing can sometimes cause bulges in abutments, wing walls, and
retaining walls that, although undesirable, can be construed acceptable. Closely inspect all
forms and bracing and accept the work only if it is clear that the Contractor could not have
reasonably anticipated the situation. Doing so will help ensure the provision of a quality
structure.
601.2.3 Foundation Systems
Adequate foundation systems must be provided to support the weight of falsework and
construction loads. This is particularly important during the construction of concrete box girders
and pier caps where segmental pouring sequences are employed. Partially completed structural
elements cannot be expected to carry the weight of concrete used in subsequent pours, and
adverse cracking will generally occur if falsework settles.
601.2.4 Falsework Drawing Certification
The Contractor’s Professional Engineer shall determine the need for falsework drawings, as per
subsection 601.11 of the Standard Specifications. Prior to placement of any concrete supported
by falsework, the Contractor's Professional Engineer shall prepare and submit a letter of
falsework certification to the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit the certification letter
to the Project Engineer. The certification letter must contain the following information:
1. project number,
2. project code,
3. project location,
4. date,
5. Contractor’s name,
6. name of Contractor’s Professional Engineer,
7. structure identification,
8. description of portion of structure supported by falsework,
9. statement of certification
600-3
10. Professional Engineer’s Colorado PE license number, and
11. drawings stamped “Approved for Construction”.
The certification letter must be signed and dated by the Contractor’s Professional Engineer.
The statement of certification in the body of the letter will be as follows:
I hereby certify that falsework materials and construction

have been inspected and that all falsework design,
materials, and construction conform to the requirements of
the Contract and are safe for the placement of concrete.
Note that a separate certification letter is required prior to each concrete pour that is
supported by falsework.
601.2.5 Inspection Considerations
Before the concrete pour, thoroughly inspect formwork for trueness to line and grade, warping,
smoothness of form faces, condition of form ties, proper bracing, tightness of joints, and
cleanliness of forms (e.g., shavings, sawdust). Consider the following additional guidelines:
1. Falsework Drawings. Where determined necessary by the Contractor’s Professional

Engineer, verify that the falsework drawings are stamped with the registered seal of the
Professional Engineer and approved and signed by the Contractor.
2. Letter of Falsework Certification. Verify that the Contractor has submitted a proper
letter of falsework certification. See Section 601.2.4 for additional information.
3. Form Supports. Forms must be adequately supported and sufficiently rigid to minimize
excessive deflection and distortion.
4. Concrete Finish/Surface Texture. Check that the surface of the forms complies with
specified requirements for concrete finish and surface texture.
5. Form Release Agent. Ensure that the proper treatment (i.e., oil or form release agent)
is applied to the forms prior to the placement of reinforcement.
6. Form Tightness. Form sections should be drawn tight to minimize mortar leaks at joints.
7. Metal Forms. Where metal forms are used, check sheet thickness and form design for
compliance to ensure that forms will remain true to shape during the pour. Verify that
form joints are properly aligned. The use of metal forms should produce a smooth
concrete surface finish.
8. Chamfer Strips. Check that the specified types of chamfer strips have been properly
placed in the corners of forms.
600-4
9. Form Ties. Where metal form ties are used, verify compliance with respect to type and
number. The number of ties used should be sufficient to minimize bulging. Do not permit
the use of twisted wire loops as form ties.
10. Omitted Backforms. The omission of backforms requires approval by the Project
Engineer.
11. Embedded Materials. Ensure that all materials that will be embedded in the concrete
(e.g., conduits, drains, utility blockouts, anchoring devices) are placed in the proper
location and adequately secured.
12. Form Cleaning. Verify that the inside surfaces of the formwork are cleaned of all dirt,
mortar, and foreign material.
13. Reuse of Forms. Where form panels such as plywood are to be reused, closely inspect
the panels for acceptability before they are reused. Do not allow the reuse of unsuitable
form materials.
601.3 CONCRETE PRODUCTION

601.3.1 Load Tickets/Mixer Truck Certification
Subsection 601.06 of the Standard Specifications requires the Contractor to furnish a load ticket
(i.e., delivery ticket) with each load of concrete delivered to the project. The load tickets are
used to verify compliance with specifications and to ensure that quality concrete is delivered
to the appropriate location on the project.
Upon receipt of the first load, verify that the class of concrete delivered conforms to specified
requirements and check that the information provided on the load ticket is accurate and
complete. At the end of each day, obtain the load tickets from the Contractor and verify that
the concrete meets specified requirements for the work in progress. Note that different classes
of concrete may be specified for different structural elements. Perform verification checks as
needed throughout the workday to ensure compliance. For bridge deck concrete, pay particular
attention to the maximum allowable substitution of fly ash for cement.
Subsection 601.07(c) 3 requires the Contractor to provide a Concrete Truck Mixer Certification
that shows the various pick-up and throw over configurations and wear marks so that wear on
the blades can be checked. This certification shall be completed whenever the Contractor
purchases a mixer truck. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a copy of this certification
with the correct date and current Project Number for each project. The Contractor will be
required to complete a new certification only if the flights are changed and the wear marks are
different from when the original certification was completed.
601.3.2 Deviation From Specifications
The Contract specifies many requirements for concrete production, which should be strictly
and uniformly enforced to ensure that quality materials and workmanship are incorporated in
600-5
the structure. Any consideration to accept out-of-specification material must be based on sound
engineering judgment to specifically address the problem encountered in the field and must
have the approval of the Project Engineer. Always document the extent and basis of any
deviation from specifications.
601.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

Consider the guidelines in the following Sections when inspecting the placement of structural
concrete. See Section 601.7 for guidelines on placing concrete for bridge decks.
601.4.1 Before Placement
Use the following inspection guidelines before the concrete is placed:
1. Mix Design. Know the requirements of the designated concrete class, and check that the
Contractor has obtained an approved mix design. Ensure that the type of fly ash to be
used has been approved. Know the requirements for slump, air, and admixtures,
including type and quantity.
2. Pouring Schedule/Sequence. The Project Engineer is responsible for approving pouring

sequences and procedures. Know the pouring schedule from central or transit mixers.
3. Truck Mixer Certification. Check that the Contractor has provided a properly complete
Form 46 – Concrete Truck Mixer Inspection Certification for each truck mixer used on
the project.
4. Time and Weather Requirements. Check the specified time limitations and requirements
for placing concrete during both hot and cold weather conditions. Verify that the
Contractor is adequately prepared to protect fresh concrete from damage due to
inclement weather (e.g., rain storms, freezing temperatures).
5. Formwork. Check lines, grades, and clearances of formwork, reinforcing steel and
embedded fixtures for compliance. Verify that all dirt, chips, sawdust, water, and other
foreign materials have been removed from formwork. Wood forms should be thoroughly
moistened with water prior to the concrete pour. See Section 601.2 for additional
guidance on formwork and falsework.
6. Drainage and Weep Holes. Check drainage and weep holes for proper location and
elevation.
601.4.2 During Placement
Consider the following inspection guidelines during the placement of concrete:
1. Load Tickets. Check the information presented on load tickets as discussed in Section
601.3.1. Verify compliance with the mix design.
600-6
2. Mix Proportion Changes. Consult the Materials and Geotechnical Branch regarding any
changes to mix proportions.
3. Adding Water. Ensure that the quantity of water added to the concrete mix at the site
is properly recorded. Verify compliance with specified procedures for adding water
(e.g., mixer drum revolutions, water/cement ratio).
4. Mixer Revolutions. Check that mixer revolutions are performed at mixing speed.
5. Chutes and Troughs.Verify that chutes or troughs are used properly.
6. Segregation. Check that the Contractor’s method of placing concrete minimizes

segregation.
7. Construction Joints. Verify that construction joints are properly formed at the correct
location. Check that construction joints are cleaned and maintained free of debris and
loose material.
8. Tell-tales. Check forms for obvious signs of weakness, such as panel bulges and
settlement. Monitor tell-tales for settlement beyond acceptable limits, and required
immediate corrective action.
9. Pour Sequence. Verify conformance with the designated concrete pour sequence.
10. Reinforcing Steel. Monitor the operation for reinforcing steel displaced by workers or
concrete pours. Check that proper cover and clearance is maintained. Prior to
placement of additional concrete, verify that extraneous mortar is cleaned from
exposed reinforcing steel.
11. Reinforcement Dowels. Check that reinforcement dowels are properly installed at the
correct locations.
12. Time Limitations. Monitor the operation to ensure that specified time limitations are
not exceeded during concrete placement.
13. Consolidation. Check that vibrators provide adequate consolidation, thorough but not
excessive. Do not permit vibrators to be used to move concrete along the forms.
14. Concrete Placed Under Water. Determine and verify the requirements for placing
concrete under water.
601.5 CONCRETE FINISHING

Project Inspectors should closely monitor the finishing operation to ensure that all specified
finishing requirements are being met. Various classes of concrete finish may be specified for
any given structure, and the designated finish must be applied properly at the designated
location. Do not approve a structure until the finishing operation has been thoroughly inspected
600-7
and found acceptable. A structure’s appearance is only as good as the quality incorporated in
the surface finish. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Form Removal. Check that forms are removed at the proper time. The concrete must
be allowed to cure to a strength that will allow the structural member to support itself
without damage when formwork and falsework are removed. Minimum strength criteria
and number of days required before removal of forms will be specified in the Contract.
2. Temperature Considerations. Where a structural coating is designated, verify that the

concrete surface temperature is within allowable limits before application.
3. Joints. Pay particular attention to construction and expansion joints during the finishing
operation. Joint cavities must be maintained free of all mortar and loose concrete.
4. Bridge Decks. See Section 601.7 for guidance on finishing concrete bridge decks.
5. Surface Preparation. Verify that exposed surfaces are thoroughly cleaned by water
and/or sand blasting at the proper time and that all irregular projections are removed.
Check that all cavities, honeycomb spots, and broken edges are properly cleaned,
saturated with water, and pointed and trued with the specified mortar mixture. Check
that mortar patches are cured as specified.
6. Types of Surface Finishes. Verify that the designated class of finish is properly applied
at the correct location. Although a Class 1 finish is not a comprehensive treatment, it is
just as important as other surface treatments. Class 1 finishes are applied immediately
after form removal. Before the application of a Class 5 finish or a structural coating, the
concrete surface must been allowed to cure as specified. Where a structural coating is
designated, check that the coating material and color have been approved, and verify
the application rate and number of coats for compliance.
601.6 CONCRETE CURING

The requirements for the allowable methods of curing structural concrete are defined in the
Standard Specifications and must be strictly enforced. Closely monitor the operation for
compliance to all specifications. The surface of the concrete must be maintained in a moist
condition for the minimum curing period, which includes the period during which the finishing
operation is performed. Check that that Contractor is adequately prepared to protect the
concrete and maintain the surface in a moist condition, especially during hot, sunny weather.
1. Temperature Requirements. Know the requirements for cold-weather concreting.

Concrete must be maintained at the minimum specified temperature for the minimum
number of curing days.
2. Curing Method. Verify that the Contractor’s proposed curing method has been approved
for the project.
600-8
3. Curing Compound. Ensure that the curing compound has been approved for use on the
project, and verify the application rate for conformance.
4. Bridge Decks. See Section 601.7 for guidance on curing concrete bridge decks.
601.7 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECKS

The following Sections specifically address the construction of concrete bridge decks. Sections
601.1 through 601.6 provide additional information that should be considered for structural
concrete work.
601.7.1 Pre-Pour Conference
A Structural Concrete Pre-Pour Conference will be held prior to the concrete deck pour to
discuss project requirements with the Contractor. The Agenda for the Pre-Pour Conference is
presented in Appendix A. During the various stages of the project, it is important to maintain
communications with Contractor personnel (e.g., Superintendent, Foremen, Material Testing
Supervisor) that have been established at the Conference.
601.7.2 Stay-in-Place Forms
Consider the following where stay-in-place steel forms are used in bridge deck construction:
1. Erection Drawings. Ensure that the Contractor has submitted erection drawings, and
verify that materials and installation comply with these drawings.
2. Form Connections. Verify that form connections are made in compliance with specified
requirements.
3. Welding Considerations. Monitor the operation to ensure that welding arcs do not come
into contact with steel girder flanges.
Problems with forming concrete decks on precast prestressed concrete girders are typically due
to inadequate haunch height. The haunch is the distance from the top of the girder to the
bottom of the bridge deck. The haunch is specified by the designer on the plans and is designed
to accommodate girder camber, deck geometry, and forming of the deck. It allows for the
girder deflections due to the weight of the slab (dead load deflections).
Girder camber is due to the force of the tensioned prestressing strand and the time dependent
effects of creep and shrinkage. Creep and shrinkage are a function of the actual concrete mix
placed in the girder. Camber in a girder cannot be reliably predicted, since it is not known
during design what the girder's age will be at the time of erection, the creep and shrinkage
characteristics of the concrete mix, the concrete strength when the prestressing force is
applied to the girder, and how these factors will interact.
Inadequate haunch height problems generally have been the result of:
600-9
1. The fabricator not monitoring the camber growth of the girders and taking corrective
action when necessary, i.e. weighting the girders down.
2. The designer not allowing adequate tolerance for girder camber when specifying the
haunch height.
3. The girders sitting on the bridge substructure for extended periods before the deck is
placed.
4. The designer not making an allowance for the bridge deck geometry when determining
the haunch height, for example, the effects of a vertical curve or the deck cross slope.
During construction, a number of different problems can develop that result in a difference
between the haunch height specified on the plans and the actual haunch height in the field.
For example:
1. Less camber than predicted or failure to consider the effects of a crest vertical curve
during design leads to a deeper haunch which can:
a. Increase the dead load on the girders and subsequently create additional dead
load stress or deflection that the girder was not designed for.
b. Increase the height of the haunch, which probably was not planned for by the
Contractor and is often discovered after the girders are erected. This often leads
to conflicts and discussions about payment and time requirements for additional
work. It may require ordering new forming materials.
2. More camber than predicted or failure to consider the effects of a sag vertical curve
during design leads to a thinner haunch which can result in:
a. The inability to attain the minimum concrete bearing thickness under the ends
of the precast concrete deck panels when the panels are used for deck forming.
b. Girders projecting into the deck, reducing the deck thickness over the girders
and complicating the support of deck forming systems.
3. More camber than predicted due to:
a. The fabricator failing to support girder segments stored in the yard at the bearing
seat locations at the end of the girders, or
b. The fabricator failing to weight the girders down, when there is an especially
long period between girder fabrication and erection.
See the standard note on CDOT’s prestressed girder worksheets for more information on
the remedial action required by the Contractor to prevent excessive camber growth (B-
616-BT,BX,SL, and U).
600-10
4. More or less camber than predicted due to bearing seats constructed at an elevation
lower or higher, respectively, than that shown in the plans. As specified in subsection
601.12(l) of the Standard Specifications,– the Contractor shall provide an as constructed
survey of abutments and piers prior to girder erection. Conducting this survey is
important to predicting problems with haunch depth and allowing for any necessary
adjustments prior to girder erection.
When problems arise, discuss the options with the Contractor, the bridge designer, the roadway
designer, and the Area Engineer.
Options that may be considered:
1. Raising or lowering the grade of the bridge deck and approach roadway to accommodate
the actual girder cambers, if possible.
2. Reducing the bearing thickness under the precast panels by using a grout as the panels
are placed.
3. When metal stay-in-place deck forms are used, letting the girder project up into the
deck and reduce the clearance between the bottom mat of steel reinforcement and the
girder. In some cases, they may sit directly on the girder.
4. When precast box girders are placed side by side, there can be differences in camber
between adjacent girders. This can result in a thinner slab or thicker slab than required
on the plans at various locations and the clearance between the reinforcement mat and
the tops of the girders will vary. This will require variable height chairs for
reinforcement support.
601.7.3 Finish and Placement Considerations
To provide a smooth, uniform deck finish, it is important to balance the placement and finishing
operation with the delivery of a uniform concrete mix. The delivery rate should be governed
by the quantity of concrete that the Contractor’s force and equipment can properly place and
finish. The rate of placing and finishing should never be adjusted to accommodate a faster
delivery rate. A proper balance will minimize frequent stops in the finishing operation, which
usually creates humps in the deck. In addition, pay particular attention to slump and air
content, because these factors greatly influence mix workability and consistency.
601.7.4 Concrete Placement Considerations
601.7.4.1 Before Placement
Consider the following guidelines before the concrete bridge deck pour begins:
1. Pre-Pour Conference. Verify that the Pre-Pour Conference has been held (see 601.7.1).
Review the conference minutes, and check that the minutes have been updated, as
needed, before each pour.
600-11
2. Temporary Traffic Control. Check that all provisions for protecting vehicle and
pedestrian traffic have been adequately addressed.
3. Safety. Check that all safety items including handrails and toe rails are installed properly
to protect workers and the traveling public.
4. Reinforcing Steel. Check the reinforcing steel for compliance immediately prior to the
concrete pour.
5. Deck Machine Support. Verify that the deck machine is properly supported beyond the
edge of the bridge deck.
6. Finishing Equipment. Verify that the screeding and finishing equipment has been
checked for trueness. See Section 601.7.5 for additional information on finishing bridge
decks.
7. Dry Run. Monitor the dry run of the finishing machine to ensure that the required
thicknesses and clearances will result.
8. Test Slab. At least 14 days prior to initial placement of Class H, Class HT or Class S50
concrete on or in a deck the Contractor shall place, finish and cure a test slab according
to the project specifications.
601.7.4.2 During Placement
Consider the following guidelines during the placement of bridge deck concrete:
1. Reinforcing Steel. Randomly check and document clearances of reinforcing steel.
2. Mortar Roll. Check for the proper quantity of mortar rolling ahead of the screed. A loss
of roll will usually create a low spot, which will lack good consolidation.
3. Vibrators. Check that mechanical vibrators are being properly used to adequately
consolidate the concrete.
4. Hand Work. Monitor the hand work used during the operation. Hand work should be kept
to a minimum.
5. Slab Thickness. Check slab thickness for compliance using the stabbing method.
6. Finishing Machine. Verify that the finishing machine is providing a uniform, sealed
surface finish with minimal ridges and voids. See Section 601.7.5 for additional
information on finishing bridge decks.
7. Water. Ensure that the quantity of water applied for finishing is the minimal required
and that application is performed using an approved fog spray.
8. Slab Surface. Before the concrete takes its initial set, check the deck slab for
irregularities, and verify that the Contractor is performing straight-edge testing, as
600-12
specified. Ensure that the deck surface conforms to the requirements for pavement
smoothness.
9. Joints. Monitor the operation to ensure that joints are properly constructed at the
correct location. Where expansion joints are installed, consider the following:
a. Angles. Angles must be accurately set with respect to cross-section, grade, and
curbing.
b. Anchor Bars. Check that anchor bars are correctly set and attached to angles.
c. Compression Joint Sealer. Verify that the compression joint sealer is installed in
conformance with specified requirements.
d. Finger-Type Expansion Joint Devices. Where designated, check the vertical and
horizontal alignment of the devices, and ensure that they are installed parallel
to grade without lateral contact between fingers.
601.7.4.3 Bond of Cast-in-Place Concrete Deck to Precast Elements
The top surface condition of precast prestressed concrete girders and deck panels will affect
the bond of cast in place concrete to these elements. Since this is a mechanical bond, factors
such as surface roughness, dirt or debris on the surface, surface water, the substrate concrete's
moisture condition, and consolidation of the deck concrete placed on the precast elements all
can affect the bond. These factors also apply to the bond of thin concrete overlays to existing
decks on bridge deck rehabilitation projects. Delamination at this interface can lead to deck
failure.
When precast prestressed concrete deck panels, girders, or both are used, inspect these
elements and have the Contractor remove all dust, dirt, water, and other deleterious
substances from the top surface prior to placing the deck concrete. The bond of the cast-in-
place concrete to the precast members is dependent on the cement paste flowing into the
surface irregularities (pores) of the substrate concrete. Thus, any material that covers or fills
these small voids or pores will inhibit the bond of the concrete and could lead to delamination
and premature failure of the deck.
601.7.4.4 Bridge Deck Construction Joints
Construction joints (CJ) in bridge decks are used for various reasons, for example: to reduce
the size of a deck placement or when an emergency bulkhead is needed to suspend a large deck
pour. Ideally, construction joints should be located to allow the girders in a span to deflect and
the ends to rotate under the weight of the entire deck. When CJ are not placed at correct
locations, girder end rotation and deformation are restrained by the hardened concrete.
Therefore, in the process of placing the deck on precast prestressed concrete girders, the ends
of the girders in the next span should not be restrained until about 80% of the next span is
placed. To approximate these conditions, a construction joint can be placed at about 80% ± 10%
of the span length as shown in the following examples.
600-13
During a deck placement (See subsection 601.12 of the Standard Specifications), the leading
edge of the fresh concrete should be kept parallel to the substructure so that the girders are
loaded evenly during the placing and screeding operations. Construction joints should be placed
parallel to the substructure. Construction joints should be cleaned of surface laitance, curing
compounds, and other foreign materials before fresh concrete is placed against the surface of
the joint.
See Structural Concrete Pre-Pour Conference in Appendix A for the construction joint locations.
600-14
600-15
601.7.5 Concrete Finishing Considerations
601.7.5.1 Before Finishing
The Department requires the use of self-propelled mechanical finishers for all concrete bridge
decks. The mechanical finisher is usually supported by a rail support system that is attached to
the bridge deck, which transfers the load to the outside girders. If improperly installed, the use
of a rail support system on welded plate or wide flange girders can cause thin decks or thick
overhang sections, primarily due to girder rotation and overhang settlement. To prevent this
condition, adequate cross-bracing must be installed between the outside and intermediate
girders. Where rail support systems are installed, check that the spacing of the rail supports is
sufficient to carry the load of the finishing operation without causing undue girder rotation or
overhang settlement. In addition, check that the rail supports have been properly adjusted for
the required alignment and grade. This adjustment check is typically performed using a string
line to verify the grade at various locations along the deck while the mechanical finisher is
moved into position.
601.7.5.2 During Finishing
Consider the following guidelines during the finishing of concrete bridge decks:
1. Hand Finishing. Because the use of self-propelled mechanical finishers is required for all
concrete bridge decks, CDOT expects a higher quality surface in terms of smoothness
and uniformity and a strict conformance to designated lines and grades. Therefore, hand
finishing should only be permitted where it is necessary to remove surface irregularities
such as:
a. holes and depressions resulting from test procedures,
b. surface tears caused by the screed, and
c. minor incidental deformities.
2. Plastic Turf Drag. When the final riding surface is the concrete surface, a plastic turf
shall be dragged longitudinally over the full width of bridge deck after a seamless strip
of burlap or other approved fabric has been dragged longitudinally over the full width
of bridge deck to produce a uniform surface of gritty texture. Verify the proper dragging
of a seamless strip of turf over the deck surface. Check that the drag material is
maintained clean and free from encrusted mortar.
3. Grooving/Surface Texturing. Where designated for decks that will not receive a
bituminous overlay, verify that the deck surface is properly textured.
601.7.5.3 After Finishing
Consider the following guidelines after the finishing operation:
600-16
Surface Check. Before the concrete takes its initial set, verify that all joints are tested with a
straight edge and properly corrected. Check the entire slab surface for trueness, as needed,
using a string line or a straight edge.
Joint Edges. Verify that joint edges are rounded with an approved radius hand tool, and that
any tool marks on the adjacent surface are removed by brooming.
Surface Protection. Ensure that the finished surface is properly protected from damage due to
traffic.
601.7.6 Concrete Curing Considerations
Immediately after the concrete is placed and finished, the deck will be cured and protected in
accordance with specified requirements, including any Special Provisions.
1. Curing Method. Verify that the method of curing has been approved and is following
immediately behind the finishing operation without damaging the designated surface
finish.
2. Deck Cracking. Cracks allow moisture and de-icing chemicals to penetrate the deck slab,
and extensive cracking may affect the durability of the structure. Crack width is usually
measured by inserting a wire gauge in the cavity. Contact the Staff Bridge Branch at
(303) 757-9309 where crack widths of 0.02 inches or larger are observed. Where crack
widths greater than 0.035 inches are found, ensure that the Contractor immediately
repairs the cracks in accordance with subsection 601.15(i) of the Standard
Specifications.
601.7.7 Approach Slabs
For joint or tied approach slabs, use the guidelines for bridge deck construction to inspect
formwork, reinforcement, mix production, concrete placement, and the finishing operation.
The inspection of approach slabs should be performed with the same diligence as for the bridge
deck.
600-17
SECTION 602 REINFORCING STEEL
602.1 GENERAL
The design strength of reinforced concrete structures cannot be fully realized unless the
specified reinforcing steel is placed as designated in the Contract. The type and size of
reinforcing steel; bar location, spacing, and clearance; and the bond developed between the
concrete and the bar surface are critical factors to consider during inspection.

Consider the following guidelines before work involving reinforcing steel for structural concrete
and concrete bridge decks begins:
1. Mill Test Reports. Upon delivery, compare bar bundle tags with Mill Test Reports to
ensure that bar size, material grade, and coating meet specified requirements. Spot
check bar identification markings for proper steel grade.
2. Certificates of Compliance. Verify that Certificates of Compliance have been received.
3. Bar List. Verify that the Contractor’s Bar List conforms to the Contract with respect to
bar size, quantity, and bending details.
4. Bar Condition. Check reinforcing bars for mud, oil, rust, and detrimental scale. Concrete
will only bond with a clean bar surface. In addition, check bars for straightness, and
ensure that they are protected from damage. Ensure that any damage to epoxy coating
is adequately repaired.
5. Bar Bending. Become familiar with the bar bending details. Where field bending is
required, ensure that the proper procedures are being followed, and verify if the
application of heat is permissible.
6. Additional References. As needed, consult the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

Manual of Practice for recommended placement practices.
Consider the following guidelines during the placement of reinforcing steel for structural
concrete and concrete bridge decks:
1. Bar Alignment and Spacing. Check that bar alignment and spacing conforms to the
Contract. Verify that all bars and other embedded items are correctly placed so that
the concrete can be adequately consolidated.
600-18
2. Bar Clearance. Check bar clearance and depth of concrete cover for compliance. Ensure
that the proper minimum clearance is obtained between the top mat of deck bars and
the surface of the concrete.
3. Bar Splicing. Check bar splices to ensure that they are the proper length for the type
and size of bar placed. Note that epoxy-coated bars require longer splices than uncoated
bars. Verify that bar splices are correctly staggered.
4. Bar Supports. The type, number, and spacing of supports must be adequate to minimize
sagging, displacement, and damage of reinforcing bars. Plastic or epoxy coated supports
are required for epoxy-coated bars.
5. Securing of Bars. To minimize displacement, bars must be securely tied. Verify that the
bars are tied at all intersections or as otherwise designated. For bridge decks, check
that the upper mat of bars is properly tied to the lower mat. Do not permit welding of
bars except as noted in the Contract. Note that the use of coated ties is required for
epoxy-coated bars.
6. Post-Tensioned Concrete. Adjustments made to reinforcement in post-tensioned

concrete require approval by the Project Engineer.
7. Optional Form 279 (see Appendix B) can be used to document quantities of reinforcing
steel for payment purposes.
600-19
SECTION 603 CULVERTS AND SEWERS
603.1 GENERAL
The acceptability of culvert and sewer installations depends on the extent to which material
and construction conform to the Contract. Many factors must be considered during inspection,
including:
1. structure alignment, elevation, and grade;
2. alignment of upstream and downstream channel, where applicable;
3. camber and end treatments;
4. bed preparation and condition and uniformity of bedding material;
5. backfilling method and material (see Section 206); and
6. embankment material and construction.
Culvert and sewer designs are typically based on the results of preliminary data collection and
field investigations. Although adequate designs will be specified, it is common to discover
situations that were not found during the field investigation or considered during design.
Project Engineers and Project Inspectors should continuously monitor the construction
operation and be watchful for situations that may warrant consideration of complete or partial
redesign work.

Review the Contract for the location, type and size of culverts, and bedding required.
1. Pipe Material. Upon delivery, verify receipt of proper material certifications. Inspect
pipe and coating material for cracks, defects, and damage that may have occurred
during shipping. Verify that smooth lined pipe is being used for irrigation and storm drain
systems. Check pipes for proper:
a. class, type, and size;
b. thickness, gauge, and schedule;
c. coating and lining, and
d. lengths of sections.
600-20
2. Safety Considerations. Review the safety requirements for trenching operations and
confined space entry. Do not enter manholes, inlets, vaults, trenches, or other confined
spaces without taking the proper safety precautions.
3. Staking. Check that manholes, inlets, and pipes have been properly staked. Verify that
staked locations and elevations are appropriate for existing field conditions.
4. Utilities. Verify that the Contractor has located all underground utilities. Ensure that all
conflicts have been resolved.
Consider the following guidelines during the construction of culverts and sewers:
1. Grade Stakes. Frequently check grade stakes for errors.
2. Excavation. Know the requirements for pipe installation in new embankments. Check
excavation for correct depth, width, and alignment. Verify that the trench bed has been
properly graded and compacted. Where rock is encountered during excavation, enforce
the minimum depth of removal below grade.
3. Bedding. Check the type and depth of bedding for conformance.
4. Placement. Verify that pipe placement begins at the downstream end. Check that the
entire length of pipe rests in contact with the bedding material at the proper flow line.
Perform frequent alignment and elevation checks. Be exacting on sanitary sewer grades
and flow-line smoothness.
5. Pipe Jacking. Where pipe jacking is required, verify the proper proportioning of the
grout mixture. Check the roadway surface for signs of upheaval or failure, and require
immediate corrective action. Where jacking is designated, proposed alternative
methods require written approval by the Project Engineer.
6. Pipe Joints. Check the direction of joint laps for conformance. The bell or grooved end
of concrete pipe or the outside lap of metal or plastic pipe must be placed in the
upstream direction. Check that joints are properly sealed or banded and snug. Verify
that joints are grouted, where required.
7. Lift Holes. Ensure that all lift holes are properly plugged.
8. Pipe Damage. Check in-place pipe for damage prior to backfilling and again before
accepting the work. Ensure that any damage to coating or lining is properly repaired.
9. Pressure Testing. Prior to backfilling, check that storm drain and sewer lines have been
pressure tested for water tightness as specified.
10. Backfilling Operation. Check the backfill material for conformance. Verify that the
backfill material is being placed and fully compacted in lifts of the required thickness.
600-21
This operation must be performed equally and simultaneously on both sides of the pipe.
Note that the required compaction must be obtained prior to placing successive lifts.
Observe the operation to ensure that the method of compaction does not cause pipe
damage or displacement.
Prior to acceptance, verify that the pipe is properly cleaned and in good repair. Trenches in
roadways must be properly resurfaced before opening to traffic.
Deflection testing is required at least 30 days after installation and backfill have been
completed.
600-22
SECTION 604 MANHOLES, INLETS, AND METER VAULTS
604.1 GENERAL
Section 604 of the Standard Specifications governs the material and construction requirements
for concrete manholes, inlets, and meter vaults. Unless the type is specifically designated,
these items, or portions thereof, may be precast or cast-in-place.
See Section 601 for information on reinforced concrete structures and bridge decks, and Section
602 for information on reinforcing steel.

Prior to starting work on drainage structures, review the Contract. Verify existing drainage
conditions, and check that the structures are staked at the proper location and elevation.
1. Safety. Review safety requirements for trenching operations and confined space entry.
Do not enter manholes, inlets, vaults, trenches, or other confined spaces without taking
the proper safety precautions.
2. Precast Structures. Upon delivery of precast structures, verify receipt of proper material
certifications. Check the type and dimensions of precast items for conformance. Where
applicable, check the spacing of stair rungs for compliance. Pay particular attention to
defects and damage that may have occurred during shipping.
3. Cast-in-Place Structures. Where cast-in-place structures are used, check forms and
reinforcing steel for proper condition and dimension. Check the Contractor’s Bar List.
Consider the following during construction of manholes, inlets, and meter vaults:
1. Pipe Invert and Flow Line. Check pipe invert and flow-line elevations.
2. Manholes. A smooth flow line must be provided between manholes and pipes. Check
that a good union with pipes is achieved. Where precast sections are used, check that
neat joints are constructed. Verify the proper use of brick and mortar to make field
adjustments.
3. Inlets. Check for proper dimension, formwork, concrete placement, and curing.
600-23
Verify that all drainage structures are cleaned of any debris prior to accepting the work.
1. Grates. Check grates for acceptability with respect to type, dimension, orientation, and
galvanization.
2. Manhole Covers. Check the type and dimension of manhole covers for compliance.
Where located within pavements, check the slope and elevation of covers.
3. Mortar/Grouting. Verify that any needed mortar repairs and grouting around pipe are
properly performed.
600-24
SECTION 605 SUBSURFACE DRAINS
605.1 GENERAL
Subsurface drains are installed to remove water from the roadway prism. Several different
types may be designated. Underdrains may be installed to lower a high-water table, to intercept
and dispose of water seeping into the roadway from sources outside the roadbed, or to intercept
and control water seepage from the backslope. Edge drains are typically installed parallel to
and near the edge of pavement to intercept water that seeps through the pavement surface
courses.

Various types of pipe material may be designated for subsurface drainage. Know the locations
where the designated types of pipe are to be installed, and consider the following:
1. Safety. Review safety requirements for trenching operations. Do not enter trenches or
other confined spaces without taking the proper safety precautions.
2. Material Considerations. Upon delivery, verify receipt of proper material certifications.

Check pipe materials for proper type (e.g., perforated, nonperforated), material grade,
schedule, and diameter. Where corrosion resistant pipe is designated, pay particular
attention to the specified material requirements. Check filter fabric material for
compliance.
3. Staking. Check the location and elevation of staking for conformance.
4. Field Adjustments. Be alert for adjustments to underdrain locations that may be

performed to enhance the functionality of the system.
During the construction of subsurface drainage systems, consider the following guidelines:
1. Trench. Check trench location and shape for compliance. Perform grade checks
regularly.
2. Bedding. Verify that the proper type of bedding material is being used. Check the depth
of bedding for conformance.
3. Perforated Pipe. Verify that perforated pipe is being used at the proper location and
that the pipe is being placed correctly with regard to the orientation of the perforations.
4. Joints. Verify that pipe sections are being securely fastened using the proper method of
connection (e.g., connecting bands).
600-25
5. Filter Fabric. Verify that the proper type of filter fabric is being correctly placed. Watch
for tears and contamination of the fabric material.
6. Filter Material. Check that the filter material is clean and uncontaminated. Ensure that
the filter material is corrected where contamination such as dirt, clay, and vegetation
is observed.
7. Backfilling. Verify that the backfill material is as specified and the backfilling operation
does not damage the filter fabric.
600-26
SECTION 606 GUARDRAIL
606.1 GENERAL
Where guardrail and concrete barrier rail systems are warranted, they are installed to prevent
errant vehicles from leaving the traveled way and moving into fixed objects, steep slide slopes,
and opposing traffic. Different types of designs exist to address specific conditions.

See Section 210.2.1 and consider the following guidelines before installing guardrail and
concrete barrier rail systems:
1. Materials Considerations. Check the type of rail system for conformance, including rail
sections, hardware, and posts.
2. Location. Verify stake locations. Check lateral offset, longitudinal length, termini
location, post spacing, rail curvature, parabolic flares, and trench width, where
applicable.
See Section 210.2.1 and consider the following guidelines during the construction of guardrail
and concrete barrier rail systems:
1. Guardrail Post Installation. Unless designated otherwise, guardrail posts may be driven
in place, set in dug holes, or set on a concrete base. Check post spacing, elevation, and
alignment regularly. Where posts are driven, watch for irregular movement, possibly
indicating an underground obstruction. Check driven posts for damage (e.g., distortion,
burring). Where posts are set in dug holes, watch for overdrilling and require backfilling
and compaction as needed to adjust depth and provide a firm foundation. After setting,
verify that backfill material is placed and compacted in layers around posts. Check that
all posts are set firm and plumb and that they are within tolerance of the required
alignment and elevation.
2. Cutting of Wood Posts. Where wood posts are cut in the field, verify that the exposed
surface is properly treated.
3. Installation of Rail Sections. Check that all fittings and metal plates are securely placed
in the correct position. Check that rail sections are properly lapped in a smooth,
continuous installation. Check that all bolts are drawn tight. Check the rail height and
rail face (i.e., with respect to lateral offset and alignment) for conformance and any
needed adjustment.
600-27
4. Concrete Barrier Rail. Concrete barrier rail may be either precast slipformed, or cast-
in-place. Check the trench lines and grades for conformance and ensure that the base
is properly compacted and watered before the barrier is placed. At transitions, check
connection hardware for conformance and ensure that it is properly installed. Verify
that cast-in-place and precast barriers are given a Class I finish and that slipformed
barriers are given a vertical broom finish. Check that lift holes are properly filled and
sealed. Ensure that the barrier is checked with a straightedge in the longitudinal
direction and corrected where out of tolerance.
5. Terminals and Transitions. Pay particular attention to the construction details for end
treatments, median terminals, and rail transitions (e.g., post type, post spacing,
number of rail sections, lapping direction, splices, method of connecting, fastener type,
reflector tab location). Specialized hardware and designs are commonly used at these
locations and require close inspection prior to acceptance.
6. Dissimilar Metals. Where dissimilar metals contact each other, ensure that the surfaces
are separated by an approved protective coating.
7. Traffic Considerations. Where the facility will be maintained open to traffic, it is good
construction practice for the installation of rail sections to closely follow the installation
of guardrail posts. At the end of the workday, check to ensure that, the termini of
exposed rail sections are treated as specified.
600-28
SECTION 607 FENCES
607.1 GENERAL
Fences are generally placed within the CDOT right of way.

Consider the following guidelines before the installation of fencing begins:
1. Agreements. Check the right of way agreements for special fence requirements.
2. Material Considerations. Know the required type of fencing and gates. Check material
certifications for compliance and document material condition. Check the weight,
length, and coating of steel posts and the preservative treatment, straightness, and size
of wood posts for acceptability. Verify that barbed and woven-wire fabric rolls are
tagged with the required information. Check hardware for conformance. Concrete used
for fence installation will comply with the requirements of Section 601 of the Standard
Specifications. The use of field-mixed concrete requires previous approval.
3. Staking. Check that the staked alignment is approximately six inches inside CDOT right
of way unless otherwise specified and that the post spacing is properly marked.
4. Temporary Fence. Verify if temporary fence is required (e.g., stock control, pedestrian
safety, wetlands protection).
Regularly check line, grade, and post spacing, and consider the following guidelines during the
installation of fencing:
1. Posts. Check that posts are set at the specified depth and elevation. Verify that metal
posts are set to face the correct direction.
2. Corner and Line Brace Posts. Check for properly located corner and line brace posts.
Verify that line braces have been installed where needed for grade changes.
3. Concrete Curing. Concrete must be allowed to set sufficiently around posts and braces.
Verify that the concrete has been permitted to gain the required strength before the
fabric or wire is stretched.
4. Wire/Fabric. Know which side of the post the fence fabric or wire is to be installed.
Check that the fence fabric or wire is properly stretched and fastened.
600-29
5. Sound Barrier. Where sound barriers are installed, verify that components are tightly
abutted.
6. Vegetation Protection. Verify that plastic fencing is installed around vegetation that is
to be protected.
Ensure that no advertising tags or signs are placed on fencing or within the right of way.
600-30
SECTION 608 SIDEWALKS AND BIKEWAYS
608.1 GENERAL
Sidewalks and bikeways will either be concrete or bituminous paved facilities, as designated in
the Contract. They are constructed on a solid foundation, typically bed course material that
has been properly graded and compacted.

608.2.1.1 Subgrade
Check the cross-slope, elevation, and alignment of the subgrade for compliance. Where bed
course material is required, ensure that the required type and depth of material is properly
placed, shaped, and compacted. Check for soft spots, and enforce the Contract provisions with
respect to needed repairs. Do not permit construction on a frozen base. Freeze-thaw cycles
tend to loosen a compacted base. Recheck base density after freezing and thawing.
608.2.1.2 Curb Ramps
Review the location and construction details of curb ramps that are designated in the Contract.
Pay particular attention to the slope and surface finishing requirements of curb ramps.
Detectable warnings are typically required to meet ADA requirements, and field adjustments
may be needed to meet slope requirements. Review the locations of drainage structures to
ensure that no new drainage structures are aligned with curb ramps.
Current as builts utilize Survey 123 application, which allows CDOT’s inspection staff to record
curb ramp as-built measurements on a tablet in the field. This electronic system will help
ensure we are building functionally accessible ramps and keep CDOT’s curb ramp database
accurate in real-time. Measurements that exceed the standard and/or tolerance must have an
accompanying Form 464 Design Exception Variance Request and Curb Ramp Variance Support
Document that are signed by a Program Engineer in accordance with Procedural Directive 605.1.
Survey 123 application, information and available resources for as builts can be found here:
https://www.codot.gov/business/civilrights/accessibility/ada/documents
CDOT recognizes that it is not always possible for altered elements, spaces, or facilities to fully
comply with new construction requirements because of existing physical constraints. Where
existing physical constraints make it impracticable for altered elements, spaces, or facilities to
600-31
fully comply with the requirements for new construction, compliance is required to the extent
practicable within the scope of the project. Variance support document can be found here:
https://www.codot.gov/business/civilrights/ada/assets/curb-ramp-variance-support-
document-091917-final.pdf/view
Questions about the curb ramps program, taking measurements, or documentation and
resources can be directed to Civil Rights & Business Resource Center at
[email protected].
608.2.1.3 Concrete Materials and Equipment
Where concrete will be used for sidewalks and bikeways check that the concrete complies with
the specified class and that the mix design has been approved (see Section 601). Check for
concrete coloring agents if required for curb ramps. Ensure that the specified sampling and
testing requirements are being met. Where reinforcing steel is required, check to ensure that
the reinforcement is of the proper type and size (see Section 602). Check the type, number,
and condition of equipment that will be used to place, consolidate, finish, and cure concrete.
Where forms are used, ensure that they are in good condition and of the proper type and
dimension. Where slipforming is used, check the slipforming equipment for acceptability.
Ensure that the Contractor has adequate materials on hand to properly cure and, as needed,
protect the concrete during cold weather.
608.2.1.4 Bituminous Materials and Equipment
Where bituminous materials will be used for sidewalks and bikeways, check materials for
conformance and that, the mix design has been approved. Ensure that the specified sampling
and testing requirements are being met. Check the type, number, and condition of equipment
that will be used to place and compact the mix. Where it is impractical to use standard paving
equipment, ensure that the Contractor’s proposed alternative methods have been approved.
See Section 401 for additional guidance.
608.2.2.1 Concrete Sidewalks and Bikeways
Consider the following guidelines during the construction of concrete sidewalks and bikeways:
1. Forms. Where forms are used, check that they are set to the proper line and elevation
with respect to grade stakes and that they are firmly staked into position. Pay particular
attention to how forms are set with respect to locations of inlet sections, curb ramps,
and driveways, and require adjustments where needed. Ensure that forms are set to
accommodate drainage. Prior to placement of concrete, verify that forms are treated
with an approved release agent.
600-32
2. Reinforcement. Where reinforcing steel is required, check spacing, clearance, and

supports for acceptability.
3. Moistening of Subgrade. Ensure that the subgrade has been thoroughly moistened before
the placement of concrete.
4. Placement and Consolidation. Check for the proper placement and consolidation of
concrete. Where slipforming is used, check that the grade has been trimmed to the
correct line, cross-slope, and elevation. Check grade stakes, grade line, and electronic
controls for proper adjustment, including locations of inlet sections, curb ramps, and
driveways. Regularly check alignment, elevation, and crossslope during slipforming, and
ensure that the extruded section conforms to typical section, especially the pan (i.e.,
spill or catch).
5. Joints. Check that transverse expansion joints and saw cuts are located and constructed
properly. Joint types and locations should match those in adjacent concrete. Ensure
that approved expansion material is placed to full depth in the joint reservoir. Verify
that edging is performed where required. Construction joints shall be formed around all
appurtenances, such as manholes and utility poles that extend through the sidewalk.
6. Finishing. Check the acceptability of the surface finish. Pay particular attention to
texturing requirements (e.g., curb ramps). The finishing operation ideally should be
accomplished without the use of additional water.
7. Curing. Verify that concrete is properly cured for the specified curing period. Where
curing compound is used, check that it is of an approved type and that the rate and time
of application are acceptable. Ensure that the Contactor complies with the provisions
for concrete protection during cold weather.
8. Protection. Verify that the Contractor protects the concrete sidewalks and bikeways for
the specified period.
9. Form Removal and Backfill. Form removal and backfill must not be started until the
concrete has reached sufficient strength to withstand damage. Ensure the edges are
adequately shouldered. Watch for damage to the concrete during the backfill operation.
608.2.2.2 Bituminous Sidewalks and Bikeways
Check the alignment, elevation, depth, and cross-slope of the bed course material and ensure
that it has been thoroughly compacted. Verify that the correct mix is being used. Where tack
coat is specified, check that a proper type of bituminous material is being applied at the
specified rate. Monitor the operation for proper mix placement and ensure that full compaction
is being achieved. After construction, check that the edges are adequately shouldered. See
Section 401 for additional guidance.
600-33
SECTION 609 CURB AND GUTTER
609.1 GENERAL
The treatment of the foundation and forms for curb and gutter systems greatly affects the
quality of the final product. Substandard work generally produces curb and gutter systems that
promote standing water and deterioration of the roadway structure.

Before construction begins, ensure that the base has been properly prepared (see Section
608.2.1.1). Where concrete curb and gutter is specified, check the concrete class and review
Section 608.2.1.3 for additional materials and equipment considerations. Where bituminous
curb is specified, verify mix design approval and that the curb machine is of an approved type.
Review Section 608.2.1.4 for additional guidance.
609.2.2.1 Concrete Curb and Gutter
Check that forms are rigidly braced at the correct line, grade, and depth. Require correction
of any weakness found in formwork. Verify that forms have been set correctly to accommodate
all drainage per typical section (e.g., pan constructed to spill or catch). Where reinforcement
is required, check for proper type and placement. Watch for proper placement and
consolidation of concrete. Check joints for proper type and location, including mortared joints
where applicable. Check length of sections and finish of joints upon form removal. Verify
surface finish and timely application of curing compound.
See Section 608.2.2.1 for additional guidance.
609.2.2.2 Bituminous Curb
Check the location and layout for compliance with the drainage requirements of the Contract.
Monitor placement to ensure that the curb machine is forming a uniform and compact curb
shape at the correct alignment. Ensure that the proper type and rate of tack are applied in only
the area where curb is to be placed. Check for the proper application of a fog coat after the
curb is placed. Know if the curb is to receive paint or seal, and check for a clean and dry
surface. Verify that temperature requirements are met.
Ensure that the Contractor takes adequate precautions to protect concrete from cold weather
conditions. Verify that forms are not removed and the backfill operation is not begun until the
concrete has gained sufficient strength to prevent damage from the operation. Upon removal
600-34
of forms, inspect the concrete curb and gutter for honeycombed areas and require proper repair
work to be performed.
600-35
SECTION 610 MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL
610.1 GENERAL
Median cover material will generally be comprised of a concrete, bituminous, or stone material.
The quality of the finished product depends greatly on the attention given to ensuing a properly
prepared base. Construction requirements for median cover material are specified in Section
608 of the Standard Specifications.

The inspection guidance provided in Section 608.2 generally applies to concrete and bituminous
median cover. In addition, consider the following:
1. Herbicide Treatment. Prior to herbicide treatment, ensure that the Region Maintenance
Noxious Weed Coordinator has been notified of the location and time of application. See
Section 217.2 for additional guidance on herbicide treatment.
2. Pattern and Color. Check for the correct pattern and color of application.
3. Stone Material. Check for the correct type, size, and depth of stone material.
4. Plastic Sheeting. Where plastic sheeting is required, verify it is of the correct type and
thickness.
5. Expansion Joint Material. Ensure placement is in accordance with the Contract.
600-36
SECTION 611 CATTLE GUARDS
611.1 GENERAL
Cattle guards may be either precast or cast-in-place. The Contract will designate the location
and type to be constructed. Each cattle guard must be constructed in accordance with the
details shown in the Contract.

Cattle guards must be carefully constructed to the specified grade and cross-slope to provide a
smooth riding surface and a well-drained facility. Ensure that bumps, ponding, and other errors
in elevation are properly corrected. Consider the following guidelines:
1. Material Certification. Ensure that all required material certifications have been
obtained and that they reflect proper materials.
2. Concrete Foundation. Ensure that the concrete foundation is placed, finished, and cured
in accordance with the requirements of Section 601 of the Standard Specifications. See
Section 601 for additional guidance.
3. Wings. Timber and steel materials that are used in wings of cattle guards must conform
to the respective requirements of Section 508 and Section 509 of the Standard
Specifications. Ensure that timber posts are the correct size and treated in accordance
with specified requirements. Check steel for proper welding and painting.
4. Backfill. Ensure that backfill material is properly placed and compacted to the correct
grade and cross-slope.
600-37
SECTION 612 DELINEATORS AND REFLECTORS
612.1 GENERAL
Delineators and reflectors are supplemental traffic control devices that delineate the alignment
of the roadway during hours of darkness and inclement weather. Delineators and reflectors are
especially advantageous during inclement weather because they remain visible where the road
is wet or covered with snow. Installation must always conform to Contract requirements.

Before delineators and reflectors are installed, consider the following:
1. Delineators. Know the type and color of delineators required, and ensure compliance
with specified requirements.
2. Reflectors. Check reflectors for guardrail and concrete barrier for compliance with
respect to type, color, and dimension. Verify that containers are marked with the CDOT
pre-inspection stamp or that samples have been submitted to the Materials and
Geotechnical Branch and found acceptable.
3. Condition. Inspect delineator and reflector materials for damage and reject as
necessary.
Consider the following guidelines during installation of delineators and reflectors:
1. Location and Spacing. Verify that delineators and reflectors are being laid out and
installed at the correct location and spacing, especially with regard to curves and
roadside obstacles. The Contract will generally designate spacing criteria in a tabular
format.
2. Delineators. Delineator posts may be driven or set in drilled holes. Check for damage
during installation, and ensure that posts are set stable and plumb. Check mounting
height and lateral clearance for acceptability. Angular placement shall be according to
Standard Plan S-612-1. Ensure that the proper number and color of reflectors are affixed
to each delineator post.
3. Base Anchoring. Ensure the anchoring depth can be achieved. If the minimum anchor
depth cannot be obtained, the anchor shall be embedded in concrete.
4. Reflectors. Verify that reflectors are properly mounted on guardrail and concrete
barriers. Check the location and mounting height for acceptability. Ensure that the
600-38
proper number and color of reflectors are installed. Pay particular attention to the
direction and orientation of reflectors during installation.
600-39
SECTION 613 LIGHTING
613.1 GENERAL
The materials and construction requirements for lighting will be governed by the Contract and

Before lighting work begins, consider the following:
1. Preconstruction Conference. If a lighting plan is included in the Contract, the Contractor

is required to supply at the Preconstruction Conference a list of all material and
equipment to be incorporated in the work. The Contractor must coordinate with the
local utility company to ensure system compatibility and to plan for required utility
connections and any needed utility relocations or adjustments.
2. Materials Considerations. Check the type, dimension, coating, and condition of all
lighting materials including light poles, arms, luminaires, galvanized fastener hardware,
breakaway bases, conduits, cables, pull boxes, and expansion fittings. Ensure that
required material certifications have been submitted.
3. Screw-In Foundations. If screw-in foundations will be used, ensure that the required Soil
Test Reports have been received from the Contractor and found acceptable. Screw-in
foundations are permitted only for specific soil conditions. Check to ensure that all
material certifications have been submitted. Know the manufacturer’s recommended
installation procedures.
4. Concrete Foundations. Where concrete foundations will be used, they may be either
precast or cast-in-place. Check concrete materials for conformance. Check that
foundation locations and dimensions conform to designated requirements, and ensure
that a solid and properly compacted foundation subgrade is provided. See Section 503
for additional guidance.
5. Layout and Obstructions. Review the general layout of the work for acceptability, and
verify that the Contractor has accounted for underground obstructions and overhead
lines (e.g., power, telephone, cable television).
6. Conduit and Cable. The location of conduit runs will be established during construction
with consideration to existing and future installations. Know the requirements for
conduit placed under roadway sections. Know circumstances that require pull boxes
(e.g., wire splices, conduit ends and angles). Know if jacking of conduit is required.
600-40
Consider the following guidelines during the installation of highway lighting:
1. Screw-In Foundations. Where screw-in foundations are permitted, verify that the
Contractor is following the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
2. Concrete Foundations. Where concrete foundations are used, ensure that they are
properly poured or placed. Pay particular attention to reinforcement, curing, and
backfill requirements.
3. Light Poles. Ensure that the Contractor installs light poles and luminaires in accordance
with specified requirements and the manufacturer’s installation guidelines. Check that
light poles are set plumb at the correct location. Verify the proper installation and
location of breakaway bases. Require that any coating damage is properly repaired.
4. Pull Boxes. Verify that pull boxes are being installed at the correct location and at the
proper grade.
5. Trenches. Check trench depth and shape for compliance. Watch for obstructions. Ensure
that the correct material and procedures are being employed for the backfill operation.
6. Jacking. Check the clearance from roadway of jacking pits to ensure the specified
minimum is not encroached. Do not permit the use of water to aid jacking.
7. Expansion Fittings. Check that conduit expansion fittings are properly installed on
bridges.
Check backfilled trenches for settlement and the correct operation of lights at night prior to
project acceptance. Check for tagging of all electrical conductors in boxes. Check that a plastic
envelope containing the cabinet drawings, line diagram, luminaire schedule and list of all
system components is mounted to the inside of the lighting cabinet door.
600-41
SECTION 614 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
614.1 GENERAL
Traffic control devices must be installed in compliance with the requirements of the Contract.
Contact the Region Traffic Engineer for any needed assistance. See Section 630 for guidance on
temporary traffic control in construction zones.
614.2 HIGHWAY SIGNS

Before the installation of highway signs, consider the following guidelines:
1. Class III/Special Signs. Verify that the detailed layouts for Class III and special signs have
been furnished to the Contractor.
2. Material Certifications. Verify that material certifications have been received.
3. Permanent Barricades. Verify if permanent barricades are required.
4. Timber Posts. Prior to installation, inspect timber posts for acceptability. Check the
certified grading stamp on the posts for proper inspection agency, species, and grade
(see Grade Stamps of Accredited Lumber Agencies in Appendix D).
5. Steel Posts. Check steel post certifications, welding, and coating for acceptability.
6. Hardware. Inspect fastening hardware prior to installation. Verify that bolt heads and
washers match the background color of panels and legends, as appropriate. Check that
anchor bolts and washers are galvanized.
7. Sign Location. Inspect staked sign locations for compliance to the Contract. Check for
obstructions to sign visibility. When inspecting sign staking, consider placing signs behind
guardrail where appropriate.
8. Sign Panels. Check for closure strip on vertical seams. Verify that the back side of all
panels is stamp dated. Verify if masking of sign legends is required.
Verify that highway signs are installed in accordance with the Contract and the Manual of
Uniform Traffic Control Devices. Ensure that removal and installation of signs follow a logical
sequence to maintain traffic safety.
614.2.2.1 Post Installation
Consider the following guidelines during highway sign post installation:
600-42
1. Footings. Ensure that concrete, reinforcing steel, and backfill for footings conform to
specified requirements.
2. Posts. Check for correct type and size of posts. Verify if modifications to existing posts
are required.
3. Plate Bolts. Check torque on breakaway plate bolts and fuse plate bolts.
4. Breakaway Assembly. Check ground level with reference to the top of the footing.
Clearance of the breakaway assembly is critical. Check breakaway holes for spacing and
diameter on six inch by six-inch timber posts.
5. Vertical Alignment. Ensure that all posts are plumb.
6. Post Embedment. Verify that post embedment is proper for the post size.
614.2.2.2 Sign Panels
Consider the following guidelines during sign panel installation:
1. Illumination. Verify if sign illumination is required.
2. Sign Panels. Check for correct type and size of panels. Verify if modifications to existing
sign legends are required. Inspect for cleanliness and general appearance.
3. Angular Placement. Inspect the angle of sign placement to the roadway for compliance.
4. Height and Clearance. Check for proper height above edge of traveled way and proper
vertical and horizontal clearance of sign panel.
614.3 OVERHEAD SIGN STRUCTURES

614.3.1 General Considerations
Overhead sign structures have a substructure component constructed of reinforced concrete,

and a superstructure component typically constructed of structural steel. In most cases, the
substructure is a drilled caisson with anchor bolts that project from the top of the foundation
to connect with the superstructure. Drilled caissons are designed to provide support for the
overhead sign from structurally stable soil. It is essential that the anchor bolts are accurately
located, have the proper orientation, and project the specified length from the top of the
foundation. It is important to examine the proposed overhead sign location for acceptability
and inspect the soil conditions to ensure they are as described in the Caisson Drilling and
Installation Notes in the Contract.
614.3.2 Shop Drawings/Fabrication Inspection
Shop drawings are required for sign structures. The Project Engineer will send the drawings to
the Staff Bridge Branch according to Section 105.2.3. Upon receipt of the drawings, the Staff
600-43
Bridge Branch will forward them to the Project Structural Engineer for review. Once reviewed
and accepted, the drawings will be returned to the Staff Bridge Branch for distribution to the
Fabrication Inspector and Project Engineer. Because the Fabrication Inspectors only perform
random inspections, upon receipt of the reviewed drawings, the Project Engineer will perform
a thorough field inspection of the fabricated structure and report the fabrication’s acceptability
on CDOT Form 157 – Field Report for Sample Identification or Materials Documentation. The
Project Inspector must have a thorough understanding of shop drawings, and the drawings must
be readily accessible at all times. Whenever the Contractor is working, the Project Inspector
should actively monitor erection and assembly to ensure compliance and immediately report
significant problems. Significant problems warrant stoppage of work until the structure’s design
engineer can review the situation and evaluate solutions. Disassembly may be necessary.
614.3.3 Substructure Considerations
Before construction, ensure that the ground surrounding the substructure is well drained and
that the overhead sign will have a minimum vertical clearance required above the finished
roadway surface. The inspection guidance provided in Section 614.4.3 for traffic signal
substructures is also applicable to overhead sign substructures. Consider the following
additional guidelines:
1. Anchor Bolts. Ensure that anchor bolts are accurately located, have the proper
orientation, and project above the top of the drilled caisson concrete the specified
length. For bridge type overhead signs, verify that anchor bolts are placed such that the
distance between drilled caissons, as referenced between the centerline of anchor bolt
groups, complies with that specified on the shop drawings.
2. As-Constructed Survey. The Contractor is required to perform an As-Constructed Survey

of the substructure as soon as practical after it has been completed. The requirements
for the As-Constructed Survey are defined in the notes on the plan sheets for the
overhead sign.
614.3.4 Superstructure Considerations
Bolted connections are used to connect the superstructure to the substructure and to fasten
structural elements within the superstructure itself. Bolts must be tightened as specified
without gaps between connection plates and without overtightening. Consider the following
during erection of overhead sign structures:
1. Bolt Tightening. Verify that bolts in field splices are tightened in an incremental and
progressive manner. This must be performed while the splice connections are not
carrying load. To create this no-load condition, a crane will be necessary to lift
fabricated components during tightening.
2. Overtightening. Do not permit the overtightening of bolts to close non-designated gaps

or where such action will distort steel components.
3. Adjustment and Leveling. Once erected, the anchor nuts and leveling nuts may require
adjustment to level the sign. When assessing the need for leveling, no external support
600-44
should be attached to the superstructure; however, during adjustment, a crane will be

necessary to lift the superstructure. Verify that the leveling nuts are in contact with the
base plate before releasing the overhead sign from the crane and tightening the anchor
nuts.
4. Field Welding. Unless otherwise designated, field welding is not permitted.
614.4 TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS

614.4.1 General Considerations
The supports for traffic signals have a substructure component constructed of concrete, a
superstructure component constructed of structural steel, and an electrical system component.
The substructure is designed to provide support from structurally stable soil. It is important to
examine the proposed location for acceptability and inspect the soil conditions to ensure they
are as described in the notes in the Contract. The following types of support systems are
typically installed for traffic signals:
1. Span Wire. In span-wire installations, the strain pole is typically placed in a drilled hole,
and concrete is poured around the pole for support. Span wire is then strung between
the poles once the concrete has hardened.
2. Mast Arm. In mast-arm installations, the substructure is typically a drilled caisson with
anchor bolts projecting from the top of the caisson. It is essential that the anchor bolts
are accurately located, have the proper orientation, and project from the top of the
caisson the specified length. The pole of the superstructure is connected to the anchor
bolts of the substructure using bolted connections. Bolted connections are also used to
connect the mast arm to the pole of the superstructure. It is important that all bolts be
tightened as specified without overtightening and without gaps or spaces between
connection plates.
614.4.2 Shop/Working Drawings
The type of drawing submittal necessary is specified on the traffic signal plan sheets.
614.4.3 Substructure Considerations
614.4.3.1 Before Construction
Thoroughly review the Contract and consider the following before construction of the
substructure begins:
1. Soil. Verify that the soil surrounding the substructure location is well drained. Bogs and
sloughs are undesirable locations, especially where the lower portion of the
superstructure will be in a wet or frequently moist environment. Prompt notification is
required if such conditions are found to ensure that the design engineer can consider
alternatives to resolve the problem.
600-45
2. Vertical Clearance. Verify that the proposed location will accommodate the minimum
required vertical clearance above the roadway surface. Provide immediate notification
if encroached, because the design engineer will need to evaluate alternatives such as
relocating the substructure or raising its elevation.
3. Survey References. Verify that the Contractor has established adequate survey
referencing to locate the center of the bolt circle and pole. Multiple survey reference
points are preferred.
4. Utilities. Verify that the Contractor has staked known utility locations, resolved utility
conflicts, and coordinated any needed adjustments or relocations.
614.4.3.2 During Construction
Section 503 provides inspection guidance that is applicable to the construction of traffic signal
substructures. Consider the following additional guidelines:
1. Drilling Auger. Check the auger diameter used for boring the foundation hole for
acceptability.
2. Drilling Operation. During the drilling operation, inspect the soils and provide immediate
notification of any discrepancies with the soil notes in the Contract so that the design
engineer can assess the situation and consider any needed alternatives. Check the depth
of the hole of compliance, and verify that all loose material is removed. On span-wire
installations, ensure that crushed rock is placed in the bottom of the hole as specified.
3. Reinforcing Steel. Verify that the reinforcing steel complies with the requirements of
Section 602 of the Standard Specifications. Check bar arrangement and spacing for
compliance. Do not permit the welding of reinforcing steel.
4. Concrete Placement. Verify that concrete material and placement, respectively,

complies with the requirements of Section 601 and subsection 503.07 of the Standard
Specifications.
5. Anchor Bolts. Verify that anchor bolts are accurately located, have the proper
orientation, and project above the top of the drilled caisson concrete the specified
length. Do not permit the welding of any attachments to anchor bolts.
6. Concrete Curing. Ensure that the concrete at the top of the drilled caisson is cured in
7. Cover Plate. Ensure cover plates are installed when the pole is erected to prevent
intrusion by wildlife.
600-46
614.4.4 Superstructure Considerations
614.4.4.1 Span-Wire Installations
For span-wire installations, ensure that the strain pole and span wire are installed in compliance
with the Contract. The span wire should not have more than a five percent sag after loading.
Upon completion, ensure that the Contractor furnishes the requisite As-Constructed Plans.
614.4.4.2 Mast-Arm Installations
Bolted connections are used to connect the pole to the substructure and to connect the mast
arm to the traffic signal pole. Bolts must be tightened as specified without gaps between
connection plates and without overtightening. To ensure adequate vertical clearance, the
traffic signal pole must be placed such that it is plumb when deflected by the load it carries.
Verify that the leveling nuts are in contact with the base plate before the anchor bolt nuts are
tightened, and ensure that anchor nuts and leveling nuts are tightened according to the notes
in the Contract (see Section 614.3.4). Upon completion, verify that the Contractor furnished
the required As-Constructed Plans.
614.4.5 Electrical Considerations
Verify that all Certificates of Compliance for materials have been received and checked and
that the Contractor has furnished the required list of materials and equipment and schematic
wiring diagram. Where applicable, verify that provisions have been met to properly coordinate
new traffic signals with existing systems.
The Region Traffic Engineer may be contacted for inspection assistance. During electrical work
traffic signal systems, consider the following:
1. Conductors. Verify that the correct number of active and spare conductors has been
provided. Ensure that the end of each run is taped until connected. Do not permit the
splicing of conductors outside of specified areas (e.g., pull boxes, handhole locations).
2. Wire Slack. Verify that the proper slack is provided at pull boxes and handhole locations.
3. Control Cable. Check that the control cable is properly tagged and identified and that
its ends are taped until connected. In span-wire installations, verify that the control
cable is properly attached to the span wire by cable rings spaced a maximum of one
foot apart. There should be no sag in the control cable.
4. Vehicle Detector Loops. Verify that vehicle detector loops are of the proper type and
are installed in conformance with the requirements of the Contract. Check the depth of
the detector for compliance and verify that saw cuts are properly filled after
installation.
600-47
5. Pull Wire. Verify that pull wire has been placed in all new conduit and in existing
conduits, if cable is added or replaced. Ensure that there is a minimum of two feet of
pull wire doubled back at each termination.
6. Bonding and Grounding. Verify that all bonding and grounding comply with Article 250
of the National Electrical Code.
7. Controller Cabinet. Verify that the controller cabinet is of the proper type and ensure
that it is mounted to provide a clear view of the intersection when the cabinet door is
open.
8. Pre-emption Equipment. Verify the proper location and installation of any required pre-
emption equipment for emergency pre-emption or railroad coordination.
9. Signal Heads. Verify that traffic signal heads, pedestrian signal heads, and pushbuttons
are of the proper type and installed in compliance with the Contract. Pay particular
attention to mounting height and orientation with respect to driver and pedestrian
approaches. Verify that signal heads are covered until the system is operational.
10. Signal Lamps. Verify that the traffic signal lamps are of the proper type and wattage.
614.4.5.3 After Construction
Consider the following after the installation of traffic signal systems:
1. Backfilling and Patching. Where required, verify that trenches are properly backfilled
and the roadway surface is properly patched.
2. As-Constructed Plans. Verify that the Contractor has furnished the required As
Constructed Plans.
3. Testing. Before accepting the system, ensure the Contractor performs a five-day
functional test and that any needed adjustments are performed.
4. Diagrams. Verify that the controller diagram and intersection-phase diagram are placed
inside the controller cabinet.
5. Manufacturer Guarantee. Verify that the Contractor has furnished the manufacturer
guarantee for the signal equipment.
6. Local Agency. Where applicable, verify that the Local Agency has been notified to
accept operation of the signal system.
7. Cleanup. Verify that the area is left in an acceptable manner and know the disposition
of any material or equipment removed from the job site.
600-48
SECTION 615 WATER CONTROL DEVICES
615.1 GENERAL
The construction of water control devices is discussed in Section 603 of the Standard
Specifications. Erosion control devices (e.g., Embankment Protector Type 3 and Type 5) are
generally constructed with materials such as dry or grouted rubble, concrete, bituminous,
riprap, and geotextile fabric, as discussed in their respective Sections of the Standard
Specifications. The material is placed on the embankment as an apron for protection against
water runoff.

Inspection guidelines for water control and erosion control devices are presented in the Section
of the Manual for which the material applies. Consider the following additional guidelines:
1. Slide Head gates and Automatic Drain Gates. Check for correct sizes and verify that the
gates have been approved for use. Check for proper coating.
2. Embankment Protectors. Check that embankment protectors are located according to

the Contract and cover an area sufficient to provide adequate runoff protection. Verify
if curbing is required.
600-49
SECTION 616 SIPHONS
616.1 GENERAL
Siphons are generally used in conjunction with irrigation systems where it is necessary to pipe
water from one side of the roadway to the other and where the ditch line is higher than the
elevation of the roadway to be crossed. To provide sufficient cover material over the pipe, a
siphon is used.

Upon delivery, inspect all materials for damage. Verify items such as pipe and valves are of the
proper type and size. Ensure that any required material certifications have been obtained.
Watch for damage to materials (e.g., crushing of pipe) during installation and consider the
following:
1. Grade. Check for reversed siphon grade.
2. Drain Valves. Verify the proper installation of drain valves and ensure that they are
accessible after installation.
3. Drainage. Proper provision for drained water to escape is required.
4. Trash Guards. Where required, verify the proper installation of trash guards and ensure
that the specified coating is properly applied.
5. Watertight Test. Test for a watertight installation before backfilling.
Prior to acceptance, inspect siphons for proper operation.
600-50
600-51
SECTION 618 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
618.1 GENERAL
Prestressed concrete members differ from conventionally reinforced concrete members in that
the concrete member is stressed prior to loading. This pre-compression is achieved through the
action of high-strength steel bars or stranded wire that are placed within the structural
members. Prestressed concrete members are used to minimize tension in structural elements,
thus allowing the use of minimum concrete material.
Prior to fabrication of prestressed members, contact the Staff Bridge Fabrication Inspection
Unit (303) 757-9339.
See specification Section 618 for pre erection requirements and see Appendix A for the pre-
erection conference agenda.
618.1.1 Pre-tensioning / Post-tensioning
The prestressing force may be applied before the concrete is placed or after the concrete has
cured. Consider the following:
1. Pre-tensioning. Pre-tensioning is the method of applying the prestressing force before

placing the concrete. The bars or wire strands are anchored by a continuous bond
throughout the length of the structural element, unless debonded.
2. Post-tensioning. Post-tensioning is the method of applying the prestressing force after

the concrete has cured. In post-tensioning, the bars or wire strands are mechanically
anchored at each end of the member.
618.1.2 Creep and Camber
Creep is the shortening of a girder after it is prestressed. The actual shortening is slight and
occurs rapidly, tapering off over a period of about two months. Because the prestressing force
is applied eccentrically, a noticeable uplift, or camber, will occur, which is anticipated during
design. However, if the girder cambers beyond tolerable limits, corrective action will be
necessary.
618.1.3 Precast Girders
Precast girders are fabricated on a flat surface at the precast yard and shipped to the bridge
site for erection similar to steel girders. The girders will camber when the prestressing force is
applied (see Section 618.1.2). Be aware that girder age and storage conditions can produce
additional camber that may render the girder unacceptable.
600-52
618.1.4 Cast-In-Place Girders
Concrete box and “T” girders are typically cast-in-place and post-tensioned in the field. During
construction, galvanized rigid ducts are cast into the girder webs. Once cured, the wire strands
are pulled through the ducts to prestress the member. Because these girders are produced in
the field, the forms and falsework must account for deflections due to dead load and
prestressing.
618.1.5 Segmental Construction
The use of precast or cast-in-place post-tensioned segmental structures is generally limited in

application to side hill bridges and viaducts. Such structures are generally long in span with
limited access area, thus requiring gantries or heavy cranes for construction and erection. Bars,
wire strands, or a combination of both may be used to impart the prestressing force in
segmental members.
In precast applications, the members are match cast to produce a bridge that conforms to the
required geometry, but the prestressing is performed in the field. Contrary to conventional
girders, segmental members must accommodate both heavy construction and final service
loads, and special construction techniques are employed to provide stability. It is therefore
important to thoroughly study the Contract and the fabrication drawings. If the Contract
designates the prestressing force required only for the final service load, the fabrication
drawings must define that force needed to accommodate both construction and service loads.
Note that superstructure camber has already been developed in member segments during match
casting but may be adjusted between segments with shims during erection.

618.2.1 Precast Girders
Inspection work is to be performed by Fabrication Inspectors from the Staff Bridge Branch.
Maintain a close liaison with Fabrication Inspectors to coordinate delivery and follow through
on any repair work prior to final acceptance of the girders.
Before precast girder construction begins, thoroughly review the Contract, shop drawings, and
job safety requirements. Consider the following:
1. Construction Procedures. Review the prestressing procedures with the Contractor.

Check the Contractor's field sheets for compliance. Pay particular attention to strand
elongation and tiedown details.
2. Concrete Mix. Verify acceptability and approval of the aggregate source and concrete
mix design.
600-53
Consider the following during precast girder construction:
1. Reinforcement/Embedments. Inspect reinforcing cages and embedments for proper

assembly and placement in forms.
2. Forms and Prestressing Steel. Inspect forms and prestressing steel for cleanliness and
proper dimensions. Observe the tensioning procedure and verify compliance with the
shop drawings.
3. Concrete Placement. Inspect concrete placement, form vibration, and curing method
for acceptability.
4. Tensioning. Ensure that the concrete has attained the proper strength prior to
tensioning.
To maintain the integrity of the final product, it is important that the precast girders be
properly handled and stored. If the girders are tipped or dropped, they may split apart or
become otherwise damaged. After precast girder construction, consider the following:
1. Shipping/Erection. Review the methods of shipping and erecting the girders with the
Contractor. A Pre-erection conference will be held prior to installation; erection agenda
is in Appendix A.
2. Camber. Check the camber in the girders. Excessive camber may cause the girder flange
to project into the deck slab, interfering with the concrete deck panel or placement of
reinforcing steel. Notify the Staff Bridge Branch immediately in such situations.
618.2.2 Cast-In-Place Girders
Coordinate with the Materials and Geotechnical Branch for the QA testing of materials used for
cast-in-place girders. The Project Engineer and Project Inspectors are responsible for the
inspection of all girder construction in the field.
Before cast-in-place girder construction begins, thoroughly review the Contract, shop drawings,
and job safety requirements. Pay particular attention to the blockout dimensions and anchorage
clearances noted on the shop drawings. Consider the following additional guidelines:
1. Prestressing Construction Procedures. Review the prestressing procedures with the

Contractor and become familiar with the equipment and materials to be used. The Staff
Bridge Branch will provide assistance for personnel unfamiliar with posttensioning.
600-54
2. Concrete Mix. Verify acceptability and approval of the aggregate source and concrete
mix design.
3. Prestress Strand Sample. Obtain samples of the wire strand material that will be used
for prestressing well in advance of the post-tensioning operation. Forward the sample
to the Materials and Geotechnical Branch for testing.
Consider the following during cast-in-place girder construction:
1. Forms. Inspect forms for cleanliness and proper dimensions.
2. Grouting Ports and Vents. Verify that grouting ports and vents will remain accessible
after concrete placement.
3. Concrete Placement. Ensure that concrete placement complies with specified

requirements. Check for proper vibration of concrete around and under anchorages to
eliminate voids.
4. Ducts. Verify that ducts are blown clear immediately after the concrete is placed.
Ensure ducts and/or tendons are installed at the proper locations and without any
wobble.
5. Prestressing Steel. Ensure that exposed prestressing steel is protected from dirt and
debris when threaded through ducts in the field. If not immediately tensioned, also
ensure that it is adequately protected from adverse weather conditions.
6. Construction Joints/Anchorage Zones. Construction joints should be located well away

from anchorage zones and anchorage zone reinforcement. Verify that all anchorage zone
reinforcement is placed in accordance with the Contract and shop drawings and
reviewed by the Project Structural Engineer.
7. Concrete Curing. Check the curing of concrete for compliance, and ensure that the
concrete attains proper strength prior to staring the prestressing operation.
618.2.2.3 During Prestressing
Review the sequence of operations with the Contractor, and be concerned with safety. Stay
away from the backside of the ram, dead-end anchorages, and above the anchorage during the
prestressing operation. The prestressing operation will elongate the steel strands in the
members as the jacking force is applied. The jacking force is applied by a ram that is equipped
with a dial gauge, graduated in pounds per square inch. This dial gauge is used to indirectly
monitor the amount of jacking force applied. A calibration curve is provided with the dial gauge,
which is calibrated for the ram. Use this curve to convert the jacking force (e.g., P(JACK) to
an associated reading on the dial gauge. Monitor strand elongation as follows:
600-55
1. Find the strand elongation length on the shop drawings. The actual stand elongation will
vary from what has been calculated if the physical properties of the strand are different
from those assumed in the calculations. The following equation is used as a basis to
adjust the strand elongation:
e = PL/(AE)
where:
e = strand elongation (inches) P = force applied to the strand (kips)
L = length of strand (inches)
A = area of the strand (square inches)
E = Modulus of Elasticity of the steel strand (kips/ksi)
Moving P and L to the other side of the equation, the expression becomes:
PL = eAE.
The subscript 1 is added to the right side of the equation to denote the assumed strand
physical properties and becomes:
P1L1 = e1A1E1.
Similarly, in a second equation, the subscript 2 is added to denote the actual strand
physical properties and the equation becomes:
P2L2 = e2A2E2.
Since P1L1 equals P2L2 the two equations can be set equal to each other:
e1A1E1 = e2A2E2.
Solving for e2 yields:
e2 = e1A1E1/A2E2
A1 = 0.153 square inches for 0.5 inch strand and A1 = 0.217 square inches for 0.6 inch
strand. The shop drawings will show the size and strand area assumed. The value
assumed for E1 will also be shown on the shop drawings. The values for A2 and E2 will
be reported on samples from each heat of strand submitted to the Materials and
Geotechnical Branch for testing.
2. Before the Strand Elongation is measured, the strand is usually jacked to 20 percent of
P(JACK). This is done to remove slack in the strands. The measured strand elongation is
reduced by the same percentage (20 percent).
600-56
3. Measure the strand elongation as follows:
Mark a strand in a tendon 10 inches from the end of the ram (find a part of the ram that
does not move as the reference point and measure from there). A permanent black felt
tip marker can be used to make the mark. Monitor the dial gauge reading as the jacking
force approaches P(JACK).
At P(JACK), measure the distance to the mark made on the strand from the reference point.
This distance, less the dead end anchor set, should be equal to or greater than the strand
elongation calculated in Step 2 above. If the elongation is not what is expected, carefully check
the calculations and measurements to verify that the strand elongation is in fact short.
If the measured strand elongation varies more than seven percent from the calculated strand
elongation or if the elongation measurements are erratic, examine the prestressing operation
for possible problems. If the problem cannot be solved in the field, contact the Project
Structural Engineer or the Staff Bridge Branch for assistance. Do not permit the protruding
strands to be cut until the strand elongation has been verified and all problems have been
properly addressed.
618.2.2.4 After Prestressing
Check that tendons are grouted as soon as practical after prestressing. All grouting ports and
vents must be operating properly to ensure full-length grouting. The prestressing and grouting
for all tendons in a particular bridge must be completed before the work is accepted.
618.2.3 Segmental Construction
In advance of segment casting, discuss the inspection requirements for segmental structures
with the Fabrication Inspectors from the Staff Bridge Branch (303) 757-9339. The Project
Engineer and Project Inspectors are responsible for the inspection of all erection and/or site
fabrication.
Before segmental construction begins, thoroughly review the Contract, shop drawings, and job
safety requirements. Pay particular attention to the blockout dimensions and anchorage
clearances noted on the shop drawings. Check gantry drawings and precast form drawings to
ensure they will accommodate variables due to roadway curvature, tapered webs, and slabs
within the elements. Consider the following additional guidelines:
1. Construction Methods. Review the prestressing procedures and erection sequence with
the Contractor. Verify that equipment is available to transport and erect the segments.
Become familiar with all equipment, forms, and other items involved in the fabrication
and prestressing of the bridge.
2. Concrete Mix. Verify acceptability and approval of the aggregate source, concrete mix
design, epoxy bonding agents, and other materials used in the work.
600-57
3. Inspection Scheduling. Coordinate the inspection schedule with the casting and erection
sequence that has been established by the Contractor.
Be concerned with safety. Stay away from the back of jacks during the prestressing operation.
Periodically check work platforms, gantries, and highlines for safe operation. Consider the
following additional guidelines:
1. Forms. Inspect forms for cleanliness and proper alignment and dimensions.
2. Concrete Placement. Verify concrete placement for compliance and ensure that the
concrete is properly vibrated.
3. Ducts. Verify that ducts are blown clear immediately after concrete is placed. Check
duct and/or tendon installation for proper location and stability (i.e., no wobble). Check
ducts for leakage and verify that any repair work will withstand the forces imparted by
concrete placement and vibration.
4. Prestressing Steel. Verify that the Contractor protects the prestressing steel from
corrosion and damage prior to prestressing and grouting.
5. Concrete Curing. Ensure that the concrete has attained proper strength prior to
beginning the prestressing operation.
6. Strand Elongation. Check ram gauge readings and strand elongation as described in
Section 618.2.2.3. Because of the highly mechanized casting operation of segmental
construction, automatic procedures may need to be established to record readings for
documentation purposes.
7. Grouting. Verify that tendons are grouted in accordance with the shop drawings.
8. Epoxy Joint Material. Inspect the mixing of epoxy joint material and its application to
ensure complete coverage and proper curing.
9. Segment Alignment. Check the segments for proper line and grade as they are erected.
Checkpoint elevations on a particular segment will vary as additional segments are
added; however, tabulated data will be made available by the Contractor to recheck
points as the construction progresses. If alignment begins to deviate from the tabulated
data, verify that the alignment is properly corrected.
The stressing and grouting of tendons in the bridge must be completed before the work is
accepted. Inspect the final structure to verify that all temporary supports have been removed,
all chipped corners, tie rod holes, etc., and have been patched and that bearings and expansion
devices are functioning properly.
600-58
SECTION 619 WATER LINES
619.1 GENERAL
If work on water lines will be performed by the Contractor under Item 619, the local utility
company shall be contacted to ensure that the installation complies with local standards and
specifications.

Before construction, inspect the acceptability of all materials to be used in the work. Verify
that required material certifications have been received.
Review the safety requirements for trenching operations and verify compliance. Regularly
check the depth and width of trenches for uniformity and conformance to designated
dimensions. Consider the following:
1. Pipe Support. Ensure that the pipe is uniformly supported throughout its entire length.
2. Joints. Verify that joints are constructed in an approved and acceptable manner.
3. Alignment. Alignment must be true. Alignment deviation is limited to plus or minus 0.3
foot per 100 feet.
4. Kickers. Ensure that kickers are used and properly placed to reinforce sharp bends.
5. Watertight Test. Prior to backfilling, test to ensure that the lines are watertight.
6. Backfill. Ensure that backfill is placed in uniform lifts of the specified thickness and
thoroughly compacted.
Prior to acceptance, inspect water lines for proper operation. As needed, coordinate inspection
with the local utility company.
600-59
SECTION 620 FIELD FACILITIES
620.1 GENERAL
The Contractor is required to furnish field offices, sanitary facilities, and field laboratories, as
designated in the Contract or as otherwise directed. These facilities will be maintained
operational by the Contractor during construction and subsequently removed upon completion
of the project or as otherwise directed by the Project Engineer.
620.1.1 Trailer Shortages
If field facilities cannot be furnished as specified, the Contractor should immediately notify the
Project Engineer so that alternatives can be considered (e.g., use of larger trailers,
reconfiguring trailer interiors, use of building facilities). The Project Engineer is responsible for
evaluating the acceptability of alternate field facilities. Although the selected alternative
should satisfy the intended function of the specified facility, it is important to remain flexible
and reasonable in working with the Contractor. Price reductions, if warranted, should be
applied judiciously based on the extent of deviation from the intended functionality. Alternate
field facilities should be considered on a project-by-project basis and such considerations must
not establish a convenient precedent for unreasonably deviating from specified requirements
on future projects. The Area Engineer in the Contracts & Market Analysis Branch may be
contacted for guidance.

Note and document the date of arrival of all field facilities on the project. Check that the
facility dimensions and furnishings conform to the requirements specified in the Contract.
Verify that the facilities are serviced by the Contractor and maintained in a satisfactory
condition. Document on Form 105 – Speed Memo the date and condition of the facility when
removed from the project.
600-60
600-61
SECTION 622 REST AREAS AND BUILDINGS
622.1 GENERAL
The material and construction requirements for rest areas and buildings are detailed in Section
622 of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor is responsible for all required permits, pre-
inspections, and final inspections in accordance with governing Federal, State, and local laws
and ordinances.

Inspection of building, heating, plumbing, sanitary, and electrical installations must be
performed by qualified building inspectors charged with these duties. The Notice Of
Compliance achieved in the design phase for buildings will list the individuals who are required
to perform the inspections for the building work. This will not be a list of CDOT employees or
consultants, but rather it will be a list of non-CDOT government agency inspectors and other
such certified inspectors. CDOT’s inspectors should perform their own inspections in
conjunction with the certified building inspectors as outlined below.
622.2.1 Underground Pipe
622.2.1.1 General Considerations
For underground pipe installations, see Section 603 and consider the following general
guidelines:
1. Existing Utilities. Watch for conflicts with existing utilities and systems.
2. Trench. Check the pitch, line, and grade of the trench or bed before the pipe is placed
and after completion of each pipe section.
3. Pipe Installation. Ensure that the pipe is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
installation recommendations, and consider the following:
a. Pipe Cleanliness. Check for cleanliness of pipe sections and joints during
placement and after completion. Pay particular attention to the cleanliness of
joints.
b. Pipe Base. Pipe should be placed on a uniform, firm, and stable base.
c. Obstructions. Check for pipe plugs, debris, and other obstructions in the pipe.
622.2.1.2 Water Lines
For water lines, see Section 619 and consider the following guidelines:
600-62
1. Grade Lines. Grade lines should avoid high points where practical. Where high points
occur, vacuum and relief valves may be necessary. Check the specified requirements.
2. Pipe Support. A properly installed water line does not move. Check blocking, movement
at joints, bends, dead ends, and hydrants. Check wedging at all fittings.
3. Water Line Sterilization. Ensure that the sterilization of the water line is performed as
specified. Consider the following:
a. Main Flushing. The water line main is to be thoroughly flushed with water until
all entrained mud and debris have been removed.
b. Sterilizing Agent. Check that a sterilizing agent is added to the water line at the
specified dosage. Ensure that the agent remains in the line for the minimum
specified period.
c. System Flush. Ensure that the entire water line system is thoroughly flushed to
remove the sterilizing agent.
622.2.1.3 Sanitary Sewer Lines
For sanitary sewer lines, see Section 603 and consider the following:
1. Spigot End of Pipe. Check that the spigot end of pipe is pointed downstream.
2. Conflicts with Water Lines. Check the distance separating water and sewer lines.
Installation of sewer lines must be below the elevation of the water line, unless special
construction techniques are employed at crossings.
3. Grade/Manholes. Check that a uniform grade is maintained between manholes.
Ensure that the top elevation of the manhole is readily accessible.
4. Clean-Outs. Check that a clean-out is placed every 100 feet at an angle pointing
downstream.
622.2.1.4 Pipe Joints
Check the tightness of joints frequently during placement of pipe, and do not permit pipes to
be joined in mud and water. Where flexible joints are used, check the acceptability materials,
and consider the following:
1. Flexible Gaskets. Check the placement and positioning of flexible gaskets.
2. Lubricant. Check that a lubricant is properly applied at flexible joints.
3. Hydrostatic Test. Verify that a hydrostatic test is performed as soon as practical after
placement.
600-63
622.2.1.5 Copper Pipe
Check the acceptability of the pipe and fittings supplied. Check for good workmanship (e.g.,
good bends, no burrs, clean pipe, pleasing location and placement).
622.2.2 Masonry and Tile
Consider the following guidelines during inspection of masonry and tile work:
1. Temperature. Verify that the ambient temperature is at or above the minimum

temperature specified.
2. Leads. Verify that the Contractor erects leads at corners and jambs. Masons must use
levels to check plumbness and to set string lines between leads.
3. Cutting. Check that the cutting of block and tile was done using a masonry saw. Blocks
should be dry cut.
4. Wall Insulation. Verify the proper placement of wall insulation. Watch for broken and
compressed insulation.
5. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement. Check that joint reinforcing is provided at designated

locations (e.g., at courses designated on plans [usually 16 inches], under sills, over
lintels, overlap reinforcement by six inches, and use prefabricated “T” and “L” sections
at corners and intersecting walls).
6. Vertical Reinforcement (concrete block walls). Check size of rebar, lap and location of
vertical reinforcement. Grout all cells with vertical reinforcement after masonry wall
has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. Vertical reinforcement should
be tied to reinforcement extending from foundation as per plans. Vertical reinforcement
is usually at sides of all openings, exterior corners, and 32 inches on center.
7. Bond Beams. Check that bond beams are provided at designated locations (e.g., under
sill, above lintel level, top of wall, intermediate locations).
8. Door and Window Frames. Check that anchors are provided at each jamb. Verify that
hollow doorframes are filled with mortar.
9. Embedded Items. Check that embedded items (e.g., sleeves, electrical conduit, heating
ducts, recessed items) are installed properly as masonry is erected, not cut in
afterwards. Check mechanical and electrical drawings for proper locations.
10. Caulking. Verify that frame openings are properly caulked.
11. Wall Bracing. Incomplete walls are not self-supporting. Check that they are properly
braced to resist wind pressure.
600-64
622.2.2.2 Mortar Considerations
Verify that mortar is allowed to take its initial set before masonry joints are tooled. A good
guideline is to use the “thumb-print" rule before tooling is performed. If masonry units move
after the mortar takes initial set, require removal and resetting using fresh mortar. Consider
the following additional guidelines:
1. Excess Mortar. Unless otherwise directed, verify that excess mortar is removed from the
face and joints of brick and block before mortar takes its initial set. In insulated walls,
verify that excess mortar is removed from the backside of masonry units. Check for
excess mortar accumulation in the bottom wall cavity.
2. Proportioning. Mortar must be accurately proportioned and have all admixtures

included. Check proportioning at least once a week and whenever mortar tenders are
changed.
3. Re-temper. Mortar must not be re-tempered.
4. Mechanical Mixers. Mechanical mixers should be used on all but the smallest jobs.
622.2.2.3 Bricks and Concrete Block
Check bricks and concrete block for chips, cracks, and defects prior to installation and consider
the following:
1. Placement. Undue shifting or realignment of brick or block is not permitted. During

placement, consider the following:
a. Joints. Joints should be filled solidly as brick or block is placed.
b. Placement Method. "End buttering" (i.e., placing mortar on brick or block) or

"pick and dip" (i.e., simultaneously picking up brick or block with one hand with
mortar on trowel in the other) is acceptable. Throwing of mortar to fill joints
after brick or block is laid (i.e., slushing) is unacceptable.
c. Mortar Bond. Check to ensure that mortar bond is not broken between newly laid
brick or block joints. It is advisable to wait 24 hours to grout cells and to fill bond
beams.
2. Structural Header Courses/Metal Ties. Verify that structural header courses and metal
ties are installed between the face and back of masonry units. Check that metal ties
are of the specified shape and size and placed at the proper spacing.
3. Joints. Check that all exposed joints are of uniform width.
4. Expansion Materials. Check the quality and location of expansion materials.
600-65
5. Brick Cleaning. Final clean-up of brickwork should be in accordance with the

specifications. Check for loose bricks.
6. Anchors and Ties. Ensure that anchors and ties are installed as the work progresses.
622.2.2.4 Structural Glazed Tile
Check that joints in glazed tile are not be more than 0.25 inches in width. Verify that tile faces
are cleaned with a clean, damp rag as the work progresses. Upon completion of walls, check
that all tile surfaces are washed with soap powder and clean water. Stiff fiber brushes should
be used, not metal brushes or acid solutions.
622.2.3 Building Infrastructure
622.2.3.1 Carpentry
Check acceptability of lumber grade and dimensions. Verify good artisanship and that the
carpentry work meets governing building codes.
622.2.3.2 Roofing
Review safety requirements and consider the following:
1. Materials. Ensure that specified materials are being used.
2. Roof Surface. Verify that the roof is dry, smooth, firm, and free of dirt, projections, and
foreign materials.
3. Flashing. Check flashing at all projections through roofing. Check for vented nailers at
vertical leg of base flashing.
4. Drains and Vents. Verify that drains and vents are unplugged.
5. Roof Drains. Check roof drains for proper location and elevation. Also, check that roof
drains are properly flashed, clean, and provided with grating.
6. Temporary Protection. Verify that wood runways are used for wheelbarrow traffic to
protect roof sections.
7. Sheet Metal. Verify that construction and installation of sheet metal complies with the
Contract and shop drawings. Check fabrication for good workmanship.
8. Corrugated Roofing. Check material before and after installation for defects and
damage. Reject defective materials.
600-66
622.2.3.3 Doors and Windows
The installation of doors and windows must comply with the Contract and shop drawings.
1. Materials. Check materials for defects, warps, and buckles. Reject substandard
materials.
2. Operation. Check doors and windows for proper operation.
3. Alignment. Check each door and window to see that it is plumb, square, and level.
622.2.3.4 Caulking, Glass, and Glazing
Consider the following during caulking, glass, and glazing work:
1. Grooves. Check that grooves are of sufficient depth and cleaned of mortar, dust, and
foreign matter before caulking.
2. Caulking. Verify that caulking is uniform and relatively smooth without smearing.
3. Glass. Check the type and thickness of glass for acceptability. Verify that all glass
surfaces are cleaned of labels, paint, putty, and other defacements.
4. Mirrors. Check mirror installation for compliance with the Contract and shop drawings.
Verify that a concealed, non-tamperable mounting of mirrors is provided. Verify that
mirrors are at designated height and properly centered with respect to fixtures. Ensure
that mirrors are cleaned of labels, paint, putty, and defacements.
622.2.3.5 Ceramic Tile
Check size, color, and pattern of ceramic tile for acceptability and consider the following:
1. Tile Setting. Inspect tile setting for:
a. straight, level, perpendicular, and uniform 1/16-inch joints;
b. firmness of set; and
c. damaged or defective tiles.
2. Floor Tile. Check the laying of floor tile for:
a. cleanliness of subfloor, spread of adhesive, and initial set time;
b. cutting, trimming, setting, and fitting of tile; and
c. grouting and cleaning.
600-67
622.2.3.6 Toilet Partitions
Verify that toilet partitions are installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Check
for neat and accurate workmanship. Watch for unacceptable cutting and drilling of partition
panels. Consider the following:
1. Partition Placement. Check the acceptability of partition fitting, jointing, and

anchoring. Check that the assembly is straight, plumb, and level.
2. Partition Damage. Reject partition units that are dented, punctured, deeply scratched,
or otherwise damaged. Slight mars, abrasions, and scratches may be touched up if they
can be repaired to match undamaged parts.
3. Hardware and Accessories. Check the proper installation of all hardware and
accessories.
622.2.3.7 Plumbing and Sprinkling Systems
See Section 603, Section 619, and Section 623 and consider the following:
1. Material Damage. Check pipes and fittings for damage. Reject damaged materials.
2. Trench. Inspect each length of pipe and fitting as it is lowered into the trench. Report
all ground water conditions. Subsection 623.23 of the Standard
3. Specifications requires a pressure and coverage test. It is critical to pressure test the
system before it is backfilled. In addition, the system should be run for a few days before
the sod and plants are placed to troubleshoot the system and give the vegetation a good
start.
4. Pipe Caps/Plugs. Verify that caps or plugs are placed on open ends of pipe where work
is halted at the end of the day or where future connections are to be made.
5. Material Submittals. Check that required material certifications, samples, and approvals
have been received prior to material installation.
6. Sleeves. Check the number and size of sleeves in floors and walls for acceptability before
the floors are poured and during wall erection.
622.2.3.8 Soil, Waste, Drain, and Vent Piping
Check the following related to soil, waste, drain, and vent piping:
1. Pipe and Fitting Material. Check the acceptability of all pipes and fittings. Pay particular
attention to the type, weight, and coating, if required.
2. Pipe Slope and Alignment. Check pipe slope and alignment for correctness.
600-68
3. Pipe Bedding and Cover Material. Verify that pipe bedding is at the proper grade and
thoroughly compacted. Do not permit boulders to remain in bedding or cover material.
Verify that pipe cover material is placed in uniform layers and thoroughly compacted.
4. Floor Drains. Check that floor drains are of the proper type and size and are equipped
with sediment baskets or backwater valves. Verify that the floor pitches toward the
drain.
5. Roof Drains. Check that roof drains are of the proper type and size. Verify that the roof
drains are set at or slightly below the low points of the roof.
6. Sewer Pipe Bends. Do not allow perpendicular bends in the horizontal plane of sewer
lines upstream from the septic tank.
7. Supports and Anchors. Check all supports and anchors for acceptability.
8. Pipes Under/Through Structures. Check the placement of pipes under and through
footings and foundations to ensure that settlement will not affect pipes.
9. Vent Pipes. Check that all buildings and septic tanks have vent pipes.
622.2.3.9 Water Piping
Check water supply pipes from the outside service lines to the building for proper type, size,
location, and elevation and interference with other underground utilities. Check clearance
between water and sewer lines for acceptability and consider the following:
1. Frost Line. Check that pipes outside the building are below the frost line.
2. Non-Potable/Sewer Conflicts. Do not permit cross connections between potable and

non-potable water supply or sewer drains.
3. Hangers. Check hangers for proper type, spacing, and secure anchorage.
4. Threaded Pipe. Do not allow the use of wicking in threaded pipe.
5. Pipes and Fittings. Check for proper type and weight of pipes and fittings. Check for the
inappropriate use of galvanized and brass or copper pipe and fittings in the same run.
6. Fixtures. Check fixtures for complete trimming, fitting, and shut-off valves. Check
fixtures for blemishes and the rigidity of fixtures.
7. Protection of Fixtures. Ensure that fixtures are properly protected during building
construction. Prohibit the use of fixtures until the plumbing system is tested.
8. Accessory Equipment. Check that accessory equipment is of the proper type and
installed in accordance with the Contract.
9. Controls/Regulators. Check for the proper installation of controls and regulators.
600-69
10. Flexible Connections/Vibration Eliminators. Check for the proper installation of flexible
connections and vibration eliminators.
11. Testing. Prior to testing, check that all diaphragms and internal valve parts can
withstand the test pressure without damage; otherwise, have them removed before the
test is begun.
12. Final Cleanup. Check that all grease, paint spots, and debris are removed.
13. Final Adjustments. Check for the proper final adjustment of all fixtures, devices, and
controls.
14. Operating/Maintenance Instructions. Check that the operating and maintenance

instructions are posted where required.
622.2.4 Electrical System
The final inspection and permitting of electrical systems will require the services of a master
electrician. Such assistance should be requested promptly from such authorized individuals.
1. National Electrical Code. The electrical installation must conform to the latest edition
of the National Electrical Code and applicable State and local ordinances.
2. Materials and Equipment. Check materials and equipment for compliance with the
Contract and approved shop drawings when they are delivered to the job. Examine
equipment for damage due to shipping.
3. Permits. Verify that all required permits have been properly posted.
4. Grounding. All grounding must be in accordance with the latest edition of the National
Electrical Code and approved by a State electrical inspector.
5. Conduit and Wire Size. Know if the conduit system is to be installed concealed or
exposed. Check that the size of conduit and wire meet the minimum specified
requirements.
6. Buried Conduit. Where designated, ensure that buried electrical conduit is placed and
approved before the floor slab is poured. Where required, verify that the exterior of
buried conduit is painted with a bituminous-based paint.
7. Conduit Damage. Inspect for damage and deformation of conduit during installation.
8. Conduit Bends. Check the number of bends in conduit to verify that it does not exceed
the maximum in a single run.
600-70
9. Conduit Alignment. Verify that exposed conduit runs are installed parallel or
perpendicular, as appropriate, to walls and structural members. Check that vertical
conduit runs are plumb. Exceptions may be necessary due to obstructions or space
limitations.
10. Pulling Wire. Observe pulling of wires and cables and watch for damage to sheaths,
jackets, and insulation.
11. Panelboard Directories. Verify that panelboard directories are complete and correctly
identify the circuits and equipment served.
622.2.4.2 Lamps and Lighting Fixtures
For the inspection of lamps and lighting fixtures, consider the following:
1. Material Damage. Check fixtures for chipped porcelain, cracked glass and plastic, bent
louvers, and the overall finish.
2. Lamp Wattage. Check that the lamp wattage is of the correct rating.
3. Lamp Type. Check ballasts for fluorescent and mercury vapor lamps to ensure suitability
for circuit voltage and high-power factor type. Determine if the slow, rapid, or instant
start feature is specified and installed.
4. Fixture Alignment. Installation should be plumb and have good horizontal and vertical
alignment.
600-71
SECTION 623 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
623.1 GENERAL
The work for irrigation systems generally consists of constructing a pressurized irrigation
mainline and lateral transport lines that provide coverage to the limits shown in the Contract.
The Contractor will establish the exact locations to fit field conditions and receive approval
from the Project Engineer prior to construction. The construction of irrigation systems must
conform to all applicable State and local codes.

Ensure that all equipment and materials to be installed are new. Verify that equipment to be
installed conforms to the list of equipment submitted and approved.
During the construction of irrigation systems, consider the following:
1. Staking. Verify that staked locations are approved. The Contractor must protect stakes
during construction.
2. Trenches. Check trench bottoms for a flat grade that will support the pipe evenly. Verify
that the depth will provide for the specified minimum cover. For mainline pipe, ensure
that the bottom of the trench is flat, and excavation and backfill conform to Sections
206 and 703 of the Standard Specifications.
3. Pipe. Check pipe for correct size and proper identification markings. For mainline pipe,
check that type of pipefitting conforms to the specified type in relation to the size of
pipe (i.e., solvent weld or rubber gasket). Check that pipe ends are taped during
installation to protect against entry of foreign material.
4. Sleeve Pipes. When installing sleeves, check that the location of the sleeve is recorded
in the As-Constructed Plans and marked with magnetic tape for future location.
5. Mainline Low Points. Ensure that drain valves are placed at low points along the
mainline.
6. Clearance. Check for specified clearances between line crossings.
7. Kick Blocks. Ensure that kick blocks are installed as required.
8. Wiring. Check wire for correct color code. Check that wire is located properly in the
trench. Where more than one wire is placed in a trench, check that the wires are
correctly taped together. Check that wire is placed at least at the minimum depth.
600-72
9. Underground Marking Tape. Ensure that underground marking tape is placed with
mainline pipe that does not have control wire in the same trench.
10. Valve Boxes. Check valve boxes for proper markings on the cover and for installation to
the correct grade.
11. Pressure Test. Verify that a pressurized or volumetric test for mainline leakage is
performed prior to backfilling joints and fittings.
After the construction of an irrigation system, consider the following:
1. Coverage Test. The Contractor is required to perform the coverage test in the presence
of the Project Engineer. Verify that adjustments are performed.
2. As-Constructed Plans. The Contractor will provide detailed As-Constructed Plans of the
irrigation system.
600-73
SECTION 624 DRAINAGE PIPE
624.1 GENERAL
This specification allows the Contractor to choose any pipe material allowed in Table 624-1 for
the pipe class specified in the contract. The Contractor shall state at the Pre-Construction
Conference which pipe material was chosen. Construction requirements are the same as for
section 510 or 603 as applicable. Refer to those sections for further guidance.
600-74
SECTION 625 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING
625.1 GENERAL
Construction surveying shall be performed in accordance with Section 625 of the Standard
Specifications and the CDOT Survey Manual.
625.2 – 625.10 RESERVED
625.11 3D ENGINEERED CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING (3DECS)

Your project may be one that the Resident Engineer or Project Manager determined meets the
criteria for providing three-dimensional modeling data to the contractor to be used for bidding
and construction. To determine if yours is such a project, check the Project Special Provision,
Revision of Section 102 – Project Plans and Other Data and see if it includes the statement that
such documents are available.
The Contractor may use the data from these files to create efficiencies during construction.
The primary benefits are less staking and improved efficiency of earthwork operations. The
data can be input directly into heavy machinery enabling the machinery to make automatic
adjustments, or the data can be provided to the operator enabling the operator to make the
machine adjustments.
Chapter 6 of the Survey Manual has been modified for projects in which the Contractor chooses
to use 3D Engineered Construction Surveying (3DECS). There should be discussions at the Pre-
survey Conference regarding use of 3DECS.
The CDOT Standard Specification Section 625 and the Survey Tabulation Sheet have been
modified such that should the Contractor choose to use 3DECS, less staking is required. Less
staking will make it more difficult for CDOT to check the work, but minimal staking is still
required. Should you feel you need more surveying to check the work, you can require more
staking per Standard Special Provision, Revision of Section 105 – Construction Surveying where
we pay the contractor an hourly rate for additional surveying.
600-75
SECTION 626 MOBILIZATION
626.1 GENERAL
Mobilization is governed by Section 626 of the Standard Specifications. Item 626 – Mobilization
is automatically calculated by the Department’s construction management software.
600-76
SECTION 627 PAVEMENT MARKING
627.1 GENERAL
Pavement marking material and construction requirements are detailed in Section 627 of the
Standard Specifications, and placement must be in conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations, the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices, and the CDOT M&S Standard
Plans.
627.1.1 Surface Preparation and Payment Considerations
Preparation of the pavement surface prior to applying extruded thermoplastic, epoxy, and
preformed tape is required and should be performed in accordance to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. This cleaning shall remove oil, dirt, dust, grease, and similar foreign
materials, and payment is generally included under the pavement-marking item. Because of
the much greater effort required to remove existing markings from both asphalt and Portland
cement concrete pavements, their removal is generally specified as a separate item of work
and paid for independent of the pavement-marking item.

Before applying pavement markings, consider the following:
1. Pavement Marking Plan. If the Contract does not include a pavement-marking layout,
verify that the Contractor has provided a layout of existing conditions for approval and
modification.
2. Control Points. Check control points for correct size and placement to ensure
compliance with the pavement marking plan.
3. Conflicts. Verify that there are no conflicts between typical section, pavement marking
plan, or existing markings.
4. Material. Confirm the type of material (e.g., paint, thermoplastic, epoxy, and tape) to
be installed. Ensure that the material to be installed meets specifications.
5. Surface Preparation. Ensure the surface is properly cleaned and free of moisture,
grease, oil, dirt, and laitance. Check the need for primer, sandblasting, water blasting,
grinding, or grooving.
6. Temperature. Check that air temperature complies with the specifications and
manufacturer’s recommendations.
7. Signing Conflicts. Check for conflicts with highway signing.
600-77
During the placement of pavement markings, perform regular checks to ensure that the surface
is clean and dry. Regularly check completed lines for good workmanship and straightness.
Consider the following additional guidelines:
1. Application Procedures. Check application procedures for compliance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Application Rate. Check application rate of paint, thermoplastics, and epoxies for
compliance. The Contractor may use a meter or dip their tanks for measurements
before and after striping. Verify the application rate is correct by measuring the area
striped and calculating the minimum and maximum rate allowed in the spec.
3. Beads. Check that the application rate of beads complies with specified requirements.
4. Protection. Make sure that adequate cones are used to prevent tracking by vehicular
traffic.
5. Full-Compliance Markings. Verify the proper application of full-compliance markings at

crossovers, detours, and no-passing zones.
6. Conflicting Pavement Markings. Check that conflicting or confusing pavement markings

are properly removed. Removal should be done by water blasting to help prevent
“ghosting” of the removed pavement markings.
7. Modified Epoxy Pavement Marking. Verify that Certificates of Compliance have been
received and consider the following:
a. Curing. Check for proper curing of epoxy marking material.
b. Component Ratio. Ensure that proper equipment is on hand that is capable of

metering components at the correct ratio and able to maintain the material at
the correct temperature.
c. Thickness. Check that the correct thickness of material is applied.
8. Thermoplastic Pavement Marking. Ensure that suitable equipment is on hand to provide

proper extrusion, heating, mixing, and control of the flow of material. Consider the
following:
a. Alignment and Size. Ensure that a continuous uniformity in stripe dimensions and
alignment is maintained.
b. Thickness. Check that the correct thickness of material is applied.
9. Preformed Pavement Marking. For the application of preformed pavement markings,

consider the following:
600-78
a. Existing Pavement. When placed on existing cold pavement, check for a clean,
dry, and properly prepared surface. Verify if sandblasting is required. Ensure
that primer has been properly applied. Check for appropriate splicing sequence
and roller weight.
b. Inlay. For hot bituminous inlay placement, ensure that the material is
applied in the proper location and sequence on the new mat. Check that the
pavement surface is at the recommended temperature to obtain complete inlay.
10. Pavement Marking Tape. Where pavement-marking tape is used, ensure that the tape is
in conformance with the Contract and is suitable for temporary use. Consider the
following:
a. Tape Application. Ensure that the tape is clean and pressed down until it
completely adheres to the surface. Check for correct lengths and intervals, and
that locations are according to plan or as directed.
b. Tape Removal. Ensure that temporary tape is removed prior to subsequent lifts
of hot bituminous pavement.
600-79
600-80
SECTION 629 SURVEY MONUMENTATION
629.1 GENERAL
Survey monumentation shall be performed in accordance with Section 629 of the Standard
Specifications and the CDOT Survey Manual.
600-81
SECTION 630 CONSTRUCTION ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
630.1 GENERAL
Coordination and advance planning by the Contractor, Traffic Control Supervisor, and the
Project Engineer are required to provide for the safe and efficient maintenance and protection
of traffic during construction. Every reasonable and practical effort should be made to reduce
hazards and inconvenience to the traveling public and to adequately protect project personnel
at the site. The Traffic Control Plan and Method of Handling Traffic must address the items
shown in subsection 630.10 of the Standard Specifications.
CDOT and Contractor personnel must continually monitor the construction area and
immediately report potentially hazardous situations for correction. The topic of construction
zone traffic control will have been thoroughly addressed at the Preconstruction Conference.
630.2 TRAFFIC CONTROL REVIEW PROGRAM

630.2.1 Overview
The Traffic Control Review Program has been established to provide assistance in administering
the traffic control aspects of a construction project. The Traffic Control Review Program relies
on the experience and expertise of the Resident Engineer to assist Project Engineers. The
Traffic Control Review Form is used to document the results of the Traffic Control Review.
630.2.2 Implementation Procedures
The objective of the Traffic Control Review Program is to obtain an "in compliance" or “yes”
response to each question posed on the Traffic Control Review Form. The following procedures
are used to implement the Traffic Control Review Program:
1. Traffic Control Review Frequency. The Project Engineer and the Resident Engineer will
perform a joint Traffic Control Review once each calendar year for each active
construction project.
2. Substitution of Reviewer. The Region Program Engineer may appoint a qualified

substitute to the Resident Engineer to participate in the Traffic Control Review;
however, the substitute will not be assigned to the project being reviewed.
3. Traffic Control Review Form. The Traffic Control Review Form will be used to document
the results of the Traffic Control Review. A copy of each completed form will be
maintained in the project files. Contact the Project Development Branch for blank
copies or an electronic version of the Traffic Control Review Form. See Appendix B for
an example of a properly completed Traffic Review Form.
600-82
4. Deficiency Corrections. All deficiencies noted during the Traffic Control Review will be
immediately reported to the Contractor for correction. The maximum time period for
correction is 24 hours.
630.2.3 Inspections During Non-Working Hours
The Traffic Control Review Program requires night inspections of traffic control. The following
guidelines have been established to ensure statewide uniformity:
1. Traffic Control Supervisor Inspections. The Project Engineer is responsible for ensuring
that the Traffic Control Supervisor inspects for compliance the work zone traffic control
during non-working hours, including nights and weekends.
2. CDOT Inspections. The Project Engineer, or a qualified CDOT employee, should make at
least one nighttime inspection upon implementation of a new Method of Handling Traffic
that includes nighttime traffic control devices.
630.2.4 Review of Method of Handling Traffic
The Project Engineer is responsible for reviewing the Contractor’s Method of Handling Traffic.
Check that the Method of Handling Traffic complies with the requirements of the Manual of
Uniform Traffic Control Devices, CDOT M&S Standard Plans, and the project’s Traffic Control
Plan. Verify that the Method of Handling Traffic provides adequate protection for workers,
motorists, pedestrians, and bicyclists. Consider the following:
1. Contractor Review. Verify that the Method of Handling Traffic has been reviewed and
initialed by the Contractor.
2. Speed Reduction. If a speed reduction is requested, check that the Method of Handling
Traffic complies with the conditions of the approved CDOT Form 568 – Authorization
and Declaration of Temporary Speed Limits.
3. Emergency Vehicle Access. Ensure that there is an adequate plan for emergency vehicle
access.
4. Unnecessary Devices/Flaggers. Do not approve a Method of Handling Traffic that

includes unnecessary devices or flaggers. Part 6 of the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
Devices specifies the type, number, location, and arrangement of devices and flaggers
that are acceptable for use in construction applications. Occasionally, Contractors will
propose more devices and flaggers than are warranted, making a false assumption that
such practice will provide additional safety. On the contrary, such practice can be a
detriment to safety for an increase in cost. Too many devices and flaggers can cause
confusion, render other control measures ineffective, and exacerbate the hazard
potential. If a Contractor insists on using unnecessary traffic control, contact the Region
Traffic Engineer or the Safety and Traffic Engineering Branch for immediate assistance.
600-83
5. Pedestrian and Bicycle Traffic. Verify that the Method of Handling Traffic adequately
provides for pedestrian, bicycle, and other non-vehicular traffic. Check that bicycle and
recreational trail detours have been correctly identified and signed.
6. Access/Crossovers. Verify that the Method of Handling Traffic adequately provides

access for construction and maintenance traffic, including turnaround locations. Ensure
that median crossings and crossovers comply with the requirements of the Contract.
7. Restrictive Clearances. Where the Method of Handling Traffic includes detours and
construction activities at bridge structures, the Project Engineer will verify that the
appropriate signing has been provided and check for restrictive vertical and lateral
clearances (see Appendix D). Consider the following:
a. Vertical Clearance. If a vertical clearance of less than 16 feet six inches is

necessary, verify that the condition is appropriately signed and notify Craig Smith
([email protected]) and Dan Wells ([email protected]) in the
Maintenance and Operations Branch immediately by electronic mail. The subject
line of the message should read “RESTRICTION ALERT.” Include the following
information in the body of the message:
i. highway number,
ii. beginning mile post for the restriction,
iii. ending mile post for the restriction,
iv. direction of travel that is restricted,
v. restriction description (e.g., vertical, lateral),
vi. beginning date and approximate time of restriction, and
vii. name and phone number of contact for the project restriction.
Note that the ending date of the restriction is an approximation. Although, the
restriction will not be removed from the report until notification of the end of
the project, an estimate assists the permit writers in answering queries about
the restriction.
b. Lateral Clearance. If a restriction to the existing lane width or shoulder is

necessary, immediately notify the Maintenance and Operations Branch by
electronic mail as previously discussed for vertical clearance restrictions.
c. Advance Notice. Provide the Maintenance and Operations Branch with as much
advance notice as possible to allow them to properly notify permit holders. As
soon as the Contractor provides any indication that height or width restrictions
will be necessary, immediately use the notification procedures contained in
Construction Manual subsection 630.2.4, number 7, paragraphs a. and b.
600-84
Additionally, notify the Maintenance and Operations Branch when the restriction
may be lifted.
Vertical and horizontal clearance restrictions and the notification process must
also be discussed at the Preconstruction Conference.
For Local Agency projects, the Local Agency Project Manager must make the
required notification to the CDOT Maintenance and Operations Branch as
described above, and must also send a copy of the notification to the CDOT
Resident Engineer.
630.2.5 Responsibilities of the Traffic Control Supervisor
The Traffic Control Supervisor is an individual other than the Contractor Superintendent and
must have a current Flagger’s Certificate and certification from the American Traffic Safety
Services Association or the Colorado Contractors Association. The following is presented to
assist the interpretation of subsection 630.10 of Standard Special Provision, Revision of 630 –
Construction Zone Traffic Control and to ensure statewide uniformity in administration. The
Traffic Control Supervisor is responsible for the following:
1. Method of Handling Traffic. The Traffic Control Supervisor will prepare, revise as
needed, and implement each Method of Handling Traffic in accordance with the Traffic
Control Plan. Each Method of Handling Traffic must designate the traffic control
operations and devices necessary for its respective phase of construction. The Method
of Handling Traffic must be submitted on 8.5-inch by 14-inch or 11-inch by 17-inch paper
for convenient use by project personnel. The Traffic Control Supervisor will provide
multiple copies of the Method of Handling Traffic for distribution to the Contractor and
all subcontractors that are involved in the construction phase. Alternatively, the
Contractor may submit MHT’s electronically for review and electronic signature by the
Project Engineer. Electronic copies may be retained for records. See Section 630.2.4
for guidance on reviewing Methods of Handling Traffic.
2. Communications. The Traffic Control Supervisor will provide Traffic Control

Management on a 24-hour-per-day basis. The required minimum level of
communications includes:
a. Contractor. The Traffic Control Supervisor will communicate with the Contractor
to determine what traffic control measures need to be provided by
subcontractors and material suppliers.
b. Local Agencies. The Traffic Control Supervisor will inform local police and fire
agencies of any lane closures or delays. Regular updates are required as
operations change.
c. Emergency Contact Numbers. The Traffic Control Supervisor will provide

emergency contact numbers of Contractor and CDOT personnel to local police
and fire agencies. This allows the proper project personnel to be notified in case
of an emergency on the project during working or non-working hours.
600-85
d. Response Time. During non-working hours, the Traffic Control Supervisor, or

designee, will respond to the site within 45 minutes of notification; however, if
not certified, a certified respondent must arrive at the site within two hours of
initial notification.
3. Inspections. The Traffic Control Supervisor, or certified designee, will inspect traffic
control devices on each calendar day that they are in use, masked, or turned away from
traffic. These inspections will include at least one night inspection per week. Verify that
the proper type and number of traffic control devices are located and arranged as
designated on the active Method of Handling Traffic. Check devices for damage,
undesirable relocation, and acceptable visibility. Ensure that lights and flashing beacons
are functioning properly. Supervise the cleaning of devices as frequently as necessary
to preserve legibility and retroreflectivity. All devices must be cleaned a minimum of
once every two weeks.
4. Traffic Control Inspection Diary. The Traffic Control Inspection Diary must be signed by
the person that conducted the inspection (i.e., Traffic Control Supervisor or certified
designee). The Traffic Control Inspection Diary must contain a statement certifying that
all traffic control devices are clean and properly maintained and include the following
information:
a. date and time of inspection;
b. project number;
c. list of flaggers and hours;
d. uniformed traffic control hours used;
e. Method of Handling Traffic used;
f. weather conditions;
g. interference with normal traffic flow,
h. detours in use;
i. work performed by Contractor, subcontractors, or utility companies;
j. location of flagging stations and flagging hours,
k. problems encountered and corrections made;
l. crashes or other incidents involving the traveling public;
m. types and quantities of traffic control devices used;
n. maintenance or cleaning performed on the traffic control devices; and
600-86
o. any unusual conditions, significant delays or problems encountered during the

day.
5. Project Meetings. The Traffic Control Supervisor will attend all project scheduling
meetings. This will help ensure that the Traffic Control Supervisor is properly informed
of the planned operations so that an appropriate Method of Handling Traffic can be
developed. Any conflicts in traffic control between subcontractors should be addressed
at project scheduling meetings.
6. Relief Flagging. The Traffic Control Supervisor will not act as a flagger, except in
emergency situations or when it is necessary to relieve the stationed flagger for a period
of a half hour or less (e.g., lunch breaks, rest periods). Relief flagging will be performed
only when such action will not interfere with the normal duties of the Traffic Control
Supervisor; otherwise, another certified flagger must be provided.
630.2.6 Flagger Certification
All flaggers on CDOT projects must possess a Flagger’s Certification Card in accordance with
subsection 630.14 of the Standard Specifications. Subsection 630.14 requires that all flaggers
on CDOT projects be properly certified, having successfully passed the Department’s minimum
training requirements within two years of starting work on the project. The Department’s
minimum training requirements are defined in CDOT Procedural Directive 306.1 – Flagger
Training and Certification Program. Note that CDOT does not certify non-CDOT employees for
flagging duties. The certification requirements include reviewing the latest edition of the CDOT
Flagger’s Training Manual, viewing a flagger training video, and obtaining a passing score of at
least 80 percent on a Flagger Proficiency Test, which must be administered by a Registered
Flagger Proctoring Agency. Contact the Project Development Branch for a list of Registered
Flagger Proctoring Agencies. Public or private entities desiring to become a Registered Flagger
Proctoring Agency may contact the Department as follows:
Colorado Department of Transportation

Safety and Traffic Engineering Branch
Work Zone Safety Program
Attn: Work Zone Safety Coordinator 2829 W. Howard Place.
Denver, CO 80204 (888) 639-3271
[email protected]

Use the Traffic Control Review Form to inspect the construction zone traffic control provided
by the Contractor, and consider the guidelines presented in the following Sections.
630.3.1 Traffic Operations and Project Documents
Verify that the following documents are available at the project site:
600-87
1. Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. Check that a current version of the Manual
of Uniform Traffic Control Devices with up-to-date Federal Highway Administration
revisions and current CDOT supplement is readily available.
2. Plans. Verify the availability of the Traffic Control Plan sheets, CDOT M&S Standard
Plans, and detour plan and profile sheets, where applicable.
3. Method of Handling Traffic. Inspect traffic control operations for compliance with the
approved Method of Handling Traffic. Verify that each Method of Handling Traffic
addresses the following (see Section 630.2.5):
a. approved by Contractor and CDOT for each construction operation,
b. tabulation of traffic control devices and flaggers,
c. match CDOT Form 568 for location and approved speed limitations,
d. provide for emergencies, special events, and non-vehicular traffic,
e. provide for access, median crossings, and turnaround locations.
4. Flagger Certifications. Ensure that current and proper certifications from the American
Traffic Safety Services Association or the Colorado Contractors Association are provided
for the Traffic Control Supervisor and all flaggers. See Section 630.2.6 for additional
information on flaggers.
5. Emergency Contacts. Verify that 24-hour Contractor emergency phone numbers are
provided for the Traffic Control Supervisor and response personnel. Ensure that the
appropriate Contractor and CDOT numbers are given to the Local Agency. As needed,
contact the Local Law Enforcement Agency and request copies of any crash reports
involving work zone traffic control. Review the crash reports and determine if
improvements are warranted.
6. Speed Reductions. Verify that a CDOT Form 568 – Authorization and Declaration of
Temporary Speed Limits has been approved for requested speed reductions, and ensure
a copy of the approved form is retained in the project files.
7. Traffic Control Review. Verify that a Traffic Control Review is performed at least once
per calendar year.
630.3.2 Traffic Control Supervisor
Verify that the Traffic Control Supervisor is available on the project as required, is
appropriately dressed (e.g., reflectorized clothing at night), and making and documenting
periodic project inspections, day and night, as required (see Section 630.2.5). Consider the
following:
600-88
1. Project Documents. Check that the Traffic Control Supervisor has a copy of the
documents presented in Section 630.3.1.
2. Certifications. Know if an American Traffic Safety Services Association or a Colorado

Contractors Association certification will require renewal during the course of the
project. Ensure that the Traffic Control Supervisor has a current flagger certification if
used as a relief flagger (see 630.2.6).
3. Inspections. Ensure that night inspections are being conducted and properly
documented. Check that device cleaning and maintenance activities are being properly
documented.
4. Daily Diary. Verify that the Traffic Control Supervisor is submitting a daily diary. Check
that the diary properly reports problems and unsafe conditions, crashes, flagging and
device quantities for the active Method of Handling Traffic, including any changes.
Verify that discrepancies, as noted in the diary, have been corrected in a timely manner.
630.3.3 Flaggers
During construction, check the following with respect to flaggers:
1. Certifications. Verify that current and proper flagger certifications are provided. Check
that the card matches the person. Know if the certifications will require renewal during
the course of the project. See Section 630.2.6 for additional information.
2. Dress/Equipment. Check the flaggers’ dress and equipment to ensure compliance with
the Standard Specifications and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. Pay
particular attention to compliance of the following:
a. Fluorescent orange-red or fluorescent yellow-green hardhat and vest of the

proper type of material,
b. correct size and shape of “Stop/Slow” paddle, and
c. proper reflectorized clothing and equipment for night operations.
CDOT currently requires all of our CDOT-employed highway construction and

maintenance workers, including CDOT flaggers, to wear high-visibility vests and hardhats
with background material color either fluorescent orange-red or fluorescent yellow-
green as defined in the latest version of the ANSI/ISEA standard (see CDOT Procedural
Directive 80.1).
3. Methods. Check that proper flagging methods are being used.
4. Location. Check flagger location as follows:
a. flagger facing oncoming traffic,
600-89
b. visible to oncoming traffic,
c. proper distance in advance of the work, and
d. flagger station illuminated during night operations.
630.3.4 Construction Signing
The American Traffic Safety Services Association publication Quality Standards for Work Zone
Traffic Control Devices may be used as a guideline when inspecting signing and traffic control
devices. Inspect construction signing for proper installation and satisfactory condition. Consider
the following:
1. Contract Plans and Specifications. Ensure that signs conform to the Contract, including
the CDOT M&S Standards and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. Pay
particularly attention to compliance of the following:
a. size, shape, and color;
b. retroreflective sheeting; and
c. appropriate location.
2. Traffic Control Plan/Method of Handling Traffic. Verify that signs and devices conform
to the Traffic Control Plan and the active Method of Handling Traffic.
3. Sign Condition. Check that the signs are clean, legible, and in good repair.
4. Breakaway Bases. Check for required breakaway bases on post mounted signs. Posts that
do not meet these conditions should be rejected and replaced. Please see CDOT
Standard Plan S-614-5, sheet 1 of 2, for clarity.
5. Temporary Signs. Check that temporary signs are properly weighted, mounted, and at
the correct height.
6. Stored Signs. Signs not in use should be properly stored. Check that signs are:
a. lying flat, including the base;
b. beyond the shoulder;
c. outside the normal roadside recovery area; and
d. not on landscaped areas or sidewalks.
7. Conflicting Signs. Ensure that conflicting permanent signs are properly masked.
8. Retroreflective Sheeting. Confirm that that sign and barricade sheeting placed on the
project complies with the CDOT Construction Zones Retroreflective Sheeting Materials
600-90
Guide. The Safety and Traffic Engineering Branch, in conjunction with the FHWA, has
developed this publication to facilitate inspection of the proper application of
retroreflective sheeting materials on CDOT projects. The publication contains samples
of retroreflective sheeting that are approved by CDOT and FHWA and will be updated
as needed. Contact the Safety and Traffic Engineering Branch at (303) 757-9654 for
630.3.5 Traffic Control Devices
Traffic control devices are used to warn the traveling public of hazards, advise them of the
proper path through the work zone, delineate areas where they may not operate, and separate
them from construction workers. The effectiveness of these markings depends on their visibility
upon installation and throughout the life of the project. Because it is not practical to require
new devices to be installed on each construction project, the American Traffic Safety Services
Association has published the document Quality Standards for Work Zone Traffic Control Devices
as guidance to use in assessing the quality of traffic control devices used in construction zones.
Copies of this publication can be obtained by contacting the Safety and Traffic Engineering
Branch at (303) 757-9654.
Work zone devices designated by FHWA as Category I, II, or III, shall meet NCHRP 350
requirements. Devices designated as Category IV, including but not limited to portable or
trailer-mounted devices such as flashing arrow panels, temporary traffic signals, area lighting
supports, and changeable message signs, are not required to meet NCHRP 350 requirements.
Except for Category IV devices, the Contractor shall obtain and present to the Engineer the
manufacturer’s written NCHRP 350 certification for each work zone device before it is first used
on the project.
Consider the following during the inspection of traffic control devices:
1. Flashing Arrow Panels. Ensure that flashing arrow panels are in the correct location and
functioning properly. Check flashing arrow panels for:
a. properly working lights in the correct mode,
b. correct automatic dimming at night, and
c. correct panel size mounted at the correct height.
2. Channelizing Devices. Ensure that channelizing devices conform to the requirements of

the Contract Specifications, Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices, Method of
Handling Traffic, and the project’s Traffic Control Plan. Pay particular attention to the
following:
a. correct dimensions in a clean, serviceable condition,
b. proper retroreflectorized sheeting or collars,
600-91
c. correct placement with proper taper lengths and spacing,
d. proper and functioning warning lights that are set in the correct mode, and
e. weighting by acceptable methods.
3. Concrete Barriers. Check that temporary concrete barriers are correctly placed with
proper treatment at end sections. Pay particular attention to the acceptability of
connecting pins and the color and retroreflectorization of sheeting.
4. Impact Attenuators. Ensure that impact attenuators are properly located and installed
according to the Contract and manufacturer’s recommendations including:
a. correct weight of proper material placed in each barrel, and
b. provisions for preventing filler material from freezing.
5. Quality Standards. Temporary traffic control devices are subjected to wear during use,
storage, shipment, installation, relocation, and removal. A large number of worn devices
on a project are unacceptable. The American Traffic Safety Services Association
publication Quality Standards for Work Zone Traffic Control Devices should be used to
assess device quality. Such assessments should be made while the devices are in storage
before use on the project, during initial set up, and periodically during the life of the
project. Require removal and replacement of unacceptable devices in accordance with
subsections 630.02 and 105.01 of the Standard Specifications.
6. Flashing Beacons. The S-Standard, S-630-3, requires that flashing beacons utilize a
typical 12” signal head lens with a 150 Watt lamp or approved ITE Amber LED. Do not
accept an 8” lens with 110-Watt lamps. Although the 8” lens meets the requirements
of the MUTCD, it does not meet the requirements of the M&S Standards and is
unacceptable for use on CDOT projects.
630.3.6 Temporary Pavement Markings
Ensure that temporary pavement markings meet the requirements of the Method of Handling
Traffic, striping plan, and Contract Specifications. Check temporary markings for correct
placement in a timely manner, and ensure that conflicting markings have been completely
removed.
630.3.7 Pilot Car Operations
Ensure that flaggers and pilot vehicles are properly equipped and located in accordance with
the requirements of the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
600-92
MISCELLANEOUS
CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
AGENDAS
A-1
Appendix A
APPENDIX A. MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AGENDAS .......................A-1

CONFERENCE AGENDAS ...................................................................................A-3
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE NOTIFICATION AND AGENDA .....................................A-4
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AGENDA ............................................................A-8
HOT MIX ASPHALT PRE-PAVING CONFERENCE AGENDA ...............................................A-9
PRE-DEMOLITION CONFERENCE AGENDA ..............................................................A-33
PRE-ERECTION CONFERENCE AGENDA .................................................................A-44
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PRE-POUR CONFERENCE AGENDA ........................................A-55
CONCRETE PAVEMENT PRE-PAVING AND QC/QA CONFERENCE AGENDA ..........................A-68
ENVIRONMENTAL PRECONSTRUCTON CONFERENCE AGENDA AND ATTENDANCE ROSTER ......A-70
A-2
Appendix A
CONFERENCE AGENDAS
Appendix A contains several example Conference Agendas to assist in facilitating meetings for
various conferences required by the Department, including:
Where extensive utility adjustments or relocations are involved, it is desirable to hold an

additional Preconstruction Conference to resolve and coordinate utility issues. All affected
utility companies should attend this meeting, and the Contractor should furnish a detailed
construction schedule of proposed utility activities to facilitate coordination. Where the project
requires extensive survey work, use the appropriate Pre-survey Conference Agenda Form(s)
(i.e. Aerial Survey Form, Construction Survey Form or Preliminary Survey Form) presented in
the CDOT Survey Manual.
Each of these examples presents a minimum set of topics that should be discussed during the
conference; however, not all topics will be covered for every project in every Region. Prior to
its use, thoroughly read the content of the agenda and consider the special needs of the
particular project and specific Region. Contact the Area Engineer in the Contracts & Market
Analysis Branch for additional information. Copies of these agendas are available from the CDOT
website.
A-3
Appendix A
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE NOTIFICATION AND AGENDA
The following examples include a notification letter for the Preconstruction Conference and a
Preconstruction Conference Agenda to assist in facilitating the meeting. The agenda presents
a minimum set of topics that should be discussed during the Conference; however, not all topics
will be covered for every project in every Region. Modify this agenda to meet the needs of your
project. Copies of this Agenda are available from the CDOT website:
https://www.codot.gov/business/designsupport/bulletins_manuals/construction-manual
Contact the Area Engineer in the Contracts & Market Analysis Branch for additional information.
A-4
Project Development Branch
2829 W. Howard Place
Denver, Colorado 80204
Date RE:
Name Of recipient
Company
Another Line
555 Address St. Apt. 55
Denver, CO 80222
To Whom It May Concern:
This is to confirm that the PreConstruction Conference for the XXXX project has been scheduled
for [DATE]. The conference will be held at [TIME] in/at [LOCATION NAME WITH ADDRESS AND
GENERAL DIRECTIONS IF NECESSARY].
If your superintendent is unable to attend, the meeting will be rescheduled. You may invite
representatives of each subcontractor.
In addition, you need to provide the information previously requested, at least two working
days prior to the conference. You may hand carry or mail the information to the Resident
Engineer’s office at [ADDRESS]. Should you choose to mail it, please allow an additional three
to four working days for delivery. Timely submittal of the information will assure that the
conference will continue as scheduled.
You must obtain consent to sublet portions of the work prior to that portion of the work
beginning. Form 205 – Sublet Permit Application is required for each subcontractor on the
project. Please allow [NUMBER] days for CDOT to process the forms. If you need copies of this
form, please contact the Resident Engineer or Project Engineer listed below:
[RESIDENT ENGINEER
PROJECT ENGINEER]
The general outline for the conference agenda will be as follows:
Project Organization Right of Way

Utilities/Railroad Materials
EEO and Labor Compliance Safety
Project Status Surveying
General Comments
A-5
Utility/Railroad/Entity companies with facilities affected by work on this project are:
COMPANY CONTACT PHONE

Utility Name Person XXX-XXX-XXXX
Please call the Project Engineer at (XXX) XXX-XXXX with any questions.
Sincerely,
Resident Engineer Signature Block
CC: Federal Highway Administration

Bridge Design and Management Branch
Office of Public Relations
Region Maintenance Section
Region Traffic and Safety Section
Region Program Engineering Section, Right of Way Unit
Region Program Engineering Section, Materials Laboratory Unit
Region Program Engineering Section, Survey Unit
Region Program Engineering Section, Utilities Unit
Region Planning and Environmental Section
Region Landscaping Unit
Region Equal Employment Opportunity Office
Project Engineer
Head Tester
Resident Engineer
Project File
A-6
2829 W. Howard Place
Denver, Colorado 80204
Date RE:
FAX TO:
COMPANY CONTACT FAX NUMBER
Public Service Company - Cheri Weers 303-595-4577
Lighting
Public Service Company Clint Berry 303-571-7866
Elec. Distribution
Public Service Company - Don Booton 303-571-3826
Gas
U.S. West Communications Bill Reed 303-451-2579
AT & T Cable Services/TCI of Eric Carroll 303-603-5980
Colorado
MCI Telecommunications Jesse Padilla 303-214-7130
Corporation
US Sprint Larry Schneidmiller 303-789-4867
Denver Water Department Paul McQuade 303-628-6851
Denver Wastewater Dave Willett 303-446-3589
Management (Const/Insp)
Metro Wastewater Ron Maring 303-286-3030
Reclamation District
Burlington Northern and
Santa Fe Railway
The Preconstruction Conference for the above-referenced project will be held on[DATE AND
TIME], [LOCATION]. The contract for this project has been awarded to [PRIME].
Please contact the Project Engineer or Resident Engineer at (XXX) XXX-XXXX
Sincerely,
Resident Engineer signature block
A-7
Appendix A
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AGENDA
CDOT CONSTRUCTION MANUAL AGENDA FORMS
A-8
Appendix A
HOT MIX ASPHALT PRE-PAVING CONFERENCE AGENDA
The following is an example Hot Mix Asphalt Pre-paving Conference Agenda to assist in
facilitating the meeting. This example presents a minimum set of topics that should be
discussed during the Conference; however, not all topics will be covered for every project in
every Region. Prior to its use, thoroughly read the Agenda’s content and consider the special
needs of the particular project and Region. Modify this agenda to meet the needs of your
A-9
Appendix A
HOT MIX ASPHALT PRE-PAVE and PC/QA AGENDA

The items in the following agenda are minimum requirements that should be covered during the conference. The agenda may
be used as is or as a base to develop a customized agenda. Personnel recommended to be in attendance are: Project Engineer,
Paving Inspector, QA Tester, Region Materials Engineer, PC Tester, Superintendent, Paving Foreman, and Traffic Control
Supervisor.
Project Number: Resident Engineer:

Sub Account: Project Engineer:
Location: Contractor:
Date: Superintendent:
Time: Foreman:
I. Project Personnel
A. Colorado Department of Transportation Personnel

1. CDOT Project Engineer:
Name: Fax Number:
Office Number: Email Address:
Cell Number:
2. Assistant CDOT Project Engineer:
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
3.Owner Acceptance Tester (QA Tester):
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
4. Head Tester:
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
5. Paving Inspector:
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
6. Other
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
7. Other
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
A-10
Appendix A
B. Contractor Personnel
1. Superintendent
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
2. Personnel to Notify at Paving Site:
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
3. Process Control Supervisor:
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
4. On Site Process Control Supervisor (if different from above):
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
5. Process Control Tester (PC Tester)
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
6. Other
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
7. Other
Name: Fax Number:
Cell Number:
II. Attendance Roster
Name: Office Number:

Representing: Fax Number:
Address: Cell Number:
City. State, Zip: Email Address:
A-11
Appendix A

A-12
Appendix A

A-13
Appendix A
III. Escalation Process
A. Escalation Process ‐ Discuss the escalation process for paving items. What is the chain of command and how/when issues are elevated
to the next level in an effort to improve communication and decision making
Comments:
B. Form 626 Field Laboratory Test Results‐ Who is responsible for preparing, providing, and signing a Form 626 if required on the project.
Owner Responsibility:
Contractor Responsibility:
C. Who will be the 3rd party, independent testing lab for dispute resolution? Has this been submitted in writing prior to the Pre ‐Pave
Conference?
Title YES NO
Asphalt Mix Dispute Lab:
Roadway Smoothness Profiling:
Comments:
D. Discuss dispute split sampling requirements (per CP 17) and the different levels of the dispute resolution process
(levels 1, 2, and 3)
Comments:
A-14
Appendix A
IV. Special Provision Requirements

A. Distribution of Section 105 and Section 106 of the Standard Specifications:
A minimum of the following personnel should have a copy of Section 105 and Section 106 of the Standard Specifications
Title YES NO
Project Engineer:
Owner Acceptance Tester:
Head Tester:
Superintendent:
Process Control Supervisor:
Process Control Tester:
B. Distribution of QC/QA Software:
Which PC/QA Software is to be Name: Version:
used on this project? :
A minimum of the following personnel should have a copy of the QC/QA Software:
Title YES NO
Owner Acceptance Tester:
Head Tester:
Process Control Tester:
The following Project Special Provisions for Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement are reviewed and discussed below. Review the specifications associated
with the project, determine what has been revised from the Standard Special Provisions and discuss each difference with the project staff.
C. Project Special Provision

Comments:
D. Project Special Provision

Comments:
E. Project Special Provision

Comments:
F. Project Special Provision

Comments:
A-15
Appendix A
V. Standard Special Provisions
The following Standard Special Provisions for Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement are reviewed and discussed below. Review the specifications
associated with the project, determine what has been revised and discuss each difference with the project staff.
A. Standard Special Provision

Comments:
B. Standard Special Provision

Comments:
C. Standard Special Provision

Comments:
D. Standard Special Provision

Comments:
VI. Schedule
A. Materials
1. Materials will be available for sampling on:
Comments:
B. Asphalt Plant
1. The asphalt plant will be ready to be checked on:
a. The location of the plant to be used is:
b. What is the contingency plan if the designated palnt breaks down?
Comments:
c. What type of Release Agent will be used?

Comments:
C. Scales and Certified Weigher:

1. Has a copy of the scale certification(s) been submitted? YES: NO:
Comments:
A-16
Appendix A
2. Has a copy of the weigher certification(s) been submitted? YES: NO:

Comments:
3. Weigh tickets shall contain information required by the owner, as listed in section 109.01 of the
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Is the Contractor's plant set up to print the YES: NO:
tickets with the information required?
Comments:
4. The Contractor shall provide a daily list of haul vehicles and required information per specification (CDOT subsection 109.01). Who will
provide this to the Owner and who from the Owner's Agency will accept it from the Contractor?
Comments:
5. Random scale checks are required in the Standard Specifications (CDOT 109.01).
Comments:
D. Paving Schedule
1. The Contractor will commence paving on:
2. The paving equipment will be set up and ready to be checked on:
3. How many days per week does the Contractor intend to work?
4. What hours does the Contractor intend to work?
5. Where will paving start?
6. What width will be paved?
7. What paving sequence will be followed?
Comments:
8. Are there any concerns with the phasing plan?

Comments:
9. Who should be notified if an asphalt truck is rejected?

Comments:
E. All Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) safety procedures must be followed. Discuss how the paving operation will
be affected by OSHA requirements.
Comments:
A-17
Appendix A
F. What method will be used to determine pavement thickness?

Comments:
G. How does the Contractor and CDOT plan to address materials overruns?
Comments:
H. Other scheduling items that will affect the start of asphalt paving include:
Comments:
VII. Mix Design
A. Has the HMA Mix Design and CDOT Form 429 been submitted to the Owner? YES: NO:
Comments:
B. Has the HMA Mix Design been reviewed by the Owner YES: NO:
Comments:
C. Has the HMA Mix Design (CDOT Form 43) been issued by the Owner YES: NO:
Comments:
D. Have the samples for CDOT acceptance testing been taken by the Contractor, and as appropriate,
YES: NO:
reduced to the size designated by the Project Engineer for compliance with CP‐52?
Comments:
E. The target values for Voids in Mineral Aggregates (VMA) will be established using the average of the first three volumetric field test
results, or the target value specified in Table 403 ‐2 of the Standard Special Provisions , whichever is higher.
Comments:
F. New VMA target values will be set whenever a new or revised mix design is used and production resumes.
Comments:
A-18
Appendix A
G. Have incidental items been verified with the Approved Products List? YES: NO:
Comments:
H. No change shall be made to the ingredients comprising the approved mix design without prior
written approval of the Project Engineer ‐ this includes asphalt binder suppliers. Does the YES: NO:
Contractor anticipate any changes needed at this time?
Comments:
VIII. Check Testing Program
A. When will check testing be performed?

Note: Check testing shall be done prior to, or in conjunction with, placement of the first 500 tons of HMA. A check testing program will be
conducted between acceptance testing and process control testing, per subsection 106.05 (c) of the Standard Specifications and compared to
the acceptable limits shown in column 3 of Table 106‐1 of the Standard Specification s
Comments:
B. If production is suspended and then resumed, the Project Engineer may order a Check Testing Program between process control and
acceptance testing personnel to assure the test results are within the permissible ranges. How with the Project Engineer notify the
Contractor if this is required?
Comments:
IX. Testing Requirements

A. How will test location be determined?
Comments:
B. Which daily Rice value will be used for compaction verification? FIELD: REGION:
Comments:
C. What is the frequency of testing to be performed? (Refer to table 106‐1 of section 106.05 of the Standard Specifications for minimum
sampling and testing for HMA)
Comments:
A-19
Appendix A
D. Are Quality Assurance tests to be performed in addition to Process Control tests? (All jobs
including "M" projects greater than $150,000 require testing). If yes, how often and who will be YES: NO:
responsible to schedule the QA tests?
Comments:
E. The turnaround time for test results for both QA and PC tests is immediately upon completion. Discuss any potential deviations from
this requirement. What is the anticipated turnaround time?
Comments:
F. Split Samples: During production, split samples of randomly selected acceptance tests will be compared to the permissible ranges shown in
Field Materials Manual , Colorado Procedure 13 (CP‐13) Table 13‐1. The minimum frequency will be as shown in Table 106‐1 of the Standard
Special Provisions .
Comments:
G. Reference Conditions: "Condition Red" reference condition requires the Contractor to be immediately notified as per subsection
106.05(c)(3) of the Standard Special Provisions . The minimum testing frequency will be increased to 1/250 tons until the Quality Level reaches
or exceeds 78. If the Quality Level for the next five process control tests is below 65, production will be suspended. Is the Contractor familiar
with the steps that must be taken to resume production and the testing to be performed when production is resumed?
Comments:
H. Lottman Retesting: If one or more samples fail to meet the requirements of Table 401‐2, material from the area represented by the failing
sample will be evaluated per Standard Specifications 401.02 (b)(2).
Comments:
X. Production and Placement

A. Compaction Test Section
1. The Contractor must establish a roller pattern and carefully record the following information. Who will be responsible from both the Owner
and the Contractor to document and verify prior to paving continuance?
a. Type, size, amplitude, frequency, and speed of roller

b. Tire pressure for rubber tire rollers
c. For vibratory rollers, is it vibratory or static?
d. Surface temperature of mixture behind the lay‐down machine and subsequent temperatures and densities after each roller pass.
e. Sequence and distance from lay‐down machine for each roller and total number of passes of each roller to obtain specified density.
A-20
Appendix A
Comments:
2. When a successful Compaction Test Section (CTS) has been completed, the Contractor is required to maintain the roller pattern established
during the CTS for the balance of the HMA construction (i.e., the Contractor must use the same number and type of rollers and operate them
at the same speed, frequency, amplitude, and in the same position, relative to the lay‐down machine, as was performed during the CTS. If the
Contractor wants to perform minor changes to the roller pattern that was established during the CTS, the Contractor must perform a Roller
Pass Study to demonstrate that the density is obtained with the new roller pattern before proceeding with the paving operation. The Project
Team needs to agree to the definition of "minor" at the prepave meeting. Minor changes may include items such as type of roller; numbers
of rollers; distance from paver; number of roller passes; and temperatures.
Comments:
3. The Contractor is responsible for testing the compaction of the pavement in the Compaction Test Section. Who will be the contact for the
Contractor for the testing?
Comments:
4. Cores are required to calibrate the nuclear density gauge. The Contractor can continue to pave under the following conditions:
a. The period that the Contractor continues to pave without test results from cores shall not exceed one working day.
b. Construction proceeds at the Contractor's risk.
Comments:
Traditional
5. What method will be used to bulk core samples? Method (CP 44, Core Dry
Method "B")
Process Control (PC)

Quality Assurance (QA)
Comments:
6. A new Compaction Test Section or roller pass study will be required whenever there is a major change in the compaction process. The
Project Team needs to agree to the definition of "major" at the prepave meeting. Major changes may include items such as: new mix
design; change in lift thickness; or other items that could affect the nuclear density gauge correlations .
Comments:
A-21
Appendix A
XI. Process Control Testing

A. Has the Contractor submitted their Process Control Plan? YES: NO:
Comments:
B. Does the Process Control Plan, process control, project acceptance testing, and check testing
frequencies meet the minimum random sampling frequency (Table 106 ‐1 of the Standard YES: NO:
Specifications )?
Comments:
C. Is the Test Result Chart for each process, with tonnage and tolerance limits, posted daily at a
location convenient for viewing by the Project Engineer? YES: NO:
Posting Location:
Comments:
D. Is the Quality Level Chart for each element in Table 106‐1 of the Standard Specifications posted
daily at a location convenient for viewing by the Project Engineer? YES: NO:
Posting Location:
Comments:
E. Is the Process Control Supervisor for process control sampling and testing identified in the Process
Control Plan (PCP)? YES: NO:
Comments:
F. Does the Process Control Supervisor possess one of the following qualifications?
1. Registration as a Professional Engineer in the State of Colorado
2. Level A, B, and C certifications from the Laboratory for Certification of Asphalt Technicians YES: NO:
(LabCAT)
Comments:
G. Do technicians taking samples and performing tests possess all of the following qualifications?
1. Technicians taking samples and conducting compaction tests have Level A LabCAT certification? YES: NO:
2. Technicians conducting process control tests have Level B LabCAT certification? YES: NO:
3. Technicians determining mix volumetric and strength characteristics have Level C LabCAT
certification? YES: NO:
Comments:
A-22
Appendix A
H. Does the PCP provide information to control the quality of the following:
1. Segregation YES: NO:
2. Longitudinal Joint Construction YES: NO:
3. Transverse Joint Construction YES: NO:
4. Smoothness YES: NO:
a. This project is: Profiler (MRI):
Comments:
I. The Contractor will report the results of the process control tests to the Project Engineer in writing at least once per day. Where and when
will this be performed?
Comments:
J. Has the Contractor's Processy Control Plan been accepted and approved in writing by the Project
YES: NO:
Engineer?
Comments:
K. Has the Contractor submitted the Contractor's Binder Field Quality Plan to ensure requirements of
YES: NO:
CP 11, Section 14 ‐ Certifying Suppliers Providing Performance Graded Binders?
Comments:
XII. Striping
A. Is the Subcontractor or Contractor installing the striping? PRIME: SUB:
Comments:
B. When will striping occur?

Comments:
C. What material will be used?

Comments:
D. Have Materials Data Sheets been submitted? If so, have they been approved? YES: NO:
Comments:
A-23
Appendix A
E. Has the striping plan been submitted? If so, has it been approved? YES: NO:
Comments:
XIII. Traffic Control

A. Method of Handling Traffic (MHT):
1. Has the MHT been submitted for the Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement placement operation? YES: NO:
If no, when will it be submitted?
Comments:
2. Has the MHT been submitted for the striping operation? YES: NO:
If no, when will it be submitted?
Comments:
3. Is the traffic control plan approved? YES: NO:

Comments:
A-24
Appendix A
SUGGESTED BEST PRACTICES FOR MINIMIZING SEGREGATION
1. Aggregate Stockpiles:
A. Build in Layers
B. Avoid any procedure that will allow the aggregate to be pushed or dumped over the side of a stockpile
C. Separate to prevent intermingling
D. Aggregate Handling:
i. Loader operator works full face of stockpile
ii. Install dividers on the “cold feed” bins to prevent the material from flowing into an adjacent bin
iii. DO NOT pile the aggregate so high it flows over the dividers
2. Loading the Surge Silo: (if the plant has a “batcher or “Gob Hopper” at the top of the silo)
A. Adjust the conveying devises to deposit the material in the center of the batcher or gob hopper
B. Keep the gates on the batcher or gob hopper closed unless dropping a load of mix
C. Close the gate on the batcher or gob hopper before it is empty to prevent the material from dribbling into the silo
3. Loading Trucks
A. Keep the gates on the bottom of the silo closed so the material does not dribble into the trucks
B. Take care to center the trucks (left to right) when loading
C. Load trucks in multiple drops with the first drop at the rear, second at the front and then alternate dumps
D. If the mix is prone to segregation, you should avoid loading the trucks by “slowly” driving forward while dropping the mix from the silo
4. Dumping Trucks:
A. To provide as surge of material to the paver, when using end dump type trucks, the box should be raised until the mix moves to the rear of
the bed charging the tail gate prior to releasing the load
B. If any mix is spilled on the roadway, in front of the paver while dumping the truck, the spilled mix should be removed from the roadway
before the paver moves forward across the mixture on the grade
5. Laydown Operations:
A. Only dump the wings on the paver hopper at the end of the paving day and utilize this material in the night taper joint or waste thematerial
B. To provide consistent flow of material to the screed and avoid gradual deceleration/ acceleration, the paver should be started andstopped
quickly at normal operating speed
C. Keep the hopper more than half full at all times and maintain the height within 1 inch the entire paving day
D. The auger height should be adjusted so the bottom of the auger is at least two (2) inches above the finished surface of the HMAmat
E. Adjust the feed sensors to keep the material near the center of the auger at all times
F. Correctly adjust the lead and tail crown of the screed so that the surface of the HMA behind the paver is uniform in appearanceand
texture
G. Install or verify the material management kits are installed and functioning properly. This includes the “kick back” paddles underthe gear
box and outer edges of the auger
H. Adjust the flow control; gates at the rear of the hopper so that:
A-25
Appendix A
i. The slat conveyors run continuously

ii. The amount of material being presented to the augers allows for them to run almost continually, (minimum of 80% of the
time)
6. Windrow Elevators
A. When using pickup machines they should be adjusted so that all of the HMA is removed from the surface
7. Troubleshooting
A. If segregation is observed behind the paver, check the trucks as they arrive and are dumping to see if the mix in the truck is
segregated
B. The risk of causing thermal segregation is increased when paving in cooler temperatures
A-26
Appendix A
SUGGESTED BEST PRACTICES FOR PAVEMENT SMOOTHNESS
Paver Operations - Best Practices and Innovations
Keep the hopper full: If you are not using a hopper insert leave as much surge as possible between truck exchanges and do not run the hopper
empty. This will minimize “truck fans” by allowing hot, uniform material from the next truck to blend with mix from the previous dump.
Keeping your mat as thermally uniform as possible will result in better densities.
Controlled hopper wing cycling: The wings are where the large, cooler stone tends to collect if not properly reintroduced back to the mix.
Regular cycling, where allowed by spec, will reduce large buildups of this segregated material. Don’t wait until you are “out of material” to cycle
the wings
Use a hopper insert: If you are using pick up machines and windrow paving use a hopper insert. It will reduce or eliminate segregation.
Keep a constant head of material at the spreading augers: A consistent flow of material to the spreading augers will prevent them from
spinning too fast or too slow, which can cause longitudinal segregation. As a rule of thumb, a proper head of material is ½ up the spreading
auger. Constant changes in the head of material make waves in the mat. If allowed to rotate too fast, longitudinal stripes will occur in line with
the reversing augers; too low a rate and the larger stone will drop and collect at the bearing support
Time the conveying and spreading systems: Ensure the ratio pots or flow gates are set to deliver enough material to the spreading augers to
keep them running continuously. Set your sonic feeds and leave them there.
Keep your paver speed steady: Drag race paving may be entertaining but stops and starts cause the head of material to rise and fall changing
the mat thickness. This not only affects ride but can detrimentally affect density.
Correct lead crown setting and proper strike off adjustment: Equipment fine-tuning issues will help eliminate longitudinal segregation. String
line your screed before every job and introduce the correct amount of lead crown; usually 1/8 - 1/4 inches. Make sure your strike offs are
correctly aligned. Refer to your owner’s manual for the recommended procedure.
Correct spread auger length: Once you have the job planned out if you need to build up the spreading augers then DO IT. Trying to compensate
for spreading augers that are too short by running them faster will only result in segregation. This only gets worse with more gap graded mixes.
If you have a 20’ screed and the job calls for wide paving then BUILD UP THE SCREED; use the auger extensions, wide mat grade supports and
the outboard bearing supports. The finished jobs will more than compensate for the time involved in the buildup. Then plan the layout so you
can maximize the use of the built-up screed.
Use Thermal guns: Equip your paver operator and roller hands with thermal (infrared) handheld thermometers and use them to monitor
changes in the mat temperature. Establishment of a thermal range during the test strip process gives you a working range to be used throughout
the paving project.
Don’t broadcast material across the mat: This just gives the appearance of a segregation problem. Don’t rake material off the joint onto the
new mat. Don’t walk on the fresh mat.
Train your personnel: Not only in the operation of the equipment but in the art of reading mat defects. The sooner these defects are identified the
sooner remedial action can be taken. Remember when the only tool you have is a hammer every problem looks like a nail.
A-27
Appendix A
Pave predominately uphill: On steep grades in mountainous terrain, pave uphill when possible. Control of material and speed of
equipment is easier to maintain when paving uphill. Paving downhill may be problematic with paver and roller speeds. This may
cause "ripples" in the mat that are difficult to remove. The mat may shove and tear more when operations proceed downhill,
requiring patching or other undesired corrective work. QC should be onsite to monitor densities when steep grades require a
change in the roller pattern.
NOTE: It is not intended to change the direction of the paving operation in rolling terrain. If the roadway grade is predominately in the
uphill or downhill direction on mountain passes or other significant elevation changes, paving uphill provides a better product.
Job Set Up - Best Practices
Partnering: All personnel involved in the construction planning and design need to meet before the job so we can all “be on the
same page” and resolve possible problems before they arise.
Pre Paving Planning Meeting: Meet with your crew every day to review the plan for the day’s construction and expectations. Plan
the truck route, plan the job layout, and assign people to required tasks.
Communication: Constant communication with all the elements of the paving process from design engineers to the lute man. This
keeps all phases of the job on schedule and free of “Uh Ohs”.
Mix Selection: Ensure the mix is of an adequate design for both strength and workability. Mind your temperatures.
Machine Maintenance: Not only does well maintained iron contribute to a more pleasant work environment it shows your people
that you care enough about them to give them the best tools. It provides for a safer work environment and a more productive and
profitable organization.
Smoothness-Thickness-Yield: The inspectors and field personnel need to be aware of the paving fundamental that yield, minimum
thickness, and smoothness cannot be obtained at the same time.
Crew Training: Not only in the operation of the equipment but in the art of reading mat defects. The sooner these defects are
identified the sooner remedial action can be taken. Remember when the only tool you have is a hammer every problem looks like a
nail.
Know the Consequences: Of improperly operating the machines, improper principles and techniques of paving, rolling and trucking
of poor safety awareness. Designate a “job site safety man” know the way to emergency medical care.
A-28
Appendix A
SUGGESTED BEST PRACTICES FOR LONGITUDINAL JOINT CONSTRUCTION
BE CONSISTANT: Decide on a plan and stick with it.
COMMIT TO A GOOD JOINT: Quality contractors build quality joints.
MAINTAIN A PROPER TAPER: Tapers range from near vertical to 12:1. Regardless of what taper is used, keep it consistent. Vertical
edges and notches as vertical as possible. Keep edges confined as long as possible. Maintain a Proper “Head of Material”.
MAINTAIN PROPER OVERLAP: Keep overlap consistent typically from 0-1.5 inches. Place proper amount of HMA at the joint: Too
little will allow water to enter the joint. Too much will cause a ridge which will carry water and interfere with compaction. DO NOT
RAKE THE JOINT! If raking to correct improper amount of material, just bump the joint, DO NOT BROADCAST loose material across
the mat.
USE PROPER ROLLING TECHNIQUES!
A-29
Appendix A
SUGGESTED BEST PRACTICES FOR BREAK DOWN ROLLER OPERATIONS
1. Communicate with paving crew and foreman for job requirements prior to the arrival of asphalt.
2. Confirm maintenance and water system checks – done on a daily basis to rollers.
3. Determine lift thickness – base or surface riding course.
4. Be aware of material temperature – at delivery to paver and behind screed.
5. Determine rolling drum mode – vibratory or static.
6. Make required amplitude adjustments both roller drums – depending on mix design, material thickness, and temperature zone.
7. Optimize water system controls – to avoid material pick-up and eliminate excessive water usage.
8. Establish proper rolling pattern – determined by paving width, roller drum width, unsupported edges, and drum overlap.
9. Determine rolling speed – to achieve proper impact spacing and meet smoothness requirements.
10. Monitor rolling temperature – and work within optimum temperature zones.
11. Make required rolling coverages – to achieve density requirements.
12. Adjust rolling operations – to satisfy density, smoothness, and production rates.
13. Maintain consistency throughout the entire shift.
A-30
Appendix A
SUGGESTED BEST PRACTICES FOR FINISH ROLLER OPERATION
1. Communicate – with paving crew, foreman and breakdown roller operator for job requirements.
2. Confirm maintenance and water system checks – done on a daily basis to rollers.
3. Be aware of material temperature – avoid “tender zone.”
4. Determine rolling drum mode – vibratory or static depending upon requirements to achieve density and smoothness.
5. Optimize water system controls – to avoid material pick-up and eliminate excessive water usage.
6. Establish proper rolling pattern, – determined by paving width, roller drum width, unsupported edges, and drum overlap.
7. Coordinate final rolling process with QA / QC personnel
8. Monitor rolling temperature – and work within optimum temperature zones.
9. Make required rolling coverage’s – to achieve density requirements and to remove drum edge marks.
10. Maintain consistency throughout the entire shift.
A-31
Appendix A
SUGGESTED BEST PRACTICES FOR PAVER OPERATORS
Safety operates the paver using "Best Practices" procedures, to produce the highest-quality pavement possible.
1. Select a paving speed that balances delivery, paver capacity and the compaction process and pave with few if any extended stops.
2. Work with screed operator in establishing and maintaining the head of material within a plus or minus one inch tolerance.
3. Steer the paver holding to a pre-determined reference.
4. Direct the truck driver to raise bed and exit when empty
5. Utilize rapid, but smooth start and stops to help prevent end-of-load roughness (if stopping is necessary.)
6. Observe HMA being discharged into paver hopper or insert for changes in characteristics of the mix.
7. Monitor paver for unusual noise or vibration (notify the proper person to take corrective actions).
8. Work with dump person to make sure truck does not bump paver, or let hopper run low.
9. Work as a team member.
A-32
Appendix A
PRE-DEMOLITION CONFERENCE AGENDA
The following is an example Pre-demolition Conference Agenda to assist in facilitating the

meeting. This example presents a minimum set of topics that should be discussed during the
Conference; however, not all topics will be covered for every project in every Region. Prior to
its use, thoroughly read the Agenda’s content and consider the special needs of the particular
project and Region. Modify this agenda to meet the needs of your project. Copies of this Agenda
are available from the CDOT website:
A-33
Appendix A
PRE-DEMOLITION CONFERENCE AGENDA

The items in the following agenda are minimum requirements that should be covered during the conference. The agenda
may be used as is or as a base to develop a customized agenda.
Project Code (SA): Project Engineer:
Time: Foreman:
I. Attendance Roster
Street Address: Cell Number:
City, State, Zip: E-Mail Address:








A-34
Appendix A
PRE-DEMOLITION CONFERENCE AGENDA (continued)

I. Attendance Roster (continued)









A-35
Appendix A

II. Project Organization and Status
A. Colorado Department of Transportation Personnel:
1. Personnel in Charge at Site:
Name/Title: Fax Number:
Office Number: Home Number:
Mobile Number: E-Mail Address:
2. Assistant-in-Charge (when personnel identified in A.1 is not present):
3. Inspector/Duties:
6.: Tester:
7. Other:
8. Other:
Comments:
A-36
Appendix A
B. Contractor Personnel:
1. Project Superintendent:
2. Demolition Company Superintendent:/Foreman
3. Contractor’s Engineer:
4. Traffic Control Supervisor:
5. Other:
A-37
Appendix A

III. Scheduling
A. Demolition Schedule:
1. Demolition is scheduled for:
2. Anticipated duration of demolition:
3. Detailed schedule complies with working hour restrictions?
4. If all girders in any one span cannot be removed in a shift, how will the Contractor ensure stability of the remaining
structure?
5. If all spans of a multi span structure cannot be removed in a single shift, how will the Contractor ensure the stability of
the remaining structure?
B. Utilities:
1. Has the Contractor verified that Power Lines will not interfere with demolition operations? Comments:
2. Has the Contractor verified the location of underground utilities?
C: Equipment Delivery:
Demolition equipment will arrive at:
D. Contractor’s Engineer:
1. The Contractor’s Engineer shall inspect and provide written approval of each phase of demolition prior to allowing
vehicles or pedestrians below or adjacent to the bridge. Comments:
E. Other Scheduled Items:

Other scheduling items that will affect the start of the demolition process include:
1. Lighting necessary:
2. Railroad Coordination:
3. Utility Coordination:
4. Agency Coordination:
5. Other:
A-38
Appendix A

The following Special Provisions are reviewed and discussed below:
A. Special Provision:
Comments:
B. Special Provision:
Comments:
C. Special Provision:
Comments:
D. Special Provision:
Comments:
E. Special Provision:
Comments:
F. Special Provision:
Comments:
G. Special Provision:
Comments:
H. Special Provision:
Comments:
A-39
Appendix A

V. Plan Notes and Unusual Requirements
The following plan notes and unusual requirements, experimental features, research items, and other unusual
requirements are reviewed and discussed below:
A. Plan Note:
Comments:
B. Plan Note:
Comments:
C. Plan Note:
Comments:
D. Plan Note:
Comments:
E. Other Requirement:
Comments:
F. Other Requirement:
Comments:
G. Other Requirement:
Comments:
H. Other Requirement:
Comments:
A-40
Appendix A

VI. Pre-Demolition Inspections
A. Falsework:
1. Are falsework drawings required per section 202 of the Project Special Provisions?
2. If falsework drawings are required, the Contractor's Engineer must certify in writing to the Project Engineer that
falsework materials and construction are in conformance with the falsework drawings submitted to the Project Engineer
prior to commencement of work, in accordance with subsection 601.11 of the Standard Specifications. Comments:
VII. Demolition Plan and Procedures

A. Demolition Plan:
Has demolition plan been submitted as required? Comments:
1. Have minimum requirements been incorporated into the demolition plan?
a. Removal Sequence?
b. Equipment Descriptions?
c. Temporary falsework, bracing and shoring?
d. Protective covering details?
e. Protection of live waterways?
i. Turbidity?
ii. Sedimentation?
iii. pH?
iv. Wetlands?
f. Fugitive Dust Mitigation
g. Dismantling, loading, and hauling details?
h. Hazmat?
2. Plan stamped by Contractor’s Engineer?
3. Final plan to be submitted to Project Engineer on ______________________
A-41
Appendix A

B. Demolition Plan Deviation:
If the Contractor is required to deviate from the demolition plan, prior approval from the Contractor’s Engineer to make
the revision must be discussed (i.e. schedule and related impacts) with the Project Engineer. Comments:
C. Method of Communication:
What method of communication will be used between the Contractor, the demolition subcontractor, the Contractor’s
Engineer, and the Project Engineer on the job site, during demolition? Comments:
D. Weather :
Does the Contractor have a contingency plan for inclement weather?
The Contractor will confirm weather forecast 24 hours prior to demolition. Comments:
IX. Safety Requirements

A. Safety Plan:
1. Has the Contractor provided for work site safety in accordance with the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration requirements (e.g., hardhats, handrails, safety belts, nets)? Comments:
2. Suggested safety topics:
a. Appropriate equipment (type and size)?
b. Never stand or walk under structure once demolition has begun.
c. Do working hour limitations allow sufficient time for the Contractor’s demolition sequence?
3. Time and place of demolition safety meeting?
A-42
Appendix A
X. Traffic Control
A. MHT
1. Will the equipment delivery require traffic control? Describe MHT
2. Will the debris removal require traffic control? Describe MHT
3. Will the demolition require traffic control? Describe MHT
4. Has the Method of Handling Traffic been submitted and approved?
5. Method to prevent traffic (vehicular and others) from entering workzone?
6. Public relations notified?
7. Verify vertical and lateral clearances after demolition and notify Staff Maintenance if necessary.
Additional comments:
A-43
Appendix A
PRE-ERECTION CONFERENCE AGENDA
The following is an example Pre-erection Conference Agenda to assist in facilitating the

A-44
Appendix A
PRE-ERECTION CONFERENCE AGENDA

The items in the following agenda are minimum requirements that should be covered during the conference. The agenda
may be used as is or as a base to develop a customized agenda.
Time: Foreman:








A-45
Appendix A
PRE-ERECTION CONFERENCE AGENDA (continued)










A-46
Appendix A

2. Assistant-in-Charge (when individual listed above is not present):
3. Bridge Designer (attendance required):
4. Staff Bridge (attendance as established by Project Engineer if bridge designed by Consultant):
8. Tester:
9. Other:
Comments:
A-47
Appendix A
1. Project Superintendent:
2. Erection Company Superintendent/Foreman:
3. Contractor’s Engineer:
4. Girder Fabricator (may attend by speaker telephone):
5. Traffic Control Supervisor:
6. Other:
A-48
Appendix A

III. Scheduling
A. Materials:
1. Girders will be delivered when (date and time)?
2. Has the Quality Assurance Acceptance Report (Bridge Report #193) been received from the Staff Bridge Fabrication
Inspector?
3. If girders will be stored on site, describe storage and protection plan:
4. Location of temporary storage if erection is postponed:
5. What contingency plans are there for an interrupted delivery schedule?
6. Has the pier cap concrete attained at least 80% of its 28 day strength (Subsection 601.11(e))?
7. Project Engineer: When girders are delivered, who from the project will inspect for damage?
B. Erection Schedule:
1. Erection is scheduled for:
2. Anticipated duration of erection:
3. Detailed schedule complies with working hour restrictions?
4. How will the Contractor stabilize the girders during and after erection operations?
Precast, Prestressed Concrete Box Girders (Bracing may not be required.):
Precast, Prestressed Concrete I and BT Girders (Bracing may only be required during erection. Diaphragms will require
installation as erection progresses.):
Steel Girders: “No fewer than two steel girders shall be erected when girders are initially placed in any span, unless the
Engineer provides a written waiver to this requirement.” “Steel box girders need not be erected in pairs.”
C. Crane Delivery:
Crane(s) will arrive at:
D. Contractor’s Engineer:
1. When a bridge spans traffic of any kind, the area beneath the girders shall not be opened to traffic until the
Contractor’s Engineer has inspected and provides written approval of the erected girders. Comments.
2. Has the Contractor’s Engineer provided the inspection form the Contractor will use to document the daily inspection of
the erected girders and other permanent and temporary bridge elements?
Project Engineer: Who from the project has been assigned the task of inspecting the erected girders daily?
A-49
Appendix A
F. Other Scheduled Items:

Other scheduling items that will affect the start of the erection process include:
1. Lighting necessary:
2. Railroad Coordination:
3. Utility Coordination:
4. Other:
5. Other:

Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
A-50
Appendix A

A. Plan Note:
Comments:
B. Plan Note:
Comments:
C. Plan Note:
Comments:
D. Plan Note:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
A-51
Appendix A

VI. Pre-Erection Inspections
A. Bearings:
1. Are bearings set on proper line and grade? Comments:
2. Will the bearings be welded during erection? If so, welding must be performed by certified welder. Comments.
B. Falsework:
1. Is falsework required per subsection 601.11(a) of the Standard Specifications?
2. If falsework is required, has the Contractor's Engineer certified in writing that falsework materials and construction
have been inspected and that all falsework design, materials, and construction conform with the requirements of the
Contract and are safe for placement of loads, in accordance with subsection 601.11(b) of the Standard Specifications?
Comments:
C. Substructure Survey 601.12(l)

Has substructure survey been completed and submitted? Information checked against the plans and shop drawings?
VII. Erection Plan and Procedures

A. Erection Plan:
Has erection plan been submitted as required? Comments:
1. Have minimum requirements been incorporated into the erection plan?
2. When will the final Erection Plan, signed and sealed by the Contractor’s Engineer, stamped “Approved for
Construction” and signed by the Contractor be submitted to the Project Engineer (date and time)?
3. Erection subcontractor’s demonstration of knowledge and familiarity with piece marks.

- The Erection sheets from the shop drawings may be needed to facilitate the discussion.
- Call the girder fabricator on the speaker telephone.
• On the components to be erected, where are the piece marks located?
• How are the piece marks oriented in the finished structure?
• Discuss the shop drawing piece mark convention used by the girder fabricator.
• Has the Erection subcontractor discussed with the fabricator how the girders will be loaded? Piece marks toward
the front or rear of the truck?
Did the girder fabricator state whether the erection subcontractor had demonstrated a correct understanding of the piece
marks?
Did the girder fabricator correct any misunderstanding?
A-52
Appendix A

B. Erection Plan Deviation:
1. Any deviation from the final Erection Plan will require prior approval from the Contractor’s Engineer and the
Contractor and must be discussed with the Project Engineer. Comments:
2. What are the contingency plans if erection is not proceeding according to schedule? Based on production and time,
what are the specific points during erection a decision will be made to proceed with or cancel erection? The decision
must be discussed with the Project Engineer. Comments:
C. Method of Communication:
What method of communication will be used between the Contractor, the erection subcontractor, Contractor’s Engineer,
and the Project Engieer during erection?
D. Crane Operation:
1. Is the crane staging and erection site properly graded, drained, and stabilized? If not, when will it be?
2. Is there adequate room allowed for outriggers? Has the proximity to walls or other structures been investigated?
3. Has the Contractor verified the location of underground utilities in relation to the crane outriggers?
4. Has the Contractor verified that power lines will not interfere with crane operation? Comments:
5. What contingency plans are there for equipment failure? Comments:
E. Weather :
The Contractor will confirm weather forecast 24 hours prior to erection. Comments and description of contingency plan:
VIII. Inspection Requirements

A. Inspection of Bolts:
1. What “acceptable platform” will the Contractor provide to allow the Engineer to inspect tension in high strength bolts
per subsection 509.28(h)?
2. The Contractor will need to demonstrate that the bolt tightening method used produces the tension specified in Table
509-3. Comments:
A-53
Appendix A

IX. Safety Requirements
A. Safety Plan:
1. Has the Contractor provided for work site safety in accordance with the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration requirements and standard special provision, Project Safety Planning (e.g., hardhats, handrails, safety
belts, nets)? Comments:
2. Suggested safety topics:

d. Properly sized crane?
e. Appropriate slings, chokers, and lifting devices?
f. Ensure that a single girder is tied off and braced prior to hoisting the adjacent girder.
g. Tag lines to be used to control hoisted girders
h. Never stand or walk under hoisted girder.
3. Time and place of erection safety meeting?
X. Traffic Control
A. Method of Handling Traffic (MHT)
1. Will the crane delivery require traffic control? Describe MHT
2. Will the girder delivery require traffic control? Describe MHT
3. Will the girder erection require traffic control? Describe MHT
4. Has the Method of Handling Traffic been submitted and approved?
5. Method to prevent traffic from entering work zone?
6. Public relations notified?
7. Verify vertical and lateral clearances after erection per subsection 630.09, Paragraph 4, ( 7) and (8). Staff
Maintenance Permit Office may require notification. See Construction Bulletin 2006 Number 1..
Comments:
A-54
Appendix A
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PRE-POUR CONFERENCE AGENDA
The following is an example Structural Concrete Pre-pour Conference Agenda to assist in

facilitating the meeting. This example presents a minimum set of topics that should be
needs of the particular project and Region. Contact the Area Engineer in the Project
Development Branch for additional information. Copies of this Agenda are available from the
Project Development Branch and the CDOT Intranet and Internet Web Site.
The following is an example Pre-erection Conference Agenda to assist in facilitating the

A-55
Appendix A
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PRE-POUR CONFERENCE AGENDA

The items in the following agenda are minimum requirements that should be covered during the conference. The
agenda may be used as is or as a base to develop a customized agenda.
Time: Foreman:








A-56
Appendix A
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PRE-POUR CONFERENCE AGENDA (continued)










A-57
Appendix A

2. Assistant-in-Charge (when personnel identified in A.1 is not present):
3. Tester:
7. Other:
Comments:
1. Quality Control Supervisor:
2. Other:
3. Other:
4. Other:
Comments:
A-58
Appendix A

III. Scheduling
A. Materials:
Materials will be available for sampling on:
B. Concrete Plant:
Concrete plant will be ready to be checked on:
C. Finishing Equipment:
Finishing equipment will be set up and ready for approval on:
D. Placement Schedule:
Placement is scheduled for:
E. Concrete Batching:
Concrete batching will start at:
F. Placement Location:
Concrete placement will start at:
G. Length of Pour:
Anticipated length of pour:
H. Other Scheduled Items:

Other scheduling items that will affect the start of the concrete pour include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
A-59
Appendix A

Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
A-60
Appendix A

A. Plan Note:
Comments:
B. Plan Note:
Comments:
C. Plan Note:
Comments:
D. Plan Note:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
Comments:
A-61
Appendix A

VI. Pre-Pour Inspections
The Contractor is hereby informed that no concrete shall be placed prior to review, inspection, and approval of the
following items:
A. Forms:
Are forms set on proper line and grade, adequately supported, free of grout leaks, clean and properly sized. Comments:
B. Falswork:
Are falsework drawings required per subsection 601.11(b) of the Standard Specifications?
If falsework drawings are required, the Contractor's professional engineer must certify in writing to the Project Engineer
that falsework materials and construction are in conformance with the falsework drawings submitted to the Project
Engineer prior to placement, in accordance with subsection 601.11(a) of the Standard Specifications. Comments:
Placement of telltales. Comments:
C. Reinforcing Steel:
Reinforcing steel must be of the proper grade, and the bars must be of the correct number and size placed in the
correct location. Bars must be properly tied and all areas where the epoxy coating has been damaged must be correctly
repaired. Comments:
D. Expansion Devices:
Expansion devices must be set on correct line and grade, formed and secured to allow concrete to flow around anchor
devices with no resulting voids. Comments:
E. Line and Grade:

Inspected for proper line and grade. Comments:
F. Finishing Machine and Testing Bridge:

The finishing machine must be adjusted to finish on the proper line, grade, and skew, and the support rail or string line
must be set properly and supported adequately. A test run must be completed and measurements taken to check
uniformity. The testing bridge must be ready for use by CDOT forces. Comments:
A-62
Appendix A

VII. Concrete Batching and Delivery (subsections 601.06 and 601.07)
A. Plant and Truck Inspections: Yes No
Are plant and truck inspections current?
Have CDOT Forms 46 – Concrete Truck Mixer Inspection Certification been submitted?
Do all trucks have counters and manufacturer's plates that list the various drum speeds?
Comments:
B. Design Mix: Yes No

Has the Concrete Mix Design Report been reviewed and approved by the Materials and
Geotechnical Branch?
Are copies of the CDOT Mix Design Review Sheet available for supplier and Inspector?
Are there any unusual features in the concrete mixes?
Comments:
C. Mix Deviation: Yes No

Does Contractor or supplier intend to deviate from proposed proportions for any reason (e.g.,
admixtures)?
If yes, prior approval to make the revision must be received. Comments:
D. Aggregate Stockpiles: Yes No

Have the fine and coarse aggregate stockpiles been tested for compliance with specifications?
Are they adequate for the proposed placement?
Will supplier sample aggregate stockpiles for moisture content within 24-hours prior to
placement?
These test results should be made available to the Inspector.
Comments:
E. Method of Communication:
What method of communication will be used between the batch plant and the job site?
F. Plant Breakdowns: Yes No

In the event of a plant breakdown, will an alternate plant be used?
Has a mix design been approved for this alternate plant?
Comments:
A-63
Appendix A

VII. Concrete Batching and Delivery (continued)
G. Emergency Bulkheads:
If it is necessary to place an emergency bulkhead, at what locations can this emergency bulkhead be placed?
H. Bridge Design and Management Branch: Yes No

Has the Bridge Design and Management Branch been contacted for advice?
Comments:
I. Concrete Tests:
The Contractor is reminded that the concrete will be tested at the job site. The results of these tests will be used to
accept, price reduce, or reject the concrete. The Project Engineer, or his delegated representative, will be responsible
for informing the Contractor of the test results and the acceptability of the concrete. Comments:
J. Concrete Rejection:
The Contractor is reminded that concrete can be rejected for any of the following reasons:
1. mix exceeds the water-cement ratio criteria,
2. mixing/hauling exceed specified time limit,
3. work is not meeting specified concrete mix temperatures, or
4. a batch ticket is not filled out completely.
Comments:
K. Batch Tickets:
The concrete supplier is to furnish a batch ticket with each load of concrete delivered to the project. These tickets must
contain all the information specified in subsection 601.06 of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall collect
and complete the batch ticket at the placement site and deliver all batch tickets to the Project Engineer on a daily basis
as per subsection 601.06 of the Standard Specifications. Comments:
A-64
Appendix A

VIII. Concrete Placement (subsection 601.12 and 601.15)
A. Weather (see subsection 601.12 (b) and (c) for temperature limitations): Yes No
What is the weather forecast for the proposed placement date? Comments:
B. Placement Method:
What is the Contractor's method of placement, and what other method will be used in the event of breakdowns?
C. Form and Reinforcement Prewetting:

What method will be used to prewet forms and reinforcing steel?
D. Placement Sequence: Yes No

Is the placement sequence approved?
Comments:
E. Special Controls: Yes No

Is special control required to prevent detrimental camber deflections or girder rotation?
Comments:
1. F. Construction Joints:
If construction joints are needed, where will they be placed?
G. Vibrators: Yes No
Have frequency checks been performed on the vibrators?
Will backups be available?
How many vibrators and generators will be used?
The Contractor is reminded that the vibrators shall not be used to move the concrete. Comments:
A-65
Appendix A

IX. Concrete Finishing (subsections 601.12(k), 601.14, and 601.15)
A. Finishing Equipment:
What is the Contractor's plan in the event of a mechanical breakdown of the finishing machine?
B. Straightedge: Yes No
Is a 10-foot straightedge available for checking the tolerances of the finished concrete?
Comments:
2. C. Thickness and Cover Checks:

The Contractor is reminded that slab thickness and reinforcing steel cover checks will be made continuously and that the
Contractor may be required to adjust the screed periodically or refinish a portion of the slab to within tolerance. Comments:
D. Addition of Water:
The Contractor is cautioned that applying water to in-place concrete by any method other than those permitted by the
Contract will result in the rejection of placed concrete. Comments:
E. Waterproofing Membrane: Yes No

Will the deck be covered with a waterproofing membrane? OR
Will the final surface be concrete?
Comments:
A-66
Appendix A

X. Concrete Curing (subsections 601.13 and 601.16)
A. Curing Method:
What method of curing will the Contractor use?
B. Timing of Curing:
When will the curing method begin and how long will it last?
C. Protection of Concrete: Yes No

Does Contractor have equipment and materials at the site to provide insulation/heating of the
concrete?
Comments:
XI. Safety Requirements

Yes No
Has the Contractor provided for work site safety in accordance with the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration requirements (e.g., hardhats, handrails, safety belts, nets)?
Comments:
XII. Traffic Control

Yes No
Will the concrete placement require traffic control?
Has the Method of Handling Traffic been submitted and approved prior to placement?
Comments:
A-67
Appendix A
CONCRETE PAVEMENT PRE-PAVING AND QC/QA CONFERENCE

AGENDA
The following is an example Concrete Pavement Pre-paving and QC/QA Conference Agenda to
assist in facilitating the meeting. This example presents a minimum set of topics that should be
needs of the particular project and Region. Modify this agenda to meet the needs of your
A-68
Appendix A
[A-6_CONCRETE PAVEMENT PRE-PAVING AND QCQA CONFERENCE AGENDA.PDF]
A-69
Appendix A
ENVIRONMENTAL PRECONSTRUCTON CONFERENCE AGENDA

AND ATTENDANCE ROSTER
The following is an example Environmental Preconstruction Conference Agenda and an

Attendance Roster (with Certification of Understanding) to assist in facilitating the meeting.
This example presents a minimum set of topics that should be discussed during the Conference;
however, not all topics will be covered for every project in every Region. Prior to its use,
thoroughly read the Agenda’s content and consider the special needs of the particular project
and Region. Modify this agenda to meet the needs of your project. Copies of this Agenda are
available from the CDOT website:
A-70
Appendix A
ENVIRONMENTAL PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AGENDA
1. Introductions
Name Phone number Email Address
Project Engineer
Superintendent
Contractor’s SWMP
Administrator
Supervisors or
Foremen
RWPCM
CDOT SWMP
Preparer or Reviewer
2. Purpose of the Environmental Pre-construction Conference

• To discuss the terms and conditions of the Stormwater Management Plan
(SWMP). Review the regulatory enforcement mechanisms outlined in 208.09
Failure to Perform.
• Project site review.
• At the conclusion of the Environmental Preconstruction Conference, each
attendee is required to sign the Certificate of Understanding acknowledging that
they understand the terms and conditions of the SWMP and the Permit. Any
other individuals that comes onto the project site during construction (including
sub-contractors and suppliers) shall also be made aware of these requirements
and they are required to sign the Certification of Understanding. This Agenda
and the Certification of Understanding must be included in Tab 15 of the SWMP
Notebook.
3. Concept, Goal and Compliance

• Basic concept is that stormwater runoff caused by precipitation is OK. It’s the
pollutants collected in the runoff as it is conveyed through our construction site
that is the problem.
• Our goal is to contain, reduce or eliminate the pollution to the stormwater runoff
that is caused by the project’s construction activities be it grading, paving,
painting, or simply where we park our vehicles and dispose of our trash.
• This project has a Permit from the Colorado Department of Public Health and
Environment (CDPHE). Under this Permit, facilities are granted authorization to
discharge stormwater associated with construction activities into State waters of
Colorado; however, there are regulatory requirements that we need to comply
with to protect water quality as defined in the Permit.
A-71
Appendix A
• The SWMP must include a description of all stormwater management controls

that will be implemented as part of the construction activity to control pollutants in
stormwater discharges such as sediment, chemicals and trash.
• The Contractor is responsible for making their own determination as to the
adequacy and locations of BMP types, and shall amend the SWMP in
accordance with Section 208.
4. Project Start Date

• Prior to construction the Region Water Pollution Control Manager (RWPCM)
and the contractor’s SWMP Administrator shall:
o Evaluate the project site for stormwater draining into or through the site.
o Evaluate the project site for non-stormwater coming onto the site.
o Review existing inlets and determine is protecting is needed.
o Review and identify sensitive habitats on site, wetlands and other
vegetation (including trees) to be protected.
The anticipated start of construction is:
__________________________________
5. Inspections
• 7-day and post-storm event inspections by the SWMP Administrator and
Erosion Control Inspector (if required), Superintendent and Project Engineer per
specification 208.03 (c) 2.
• Headquarter and Region water quality inspections performed by the
RWPCM per CDOTs Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4)
permit. Attendees can include the RWPCM, the Project Engineer, the
Superintendent, SWMP Administrator and Erosion Contol Inspector (ECI)
(if needed). Inspections with aforementioned representatives will perform
an audit of the SWMP notebook and a MS4 compliance site inspection.
The concept of the these inspections is to initially assess each project for
their level of environmental risk to adversely impact State waters, and then
continually reassess the project’s performance throughout the duration of
the project. Environmental risk is based upon factors such as proximity to
State waters, amount of acres of disturbance, type of project, soil
classification, slopes and type of “findings” identified during the inspection.
The findings identified in the inspection that need to be corrected must be
documented within ESCAN.
• Local Jurisdictional and Qualifying Local Program inspections may also be
required per Part 1, A.1 of the Permit unless a waiver or other agreement has
been made.
6. Failure to Perform Erosion Control

• Failure to implement the SWMP is a violation of the Permit and CDOT
specifications. Penalties will be assessed to the Contractor by the appropriate
A-72
Appendix A
agencies. Any penalties (including monetary fines) assessed to the Department

for the Contractor’s failure to implement the SWMP will be deducted from
moneys due the Contractor in accordance with subsection 107.25 (c) 2. See
subsection 208.09 for further information about notifying Contractor for
incidences of failure to perform, liquidated damages, and stop work orders.
o First Engineer Response – The Engineer will provide immediate verbal
notification to Contractor accompanied by a Form # 105 to the Contractor
requiring immediate compliance with the Permit. The Contractor has 48 hours
from 11:59 p.m. of the day the Form 105 was issued to complete the work.
Compliance must be documented by a reply to the Form 105 of the corrected
items. Documentation must be submitted to the Engineer by the following
business day after the 48 hour period.
o Second Engineer Response –If required work is not completed within 48
hours of the issued Form 105, the Engineer will assess the appropriate
liquidated damages. Liquidated damages will continue to accumulate for
each calendar day until all corrections are completed as stipulated under
revised subsection 208.09.
o Third Engineer Response – If the Contractor fails to correct compliance
failures within 48 hours without acceptable justification, once liquidated
damages are applied, the Engineer will issue a Stop Work Order in
accordance with subsection 105.01.
o Fourth Engineer Response – If the Contractor’s deferment request including
the corrective action plan and schedule are not submitted within 96 hours of
the initial notice, the Engineer will schedule an on-site meeting with the
Resident Engineer, RWPCM, Superintendent, SWMP Administrator, and the
Superintendent’s supervisor.
o Fifth Engineer Response – If the Contractor remains non-responsive to
requirements of the on-site meeting, the Engineer will start default and
Contract termination procedures in accordance with section 108.8 of the
Construction Manual.
The Contractor’s deferment request shall be in writing and include the specific
failure, temporary measures until final correction is made, the methodology which
will be employed to make the correction and interim milestones to completing the
work. The Region Water Pollution Control Manager (RWPCM), Engineer, the
SWMP Administrator and the Contractor shall concur on this deferral and set a
proposed date of completion. Based on the submittal date of the approved
deferment Liquated Damages and a Stop Work Order may not be mandated to
the Contractor.
When a failure meets any one of the following conditions, the Engineer may
immediately issue a Stop Work Order in accordance with subsection 105.01
irrespective of any other available remedy:
o It may endanger health or the environment.
A-73
Appendix A
o It consists of a spill or discharge of hazardous substances or oil which may

cause pollution of the waters of the state.
o It consists of a discharge of stormwater which may cause an exceedance of
a water quality standard.
7. Key Submittals
• SWMP Notebook will be provided to the Contractor at the time of the
Environmental Pre-construction Conference. Notebook is and shall remain the
property of CDOT. The notebook will be stored in the CDOT field office or at
another on-site location approved by the Engineer. Notebook will include the first
4 items per specification 208.03 (d) 1:
1. SWMP Plan Sheets.
2. SWMP Site Map(s) and Project Plan Title Sheet.
3. Copies of subsection 107.25, and Sections 207, 208, 212, 213, and 216 of
the Standard Specifications, and the standard and project special
provisions that modify them.
4. Standard Plan M-208-1, M-216-1 and M-615-1.
• Certification that the contractor’s appointed SWMP Administrator and ECI (if
needed) has completed the Transportation Erosion Control Supervisor (TECS)
training program. The SWMP Administrator and ECI shall be a person other than
the Superintendent. The SWMP Administrator shall be responsible for
developing, implementing, maintaining and revising the SWMP for the duration of
the project.
• “Spill Response Plan” completed prior to the Environmental Pre-construction
Conference. Work shall not be started until the plan has been submitted to and
approved by the Engineer. Specification 107.25 (b) 6 and 208.06 (c).
• “List of Potential Pollution Sources” completed prior to the environmental
preconstruction conference per specification 107.25 (b) 6.
• “Method Statement for Containing Pollutant Byproducts” statement submitted to
the Engineer a minimum of ten days prior to the start of the construction activity
per specification 107.25 (b) 13.
• “Clean Equipment Certification” submitted to the Engineer that
construction equipment has been cleaned prior to initial site arrival.
Vehicles shall be free of soil and debris. Specification 107.25 (b) 20.
• “Construction Dewatering Permit” (CDW) prior to dewatering operations (if
any) per specifications 106.02 (b) and 107.25 (b) 8.
• Written notification to downstream owners of water supply at least 15 days
prior to dredging or fill operations (if any) per specification 107.25 (b) 9.
• Soil Retention Blankets (Subsection 216.02): A sample of the staples and a
copy of the manufacturer's product data showing that the product meets the
Contract requirements shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
8. SWMP Notebook:
A-74
Appendix A
This is for the SWMP Administrator to update and revise as needed. Read all areas
prior to the start of construction to make sure they are correct and apply to this
project.
208.03 (d) The following Contract documents and reports shall be kept, maintained,
and updated in the notebook by the SWMP Administrator:
(1) SWMP Plan Sheets - Notes, tabulation, sequence of major activities, area of
disturbance, existing soil data, and existing vegetation percent cover, potential
pollutant sources, receiving water, non-stormwater discharges and environmental
impacts.
(2) Site Map and Plan Title Sheet - Construction site boundaries, ground surface
disturbance, limits of cut and fill, flow arrows, structural BMPs, non-structural
BMPs, Springs, Streams, Wetlands and surface water. Also included on the
sheets is the protection of trees, shrubs and cultural resources.
(3) Specifications - Standard and Project special provisions related to Stormwater
and Erosion Control.
(4) Standard Plans M-208-1, M-216-1 and M-615-1
(5) BMP Details not in Standard Plan M-208-1 or M-216-1 (Non-standard details).
(6) Weekly meeting sign in sheet.
(7) Calendar of Inspections -Calendar of inspections marking when all inspections
take place.
(8) Form 1176, Weekly meeting notes and inspection report
(9) Region and Headquarter Water Quality Reports and Form 105(s) relating to
Water Quality.
(10)Description of Inspection and Maintenance Methods -
(11)Spill Response Plan - Reports of reportable spills submitted to CDPHE
(12)List and Evaluation of Potential Pollutants -
(13)Other Correspondence e.g., agreements with other MS4s, approved deferral
request, CDPHE audit documentation, Water Quality Permit Transfer to
Maintenance Punch List and other miscellaneous documentation.
(14)TECS Certifications of the SWMP Administrator and all ECIs, keep current
through the life of the project.
(15)Environmental Pre-construction Conference – Conference agenda with a
certification of understanding of the terms and conditions of the CDPS-SCP and
SWMP.
(16)All Project Environmental Permits - All project environmental permits and
associated applications and certifications, including, CDPS-SCP, Senate Bill 40,
USACE 404,temporary stream crossings, dewatering, biological opinions and all
other permits applicable to the project, including any separate CDPS-SCP
obtained by the Contractor for staging area on private property, asphalt or
concrete plant, etc.
(17)Photographs Documenting Existing Vegetation –
(18)Permanent Water Quality Plan Sheets - Plan sheets and specifications for
permanent water quality structures, riprap.
A-75
Appendix A
The Contractor shall provide and insert all other documents and reports as they become
available during construction. The Region or HQ Environmental staff may need to be
contacted to acquire some of the information (e.g., SB 40 reports, 404 permits, etc).
9. Environmental issues:
• SWMP should include practices to ensure that existing vegetation is preserved
where possible – see 101.78 and Part 1.C.3.c.2 of the Permit.
• SWMP should include practices to ensure protection of existing wetlands – see
101.78.
• Protection of threatened and endangered species (T&E habitat) (Biological
Resources Report).
10. New requirements from specification updates (includes but not limited to):
• Stabilization is now defined as temporary, interim, permanent and final. The
maximum area of temporary stabilization shall not exceed 20 acres.
• One Erosion Control Inspector is required for every 40 acres of total disturbed
area which is currently receiving temporary and interim stabilization
measures. The Erosion Control Inspector and the Stormwater Administrator
may be the same person in projects involving less than 40 acres of disturbed
area.
• The SWMP Site Maps must show the Areas of Disturbance (AD). This is the
location where any activity has altered the existing soil cover or topography,
including vegetative and non-vegetative activities during construction.
• Replaced the daily inspection requirement with a 7-calendar-day minimum
inspection frequency.
• Vehicle Tracking Pad aggregate may be required for maintenance and will be
paid for under a new Pay Item, Maintenance Aggregate (Vehicle Tracking
Pad).
11. Additional Project Specific Notes:
A-76
Appendix A
Environmental Pre-construction Meeting Attendance and

Certification of Understanding
The following individuals were in attendance at the Environmental Pre-construction meeting and hereby
understand the terms and conditions of the CDPS-SCP, the site’s associated SWMP.
Name: Signature: Company and Title:
A-77
Appendix A
Environmental Pre-construction Meeting

Certification of Understanding
The following individuals have been updated on the items discussed at the Environmental Pre-construction
meeting and hereby understand the terms and conditions of the CDPS-SCP, the site’s associated SWMP.
Date: Name: Signature: Company and Title:
A-78
Appendix A
A-79
APPENDIX B. EXAMPLE
NOTICES, LETTERS, AND FORMS
B-1
Appendix B
APPENDIX B. EXAMPLE NOTICES, LETTERS, AND FORMS ......................................... B-1

EXAMPLE LETTERS, NOTICES, AND FORMS .......................................................... B-4
Sample Acceptance Letter ........................................................................... B-5
Sample Buy America Certification................................................................... B-6
Sample Summary of Buy America Quantities ...................................................... B-8
Sample Buy America Certification with Exceptions ............................................. B-10
Sample Stockpiled Material Letter of Vested Interest.......................................... B-13
Sample Prompt Payment Notice ................................................................... B-14
Sample Prompt Payment Law Notice ............................................................. B-15
Form 7 – Weekly Report on Miscellaneous Pay Items ........................................... B-16
Form 10 – Inspector’s Report for Force Account Work ......................................... B-20
Billing Example: Contractor Bill to CDOT ........................................................ B-24
Billing Example: Subcontractor Bill to Contractor .............................................. B-25
Form 46 – Concrete Truck Mixer Inspection Certification ...................................... B-26
Form 103 – Project Diary ........................................................................... B-28
Form 105 – Speed Memo ............................................................................ B-31
Form 200 – OJT Training Questionnaire .......................................................... B-34
Form 262 – Weekly Time Count Report – Work Days ............................................ B-36
Form 263 – Weekly Time Count Report – Calendar Days ....................................... B-39
Form 266 – Inspector’s Progress Report .......................................................... B-42
Form 279 – Inspector’s Report of Reinforcing Steel Placed .................................... B-46
Form 280 – EEO and Labor Compliance Verification ............................................ B-49
Form 282 – Asphalt Paving Inspector’s Daily Report ............................................ B-51
Form 568 – CDOT Temporary Speed Limit Reduction ........................................... B-54
Form 580 – Equipment Rental Rate Determination Request ................................... B-59
Form 832 – Trainee Status and Evaluation ....................................................... B-63
Form 838 – OJT Trainee/Apprentice Record ..................................................... B-66
Form 859 – Project Control Data .................................................................. B-69
Form 1186 – Contract Funding Increase/Decrease and Approval Letter ..................... B-78
Form 1212 – Final Acceptance Report ............................................................ B-81
Form 1318 – Dispute and Claim Status Report ................................................... B-85
FHWA Form 1391 – Federal-Aid Highway Construction Contractors Annual EEO Report ... B-89
B-2
Appendix B
Form 1401 – Block Faced MSE Wall Submittal Checklist ........................................ B-91
Form 1402 – Panel Faced MSE Wall Submittal Checklist........................................ B-93
Piling Form............................................................................................ B-94
Traffic Control Review Form ....................................................................... B-97
Project Final Submittal Checklist ................................................................ B-105
CPM Schedule Review Checklists ................................................................. B-110
B-3
Appendix B
EXAMPLE LETTERS, NOTICES, AND FORMS
Appendix B presents examples of the most common letters, notices, and forms (i.e., CDOT
Forms, FHWA Forms) Project Engineers and Project Inspectors will be involved with on a day-
to-day basis. The Contractor may be responsible for submitting some items. The completion of
other items will be the responsibility of either the Project Inspector or the Project Engineer.
Regardless, the Project Engineer is responsible for ensuring the items are properly reviewed
and distributed.
Completion instructions are provided for each form example presented in Appendix B. See
Appendix C for guidance on preparing change orders (i.e., Form 90 and Form 94).
Most of the forms are self-explanatory. Computer generated forms will be accepted if they
contain the exact verbiage and statute references.
CDOT Forms are available on the CDOT Forms Catalog Web Site
https://www.codot.gov/library/forms, and FHWA Forms are available at
https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/eforms/.
B-4
Appendix B
Sample Acceptance Letter
B-5
Appendix B
Sample Buy America Certification
The specification requires the Contractor to certify that he has obtained all the correct
certifications from the manufacturers and suppliers and maintain the certifications on file at
the project. These Buy America certifications are to be received and approved by CDOT before
the materials are incorporated into the project. Once the Contractor receives the Buy America
certification from manufacturers and suppliers, the Contractor shall provide CDOT with a Buy
America certification such as the example below. CDOT does not accept blanket Buy America
letters covering all materials.
B-6
Appendix B
Kryptonite Construction Inc.

13369 W. Rocky Rd.
Smallville, Colorado 91130
Phone: 999-123-4567
Attn: Project Engineer
Date: August 3, 2018
Re: CDOT Contract ID: 53124
Re: CDOT Project: No. CC 00-0000-00
Subject: Buy America Certification and Exception for Foreign Steel
Kryptonite Construction hereby certifies that during the month of July 2018 the materials and
quantities represented below, to be incorporated into the project, meet the contract Buy
America requirements. We also certify that the Buy America paperwork and certifications
required by Section 106.11 are on file at the project.
1) 550 LF of 24” culvert pipe for bid item 603-01180
Minor Exceptions: ____ Yes __X__ No
Value less than 1/10 of 1% of the total contract cost or $ 2,500.00 whichever is greater.
Documentation is in our Project Files.
Respectfully,
EXAMPLE
Buy America Requirements
(Per requirements of Subsection 106.11)

(Original Signatures Required, No Facsimiles Accepted)
Clark Kent
Construction Manager
Note 1: The Contractor shall submit the Buy America Certification to the Project Engineer at time
materials are delivered and prior to incorporating the steel or iron into the project.
Note 2: The delivery date and/or the incorporation date may be included in the letter.
Note 3: This example depicts what is to be provided for each delivery.
B-7
Appendix B
Sample Summary of Buy America Quantities
This is a suggested format for the reconciliation of the Buy America Certification quantities
with Installed Quantities. The Contractor shall submit this summary on a monthly basis to the
Project Engineer for material incorporated during the previous month. The Project Engineer
will verify the information in the Summary and all Buy America certifications provided by the
Contractor. Before approving a progress payment, the Resident Engineer will verify that the
quantities in the Contractor’s summary document match the quantities in the progress
payment.
B-8
Appendix B
August 3, 2018
Note: This example depicts what is to be provided monthly summarizing delivery and
installation.
B-9
Appendix B
Sample Buy America Certification with Exceptions
The specification requires the Contractor to document the project delivered costs of any
foreign steel or iron permanently incorporated into the project. This is an example of the
requirement.
B-10
Appendix B

13369 W. Rocky Rd.
Smallville, Colorado 91130
Phone: 999-123-4567
Attn: Project Engineer
Date: October 4, 2018
Re: CDOT Contract ID: 53124

Re: CDOT Project No.: CC 00-0000-00
Subject: Buy America Certification & Exception for Foreign Steel
Kryptonite Construction hereby certifies that during the month of September 2018 the materials
and quantities represented below, to be incorporated into the project, meet the contract Buy
America requirements. We also certify that the Buy America paperwork and certifications
required by Section 106.11 are on file at the project.
1) 150 LF of 24” culvert pipe for bid item 603-01180
Minor Exceptions: __X__ Yes ____ No
Value less than 1/10 of 1% of the total contract cost or $ 2,500.00 whichever is greater.
Documentation is in our Project Files.
1) 16 panels of ADA Truncated Domes which were imported from China were incorporated into
the project. The total contract cost to date of imported steel or iron is $1,831.66.
Respectfully, EXAMPLE
Buy America Requirements
(Per requirements of Subsection 106.11)

(Original Signatures Required, No Facsimiles Accepted)
Clark Kent
Note 1: The Contractor shall submit the Buy America Certification to the Project Engineer at time
materials are delivered and prior to incorporating the steel or iron into the project.
Note 2: The delivery date and/or the incorporation date may be included in the letter.
Note 3: This example depicts what is to be provided for each delivery.
B-11
Appendix B
October 4, 2018
Note: This example depicts what is to be provided monthly summarizing delivery and installation.
B-12
Appendix B
Sample Stockpiled Material Letter of Vested Interest
To Whom It May Concern:
Re: Stockpiled Material Letter of Vested Interest
It is hereby understood that the Colorado Department of Transportation fully intends to

reimburse
(Contractor – Purchaser)
for materials owned by said Contractor – Purchaser and intended for incorporation into Colorado
Department of Transportation Project No.
Said materials, as described below, are now stored on property owned by
and leased by
(if applicable)
Said storage property is located as follows:
(Address and/or Description of Property)
Said stored materials are described as follows:
(Detailed Description of Materials)
It is hereby recognized that once reimbursement has been accomplished, the Colorado
Department of Transportation will have a vested interest in the materials. Access to and
possession of the materials will be granted to the Colorado Department of Transportation upon
demand and providing that acceptable proof is offered substantiation that reimbursement to
the named Contractor – Purchaser was in fact, accomplished.
Owner Phone Number Lessee (if applicable) Phone Number
Owner Phone Number Lessee (if applicable) Phone Number
Attachments: (when existing)
Warehouse Receipt of Contract for Storage
This letter is a legal document, must be original, and must clearly identify the materials
wither in the body or by specifically identifiable attachments.
B-13
Appendix B
Sample Prompt Payment Notice
B-14
Appendix B
Sample Prompt Payment Law Notice
B-15
Appendix B
Form 7 – Weekly Report on Miscellaneous Pay Items
Completion Instructions
Use Form 7 to document daily quantities for miscellaneous pay items such as dozing, blading,
roller, wetting, flagging, traffic control supervision, pilot car, and trainee. See Section 120 and
Section 121.2.1 of this Manual for additional information. Complete Form 7 as follows:
1. Project No., Project Code (SA#), and Location. Fill in as appropriate.
2. Week Ending. Enter month, day, and year of the last day represented by the Form 7
being completed.
3. Calendar Day. Enter the month and day for each day of the week represented by the
Form 7 being completed.
4. Reference No. and Item No. Enter the appropriate Computer Reference Number and
Item Number for the items not listed on Form 7.
5. Description. Enter a description of the added item.
6. Unit. Enter the unit of measurement for the added item.
7. Daily Quantities. Enter the item quantity for each day. The person that is preparing
Form 7 will determine the daily quantities. The following additional information may
be useful in determining quantities:
a. Traffic Control Supervision Diaries,

b. Form 20 – Daily Water Report, and
c. Project Diaries.
8. Weekly Total. The weekly total is the sum of the daily quantities.
9. Previous Total. Provide the total to date from the previous Form 7.
10. Total to Date. The total to date is the sum of the weekly total (#8) and the previous
total (#9).
11. Remarks. Note any unusual or special conditions that may clarify this week’s
quantities. Additional space is available on the second page of Form 7.
12. Signature and Title. Signature and title of the person completing Form 7.
B-16
Appendix B
13. Checked By. Must be signed or initialed and dated by the person who checked the
calculations and quantities on Form 7. This check must be performed by an individual
other than the person who determined the quantities. This check should be
completed in accordance with Section 121 of this Manual.
14. Posted By. Must be signed or initialed and dated by the person who transferred the
total quantity from Form 7 to Daily Work Report in SiteManager®.
15. Contractor’s Representative Signature. The Contractor is not required to sign and date
the completed Form 7, but it is a best management practice to get the Contractor to
agree to the quantities on a weekly basis.
16. Sequential No. Enter the sequential number of the Form 7. Start with number one and
continue sequentially numbering each Form 7 throughout the project.
B-17
Appendix B
B-18
Appendix B
B-19
Appendix B
Form 10 – Inspector’s Report for Force Account Work
The documentation requirements presented in Section 120 of this Manual should be reviewed
before using Form 10. Complete Form 10 as follows:
1. Project No., Project Code (SA#), and CMO or F/A No. Enter the project number,
project code, and CMO or F/A number.
2. Contractor’s Name, Subcontractor’s Name, and Description of Work. Enter the

Contractor and subcontractor names, and provide a description of the work.
3. Date. Enter the dates when the force account work was performed. The dates need
not be consecutive.
4. Employee Name, Occupation, and Hours. Enter the employee name, occupation, and
number of hours worked. The Project Inspector must check the payrolls against the
billing and Form 10 data and then sign and date the Form 10.
5. Equipment Code No. and Rate. Equipment code numbers and rental rates shall be as
listed on Form 580 – Equipment Rental Rate Determination Request. Completion
instructions for Form 580 are included in Appendix B.
The Contractor must submit a certified invoice for rental equipment.
If the rental equipment was used for bid item work as well as force account work, the
portion of the rental cost that will be paid for on force account shall be determined by
prorating the total number of hours the equipment was operated to the number of
hours it was operated on the force account work.
If the rental agreement does not include operating costs, hourly operating costs shall
be calculated in accordance with the Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction
Equipment. The Blue Book hourly operating costs will be paid for the actual hours that
the equipment was used on the force account work. The hourly operating cost
calculation can be shown on the rental invoice.
In accordance with subsection 109.04 of the Standard Specifications, an additional 10

percent of the total rental cost, including operating cost, will be added to the
Contractor’s payment.
6. Material. List all material used for the force account work.
B-20
Appendix B
7. Contractor/Subcontractor Initials. The Contractor representative shall initial the

Form 10 daily. For subcontract work, the initials of the subcontractor who performed
the force account work and the Prime Contractor’s initials must be shown.
8. Sinature and Title. The Project Inspector of the force account work must sign and date
the Form 10.
Other items that require review include:
a. Use of correct wage rates and fringe benefits per payrolls.
i. If a State-funded project, the Contractor will need to furnish a copy of

the payroll for rate verification.
ii. If a specialty firm, a certified invoice that may include wages, etc., is
required.
b. 67 percent loading applied to wage rates including fringe benefits when paid
directly to the employee.
c. Check the mathematics. Minor errors can be corrected. Copy the Contractor on
corrected billings.
d. Materials invoices must be certified in accordance with Section 120 of this

Manual.
e. The Contractor’s force account billings must be reviewed and approved by the
Project Engineer prior to authorizing payments and submittal to the Region for
final checking. Sample billings follow the Form 10 example.
B-21
Appendix B
B-22
Appendix B
B-23
Appendix B
Billing Example: Contractor Bill to CDOT
CONTRACTOR LETTERHEAD
To: Colorado Department of Transportation Re: NH1111-111/ 99999

4201 East Arkansas Avenue CMO #2
Denver, CO 80222 Repair Bridge Approach
Attn: Alex White
Project Engineer
Billing for force account work performed on 10/21/13 through 10/25/13:
Labor:
Foreman 12 hrs @ 480.00/wk $144.00
Operator 14 hrs @ 14.10 197.40
Truck driver 4 hrs @ 13.36 53.44
Labor 10 hrs @ 10.50 105.00
Total Labor $499.84
Equipment:
Hyd. Tamper rental @invoice $112.90
Plus Rental Rate Overhead (10% of 112.90) 11.29
Tandem 04429 4 hrs @ 34.65 138.60
04850 2 hrs @ 5.95 11.90
04862 3 hrs @ 8.45 25.35
Total Equipment $300.04
Fringe Benefits:
Operator 14 hrs @ 3.2 $44.80
Labor 10 hrs @ 2.59 25.90
Total Fringe Benefits $81.26
Summary (Total this billing)
Labor $499.84
+67% Labor 334.89
Equipment 300.04
Fringe Benefits 81.26
+67% Fringe Benefits 54.44
Billings from Subcontractor 3,540.97
Admin. Loading per 109.04(e) 227.05
TOTAL BILLING $5,038.49
Attachments:
Billing and invoice from Subcontractor
Certified invoices (materials and equipment rentals)
B-24
Appendix B
Billing Example: Subcontractor Bill to Contractor

SUBCONTRACTOR LETTERHEAD
To: Contractor Re: NH1111-111/ 99999

CMO #1
Repair Bridge Approach
The following is our bill for doing work in October 2013:
Labor:
Operator 8 hrs @ 14.10 $112.80
Operator 2 hrs @ 21.15 42.30
Labor 2 employees @ 8 hrs @ 10.50 168.00
Labor 2 employees @ 2 hrs @ 15.75 63.00
Total Labor $479.62
Equipment:
Demo saw @ $2.00 (small tool rate) 4 hrs $8.00
Tandem 01284 10 hrs @ $38.80 388.00
Backhoe 04294 6 hrs @ $73.25 439.50
Carbon steel saw blade @ agreed 50% invoice 175.00
Loading on fast-use expendable parts (109.04(c)9) $17.50
Total Equipment $1028.00
Material:
Asphalt, 42 tons @ invoice of $32.00/ton 1,344.00
Total Material $1,344.00
Fringe Benefits:
Operator 10 hrs @ 3.20 $32.00
Labor 20 hrs @ 2.59 51.80
Total Fringe Benefits 99.64
Summary (Total this billing)
Labor $479.62
+67% Labor 321.35
Equipment 1.028.00
Material 1,344.00
+15%Material 201.60
Fringe Benefits 99.64
+67% Fringe Benefits 66.76
TOTAL BILLING $3,540.97

B-25
Appendix B
Form 46 – Concrete Truck Mixer Inspection Certification
Form 46 is used to document inspection and certification of the concrete supplier’s truck mixers
for compliance with subsection 601.07(c) of the Standard Specifications. Form 46 should be
completed by the concrete supplier and returned to the Project Engineer prior to delivery of
concrete to the project site. Each mixer hauling to the project site is required to be inspected.
Complete Form 46 as follows:
1. Project No., Date, Project Code (SA#), Project Location, and Concrete Company. Enter
the project number, date, project code, project location, and concrete supplier’s
name in the appropriate cells of Form 46.
2. Unit Number. Enter the unit number of each mixer truck delivering to the project.
3. Inspection Requirements. Each unit hauling to the project must be inspected for the
requirements listed on Form 46.
4. Inspected By. The employee of the concrete supply company that performed the
inspection must initial Form 46 in these cells.
5. Concrete Company Principal Executive Signature. The principle executive of the

concrete supply company signs this cell to certify the inspection of the listed concrete
truck mixers.
6. Batch Plant. The Project Inspector enters the batch plant certifier’s name, date of
certification, and date of meter certification and then signs the form.
B-26
Appendix B
B-27
Appendix B
Form 103 – Project Diary
Form 103 may be used to log the project diary. A project diary contains general information
that the Project Engineer deems to be relevant to the project. Complete Form 103 as follows:
1. Project No. and Date. Fill in as appropriate.
2. Time, Employee, and Weather Information. Enter the total days charged to date,
elapsed days, hours worked, approximate number of employees, supervisory
personnel, time lost and reason, weather condition, and temperature range.
3. Diary Entry. The following are suggested topics that the diary entry should address:
a. changes in weather conditions during working hours;
b. type of work performed;
c. location where work was performed;
d. materials delivered to the project;
e. equipment deliveries, breakdowns, and equipment stored on the project;
f. access to site or work area;
g. traffic incidents, detour shifts, etc.;
h. visitors to the project site;
i. conversations with and directives to the Contractor;
j. potential or developing problems; and
k. any other topic deemed important by the Project Engineer.
4. Additional space is provided on the second page of Form 103.
5. Signing and Barricading and Traveled Roadway Condition. Fill in as appropriate.
6. Signature and Title. Form 103 is signed and dated in these cells.
B-28
Appendix B
B-29
Appendix B
B-30
Appendix B
Form 105 – Speed Memo
Form 105 may be used for intradepartmental correspondence or to provide timely or immediate
written communication between the Project Engineer and the Contractor. The following
instructions apply when the form is used for communicating with the Contractor (i.e.,
construction distribution):
1. Project No., Project Code (SA#), and Location. Enter the appropriate project number,
project code, and location.
2. Contractor Information and Date. Enter the name of the Contractor’s designated
Superintendent, the Contractor’s name, and the date.
3. Subject and Message. Form 105 may be used for any of the following purposes:
a. issue direction to the Contractor;

b. accept, approve, or reject submittals;
c. document an agreed unit price, method of measurement, or basis of payment
for extra work;
d. accept or reject specific work items;
e. delete bid items;
f. document verbal agreements; and
g. document Region preapproval for change orders.
See Section 120 of this Manual to determine when a change order is required.
4. CDOT Personnel Signature and Title. The Project Engineer, or assigned designee,
should sign Form 105 at this location.
5. Contractor Personnel Signature and Title. The Contractor’s Superintendent should sign
and date the Form 105 to document receipt. If the Contractor’s Superintendent
refuses to sign the Form 105, the Project Engineer should write the following
information on the bottom half of the form and give the Superintendent a copy:
a. “Contractor’s Superintendent refused to sign,” and

b. date and time.
6. Reply. The lower half of Form 105 allows for a reply by the Contractor’s
Superintendent.
B-31
Appendix B
7. Contractor Personnel Signature and Title. The Contractor’s Superintendent or other

individual replying to the memo should sign and date the Form 105.
8. Distribution. When communicating with the Contractor, retain the original Form 105
with the Contractor’s signature in the project file.
B-32
Appendix B
4 4
5 5
7 7
B-33
Appendix B
Form 200 – OJT Training Questionnaire
Form 200 is used to monitor the Contractor’s compliance with the Training Special Provision by
interviewing the trainee. It is normally completed by project personnel or by the Region Civil
Rights Office. Upon completion, it is forwarded to the Civil Rights and Business Resource Center
and placed in the labor interview file.
B-34
Appendix B
B-35
Appendix B
Form 262 – Weekly Time Count Report – Work Days
Form 262 is used to record project time charges when the Contract specifies a working day
basis. Time charges should be made in accordance with the Project Special Provisions or
subsection 108.08 of the Standard Specifications. A Form 103 – Project Diary should substantiate
the daily assessment of Contract time. An automated version of Form 262 is available in
SiteManager®. See Section 120 of this Manual for additional information on Contract time and
Form 262. One Form 262 will be completed by the Project Engineer and should be signed by the
Contractor weekly as follows:
1. Project #. Fill in as appropriate.
2. Project Code (SA#). Fill in as appropriate.
3. No. Enter the sequential number. Begin with number one and continue numbering
sequentially throughout the project.
4. To. Enter the Contractor name.
5. Date. Enter the date the form was generated.
6. Week Ending. Enter the month and date of the last day of the week the Form 262
represents.
7. Date. Enter the date for each weekday.
8. Day. Enter the Day of the week.
9. Weather, weather conditions or other causes. Describe the weather conditions for
each day of the week. Also document any cause that explains why you charged or did
not charge time. This is important to document if a dispute about time occurs.
10. Workable days. Mark each day the Contractor could prosecute work.
11. Unworkable Days (weather). Mark each day that adverse weather conditions
prevented the Contractor from performing work.
12. Days not chargeable other causes. Mark each day that is not chargeable or the
Contractor did not work due to other causes such as weekends, holidays, free time, or
time suspension.
B-36
Appendix B
13. Days charged this week. Enter totals for the week.
14. Days previously reported. Enter the total days charged to date from the previous
week’s Form 262.
15. Total days charged to date. Enter the sum of Days charged this week (13.) and Days
previously reported (14.).
16. Work days allowed by original contract. Enter the work days allowed by the original
Contract.
17. Extra days approved by Change Orders. Enter the additional days added by change
orders. Enter as participating if added days have been approved for Federal
participation, otherwise enter as nonparticipating.
18. Total revised contract days. Enter the sum of Work days allowed by original contract
(16.) and Extra days added by Change Orders (17.).
19. Total days charged to date. Enter the sum of all workable days charged to date.
20. Total days remaining. Enter the difference between Total revised contract days (18.)
and Total days charged to date (19.).
21. Elapsed Time. Enter the sum of all days, workable and unworkable, and not
chargeable to other causes, since the start of Contract time. This should be equal to
calendar days.
22. Remarks. Note any unusual conditions or problems, and provide further explanation
of any time charges or non-charges, suspensions, etc.
23. Project Engineer. Project Engineer signs here.
24. Contractor’s Comments. The Contractor can enter comments here. The Contractor is
to acknowledge receipt by signing and dating the completed Form 262. The
Contractor should indicate if the company intends to submit a written request for an
extension of time or correction of the time count. The Contractor has 30 days to file
the written protest. See subsection108.08 of the Standard Specifications. If the
Contractor refuses to sign the completed Form 262, the original copy should be sent
immediately by registered mail to the Contractor’s permanent address.
B-37
Appendix B
1 3
2
4 5
7 8 11 12
9 10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B-38
Appendix B
Form 263 – Weekly Time Count Report – Calendar Days
Form 263 is used to record project time charges when the Contract specifies a calendar day
basis. Calendar day, as defined in subsection 101.09 of the Standard Specifications, is defined
as follows: “Each and every day shown on the calendar, beginning and ending at midnight.” All
time charges should be made in accordance with the Project Special Provisions or subsection
108.08 of the Standard Specifications. Form 103 – Project Diary should substantiate the daily
assessment of Contract time. An automated version of Form 263 is available in SiteManager®.
See Section 120 of this Manual for additional information on Contract time count and Form 263.
One Form 263 will be completed by the Project Engineer and should be signed by the Contractor
weekly as follows:
1. Project #. Fill in as appropriate.
2. Project Code (SA#). Fill in as appropriate.
3. No. Enter the sequential number. Begin with number one and continue numbering
sequentially throughout the project.
4. To. Enter the name of the Contractor.
5. Date. Enter the date the Form 263 was generated.
6. Week Ending. Enter the month and date of the last day of the week the Form 263
represents.
7. Date. Enter the date for each weekday.
8. Day. Enter the Day of the week.
9. Weather, weather conditions, or other causes. Describe the weather conditions for
each day of the week. Also document any cause that explains no time was charged.
This is important to document if a dispute about time occurs.
10. Calendar Days. Mark each day that is classified as a calendar day.
11. Worked/Not Worked. Mark each day the Contractor worked with “W” and each day no
work was performed with “NW.”
12. Days not chargeable other causes. Mark each day not charged.
B-39
Appendix B
13. Days charged this week. Enter totals for the week.
14. Days previously reported. Enter the total days charged to date from the previous
week’s Form 263.
15. Total days charged to date. Enter the sum of Days charged this week (13.) and Days
previously reported (14.).
16. Calendar days allowed by original contract. Enter the calendar days allowed by the
original Contract.
17. Extra days approved by Change Orders. Enter the additional days added by change
orders. Enter as participating if added days have been approved for Federal
participation, otherwise enter as nonparticipating.
18. Total revised contract days. Enter the sum of Work days allowed by original Contract
(16.) and Extra days added by Change Orders (17.).
19. Total days charged to date. Enter the sum of all workable days charged to date.
20. Total days remaining. Enter the difference between Total revised Contract days (18.)
and Total days charged to date (19.).
21. Elapsed Time. Enter the sum of all days, workable and unworkable, and not
chargeable to other causes, since the start of Contract time. This should be equal to
calendar days.
22. Remarks. Note any unusual conditions or problems, and provide further explanation
of any time charges or non-charges, suspensions, etc.
23. Project Engineer. Project Engineer signs here.
24. Contractor’s Comments. The Contractor can enter comments here. The Contractor is
to acknowledge receipt by signing and dating the completed Form 263. The
Contractor should indicate if the company intends to submit a written request for an
extension of time or correction of the time count. The Contractor has 30 days to file
the written protest. See subsection108.08 of the Standard Specifications. If the
Contractor refuses to sign the completed Form 263, the original copy should be sent
immediately by registered mail to the Contractor’s permanent address.
B-40
Appendix B
1 3
2
4 5
7 8 9 10 11 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B-41
Appendix B
Form 266 – Inspector’s Progress Report
Form 266 is used for source documentation of interim and final quantities. Form 266 must
contain the required data for the pay item being documented. For documentation requirements
of individual Contract pay items and further information on Form 266, see Section 120 of this
Manual. The following describes how to complete Form 266:
1. Project No., Project Code (SA#), Date, No. of Workers, and Equipment. Enter the
project number, project code, date (must not be later than date of project
acceptance), number of workers, and the equipment utilized by the Contractor to
complete the work.
2. Location, Comments, and Supporting Calculations. Information to be provided in this

section of Form 266 includes location of the work, quantity calculations, and total
quantity being paid on Form 266. The second page of Form 266 may be used for
additional calculations and sketches, as appropriate, to support the pay quantity.
Additional supporting documents may be attached to the form. The total pay quantity
should be rounded to the appropriate significant figures as discussed in Section 121 of
this Manual. All calculations should be checked and a mark placed next to each
checked value.
3. Interim/Final. Check the appropriate box for interim measurement or final

measurement for that pay quantity or portion of the item.
4. Calculated By. This cell of Form 266 should be signed or initialed by the person who
performed the calculations.
5. Measured By. This cell of Form 266 should be signed or initialed by the person who
performed the field measurements or counted the item.
6. Posted By. This cell of Form 266 should be signed or initialed by the person who
transferred the total quantity from the Form 266 to the Item Summary Report.
7. Checked By. This cell of Form 266 should be signed or initialed by the individual who
checked the calculations and quantities on the Form 266. This check must --be
performed by an individual other than the person who determined the quantity. This
check should be completed in accordance with Section 121 of this Manual.
B-42
Appendix B
8. Reference and Item Number. Enter the computer reference number and the item
number for the pay item. Entering the computer reference number is optional as
determined by the Region.
9. Item Description. Enter the description of the item. The description should match the
description on the Summary of Approximate Quantities on the plans, if appropriate.
The location may be entered if it is not shown in the location, comments, and
supporting calculations section of Form 266.
10. Quantity. Enter the total quantity this Form 266 represents.
11. Unit. Enter the appropriate unit of measurement for the item.
12. Signed and Title. The signature and title cells are for the individual who is
responsible for the inspection and documentation of the pay item. This is usually
performed by the person completing the Form 266.
13. No. Enter the sequential number of the Form 266 in the series of source documents
for the pay items. This is usually performed by the person who posted the quantity.
B-43
Appendix B
B-44
Appendix B
B-45
Appendix B
Form 279 – Inspector’s Report of Reinforcing Steel Placed

Form 279 is an optional form that may be used for source documentation of interim and final
quantities of reinforcing steel or for revisions to plan quantities. See Section 121.2.1 of this
Manual for additional information on requirements for Basis of Payment Documentation. The
following describes how to complete Form 279:
1. Project No., Project Code (SA#), and Date. Enter the project number, project code,
and date. The date must not be later than date of project acceptance.
2. Equipment and No. of Workers. Enter the equipment utilized by the Contractor to
complete the work and the number of workers.
3. Station, Structure, and Portion. Enter the station, left or right, structure number, and
portion of structure, if applicable (e.g., deck, abutment, structure wall, approach
slab).
4. Mark, Bar No., and Length. Enter the mark, bar number, and length. If the plans or
supplier’s bar list or bending diagram do not designate a mark (e.g., 401, 523), show
the shape of the bar. Inspection should be made to ensure compliance with the plans.
5. No. of Bars. Enter the number of bars of this type placed for this Form 279.
6. Total Length, Weight per Unit Length, Total Weight. Enter the total length, weight
per unit length, and total weight. Be sure to use the correct unit of measurement.
Either multiply bar length times weight per foot for each bar or add the total length
for each size and then multiply by the proper weight per foot.
7. Space and Clear. Enter the plan bar space and clearance. This information may be
used to inspect the in-place rebar.
8. Total. Enter the total quantity this Form 279 represents.
9. Remarks. Any comments or information supporting the item may be made in this
section. Additional supporting documents, calculations, or sketches may be attached
to the Form 279.
10. Interim/Final. Check the appropriate box for an interim or a final measurement for
the portion of the pay item represented by this Form 279.
B-46
Appendix B
11. Calculated By, Measured By, Posted By, and Checked By. These cells must be signed or
initialed by the individual who performed the functions.
12. Computer Reference No. Enter the computer reference number for the item. This is
an optional entry.
13. No. Enter the sequential number of the Form 279 in the series of source documents
for the pay item. This is usually performed by the person posting the quantity.
B-47
Appendix B
B-48
Appendix B
Form 280 – EEO and Labor Compliance Verification
Form 280 is used to interview employees of Contractors and subcontractors to verify that
employees are aware of each company’s Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) requirements
and that they are receiving the correct wages for the classification in which they are working.
Form 280 should be completed by CDOT project site personnel as addressed in Section 107.1.3
of this Manual and when labor or EEO violations are suspected. The Region EEO/Civil Rights
Specialists may also use this form during compliance reviews and investigations. Complete Form
280 as follows:
1. Project No., Project Code (SA#), Project Location, and Contractor Name. Fill in as
appropriate. Note if the name is for a subcontractor.
2. Employee Name and Job Classification. Enter the name of the employee interviewed
and the worker’s job classification.
3. Equal Employment Opportunity. The Equal Employment Opportunity section of Form

280 includes the questions that should be asked of the employee regarding his
knowledge of the equal employment policies and procedures of his employer.
4. Labor Compliance. The Labor Compliance section of Form 280 includes questions that
should be asked of the employee regarding wage rate, fringe benefit plan, and pay
frequency. It allows the interviewer to verify the type of work being performed by the
employee. The employee is requested to look over the interview and sign and date the
form.
5. Verification Section. The interviewer completes the verification section by referring to

the appropriate payroll for information on the hourly rate and classification of the
employee and verifying from the Contract wage decision that the employee is paid
correctly. Errors in classification, hourly wage, or fringe benefit must be corrected and
back wages calculated as necessary. The interviewer completes the form with the
individual’s signature and date.
Should interviews reveal a pattern or lack of knowledge by employees, the Region’s EEO/Civil
Rights Specialist should be notified immediately.
Employer requests to review interviews should be referred to the Contracts and Market Analysis
Branch.
B-49
Appendix B
B-50
Appendix B
Form 282 – Asphalt Paving Inspector’s Daily Report
Form 282 may be used to document daily asphalt paving operations. Its use is optional in lieu
of other acceptable recording methods, as determined by the Project Engineer, to record loads
delivered, location placed, spread yield, and asphalt temperatures. Complete Form 282 as
follows:
1. Weather, Air Temperature, and Date. Enter the date and enter the weather conditions
and maximum and minimum air temperatures for that date.
2. Project No. and Project Code (SA#). Fill in as appropriate.
3. Load No. Record the load number from the Contractor’s load ticket. The load number
will indicate the sequential loading order from the plant. If a load arrives to the
project site out of sequence according to the load number, the truck may have been
substantially delayed and the Hot Bituminous Pavement temperature should be
checked against allowable minimum temperature, as per specification.
4. Ticket No. Enter the ticket number from the Contractor’s load ticket for each load
delivered to the project.
5. Ticket Weight. Enter the net weight (tons) from the load ticket of each load.
6. Cumulative Weight. Enter the cumulative weight of asphalt by adding the net weight
for each ticket to the previous cumulative total.
7. Station to Station. Record the beginning and ending station of the placement location
for each load of asphalt.
8. Location. Enter the lane and direction being paved.
9. Paver Pass. Record the thickness (inches) and width (feet) of asphalt being placed.
10. Course. Check the appropriate box for bottom or top lift.
11. Spread Yield. Any method to calculate spread yield is acceptable as long as the
calculation results in an accurate comparison between the actual application rate and
the plan application rate.
B-51
Appendix B
The following method provides a relative comparison of actual-to-plan application rates. A

calculated result over 1.00 indicates that the actual application rate is exceeding the plan
application rate. For example, a spread yield rate of 1.05 indicates that the plan quality is
being overrun by five percent for the asphalt quantity placed.
First determine the correct plan application rate factor as follows:
2,000 × 9
Plan Application Rate (pounds/square yard/inch )
The plan application rate can be found in the General Notes of the plans. In this example, use
112 pounds/square yard/inch.
2,000 × 9
Factor = = 160.7
112
Calculations can be completed for a single load, any portion of the day, or the entire day’s run
as follows:
Factor × Actual Tons Thickness Width Station - Station Length
Single Load: 160.7 × 12.88 2 12.5 75 = 1.10
Partial Day: 160.7 × (109.04 - 26.83 ) 2 12.5 (52,680 - 52,160 ) = 1.02
Entire Day: 160.7 × 146.1 2 12.5 (52,915 - 52,000 ) = 1.03
12. Mix Temp. Record the delivered mix temperature.
13. Remarks. Provide any appropriate remarks.
14. Signed and Title. The Form 282 needs to be signed by the person who completed the
form.
B-52
Appendix B
B-53
Appendix B
Form 568 – CDOT Temporary Speed Limit Reduction
A Form 568 must be completed, approved, and signed whenever the speed limit is reduced on
a construction project, even if the speed limit reduction is shown on the plans.
The Project Engineer is responsible for initiating and completing the Form 568 when a reduced
speed limit is appropriate.
Fill in the appropriate project information such as city, reduced speed limit, regular speed
limit, and direction of traffic.
The Chief Engineer shall delegate signature authority to the Region Traffic Engineers or
designee to determine appropriate temporary speed limits.
See instructions on the Form 568.
B-54
Appendix B
B-55
Appendix B
B-56
Appendix B
B-57
Appendix B
B-58
Appendix B
Form 580 – Equipment Rental Rate Determination Request
Form 580 is used when an hourly rate for Contractor owned equipment is required for payment
under force account or for performing a force account analysis of a Contractor’s proposed unit
price for extra work for a change order price justification. Equipment rental rates and standby
rates are calculated on the Form 580 using the current Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction
Equipment. The Project Engineer completes the top half of the form and, generally, the Region
Finals Engineer completes the bottom portion. The information is used for force account
billings. Form 580 should be prepared as follows:
1. Project No. and Project Code (SA#). Fill in the project number and project code as
appropriate.
2. Contractor and F/A, CMO, MCR No. Enter the Contractor’s name and the force
account, contract modification order, or minor Contract revision number.
3. Type/Description and Make. Describe the equipment as completely and accurately as

possible. (e.g., there is a difference between a backhoe and a hydraulic excavator).
Also enter the equipment make.
4. Year and Serial No. The year of manufacture is important. If this information is not
available, the serial number should be recorded because this can aid in determining
the age of the equipment.
5. Model and Series. Enter the model number and series. Often the model number and
series are contained in the same number (e.g., Model 570B). For this piece of
equipment, the model number is 570 and the series is B.
6. Fuel Type and Transmission. Indicate the type of fuel the equipment uses and the
transmission type.
7. Trucks: Wheel Combination. For all pickups, semis, dump trucks, etc., indicate the
type of wheel power used. Wheel power is defined as the number of wheels times the
number of wheels powered. Dual wheels are counted as single wheels.
8. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Capacity. For dump trucks, belly dumps, pups, water,
and other liquid-haul trucks, enter the correct gross vehicle weight and capacity.
B-59
Appendix B
9. Equipment Owner Name and Equipment Owner ID. Enter the equipment owner’s name
and equipment owner ID, if available.
10. Remarks. Enter any needed remarks that describe the equipment.
11. Submitted By, Region No., and Date. Sign the Form 580 and enter the Region number
and date.
12. Equipment No. The Region will assign an equipment number to be used to identify the
specific piece of equipment and its hourly rates.
13. Blue Book Reference. Enter the volume, section, page, and date from the current
Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment.
14. Bare Rate. See subsection 109.04(c) of the Standard Specifications for information on
calculating the bare rate and the adjusted bare rate.
15. Operating Cost. The hourly operating cost is taken directly from the appropriate
column in the Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment for the specific
piece of equipment.
16. Total Shift Rate Per Hour. Enter the sum of the bare rate (#14) and the operating cost
(#15).
17. Adjusted Bare Rate. The adjusted bare rate per hour for standby is calculated as 50
percent of the shift bare rate per hour calculated in #14 above.
18. Standby Rate Per Hour. The standby rate per hour is the adjusted bare rate as
determined in #17 above.
19. Signed, Title, and Date. The person who calculated the rates signs and dates the Form
580.
B-60
Appendix B
Examples of some common usages are shown below:
B-61
Appendix B
B-62
Appendix B
Form 832 – Trainee Status and Evaluation
Form 832 is used to monitor the project progress and status of both standard and pilot program
trainees. Every month the Contractor shall complete and submit to the Project Engineer a Form
832 for every active trainee. The Contractor shall also submit a Form 832 when any change in
the employment status of a trainee occurs while the trainee is working on a project. The Project
Engineer will not accept incomplete forms.
Form 832 provides space for listing the hours of on-the-job training received by a trainee on
several projects. This permits CDOT to monitor the hours of trainees enrolled in the pilot
program. The Project Engineer should pay only for the hours a trainee worked on the project.
Trainee hours can be verified, if necessary, by comparison with certified payrolls.
The Contractor shall complete Form 832 as follows:
1. Type of Program. Indicate the type of program.
2. Contractor’s Name, Project Number and Project Code (SA#). Fill in as appropriate.
3. Reporting Month. Enter the month being reported.
4. Trainee’s Name, Classification, and Social Security Number. Enter the trainee’s name,
work classification, and the last four digits of his social security number.
5. Date Enrolled in Program and Hourly Rate. Enter the date the trainee enrolled in the
program and the trainee’s hourly rate.
6. Percent of Journeyman Scale. Enter the trainee’s hourly rate as a percentage of the
journeyman scale.
7. Total Hours Required in Program. Enter the total hours required in the program.
8. Status of Trainee. Indicate the status of the trainee.
9. Days and Hours Worked by Trainee this Month. Enter the hours the trainee worked
each day, broken down per CDOT project. Round the hours to the nearest half-hour.
10. Non-CDOT Project Descriptions. Enter the hours, if any, the trainee worked on non-
CDOT projects.
B-63
Appendix B
11. Total Training Hours Worked this Month. Enter the total hours worked by the trainee
this month.
12. Previous Training Hours Worked. Enter the total hours completed in the program prior
to this Form 832. Include any hours credited for previous experience.
13. Total Training Hours Worked to Date. Enter the total hours completed in the program
including this Form 832 and any credit for previous experience.
14. Trainee’s Primary Job Duties. Provide a description of the trainee’s primary job duties
this month.
15. Trainee’s Overall Job Performance. Indicate the trainee’s job performance this
month.
16. Supervisor’s Comments. This entry reflects any comments the trainee’s supervisor
provides.
17. Trainee’s Signature. If available, the trainee should sign in this cell.
18. Supervisor’s Signature. The trainee’s supervisor should sign in this cell.
19. Contractor’s Certification.
20. Project Engineer’s Certification.
B-64
Appendix B
1
2 2 2 3
4 4
4 5 5
6 7
8
10 10
11 12
13
14
15
16
17 18
19
20
B-65
Appendix B
Form 838 – OJT Trainee/Apprentice Record
Form 838 provides demographic data about individual trainees. The Contractor shall complete
and submit Form 838 to the Project Engineer. The Project Engineer will not accept an
incomplete Form 838. The Project Engineer will forward the Form 838 to the Region EEO/Civil
Rights Specialist for review and approval. The Region EEO/Civil Rights Specialist will return an
approved copy to the Project Engineer. The Project Engineer should not make payment for
trainee hours until an approved Form 838 has been received from the Region EEO/Civil Rights
Specialist.
After the Project Engineer receives an approved copy from the Region EEO/Civil Rights
Specialist, the Contractor is eligible for reimbursement under the on-the-job training force
account item, for each hour of training the approved trainee receives on the project. It is
important that the Contractor provide information on all previous experience in the field for
the trainee’s previous construction work experience.
The Contractor shall complete Form 838 as follows:
1. Type of Program. Indicate the type of program.
2. Contractor’s Name, Project No., Location, and Project Code (SA#). Fill in as
appropriate.
3. Name and Title of Trainee’s Supervisor.
4. Trainee Information. Enter the following information for the trainee:
a. name,
b. date,
c. job classification,
d. wage decision number,
e. sex,
f. last four digits of social security number,
g. veteran status,
h. education status,
i. training hours credited, and
j. ethnic or racial background.
5. Previous Construction Work Experience. it is important that the Contractor provide

information on all the trainee’s previous work experience.
B-66
Appendix B
6. Employment Dates. Enter the date the trainee was first employed by your company
and the date you anticipate employment through.
7. Anticipated Employment Time. Enter the length of time anticipated.
8. Trainee’s Beginning Wage Rate. Indicate the trainee’s beginning wage rate.
9. Trainee’s Preference to Travel. Indicate whether or not the trainee is willing to travel
to continue employment.
10. Signature of Authorized Contractor Representative. Signature of Contractor or

Designee.
11. Region Civil Rights Manager Signature. Signature and approval decision of the Region
Civil Rights Manager.
B-67
Appendix B
1
2 2 2 2
3
4
6
7
8 9
10
11
B-68
Appendix B
Form 859 – Project Control Data
Review Section 108.8 of this Manual and the current Standard Specification Subsection 108.08,
Determination and Extension of Contract Time before completing Form 859. Distribution of
Form 859 should be completed two weeks prior to the scheduled advertisement date. The first
page of Form 859 lists features for consideration when determining contract time. Complete
the first page of Form 859 as follows:
1. Project No., Project Code (SA#), Location, and Region. Enter the project number,
project code, location, and Region number.
2. Date. Enter the date that information on the Form 859 is considered accurate. Any
changes made after this date must be re-approved by the Program Engineer.
3. Advertisement Period. Enter the advertisement period, with three weeks being
typical. The advertisement period may be adjusted to suit individual project
requirements; however, the Chief Engineer must approve advertisement periods of
less than three weeks.
4. CDOT Personnel. Enter the names of the individuals associated with the project.
5. Floating Start Date. Typically, this is No. If the project is to have a floating start
date, select yes and enter the appropriate period in this cell.
6. Lead Time. Enter the lead time period in calendar days from the award date to the
date shown on the Notice to Proceed Letter. This is typically 20 days, however,
additional lead time may be allowed for individual project considerations such as
material fabrication and delivery (e.g., traffic signals, luminaires, and steel
fabrication), obtaining permits, and development of Contractor material sources, or
scheduling partnering sessions. If a lead time is necessary, it will be included in the
Project Special Provisions.
7. Time Specification Considerations. You will always select Yes for Critical Path. Check
the applicable boxes for time considerations relative to contract time to be used on
the project.
8. Work Items that may Impact Contract Time. Provide information in this section on the
work items that may impact contract time. For example, ensure that the following
issues are considered:
B-69
Appendix B
a. Lead time for construction survey work,

b. Utility relocations completed during construction,
c. Seasonal considerations including winter months, or winter shutdown,
d. Local events and traffic issues,
e. Temporary detour installation and removal, and
f. Planting season limitations.
9. Flagging and Traffic Control. Enter the estimate for flagging and traffic control
management quantities after completing a CPM schedule (see description below).
10. Construction Type, Special Requirements, and Comments. Describe the type of
construction and any special construction requirements or comments in this section of
Form 859. This information is included to document the thought process for
developing the contract Time.
11. Days or Fixed Completion Date. Enter the number of contract days determined from a
CPM Schedule or indicate the fixed completion date as appropriate.
12. Months’ Time Not Charged. Subsection 108.08 of the Standard Specifications does not
allow free time. Any time period that time is not to be charged must be indicated in
this cell and addressed in the Contract.
13. Minor Contract Revisions. Enter the estimated dollar amount of minor Contract
revisions to be reflected with project plan force accounts.
14. Region Program Engineer Signature and Date. Form 859 will be signed and dated by
the Region Program Engineer in these cells.
15. Resident Engineer Signature and Date. Form 859 will be signed and dated by the
Resident Engineer in these cells.
B-70
Appendix B
Instructions for Completing a CPM Schedule
A Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule will be used to determine the contract time and attached
to the Form 859. Microsoft Project is the software CDOT uses to develop the CPM schedule. The
example below is a widening and Hot Mastic Asphalt overlay project. The following items of
work are included in the project. The schedule begins when the Notice to Proceed is issued to
the Contractor.
Bid Item Quantities:
a. Construction Signing (ground mounted) 20 each

b. Construction Surveying lump sum
c. Clearing and Grubbing 10 acres
d. Erosion Control installation 2 days #
e. Utility Work (relocate power lines) 1 week
f. Minor Structures (pipe extensions) 800 linear feet
g. Unclassified Excavation (CIP) 40,000 cubic yards
h. HMA (Grading SX)(100)(64-22) 15,000 tons
i. Emulsified Asphalt (slow setting) 2,000 gallons
j. Aggregate Base Course (Class 6) 6,000 tons
k. Guardrail 5,000 linear feet
l. Topsoil (H) 5,000 cubic yards
m. Seeding (Native) 10 acres
n. Mulching 10 acres
o. Flagging * hours
p. Traffic Control Management * days
q. Traffic Control Inspection * days
r. Pavement Marking Paint 170 gallons
#
While Erosion Control Installation is not a bid item, it is included to determine how it
affects the Contract time.
*To be determined by the Resident Engineer and entered on Form 859.
1. List the items of work to be prosecuted. Listing these items of work in the logical
sequence in which they must be performed will assist with completion of the CPM
schedule.
a. Utility Locates
b. Mobilization and Construction Signing
c. Construction Surveying
d. Clearing and Grubbing
B-71
Appendix B
e. Utility Work
f. Minor Structures
g. Unclassified Excavation
h. HMA (Emulsified asphalt can be omitted, because it is controlled by HMA)
i. ABC (ABC is for shouldering)
j. Guardrail
k. Topsoil
l. Seeding (Mulching can be omitted, because it is controlled by seeding)
m. Pavement Marking Paint.
Flagging, Traffic Control Management and Traffic Control Inspection are concurrent
with the other work and do not affect project completion.
2. Determine which items are anticipated to be controlling items of work. A controlling

item of work and a salient feature are not synonymous. A controlling item of work is
an item of work that may extend the overall completion of the project if the duration
of this item is increased. A salient feature is an item of work that may be of special
interest in coordinating the project schedule because of the volume, complexity, or
nature of the work, but may not affect the overall completion of the project.
In order to produce the schedule, the project should be constructed in theory to

determine the sequence of the work, especially when phasing is required. Items of
work can often be constructed concurrently which will also impact the duration of the
project. Creating the CPM schedule will determine which items are controlling items
of work for the project.
In this example, the following items are predicted to be controlling items of work:
a. Utility Locates
b. Construction Signing
c. Construction Surveying
d. Clearing and Grubbing
e. Erosion Control Installation
f. Minor Structures
g. Unclassified Excavation
h. HMA
i. ABC
j. Guardrail
k. Topsoil
l. Seeding and Mulching
B-72
Appendix B
m. Striping
n. Punch List
Construction signing is included as a controlling item to consider time for initial

installation of ground-mounted advance warning signs, as indicated by the Traffic
Control Plan. The construction signing work item is ongoing throughout the life of the
project; however, initial placement of advance warning construction signs and
required devices will be necessary prior to beginning construction surveying and other
bid item work. In this example, mobilization is presumed to be completed in
conjunction with construction signing and; therefore, time is not specifically
addressed.
Lead time to initiate Construction Survey work should be considered to allow for
checking of monuments and benchmarks and for slope staking to begin in advance of
earthwork operations.
The remaining items are the primary work items required for completion of the
project.
The utility work is anticipated to take five working days and is required to be
completed in conjunction with unclassified excavation work, as the lines to be
relocated are under ground. However, the utility company must be notified and the
relocation completed in a timely manner to avoid delays. Therefore, these items are
not controlling items of work, but rather are salient features. Final Striping (Pavement
Marking Paint) can be completed while placing ABC, Topsoil, Seeding and Mulching.
3. Determine durations for items of work. Determine an estimated daily production rate
for each controlling item of work, considering any factors that will impact completion
as indicated on the first page of Form 859.
The estimated daily production rates used in the example below are specific only to
this project and are not to be used for actual projects. Actual project production rates
will vary based on location, accessibility, weather restrictions, working hour
limitations, and traffic conditions.
To determine the number of work days required to complete each controlling item of
work, divide the quantity of work for each item by the estimated daily production
rate. Production rate calculations should be documented in the notes for each activity
in the Microsoft Project file.
B-73
Appendix B
Computing Work Days for Controlling Items of Work
Estimated Daly
Item Quantity Production Rate** Work Days
Utility Locates 1 day
Construction Signing 20 signs 10 signs/ day 2 days
Construction Surveying 15 days
Clearing and Grubbing 10 acres 1 acre/ day 10 days
Erosion Control Installation 2 days
Minor Structures 800 linear feet 50 linear feet/ day

16 days
(pipe ext. w/ end sections)
40,000 cubic yards 2,000 cubic yards/

Unclassified Excavation 20 days
day
HMA 15,000 tons 1,000 tons/ day 15 days
ABC 6,000 tons 600 tons/ day 10 days
5,000 linear feet 300 linear feet/

Guardrail 17 days
day
5,000 cubic yards 500 cubic yards/

Topsoil 10 days
day
Seeding 10 acres 5 acres/ day 2 days
Striping 1 day
Punch List 3 days
**Notes on Production Rates:
a. One work day for Utility Locates is considered reasonable.

b. Fifteen days for Construction Surveying is considered reasonable, with three days lead time provided for
checking of control monuments and initial slope stake placement in advance of clearing and grubbing, minor
structure, and earthwork operations.
c. Determination of the Construction Surveying duration and appropriate lead-time for actual projects will be
based on survey complexity, engineering judgment, and experience with actual progress of survey work.
d. Two days is considered reasonable for installing the first set of Erosion Control items.
e. One work day is reasonable to perform final striping of the project.
f. Three days is typical for completing Punch List items.
B-74
Appendix B
4. Create a CPM schedule. Create a new project in MS Project and enter the items of
work as tasks. Adding the Notice to Proceed and Project Acceptance as milestones is
helpful. Next add the estimated production rates and quantities in the notes, and the
calculated durations in the appropriate box for each task. Finally add relationships
between activities. If using relationships other than Finish to Start with zero lag, note
the reasoning for using the different relationships and lags. All tasks or activities will
have predecessor and successor activities except for the first activity (no
predecessor), and the last activity (no successor).
5. It is helpful to create a summary activity that includes all project activities to

calculate the number of days required to complete all project work.
6. The completed CPM Schedule shows that the contract time for this project should be
79 working days. Enter 79 working days in the proper box on the first page of Form
859.
7. In accordance with Section 630, a Traffic Control Management (TCM) day is paid for
every calendar day on which there is active traffic control. In this example, the
appropriate number of TCM days is 79 days. The elapsed time for the project which
starts April 14, 2014 and ends August 7, 2014 is 117 days. In order to determine the
Traffic Control Inspection (TCI) days, subtract the TCM days from the Elapsed time. In
this example the difference is 38 days. Enter the TCM and TCI days in the comments
section on the first page of Form 859.
8. To estimate the number of Flagging hours that will be required, estimate how many
hours that will be required each day and multiply by the number of working days.
9. In this example, it was estimated that 948 hours of flagging would be required. Enter
this amount on the first page of Form 859.
B-75
Appendix B
1 1
1
1
2 3
4 4
4 4
5
7
6
8
9 9 9
10
11 11 12 13
14 14 15 15
B-76
Appendix B
Note: Page 2 of Form 859, when printed from SiteManager®, is marked “Do Not Use.” As per
the instructions, a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule will be used instead of the second page
of Form 859 to determine the Contract time. Microsoft Project is the software used to develop
the CPM schedule.
B-77
Appendix B
Form 1186 – Contract Funding Increase/Decrease and

Approval Letter
Form 1186 must be submitted and approved prior to payment of any interim estimate that will
cause the cumulative total of Contractor payments to exceed the project commitment amount.
Form 1186 must be coordinated through the Region Business Office. See Section 120 of this
Manual for additional information on when it is necessary to submit a Form 1186. Complete
Form 1186 as follows:
1. Contracts/Situations. Indicate the contracts or situations that are applicable (e.g.,

CDOT construction, sum of contract modification orders, utility/railroad,
underestimated total cost).
2. Section 1 Information. Enter the date, project code, project number, Region, office
address of the requesting Business Office or residency, and the phone number and fax
number of a contact person who can provide additional information concerning the
request to increase or decrease funding.
3. Vendor Information. Enter the vendor’s name, vendor’s address, SAP vendor number,
and the Contract routing number. The Contract routing number can be obtained from
a copy of the signed Contract.
4. SAP Purchase Order Number, Fund, Functional Area:, GL Account Number, WBS
Element or Functional Center. All information regarding SAP coding can be obtained
from the Contract.
5. Original Contract Amount. Enter the original Contract amount, which can be obtained
from the Contract.
6. Budget Request Processing. Indicate whether or not a budget request has been made
through OFMB to cover the increased amount.
7. Previous Funding Letter(s) Total. Enter the previous funding letter(s) total, which is
available from the project file.
8. Funding Letter Total. Enter the amount of this request.
9. Adjusted Contract Amount. Enter the adjusted Contract amount, which is the original
Contract amount, plus any previous funding letters, plus this funding letter.
B-78
Appendix B
10. Contract Administrator’s/Business Manager’s Approval. The Region Business Manager

must sign and list a phone number.
11. CDOT Designee Approval. The CDOT designee approval is no longer necessary.
12. Local Agency Approval. If it is a Local Agency Contract, the Region determines if the
Local Agency approves.
The original must be sent to Accounting before the funds will be encumbered. Retain a copy of
Form 1186 for the project file.
The Controller will sign and make the distribution as requested by the Region.
B-79
Appendix B
5
63
7
3 3
8 10
11 4
9
12
B-80
Appendix B
Form 1212 – Final Acceptance Report
Form 1212 is used to document the final inspection of the project by the Resident Engineer, as
required by FHWA on all Federal-Aid projects. The final inspection of the project should be
completed in advance of project acceptance to permit any necessary corrective work to be
completed before the Contractor vacates the project site. To facilitate coordination of the final
inspection prior to project acceptance, the Resident Engineer will use transaction ZJ11 in SAP
to complete items in Form 1212. SAP will execute the workflow and email a pdf copy to the
Resident Engineer and the Finals Administrator. See Section 100 of this Manual for additional
information on the use of Form 1212.
1. Project No., Project Code (SA#), and County. Fill in as appropriate.
2. Federal Oversight. Check the appropriate response indicating whether or not the
project has Federal-Aid oversight.
3. Contractor’s Name. Enter the Contractor’s name.
4. Location. Enter the project location.
5. Original Contract Amount. Enter the original Contract amount.
6. Description of Improvement as Advertised. Provide a description of the project

improvement as advertised.
7. Inspection Date. Show the date that the project inspection was completed.
8. Acceptance Date. Enter the project acceptance date.
9. Percent Time Elapsed. Enter the percent of authorized Contract time elapsed as of
the project acceptance date.
10. Original Contract Time. Input the number of original Contract days or the Contract
completion date for the original Contract time.
11. Checklist. The Resident Engineer must check each box after verifying that the listed
items are completed and correct. If any of the items on the checklist are not required
for the project, the box should be left blank and an explanation entered on the form
as to why the item was not required. In addition to the listed items that are discussed
below, dollar amounts and time extensions associated with the claim resolutions may
also be indicated as remarks.
B-81
Appendix B
12. Name, Title, Signature, and Date. The Resident Engineer’s name and signature and
the date are required.
A hard copy with original signature must be forwarded to the FHWA via the Region Final’s
Engineer and a copy included in the project files even when using the electronic version of the
form.
B-82
Appendix B
B-83
Appendix B
B-84
Appendix B
Form 1318 – Dispute and Claim Status Report
The Project Engineer is responsible for completing the Dispute and Claim Status Report. See
Section 105.22 of this Manual for additional information on claims. Complete the Claims Status
Report as follows:
1. Date of Report. Date of first instance.
2. Claim No. Number consecutively on the project. Enter both claim number and dispute
number as per the example. You may have had four disputes on the project, but this
is the first dispute that went to claim status; the Claim No. would be “1-D4” to tie
the claim to the dispute.
3. Project No., Project Code (SA#), and Project Description. Fill in as appropriate.
4. Final Acceptance Date. Date the project was accepted.
5. Contractor Information. Fill in as appropriate.
6. CDOT Contacts. Fill in as appropriate.
7. Work Category. As instructed, enter the Standard Specification which addresses the
disputed item (i.e. 203.06 Embankment.)
8. Primary Basis of Dispute. Enter the primary reason for the dispute (i.e. CDOT and the
Contractor could not agree on time allowance, cost, interpretation of plans, etc.).
9. Brief Description of Dispute. Fill in as appropriate.
10. Amount of Contractor’s Dispute. If amount of dispute is unknown at the time of

notice, put “unknown” until amount is determined. Amount of Contractor’s dispute
must be determined when their Request for Equitable Adjustment (REA) is submitted.
11. Amount of Contractor’s Dispute. If time of dispute is unknown at the time of notice,
put “unknown” until the number of days is determined. Amount of time related to
Contractor’s dispute must be determined when their Request for Equitable
Adjustment (REA) is submitted.
12. Event. Fill in the dates as each item transpires. The days listed after each line item
denote the time frame when that line item is due based on the preceding process
B-85
Appendix B
completed. Schedule of dispute is critical; dispute may be granted or denied is CDOT

or the Contractor fail to follow the schedule outlined in subsection 105.22 of the
Standard Specifications.
13. Level. Level denotes the level the dispute/claim was resolved.
14. Comments. Fill in as appropriate.
B-86
Appendix B
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10 11
12
B-87
Appendix B
13
14
B-88
Appendix B
FHWA Form 1391 – Federal-Aid Highway Construction

Contractors Annual EEO Report
A blank copy of FHWA Form 1391 is presented on the next page for reference and at this link
FHWA Form 1391.
An electronic version of the Form FHWA 1391 (Rev. 09-13) Excel workbook is embedded here:
FHWA 1391.xlsx
B-89
Appendix B
B-90
Appendix B
Form 1401 – Block Faced MSE Wall Submittal Checklist
A blank copy of Form 1401 is presented.
B-91
Appendix B
B-92
Appendix B
Form 1402 – Panel Faced MSE Wall Submittal Checklist
A blank copy of Form 1402 is presented.
B-93
Appendix B
Piling Form
Complete the Piling Form as follows:
1. Project No. and Project Code (SA#). Fill in as appropriate.
2. Date. Enter the date the piling was driven into the ground.
3. Piling Site No. Make a copy of the piling layout from the plans. The sites of the piling
will be numbered beginning with Abutment 1, continuing to Pier 2. Write the piling
site number corresponding to the piling to be driven.
4. Pile No. Record a number if a cutoff is being spliced to the pile. The pile number to
be used will be the piling site number followed by an “A” of the site it was cut from.
5. Heat No. Enter the heat number. The heat number is the number recorded on the
piling.
6. Linear Feet. Enter the data for linear feet as follows:
a. In Lead. The length of the piling that has been driven.

b. Cut Off. The length of the piling that has been cut off.
c. In Place (a). The lead length minus the cutoff length.
7. Splices. Enter the data for splices as follows:
a. No. Enter the total number of splices on the piling. Check the specifications for
the total number of splices allowed for payment.
b. X. Enter the length allowed for splices per the Standard Specifications.
c. Linear Feet (b). Enter the number of splices multiplied by the X length.
8. Item 502 Total Linear Feet (c). Enter the sum of column (a) and column (b).
9. Item 900 *Cutoff L ≤ 10 feet. Enter the cutoff length not used that is less than or
equal to 10 feet. Add a new item to the Contract. The unit price for the new item is
based on using 80% of the Contract unit price per subsection 502.13 of the Standard
Specifications.
10. Calculated By. The initials of the Project Inspector who is documenting the piling
quantities are entered in this column.
B-94
Appendix B
11. Checked By. The initials of the Project Inspector who checks the piling quantities are
entered in this column.
B-95
Appendix B
B-96
Appendix B
Traffic Control Review Form
An example of Traffic Control Review Form is presented.
The seven-page printed version that follows is a sample. The fillable Excel spreadsheet is
embedded below.
Master TCR -
wTeamWeighting.xls
B-97
Appendix B
B-98
Appendix B
B-99
Appendix B
B-100
Appendix B
B-101
Appendix B
B-102
Appendix B
B-103
Appendix B
B-104
Appendix B
Project Final Submittal Checklist
The following is the Project Final Submittal Checklist. Refer to section 121.2.6 for details on
how to use this document. An electronic version can be obtained from your Final Administrator.
Project Final
Submittal Checklist.p
B-105
Appendix B
B-106
Appendix B
B-107
Appendix B
Final Materials Submittal Checklist
An example of the Final Materials Submittal Checklist is presented.
Final Materials
Submittal Checklist.p
B-108
Appendix B
B-109
Appendix B
CPM Schedule Review Checklists
Use these checklists to assist in reviewing project CPM schedules.
Checklist 1 - Schedule Submittal checklist will help ensure that a schedule submittal is
complete. The best response to each item in the checklist is “yes”.
Checklist 2 – Preliminary and Baseline Schedule checklist will help determine topics for the
Schedule Review meeting and the items the Contractor needs to address. It is possible that not
all of the items listed apply to every project. The best response to each item in the checklist
is “yes”. If a statement applies and you cannot answer yes, decide if you should respond
approve or require corrections and resubmit.
Checklist 3 – Project Schedule Update checklist will help determine topics for the Schedule
Review meeting and the items the Contractor needs to address. It is possible that not all of the
items listed apply to every project. The best response to each item in the checklist is “yes”. If
statement applies, and you cannot answer “yes,” decide if you should respond Approve-as-
noted, require corrections and resubmit, or require a Revised Schedule.
Checklist 4 – Revise and Resubmit Schedule checklist lists issues that require revision of the
Schedule. When these items are answered “yes,” consider requiring corrections (respond with
Approve-as-Noted) and requiring the contractor to resubmit the submittal.
Checklist 5 - Schedule Risk Analysis checklist offers points to consider when analyzing schedule
risk and help determine if a schedule consultant is needed.
CPM Schedule
Review Checklists.pd
B-110
Appendix B
B-111
Appendix B
B-112
Appendix B
B-113
Appendix B
B-114
Appendix B
B-115
Appendix B
B-116
Appendix B
B-117
APPENDIX C. CHANGE ORDER

EXAMPLES
C-1
Appendix C
APPENDIX C. CHANGE ORDER EXAMPLES .......................................................... C-1

CHANGE ORDER EXAMPLES ........................................................................... C-3
C-2
Appendix C
CHANGE ORDER EXAMPLES
Appendix C presents examples of the most common types of change orders that Project
Engineers and Project Inspectors will prepare on a day-to-day basis. Although either the Project
Engineer or the Project Inspector may prepare the change order, the Project Engineer is
responsible for ensuring it is properly approved and distributed.
A sample Letter of Explanation accompanies each example change order. See Appendix B for
guidance on preparing other letters and forms (e.g., Form 266).
Form 90 – Contract Modification Order is available at Forms Management on the Intranet Web
Site. Consultants may obtain the forms from their CDOT contact.
C-3
Appendix C
Major CMO (Earthwork)
C-4
Appendix C
C-5
Appendix C
Major CMO (Earthwork)
C-6
Appendix C
Project Termini Extension Type I (Erosion Control)
C-7
Appendix C
C-8
Appendix C
Project Termini Extension Type I (Erosion Control)
C-9
Appendix C
Project Termini Extension Type II (Paving Plus Time)
C-10
Appendix C
C-11
Appendix C
C-12
Appendix C
C-13
Appendix C
C-14
Appendix C
C-15
Appendix C
C-16
Appendix C
C-17
Appendix C
C-18
Appendix C
Project Termini Extension Type II (Paving Plus Time)
C-19
Appendix C
C-20
Appendix C
C-21
Appendix C
C-22
Appendix C
Significant Change to Work (Change Wall Type)
C-23
Appendix C
Significant Change to Work (Change Wall Type)
C-24
Appendix C
Change Basis of Payment (From CY to FA)
C-25
Appendix C
Change Basis of Payment (From CY to FA)
C-26
Appendix C
Administrative Settlement of Claim
C-27
Appendix C
Administrative Settlement of Claim
C-28
Appendix C
Design Error (Incorrect Pipe Size)
C-29
Appendix C
Design Error (Incorrect Pipe Size)
C-30
Appendix C
Urgent Work (Mudslide / Payment of Repair)
C-31
Appendix C
Urgent Work (Mudslide / Payment of Repair)
C-32
Appendix C
Change Fence (ROW Agreement)
C-33
Appendix C
Change Fence (ROW Agreement)
C-34
Appendix C
Utility Work (Utility Invoices Contractor)
C-35
Appendix C
Utility Work (Utility Invoices Contractor)
C-36
Appendix C
Utility Work (Contractor Performs Work)
C-37
Appendix C
Utility Work (Contractor Performs Work)
C-38
Appendix C
Traffic Control Plan Change
C-39
Appendix C
Traffic Control Plan Change
C-40
Appendix C
Price Reduction (Accept Out of Spec HBP)
C-41
Appendix C
Price Reduction (Accept Out of Spec HBP)
C-42
Appendix C
Purchase of Materials (Unused Seed)
C-43
Appendix C
Purchase of Materials (Unused Seed)
C-44
Appendix C
VECP Change Type of Fence (No Form 90)
C-45
Appendix C
VECP Change Type of Fence (No Form 90)
C-46
Appendix C
MCRs (CMO 01)
C-47
Appendix C
Example of Simple FA Analysis Justification
C-48
Appendix C
Example of Complex FA Analysis Justification (Page 1)
C-49
Appendix C
Example of Complex FA Analysis Justification (Page 2)
C-50
APPENDIX D.
MISCELLANEOUS DATA
D-1
Appendix D
APPENDIX D. MISCELLANEOUS DATA ................................................................ D-1

MISCELLANEOUS DATA................................................................................. D-3
D-2
Appendix D
MISCELLANEOUS DATA
Appendix D presents common tables, figures, and miscellaneous data that Project Engineers and
Project Inspectors will use on a day-to-day basis. These include such items as legal dimensions and
weights for trucks, procedures for measuring and documenting vertical and lateral clearances at
structures, grade stamps used by accredited lumber inspection agencies, and miscellaneous
mathematical formulas.
D-3
Appendix D
Figure 105-1
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FLOW CHART
(Note: If an audit is to be performed, durations in this flow chart are extended accordingly)
105.21 Project Issue – Verbal discussions between Proj. Eng. and Supt.
Contractor provides written notice of dispute to Project Engineer

15 Days – 105.21
Contractor provides written REA including the following:
(1) Date of dispute
(2) Nature of order and circumstances causing dispute
(3) Contract provisions supporting dispute
(4) Estimated cost of dispute with supporting documentation
(5) Analysis of progress schedule and disruption, if any
15 Days – 105.21
CDOT Project Engineer and Contractor discuss merit of dispute
7 days – 105.21
PE denies merit of dispute PE determines dispute has merit Merit granted –
Quantum negotiations
7 days – 105.21 (c) 30 Days – 105.21
Contractor rejects PE’s denial. Contractor Contractor accepts denial.
provides written notice to PE. Dispute is resolved.
7 days – 105.21 Disagree on quantum
Adjustment of
Proj Eng/Res Eng & Supt/PM & Contractor’s rep with decision authority above the payment/schedule in
project level to meet regularly to discuss dispute consultation with
Program Engineer -
Up to 30 days – 105.21 Dispute is resolved
DRB agreement signed 105.22(a) Proj Eng Dispute is

initiates DRB unresolved
5 Days –
20 days – 105.22 105.22
Prehearing Submittal
10 days – 105.22
DRB Hearing
30 days – 105.22 (g)
DRB renders a recommendation
10 days – 105.22
Request for Clarification and Reconsideration
14 days – 105.22 (i)
Either party rejects DRB recommendation DRB recommendation is accepted
Figure 105-1 continued on next page
D-4
Appendix D
Figure 105-1 (continued)
Either party rejects DRB Adjustment of

payment/schedule in
30 days – 105.23
consultation with
105.23 Notice of intent to file a claim Program Engineer -
60 days – 105.23 Dispute is resolved
Contractor submits certified claim package w/RTD
60 days – 105.23 (d)

RTD renders a decision Contractor accepts decision Decision is implemented
30 days – 105.23
60 days - 105.23 (e)
Contractor rejects and Chief Engineer
appeals RTD decision to CE renders decision
15 days Request for hearing 45 days –
105.23 105.23 (e)
30 days – 105.23
Contractor rejects CE decision Contractor accepts CE decision Decision is implemented
Optional Mediation
Dispute is unresolved Dispute is resolved
Contractor initiates Resolution is implemented
Binding Arbitration or Litigation

(Whichever was selected at Contract execution) Binding Arbitration
Litigation Arbitrator(s) render recommendation
Court Decision Appeal process only for damages
D-5
Appendix D
D-6
Appendix D
D-7
Appendix D
D-8
Appendix D
D-9
Appendix D
D-10
Appendix D
D-11
Appendix D
Fact Sheet
Non-Interstate Quad Axle Overweight Divisible Permits
Effective October, 2008
• Overweight permits only (no oversize/over dimension)
• Non-interstate highways only
• Vehicle must be configured with a quad axle grouping
• Cannot exceed 110,000 lbs. gross vehicle weight
• Must comply with maximums on CDOT Bridge Weight Limit Map
• Single trip permit available. Fee: $30 + $10 per axle
• Annual permit available. Fee: $500
• Annual Fleet Permit available. Fee: $2,000 + $35 per permitted vehicle
• Substantial fines may be assessed for violations
Non-Interstate Tandem/Triple Axle Overweight Divisible Permits

Effective January 1, 2010
• Overweight permits only (no oversize/over dimension)
• Non-interstate highways only
• Applies to tractor/trailer combination vehicles only
• Must have either tandem or triple axle grouping on trailer
• Cannot exceed 97,000 lbs. gross vehicle weight
• Must comply with maximums on CDOT Bridge Weight Limit Map
• Single trip permit available. Fee: $15 +$10 per axle, plus a surcharge equal to the total
amount of the permit
• Six-month permit available. Fee: $250
• Annual permit available: Fee: $500
• Substantial fines may be assessed for violations
To view Legislation click on the respective link:
• Quad Axle Non-Interstate Overweight Divisible Permits – HB 08-1257

• Tandem/Triple Axle Overweight Divisible Permits – HB 09-1318
Fact sheet compiled September 16, 2009
D-12
Appendix D
D-13
Appendix D
D-14
Appendix D
D-15
Appendix D
D-16
Appendix D
D-17
Appendix D
D-18
Appendix D
D-19
Appendix D
D-20
Appendix D
D-21
Appendix D
D-22
Appendix D
D-23
Appendix D
D-24
Appendix D
D-25
Appendix D
D-26
Appendix D
D-27
Appendix D
AREAS OF PLANE FIGURES

Circle
π = 3.1416; A = area; d = diameter
p = circumference or periphery; r = radius
𝑝𝑝 = 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 = 3.1416𝑑𝑑 𝑝𝑝 = 2√𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 = 3.54√𝐴𝐴
2𝐴𝐴 4𝐴𝐴
𝑝𝑝 = 2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 = 6.238𝑟𝑟 𝑝𝑝 = =
𝑟𝑟 𝑑𝑑
𝜋𝜋𝑑𝑑 2 𝑝𝑝2 𝑝𝑝2

𝐴𝐴 = = 0.7854𝑑𝑑2 𝐴𝐴 = = 12.57
4 4𝜋𝜋
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐴𝐴 = 𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟 2 = 3.1416𝑟𝑟 2 𝐴𝐴 = =
2 4
Circular Ring
r 𝐴𝐴 = 𝜋𝜋(𝑅𝑅 2 − 𝑟𝑟 2 ) = 3.1416(𝑅𝑅2 − 𝑟𝑟 2 )
R
𝐴𝐴 = 0.7854 (𝐷𝐷 2 − 𝑑𝑑2 ) = 0.7854(𝐷𝐷 − 𝑑𝑑)(𝐷𝐷 + 𝑑𝑑)
Area (A) = difference in areas between the inner and outer circles.
Example: R = 4; r = 2
A = 3.1416(42-22)=37.6992 Ans.
Quadrant
𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟 2
𝐴𝐴 = = 0.7854𝑟𝑟 2 = 0.3927𝑐𝑐 2
4
Example. r = 3; c = chord.
Area = 0.7851 x 32 = 7.0686 Ans.
Segment
b = length of arc; θ = angle in degrees; c = chord = �4(2ℎ𝑟𝑟 − ℎ2 )

1 𝜃𝜃 𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟−ℎ)
𝐴𝐴 = [𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − 𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟 − ℎ)] = 𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟 2 − 2
2 360
𝑐𝑐
When Ɵ is greater than 180° then 𝑥𝑥 the difference between r and h is added to the
2
𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟 2 𝜃𝜃
fraction: .
360
Example: R = 3; Ɵ = 120°; h = 1.5

120 5.196(3 − 1.5)
𝐴𝐴 = 3.1416𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥 − = 5.5278 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴.
360 2
D-28
Appendix D
AREAS OF PLANE FIGURES

Sector
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝜃𝜃
𝐴𝐴 = = 𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟 2
2 360
𝜃𝜃 = 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑; 𝑏𝑏 = 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙ℎ 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
Example: r = 3; 𝜃𝜃 = 120°
120
A = 3.1416 x 3= 3.1416 x 32 x = 9.428 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
360
Spandrel
Area = 0.2146r2 = 0.1073c2

Example: r = 3
Area = 0.2146 x 32 = 1.9314 Ans.
Parabola
l = length of curved line = periphery - s

𝑠𝑠2 4ℎ
𝑙𝑙 = 8ℎ ��𝑐𝑐(1 + 𝑐𝑐) + 2.0326𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥�√𝑐𝑐 + √1 + 𝑐𝑐�� 𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑐𝑐 = ( )2
𝑠𝑠
2
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑠𝑠ℎ
3
Example: S = 3; h = 4
2
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑥𝑥3𝑥𝑥4 = 8 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
3
Ellipse
Area = πab = 3.1416ab
𝑎𝑎2 +𝑏𝑏2
𝐶𝐶 = 2𝜋𝜋� 2 (𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
Example: a = 3; b = 4
Area = 3.1416 x 3 x 4 = 37.6992 Ans.
32 +42
𝐶𝐶 = 2𝑥𝑥3.1416√ 2
=6.2832 x 3.5355 = 22.21 Ans.
D-29
Appendix D
TRIGONOMETRIC SOLUTION OF TRIANGLES
𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐
𝑆𝑆 =
2
Given: Sought: Formulae:

RIGHT-ANGLED TRIANGLES
𝑎𝑎 𝑎𝑎
A,B,b sin 𝐴𝐴 = , cos 𝐵𝐵 = , 𝑏𝑏 = √𝑐𝑐 2 − 𝑎𝑎2
𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐
a,c
𝑎𝑎
Area 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = √𝑐𝑐 2 − 𝑎𝑎2
2
𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏
A,B,c tan 𝐴𝐴 = , tan 𝐵𝐵 = , 𝑐𝑐 = √𝑎𝑎2 − 𝑏𝑏 2
𝑏𝑏 𝑎𝑎
a,b
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
Area 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 =
2
𝑎𝑎
𝐵𝐵 = 90° − 𝐴𝐴, 𝑏𝑏 = 𝑎𝑎 cot 𝐴𝐴, 𝑐𝑐 =
B,b,c sin 𝐴𝐴
A,a
𝑎𝑎2 cot 𝐴𝐴
2
𝑏𝑏
B,a,c 𝐵𝐵 = 90° − 𝐴𝐴, 𝑎𝑎 = 𝑏𝑏 tan 𝐴𝐴, 𝑐𝑐 =
cos 𝐴𝐴
A,b
𝑏𝑏 2 tan 𝐴𝐴
2
B,a,b B = 90° - A, a = c sin A, b = c cos A
A,c 𝑐𝑐 2 sin 𝐴𝐴 cos 𝐴𝐴 𝑐𝑐 2 sin 2𝐴𝐴
Area 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
2 4
OBLIQUE-ANGLED TRIANGLES
1 (𝑠𝑠−𝑏𝑏)(𝑠𝑠−𝑐𝑐) 1 𝑠𝑠(𝑠𝑠−2) 1 (𝑠𝑠−𝑏𝑏)(𝑠𝑠−𝑐𝑐)

A 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐴𝐴 = � , 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝐴𝐴 = � , tan 𝐴𝐴 = �
2 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 2 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 2 𝑠𝑠(𝑠𝑠−𝑎𝑎)
1 (𝑠𝑠−𝑎𝑎)(𝑠𝑠−𝑏𝑏) 1 𝑠𝑠(𝑠𝑠−𝑏𝑏) 1 (𝑠𝑠−𝑎𝑎)(𝑠𝑠−𝑐𝑐)

B 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐵𝐵 = � , 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2 𝐵𝐵 = � 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 , 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 2 𝐵𝐵 = � 𝑠𝑠(𝑠𝑠−𝑐𝑐)
2 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
a,b,c
(𝑠𝑠−𝑎𝑎)(𝑠𝑠−𝑏𝑏)
C 1
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐶𝐶 = �
1 𝑠𝑠(𝑠𝑠−𝑐𝑐) 1 (𝑠𝑠−𝑎𝑎)(𝑠𝑠−𝑏𝑏)
, 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2 𝐶𝐶 = � 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 , 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 2 𝐶𝐶 = � 𝑠𝑠(𝑠𝑠−𝑐𝑐)
2 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
Area 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = �𝑠𝑠(𝑠𝑠 − 𝑎𝑎)(𝑠𝑠 − 𝑏𝑏)(𝑠𝑠 − 𝑐𝑐)
𝑎𝑎 sin 𝐵𝐵 𝑎𝑎 sin 𝐶𝐶 𝑎𝑎 sin(𝐴𝐴+𝐵𝐵)

b,c 𝑏𝑏 = , 𝑐𝑐 = =
sin 𝐴𝐴 sin 𝐴𝐴 sin 𝐴𝐴
a,A,B
1 𝑎𝑎2 sin 𝐵𝐵 sin 𝐶𝐶
Area 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 sin 𝐶𝐶 =
2 2 sin 𝐴𝐴
D-30
Appendix D
TRIGOMETRIC SOLUTION OF TRIANGLES
𝑏𝑏 sin 𝐴𝐴
B sin 𝐵𝐵 =
𝑎𝑎
𝑎𝑎 sin 𝐶𝐶 𝑏𝑏 sin 𝐶𝐶
a, b, A C 𝑐𝑐 = = = �𝑎𝑎2 + 𝑏𝑏2 − 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 cos 𝐶𝐶
sin 𝐴𝐴 sin 𝐵𝐵
1
Area 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 sin 𝐶𝐶
2
𝑎𝑎 sin 𝐶𝐶 1 𝑎𝑎−𝑏𝑏 1
A tan 𝐴𝐴 = , tan (𝐴𝐴 − 𝐵𝐵) = cot 𝐶𝐶
𝑏𝑏−𝑎𝑎 cos 𝐶𝐶 2 𝑎𝑎+𝑏𝑏 2
𝑎𝑎 sin 𝐶𝐶
a, b, C C 𝑐𝑐 = �𝑎𝑎2 ÷ 𝑏𝑏2 − 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 cos 𝐶𝐶 =
sin 𝐴𝐴
1
Area 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 sin 𝐶𝐶
2
a2 = b2 + c2 – 2bc cos A, b2 = a2 + c2 – 2ac cos B, c2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos C
D-31
Appendix D
PROBABLE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CYLINDERS
S28 = S7 + 30 S7
where: S28 = approximate 28 day strength.
S7 = known 7 day strength.
For approximating strengths at other ages from known strengths at various ages the following
table may be used.
AGE PROBABLE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
(days) (pounds per square inch)
100 1550 2250 2900 4150 4720 5400 5970 6560
90 1500 2180 2830 3440 4050 4620 5280 5840 6430
80 1460 2110 2740 3350 3950 4510 5150 5710 6290
70 1390 2030 2640 3250 3830 4380 5000 5550 6110
60 1330 1940 2540 3120 3690 4220 4840 5370 5930
55 1290 1890 2470 3050 3610 4140 4750 5270 5820
50 1250 1840 2410 2970 3520 4050 4640 5170 5700
45 1200 1780 2330 2890 3420 3950 4520 5040 5570
40 1150 1700 2250 2790 3310 3830 4400 4910 5430
38 1130 1670 2220 2760 3280 3790 4350 4860 5380
36 1110 1640 2190 2720 3230 3740 4300 4800 5310
34 1080 1610 2140 2670 3180 3680 4220 4720 5240
32 1050 1580 2100 2620 3120 3620 4160 4650 5170
30 1030 1540 2050 2560 3060 3560 4090 4570 5090
28 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
26 960 1450 1950 2450 2930 3410 3930 4400 4900
24 920 1400 1890 2380 2850 3340 3840 4300 4800
22 890 1350 1830 2310 2780 3250 3750 4200 4700
20 850 1300 1770 2240 2700 3160 3640 4100 4590
19 830 1270 1730 2200 2650 3110 3590 4040 4510
18 800 1240 1690 2150 2600 3050 3520 3980 4450
17 780 1200 1650 2100 2550 3000 3460 3910 4380
16 750 1170 1600 2050 2490 2940 3400 3830 4300
15 720 1130 1550 2000 2430 2870 3310 3770 4210
14 690 1090 1500 1950 2360 2800 3250 3690 4130
13 660 1050 1450 1890 2300 2740 3180 3600 4050
12 630 1000 1400 1820 2230 2660 3090 3500 3960
11 590 950 1350 1750 2150 2570 3000 3400 3850
10 550 900 1280 1680 2070 2490 2900 3300 3730
9 510 840 1200 1590 1980 2380 2780 3170 3600
8 460 780 1130 1500 1880 2280 2650 3050 3460
7 400 700 1040 1380 1750 2120 2500 2890 3280
6 340 600 920 1260 1610 1980 2340 2700 3100
D-32
Appendix D
D-33
Appendix D
D-34
Appendix D
D-35
Appendix D
D-36
Appendix D
D-37
Appendix D
D-38
Appendix D
D-39

Construction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Construction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Construction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONSTRUCTION MANUAL

Preconstruction is a commonly used name for AASHTOWare Project PreconstructionTM.

SiteManager is a commonly used name for AASHTOWare Project SiteManager.

MicroStation® is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

ProjectWise® is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

Revisions are notated as shaded text.

SECTION 101 GENERAL GUIDELINES

101.1 – 101.100 RESERVED

101.101 SOURCE DOCUMENTS

1. CDOT Construction Bulletins,

2. CDOT Cost Data Book,

3. Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment,

4. CDOT Pavement Design Manual,

6. CDOT Field Materials Manual,

7. CDOT Laboratory Manual of Test Procedures,

8. CDOT M&S Standard Plans,

9. CDOT Policy and Procedural Directives,

10. CDOT Safety Manual,

11. CDOT SiteManager® Users Guide,

12. CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,

13. CDOT Standard Special Provisions,

14. CDOT Project Special Provisions,

15. CDOT Supplemental Specifications,

16. CDOT Survey Manual,

18. Contract Plans.

101.102 CDOT INTERNET AND INTRANET WEBSITE

Following is a partial list of the electronic information contained on the websites:

101.103 CDOT ORGANIZATION AND STAFF

101.103.2 Construction Engineering Services Branch Manager

Responsibilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. establishing consistent policy and uniform standards for the administration of

2. formulating, developing, issuing, and implementing policies, procedures, and

5. assisting the Chief Engineer during construction contract dispute/claim resolution.

101.103.3 Region Transportation Director

101.103.4 Region Program Engineer

101.103.5 Resident Engineer

101.103.6 Project Engineer

101.103.6.1 Consultant Project Engineer

101.103.7 Project Inspector (Materials Tester)

The following training is required to perform inspection on a CDOT project:

Technical Series (EPS Assistant I through EPS Technician III) +-6+-6

1. Basic Highway Math

2. Basic Highway Surveying

3. Basic Highway Plan Reading

4. Erosion Control Supervisor

Professional Series (EIT I through EIT III)

1. Basic Highway Surveying

2. Basic Highway Plan Reading

3. Erosion Control Supervisor

101.103.8 Staff Bridge Services Branch

101.103.8.1 Quality Assurance Inspectors (Fabrication Inspectors)

101.103.8.2 Bridge Construction Assistance

101.103.8.3 Bridge Construction Reviews

101.103.9 ENGINEER IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE (EIRC)

101.104 PROCESS CONTROL/OWNER ACCEPTANCE (PC/OA)

101.105 FHWA INVOLVEMENT

SECTION 102 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND

102.1 – 102.3 RESERVED

102.4 BID RULES AND CONTRACTOR EVALUATIONS